JP7306498B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. .
In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a game machine has been proposed in which the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as effects can be varied and set according to the player's operation or the setting of the game parlor.

JP 2011-200511 A

However, in this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of more suitable volume control .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitable sound volume control .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 provides a performance executing means capable of executing a performance, and gives a privilege advantageous to the player when a specific performance is executed by the performance executing means. an audio output means capable of outputting a sound as part of the effect executed by the effect executing means; A volume setting means that can be set based on an operation, a first state in which the audio output means outputs sound based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the volume set by the volume setting means output control means for switching between a second state in which the sound is output from the sound output means at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume; and initial setting means for setting the second state in a return state in which power supply is started, wherein the game machine is set by the volume setting means in the second state. A specific volume that is smaller than the lowest volume can be set, a plurality of different levels of volume can be set, and a suggestion mode corresponding to the set levels of volume can be suggested. The suggestion mode corresponding to the specific sound volume set in the second state is not suggested, and a predetermined condition is established when power supply to the game machine is started. and an initialization means capable of initializing the state of the game machine based on the above, wherein a predetermined specific sound is louder than the specific sound volume during a period in which the initialization process is being executed by the initialization means. It is possible to notify with a predetermined volume, which is the volume, and to display a predetermined display mode during the period of the second state.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to provide a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means capable of executing the effect and the effect executing means. Privilege granting means, sound output means capable of outputting sound as a part of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and volume output by the sound output means is set based on an operation from outside the game machine. a first state in which the audio output means outputs audio based on the volume set by the volume setting means; and a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. output control means for switching between a second state in which the sound is output from the sound output means at a volume level; and initial setting means for setting the second state when the game machine is in the return state, wherein the gaming machine sets the lowest volume set by the volume setting means in the second state. It is possible to set a specific volume that is smaller than the volume, it is possible to set different levels of volume, and it is possible to suggest a suggestive mode corresponding to the set level of volume, The suggestion mode corresponding to the specific sound volume set in the second state is not suggested, and the game is played based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when power supply to the game machine is started. initialization means capable of initializing the state of the machine, and a predetermined specific sound having a volume higher than the specific volume during a period in which the initialization process is executed by the initialization means; It is possible to notify with a predetermined volume, and it is possible to display a predetermined display mode during the period of the second state.

Therefore, there is an effect that suitable volume control can be performed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member; FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21; FIG. Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the displacement unit in the second embodiment; 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 25; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of a displacement unit in a third aspect; 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. It is a front view of a back base. FIG. 4B is a rear view of the front base and the illumination unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; 35 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member; FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37; FIG. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (B) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXB-XXXIXB of FIG. 39(A). (A) to (C) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (A) and (B) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (B) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) and (B) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (B) is a front view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVB in FIG. 44(A). 44(A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLVA in FIG. 44(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along line XLVB-XLVB in FIG. 44(B). (A) is a front view of the first block, (B) is a cross-sectional view of the first block along line XLVIB-XLVIB in FIG. 46(A), and (C) is a front view of the second block. and (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block along the XLVID-XLVID line in FIG. 46(C). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a second position; FIG. 4B is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position; (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the first position, (B) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the intermediate position, and (C) is the transmission at the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (C) are rear views of a transmission gear and a connecting member in the first drive range. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit along the LIXA-LIXA line in FIG. 54, (B) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit along the LIXB-LIXB line in FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXC-LIXC in FIG. 56; FIG. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in a second embodiment, and (B) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove taken along line LXB-LXB in FIG. 60(A). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member in a third embodiment, and (B) is a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove along line LXIVB-LXIVB in FIG. 64(A). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (A) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVA in FIG. 64(A), and (B) is a projection plate along line LXVB-LXVB in FIG. 65(C) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member taken along line LXVC-LXVC in FIG. 65(A); FIG. (A) and (B) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (B) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the first block, and (B) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the second block. FIG. 11 is a front view of a projection unit in a fifth embodiment; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (B) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. FIG. 21 is a front view of a projection unit in a sixth embodiment; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the front base with the front base and the irradiation unit assembled. (A) to (C) are rear views of the projection unit. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing game states and effects in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 1 during the big win in the first control example, and (B) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 2 during the big win in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect content of the effect 3 during the big win in the first control example, and (B) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect content of the effect 1 during the big win in the first control example. is. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an additional effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is started, and (B) is a diagram showing the It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big-hit continuation production|presentation among the production|presentations for addition displayed by 3 design display devices. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big-hit continuous production among the additional production|presentations displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1 control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a jackpot ending screen among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when a big hit is complete|finished among the additional effects displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in . (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the end of a big hit among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a continuous jackpot effect among the additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a special symbol high-speed change after the end of the big win, among the normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; [FIG. 11] is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big win is won among normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of a battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the battle mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 1st example of control. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pre-battle effect in the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a battle ready-to-win display mode among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is the third symbol display in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when winning Battle Reach among the battle modes displayed on the device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a draw in battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of being defeated by battle reach among the battle modes displayed with a 3rd design display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle ready-to-win resurrection effect in the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a prognostic effect among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (B) is a third symbol in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the countdown effect|presentation among the suggestive effects displayed on a display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the flow of suggestive effects executed within one variation among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. 10 is a timing chart showing the flow of suggestive effects that are executed with multiple variations among the suggestive effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an expectation level suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an expectation level suggesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation degree suggestion production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (B) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (B) is the main controller in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (B) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern table for big hits (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (D) is a schematic representation of the specified contents of the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the special variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot transition setting table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; (B) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 1 table; 2C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 2 table, and (D) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table. , (E) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table, and (F) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table, and (D) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; . (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the first control example, and (B) schematically shows the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table in the first control example. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect selection table during the jackpot. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the addition number selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the continuous effect mode selection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous value main selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first continuous value sub-selection table. and (C) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram explaining the contents of the effect set as the final mode. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the expectation level selection table in the first control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the expectation level effect selection table. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 7 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing during addition production which is performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 1st example of control. 9 is a flow chart showing an additional display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process after a big hit performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing extension management processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing continuous value setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an expectation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a multiple variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (B) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (A) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (B) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing continued value-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing expectation level effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a character effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the example of addition of effect of the first control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a character effect displayed on a third symbol display device in an example of addition of effects of the first control example, and (B) is a view of addition of effects of the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the additional example of the effect of the first control example; (B) is the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the example of the additional effect of the first control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the transformation pattern table in the example of adding the effect of the first control example, and (B) is the stipulation of the title system selection table in the example of adding the effect of the first control example. FIG. 13B is a diagram schematically showing the contents, and (C) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the title selection table in the effect addition example of the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the character object action level selection table in the example of adding the effect of the first control example, and (B) is a group of effect settings in the example of adding the effect of the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing change processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing title setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example; FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, and (B) is the prescribed contents of the falling lottery table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example; (D) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a falling state transition 1 table out of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a falling state transition 2 table out of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the example; (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example, and (B) shows the configuration of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the example of addition of the effect of the second control example. is a block diagram. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table in the second control example, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the second control example. is a diagram shown in FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing state determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in another example of the second control example, and (B) schematically shows the contents of the post-fall variation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram. 10 is a flow chart showing countdown effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of effect. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of effect. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, and (B) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example, (B) is a variation pattern selection table in the third control example Among them, it is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the (variable probability) variation pattern table for big hits, (C) is the first out (variable probability) variation pattern for the first out of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, and (D) schematically shows the defined contents of the second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables in the third control example. FIG. 11(E) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a special (probability variation) variation pattern table in the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in the third control example; (B) to (D) are diagrams in the third control example; FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of fluctuation scenarios 1 to 3 defined in a fluctuation scenario table. (A) to (D) are diagrams schematically showing the defined contents of variation scenarios 4 to 7 defined in the variation scenario table in the third control example, respectively. (A) to (D) are diagrams schematically showing the defined contents of variation scenarios 8 to 11 defined in the variation scenario table in the third control example, respectively. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and FIG. 8B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a first continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a third continuous value main selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the continuous production|presentation mode selection 4 table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a third control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 10 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing 4 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a continuous value setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing continued value-related command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing final mode command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example; is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example, and (B) is a third control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variable scenario A1 defined in a variable scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example; ) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the post-small hit variation scenario stipulated in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in another example of the suggestive effects described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in another example of the suggestive effects described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second precursor effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 6 in additional explanation of the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of an effect in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect explained in the first control example; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first control example. (A) and (B) are diagrams schematically showing display screens in another example of the expectation level suggesting effect described in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing countdown effect setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggesting effect described in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in another example of the expectation degree suggesting effect explained in the first control example; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A1. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A1. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a V winning device in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a V winning device in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a movable guide member in the A1 embodiment; (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode that does not result in a pseudo run displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect which does not become a pseudo run displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode of the pseudo-run 1 displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of variation of button effects during pseudo-continuous development displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect of the button production|presentation at the time of pseudo|simulated continuous development displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode when the V-attacker opens immediately after the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment are stopped. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect at the time of V attacker releasing immediately after the symbol stop displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the A1 embodiment; (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, (B) is a special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment, (D) is the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal design random number table. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, (B) is a special figure 1 jackpot type in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the selection table, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, (B) is a special figure 1 small hit type in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the selection table, (C) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, (B) is the normal variation pattern table definition content in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a time saving variation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. FIG. , It is a diagram illustrating each winning type and the operation content of the winning game in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot scenario table in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small winning scenario table in the A1 embodiment. and (C) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot scenario A in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning scenario A in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning scenario B in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the winning scenario C in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment. . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing when a small hit V passes in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing when the small hit V does not pass in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing when the jackpot V passes in the A1 embodiment. (A) to (I) are timing charts showing when the jackpot V does not pass in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in Embodiment A1; (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image according to the A1 embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the A1 embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the A1 embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the A1 embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows through gate passage processing which is performed by MPU in main control unit in the A1st embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot ending control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning ending control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (A) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 13C is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (B) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small winning end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. 13 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A2 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the sorting apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (D) are diagrams schematically showing the inside of a sorting device B700 in the A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the croon member in 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A4 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow-path unit in 4th embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed by the third pattern display device in the A4th embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed by the third pattern display device in the A4th embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed by the third pattern display device in the A4th embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main-control apparatus in 4th A embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the small winning V in the A4 embodiment, and (B) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when passing the big winning V in the A4 embodiment. is. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the small win V is not passed in the A4 embodiment, and (B) is a roulette display timing when the big win V is not passed in the A4 embodiment. It is a timing chart. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the condition apparatus determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a V winning device in the A5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific big-hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th A5 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a fifth control example; It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the game content and the effect mode of a series of effects in the fifth control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the game content and the effect mode of the final variable effect in the fifth control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing display contents displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of normal figure fluctuation production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which a normal figure fluctuation effect is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a view in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the screen per normal figure displayed on a 3rd design display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the production|presentation (challenge game) during special 2 fluctuation|variation displayed on a 3rd pattern display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a small hit is won with a special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of winning a big win during the small win displayed on a 3rd design display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 non-fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (B) is a fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of winning small hit by special 2 fluctuation|variation displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in . (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time point of 1 second from the start of the normal pattern per game displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a fifth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the ball does not enter the second winning hole during the normal figure winning game displayed on the third symbol display device in . (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of 3 seconds from the start of the small winning game displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a diagram in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect when a ball|ball does not win a prize in V winning a prize mouth during the small hit game displayed on a 3rd design display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the third symbol display device in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the time saving final fluctuation|variation displayed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode of the first half production of the time saving final variation displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is the third pattern in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the latter half production|presentation of the time saving final variation displayed on a display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode showing the effect result of the second half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (B) is a fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time-saving final fluctuation production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in . (A) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time of the special 2 hit after the end of the time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (B) is a diagram showing the second in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time-saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation displayed on a 3 design display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect which shows the completion|finish of a time saving state displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the fifth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (B) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first winning random number 5 table in the fifth control example, (B) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 5 table in the fifth control example (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 5 table in the fifth control example, (D) schematically shows a random number 5 table per normal symbol It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, (B) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table in the fifth control example (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal pattern per type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, (B) is a normal pattern per type and a game state based on the release of electric accessories It is the figure which showed the content of operation|movement. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a small hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, (B) schematically shows a special figure 1 small per type selection 5 table in the fifth control example (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 small per type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example. be. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a time-saving variation pattern 5 table, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection 5 table in the fifth control example, and (B) schematically shows a time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start winning process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure prefetching processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passing processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning state determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 5 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example, (B) is by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example It is a flow chart showing a normal small winning process to be executed. It is a flow chart which shows a series of effect small winning process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting processing for normal figure executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing for time reduction performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a winning variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a series of effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing update processing during game per normal figure executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example, (B) is a flow chart in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example It is a flow chart which shows update processing during a small hit game performed by MPU. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing final variation effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing a game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example; (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving final variation in the sixth control example, (B) is an effect during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the type selection 6 table per normal pattern in the sixth control example, (B) is an electric role based on the type and game state per normal pattern in the sixth control example It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of opening operation|movement of an object. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 6 table in the sixth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal figure fluctuation pattern table in the sixth control example, (B) schematically shows a normal figure fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the sixth control example It is a schematic diagram, and (C) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving B in the 6th control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a normal figure effect setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; It is an enlarged view schematically enlarging the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarging the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (A) and (B) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of presentation of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example. be. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table in the 7th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing set effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure set production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is the figure which showed the setting method of the series production|presentation in the 7th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal map scenario table in the 8th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow in which scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of production scenarios in the eighth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series production scenario in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a series of effect determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows per normal figure related command processing which is performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 8th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variation effect setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing constant monitoring effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a normal figure effect setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a series of performance prediction setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final variation effect table in the ninth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning final table in the ninth control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final table for deviation in the ninth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final effect variable setting table in the ninth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a win setting table in the ninth control example. . FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation setting table in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing final winning processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a time-saving effect setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing final variation effect update processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; (A) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (B) is a third control example in the tenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the right hitting information screen in the 2nd information mode displayed on a pattern display apparatus. FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a modification of the seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the performance of the pachinko machine in the modified example of the seventh control example; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, and (B) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing, and (B) is a view showing four reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode in which the character J0 appears from the display area C after the character J0 is displayed. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four held balls are set during the variation of the third symbol, and no vacant recommended value is increased, and (B) is further held from the state of (A) It is the figure which showed the display mode when the number of balls increases and it exceeds a recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of held balls increases in a short period of time, and (B) shows a character J0 in the display area C indicating the optimum number of held balls according to the state. It is the figure which showed the display aspect in a case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C while the third symbol is changing, and (B) is a change to a held ball while the third symbol is changing. , and a character J2 is displayed in the display area C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of pending balls reaches the maximum number, and (B) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C changes when an over-winning is won. It is a figure showing. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player accumulates the number of pending balls up to 6 during reach, and (B) shows that the number of pending balls is accumulated up to 6, and the pattern arrangement changes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode when (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the lucky display of the previous big hit pending, (B) is a display mode when the player presses the button after the number of pending balls has accumulated up to 6. It is a diagram. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the long open effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the variable effect of the long open winning prize. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the eleventh control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eleventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the eleventh control example. and (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal random number table in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) schematically shows the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram, (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the eleventh control example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table which is part of the variation pattern selection table in the eleventh control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table for reducing working hours, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the eleventh control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning command table in the eleventh control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eleventh control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a suspension change selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a suspension effect mode selection table in the eleventh control example. . (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) schematically showing a normal holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram showing a preliminary notice A mode reservation lid range selection table in the eleventh control example, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a selection table; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) schematically shows a ready-to-win effect holding lid range selection table in the eleventh control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid command selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a holding lid color change selection table in the eleventh control example. is. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reserve command table in the eleventh control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background mode selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character selection table in the eleventh control example. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character change table in the eleventh control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a balloon selection table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal balloon selection table in the eleventh control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the announcement A balloon selection table in the eleventh control example, and (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the announcement B balloon selection table in the eleventh control example. is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win effect balloon table in the eleventh control example. be. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reserved speech balloon selection table in the eleventh control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win effect lottery table in the eleventh control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win start time calculation table in the eleventh control example. There is, and (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reservation lottery table in the eleventh control example. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in an eleventh control example; (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the eleventh control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the eleventh control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the eleventh control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 11th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design 1 fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design 2 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the design variation processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the design variation start processing normally performed by MPU in the main controller in the 11th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 11th control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a lucky display determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a reach-while-hold effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a holding lid setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a pending character setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a balloon lid setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing short-term winning determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a lucky pending storage process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing short-term winning management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding effect management process during reach performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in the 11th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, (B) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; (B) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; 4 is a flow chart showing mode switching processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a holding lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; 10 is a flowchart showing a pending character display process. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing balloon display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process which carries out. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example, and (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eleventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the twelfth control example. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the twelfth control example; (A) is a display mode showing the display screen during the continuous effect in the twelfth control example, and (B) is a display mode showing the display screen during the special effect in the twelfth control example. This is a display mode showing a background change during continuous presentation in the twelfth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the twelfth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the twelfth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the process during time saving performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 12th control example. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect return processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing continuous effect return processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 14th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen when the power is turned on in the fourteenth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourteenth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power is turned on in the fourteenth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing a variable game screen for the first rotation after power is turned on in the fourteenth control example. . FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fourteenth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the fourteenth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a volume table in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing initial sound volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing volume-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen when the power is turned on in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen during a game operation in the fifteenth control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; 4 is a timing chart when the tilting device performs a retry operation; 4 is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting action scenario table in the fifteenth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario A table in the fifteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario B table in the fifteenth control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection operation A table in a fifteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection B table in a fifteenth control example. and (C) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifteenth control example. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing retry processing during touch input executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing tilting device control processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing operation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing tilting initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a process during operation presentation executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect backtracking operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing retry operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the retained ball has a variation of the jackpot A and the third symbol is varying; It is the figure which showed the display mode when one is digested and it becomes a jackpot A. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during super time when one more retained ball is digested from the state of FIG. 483 (B), and ), one more is digested, and this time variation is a diagram showing a display mode when a big win is achieved. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a chance, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode during probability variation. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when a big win is started, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect for the 1st round of the big win. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case of notifying that there is a button effect during the big win, It is the figure which showed the display mode in the case of informing a player that probability variation was provided. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the big win is over, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode when the big win is over and the variable probability mode is entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the sixteenth control example, and (B) schematically shows a promotion lottery table in the sixteenth control example; It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation pattern reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing stop symbol switching processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing stop symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related command reception process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing opening processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a big prize winning ball process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing round processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing a stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 16th control example, (B) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 16th control example; It is a flow chart showing a game state setting process to be performed. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a big winning process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example; (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when long open is won in the 17th control example, and (B) shows a display mode in the case of the long open effect in the 17th control example. It is a diagram of FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a display mode during the long opening effect regulation in the seventeenth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the seventeenth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the design variation processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing long open effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventeenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing long open-related processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventeenth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in the eighteenth control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display screen and BGM when the power is turned off in the eighteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when power is turned on, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of return fluctuation after initial setting is completed. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the background change according to the background change operation timing in Toku-zu fluctuation|variation. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when a background change operation is performed while the third symbol is changing at low speed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a variable screen; FIG. 17 is a timing chart showing the flow of the variation state of the third symbol, the effective period of the touch sensor, and the operation in the eighteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a touch operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the 8 pending effects are executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first variation after the 8 pending effects are executed. It is a diagram. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a new prize is won after the 8 pending effect is executed, and (B) is a view from the new winning after the 8 pending effect is executed. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the completion|finish of 8 pending|holding production|presentation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch operation is performed during a touch effect, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a special operation is performed during a touch effect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special effect selection table in the eighteenth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing vibration pattern data in the eighteenth control example. and (C) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an 8-piece reservation lottery table in the eighteenth control example. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in an eighteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an 8 effect scenario selection table in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing 8 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing variation pattern reception processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a holding number control process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fluctuation recovery processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a display start-up process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing left and right button input processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing background change processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing mode identification processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a ramp setting process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing counter update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing 8-display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing resident image transfer setting processing 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background announcement selection table in the nineteenth control example; (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the sea mode, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the mountain mode. be. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing background change processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing variation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing customer waiting setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing customer waiting effect processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the flow of the crack effect in the nineteenth control example; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a crack effect is started, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a button is operated during the first period of the crack effect. be. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the second period of the cracking effect, and (B) is a view of the display mode when the button is not operated during the first period of the cracking effect. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a crack effect selection table in the twentieth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 10 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a crack effect ending process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing SW effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twentieth control example; FIG. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation effect pattern 1 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 21st control example, and (B) is a timing chart showing the flow of operation effect pattern 2 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 21st control example It is a timing chart showing a flow. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the jackpot in the 21st control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the PUSH effect screen during the jackpot in the 21st control example. . It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the success of the PUSH effect|presentation during a jackpot in the 21st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the ending effect in the 21st control example, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing success of the ending effect in the 21st control example. . FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-first control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation effect selection table during a grand prize in the twenty-first control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a tilting motion scenario table during a grand prize in the twenty-first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a tilting action scenario C table in the twenty-first control example, and (B) schematically showing the contents of an ending scenario table in the twenty-first control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation effect execution timing selection table in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing processing 11 during operation rendering executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing opening processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing round processing 11 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 21st control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 11 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; It is a timing chart showing the flow of the role product operation, the liquid crystal display, and the pseudo sound when there is the last effect of the jackpot game period in the 22nd control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the character action, the liquid crystal display, and the pseudo sound when there is no final effect during the jackpot game period in the twenty-second control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the role product operation, the liquid crystal display, and the pseudo sound when the role product control device is driven during the round performance of the jackpot game period in the 22nd control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing round processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 12 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 22nd control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing final round processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 22nd control example; (B) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 22nd control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 22nd control example; (A) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the role product control device in the 22nd control example, and (B) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the role product control device in the 22nd control example. 4 is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 22nd control example; (A) and (B) are the BGM and the display contents of the third symbol display device when the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation in the 23rd control example and the special figure fluctuation is restarted when the power is turned on. is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the twenty-third control example, and (B) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the twenty-third control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a silhouette previous notice selection table defined in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing fluctuation stop processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fluctuation recovery processing 13 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing display start-up processing 13 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pseudo fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing background change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing counter update processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-variation setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of a mode promotion effect display mode in the twenty-fourth control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when three identical numbers are arranged vertically in the mode promotion effect in the 24th control example, and (B) is a mode promotion effect in the 24th control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after the background mode is upgraded by . FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a mode promotion effect selection table specified in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example, and (B) is a schematic diagram in the twenty-fourth control example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a win table that constitutes a mode promotion effect selection table; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a failure table that constitutes a mode promotion effect selection table in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the specified content of the number-of-rounds display data table in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing mode promotion effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing display setting processing 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing drawing content acquisition processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIB-VIB in FIG. 708(A). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIB-VIIB in FIG. 709(A). 709 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 708; FIG. FIG. 710 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 709; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (B) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVB in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVC; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (A) is a front view of the driving device, and (B) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIB in FIG. 719(A). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 720. (A) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXA in FIG. 720, and (B) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXB in FIG. (A) and (B) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); 709 is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 708; FIG. FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A); FIG. 708(A) is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A);

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112A (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112A to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5C having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112A (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 5C. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5C. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51A for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112A, a shooting stop switch 51B for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51A is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51A and the firing stop switch 51B are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5C of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112A (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric role product 140A is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric role product 140A is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning port 140 The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140A associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 140A is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product 140A associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first electric role product is hit once. At least one of the number of times 140A is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric role product 140A and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 140A associated with the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more chances to open the first electric accessory 140A of the second winning opening 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140A for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140A may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140A is attached to the second prize winning port 140. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 140A is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140A is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 140A is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ , the number of times the first electric accessory 140A is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 140A is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140A like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140A attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to set the first electric accessory 140A in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a laterally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65A is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65A is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65A is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65A can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65A is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65A, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65A is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65A while the specific winning opening 65A is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65A is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65A, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112A so that when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. . The sphere firing unit 112A has a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51B for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include respective drive motors 481 , 491 , 661 , 880 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. 400, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the motion unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are placed in the inner space of the rear case 300. housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301A is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301A, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 which are displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projection member 485 are retracted to the back side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301A of the back case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (a plurality of types of displacement modes can be formed). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front of the displacement unit 400 , a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged inside the base member 610 , and a projection plate member 620 . It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 . The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that enhances the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 onto the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and designs). clearly emerge). Also, a structure is adopted that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation units 650 ) to the base member 610 . Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 which are arranged above the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. , the other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the retracted position above the opening 301A (that is, the third pattern display device 81) of the back case 300 and the projecting position projecting to the front side. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850. At a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) around the balanced position (predetermined position) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The displacement unit 400 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400. FIG.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L) displaceably disposed on the base member 410. member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower driving mechanism 480 and upper driving mechanism 490) for applying driving force to the displacement member. When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 491) When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed to be displaced in different manners. The details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18. FIG.

First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member arranged in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the rear surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a sliding member formed at the lower end. and a moving groove 423 . The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the rear side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set so that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the rear surface of the left driven member 430L. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 described later is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation around the axis of the connection hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a drive pin 488B (see FIG. 15) of a lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L. and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the rear surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The slide pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a slide groove 410A bored in the side of the base member 410 . Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The carriage member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410F and the upper front portion 410G, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It comprises two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported on both ends of each connecting shaft 441 . Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the truck member 440 by rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440 and supported.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410F and the upper front portion 410G, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R, the right driven member 430R, the left driven member 430L, the upper right rack 450R, and the upper left rack 450L are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, respectively. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on its front surface. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is offset to the front side at the portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed, and is arranged in a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Accordingly, as the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the number of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is reduced. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (the direction toward or away from each other). However, an even number of pinion gears 459 may be provided, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 and 14 show a state in which the rear cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the rear cover 412 is removed. 13 to 16, illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the rear surface of the protruding member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487A to 487E) in which a leading gear 487A is meshed with, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R which are meshed with a gear 487E at the end of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back of the left front cover 411L. be. The drive gear 483 and the drive arm 484 are rotatably supported on the rear surface of the left front cover 411L and the front surface of the base member 410, respectively.

The driving gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483A that is positioned eccentrically from its center of rotation and that protrudes from its rear surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484A through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484B through which the eccentric pin 483A of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, A drive pin 484C projecting from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484A and the slide groove 484B are formed is provided.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483A of the drive gear 483 and the sliding groove 484B of the drive arm 484 move. By acting on one or the other inner wall surface, the drive arm 484 rotates in the forward or reverse direction around the pivot hole 484A, and the drive pin 484C of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The projecting member 485 has a linear sliding groove 485A through which the driving pin 484C of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extending and retracting direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail provided on the front surface of the base member 410, a tip rail provided on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a base end rail interposed between the base end rail and the tip rail. and an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be longitudinally displaceable relative to each other.

Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485A of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the driving pin 484C of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is extended and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the upward/downward direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) is arranged in a state in which the top gear 487A is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front and right front surfaces of the base member 410. They are rotatably pivotally supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) by raising and lowering the protruding member 485 .

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and include a rack gear 488A engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488B protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and respectively. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are arranged at different positions in the vertical direction, with the rack gears 488A opposed to each other, and between the rear surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the rear cover 412 in the horizontal direction (width direction). , left-right direction in FIG. 19).

A gear 487E at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to an adjacent gear 487D and protrudes rearward through an opening 410B drilled in the base member 410 to form a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488L. It meshes with each rack gear 488A of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) rotates as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487A at the end of the gear train causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to mutually move. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards or away from each other).

The drive pins 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrude to the front side through linear insertion grooves 410C drilled in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. and the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R so as to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410C is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410F and the upper front portion 410G to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly comprises a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 which together with the drive gear 493 form a crank mechanism.

The upper part of the base member 410 (the upper side part formed in a substantially picture frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed as a divided structure in which an upper rear part 410E, an upper middle part 410F, and a front part 410G are sequentially superimposed on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of the upwardly projecting portion of the upper intermediate portion 410F. 492 is attached (fixed). A drive gear 493 and a drive arm 494 are rotatably journalled on the rear surface of the upper intermediate portion 410F.

The driving gear 493 is provided with an eccentric pin 493A that is positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation and protrudes from the rear surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494A through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410F is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494B through which the eccentric pin 493A of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and It has a linear drive groove 494C located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494A and the sliding groove 494B are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the eccentric pin 493A of the drive gear 493 and the sliding groove 494B of the drive arm 494 are rotated. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 rotates forward or backward around the pivot hole 494A, and the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494 is displaced left and right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted through the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494A) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is supported. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is laterally displaced and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L moves to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The displacement (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the right displacement member is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed on the upper intermediate portion 410F and the upper front portion 410G.

Next, the operation of displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28. FIG.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. FIG.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are front views of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIGS. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. and a state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost positions (positions farthest apart from each other in the left-right direction), A protruding member 485 is arranged at the bottom.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is raised to the state (extended position in the first aspect). In the overhang position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are formed in a united state (a state in which the side surfaces of the three are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the projection member 485 (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487A to 487E) and the rack gear 488A (Figs. 16), the driving pins 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby displacing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420L. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410C of the base member 410 in a direction toward each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494 becomes the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421. As a result, the truck member 440 rolls on the rolling surface, and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L (the truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the right displacement member 420R. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the amount of displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (the width direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the amount of displacement on the lower end side is smaller than the amount of displacement on the upper end side ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488B (extended length of the insertion groove 410C) is made shorter than the movable range of the truck member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start to displace substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the extended position in the first mode ( 23 and 24) are driven substantially simultaneously. That is, the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (driving pin 488B).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while being rotated, instead of being non-rotatably displaced in the left-right direction while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to rotate and displace the displacement member in this way with the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. It has become possible for the first time to utilize the driving means of

Further, when the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (carriage member 440) differs from that of the lower end side (drive pin 488B), the distance between the drive pin 488B and the truck member 440 changes. Since the driving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the driving pin 488B, it is possible to absorb the change in the distance between the two. In other words, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488B can be formed to be rotatable and slidable, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved. be able to.

23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in directions opposite to those described above, FIGS. 19 and 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) away from each other, and the projecting member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the second mode.

25 is a front view of displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second mode.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is such that the left displacement member 420L rotates on its upper end side (the axial center of the connection hole 422). It is placed in an attitude that allows it to rotate about its center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494C of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), the drive pin of the lower drive arm 484 is driven as shown in FIGS. 484C pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485A of the protruding member 485, thereby elevating the protruding member 485, and driving pins 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R move the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction toward each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their upper end sides (the axis of the connecting hole 422).

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the third mode.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 as viewed from the rear in FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third mode.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488B. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494C of 494 acts on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (truck member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. Together, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side). Further, in the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the projecting member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the base member 410 is provided with guide means (for example, a guide groove), and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory along which the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way. As a result, the effect by displacing the displaceable member is one-pattern, and it is difficult to surprise the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (e.g., driving motor) is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In contrast, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485) can be displaced in three modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to perform displacement dominated by parallel movement (linear motion), whereas in the second mode And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to rotate (rotational motion) only, and the motion mode of the displacement can be different. can let As a result, it is possible to increase the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, there are some conventional products in which the rotation center is kept constant and only the direction of rotation is changed to change the displacement mode. It is not the same rotation center but a different rotation direction, but different rotation directions and different rotation centers (in the second mode, the upper end side is the rotation center, In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In addition, in the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a combination of rotation and parallel movement (linear motion). is the same direction as the direction of rotation in Therefore, in the initial stages of the first mode and the third mode (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize that the displacement members are displaced in the direction of approaching each other. can be hard to hit. On the other hand, in the first mode, the projecting member 485 is lifted as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the projecting member 485 is stopped. state can be maintained. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction toward each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Players can be expected to

In the displacement unit 400, a carriage member 440, a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R are arranged (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable. The upper end side (connection hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488B of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is in the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first mode) including a rotational component and rotational motion (second and third modes). can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove. That is, if the trajectory is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, but also the members 440, 488R It is necessary to provide a mechanism for continuously applying the driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the truck member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can be guided in a straight line, and therefore the truck member 440 can be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. , the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, so their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. , One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by rolling of the carriage member 440 on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488L. 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between base member 410 and back cover 412 . That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms for each mode, and therefore there is no need to employ a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the operational reliability and durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 620 . and a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the rear base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a “display area”), and an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In (that is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the player to see the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and also the irradiation unit 650 emits light. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form of a pattern or design, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 . The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along its outer peripheral surface, and meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 with a U-shaped cross section that continues in the circumferential direction between itself and the projection plate member 620, and includes a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641 , the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 . The detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in a posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 passes through substantially the center of the projection plate member 620 . The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 611 , and the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is connected (fixed) to the top gear 662 of the gear train. A gear member 630 provided on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rear base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611A erected on the inner edge of the annular plate member and an outer standing portion 611A erected on the outer edge of the annular plate member. A setting portion 611C, an intermediate standing portion 611B standing between the inner standing portion 611A and the outer standing portion 611C, and an inner concave groove in an area surrounded by the inner standing portion 611B and the inner standing portion 611A. 611D, an outer concave portion 611E in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 611C, and a restricting projection 611F projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611A is erected from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member to the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer erected portion 611C is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member to the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611B is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611A and the outer erected portion 611B. Also, the intermediate standing portion 611B is divided into seven parts around the axis, and each split end is connected to the outer standing portion 611C.

The inner recessed groove 611D is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611A, and the intermediate standing portion 611B in three directions. formed by

The outer recessed groove 611E is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed so as to surround the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611C, and the intermediate standing portion 611B in three directions. be.

The restricting protrusion 611F is a protrusion that prevents the collar C, which is pivotally supported by the front base 612, from rattling toward the rear side, and is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axial center of the collar C. and formed to protrude on the front side. In addition, in the present embodiment, the regulating projections 611F are formed at six locations with predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612 are provided inner upright portions corresponding to the inner upright portion 611A, intermediate upright portion 611B, outer upright portion 611C, and restricting projections 611F of the back base 611. A set portion 612A, an intermediate erected portion 612B, an outer erected portion 612C, and a shaft portion 612F are erected. That is, when the base member 610 is assembled, the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 612A to 612C of the front base 612 overlap the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 611A to 611C of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612F is inserted through the restricting protrusion 611F.

A plurality of holding pins 612G are erected on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611B and the outer erected portion 612C. The holding pins 612G are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and is a unit for causing the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. are placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 612C, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612. Thus, it is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612 .

36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate standing portion 612B of the front base 612 is formed with a substantially semicircular notch portion 612B1 at the leading end of the standing portion. Similarly, an approximately semi-circular notch 611B1 is formed at the same phase as the notch 612B1 on the upright distal end side of the intermediate upright portion 611B of the rear base 611 (see FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state in which the upright distal end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611B and 612B are superimposed (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the mutual notch portions 611B1 and 612B2 form an approximately circular opening when viewed from the front. be. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions with the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the notches 611B1 and 612B1 of the intermediate standing portions 611B and 612B, and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. In addition, the circular opening is set to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651 .

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, a virtual line M indicates the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 has a notch portion 621 in a portion of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation projection 611F of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a portion of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion in which the interior of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or design. As a result, when the light that has entered the interior of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting portion 622, the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622 . That is, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620 by the light being incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620 , is formed from a plate-like body that is annular in front view, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620 . It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 includes a toothed portion 631 carved along the outer peripheral surface, a rear portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and an end portion on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the rear portion 632 inclined toward the front side. and a slanted surface portion 633 .

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that extends from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and that is inclined toward the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is such that the crossing angle Θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 is the virtual It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle Θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (Θ1=Θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Also, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (the upper side in FIG. 38), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The groove forming member 640 includes a side surface portion 641A on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641B on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It has a front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end portion of the front portion 642 toward the rear side.

The side surface portion 641A is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and is spaced apart from the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 at a constant interval around the axis. formed apart.

The contact surface 641B is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641A and the projection plate member 620, and the cross section thereof is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641A. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641A and the contact surface 641B can form the guide groove 641 that guides the collar C by being arranged on the projection plate member 620 . That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 .

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and that is inclined toward the rear side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 to the rear side is defined by the angle of intersection Θ3 between the front portion 642 and the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle .THETA.4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (.THETA.3=.THETA.4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(A) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(B) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 along line XXXIXB-XXXIXB of FIG. 39(A). 40A to 40C are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40(A) to 40(C) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612F of the front base 612. As shown in FIG. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612F, the projecting portion C1 projecting radially outward is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39B). 39(B) lower side) and the side face portion 641A of the groove forming member 640 (the guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641A of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween, the projection plate member 620 can rotate vertically and horizontally by the gap. Even if the contact surface 641B of the groove forming member 640 is displaced, the contact surface 641B of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, referring to FIG. 40(A) to FIG. 40(C), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612F of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(A) and 40(A), the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 when the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612F.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612D of the front base 612 . That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner groove 612D is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612D, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612F on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the notch 621 with the shaft 612F, the collar C can be arranged on the front base 612 with the projection plate member 620 arranged thereon.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612F is such that the back side (upper side in FIG. 40(A)) of the shaft of the collar C with respect to the shaft of the shaft portion 612F is the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40(A)). It is performed in a state of being tilted to the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612F, and the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641. As shown in FIG.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(B), the opposite side of the projection plate member 620 is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(B)) around the tip of the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. This allows the axis of the collar C to be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612F.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(C), by displacing the collar C to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(C)), the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 contact each other. are arranged at positions facing each other. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620 , the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641 .

Here, if a groove is formed in the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are placed inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to place the collars. Since it is necessary to arrange the collar and both hands are used for assembling, there is a problem that the assembling efficiency is low.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this way with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG.

41A to 43B are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 41(B), 42(B) and 43(B), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted for easy understanding.

41(B), 42(B), and 43(B), the angle of refraction when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is Considered to have no effect on the invention, the light from light source A entering projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41(A) and 41(B), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 , the light of the irradiation angle A that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 . Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle A1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side in FIG. 41(B)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, , the amount of light entering the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or rear side of the projection plate member 620 and traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The light traveling through the member 620 is projected on the front or back of the projection plate member 620 even when the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected by the sides of the back. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, the light is totally reflected without being incident on the medium with a low refractive index if the angle of incidence is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like shape, and the light is incident from the end surface (edge) thereof, so the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, the light from the projection plate member 620 does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low refractive index, and the light can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and the air is the same. Since the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of transparent material, light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 The light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(A) and 42(B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle B that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, the positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other are formed of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel like the light with the irradiation angle A. FIG. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle A, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle B can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 to be emitted. can.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A. By increasing the amount of , it is possible to make (display) patterns and patterns clearly appear. Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is different from the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle B and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed such that its intersection angle Θ4 is the same as the intersection angle Θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 644 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 643, so that the light with the irradiation angle B can be projected onto the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle B from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B , of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 , the light with the irradiation angle Γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630 .

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 adjoin (face) each other.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere). be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The projected light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620, like the light with the irradiation angle A. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle A, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle Γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 (light amount).

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased to make (display) the patterns and patterns clearly stand out (display). Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gear member 630, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is more likely to be incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A than when the gear member 630 is behind the light source A (downward in FIG. 43A). , the angle of incidence when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced. As a result, it becomes difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 at its side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above is achieved. (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle Γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed such that its intersection angle Θ2 is the same as the intersection angle Θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). ), the light irradiated from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 634 and then propagate along the inclined surface portion 633, so that the light irradiated at the irradiation angle Γ can be The area reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle B from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge of the gear member 630 and made incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG.

44(A) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(B) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVB in FIG. 44(A). 45(A) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVA in FIG. 44(A), and FIG. is a cross-sectional view of. 44 and 45 show the state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, the state in which the board member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a substrate on the back of the substrate member 652. It comprises a plurality of (two each in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 that are arranged.

The substrate member 652 is made of an elastically deformable material and formed into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means for emitting light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 , and are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652 . They are arranged at regular intervals along ( FIG. 44(B) left and right direction).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction. Second blocks 654 are arranged on both longitudinal sides of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed of a resin material in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and have higher rigidity (a characteristic of being less elastically deformable) than the substrate member 652 . Therefore, in the attached state to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

46(A) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(B) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along line XLVIB-XLVIB in FIG. 46(A). 46(C) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 taken along line XLVID-XLVID in FIG. 46(C).

The first block 653 has a bottom wall portion 653A that is oblong in the front view and side wall portions 653B erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653A toward the front side (FIG. 46A). front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side.

Of the four side wall portions 653B, the facing side wall portion 653B (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653A) has a fastening hole H recessed in the end face on the front side thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that Side wall portions 653B other than the side wall portion 653B in which the fastening hole H is recessed are connected by a connecting wall 653C, and a projection 653C1 is provided protruding from the front end face of the connecting wall 653C.

The second block 654 has a rectangular bottom wall portion 654A in a front view, and side wall portions 654B erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 654A toward the front side (FIG. 46C). side) is formed into an open box shape. The bottom wall portion 654A is provided with a rectangular opening 654A1 in front view, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

Of the four side wall portions 654B, the side wall portion 654B erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654A has a fastening hole H recessed in the end face on the front side thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. The side walls 653B erected from the long sides of the bottom wall 654A are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654C, and the connecting wall 654C has a fastening hole H recessed in the end face on the front side thereof and screw S1. can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, through-holes 653B1 and 654B1 are formed at two locations in each of side wall portions 653B and 654B erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653A and 654A (see FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46(B)). The holding pins 612G of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1. As a result, it is possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold the blocks 653 and 654 at the positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46A) (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes H). Moreover, it is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane passing through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first blocks 653 can be shared, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the product cost. can be done. In addition, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 has neither vertical nor longitudinal directionality with respect to the substrate member 620, which improves workability during assembly work. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is positioned with respect to a first virtual plane (i.e., a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes H) passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(C)). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, since the second blocks 654 can be shared, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. can be done. Further, when the second block 654 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work can be improved. can be done.

Returning to FIGS. 44 and 45, description will be made. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and with a predetermined gap between adjacent blocks. be.

Specifically, the front surfaces of the first block 653 and the second block 654 are superimposed on the rear surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole H. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the protrusion 653C1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 toward the front side.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the board member 652 , and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652 . In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in the shape of a box with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlaid on the back of the substrate member 652 . That is, both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with recesses in the surfaces on which they are superimposed (arranged) on the substrate member 652, so that the recesses (internal spaces) accommodate electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652. can accommodate. Therefore, the electronic parts and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage to the electronic parts and connectors due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Also, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage (disconnection) of the circuit due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the rear side (see FIG. 34), the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620 . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage (disconnection) of the circuit even in the portion where the blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method for arranging (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 thus configured to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in the area between the intermediate standing portion 611B and the outer standing portion 612C. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, the holding pins 612G erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlaid on the rear surface of the front base 612 , so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612 . That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (attached) to the base member 610 .

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (mounting) of the LEDs 651 is such that each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do so, and the time and effort of the arrangement work increases.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a substrate member 652 that is elastically deformable. are arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), the work of arranging a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the LEDs 651 .

Further, by inserting the holding pins 612G of the rear base 612 into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The direction of the illuminated surface can be defined (see Figure 34). In other words, it is not necessary to individually adjust the irradiation surfaces of the plurality of LEDs 651 and assemble them to the rear base 612, and each LED 651 can be attached only by inserting the holding pins 612G into the insertion holes 653B1 and 654B1 of the blocks 653 and 654. can set (adjust) the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651, and also from this point, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the work of arranging (mounting) the LED 651.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations and the like are prevented. By suppressing the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force, or by correcting the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side wall portions 653B and 654B when viewed from the front). is set. Therefore, warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to input of external force such as vibration can be easily suppressed, or warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself can be easily corrected. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at regular intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in this embodiment, the second block 654 has one of the two fastening holes H formed in the connecting wall 654C. can be shortened. The second block 654 is arranged on the substrate member 652 in such a manner that the side wall portion 653B in which the fastening hole H is formed faces the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653B in which the fastening holes H are not formed are positioned on both longitudinal end sides of the substrate member 652 .

Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while ) can be shortened to provide spacing between adjacent illumination units 650 . In this case, the shaft portion 612F can be arranged using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily brought closer.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, both of the fastening holes H formed at two locations are formed in the connecting wall 654C, so the distance between the fastening holes H and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. In other words, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought closer to the LED 651 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LEDs 651 to be affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration. Therefore, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp and flexure of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, since the distance between the fastening holes H formed at the two locations is large, there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes H at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, connecting walls 653C are provided between the side walls 653B in which the fastening holes H are formed, and projections 653C1 projecting from the connecting walls 653C are inserted through the base member 652. pass through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653C1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by eliminating the need to provide the screw S1 separately. It can be easier to maintain.

Note that both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction (the outermost ends in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45(B)) are free ends (that is, are not constrained by the second block 654). The attitude of the LEDs 651 positioned at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the center of the arc is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the rear surfaces of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654 . As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear base 820 on the rear side of the rear base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the driving force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The rear base 830 protrudes into an opening 831 formed to have a size through which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 formed thereon, and a back-side restricting portion 834 that protrudes toward the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a drive motor 880 attached to the rear side of the rear base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830 .

Also, the opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 . Accordingly, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work processes for parts replacement when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later, and project from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The back-side restricting portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (inward direction of the paper surface of FIG. 47), and protrudes from the front side of the back base 830. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view with an external shape slightly larger than that of the rear base 830 . The front base 820 includes a shaft support portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected at the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 protruding to the back side. , a front-side restricting portion 824 that protrudes toward the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes toward the back side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 to be described later is inserted, and is recessed on the lower right side of the front base 820 in front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the rear base 830 and the front base 820 for arranging a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870 to be described later. It is erected on the upper and left and right edges (other than the lower end) of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Accordingly, when the front base 820 and the rear base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be displaceably arranged therebetween.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that engages with one end side (the upper side in FIG. 48 ) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later.

The front-side restricting portion 824 is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 47). It extends in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP (to be described later) with a predetermined gap therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the rear side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh with each other in series. is transmitted to

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863A that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863B that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projecting portion 863C that projects in an arc shape about the shaft, and the rotation position of the shaft portion 863C. A plate-like sensor detection plate 863D for detecting is mainly provided.

The toothed portion 863A is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, so that the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863B is a shaft that is connected to the connecting member 870, protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side, and is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The projecting portion 863C is a projection for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction. It is formed curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863D is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863A of the transmission gear 863 is formed thereon. It is formed so as to protrude radially outward on the non-contact side surface.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. The connecting member 870 is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front. A gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed projecting upward from the outside of the curved portion. a portion 873;

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863B. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853 . Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850 .

The abutting portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the rear-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 facing each other. be done.

In addition, the contact portion 873 has a front-to-rear width dimension of the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 . It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the abutting portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. can prevent it from becoming On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the rear base 830 .

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft supporting portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890 , and is positioned opposite the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 . formed in As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the opposing shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 , so that it can be prevented from falling out of the vertical displacement unit 800 .

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed with a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 for transmitting the driving force of the connecting member 870 .

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above. is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 in a state in which the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851 . , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851 .

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and protrudes from the back side of the displacement member 850 . Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the rear side, and the protrusion distance is set to the front side of the rear base. is formed up to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface of the . Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the gravitational direction with respect to the front base 820 .

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, it is positioned below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 as described above, and is formed of a metal rod-shaped body that is harder than the displacement member 850 . As a result, damage to the rotating shaft can be suppressed when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

In addition, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is divided into the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two parts, it is possible to suppress damage to the part due to an increase in resistance at one point.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is positioned upward (first position), the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is positioned upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

At the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863B connects the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. are arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to form a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880, the drive motor 880 is driven to rotate, and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are rotated. The shaft portion 863B is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863B is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed in the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850, thereby rotating the displacing member 850.

In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863B and the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side of the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the connecting holes 872 intersects. Therefore, the state where the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 and does not generate a force component in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 (that is, the dead point) can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the direction of rotation displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the gravity of the displacement member 850 pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780. , in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumed by the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863B and the direction connecting the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to reciprocate by the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can perform interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the driving motor 880 and driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement (the orthogonal projection of uniform circular motion) described above is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, thereby increasing variations in displacement. That is, only by switching on or off the power supply to the driving motor 880 to switch whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement, thereby improving the structure and control. Since there is no need for complication, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is cancelled, and the gravitational force of the displacement member 850 is applied. and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (vertically displaced) as the displacement member 850 is displaced to rotate the transmission gear 863 . Since the posture of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axial center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 A straight line connecting the axial centers and a straight line connecting the axial centers of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are located at substantially orthogonal positions. The magnitude of the force component in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balanced position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced from the balanced position in either direction of pushing or pulling. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position. can be easily continued.

When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55 to further rotate the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (the transmission mechanism 860), the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 moves further downward. is displaced to Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863B is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850 to rotate the displacing member 850 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (the left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863B is disposed below. As a result, since the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged downward, the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

At the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the axes of the holes 872 is arranged with the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to form a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

Next, transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(A) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57(B) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57(A) to 57(C), a part of the transmission gear 863 (a protruding portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 57A, at the first position, the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863 .

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, at the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, by increasing the resistance to drive the displacement member 850, the stopped state can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(B) and 57(C), power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 is in the second position). 6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connection member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacing member 850 in front of the third pattern display device 81 in a short period of time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the contact portion 873C of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863A of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

Here, when the displacing member that displaces up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so there is a problem that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can bring the contact portion 873C of the connecting member 870 into contact with the transmission gear 863. is stopped by connecting member 870 contacting transmission gear 863, and by stopping rotation of transmission gear 863 (driving of drive motor 880). can be distributed in one As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58(A) to 58(C). 58(A) to 58(C) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first driving range Θ5. 58(A) to 58(C) illustrate transition states from the first position. 58(A) to 58(C), a part of the transmission gear 863 (a protruding portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 58(A) to 58(C), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the first drive range Θ5, the first position is changed to the second position. As the transmission gear 863 shifts to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

Further, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacement member 850 to the first position of the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to the position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be brought to a stopped state quickly.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the movement, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the second drive range Θ6, the projecting portion 863C of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions opposed to each other in the front-rear direction. can be formed, the resistance to displace the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863B of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range Θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extension operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second driving range Θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced about the intermediate position (balanced position), The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863C.

Next, the contact portion 873 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(A) to 59(C). 59(A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXA-LIXA line in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(B) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXB-LIXB line in FIG. FIG. 59(C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXC-LIXC in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 59(A) and 59(B), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is located between the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 and the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830. placed in

That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 . As a result, the longitudinal displacement of the connecting member 870 is restricted.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 tilts in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59C, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear-side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is on a substantially straight line connecting the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and the transmission gear 863 It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830 , the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 abuts against the front base 820 and the rear base 830 . Inclination of the portion 863B and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 .

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is It is set to have the same outer diameter as the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 .

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 60(A) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(B) is a projection along line LXB-LXB of FIG. 60(A). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640;

As shown in FIGS. 60(A) and 60(B), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the rear side and the front side of the projection plate member 2620 on the outer peripheral edge thereof. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 . In addition, the projection plate member 2620 has a notch portion 621 in a part of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. and a guide groove 2641. The groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side of the projection plate member 2620 (the upper side in FIG. 60(B)), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620 . Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide grooves 2641 .

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. FIG. 61(B), 62(B) and 63(B), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

61(B), 62(B), and 63(B), light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at that time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a manner in which they are orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle A2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle A1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflection portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. This allows the edge of the projection plate member 2620 to be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle A2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle A1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 .

As shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 62(A)) from the guide groove 641. Light at angle B 2 is incident on the front edge of channel forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated within the irradiation angle B2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620 . In this case, as in the first embodiment, at positions where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected onto the projection plate member 2620 . can be made incident on

As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62A). The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surfaces of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 at positions where they are adjacent (facing).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620 .

Therefore, by recessing and forming the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting the light onto the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. .

Moreover, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the additional irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the emitted light from the LEDs 651 . .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the rear side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 2640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light that illuminates the gear member 630 is the same as in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620 .

First, referring to FIGS. 64 and 65, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630 and groove forming member 640 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(A) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(B) is a projection along line LXIVB-LXIVB of FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 640;

65(A) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVA in FIG. 64(A), and FIG. 65(B) is a side view of FIG. 65(C) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the LXVB-LXVB line, and FIG. 65(C) is the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the LXVC-LXVC line of FIG. 65(A). and a cross-sectional view of a groove forming member 640. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. arranged on each side. The projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and has protrusions 3623 that protrude to the front side and the back side at the outer edge thereof.

The projecting portion 3623 is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section projecting toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(B)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(B)) toward the outer edge. In addition, the projection 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the virtual line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the recessed groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. be done. On the other hand, the projection 3623 protruding to the back side is set on a virtual line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a recessed groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630, which will be described later. be.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the gear member 3630 includes a recessed groove 3635 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 64(B)) and a screw-fastened groove 3635 which is formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and a stop hole 636 for.

The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction and are formed on both circumferential sides of each stop hole 636 . Accordingly, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(B)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(B)) at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and an opening 646 for screwing.

The recessed groove 3645 is a groove that extends in the radial direction and is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630 . Thereby, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 is inserted. The planes overlap in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG.

66A and 66B are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 66B, the illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted for easy understanding.

Also, in FIG. 66B, similarly to the first embodiment, the angle of refraction when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 does not affect the present invention. , the light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is illustrated in an orthogonal fashion. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle A3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 Incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620 . As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 toward the central side (axial side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle A3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 is can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be made to reach the reflecting portion 622 more easily. and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle A3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. FIG. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side unlike the mode.

Therefore, light emitted from a light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected toward the projection plate member 3620, and is made incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630. can be suppressed from being incident. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display provided on the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from being highlighted (displayed) by light other than the LEDs 651 .

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(C)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed in the entire area overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction. Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axial center of the projection plate member 3620, There is a risk that light may leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Furthermore, the protrusion 3623 can increase the dimension in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A) of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620, so that the irradiation angle A3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 . .

Next, an irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67(A) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(B) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68A is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. Note that FIG. 67B corresponds to FIG. 44B. 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651 . That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651 .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is the height of the projection plate member 620 at the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. The dimensions are set so that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LEDs 651 disposed between the two screws S2 when the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed).

This allows the LED 651 to be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it comes close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to rattling in the radial direction based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is twisted. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material. can increase the effectiveness of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, and the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

Since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2 in this way, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611B and 612B can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the rear base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

In addition, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, it is possible to reduce the allowable amount of rattling in the radial direction due to the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LEDs 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 .

Next, a projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disc shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the circle. , and is slidably displaced in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 includes a base member 5610 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and having an opening at the center, and a base member 5610 slidably disposed in the opening of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for driving the projection plate member. A gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620 is mainly provided.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rear base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center, and is arranged in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611 . A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) are stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. a central opening 5612H, an inner standing portion 612A erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612H, a pair of left and right holding portions 5612I protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612H, It mainly includes two shaft portions 5612K projecting rearward from between the pair of holding portions 5612I, and a sliding projection 5612M projecting rearward from below the central opening 5612H. be.

The central opening 5612H has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize patterns and patterns of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612H.

The holding portions 5612I are projecting portions for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later. Further, the holding portion 5612I is formed with a recessed groove 5612I1 that is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the projecting surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612I1 is recessed from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 71) toward the end portion so as to have an arc-shaped cross section. formed larger than The pair of grooves 5612I1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is equal to the axis of the rod member 5625. Set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the recessed groove 5612I1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 5612I1 from the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging the holding part covers 5628 provided at both ends, the rod members 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612K is a projection that serves as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later, and is arranged above the central opening 5612H at a symmetrical position about a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 as an axis.

The sliding protrusion 5612M is a protrusion that guides the displacement of the rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape so as to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612H toward the rear side. Also, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612M are arranged at symmetrical positions about a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 as an axis.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmissive material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of the pattern. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620 . The rack 5627 is arranged below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612H of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position that is not visible from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 (horizontal direction in FIG. 72). As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 .

The rack 5627 has a rack gear 5627A that meshes with the gear 5668 engraved on its lower surface, and a sliding groove 5627B penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion.

The rack gear 5627A is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). and is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627 .

The sliding groove 5627B is a groove for suppressing the inclination of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the horizontal direction by driving the drive motor 661. The sliding groove 5627B is elongated in the horizontal direction. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612M of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620 is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangle in a front view facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 interposed therebetween. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The bar member 5625 is longer in the left-right direction than the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611 . It is arranged on the projection plate member 5620 sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with the bar member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620 .

The front cover 5626 has a groove 5626A recessed in the left-right direction on the side facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626A is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged, and is recessed with a substantially U-shaped cross section. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626A. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably displaced relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 .

Also, the bar member 5625 is arranged on the back side rather than the front side surface of the front cover 5626 . That is, since the bar member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626 , the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620 .

Here, if the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the rear side of the projection plate member 5620. FIG. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident thereon from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or design, the projection plate member 5620 is formed with grooves. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, it becomes difficult for the light incident on the interior of the projection plate member 5620 to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged on the front cover 5626 in which the bar member 5625 is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the incident light from traveling inside the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

In addition, as described above, since the bar member 5625 is attached to the front base 5612 at both ends so as not to fall off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid laterally. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the horizontal direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the first block are aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. They are arranged in opposite positions. Accordingly, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the patterns and patterns of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

The side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged is formed with a bulging portion 5612N that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in a rear view toward the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612N is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the rear side, and the raised dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512 .

A projection 612G is formed on the bulging portion 5612N. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the projection 612G into the insertion hole 653B1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611. FIG.

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650 .

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. A through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612K of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612K. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 about the shaft portion 5612K.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670 , the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612 . That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670 , the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653 .

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction of displacing the tip portion on one side of the shaft portion 5612K downward. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612J projecting to the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612K of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement regulating projection 5612J is a member that regulates the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is located behind the rotating member 5670 arranged on the front base 5612 (toward the rear base 5611). It is positioned on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 . As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is restricted by the displacement restricting projection 5612J, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is directed to the displacement restricting projection. Blocking by 5612J can be suppressed.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. FIG. 73(A) is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(B) is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74A is a rear view of projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74B is a rear view of projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75(A) is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(B) is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76A is a rear view of projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76B is a rear view of projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. In addition, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is just a left-to-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 74(A), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged substantially in the center of the central opening 5612H in the left-right direction, the rotating plates arranged on both sides in the left-right direction are in the first state. The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotary member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed to It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 (left and right sides in FIG. 74A), and the projection plate member 5620 can The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(A) and 74(A), driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) to the rack 5627. When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid rightward in front view (rightward in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 is also slid rightward (see FIGS. 73B and 74B). ). As a result, the second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the central opening 5612H when viewed from the front.

In this case, the front cover 5626 provided on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 abuts on the other side of the L-shaped rotation member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction. As a result, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612K, which serves as the rotation axis, in a direction to push up the one end side. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74) is displaced. (B) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are on substantially the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is slid, and the amount of light incident from the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

In addition, as the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed. can be changed. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of patterns and designs displayed on the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, an LED arranged at a different position is turned on according to the displacement to keep the light amount of the projection plate member constant. As a result, it is necessary to control the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LEDs becomes more complicated, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Furthermore, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LEDs are arranged at different positions.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since there is no need to control the LED 651 to turn on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate a displaced irradiated object (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiating objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated object, the irradiation range of each irradiating object There is a problem that a portion with a weak amount of light is created between them, and when the object to be illuminated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-described problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the number of irradiators to be arranged increases, so the problem is that the product cost increases. there was a point

However, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of brightness and darkness of light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing loss of interest of the player. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced to change the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 . The drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654 can be combined, and it becomes unnecessary to newly provide a driving means for displacing the second block 654 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the respective blocks 653 and 654 made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is arranged on the front base 5612 and then connected with the wiring, so that the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base 5612, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the driving of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612H. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(B)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is pushed up by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the front base 5612 and the projection plate. As the member 5620 is slid to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shape in front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612K. Further, as described above, the rotational range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is restricted by being brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612J.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the central opening 5612H in front view (see FIGS. 75B and 76B).

Next, a projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible through an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620 , an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620 . A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the rear base 611. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650 and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has a ring-shaped shielding member 6612R formed on the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment. A portion 6612P is formed.

The opening 6612P is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the rear side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612, which is annular in front view. It is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shielding member 6612R, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612B and the outer standing portion 612C on the outer edge of the opening 6612P. are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612 by overlapping the front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 .

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612 . Also, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612 . Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612R). ), so that it is difficult for the player to see it, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmissive material, and allows the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side to pass through and is visible to the player through the opening 6612P of the front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design. , through the opening 6612P of the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design in the internal space of the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside. Reflecting portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, pattern, or the like is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 in the circumferential direction over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 when viewed from the front. be. In this embodiment, the shape of the pattern, pattern, etc. of the reflective portion 6622 is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection regions 6622A to 6622F, such as six patterns and patterns, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 has the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664).

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described. 80(A) to 80(C) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80(A) to 80(C) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. FIG. Also, FIG. 80 illustrates a state in which the rear base 611 is removed. Also, the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting areas 6622A to 6622F) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is placed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622A is located. Therefore, when the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to display the patterns and patterns of the reflection area 6622A inside the opening 6612P. In other words, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern that appears inside the opening 6612P.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection areas 6622B and 6622F adjacent to the reflection area 6622A. The display of areas 6622B and 6622F cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612P, the player will not be able to visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest will be spoiled by being able to visually recognize other areas. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(B) and 80(C), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, patterns and designs of the reflection areas 6622A to 6622F arranged inside the opening 6612P of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and designs can be displayed inside the opening 6612P.

Here, if a pattern or pattern is printed on the front surface of the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 6620), and the object to be irradiated is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the object to be irradiated can be changed. 6612P), the pattern and pattern switching of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can understand which display will be displayed next before finishing the switching of the pattern and pattern, so that the player can see the pattern and pattern of the irradiated object. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed until the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the object is turned off and the display surface of the object is darkened, the object to be irradiated may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns of the object to be irradiated.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmissive material, and by turning off the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the projection plate member 6620 becomes transparent, making it difficult to see the patterns and designs. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of the patterns and patterns of the projection plate member 6620. 6620 displacements can be enjoyed to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612P of 6612 .

That is, when the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited. , the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, the substrate member 652 is provided with a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654. However, this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first blocks 653 and the second blocks 654 may be three or less, or may be five or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and the first block 653 alone or the second block 654 alone may be used.

In the first and second embodiments, the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface. Alternatively, the LED 651 , the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 .

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light transmissive material has been described. 630 and channel forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of light transmissive material and non-transmissive material.

For example, the rear portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material, and the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 and 2620 sides of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of non-transmissive material can prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . That is, light emitted by devices other than illumination unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Also, in this case, the layer formed of non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transparent material layer. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having a high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a seal of a member (for example, silver foil, aluminum, etc.) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a high reflectance is attached. (For example, white etc.) may be printed.

In this case, it is possible to prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by stickers or printing. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Further, the seal or printing makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, the seal may be attached in such a manner that the seal protrudes from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 toward the outer edge. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the projected seal portion, so that the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided. May be interposed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is certainly totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material with high reflectance, and can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle A3. Patterns and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate member 3620 . That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of non-transmissive material with high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the coil spring is used as the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a leaf spring. It should be noted that examples of the mounting method include a manner in which the projections 852 and 823 are connected and mounted, or a manner in which the displacement member 850 is mounted between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 .

In the first embodiment, the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in front base 820 . In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (the direction of gravity), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light from the LED 651 is made incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. FIG.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is positioned so as not to face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 2620, 3620, 6620, gear members 630, 3630 and groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640), and the light emitted from the LED The projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 , 6620 , the gear members 630 , 3630 and the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces thereof.

In this case, the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are irradiated with light emitted in a direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LEDs 651, while the irradiation surfaces of the LEDs 651 are obliquely irradiated. Part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and patterns on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and for irradiating other objects to be irradiated.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 are arranged in parallel. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 and 6620 .

Specifically, the projection plate members 620, 2620, and 3620 are arranged such that the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or pattern is displayed on the surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620, the light from the LEDs 651 leaks from the inner edges of the front bases 612 and 6612, which are annular in shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged facing the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Furthermore, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side or the front side, and is arranged in a state of being inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of .

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the back side or the front side and arranged in a state inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The position may be such that the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated to the front portions 632 of the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 or the rear portions 632 of the gear members 630 , 3630 .

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is made incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is illuminated. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620 may be different.

That is, by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 to divide the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, into three regions), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is divided into three regions. The light incident from the section is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the second area, and is emitted from the right side. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and designs to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the loss of interest of the player.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, The light source arranged on the left side emits light from the upper end to illuminate the first area, the light source arranged on the left side emits light from the left end surface to illuminate the second area, and the light source arranged on the right side emits light from the right edge. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by irradiating the light from the surface), but it is necessary to arrange a plurality of light sources for that, and there is a problem that the product cost increases.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, the case of irradiating the second or third area and the case of irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced accordingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by connecting it to the shaft of a newly provided drive motor.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front of the . That is, by changing the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the display density of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 for irradiating the projection plate member 620, and the gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 are placed between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although the case where the trains (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying a pattern or a pattern on each of the projection plate members 620, the player can visually recognize the combination of the patterns and patterns displayed on each of the projection plate members 620.例文帳に追加As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and designs, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the above-described third embodiment, the light from the LED 651 does not enter the central side from the side edge of the projection plate member 3620 where the bolt T is arranged, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) so that the light projected on the side surface of the bolt T is reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620 . In this case, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be easily condensed on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620 .

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form a portion where no pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light from the LEDs 651 is not incident). You may make it divide|segment a display.

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(C)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while the LED 651 provided in the irradiation unit 650 is emitting light, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is being displaced (rotated). .

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It can be anything.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. FIG. In this first control example, an effect (fluctuation effect) for showing the lottery result of the special symbols executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and an effect (variation effect) for showing that the jackpot game is being executed ( A big hit effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In this control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) spanning the multiple jackpot games is executed. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the ball entrance information can be stored. It is discriminated whether or not ball entry information for winning a big win exists in the ball information, and when it is discriminated that the ball entry information for winning a big win exists, a plurality of jackpot games are straddled. A continuous jackpot effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is finished, depending on the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. You can make them interested in the jackpot performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is possible to vary the contents of the jackpot presentation based on the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game as well as the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball-entering information, to facilitate the execution of consecutive big win effects, and to make the players interested in the big win effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of stored ball entry information (the number of pending memories) at the time the jackpot game is executed. ing.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo) (variable state (high probability, with electric sapo), time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the game state is continuing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

Furthermore, the above-described battle effect is composed of a effect (battle ready-to-win) that suggests whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will end, and a effect (pre-battle effect) to determine the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win. Configure. By configuring in this way, when the game state advantageous to the player actually ends, for example, the game state shifts to the normal state after the end of the jackpot, the battle performance is continued during a period other than when winning the normal jackpot. Therefore, the player continues to have a sense of anticipation for the continuation of the game state advantageous to the player and an uneasiness that makes the player think that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. It is possible to play a game while holding the robot.

Further, in this control example, a plurality of effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins are executed as effects for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. As a result, the player can have different expectations for the big win depending on which performance is executed. Furthermore, a plurality of expectation degree suggesting modes capable of stepwise suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win can be displayed in one variable performance, and the expectation degree suggesting mode is configured to be variable during one variable performance. .

In addition, in the present control example, the amount of stepwise variation of a plurality of expectation level suggesting modes during one variable performance is summed up to execute the variable expectation level suggesting performance suggesting to the player. ing. By constructing in this way, a player who grasps the performance contents of the variable expectation suggestion performance can play the game while predicting which expectation level suggestion mode will be changed to what extent, and the performance effect. can increase

Furthermore, in this control example, a specific effect (PUSH display effect ) is executed, and a foreshadowing effect is executed to notify that the countdown effect will be executed. During one variable performance, the start timing of the precursor performance, the execution timing of the specific performance, and the period of the countdown performance can be determined from a plurality of times, and the precursor performance is determined based on the determined contents. It is configured such that the presentation mode and the presentation mode of the countdown presentation are set.

By configuring in this way, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, compared to the structure in which the suggestive effect is executed for a predetermined period of time.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. The third pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main patterns imitating the numbers "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (to be described later) is a big win, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are arranged (for example, "777"). It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

Specifically, the main display area DM displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area DM, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this first control example, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

A small display area DN1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area DM when viewed from the front. This small display area DN1 displays a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) (see FIG. 85(A)). That is, in this control example, the small display area DN1 is used as the guide display area DN1. By constructing in this way, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot toward, just by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area DN1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area DN2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area DM when viewed from the front. This small display area DN2 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area DN2, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character takes an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region DM. is the case. During execution of the display effect, the effect can be displayed in a larger main display area DM, thereby providing a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area DN2 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 81(A), a sub-display area DS is formed below the main display area DM. In this sub-display area DS, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area DS are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved ball entries. In the first control example, since the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area DS.

In this control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to this, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area DM. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing and operation result of operating the frame button 22, and the win-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub display area DS. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area DM and the sub display area DS is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area DS.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that no ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 even though the player has continuously shot the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters A variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area DS is provided horizontally below the main display area DM, and among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, the balls that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of held balls. Although the details will be described later, the sub display area DS is divided into a first display area DS1 and a second display area DS2 for displaying game contents and performance contents to the player (see FIG. 102 ( A)). The pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area DS are the pending symbols corresponding to the next variation (front view of FIG. ) is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols are shifted to the left and displayed.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost during the previous variation) is the symbol display area during execution (the area where the expectation degree display mode DK1 in FIG. 102 is displayed) ). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area DM. In addition, at the right end and left end (outside the active line) of the main display area DM, three parts of the main pattern and three parts of the sub-symbol of the third pattern are displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or enters the second ball entrance 140 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters are each held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the sub-display area DS. In this control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 can be held up to four times each, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the second ball entrance 140 are not limited to be the same. The upper limit of the number of held balls entering the first ball entrance 64 may be greater than the upper limit of the number of held balls entering the second ball entrance 140, or conversely, it may be less. good. In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area DS, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82(A) and 82(B), the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described. 82(A) and 82(B) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82(A), in this control example, different effects are executed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, if the game state is "normal", that is, if the game state is a normal state that is not during the jackpot, the variable probability state, or the time saving state, the normal effect is executed, and the game state is the "jackpot ”, the production during the jackpot is executed, and if the gaming state is “probability variable or time saving”, that is, if the gaming state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, during probability changing (probability variable state or time saving state Middle) The production is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set game state just by looking at the effect being executed, and to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is executed in association with the game state, but for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. . As a result, it is possible for the player to predict the game state that is currently set by visually recognizing the effect that is being executed, and the player can play the game while expecting that the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. You can let people play games.

In addition, although FIG. 82 explains that the effect contents (display contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differ according to the game state, the mode included in the effect contents is the third symbol. It is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81, and includes, for example, the output mode of sound output by the audio output device 226 and the lighting mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227. be.

First, the effects executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. First, in this control example, the number of special symbol reserved balls and the contents of reserved and stored ball entry information (for example, determination of whether or not there is entry ball information that wins a prize) at the time the jackpot game is executed result), the content of the effect to be executed during the jackpot game is set.

Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed continuously, an effect (for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games is executed) that partially informs the content of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) a performance 1 during a jackpot, in which a performance of notifying the number of rounds for 5 rounds is continuously executed across a plurality of jackpots to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. , Execute the production corresponding to each individual jackpot game, and between the plurality of jackpot games (during the special symbol fluctuation period performed during the period from the end of the previous jackpot game to the execution of the next jackpot game) By continuing to display the ending effect of the jackpot game, a mid-jackpot effect 2 that directs as if a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed, and the following when the previous jackpot game is executed. A performance 3 during a big win, which notifies execution of a big win game and executes a continuous performance for a plurality of big win games, can be set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83(A), the content of the above-described effect 1 during the big win will be described. FIG. 83(A) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 1 during the jackpot. During this jackpot production 1, as shown in FIG. 83(A), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "3" (a state in which new reserved balls can be acquired during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a production during a big win that can be set when information on entering a winning ball is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the effect 1 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of the jackpot 1 (5 rounds (R ))) is executed (5R effect) After that, the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next big win game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed. is set so that a jackpot game effect for 25R is executed.

In other words, instead of setting the production content (production scenario) to be executed during one jackpot game as a series of production content (production scenario), it is configured to be set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). , a new performance content (scenario) is set based on the ball entry information retained and stored at that time.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 83(A), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85(A)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (fixed round number notification) is executed to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds. Then, when the jackpot game progresses up to the 4th R, a suggestive effect (see FIG. 85 (B)) that suggests whether or not the next 5R effect will be executed is executed, and in the 5th R, the 5R effect is executed next. A notification effect (see FIG. 86(A)) for notifying the result of whether or not is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 83(A), the 15th round jackpot is set as the first jackpot, so the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R effect executed for the third time (5R effect 3) is a period until the start of the second big win to be executed next, that is, the ending period of the first big win and the first big win. It is set so as to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation which is executed after the end (see FIGS. 87(A) and 88(A)). Then, the 5R effect 4 is executed along with the start of the second big win (the start of the opening period of the second big win).

As a result, a new reserved memory is generated during the jackpot game, and if the reserved memory contains information on entering a ball corresponding to a jackpot with a special symbol, the information on entering a ball (for example, the number of rounds) is used. It is possible to set a new effect (additional round number display). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the big win performance to be executed during the big win are set as a series of performance scenarios at the start of the big win, the performance to be executed during the big win (display of the number of additional rounds) can be easily changed. .

In addition, FIG. 83A shows an example in which a period of five rounds is set as one performance unit during the jackpot game, but the performance contents may be set for each round. Further, it is also possible to perform a discrimination management process for discriminating the content of winning ball information for each round, and to set the effect contents for each predetermined round (for example, every five rounds). Also, when new ball entry information is generated, the content of the entry information is discriminated, and the information (whether or not there is a jackpot, the number of rounds) used when setting the content of the performance during the jackpot is stored in the storage area. can be configured to

As a result, it is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load at the timing (every 5 rounds in FIG. 83(A)) of setting the content of the effect during the jackpot game.

Here, the display contents of the effect 1 during the big win will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. FIG. 85(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the performance 1 during the jackpot is executed, and FIG. FIG. 86(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect display for indicating whether or not the 5R effect continues, and FIG. 86(A) is an effect display for indicating that a new 5R effect is executed It is a schematic diagram showing an example, FIG. 86 (B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen in the round before the end of the jackpot 1, FIG. FIG. 87(B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot will continue during the ending period of the jackpot 1, and FIG. 87(B) is a display showing that the jackpot will end during the ending period of the jackpot 1. FIG. 88A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the screen, and FIG. 88A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen during the special symbol variation after the end of the 1 jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 85(A), when the effect 1 during the jackpot is executed, the characters "jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been won and "777" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the lottery of the special symbols. The third symbol stopped and displayed at is displayed in the main display area DM. In the small display area (guidance display area) DN1 of the main display area DM, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed to guide the player to shoot the ball into the right-handed area. On the upper right side, in a round number display area DM2 for informing the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game, a number of running rounds display mode DM3 indicating the number of rounds currently being run is displayed, and the number of rounds to be run is confirmed. A fixed round number display mode DM4 indicating the fixed number of rounds is displayed.

In this control example, as the effect 1 during the jackpot, a 5-round (R) effect for informing the player in advance that a jackpot game for at least 5 rounds will be executed is executed. As shown, "5" is displayed as the fixed round number display mode DM4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (number of running rounds display mode DM3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 86 (A) reference) the production (jackpot continuation production) suggesting the contents is executed. In this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the selected images DM5 to DM7 imitating a "treasure box" are displayed as a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the selected image DM8 imitating an "arrow" is displayed on the selected images DM5 to DM7. It is displayed so as to correspond to each of DM7. The player selects one of the selection images DM8 displayed so as to correspond to each of the selected images DM5 to DM7, thereby selecting one of the three displayed "treasure chests". Select Treasure Chest.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, one of the three "arrows" that are the selection image DM8 is displayed so that the display mode of one "arrow" is regularly varied. The selected images DM5 to DM7 corresponding to the changed display mode (variable display mode DM9) become the selected images selected by the player, and the player's arbitrary "arrow" becomes the variable display mode DM9. When the frame button 22 is operated, an arbitrary selected image is selected.

It should be noted that the method by which the player selects an arbitrary image to be selected is not limited to the content described above, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured so that it can be selected by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images DM5 to DM7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player can select a frame. By operating the button 22, it may be configured such that the selection image DM8 to be the variable display mode DM9 can be selected.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images DM5 to DM7, but different display modes may be displayed for each of the selected images. In this case, when the selected image is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode, the following 5R effect may be easily executed. As a result, the expectation that the big win game will continue can be heightened at the stage when the selected image is displayed, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

When the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round with the selected image DM5 selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86(A) is displayed. In FIG. 86(A), only the "treasure box" (selected image DM5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and the fixed round number is displayed from among the "treasure boxes". "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10 to be added to the mode DM4, and an additional effect is displayed in which the value of the fixed round number display mode DM4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10".

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. Note that FIG. 86(A) shows the display screen when "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10, but in the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 85(B)), the selected selected image , the content of the additional round number display mode DM10 is set differently. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, the fixed round number display mode DM4 is displayed with a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds. Any display mode may be used as long as the display mode is variable corresponding to the character, and a display mode using abstract expressions such as the movement, color, and size of the character may be used. By using an abstract display mode as the fixed round number display mode DM4 in this way, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of predicting the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game for the player.

In addition, since a player who has been playing games for a long time can understand the regularity of the display mode using abstract expressions, it becomes easier for the player to understand the content of the jackpot game than other players. can increase satisfaction. As for the contents of the jackpot game in this case, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed in the middle jackpot effect in which the effect that the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed is executed. It is preferable to make it possible to comprehend by the regularity of the mode.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict whether or not a game state advantageous to the player is set especially after the second big win game is finished, based on the number of rounds of the second big win game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who has been playing the game for a long time with game information that is more advantageous than the other players, so that the player can be motivated to continue playing the game for a long time.

In addition, in FIG. 86(A), "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode DM10 to be added to the fixed round number display mode DM4 while the fifth round of the round game is being executed. An example is shown in which the value of the display mode DM4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10". The contents of the effect may be set so as to be the inter-round interval period from the end of the 1st round game to the start of the 6th round game.

In addition, means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode DM10 is displayed during the fifth round of the game, and the operation timing is set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). If the number of rounds is exceeded, or if no operation is performed, the additional round number display mode DM10 may be displayed during the inter-round interval period after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, by varying the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode DM10 based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the presence or absence of the operation, the player can enthusiastically participate in the performance. , and the performance effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode DM10 may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 or the presence or absence of the operation. A discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 during a specific one second) may be provided, and the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode DM10 may be varied based on the discrimination result. . Further, only when the operation content of the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific one second during the fourth round of the round game), the additional round number display mode DM10 is displayed. may be configured so that the values displayed in are different.

Next, the production content for showing that a plurality of (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, the special from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game The contents of the effect during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86(B) and 87(A).

First, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the continuous jackpot effect is executed based on the start of the round (14th round) immediately before the final round of the first jackpot game. FIG. 86(B) shows an effect mode different from the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 85(B), and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen and the display mode are different. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a display mode that is more gorgeous than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image DM5. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the continuous jackpot effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the big win game will continue depending on the effect mode of the continuous jackpot effect to be executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the contents of the performance, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

FIG. 86(B) shows a different effect mode from FIG. 85(B) in order to explain variations of the continuous jackpot effect. The same effect mode as that shown in FIG. 85(B) is naturally set to be executed as the continuous jackpot effect executed in the round. In this way, by using the same performance mode for the continuous jackpot performance performed during the first jackpot game and the continuous jackpot performance performed at the end of the first jackpot game, it is possible to perform the first game at any timing. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot game has ended (how many rounds the first jackpot was in).

In addition to the method of setting the continuous jackpot production described above, for example, the continuous jackpot production is executed in the final round of the jackpot game according to the selected image ("treasure box") selected in the continuous jackpot production. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a continuous jackpot effect.

When the final round (15th round) is entered while the selected image DM5 is selected in the continuous jackpot effect shown in FIG. 86(B), the display similar to the additional effect shown in FIG. The display is continued during the ending period after the end of the final round, as shown in FIG. 87(A). Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the variation of the special symbols starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 88(A) is displayed.

This FIG. 88(A) is an example of the display screen during the period when the first jackpot game is over and the special symbols are changing. As shown in FIG. 88(A), even after the first jackpot game is over (after the special symbols are started to change), the display of the additional effect is continuously executed. In the small display area DN2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the variation of the special symbols that have won the jackpot stops, a combination of symbols (for example, "777") indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the small display area DN2, and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while the state is maintained.

In this control example, when the additional effect is set as the effect during the jackpot, the number of rounds set for the running jackpot and the next jackpot that will be held ) and the number of rounds set in ) can be set so that the display mode of the additional effect can be set. An additional round number display mode DM10 including the number of rounds set for the next big win can be displayed during the first big win.

In the above example, the period from the final round of the jackpot to winning the next jackpot (the period from winning the next jackpot, passing the opening period of the jackpot, and running the first round game) period), an additional effect is displayed continuously, but other effects may be used. For example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), 87 (A)) and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88 (A)), a blessing effect may be executed to congratulate the addition of the number of rounds, or the final round (15 round), and during the ending period (see FIG. 87 (A)), the additional production is completed, and during the special symbol fluctuation period (see FIG. 88 (A)), the production to celebrate the addition of the number of rounds. may be executed, and in the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 86(B)) executed in the 14th round is continuously displayed, and during the ending period (FIG. 87 (A)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88A), the additional effect may be executed.

When executing the above-described blessing effect, the round following the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86 (A))) is executed during one jackpot ( For example, it is preferable to configure so that a similar blessing effect is executed also in the sixth round). As a result, a performance mode in which it is difficult for a player to grasp how many times the jackpot has been won while the top-up performance is being executed, that is, a performance mode of the top-up performance executed during one big win; The effect mode of the additional effect executed between two big wins can be the same (same except for an error that makes it difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, when there is no round number to be added by the additional effect, as shown in FIG. ”, the comment “Unfortunately, the jackpot ends” is displayed in the main display area DM, and the jackpot ends.

In addition, this control example is configured such that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period (interval period between rounds) between each round game executed during the jackpot game. may be used, for example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same according to the type of jackpot won, it may be configured to vary the period of the inter-round interval. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one jackpot, the inter-round interval before the end of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between 5 and 6 rounds) is set to 5 seconds, and the other round interval is set to 2 seconds, and the interval between rounds two rounds before the start of a round that is a multiple of 5 (for example, a round set between 3 and 4 rounds Interval between rounds is set to 5 seconds, and interval between other rounds is set to 2 seconds.

Moreover, when using the jackpot types with different inter-round intervals as described above, it is preferable to switch the effect during the jackpot at the timing when the long-term inter-round interval is set. Furthermore, as in this control example, when executing the effect during the jackpot with a predetermined period (5 rounds) as one unit, from the start of the jackpot (start of the opening period of the jackpot, or the start of the first round) Since the interval until the long interval between rounds is first set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the performance during the jackpot, the performance other than the additional performance is executed. good to do

Furthermore, in this control example, regardless of the type of jackpot, a certain period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the jackpot. It may be configured to be different for each type, and the opening period of the jackpot may be configured to be different for each jackpot type to be set.

In this way, although the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game) is the same, the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the ending period set for the jackpot are varied according to the set jackpot type. and setting the performance during the jackpot across a plurality of jackpot games, the player is asked how many times the jackpot has been won while the performance during the jackpot is executed once. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, when the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the winning of the next jackpot is different, that is, when the next jackpot is won with the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the previous jackpot. Even if the special symbol variation period executed between the big wins differs between the case of winning the next big win in the special symbol variation of the third rotation, the opening period, the interval period between rounds, and the period set for the big win. By configuring the ending period to be different according to the type of the set big win, the performance during the big win can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, referring back to FIG. 83(B), the contents of the above-described jackpot mid-effect 2 will be described. FIG. 83(B) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 2 during the jackpot. During this jackpot production 2, as shown in FIG. 83(B), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "2" (a state in which a new reserved ball can be obtained during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a production during a big win that can be set when the winning ball entry information is not included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired.

When the effect 2 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the jackpot game effect (15R After the end of the jackpot 1, the next jackpot (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is executed. Then, when the jackpot 2 is executed, the content of the effect is switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

This production during the jackpot 2 is such that a plurality of consecutively executed jackpot games are continuously executed when ball entry information corresponding to the hit is included in the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is directed to In other words, the jackpot game production corresponding to the jackpot 1 is the normal jackpot game production (15R production), and based on the ball entry information of the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game, the content of the ending production is changed continuously. A plurality of jackpot games that are executed as a result are continuously executed.

By configuring in this way, the production (continuous jackpot production) in which a plurality of jackpot gaming machines are continuously executed can be set based on the reserved balls acquired during the jackpot game, so that the continuous jackpot production can be performed. Execution can be facilitated, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the player can play the jackpot game while expecting to shift to the continuous jackpot game effect.

88(B) to 89(B), the contents of the effect displayed between two big wins during the big win effect 2 (see FIG. 83(B)) will be described. FIG. 88(B) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first jackpot, and FIG. 89(A) shows that the first jackpot ends and the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 89(B) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen in the state of being won, and FIG. 89(B) is a diagram schematically showing the display screen in the state of winning the special symbol jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 88(B), in the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first big win, information for showing the number of rounds of this big win and the number of balls acquired during the big win is displayed in the main display area DM. (acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the special symbols start to change, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the ending display is continuously displayed, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player. In the round number display area DM2 for the game, a running round number display form DM3 indicating the number of rounds currently being executed and a confirmed round number display form DM4 indicating the fixed number of rounds that are confirmed to be executed are displayed during the jackpot. continue to be displayed in the same way. In addition, a small display area DN2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a pending execution area DN3, and a pending symbol display area DN4 are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 89(A), the second reserved design from the left in the reserved design display area DN4 (a reserved design with a circle marked with a 3 that is displayed in a variable manner one after another) wins the jackpot. It shows a state where

Then, when the special symbol jackpot is won (when the variable display of the reserved symbols marked with a circle with a 3 stops), as shown in FIG. A comment ``the jackpot is still going on'' for informing that a new jackpot is started is displayed, and the number of fixed rounds display mode DM4 is displayed so as to indicate the number of rounds of the second jackpot ``10''. The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". In addition, the third symbol combination "777" indicating that the player has won the jackpot is stop-displayed in the small display area DN2.

Although the contents of the effects executed in the 2nd effect during the big win have been described above, the same effect may be used in the 1st effect during the big win. That is, in the above-described jackpot middle production 1, since the production using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuous production, for example, during the final round of the first jackpot or the ending period after the final round, the jackpot When a new reserved ball containing ball entry information to be won is obtained, it is difficult to execute the performance during the jackpot so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-described effect 2 during the big win, the effect during the big win can be smoothly executed so as to straddle a plurality of big wins.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(A), the content of the above-described effect 3 during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 84(A) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect 3 during the big win. During this jackpot production 3, as shown in FIG. 84(A), when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of reserved balls is "4" (a state where new reserved balls cannot be obtained during the jackpot game). ), and when information on entering a winning ball is included in the reserved balls that have already been acquired, the effect during the jackpot can be set.

When the effect 3 during the jackpot is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the next jackpot game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) A jackpot game effect (25R effect) is executed in which the game content of the game is also integrated.

The performance 3 during the jackpot is a state in which it is not possible to acquire a new reserved ball during the jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is already possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is won continuously at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. It is a production that is executed in When the performance 3 during the jackpot is executed, the player can be immediately notified that the jackpot has been won in succession, and the player can be given a sense of security, and a new hold is made during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the player from overly expecting to win consecutive big wins by executing the performance 2 during the big win in a state in which the ball cannot be obtained.

As described above, in this control example, when the jackpot is won consecutively within a predetermined period (within the holding memory), the jackpot is designed to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are being continuously executed. A plurality of middle performances are prepared, and the middle-big-hit performances to be executed are set based on the number of special pattern reserved balls at the time when the previous big-hit game is executed and the determination result of the ball entry information stored in the reservation. are doing.

Furthermore, the plurality of mid-jackpot productions have different timings for informing the player of successive jackpot wins. As a result, the player can enjoy the jackpot game to the end while expecting to win consecutive jackpots.

In this control example, when a jackpot game is executed in a state in which there is a vacancy in the reserved memory number of special symbols (a state in which a new reserved memory is possible during the jackpot game), it corresponds to a jackpot of special symbols during the jackpot game. Even if the reserved pattern is reserved and stored, the performance is reserved and stored at the time of execution of the big winning game because the performance during the big winning can be executed to make it appear that a plurality of big winning games are continuously executed. Compared to the case of determining the performance during the big win based on the information, the performance during the big win is easily executed to make it appear that a plurality of big win games are continuously executed, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of the plurality of effects during the jackpot, the number of rounds to be executed in the previous jackpot game can be divided into a plurality of times and partially notified to the player, so that the effect during the jackpot this time is one time. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the performance is executed in the jackpot game or the performance is executed across a plurality of jackpot games. Therefore, the player can play while expecting that the big winning game will continue for a long time.

In this control example, during the special symbol variation period after the end of the jackpot game, the small display area DN2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, the pending execution area DN3, Although the configuration for displaying the reserved symbol display area DN4 on the third symbol display device 81 is used, other configurations may be used, for example, the conditions for executing the jackpot continuous production during the special symbol fluctuation period are established. If it is determined by the means that the conditions for executing the continuous jackpot performance are established, the variation display of the third symbol or the above-described reserved symbol is provided even during the special symbol variation period. It is preferable to execute a process that does not display the related information, or execute a process that displays the contents in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the contents (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the end timing of the first big win game and the start timing of the second big win game based on the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can make it harder to be

In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo-ending display, a pseudo-fluctuation display that fluctuates the pseudo-pattern imitating the third pattern, and a pseudo-stopping of the fluctuating pseudo-pattern in a combination corresponding to the big win. A pseudo-game executing means for executing a stop display and a pseudo-jackpot start display after the pseudo-stop display is provided, and pseudo-game execution means are provided so that a plurality of jackpots are executed while one jackpot game is being executed. You may comprise so that production may be performed. By configuring in this way, the special pattern (main pattern) displayed on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B at the time of winning the first big win is a special pattern (main pattern) corresponding to how many rounds of the jackpot game. ) can be made difficult for the player to grasp. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the production during the big win executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(B), another example of the effect 1 during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 84(B) is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the effect 1 during the big win. In this example, the content of the additional effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect with respect to the contents shown in FIG. The difference is in the presence or absence of prize winning information that indicates a win.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84(B), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning. , 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball containing winning ball entry information is acquired (the number of reserved balls becomes "2"), and the 10R effect 1 is performed. In the continuous jackpot performance, the performance indicating that the 10R performance 2 is executed is executed using the round number obtained by summing the round numbers corresponding to the jackpot 2. - 特許庁

By executing such a production, one additional production is executed so as to straddle multiple jackpots (one additional production is executed in the period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2) Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one big win. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 84(B), since the performance for 10R is executed as an additional performance that is executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots, the 10R performance 1 and the 10R performance 2 are executed. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83(A) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional effect can be shared.

Note that FIG. 83(A) or FIG. 84(B) shows an example of an additional effect, and is configured to execute an additional effect other than the contents illustrated above. Specifically, in addition to the 5R production using a period of 5 rounds, the 10R production using a period of 10 rounds, the 7R production using a period of 7 rounds and the 8 rounds production The 8R performance using the period is configured to be executable.

In this way, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as the additional effects, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds to be executed during one big win. While predicting how long (how many rounds) the current big win will continue, the game can be played with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, the game state set at the time when the production 1 during the jackpot executed corresponding to a single or multiple jackpots is completed, that is, the jackpot type (probability variable jackpot) executed last corresponding to the production 1 during the jackpot , normal jackpot) may be configured to vary the additional performance to be executed, for example, when it is determined that the game state set at the time when the performance 1 during the jackpot is completed is the probability variable state. , it is easy to set an additional performance (for example, 10R performance) corresponding to a long number of rounds as an additional performance executed at the beginning of the performance 1 during the big win, or at the time when the performance 1 during the big win is completed. It may be configured to execute an additional effect (for example, 7R effect) that is executed only when the set game state is the variable probability state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player predict both the number of rounds to be executed during the big win and the game state to be set after the end of the big win by the extra performance to be executed, and the performance effect is obtained. can increase

Returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. In this control example, when the game state becomes a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) advantageous to the player, a specific production (probability variable medium production or time saving medium production (hereinafter referred to as high probability medium production )) is executed. The period during which the high-probability middle production is executed is a period during which a predetermined production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, and whether or not the game state advantageous to the player ends based on the result of the battle production. is executed to notify the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-probability middle effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows that the flow of the high-probability production (continuous production) executed when the gaming state is in an advantageous state (probability variable state or time-saving state) is continuously executed until the jackpot is won. It is the timing chart which showed production (continuous production). As shown in FIG. 90, during the high-probability middle production (continuous production), the battle production is configured to be repeatedly executed. The battle production is a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which the production for notifying whether the advantageous state (probability variable state or time saving state) ends is executed in a period of one rotation of the special figure fluctuation (see FIGS. 93 to 96), The effect for changing the display mode when the battle ready-to-win is executed is composed of a pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) executed in a period corresponding to a plurality of rotations of the special figure variation.

Details of the effect will be described later, but in Battle Reach, the effect (attack effect) in which the HP value (continuous value) of the own character and the opponent character is reduced is executed multiple times (three times). When the HP value (continuous value) of becomes "0" (in the case of the defeat pattern battle reach), the condition for ending the advantageous state (won the jackpot where the advantageous state ends, or the number of times the special pattern fluctuates is set. When the HP value (continuous value) of the opponent character becomes "0" (in the case of the battle reach of the winning pattern), it indicates that a jackpot in which the advantageous state continues is won, When the mutual HP value (continuous value) does not become "0" (in the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern), it indicates that the high-probability middle production continues.

In addition, in the pre-battle effect, the effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuous value) of the opponent's character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured so that the effect mode is set based on the look-ahead result of the reserved symbols and the number of times the battle effect is set repeatedly, and based on the effect mode, a plurality of special symbol variations are performed. HP management using is executed.

FIG. 91(A) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a battle effect is started as a high-probability medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle production is started, first, the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is executed. In this pre-battle effect, an effect for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent in the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle effect, is executed.

As shown in FIG. 91(A), when the pre-battle effect is executed, a boy character DM11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area DM, and an opponent for selecting battle reach opponent candidates is displayed. A selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection sections DM13 to DM16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be battle reach opponents, and one of the selection sections is selected. Note that FIG. 91A shows a state in which the selection section DM13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Furthermore, an HP display area DM17 indicating the continuous value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four characters A to D is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area DM. The HP display area DM17 is composed of a display portion showing the HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display portion (DM18) showing the HP value numerically. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area DM17 is variably displayed so as to vary (decrease) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle production.

In the pre-battle effect, when an opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92(A) is displayed next, the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent is executed, and the HP display area DM17 selects and displays it. A display (a circle mark on the character A) for identifying the HP display corresponding to the opponent character is displayed. This allows the player to easily grasp the HP value of the opponent character currently selected.

Also, during this pre-battle effect, only the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (character DM11) is not decreased. As a result, until the Battle Reach is executed, as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, the HP value will not decrease, so it is expected that many effects of attacking the opponent will be executed. You can play while In addition, since the HP value of the player (character DM11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the HP value decreasing as a result of the effect being executed. can do.

It should be noted that the production mode of the pre-battle production is not limited to the contents described above. You may perform the production|presentation which increases the HP value of. In addition, in the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is reduced until it becomes "0", and the big hit (the variable state after the big win ends, or , a jackpot where a time saving state is given) may be executed.

In FIG. 92(A), since the character ADM13 was attacked by reducing the HP by "200" (main attack effect), the display portion DM18A corresponding to the character A in the HP display area DM17 is displayed in the main display area DM. It is variably displayed at "800" corresponding to the content of the presentation.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92(B), in addition to the production of the character DM11 making an attack (main attack production), the cat character DM20 appears and performs an additional attack (secondary attack production). is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the character ADM13 is attacked to reduce the HP by "230", and the display portion DM18C corresponding to the character C in the HP display area DM17 becomes the main display area DM. "770" is variably displayed corresponding to the content of the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), during this pre-battle production, the opponent may be changed in the middle, and if the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area DM18 is displayed (the character A is circled).

Here, a brief description will be given of a method for setting the HP value that is decreased by the attack effect. In this control example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-discrimination result (prefetch result) of the entering ball information that is stored pending, the result of the battle effect and the rough effect content (HP value Decrease value (100's place) and main attack effect) are determined. Then, with the aim of diversifying the types of effects for the effect contents (HP value reduction value and main attack effect) determined by the continuous value management means, the lottery result and the look-ahead result are determined by the effect setting means. It is configured such that detailed presentation contents (HP value decrease value (10's place) and secondary attack presentation) are determined without being affected.

Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management means is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased using the continuation value management means with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value). Configure.

Specifically, in FIG. 92(A) described above, an effect (main attack effect) for decreasing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the continuation value (HP value) is reduced by the effect setting means. This shows an example of the display when the content is set so that the value is not increased or decreased. As a pre-battle effect, a main attack effect (character DM11's attack effect) is executed to reduce the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADM13 by 200. there is

On the other hand, in FIG. 92(B) described above, an effect (main attack effect) in which the continuation value (HP value) is decreased by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the value of the continuation value (HP value) is reduced by 20 by the effect setting means. This shows an example of a display when a reduction effect (secondary attack effect) is set. A sub-attack effect (attack effect of the cat character DM20) is executed to reduce the continuous value (HP value) of the ADM 13 by 30, and in total, the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADM 13 is decreased by 230 as a pre-battle effect. is running.

By configuring in this way, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the number of effects managed by continuously increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value). It is possible to reduce the burden of control.

Further, when the opponent during one pre-battle effect is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continued from the previous HP value. In this way, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be the opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production, and then executing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-probability medium production. A series of productions can be executed without generating them.

In addition, during the pre-battle production, if the degree of decrease in HP of a plurality of opponent candidates is uneven, the player is made to watch the production while expecting that the battle reach will be executed with an opponent with a low HP value as much as possible. be able to.

After the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is completed, next, battle ready-to-win battles with specific opponents are executed. If the player wins this battle reach (the opponent's HP is set to "0"), it indicates that the player has won a big win in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, and the player is defeated (his own HP is set to "0"). If it becomes), it indicates that the player has won a game in which a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is set. In addition, when the battle ready-to-win is executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, the game ends in a draw (the HP of the game itself and the opponent does not become "0"), and the high-probability medium performance is continued.

This battle reach is when a jackpot is won during high probability (variable probability, short time), or when a predetermined condition is met during high probability (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the battle If the ready-to-reach production lottery is won), and if the result of the battle ready-to-win is a draw, the pre-battle production is performed again. In this case, all HP values of the opponent character are set to initial values. That is, since the pre-battle production is performed to reduce the HP value of the opponent character, for example, if the period during which the special symbol is not won during the probability change state continues for a long time, the pre-battle production In order to prevent the HP of the opponent character from becoming "0" at the beginning of the battle, it is necessary to make it difficult to execute the effect (attack effect) that reduces the HP of the opponent character, and there is a risk of lowering the effect of the pre-battle effect. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated even when a special symbol is won, and a "draw" is provided as a result of the battle reach. Since the HP value of is reset to the initial value and the pre-battle effect is resumed, the effect of the pre-battle effect decreases due to the execution of one pre-battle effect for a long period of time. can be resolved. In addition, by providing a "draw" as a result of the battle reach, even if an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed during the battle reach, the possibility of a "draw" can be left open.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 93(A) to 96(B), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during battle reach will be described. First, FIG. 93(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the start of battle reach. Here, the contents of the production of Battle Reach will be explained. In the battle reach of this control example, an effect is executed in which the attack of the player or the opponent is executed a total of three times, and the result is displayed according to the final HP value. There are three types of attacks: "strong attack", "medium attack", and "light attack", each of which is set to have a different HP value.

When the battle ready-to-win is started, the letters "battle start" and the letters "first time" indicating the number of times of the current battle of the battle ready-to-win are displayed above the main display area DM of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. be done. Below that, an HP gauge DM21 indicating the HP value of the player and an HP gauge DM22 indicating the HP value of the opponent are displayed. The HP gauge DM21 displays "1000" which is the upper limit value, and the HP gauge DM22 displays "500" which is the value decreased in the pre-battle effect.

A storage gauge DM23 is displayed below the HP gauge DM21. The accumulation gauge DM23 accumulates a value based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", a reversal production is executed and a production of winning the battle reach is executed. By enabling execution of this reversal performance, even if the performance in which the opponent side is superior is executed during the battle reach in which three battles are fought, the expectation of a big win can be made until the end.

A progress display area DM24 for indicating the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area DM, and the history of the attack effects during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93(B), the display contents when the first attack during battle reach is made by itself will be described. As shown in FIG. 93B, an effect is executed in which the player's own character (boy character) DM11 attacks (weakly attacks) the opponent's character DM15 in the main display area DM, and the value of the HP gauge DM22 changes to " 500" to "300". Then, in the progress display area DM24, a "round mark" indicating that the first battle was the attack of the player himself is displayed.

Following the first battle effect shown in FIG. 93(B), when the second battle effect is executed, the second battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(A). Here, in FIG. 94A, as the second battle effect, the opponent's character DM15 attacks, and the value of the HP gauge DM21, which indicates the continuous value (HP value) of the own character DM11, is "1000." ” to “700” and the value of the accumulation gauge DM23 is accumulated by half (50). Then, in the progress display area DM24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was an attack by the opponent is displayed.

Next, when the effect of the third battle (last battle) is executed, the effect of the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(B). Here, in FIG. 94(B), as the third battle effect, the player's own character (boy character) DM11 attacks (medium attack) the opponent's character DM15 in the main display area DM. The value of DM22 is decreased from "300" to "0", and it is reported that the current battle reach was a battle reach showing that the player won a jackpot in which a game state advantageous to the player is set. Then, in the small display area DN2, "777" is displayed as a combination display of the third symbol for indicating that the special symbol lottery of this time is a big win.

In addition to the battle reach (victory pattern) shown in FIG. 94(B), the battle reach in this control example is provided with a draw pattern and a defeat pattern as described above, and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If so, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95(A) is displayed instead of the effect for the third battle shown in FIG. 94(B). In the display example shown in FIG. 95(A), an effect in which the opponent's character DM15 attacks is executed as the effect for the third battle. In the case of a draw pattern battle reach, the value of the HP gauge DM21 of your character DM11 does not decrease to 0 (reduces to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuous value (HP value) of yourself and the opponent becoming 0. do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 95(A), even if the final attack (third attack) of Battle Reach is the opponent's attack, provide a draw pattern in which the continuation value (HP value) of the player does not decrease to 0. , the player can have expectations until the end of the battle reach. In FIG. 95(A), the pattern in which the opponent makes the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is told that the current battle reach is either a defeat or a draw. I exemplified the production that seems to be a pattern, but in addition to that, there is a pattern in which the player makes the third attack as a battle reach of the tie pattern. An effect that makes the player think that it is one of the draw patterns is also executed. In this case, when the third attack is made, the player will not be defeated in this battle reach, so the player can be relieved.

Further, when the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, instead of the third battle effect shown in FIG. 94B, the effect shown in FIG. 95B is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(B), as the third battle effect, the opponent's character DM15 attacks. Battle reach ends without accumulating to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96A, even if the value of the HP gauge DM21 of the own character DM11 has decreased to 0, if the value of the accumulation gauge DM23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), the main The characters "Resurrection" are displayed in the upper center of the display area DM, the player's own character DM11 stands up, and as shown in FIG.

As described above, the battle reach effect in this control example is such that the result of the effect varies depending on the value of the accumulation gauge DM23 in addition to the decrease in the HP gauge DM21 of the own character DM11 and the HP gauge DM22 of the opponent character DM15. Because it is structured, you can expect a big hit until the end of the battle reach.

In addition, in the first control example, the content of the pre-battle production (production mode) is based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production. Configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 is configured to be variable.

Here, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 will be described with reference to FIG. 97(A) to (D) show the HP display area DM17 that is variably set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbols when the battle effect is set. It is the figure which showed the display mode.

FIG. 97(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area DM17, and is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the HP display area DM17 in a pattern in which the opponent's character is not replaced during the battle effect. is. As shown in FIG. 97(A), in the HP display area DM17, only the characters of the same opponent (character ADM13) have different continuous values (HP values) (four levels from "700" to "1000"). is displayed. When such an HP display area DM17 is displayed, the character ADM13 is always set as the opponent for the pre-battle effect, and the character ADM13 is attacked in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92A). , an effect is executed in which all HP values displayed in the HP display area DM17 are reduced.

By using such a display mode, since a plurality of HP values are reduced at once, the effect to be executed can be flashy. In addition, even if the character ADM13 is the same, since the initial value of the continuous value (HP value) is different, it is expected that the character ADM13 with a low continuous value (HP value) will be selected when the battle reach is developed. A game can be played while Further, by making the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) different for the same character ADM13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for a big win for the same character ADM13. The types of image data for displaying a character can be reduced compared to the case where a different partner character is set for each time.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97(B) shows a display mode in which the characters A to D are displayed in a different order than the display mode of the normal HP display area DM17 (see FIG. 91). It is a schematic diagram shown. When such a display mode is used, for example, in the case where the degree of selection as an opponent character during battle production is configured to vary depending on the position displayed in the HP display area DM17, an opponent character who is likely to be selected during battle production is displayed. Characters can be changed. Furthermore, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area DM17 may be changed even while the battle effect is being executed.

FIG. 97C is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the opponent character is displayed, which is different from the normal display mode of the HP display area DM17 (see FIG. 91). As shown in FIG. 97(C), in this display mode in which opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character E and F are displayed as selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect to win the battle reach in the current battle presentation.

FIG. 97D is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced compared to the normal display mode of the HP display area DM17 (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, in order to reduce the options of the opponent character to be selected in the pre-battle production, the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character when the battle reach is developed is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle production). can be made easier.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 is changed based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the reserved storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbols when the battle effect is set. By variably setting, the variation of the battle production is increased and the production effect is enhanced. It may be configured to

For example, when the special opponent character E described above in FIG. 97(C) is selected as an opponent for battle reach, it is preferable that the battle reach of the defeat pattern is not executed. Thus, in addition to the pre-battle effect of reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. Also, in the display mode shown in FIG. 97(A), when the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A, the battle reach of the defeat pattern is performed during the current battle production period at the timing when the battle production is executed. is not executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, if the reservation memory information (entering ball information) of the special pattern at the time of setting the battle effect contains entering ball information for executing the battle reach of the winning pattern, the battle reach of the winning pattern is selected. may be displayed in a display mode including a specific opponent character for which is executed.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area DM17 may be variably set based on the operation result of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, the normal display mode of the HP display area DM17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. It is preferable to change the display mode of the HP display area DM17 to, for example, the display modes described above with reference to FIGS.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97A to 97D, the length of the HP gauge is configured to be constant even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous value (HP value) is reduced by “100”, the decrease rate of the HP value gauge is variably displayed according to the set continuous value (HP value). The HP gauge may be displayed with a length corresponding to the set continuous value (HP value) without being limited to such a display mode. In addition, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuous value (HP value) from the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is configured to vary according to the length of the HP gauge. You can

By configuring as described above, even if the battle effect is repeatedly executed for the player, the effect mode can be changed, and the player quickly gets tired of the effect contents. It can be suppressed. In addition, in this control example, the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the production mode of the pre-battle production based on the reservation storage information (entering ball information) of the special symbol at the time of setting the battle production (at the time of setting the production before the battle) is configured to be variably set, but the effect mode may be variably set using other conditions, for example, the first game state (for example, the probability variable state ) and a second game state (for example, time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state at the time of setting the battle production (at the time of setting the production before the battle) is the second game state. The effect mode may be set based on the result of determining whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, or ball entry information retained and stored at the time of setting the battle effect (at the time of setting the pre-battle effect). is determined, and as a result of the determination, an effect mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is entering ball information indicating that the game state is to shift from the first game state to the second game state. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101, the suggestive effect, which is the effect executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This suggestive effect is a game that a specific effect for showing the high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variation of the special symbol. It is a production for suggesting to the person in advance, and is a production that consists of a premonition production in the first half part and a countdown production in the second half part.

First, with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 98(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is started, and FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect, which is the second half part, is started, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

As shown in FIG. 98(A), when the suggestive effect is started, the predictive effect is executed in the sub display area DS. In the example shown in FIG. 98A, a dynamic effect is executed in which a character DC1 imitating a "car" advances from left to right, and the character DC1 reaches an arrival point DC3 where characters "goal" are displayed. By arriving at , the production is executed so as to switch to the countdown production.

Either a first route DC2A indicating a straight route or a second route DC2B indicating a meandering route is set as the movement route for the character DC1 to move to the arrival point DC3. In the example shown in FIG. 98A, the second route DC2B is selected, and a dynamic effect is executed in which the character DC1 moves along a meandering route.

Here, a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 100, but in the first control example, the start timing of the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, can be selected from a plurality of points. Since the period during which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the path of the character DC1 is selected according to the length of the period during which the precursor effect is executed. Thereby, when the portent effect is executed, the timing at which the countdown effect is started can be visually grasped.

In addition, in FIG. 98(A), an effect indicating the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used as the portent effect, but other effects may be used as the portent effect. It is also possible to use an effect suggesting to the player that the countdown effect is to be performed, an effect suggesting the period of the countdown effect, or an effect suggesting the type of specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect. In other words, it is sufficient if the effect is to inform in advance of the information regarding the effect to be executed in the future as the suggestive effect.

When the sign effect ends, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a comment "Start countdown" is displayed above the main display area DM, and in the subdisplay area DS, the character DC1 reaches the arrival point DC3 and counts down. A character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area DC4. As a result, it is possible to specifically notify the player that the current countdown effect is an effect starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed.

Although the example shown in FIG. 98B shows a countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds, in the first control example, another countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. It also has a countdown effect, and is set so that the longer the countdown period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. By configuring in this way, during the sign effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, while predicting the timing at which the countdown effect will start and the current variation pattern, the countdown effect with a long countdown period is executed. can be expected.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98(B) ends, as shown in FIG. 99, the countdown display area DC4 of the sub-display area DS displays "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended, and the main display. In the area DM, an operation effect is executed in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, the flow of setting the precursor effect and the countdown effect to be executed as the suggestive effect of the first control example will be described. In this first control example, a suggestive effect is executed to notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the second half of the suggestive effect, the target specific effect execution timing is executed (see FIG. 98(B)) to accurately (concretely) notify the performance (see FIG. 98(B)). (See FIG. 98(A)) is executed.

Here, conventionally, in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggested effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that a specific effect will be executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. A configuration that executes for a predetermined period of time has been used. If the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is predetermined in this way, the execution period overlaps with other effects that are executed in the variable effect (for example, the effect that suggests a higher degree of expectation for winning than the suggestive effect). In some cases, prohibition processing was performed to prevent the suggestive effect from being executed. Also, there is a problem that the suggestive effect cannot be executed for the specific effect executed at the timing when the period for executing the suggestive effect cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if a plurality of suggestive effect data with different predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases and the process for setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately so that the period during which the suggestive effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the first half part, the omen The start timing of the production) can be set from a plurality of points.

By configuring in this way, the suggestive effect can be executed without presetting the period during which it is executed. In addition, since the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set from multiple points, for example, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, when the jackpot is won, It is possible to set the period during which the suggestive effect is executed longer) or to change the start timing of the suggestive effect according to the execution timing of other effects. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestive effect.

FIG. 100(A) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing the suggestive effect in the variable effect in which the variable time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100(A), the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the specific effect "PUSH effect" is executed 33 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. is set to Then, a countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of variation) is set so that the countdown performance (execution period of 3 seconds) ends at the timing (33 seconds after the start of variation) at which the specific performance is executed. Then, since the variation this time is a case of winning a jackpot, the timing (timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation) that can set a longer suggestive effect period from among the multiple start timings is selected as the start timing of the suggestive effect. set as

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100(A), after 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the precursor effect (20 seconds of the effect period) is executed (30 seconds after the start of the change), and then the countdown effect (3 seconds of the effect period ) is executed. Then, a specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. It should be noted that, if the current variation does not win the jackpot, the timing at which the suggested presentation period is shortened (the timing after 20 seconds from the start of the variation) is set as the start timing of the suggested presentation (the start timing of the omen presentation). .

In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variable effect, by using the configuration of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol, The length of the suggestive presentation period can be varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols, and the player can be made aware of the length of the presentation period. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, even if the length of the suggestive effect period is variable, the countdown effect period, which is the second half of the suggestive effect, that is, the period during which the effect that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific effect is , since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the suggestive effect.

That is, when the length of the suggestive effect period is variable, only the period during which the premonitory effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is executed is variable. This foreshadowing effect directly or indirectly suggests that a specific effect will be executed as described above, and even if the length of the effecting period is changed, it will not be executed in the second half of the suggestive effect. A player can be surely notified of the timing at which the specific performance is executed by the countdown performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(B), the flow of the suggestive effect executed in the variable effect B different from the variable effect A described above with reference to FIG. 100(A) will be described. FIG. 100(B) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects executed in the variable effect B. FIG.

The variable performance B shown in FIG. 100(B) is different from the variable performance A described above, and is a variable performance in which a plurality of specific performances that can be targeted for suggestive performance are set. A method of setting the variable effect executed in the variable effect B will be described, centering on the differences from the variable effect A described above. The variable performance B is set with a timing at which a suggestive performance can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the variation, and a timing at which the specific performance can be executed 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variation is set.

In the variation effect B, as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation, there is a "cut-in effect" (not shown) in which a boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81. , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The two specific performances are set with the same degree of expectation for big win, and the specific performance corresponding to the set suggestive performance is executed.

In the variable production shown in FIG. 100(B), similarly to FIG. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the timing of starting the suggestion performance is set to 10 seconds after the start of the variation, and the specific performance is set to "PUSH performance" which is executed 40 seconds after the start of the variation. are doing.

More specifically, the above-described suggestive effect is the pattern with the highest expected degree of jackpot in descending order of the expected degree of jackpot, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggested effect, A pattern that sets "PUSH effect" as a specific effect, a pattern that sets the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and a pattern that sets the "cut-in effect" as the specific effect, the timing 17 seconds after the start of the change. is set as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is set corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big hit in the order of the pattern in which the "cut-in effect" is set as the specific effect.

Furthermore, in the variable production B shown in FIG. 100 (B), the start timing of the countdown production (the length of the countdown period) can be varied according to the length of the set suggestive production period. When a performance pattern with a high expectation of a big hit is set, the start timing of the countdown performance is set 7 seconds before the execution of the specific performance, and immediately after the start of the countdown performance, the sub of the third pattern display device 81. A countdown effect is executed in which the character "7" is displayed in the countdown display area DC4 (see FIG. 98(B)) of the display area DS.

In addition, in the first control example, it is possible to execute suggestive effects across a plurality of variable effects. The flow of suggestive effects that are executed across a plurality of variable effects will be described with reference to FIG. 101 . FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the production when the suggestive production is set across the variable production corresponding to two consecutive special symbol fluctuations.

As shown in FIG. 101, in this control example, when a new pending memory is acquired during the execution of the variable effect, the information contained in the newly acquired pending memory (results of determination of success or failure, variation patterns, etc.) is determined in advance. (Read ahead), and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the corresponding reserved memory.

Specifically, the fluctuation of the variable production C (variation time 30 seconds) is started in a state where there is no pending memory, and at the timing after 15 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation production C is 15 seconds), the second When a ball enters the 1st ball entrance 64 or the 2nd ball entrance 140 and acquires a new reserved memory (a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable performance), the information contained in the new reserved memory is used. , determines whether or not to execute a suggestive effect.

Here, when it is determined that the next variable performance is the variable performance for executing the suggestive performance, it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the current variable performance is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing when the new reserved memory is acquired is the timing when the remaining period of the variable effect C is 15 seconds, it is determined that the remaining period of the current variable effect is longer than or equal to the predetermined period. Set the start timing of the suggestion production at a predetermined timing (timing 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) in the fluctuation production, and in the next fluctuation production (variation production D), a specific production (specific A countdown effect (effect period of 3 seconds) is set for the effect C).

As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestive effect and the end timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed variable effects (variable effects C, D), the variable effect C When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the premonitory production, which is the first half of the suggestive production, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the fluctuation production C ends. Then, during the period (2 seconds) from the start timing of the fluctuation of the variable production D to the execution of the countdown production, the precursor production is continuously executed, and after that (2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation production D), the countdown production is executed. After being executed for 3 seconds, the privilege effect C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since it is possible to execute the suggestive effect in the variable effect that is executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the beginning of the variable effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the variation ), it is possible to execute the suggestive effect also for the specific effect executed in . Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of suggestive presentation.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 101, if the timing at which the new reserved memory is acquired is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) of the remaining period of the variable effect C (for example, the timing of the additional winning B shown in FIG. 101) case), it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggestive performance for the specific performance C of the variable performance D, so that the suggestive performance for the specific performance C is not set.

In the above example, based on the timing of the additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new reserved memory), it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect for the specific effect to be executed in the next and subsequent variable effects. Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of additional winning (the timing of acquiring a new reserved memory), the timing of executing the specific effect in the next and subsequent variable effects is determined. It may be configured to be variable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the setting of suggestive effects that are executed across a plurality of variable effects, and to enhance the effect of effects.

In addition, in FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestive effect executed across a plurality of variable effects, the flow of the suggested effect when the condition for starting the next variable effect is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect has been described. It is also possible to execute a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable effects under other conditions.

For example, in a state where the condition for starting the next variable performance is satisfied, when the condition for starting the next variable performance is satisfied, any timing in the next variable performance is set as the execution timing of the specific performance, and the current The timing of executing the suggestive effect may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is executed.

In this case, the performance to be executed in the variable performance currently being executed and the details of the performance to be executed during the next variable performance are discriminated, and the result of the determination and the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the next variable performance. It is preferable to configure so as to set the start timing of the suggestive effect based on the result. By configuring in this way, for example, when a continuous effect is set as a series of the currently changing variable effect and the next variable effect, a suggestive effect is provided for the next variable effect. If it is set to execute a special performance at the end timing of the currently fluctuating variable performance without execution, that is, at the start timing of the next variable performance, the suggestive performance within the next variable performance period. is set, and if there is no factor that prohibits the setting of the suggestive performance in the currently fluctuating variable performance and the next variable performance, the remaining period of the currently fluctuating variable performance or the next fluctuation The start timing of the suggestive effect can be set to any of the periods of the effect.

In addition, when the conditions for starting the next (one after another) variable performance are met, it is determined whether the variable performance is a variable performance corresponding to winning a jackpot, and the start timing of the suggestive performance is being executed based on the determination result. or the execution period of the next (one after another) variable performance. This makes it possible to easily set a suggestive performance period longer than one variable performance period.

In addition, in the first control example, the suggestive effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestive effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it is preferable to set a precursor period during which a common precursor effect is executed and a countdown period during which a countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of a plurality of specific effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while predicting how many specific effects the suggestive effects have been executed for, thereby enhancing the effects of effects.

In addition, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect while the portent effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the suggestive effect was executed for the specific effect to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the expectation degree suggesting effect, which is the effect executed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state, will be described. This expectation level suggesting effect includes the expectation level display effect of displaying a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of informing the winning expectation level of the jackpot in stages, and the display mode of the expectation level display mode being variable (the expectation level of winning the jackpot). It is an effect composed of an expectation level increasing effect for changing to a high display mode).

First, with reference to FIG. 102(A), the degree of expectation display mode used for the degree of expectation suggesting effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the degree-of-expectation display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102A, in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 are displayed.

The expectation level display mode DK1 indicates the jackpot expectation level by using the display during execution that shows information corresponding to the variable effect being executed, and in FIG. ” is displayed. Although the details will be described later, this expectation degree display mode DK1 is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variable effect, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3. be.

The expectation degree display mode DK2 indicates the degree of expectation for a big win using a character appearing during the variable presentation, and "LV1" indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed in FIG. 102(A). The degree of expectation display mode DK2 is displayed 24 seconds after the variable effect is started, although the details will be described later.

Expectation degree display mode DK3 indicates the degree of expectation for big hit by using dialogue display indicating the content of variable effect and progress information, and in FIG. 102 (A), "LV2" indicating the degree of expectation for big hit is displayed It is The degree of expectation display mode DK3 is displayed 36 seconds after the variable effect is started, although the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (A), although the LV display showing each expectation level display mode in stages is shown, it is sufficient if it is a mode that can notify the jackpot expectation level in stages, for example, corresponding to the jackpot expectation level It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, and the magnitude of the sound volume and the amount of light to be output are varied step by step. Also, a configuration may be used in which the presentation mode indicating the growth process or the transformation process is changed step by step toward the final mode.

In addition, regarding the display during execution displayed in the degree-of-expectation display mode DK1, for example, the display mode of the pending symbol display displayed in the first display area DS1 of the sub-display area DS is configured to continue to be displayed. good too. As a result, when an effect for changing the display mode of the reserved pattern (reserved pattern advance notice effect) is executed while the reserved pattern is being displayed, the changed display mode of the reserved pattern can be continuously used as a display during execution. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the reserved symbol display.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation level display effect in which the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 shown in FIG. ) is executed (see FIG. 102(B)).

As shown in FIG. 102(B), when the expectation increase (addition) effect is executed, first, as the expectation setting effect, a display having selection areas DK4A to DK4C in which different increase (addition) values are displayed. A mode (roulette) DK4 is rotated and displayed, and when the roulette DK4 stops, an increase (addition) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow DK5 is set.

This increase (addition) value indicates a variable amount for varying the display mode of each expectation display mode displayed during the expectation suggesting effect, and when "1UP" is set as the increase (addition) value means that, for any one of the respective expectation level display modes, an effect is executed in which the jackpot expectation level is changed step by step to a display mode one higher than the currently displayed display mode. showing.

By configuring in this way, by executing the expectation level increase (additional) effect, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation level display mode displayed during the current expectation level suggesting effect. . Therefore, the player can enjoy the expectation level increase (addition) effect while expecting that the expectation level of the expectation level display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the already high jackpot expectation level is displayed will further change (increase). can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) production, each expectation that is variable (increases) while the current expectation increase (addition) production is being executed It is configured such that a value obtained by adding up the variable amount of the display mode is set. As a result, for example, when "3UP" is set as an increase (addition) value, whether the display mode of one expectation level display mode is variable by three levels, or each of the three expectation level display modes is variable by one level It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the expectation-suggesting effect at an early stage, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

next. With reference to FIG. 103(A), description will be given of the effect content when "3UP" is set as the increase (addition) value. FIG. 103A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the display mode of each expectation level display mode is varied (raised) using a set increase (addition) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103(A), "3UP" is set as an increase (addition), and each of the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 displayed in the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81 is The display is variably displayed one step at a time. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation level display mode DK1 is changed from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation level display mode DK2 is changed from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation level display mode DK3 is changed. is changed from "LV2" to "LV3".

Note that FIG. 103A described above exemplifies a pattern in which the display modes of all the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 are varied at the same time. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, of the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) production, the increase (addition ) value is displayed on the display screen as a remaining increase (addition). By configuring in this way, it is possible to specifically predict the performance result based on the remaining increase (addition) value displayed on the display screen and the expectation level display mode in which the display mode is not changed. You can increase the effect. Furthermore, it may be configured to execute the expectation level increasing (additional) effect so as to vary the display mode a plurality of times with different timings for the same expectation level display mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player.

Further, in this control example, each of the plurality of expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 displayed at different timings in one variable effect is continuously displayed, so that the display as shown in FIG. 103(A) Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period in which each of the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 is displayed at the same time. , at least some display timings may be set at the same time.

Furthermore, in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation display mode for which the increase (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103(B)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the comment "I will raise the level of the boy" suggesting the desired degree of expectation display mode is displayed above the main display area DM. By displaying this comment, the player can grasp what kind of expectation level display mode is the target of the current expectation level suggesting performance, and can enjoy the game while predicting the future progress of the performance. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of the degree-of-expectation display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the degree-of-expectation display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), the expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 showing the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in stages are displayed with different timings. Specifically, the expectation level display mode DK1 (expectation level 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the expectation level display mode DK2 (expectation level 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the fluctuation start, and the expectation level display Aspect DK3 (expectation level 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

Then, an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) for increasing (adding) the display mode of each of the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, or 29 seconds from the start of fluctuation. . Here, the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is configured so that the expectation level display mode to be targeted for increasing the expectation level is different depending on the timing of display (execution). It is configured so that the expectation degree display mode displayed after execution of the degree increase effect (expectation degree added display) is targeted.

Specifically, if the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, all of the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 are targeted, and the expectation level rises 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation If the production (expectation level added display) is displayed, the expectation level display modes DK2 and DK3 are targeted, and if the expectation level increase production (expectation level added display) is displayed 29 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, An effect targeting only the display mode DK3 is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect content of the expectation level increasing effect, which is the same effect mode, simply by changing the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation level increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation level display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation level notified by the expectation level increase effect increases the expectation level of which expectation level display mode. It is possible to play the game while expecting the

In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is the expectation level display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is executed may be targeted, or the expectation degree display mode described above may be used as a target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which display mode of the expectation level display mode will be changed (whether the expectation level will increase) by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level addition display), a selection means that allows the player to select at least one of a plurality of expectation level display modes, and an expectation level selected by the selection means. A target determination means for determining whether the degree display mode is an object whose display mode is to be changed by an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display), and the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is an expectation level increase effect ( a variable control means for varying the display mode by means of an expectation level increasing effect (expectation level added display) when the object determination means determines that the object is an object whose display mode is to be changed by the expectation level added display). Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a player-participation type effect, and to make the player participate in the game willingly.

In this case, for example, a suggestion notification suggesting an expectation level display mode to be subjected to an expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display) is provided during a period prior to the period in which the player selects the expectation level display mode by means of the selection means. It is preferable to provide means for notifying the suggestion to be executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the target range to be selected by the selection means for the player, and increase the probability that the expectation level increasing effect (expectation level increasing display) is executed.

Further, when the expectation level display mode selected by the selection means is determined by the target determination means not to be subject to change in the display mode by the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display), It is preferable to provide an effect switching means for executing a different effect using the increase (additional) value set in the expectation level increase effect (expectation level addition display). As a result, the increased (additional) value that has already been displayed on the display screen can be eliminated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As the above-mentioned different effects, for example, effects for informing the player in advance of the contents of the winning information stored in reserve, and values accumulated by the player to obtain benefits (for example, game level, experience, etc.) It may be a production that is advantageous to the player, such as a production for increasing the value), or a production that is disadvantageous to the player, such as a production that changes the production mode so that the expectation level of the expectation display mode is lowered (expectation level lowering production). A performance is fine.

In addition, there is provided a means configured to vary the display mode of the performance switched by the performance switching means in correspondence with the increase (addition) value set in the expectation level increase performance (expectation level addition display). Also good. Furthermore, if the player does not select the expectation degree increasing mode by the selection means, the non-target expectation level display mode may be automatically selected. may be automatically selected. In addition, in the case where the target expectation level display mode is automatically selected, an effect is executed in which it is more advantageous for the player to select the non-target expectation level display mode by the selection means. good to do As a result, the player can actively select the degree-of-expectation display mode by means of the selection means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 113, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

The setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 includes a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first random number counter C1 used for selecting the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). Hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of stop in the special symbol, variation type counter CS1 used to select the variation pattern, initial value setting of the first random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning to the second ball entrance 140. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is provided. As described above, in this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls are provided for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140 . For this reason, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is changed to a special value. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, and when a ball wins in any of the second ball entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. After that, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, the oldest counter value in terms of time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processes are executed for the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 .

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 during a period in which the special symbol 1 cannot be drawn, such as during the variable display of the special symbols or during the jackpot game. When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the mouth is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball. It is stored in the storage area 203B. In addition, when the number of corresponding reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in this control example) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and only prize balls (three prize balls in this embodiment) is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

In this control example, the upper limit of the number of held balls is four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140. 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). In addition, the upper limit of the number of held balls may be different between the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, or the upper limit may not be set. Furthermore, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 so that only one of them can store a reserved ball.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 238. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is specified in the first winning random number table 202A (see FIG. 106A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number for the big winning specified in the first winning random number table 202A, it is determined as the special symbol big winning.

Here, the first winning random number table 202A will be described with reference to FIG. 106(A). The first winning random number table 202A is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each game state are set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), when the gaming state is a low probability gaming state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is "7", and if it is "7", it is determined to be a big win. Also, when the game state is the high probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of "5 to 9". If it is within the range of "5 to 9", it is determined as a jackpot.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-238. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202A. Among the total number of random numbers of 239, the total number of random number numbers that will result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of special symbols, there are five values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202A. Among the total number of random numbers of 239, the total number of random number numbers that will be a big hit is 10, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/47.8".

Returning to FIG. 113, the description continues. The value of the first win type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol results in a big win, one of the big wins A to K is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the first win type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107). A jackpot type is selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the first winning type selection table 202C will be described. As shown in FIG. 107, in this first hit type selection table 202C, a jackpot type to be selected is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Jackpot A" is defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, the "jackpot A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 200 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 20 random values select "jackpot A". ' is 10%.

In addition, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 79", and "jackpot B" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state with special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is smaller than that of the "jackpot A", but the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. is. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 random numbers select "jackpot B". ' is 30%.

The corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 114" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the time-saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the jackpot, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers select "jackpot C". ' is 17.5%.

In addition, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "115 to 164", "jackpot D" is defined in correspondence. . This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers select "jackpot D". ' is 25%.

Then, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", and the "jackpot E" is defined in correspondence. . In this "jackpot E", when the number of rounds is 5 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state and not a time-saving state (in the case of a normal state), the game state after the jackpot ends is the normal state. is set, and when the game state at the time of winning the big win is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), the time saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the end of the big win. Of the 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 35 random numbers select "jackpot E". ' is 17.5%.

Next, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special figure 2), as in the case of the special figure 2 described above, the "jackpot F ” to “jackpot K” are selected. Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1 (First win type) is set so that the ratio of selecting a jackpot (“jackpot F”) with a round number of 15 rounds is high (selection ratio is 80%). As a result, when winning the special pattern jackpot, the jackpot that allows the player to acquire a large amount of balls in one jackpot is higher when winning the jackpot with the special pattern 2 than with the special pattern 1. The degree of advantage of the player can be made different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

On the other hand, when the corresponding pattern type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding design type is special figure 1 may be selected. Specifically, when "jackpot I" to "jackpot K" are selected, 2 rounds less than 5 rounds, which is the smallest number of rounds among the jackpot types selected in the case of special figure 1 set.

In addition, when "jackpot H", "jackpot J", and "jackpot K", which are jackpot types to which a time-saving state is provided, are selected as the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the corresponding symbol type is a special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times (number of times of time reduction) set when the time reduction state is given as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (100 times) less than the number of times ( 50 times or 25 times) is set.

In this way, when the special figure 1 lottery wins and when the special figure 2 lottery wins the jackpot, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed (the number of rounds) and the jackpot game are set after the end. By making the game states different from each other, the game can be made complicated, and it is possible to prevent the player from always being given an excessive privilege.

Furthermore, since the game state to be set after the end of the big win is configured to be different based on the game state at the time of winning the big win, the set game state can be consciously set in the game aiming for the special symbol big win. I will play games while doing it. Specifically, even in a gaming state in which a jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends in the case of the time saving state and the normal state Differently, a game state is set that is more advantageous to the player in the time-saving state. As a result, the game can be played while strongly anticipating winning a special symbol jackpot during a specific period (during time saving).

In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the ratio of setting the high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot ends is the same. Although the first winning type selection table 202C is defined as above, the rate at which the high probability state is set may be varied without being limited to this. In addition, by selecting a jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202C and passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot, a probability variable state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot ends. In the gaming machine, in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 and the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area It may be configured to vary the easiness of application. As a result, it is possible to further differentiate the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbols won in the jackpot.

Furthermore, as a method of differentiating the privilege given to the player according to the special symbol that has won the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable prize winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) are provided and executed so that balls can win prizes during the jackpot game. The variable prize winning device 65 that allows the ball to win a prize during the jackpot game may be configured differently depending on the jackpot. In this case, the ease of winning the ball to the variable winning device 65, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins, and the end condition (number of entering balls and time limit) to end one opening operation should be different. As a result, it is possible to further differentiate the benefits given to the player depending on the special symbols won in the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description continues. The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the ready-to-win occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before or after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202D (see FIGS. 108 and 109) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202D (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In this variation pattern selection table 202D, a plurality of variation pattern tables are set according to the game state, and variation pattern tables are set for each result of win/fail determination. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126) is performed, and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 66, 67 where the ball is left or right (Hereinafter referred to as a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67) is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C of the RAM203.

The value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202B (see FIG. 106(B)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number that becomes a hit defined in the second winning random number table 202B matches, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second winning random number table 202B will be described with reference to FIG. 106(B).

FIG. 106B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202B. In the second symbol random number table 202B, when the normal symbol probability is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random numbers that are normal symbol hits, and the range is "5 to 6". there is Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of winning random numbers is two.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 140A associated with the second ball entrance 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". .

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140A associated with the second ball entrance 140 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbols is high, the variable display time becomes very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of the normal symbols is low, and furthermore, the open period of the electric accessory 140A is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 second x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 140 . In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 140A is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The details will be described later with reference to the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the normal symbol state (low probability or high probability ), the variable display time of the normal design is determined, and depending on the state of the normal design (low probability or high probability) at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal design stops, it is granted when the normal design is won. The content of the privilege to be held, that is, the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A is determined.

In other words, when the fluctuation of the normal design is started during the high probability of the normal design (during the time saving state), a short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the normal during the short fluctuation When the state of the pattern shifts to the low probability state (shifts from the time saving state to the normal state), the electric accessory 140A is the normal pattern even if the normal pattern indicating the win is stopped after the short fluctuation is finished. The opening operation (for example, "0.2 seconds x 1 time") is performed during a low probability of (during normal state).

With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of the special symbols and the variation of the normal symbols are executed separately and independently, is based on the game state that can be varied according to the lottery result of the special symbols and the number of lotteries. In the case where the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the privilege content at the time of winning are determined, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined based on the game state at the time of the lottery of the normal pattern, and the privilege contents at the time of winning the normal pattern can be determined based on the game state when the fluctuation of the normal symbols stops (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A). occurrence can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the normal symbol variation control is not limited to the contents of the above-described control example, and other controls may be used. The content of the privilege (the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) may be set. In addition, only when the normal pattern lottery and normal pattern fluctuation stop (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) are in the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), the benefits at the time of winning the normal pattern (Details of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) may set a privilege (for example, "1 second x 2 times") that is advantageous to the player. Only when both (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A) are in the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the privilege at the time of winning the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "0.2 seconds × 1 time”) may be set.

In addition, it may be configured to switch and execute a plurality of setting methods described above. And when the variation of the normal symbols stops (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 140A), both are in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbols. , During the time saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, a combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the variable state It may be configured to set a combination in which an advantageous privilege is given to the player when . By constructing in this way, it is possible to further set advantages and disadvantages in the high-probability state of normal symbols, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(A), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202A, a second winning random number table 202B, and a first winning type selection table 202C as part of the fixed value data. , variation pattern selection table 202D, jackpot transition setting table 202E, and state transition table 202F are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202A (see FIG. 106A) is, as described above, a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1 is stored. As described above, the second winning random number table 202B (see FIG. 106B) is a data table that stores the winning judgment value of the second winning random number counter C4. The first hit type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type. It is defined in association with the type. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of the various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation pattern selection table 202D is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Details of this variation pattern selection table 202D will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG.

FIG. 108(A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202D in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108(A), the variation pattern selection table 202D in the first control example is a variation pattern table for big win 202D1 used for selecting a variation pattern when winning a big win regardless of the gaming state. , The game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), and a (normal) variation pattern table 202D2 for loss used to select a variation pattern when winning a loss. And, in a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) other than the normal state, a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3 used for selecting a variation pattern when winning a loss, and a lottery of special symbols It is composed of a special variation pattern table 202D4 used to select a variation pattern when a special condition is established regardless of the result.

First, with reference to FIG. 108(B), details of the big winning variation pattern table 202D1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(B), in the big hit variation pattern table 202D1, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(B), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 50" in association with various types of normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds, and "50 to 179" In the range of , various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds are associated and defined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198" with various types of special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds. ing. In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol wins a jackpot, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the variation pattern, and a command indicating this variation pattern is issued. By transmitting to the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 executes a variation effect corresponding to the variation time.

As shown in FIG. 108(B), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the big hit variation pattern table 202D1 is 60 seconds (selection rate is about 55%), 30 seconds (selection rate is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection rate is about 20%). This is related to the specified contents of the variation pattern table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is lost, which will be described later, and the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit By the ratio and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation when the specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In addition, in this control example, regardless of the jackpot type won, it is configured to use the jackpot variation pattern table 202D1, but it is not limited to this. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicating . In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot selects a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. It should be configured so that it is easy to As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(C), details of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202D2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(C), the outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202D2 includes the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "completely out" and "common reach", and the variation pattern. are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(C), the stop type is "complete failure", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", and the fluctuation time is 7 seconds. The range of "99 to 198" is defined in association with a long fluctuation time of 10 seconds. When "Completely Missing" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without entering the ready-to-win state.

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and the normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "149 to 197". , various types of super reach with a variable time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and various types of special reach with a variable time of 90 seconds are associated with the range of "198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(D), the details of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202D3 will be described. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3 is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is loss and the game state is the probability variation state (time saving state). In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202D3, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202D2 described above, the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the stop type is "complete deviation" and "common reach" A range and a variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(D), the stop type is "completely out" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190" and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. are defined in association with each other, and the range of "191 to 198" is defined in association with a short deviation of a fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

In addition, the stop type is "common reach", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 190", and the normal reach with the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "191 to 198" , various types of super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the game state is the variable probability state (time saving state), it is defined so that the variation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Therefore, when the game state is the probability variable state (time saving state) and the variation time of 90 seconds (variation pattern) is selected, it is only when the special symbol jackpot is won. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 executes a special effect to congratulate the big win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player by notifying the player that the special symbol is missing after the long-time variation pattern is executed in the variable probability state (time-saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. can be done.

As described above, the variable probability state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state, and when the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202D3 is used, the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the deviation (normal ) Since the variation time of the special symbols is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202D2 is used, the lottery of the special symbols during the probability variation state (time saving state) which is a game state advantageous to the player is performed. can be done efficiently. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, if the variable probability state (time saving state) is set as the gaming state, the stop type is reach when the special pattern is removed than when the normal state is set. It is set so that the percentage of outliers is low. Therefore, while the game state is a variable probability state (time saving state), the frequency of occurrence of reach out is reduced (because it is difficult to execute deviation fluctuation with a long fluctuation time), which is a favorable game state for the player. The lottery for the special symbols in the time saving state can be performed more efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, details of the special variation pattern table 202D4 will be described. This special variation pattern table 202D4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for 4 rotations of the special figure variation in the case where the game state after the end of the big win is a probability variable state or a time saving state, and is a continuous jackpot production described above. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation (see FIG. 89 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 109, the special variation pattern table 202D4 defines a variation pattern in association with the number of special symbol (special symbol) variations after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the special symbol lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. short hit) is defined.

In the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, if the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation time is 0.5 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a hit, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as an ultra-short hit with a variation time of 0.5 seconds in the range of "0 to 179", and a variation time of 32 in the range of "180 to 198". A special hit of .5 seconds is defined.

By configuring in this way, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is the variable probability state or the time saving state, the variation for four rotations of the special symbol can be immediately executed. As a result, when a series of jackpot performances are executed using a plurality of jackpot games, such as the above-described continuous jackpot performance, the variation period of the special symbols executed between the jackpot games can be shortened. You can increase the effect.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set as the game state (during the continuous mode), the variable probability state or the time saving state is set again after the end of the jackpot. It is configured such that when winning, a variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202D4. By configuring in this way, only in a state in which the variable probability state (time saving state) is continuously executed, it is possible to shorten the special symbol variation time for a predetermined number of times (four times) after the end of the big win.

As a result, for example, in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, when the jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, the jackpot ends Later, since there is a reserved memory for the special pattern 1 and there is no reserved memory for the special pattern 2, in a state where the pattern variation of the special pattern 1 is easily executed, the variation pattern table 202D1 for big hits or for loss (probable variation) A variation pattern is set by referring to the variation pattern table 202D3.

On the other hand, in the state where the probability variable state (time saving state) is set, when the jackpot (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K) in which the probability variable state or time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, that is, after the jackpot ends, In a state where the special symbol 2 is reserved and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is easily executed, the special variation pattern and the special symbol variation are set to a very short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202D4 in FIG. 109, in this control example, at a rate of a part (about 10%) when winning in the fourth rotation after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern corresponding to the special winning (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is selected.

By configuring in this way, when a big win is won in a state in which a variation pattern is selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202D4, what is a series of big win effects (continuous big win effects) continuing from the previous big win game? Separately, it is possible to execute a special performance to congratulate the winning of successive jackpots. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the special variation pattern table 202D4 is defined so that the special variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in part of the fourth variation after the end of the big win, but it is limited to this. Instead, the special winning variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even in some of the first to third variations after the end of the big winning. In addition, the special variation pattern table 202D4 is defined so that a variation pattern in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set (for example, a variation time of 10 seconds) is selected when the special symbol lottery result is lost. good too. By constructing in this way, when the variation for 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of variations after the end of the big win reaches 4 times, the player can be expected to win the big win. Therefore, it is possible to play a game considering the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, details of the jackpot transition setting table 202E will be described. This jackpot transition setting table 202E is a table for defining the gaming state set after the jackpot ends, and includes jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202C. , state transition statuses (state transition 1 to state transition 9) are defined in association with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

This jackpot transition setting table 202E is referred to (S1213) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES) in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1213), and the selected state transition status , the game state is set according to the contents defined in the state transition table 202F, which will be described later.

If the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202E are specifically described, the jackpot type is any one of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot F”, “jackpot G”, and “jackpot H”. There, when the game state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and "variable state (with high probability short working hours) (ST2)", or " In the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the game state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 1 table 202F1 of the state transition table 202F (see FIG. 111), which will be described later. 2” is set, the game state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202F2.

Next, when the jackpot type is “jackpot C” and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 3” is set as the state transition status, and “probability variable state (high In the case of "time saving with probability) (ST2)" or "time saving state (low probability with time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "jackpot E" , When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "variable state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "time saving state (There is a low probability of short working hours) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is "jackpot H" or "jackpot J" and the game state when the jackpot is won is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status, and " In the case of a variable state (with high probability of time saving) (ST2)” or “time saving state (with low probability of time saving) (ST3)”, “state transition 7” is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is “jackpot K ”, and when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is “normal state (ST1)”, “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status, and “probability variable state (with high probability short working hours) (ST2)”, Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status.

When any one of “state transition 3” to “state transition 9” is set as the state transition status, the state transition 3 table 202F3 to state transition 9 table 202F9 of the state transition table 202F (see FIG. 111) to be described later. , the game state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

Here, the contents of the state transition table 202F will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 111(A). This state transition table 202F is a table used for transitioning the state status such as a game state or a variation pattern table based on the number of variations of special symbols, and is a specified number counter 203J stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. It transitions the state status based on the value of This state transition table 202F is referred to when acquiring the specified number counter 203J (S1214) when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: YES). When it is determined in the fluctuation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) that the value of the specified count counter 203J is 0 (S409: YES), it is referred to set the next state status (S410).

FIG. 111A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202F in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 111 (A), the state transition table 202F in the first control example is a state transition status ("state transition 1" to "state transition 9") set using the jackpot transition setting table 202E described above. ) (“state transition 1 table 202F1” to “state transition 9 table 202F9”).

First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202F1 will be described with reference to FIG. The state transition 1 table 202F1 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status. )” is stipulated. That is, in the state where the state transition 1 table 202F1 is used (the state in which "state transition 1" is set), the variable probability state is continuously set until the next big hit is won.

Next, details of the state transition 2 table 202F2 will be described with reference to FIG. The state transition 2 table 202F2 is a table referred to when "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202F2, the state status "ST2A (probable variable state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J, and the state status "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J "ST2 (variable probability state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST2A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203J becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the state status.

Here, when "ST2A" is set as the state status, the special variation pattern table 202D4 of the variation pattern selection table 202D is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, in a state where the same gaming state (probability variable state) is continuously set, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202D4 only for a specific period. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 110 .

FIG. 111D is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table 202F3. The state transition 3 table 202F3 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202F3, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203J becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111E is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table 202F4. The state transition 4 table 202F4 is a table that is referred to when "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 4 table 202F4, the state status "ST3A (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and the state status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, "ST3A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 96 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202D4 only for the first four times of special symbol variation.

FIG. 111F is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table 202F5. The state transition 5 table 202F5 is a table referred to when "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status. The state transition 5 table 202F5 defines the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J. That is, the normal state is set without setting the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit.

FIG. 112A is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 6 table 202F6. The state transition 6 table 202F6 is a table referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202F6, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112B is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 7 table 202F7. The state transition 7 table 202F7 is a table referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202F7, the state status "ST3A (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and the state status in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, "ST3A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 46 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202D4 only for the first four times of special symbol variation.

FIG. 112C is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table 202F8. The state transition 8 table 202F8 is a table referred to when "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202F8, the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "25" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and the state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, after the end of the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 25 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112D is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table 202F9. The state transition 9 table 202F9 is a table referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202F9, the state status "ST3A (time saving state)" in which "4" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and the state status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J "ST3 (time saving state)" and the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J are defined. In other words, after the end of the jackpot, "ST3A" is set as the state status until the value of the specified number counter 203J becomes "0" (until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times), and then until the special symbol fluctuates 21 times. "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the state status, and then "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status. As a result, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the end of the jackpot, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202D4 only for the first four times of special symbol variation.

As described above, in the first control example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the jackpot type of the jackpot won and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot are based on. , the game state set after the end of the big win and the variation pattern table used for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the big win can be made different. As a result, the content of the game can be made more complicated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202D4 is the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot, but other configurations may be used. Alternatively, the special variation pattern table 202D4 may be used in the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big win instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the end of the big win. When configured in this way, the state transition table is set to the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "10" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J, and "4" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. The state status "ST3A (time saving state)", the state status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which "46" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J, and "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203J. It is preferable to configure so that the defined "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select the variation pattern for the 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big win using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set with the end of the jackpot as a starting point and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (predetermined number of times) for which the state status continues are set in association with each other. The game specifications can be easily set just by doing so, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced. Also, when changing the game specifications, it is sufficient to change the contents of the state transition table, so that the game specifications can be easily changed.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the game state (when ST1 is set as the state status), the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is set to "0", and always The same variation pattern table (variation pattern table 202D1 for big win or (normal) variation pattern table 202D2 for losing) is configured to be referred to, but when the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern table that can be referred to A plurality of tables may be provided, and different variation pattern tables may be referred to in correspondence with the values of the specified number counter 203J. In this case, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50 times), and the game state shifts to the normal state (when the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202F6), the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is set to "10" corresponding to the state status ST1.

Then, when the value of the specified number counter 203J is greater than "0" while the state status ST1 is set, the special variation (normal) pattern table may be referenced to select a variation pattern. By configuring in this way, immediately after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to select a different variation pattern than usual, so that the player can have a game state that is advantageous to the player. It can make you think that it is still continuing.

It should be noted that, in the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the period for referring to the special variation pattern table is the effect mode of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and output from the voice output device 226. It is preferable that the sound mode and the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 become a special mode corresponding to the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a more special feeling. Further, even when a big win is won during a period in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to execute a special performance mode different from the usual performance during the big win. As a result, the player can feel that he or she has won a jackpot during a special period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the first control example, the state transition table is provided in correspondence with each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used for portions where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. By configuring in this way, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the configuration is used to switch the variation pattern table referenced by varying the state status based on the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. may be made variable. For example, in a state referring to the state transition 6 table 202F6, when the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is "40", the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but a small amount of privilege is obtained. When winning a lottery result (a so-called small win) that can give (the privilege of opening the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time (for example, 3 seconds)), the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3B, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. is set to "4", the state status ST3B is set, and if the value of the specified number counter 203J is greater than "0" ("1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated to after the small hit See The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select a dedicated variation pattern only for a predetermined period after winning a small prize (a period until the special symbols are varied four times).

If the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes "0" while the state status ST3B is set, the state status ST3B is set again as the value of the specified number of times counter 203J. By configuring to set "35" subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 50 times) Without changing it, a dedicated variation pattern can be selected and executed for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbols are varied four times) based on the small win won during the time saving state.

In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has the above-described small win as a result of the special symbol lottery, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J may be subtracted based on the number of times the small win is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result) instead of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, time is reduced. Since the variation pattern table to be referred to can be changed at a timing different from the transition of the number of variations of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(B). FIG. 105B is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(B), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. , a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F, a probability variation flag 203G, a time saving medium counter 203H, a state status storage area 203I, a specified number counter 203J, and other memory areas 203Z. have.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. Each value of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A are executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a special symbol lottery or the like is determined.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol is displayed. Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data corresponding to the starting winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1), various types obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting the information is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223A.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). In this special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to starting winnings to the second ball entrance 140 are stored.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the holding area of 1 to a holding area with an area number smaller by 1. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is the variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed) up to a maximum of 4 times. The value N1 of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is initially set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is the variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 (the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81). ) is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) up to four times. The value N2 of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E has an initial value set to zero, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. Every time the number of held balls of symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

The values of these special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (number of times N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) and special design 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (number of times N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) are reserved balls. The voice lamp controller 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127, and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E are changed. command.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E are changed, are controlled by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reserved in the device 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved design in the sub-display area DS of the third design display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is set to zero. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times M of variation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C. (S803 in FIG. 133: NO).

The probability variation flag 203G is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). Indicates that it is a probability variation state of special symbols. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203G is in the OFF state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203G is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON each time the "jackpot A, B, D, F, G, I" ends (jackpot control processing (see FIG. 137). ) of S1212). On the other hand, the variable probability flag 203G is turned off every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered off or the start of the jackpot is set (S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the probability variation flag 203G is referred to, and if the state is ON, a special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is drawn based on a special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the variable probability flag 203G is off, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In addition, in this control example, while the variable probability state is set as the game state, the time saving state of normal symbols is also set. Therefore, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed, the variable probability flag 203G and the value of the time saving medium counter 203H are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol working time saving state. Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203H is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203G is on (if the time saving state or the probability variation state), it is determined that the time saving state of the normal design, A lottery for normal symbols is performed based on a random number table per normal symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is 0 and the probability variation flag 203G is off (if neither the time saving state nor the probability variation state), based on the normal symbol per random number table for low probability, the normal symbol A lottery is held (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time-saving medium counter 203H is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203H is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203H during time saving is set to 0, a special symbol jackpot is won in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203H at the end of the jackpot, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot H, J", at the end of the jackpot. "50" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203H, and in the case of "jackpot K", "25" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203H at the end of the big win.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot E", the value of the time-saving medium counter 203H set at the end of the jackpot is set differently depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. If the game state is a time saving state (with low probability of time saving) or a variable state (with high probability of time saving), "100" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203H, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state ( If there is no low probability time saving), the value of the counter 203H is not set during time saving.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 ends until the value of the time saving counter 203H becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Also, even if the value of the time-saving counter 203H is 1 or more, the value is reset to 0 when the jackpot is won (S218 in FIG. 127).

When the normal pattern winning lottery is performed, the value of the time saving counter 203H is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the normal pattern lottery is performed based on the normal pattern random number table for high probability. is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is 0, and if the probability variation flag 203G described later is off, the normal design lottery is performed based on the normal per design random number table for the low probability time. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The state status storage area 203I is a storage area for storing current state status (ST) information set by the state transition table 202F. In the state status storage area 203I, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES), that is, at the end of the jackpot, the acquired state status is Stored, after that, in the fluctuation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when the value of the specified number counter 203J subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuates becomes 0 (S409: YES), it is newly set State status is stored.

The specified number of times counter 203J is a counter for measuring that the number of variations of the special symbols has reached the specified number of times. This specified number counter 203J corresponds to the acquired specified number of times when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: YES), that is, at the end of the jackpot. A value is set (S1213), and then subtracted every time the special symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation frequency subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S407). When the value of the specified number counter 203J changes from "1" to "0", a new state status is set based on the contents specified in the corresponding state transition table 202F.

The other memory area 203Z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 114(A), the ROM 222 includes a variation pattern table 222A, a pending rank selection table 222B, a jackpot middle effect selection table 222C, an addition number selection table 222D, a continuous effect mode selection table 222E, and a continuous effect mode selection table 222E. It has at least a value main selection table 222F, a continuous value sub-selection table 222G, a final mode selection table 222H, an expectation selection table 222I, and an expectation performance selection table 222J.

The variation pattern table 222A is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the aspect of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. is a table. A variation pattern command for display is set based on the aspect of the variation effect selected from the variation pattern table 222A (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The reserved rank selection table 222B is a table for selecting a reserved rank based on the reserved status of special symbols, and the performance during the big win is determined based on the selected reserved rank. Here, the details of this reserved rank selection table 222B will be described with reference to FIG. 115(B).

FIG. 115B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table 222B. As shown in FIG. 115(B), this reservation rank selection table 222B has the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of special symbol) and winning information indicating a big hit in the reserved balls of special symbol 2. A pending rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not. By constructing in this way, the performance executed during the big win can be determined based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special pattern (special pattern 2) executed after the big win.

Here, in this control example, when both the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 exist, the process of preferentially digesting the reserved ball of special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). ). That is, the timing at which the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 are digested is indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, based on the winning information included in the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 that preferentially fluctuates after the end of the big hit (the held ball whose fluctuation order is fixed after the end of the big hit) and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is configured to select a reserved rank, and a jackpot performance can be executed based on the fluctuation result (lottery result) of the special symbols executed after the jackpot is finished.

In addition, when both the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 exist, the reserved ball is in the order of being reserved (the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140). If it is a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration (so-called winning order digestion) that digests, instead of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, all the reserved balls or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4) in order of digestion It may be configured to select the pending rank as a target. As a result, it is possible to execute the big win performance based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbols executed after the big win is finished.

Referring to FIG. 115(B), the contents of the reservation rank selection table 222B will be specifically described. If there is prize winning information, the reserved rank "3" is selected, and if there is no prize winning information indicating winning, the reserved rank "2" is selected.

In addition, if the number of reserved special patterns (special pattern 2) is "4" and there is winning information indicating winning among them, the reserved rank "4" is selected and there is no winning information indicating winning. ', the reserved rank '1' is selected. When the reserved number of special symbols (special symbol 2) is "0", the reserved rank "1" is selected without using the reserved rank selection table 222B.

The reserved rank selected with reference to the reserved rank selection table 222B is referred to in the later-described jackpot effect selection table 222C. Next, with reference to FIG. 115(C), the effect selection table 222C during the jackpot will be described. This jackpot middle effect selection table 222C is a table for selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot. It is referred to when executing the setting process (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

In this jackpot middle effect selection table 222C, the jackpot middle effect is defined in association with the reserved rank selected in the reserved rank selection table 222B and the first effect counter 223Y1. Specifically, when the reserved rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is in the range of "0 to 99", the "ordinary win effect" is defined. This "ordinary win effect" is an effect (see FIG. 83(B)) that is completed during one big win game, and an effect corresponding to the jackpot type to be executed is executed.

When the reserved rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is in the range of "100 to 149", the "additional effect" is defined. As described above with reference to FIG. 83(A), this "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games executed in one jackpot (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, first 5 rounds are displayed), and the number of remaining rounds (the number of undisplayed rounds) is displayed as the jackpot game progresses.

When the ``additional performance'' is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the jackpot currently being executed is, and to make the player pay attention to the performance during the jackpot game. . Furthermore, the "additional effect" of the first control example is when multiple jackpots are won in a short period of time (the next jackpot is included in the winning information (holding pattern) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot case), by adding the number of rounds of the next big win to the number of rounds of the previous big win, it is configured to run across a plurality of big wins.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the jackpot has been won while the "additional effect" is being executed. Therefore, the game can be played while enjoying how many rounds in total are displayed by the "additional effect".

Furthermore, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds to be executed for one jackpot can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds to be executed for a plurality of jackpots can be summed and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times of winning big wins and the number of rounds to be executed for each big win while one "additional effect" is being executed. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds executed during one big win is 15 rounds, the pachinko machine 10 always sets the variable probability state as the game state after the end of the big win, and wins the jackpot of 15 rounds. is difficult to understand, and the game can be played while predicting which game state will be set after the end of the big win.

In addition, when an effect suggesting a game state set after the end of the big win is used as the effect to be executed during the big win, the effect is executed during one big win before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game state set after the end of the jackpot is specified and the performance effect is lowered.

Next, when the pending rank is "2" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal winning effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is In the range of "50 to 149", "additional effects" are defined. When the pending rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", the "normal winning effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is "50 to 49". 99” is defined as “additional effect”, and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is defined as “100 to 149”, “continuous winning effect” is defined.

As described above with reference to FIG. 84, this "continuous winning effect" is an effect ( See FIG. 84). As the “continuous win effect” executed here, for example, the sum of the number of rounds of the first big win (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second big win (for example, 10 rounds) (for example, 25 rounds) Round) is executed when one big win game is started (the first round of the first big win is started).

By executing the ``continuous win effect'' in this way, it is possible to quickly inform the player that he or she has won a plurality of jackpots, and to give the player a sense of superiority while playing the jackpot game with peace of mind. can let

The reserved rank is "4" and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1 is in the range of "0 to 49", "normal win effect" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", "Continuous hit production" is stipulated.

As described above, in this control example, a different effect (during the big win) is executed during the big win based on the selected pending rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223Y1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the effect executed during the big win.

Furthermore, since the timing of informing the player that the next big win is included in the hold is made different depending on the effect during the big win selected, for example, at the timing when the previous big win game ends, the next big win Compared to pachinko machines that notify the presence or absence of reserved patterns to win the jackpot (whether or not there is a reserved inner ring), compared to the case of notifying the presence or absence of a reserved inner ring only at a specific timing, It is possible to execute a jackpot game while making the player have expectations for the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the content and ratio of the performance during the big win selected according to the holding rank are made different, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations and the second ball entrance during the big win game. It is possible to execute an effect in which the look-ahead result of the winning ball 140 can be taken into consideration, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, if the pending rank is "1", that is, if the number of pending symbols is the upper limit value at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no prize information corresponding to the big win in the pending symbols, Since the game is not executed, it is specified that either the normal win effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is defined so that the normal win effect is more likely to be selected. In other words, if the pending rank is "1" at the time of winning the jackpot, the player will not have excessive expectations for the pending inner resort, or Any of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to understand how many rounds the jackpot is is executed.

If the reserved rank is "2", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbols, the reserved rank is different from "1", There is a possibility of acquiring new reserved symbols during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the reservation is not confirmed at the time of winning the jackpot, in order to cope with the case where the reservation is confirmed during the jackpot game, the "additional Production" is set to be selected at a high rate. Thus, when a reserved symbol for winning a jackpot is acquired during a jackpot game, the fact can be notified to the player by the "additional performance".

If the reserved rank is "3", that is, if the number of reserved symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot, and if there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved patterns, that is, if the reserved pattern is not the upper limit, When a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the consecutive residence is confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal winning effect" and "additional effect", it is possible to notify early that the reserved consecutive residence is confirmed. If the reserved rank is "4", that is, if the reserved design is the upper limit and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved design, "normal winning It is stipulated that either one of "effect for winning" or "effect for continuous winning" is selected.

In other words, among the reserved ranks "3" and "4" in which the reserved inner renso has already been determined, the reserved rank "3" is in a state in which a new reserved ball (winning information) can be acquired during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making it possible to select the ``additional presentation'', the player can be made to think that he/she has won the next big win by the reserved ball (winning information) acquired during the big win game.

On the other hand, in the case of the reservation rank "4", a new reservation ball (winning information) cannot be acquired during the jackpot game, and the next jackpot will not be won during the jackpot game. "Effect" is not selected, and the effect by "continuous winning effect" is executed. By configuring in this way, the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit and in other cases, that is, whether or not new reserved balls can be obtained during the jackpot game. By differentiating the options of the performance executed during the big win based on the above, it is possible to suppress the execution of the performance with a sense of incongruity with respect to the actual holding situation.

It should be noted that, in this control example, even if any of the pending rank is selected, because it is defined that the "production for normal hit" is selected, even if the "production for normal hit" is executed Even if there is, it is possible to leave the possibility of reservation. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to execute the game during the big win while making the player expect the reservation within the reserve until the end.

Next, the add-on number selection table 222D will be described with reference to FIG. 116(A). This addition number selection table 222D is a fixed round number display mode DM4 displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 when the "addition effect" is selected as the effect executed during the big win. (See FIG. 86(A)) This is a table for selecting a value (additional round number) to be added.

This addition number selection table 222D, in the win-related command process (see FIG. 142), when a new round number command is received (S3304: YES) and when the addition effect flag 223H is set to ON ( S3306: YES) is referred to in part of the processing during the addition effect (see FIG. 144) executed (S3506). The selected additional number is stored in the area for storing the value to be added to the determined round number display mode DM4 in the display round number storage area 223G (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the number of running rounds display mode DM3 (the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed in the number of fixed rounds display mode DM4 (the number of rounds confirmed to be executed) If they are the same, the additional number stored in the display round number storage area 223G is displayed in the round number display mode DM10 (see FIG. 86A).

As shown in FIG. 116(A), this addition number selection table 222D includes the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot, whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the reservation is confirmed), and the second effect counter 223Y2. The number of additions is defined in association with . Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of the presence or absence of a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223Y2.

In this first control example, the number of rounds of all jackpots (the number of rounds of jackpots in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the number of remaining rounds is 5. This is because, in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the fixed round number display mode DM4 at this timing.

If the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "yes", and the value of the second effect counter 223Y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", and the value of "50 to 99" is added. The number of additions "10" is defined in the range, the number of additions "15" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning prize is "none", and the second When the value of the production counter 223Y2 is in the range of ``0 to 49'', the number of addition is ``5'', when the value is in the range of ``50 to 99'', the number of addition is ``15'', and in the range of ``100 to 149'', the number of addition is `` 10” is defined.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, "15"), it is stipulated that the ratio of the number of additions to be selected differs depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. As a result, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not there will be a reserve house on the basis of the value added during the "additional effect", and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The value of the number of remaining rounds is "20~", the winning prize is "yes", the value of the second effect counter 223Y2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the number of additions is "5", and the range of "50 to 99". , and the range of "100 to 149" defines the number of addition "15". In addition, in this first control example, since the maximum value of the number of jackpot rounds executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20 ~", The winning prize is never "none". Therefore, if the number of remaining rounds is "20 or more" and the winning prize is "none", the additional number "-" is defined, and if selected, an error command is set. .

Here, when an error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed is different from the remaining number of rounds managed by the sound lamp control device 113, the additional effect is continued. Since there is a high possibility that an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort will be executed if the game is played, the execution of the additional effect is stopped, and based on the information received from the main controller 110 for the jackpot that is currently being executed. , the number of rounds set for the jackpot that is currently being executed and the number of rounds that are currently being executed are preferably configured to start execution of performance for displaying on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the performance during the big win, which gives the player a sense of discomfort, is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222E will be described with reference to FIG. 116(B). FIG. 116B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection table 222E. This continuous production mode selection table 222E is a production mode ( It is a table for selecting the continuous effect mode for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect), and is referred to in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M (S4006). Then, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M.

As shown in FIG. 116(B), this continuous effect mode selection table 222E contains the value of a continuous effect setting counter 223Q, which will be described later, whether or not there is a winning prize (whether or not the pending game is confirmed), A different continuous effect mode is defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223Y3.

Here, the continuous production setting counter 223Q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous production is set in one probability variable state or time saving state, and the probability variable state or time saving state continues for a long time, so that the battle It is used to determine that the effect has been executed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(B).

Specifically, the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection table 222E will be described. The value of the third effect counter 223Y3 is set to the continuous effect mode "1" within the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "2" is defined to be within the range of "100 to 149". there is

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is "1" and the winning information (winning information) is "Yes", the continuous effect mode "5" is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223Y3. stipulated. As a pattern corresponding to this continuous performance mode "5", there is a case where the first spin in which the battle performance is executed for the first time after the end of the big win wins the jackpot, in order to provide the player with a special feeling. , a dedicated continuous production mode is set.

Next, when the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223Q is "2 to 5" and the winning information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223Y3 is within the range of "0 to 99". A continuous effect mode "2" is defined, a continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the pending information (winning information) is "yes", the third effect counter 223Y3. The continuous effect mode "2" is specified in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "1" is specified in the range of "100 to 149".

Then, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is "6 or more" and the hit is "none" in the pending information (winning information), the value of the third effect counter 223Y3 is within the range of "0 to 99". A mode "3" is defined, a continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and if the pending information (winning information) wins "yes", the value of the third effect counter 223Y3 The continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the effect mode of the pre-battle effect is set based on the continuous effect mode selected with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222E. ), the type of your character, the type and order of the opponent characters that are selectably displayed, the type and HP value of the opponent characters that are actually selected, etc. The type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle production and the pattern of attacking the opponent character, which are not related to the display mode during the development of the battle reach, are set based on the continuous production mode in which the production mode is selected.

For example, when the continuation effect mode "5" is selected (that is, when the first battle effect is executed and there is a winning prize in the reserve), the player is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. A production mode for doing so is set. Specifically, a premier character that is set when there is winning information that will win a jackpot in the reserve is set as the character of the player or the opponent, or a specific value is set as the initial value or intermediate value of the HP value of the opponent character. (for example, "777" or "333"), or all the same characters are displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that he or she will win a big prize using a plurality of fluctuation periods.

Next, the contents of the continued value main selection table 222F will be described with reference to FIG. 117(A). FIG. 117A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222F. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, when a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to indicate that the game state is continuing. be done.

In this battle production, a battle reach (final mode) production for indicating whether or not the advantageous game state is over, and a pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. When the advantageous game state is not ended as a result of the battle ready-to-win effect, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

During the pre-battle effect, the third symbol display device 81 executes the effect of decreasing the opponent's HP value (continuous value) as described above with reference to FIG. Based on the continuation value decreased during the pre-battle production, a battle ready-to-win production mode (opponent's HP (continuous value) at the start of battle ready-to-win) is determined.

In the first control example, the continuation value to be decreased during the pre-battle effect is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F and the value selected by the continuation value secondary selection table 222G. configured to be calculated. By setting the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this manner, the processing load when increasing the variation of the continuous value can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 117A, the description is continued. In the continuous value main selection table 222F, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, the result of determining the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation of the special symbol that wins the big hit is executed, and the currently displayed result. A continuation value to be selected in association with the continuation value that is specified is specified.

That is, the continuous value main selection table 222F defines that the continuous value is selected based on the special symbol lottery result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the battle ready-for-hire effect is executed by taking over the opponent's HP (continuous value) that is variable during the pre-battle effect.

Here, if the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222F are set to be more complicated in order to increase the variation of the continuous value increase/decrease display that is executed during the pre-battle effect, for example, in this control example, 100 Although the continuous value is managed in units of , the continuous value is managed in smaller units (units of ten), and the special pattern lottery results are further subdivided, and each subdivided lottery result is In the case of specifying the continuation value in correspondence, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value increases. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle production, it is necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase/decrease display.

Therefore, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation value main selection table 222G, which is a table independent of the continuation value main selection table 222F, is used to select the continuation value main selection table 222G. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222F is configured to be further variable. Thereby, the variation of the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuous value is displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuous value selected using the continuous value main selection table 222F. (HP value) is configured so as to set the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) to decrease. Then, in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value sub-selection table 222G is displayed as the continuation value after reduction (after updating). It is configured as follows.

Then, an attack effect managed by a value (continuation value) selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222F, and a continuation value ( The range of values selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222G is set so as not to differ from the difference value of HP value).

By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) that decreases the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuous value main selection table 222F. Even if management is performed using only a rough continuation value, an effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, as the attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation values selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F, if the difference value is ``0 to 200'', ``light attack'' (FIG. 92 (A)), "201 to 400" is set to "medium attack", and "401 or more" is set to "strong attack (see FIG. 92 (B))". be.

As a result, for example, even though the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is in the range of "medium attack" (for example, 300), the displayed difference value of the continuation value is "weak". It is possible to suppress the difference between the continuous value range based on the special symbol lottery and the continuous value range actually displayed.

As shown in FIG. 117(A), the continuous value main selection table 222F contains the number of remaining fluctuations up to the winning variation and the last selected continuous value (among the currently displayed continuous values, the continuous value main selection table 222F The value selected in ) is defined in association with the continuation value. Specifically, if the value of the residual variation counter 222T is "3" and the last selected continuation value is "1000", then "800" is selected, and if it is "900", then "700" is selected. A value with a difference value of "200" is selected so that Similarly, if the continuation value selected last time is "400" to "800", a value with a difference value of "200" is selected. If the continuation value selected last time is '300', '200' is selected (difference value '100'). 0” is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual variation counter 222T is "2", if the last selected continuation value is "300" to "700", a value with a difference value of "100" is selected. If the selected continuation value is '100' or '200', then a value with a differential value of '0' is selected. If the value of the remaining variation counter 222T is "1", that is, if the next variation is a winning variation, and if the last selected continuous value is between "300" and "700", the difference value is "200". is selected, and if the previously selected value is "200", the value ("200") that makes the difference value "0" is selected, and if the previously selected value is "100", , the value "0" is selected so that the difference value is "100".

As described above, in this control example, based on the continuous value main selection table 222F, out of the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, roughly ( unit of 100) value, and since the production mode of the attack production is set based on the difference value, the continuous value displayed in the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81 (HP value). The number of patterns can be reduced, and the processing load when setting effects can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222G will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117B schematically shows the contents of the first continued value sub-selection table 222G1, and FIG. 117C schematically shows the contents of the second continued value sub-selection table 222G2. It is a diagram.

As described above, the continuation value sub-selection table 222G is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F. table. In this control example, by adding the value selected in the continuation value secondary selection table 222G to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (Continuation value for production) is set.

In this control example, the continuous value main selection table 222F is referenced to determine whether the selected continuous value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), and based on the determination result, a different continuous value secondary selection table 222G is selected. If the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value primary selection table 222F is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value secondary shown in FIG. The selection table 222G1 is referenced, and if it is less than a predetermined value (eg, 200), the second continued value sub-selection table 222G2 shown in FIG. 117(C) is referenced.

The first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 shown in FIG. 117(B) defines the continuation value in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuous value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuous value "-10" is selected, In the range of "80-119", the continuous value of "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120-149", the continuous value of "+20" is selected.

As a result, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F is added to the continuation value selected using the first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1, thereby increasing the types of continuation values on display. can be done. Specifically, when the continuation value main selection table 222F is referred to and the continuation value is decreased (updated) from “1000” to “800”, the selected continuation value (“800”) is changed to the predetermined value ( For example, 200) or more, so the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 is referred to. When the value "+20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222G1, "820" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 ( See FIG. 92(A)). On the other hand, when the value "-20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222G1, "780" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value).

Thus, by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222G to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation displayed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 Value (HP value) variations can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 is referred to and the displayed continuation value ( HP value) is set, a value of "+20" will be selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 while "0" is selected as the continuation value in the continuation value main selection table 222F. As an attack effect, the HP value of the opponent character is set to "0", whereas the continuation value (HP value) on the display becomes "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether or not the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200). It is configured to refer to the sub-selection table 222G2. As shown in FIG. 117(C), this second continued value sub-selection table 222G2 prescribes a range of "-20" to "0" as values to be selected.

The first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 shown in FIG. 117(B) defines the continuation value in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223Y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuous value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuous value "-5" is selected, In the range "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, differences between the above-described first continuation value subselection table 222G1 and second continuation value subselection table 222G2 will be described. The first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 provides a value to which the continuation value (eg, 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is added (“+20”) and a value to subtract (“- 10" and "-20") can be selected. On the other hand, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222G2 provides values ("-5", "-10") to be subtracted from the continuation value (eg, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F as values that can be selected. ) is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of displayed continuation values (HP values) can be set wide. is possible and the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects within a range that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuous value sub-selection table 222G1 and determination of whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value. determining means for determining which of the first continuous value sub-selection table 222G1 and the second continuous value sub-selection table 222G2 to use to select a value based on the determination result of the determining means; may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuous value sub-selection table 222G from biasing toward the positive or negative direction.

In the first control example, as described above, a configuration is used in which the mode of the attack effect is selected based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222F is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222F and a calculating means for calculating a difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222G; It is good also as a structure using a means.

In the first control example, the audio ramp control device 113 has the continuous value sub-selection table 222G, but other configurations may be used. 222F may be provided and the continuation value sub-selection table 222G may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may perform the process of selecting the mode of the attack effect. With this configuration, the audio ramp control device 113 only needs to perform update management of continuous values using the continuous value main selection table 222F, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the continuous value selection using the continuous value main selection table 222F or the continuous value sub-selection table 222G described above is performed when there is winning information corresponding to a big win as a result of pre-reading of reserved symbols. In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no prize winning information corresponding to the big win as a result of the look-ahead of the reserved symbols, the process of changing the continuation value is executed. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, the continuous value variable processing in this effect is variable depending on the period during which the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is continuously executed and the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. A later continuation value is configured to be selected.

By configuring in this way, the effect of decreasing the continuous value can be frequently executed while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the effect contents. can do.

In addition, in the first control example, as the continuation effect (pre-battle effect), the continuation values of four opponent candidates (A to D) that can be fought against during battle reach are displayed (see FIG. 91(A)). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in the continuous production (pre-battle production), the continuous production (pre-battle production) can be continued by selecting another opponent. can be run as

With this configuration, only the continuous value continues to decrease when the continuous performance (pre-battle performance) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when winning is not won during probability variation). It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach production from becoming scarce.

In addition, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle effect from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10 If the pre-battle production continues while it fluctuates more than once, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a deviation fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds), the battle ready-to-win is executed, and the battle ready-to-win As a result of (2), when the win is not won, the continuation performance (second time) is executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is executed over a long period of time (for example, when the win is not won during the variable probability), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production mode of the battle reach production from becoming scarce.

Next, the final mode selection table 222H will be described with reference to FIG. 118(A). This final mode selection table 222H is a table for selecting the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win that is executed during the above-described continuous effect, and is a table for determining whether the special symbol variation in which the battle ready-to-win is executed is performed, and the fifth effect. A different final mode is defined in association with the value of the counter 223Y5.

Specifically, when the result of judging the success or failure of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a game state (probability variable state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot ends, the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5 is increased. The range of "0-49" defines the final mode "1", the range of "50-129" defines the final mode "2", and the range of "130-149" defines the final mode "3".

When the result of judging whether or not the special symbols are successful is a big win and the game state advantageous to the player is not provided after the big win is completed, the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5 is changed to the range of "0 to 129" and the final mode "4". However, the final mode "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149", and if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is out, the value of the fifth effect counter 223Y5 will be in the range of "0 to 129". 6”, and the final aspect “7” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

In addition, in the case of a special figure variation in which the special symbol's propriety determination result is out and the time saving end condition is established, the value of the fifth production counter 223Y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" The final mode "4", The final mode "5" is defined in the range "130-149".

Here, the details of the effect of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222H will be described with reference to FIG. 118(B). FIG. 118(B) is a diagram for explaining the effect contents of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222H. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, as the final mode of the battle effect (battle reach), the effect is executed in which either the main character or the opponent character attacks a total of three times. different attack patterns are selected depending on the selected final mode.

Specifically, in the final modes "1" to "3", an attack pattern in which a winning battle is executed in which the main character wins is selected, and in the case of the final mode "1", all three attack opportunities , the attack pattern in which the main character attacks is selected, and in the case of the final mode "2", the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the opponent character attacks at the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode "3", an attack pattern (resurrection effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the main character revives and defeats the opponent's character after the opponent's character has attacked in all three attack opportunities is selected. be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222H is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation performance to be executed. A final mode (final mode "1" and "2") completed with an attack is defined to be easily selected, and a variation pattern with a variable time of 90 seconds is defined to be easily selected for resurrection performance. Here, in the resurrection effect executed with a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, the effect data for the first three attacks is the same as the effect data of the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (final mode “5”). are used. As a result, the production data can be shared to reduce the data volume, and the first half of the production in which the winning battle is executed (the first half of the final mode “3”) and the production in which the losing battle is executed (the final mode “5”). ), and by executing the same effect, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the result of the effect in the middle of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. For the final modes "4" and "5", an attack pattern is selected in which a defeat battle in which the main character is defeated is executed. In this defeat battle, an effect is executed in which the HP gauge DM21, which indicates the continuation value (HP) of the main character, finally becomes 0 as a result of the battle reach. In the case of the final mode "4", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity, and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final mode "5". In the case of , an attack pattern is selected in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities. Thus, in the attack pattern of the losing battle set in this control example, until the last attack (the third attack) is executed, other battles (winning battles, draw battles to be described later) and Since the same performance is executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from grasping the performance result in the middle of the performance.

In the final modes "6" and "7", an attack pattern is selected in which neither the HP gauge DM21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge DM22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character becomes 0, and a draw battle is executed. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends, and the next pre-battle effect is executed. In the case of the final mode "6", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity, and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final mode "7" is selected. In the case of , an attack pattern is selected in which the opponent's character attacks in all three attack opportunities. In this way, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in this control example, since the same effect as that of another battle (defeat battle) is executed as the attack pattern, not only the attack pattern but also the It is possible to make the user pay attention to the degree of reduction of the HP gauge, and to surely suppress a situation in which the effect result is grasped in the middle of the effect.

In this control example, the same attack pattern as in the losing battle is selected as the attack pattern to be executed during the draw battle, but the same attack pattern as in other battles (winning battle) is selected. It may be configured such that an effect in which an attack pattern is executed is selected. As a result, when the third battle is executed, depending on the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (first to third attack opportunities), the current battle reach is either a winning battle or a draw battle (that is, , a battle without defeat), and can see the performance (battle reach) without worrying that the game state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114(B). FIG. 114B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 stores a winning information storage area 223A, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223B, a fluctuation start flag 223C, a stop type selection flag 223D, a state storage area 223E, a jackpot information storage area 223F, and the number of display rounds. Area 223G, addition production flag 223H, display extension flag 223I, variation counter 223J, elapsed time counter 223K, continuous production mode storage area 223M, continuous value storage area 223N, duration counter 223P, and continuation At least an effect setting counter 223Q, a continuation effect flag 223R, an indication setting flag 223T, an effect counter group 223Y, and another memory area 223Z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223A includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 1, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the special symbol 2. ), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning is detected. , From the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern ) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223A. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B in the various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding , various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223A when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. By configuring in this way, an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A can be appropriately executed.

In this control example, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, the setting of the performance mode such as the big win effect, the battle effect, and the degree of expectation display effect is executed as the look-ahead effect. In this way, various effects (read-ahead effects) are executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A, so that the player can see each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223B counts the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 for counting the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball number of the special symbol 2. It has a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 for doing so, and the value of each counter according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a winning information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. to update.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 1 retained by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance up to a maximum of 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 is a variable display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is suspended by the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable performance of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times at maximum for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203E is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223B1 of the sound lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223B1 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball patterns corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223B2 is displayed in the sub display area DS of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area DS of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The variation start flag 223C is turned on when receiving a variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or a variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device. It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the fluctuation start flag 223C is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223D is turned on when receiving a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223D is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot information storage area 223F is an area for storing information about the jackpot to be executed. This is an area for storing when received from 110 . In this control example, the aspect of the effect executed during the big win is set based on the information stored in the big win information storage area 223F.

The display round number storage area 223G is an area for storing information regarding the number of rounds displayed during the big win. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. The finalized round number display mode DM4 for partially confirming and displaying the set number of rounds is displayed in the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information on the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G. Configured to be displayed in DM.

This display round number storage area 223G stores 0 as an initial value, and receives the round number command among the win-related commands transmitted from the main controller 110 (S3304 in FIG. 142: YES), and the addition effect flag. 223H is set to ON (S3306 in FIG. 142: YES) In the processing during the added effect (see FIG. 143) executed, the stored value (number of rounds) is referred to and set internally. A difference between the current number of rounds and the final number of rounds is calculated, and the value of the final number of rounds (the number of rounds) newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so as to be displayed in the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 when the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (the number of rounds N) in the additional display process (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the additional effect ends, the stored value is initialized.

In this way, in this control example, when a new round is started, the processing during the addition effect (see FIG. 144) is executed, the fixed number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223G is updated, and a predetermined number of When the number of rounds (which is a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the fixed round number display mode DM4 is executed. Therefore, since the fixed number of rounds is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 may be added, or the display of the fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 may be displayed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, even if the display timing of the fixed number of rounds is changed, it is possible to reliably cope with the situation.

Further, in this control example, when an additional prize generated during the jackpot wins the jackpot, the number of rounds is identified in advance based on the prize information corresponding to the additional prize, and the result of the advance identification indicates the number of rounds. The number of displayed rounds is set according to the total number of rounds including round number information.

The add-on effect flag 223H is a flag for indicating that the add-on effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the add-on effect is selected as the effect during the big win. This add-on effect flag 223H is set to ON when the add-on effect is read out as the effect during the jackpot in the effect setting process during the jackpot (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the hit-related command process (see FIG. 142 ) (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no pending residence (S3703 in FIG. 146: NO), it is set to OFF.

The display extension flag 223I is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the big win (display of the ending of the big win) is extended and displayed even during the special symbol fluctuation period executed after the end of the big win, and the effect during the big win ( It is set to ON when extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot). In the state where this display extension flag 223I is set to ON, that is, while the effect during the big win (the ending display of the big win) is being executed, if a new big win is won, the information about the big win (the winning ball number and number of rounds) are displayed in a manner continued from the information on the previous big win (number of winning balls and number of rounds).

This display extension flag 223I is, in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146), the jackpot effect executed this time is a normal hit effect, and when the game state after the jackpot is a probability variable state or a time-saving state ( S3709 in FIG. 146: YES), it is set to ON (S3710 in FIG. 146). And, when the special design has changed four times since the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3904 in FIG. 148: YES), or when the elapsed time is 4 seconds (S5103 in FIG. 154: YES) , is set to off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in this control example, after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times), or a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. is configured to be set to off when This is because the period during which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON is a period during which the effect during the jackpot is continuously executed, and when the jackpot is won during that period, the effect during the jackpot is performed. This is because it is a period that continues (continuous execution of the previous jackpot effect).

To explain in detail, as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223I to OFF, when only the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the special design is reserved at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times (4 times), and the player interrupts the launch of the ball after the end of the big win. If this happens, the game will be interrupted without the number of variations of the special symbol reaching a predetermined number (4 times) after the end of the big win, and there is a risk that the performance during the big win will continue for a long period of time. be. Furthermore, if the player stops playing in such a state, the effect during the jackpot will be displayed even though no one is playing the game. There is a problem that the pachinko machine 10 hesitates to play a game and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

Therefore, in this control example, the elapsed time (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223I to OFF in addition to the number of times the special symbol changes. As a result, the period during which the performance during the big win is continuously displayed and the performance over a plurality of big wins can be executed can be set as a limited period. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the jackpot during the limited period in which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON.

The variation number counter 223J is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol during the period in which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. The fluctuation number counter 223J executes the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) while the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, and when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed, "5" is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223K counts the elapsed time during the period in which the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. This elapsed time counter 223K is set to "4000 (equivalent to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223I is set to ON in the post-jackpot effect setting process (see FIG. 146) (see FIG. 146). S3711), the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the effect update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed every millisecond, is executed (FIG. 154). (see S5102 of ).

Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223K becomes "0", the display extension flag 223I is set to OFF (see S5104 in FIG. 154). By configuring in this way, when the elapsed time after the end of the big win has passed the predetermined time (4 seconds), the production during the big win is ended and the normal production corresponding to each game state can be executed. , the game can be played enthusiastically to win a jackpot within a limited period.

In this control example, the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223K is set to "4000" corresponding to 4 seconds, but the time to be set is not limited to this. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, one of a plurality of times may be selected and its period may be set. Moreover, as a value to be set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223K, it is preferable to set a value longer than the sum of the fluctuation periods for four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the end of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 preferentially digested during the big win while the display extension flag 223I is set to ON.

The continuous effect mode storage area 223M is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223M is executed when it is determined that the display extension flag 223I is set to OFF in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) and the game state is the time saving state or the probability variable state. In the continuous production setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous production mode selected by the continuous production mode selection table 222E is stored, and the Qingshu mode is selected by the final mode selection table (Battle reach is executed. until), an effect (pre-battle effect) corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223M is executed.

The continuous value storage area 223N is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222F from among the continuous values (HP values) increased or decreased during the continuous effect executed in this control example. Then, based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N, update (increase/decrease) processing of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value secondary selection table 222G. By configuring as above, the increase/decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation effect is increased. Since it is configured to execute only with the continuous value selected based on the can be reduced.

The continuation period counter 223P is a counter for measuring the period during which the continuation effect flag 223R is set to ON, and is used to suppress frequent execution of the final mode (battle reach) in the continuation effect. , is the counter used.

This continuation period counter 223P continues every time the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed in a state where the continuation effect flag 223R is set to ON, that is, each time the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed. 1 is added in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), when it is determined that the counter value is less than "6" (S4003 in FIG. 149: NO), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. Configure. By configuring in this way, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, after the pre-battle effect is executed until the special symbol variation is executed 6 times. be done.

The continuous effect setting counter 223Q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuous effect flag 223R is set to ON) while the game state is set to the variable probability state or the time saving state. It is set so that different continuous effect modes can be easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q. As a result, when the continuous effect is executed for a long period of time and the battle effect is repeatedly set, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of the same mode of battle effect. Further, by setting a continuous effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with a rare effect.

This continuous effect setting counter 223Q is referred to when selecting a new continuous effect mode in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and is incremented by 1 when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous effect ends (when the game state shifts to the normal state, or when a jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuous effect flag 223R is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect mode is selected (that the pre-battle effect is being executed) during execution of the continuous effect, and when the continuous effect mode is selected, set to on. While the continuation production flag 223R is set to ON, the pre-battle production is executed in the same continuation production mode without selecting a new continuation production mode.

This continuous effect flag 223R is set to OFF at the beginning when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149), While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004 in FIG. 149: YES). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (that is, when battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is completed), it is set to OFF (see S4015 in FIG. 149).

The portent setting flag 223T is a flag used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the variable display is switched during the portent effect period. When this precursor setting flag 223T is set to ON, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), when setting a new variable effect, Control is performed so that the precursor performance of the previous variation is continuously executed from the start of the variation.

This sign setting flag 223T has a countdown effect (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141) having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as the look-ahead information in the winning information command process (see FIG. 141), If it is determined that the remaining display fluctuation period is 10 seconds or more (S3234 in FIG. 141: YES), it is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and when it is determined that the portent effect flag 233M is set to ON in the process of S4301 In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) that is executed in , it is set to OFF after setting the effect mode (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223Y is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. The effect counter group 223Y has at least a first effect counter 223Y1 to a sixth effect counter 223Y6, and any counter is an IC for generating random numbers electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. (not shown) is stored in the range of 0 to 198. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC capable of operating at an operating clock (e.g., 1 MHZ) at least for each effect counter, which can be updated to separate random values and execute judgment. is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223Y is used when executing various determinations executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, determination of the announcement type of the normal pressing effect, and the like.

The other memory area 223Z is provided with an area for storing data other than the above-described data and flags other than the above-described flags for setting the state, and other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored. This is an area for storing Specifically, for example, a power-off flag is provided that is used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. This power-off flag receives a power-off command from main controller 110 and is set to ON before power-off processing is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), if the power-off flag is on (3008 in FIG. 138: YES), a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) before the audible lamp controller 113 is activated, i.e., there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231A, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231A is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231A.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND-type flash memory 234A generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, the NAND flash memory 234A has a slow read speed. This may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (DYNAMIC RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . MPU 231 directly accesses character ROM 234 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, and transfers a control program stored in second program storage area 234A1 of character ROM 234 to program storage area 233A of work RAM 233 . An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234A2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, in a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234A, a ROM controller 234B, a buffer RAM 234C and a NOR type ROM 234D.

NAND type flash memory 234A is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234A1 for storing data and a character storage area 234A2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234A has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234A2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

The NAND flash memory 234A can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234A2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234B is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234A or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234A, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234B applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234A. data address translation.

This ROM controller 234B corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234B analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234A and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234A. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234C is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234A. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234B reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234C. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234A (or NOR ROM 234D) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234C. do. Then, the ROM controller 234B outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234C is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234A can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234B, for example, uses the other bank with data set in one bank to output the data in the NAND flash memory 234A to the outside, or the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234A to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234D is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234A. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234D stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234A. At least a first program storage area 234D1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234D1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234A), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231A to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231A, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234C from the NOR ROM 234D while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234D. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234A, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234D. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234A is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234A and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234C. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D into the buffer RAM 234C. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR ROM 234D. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234A). 233A and data table storage area 233B. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234C, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C is transferred to the program storage area 233A. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234D1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 again in the buffer RAM 234C, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 transfers the command pointer 231A to the program storage area 233A. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233A. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234A1. The instruction pointer 231A is programmed to be included in the program storage area 233A, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233A. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or data table storage area 233B. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234D with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 125) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236B or a second frame buffer 236C to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory 234A makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237A composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234A.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237A, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237A when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234C to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235E and an error message image area 235F are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235B and a third pattern area 235D are provided.

The power-on main image area 235A is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235B, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 .

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A from the character ROM 234 when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 121 . FIG. 121 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on varying image area 235B. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235A to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22(C), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit with a special design", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235A until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts playing the game, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 is detected. 121B and 121C, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235B, and the images shown in FIGS. 121B and 121C alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display on the third pattern display device 81 at 10:00 a.m. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B. While the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 can be displayed immediately.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235A until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . can be done. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation has stopped during the time until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. can.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

The back image area 235C is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235C among the rear images will be described. 122A and 122B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 122B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 122, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234 so as to be horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions A and C. As shown in FIG. The image between position C and position D and the image between position A and position A' are composed of images corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction. is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position A and the position A' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back face type and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the position between position A and position A' of the corresponding back face image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position C and position D, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position A to position A'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions A to C by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235C will be described. As shown in FIG. 122(A), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, the positions A to D, on the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. Stored in image area 235C. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235C, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122B, only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back surface, that is, an image between position A and position B, is resident on the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage". It is stored in the rear image area 235</b>C of the video RAM 235 .

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position A to position A' (or the range shown in FIGS. 122A and 122B). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position A and position B including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, which has a slow read speed, if a lottery at the start of the variation determines the change of the stage, the character ROM 234 can be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235C, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. can be displayed. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position A to position B from left to right. The range from position A to position B is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position B' to position D can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, while the range from position A to position B is being scrolled, the image data from position B' to position D can be transferred to normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in rear image area 235C of resident video RAM 235 can After scrolling the range from position A to position B without delay, the range from position B' to position D is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay to scroll the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the back B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236A (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the position B' and the position B. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position B is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By using the image data stored in the RAM 236 to display the image from the position B' on the third pattern display device 81, the back image is scroll-displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position C and the position D is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position A and the position A' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions A and C in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

The third symbol area 235D is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235D, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main patterns (see FIG. 81(B)) with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. be. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable performance, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

Image data corresponding to sub-symbols not attached with numbers are also resident in the third design area 235D. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sub-symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235E is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "young man" and "woman" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character pattern area 235E. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235E. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235F is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235F. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235F, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the error message corresponding to the error command is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236A, a first frame buffer 236B and a second frame buffer 236C.

The image storage area 236A is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236A is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 in subareas provided in image storage area 236A of normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated sub-area of the image storage area 236A via the buffer RAM 237A.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, the image controller 237 can simultaneously expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233A, a data table storage area 233B, a simple image display flag 233C, a display data table buffer 233D, a transfer data table buffer 233E, a pointer 233F, a drawing list area 233G, a timer counter 233H, and a storage image data discriminator. It has at least a flag 233I, a drawing target buffer flag 233J, a total value storage area 233K, and an omen effect flag 233M.

The program storage area 233A is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233A. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233B includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233B. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233B. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , a display data table corresponding to a jackpot middle effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main controller 110) as a display stop type. It is configured to output together with the command and set the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, but other configurations may be used. Divide the display variation pattern command corresponding to one period of special symbol variation (for example, 60 seconds) into a plurality of pieces (for example, first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and second half variation pattern (30 seconds) Display control device 114 By configuring in this way, the game content that occurred during the period in which the first half variation pattern was executed (for example, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, a new ball entry Acquisition of information), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the second half variation pattern can be set.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, after once outputting the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation, when the additional display variation pattern command is received, the additional display variation The processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced because there is no need to perform the process of rewriting the effect content in correspondence with the pattern command. In addition, as described above, the voice ramp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation (eg, 60 seconds) into a plurality of commands (eg, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half When outputting the variation pattern (30 seconds) to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output the display stop type command together with the display variation pattern command that is output first.

Further, in this control example, a display effect command for executing a continuous effect (see FIG. 96) which is continuously executed when the game state is advantageous to the player, and a continuous effect is terminated. The voice lamp control device 113 provides a display final mode command for executing an effect (battle ready-to-win) to notify whether or not the player wins, and other various commands for increasing the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. When various commands are received, effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

Furthermore, even if the presentation contents have already been set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if the additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is responded to. It is configured so as to overwrite the contents of the presentation with the contents. As a result, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, in a state in which the effect for the period corresponding to the predetermined period (variation period of the special symbol) is set (created) in advance, additional during that period When a display command (for example, a player's operation of the frame button 22 or a display command indicating acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display contents of the effect can be changed smoothly.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the specific prize winning port 65A that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. The third pattern composed of sub-patterns with no numerals "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233B stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, A blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The A blending information is information for specifying a known A blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a young man's image, characters, and other characters used for various effects, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back face is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "morning stage", "evening stage", and "night stage"), or Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C (special back faces A to C, etc.), the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display. .

When the type of the back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back faces A to E as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "START" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75) describes the data table. "END" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and the pointer 233F is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233F is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233B can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 124).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, "02F0H") describes "END" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233B and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233E of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233F is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233F is "0002H", NULL data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236A, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233C is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 . The simple image display flag 233C is set to the main image executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235A or the power-on variation image area 235B of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display an image other than the power-on image. , is set to OFF (see S8005 in FIG. 170B).

The simple image display flag 233C is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157B). If the image display flag 233C is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 157B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 157(B) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233C is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170A), and when the simple image display flag 233C is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(B)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233C is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233D stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233B. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233F by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D.

While incrementing the pointer 233F one by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233E stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233B, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233E. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233E by writing NULL data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233F one by one, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. (that is, if NULL data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 125) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236A.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233F is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233F to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (FIG. 167 (B ), the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233F is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233F is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 125), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233G allows the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, ..., error pattern ) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, A blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. processing, blending with other sprites according to the A blending information, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 stores the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F and other image contents to be drawn (for example, the holding number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The clock counter 233H is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157 (B)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233H is decremented by one (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233H becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233I is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233I is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233I generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236A.

The stored image data determination flag 233I is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236A as the one sprite is always unstored by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233I and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236A, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233J is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236B as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236C. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233J, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 157B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. be. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The total value storage area 233K is an area for storing (memorizing) a history displayed (displayed as a total value) as a continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-described continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233K and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display content in the continuous effect (for example, in FIG. 92(A) The decrease value DM12, the display mode of the HP display area DM17, and the effect mode of the attack effect) are determined and displayed.

In other words, in this control example, means (total value storage area 233K) is provided for storing the previously set total value on the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set total value on the sound lamp control device 113 side. The display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous total value and the current total value, and displays a display mode based on the calculation result. Thereby, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In this control example, means for setting the effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuous value (HP value) on the sound lamp control device 113 side (continuous value sub-selection table 222G and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. 150) ) is provided, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting this effect value. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The portent effect flag 233M is a flag for determining whether or not the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If this portent effect flag 233M is ON, it means that the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, and if it is OFF, the portent effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. It means that the The portent effect flag 233M is set to ON when the additional portent command for display transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). In addition, this portent effect flag 233M is referenced in the variation pattern command processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the portent effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations, , is set to OFF (see S6503 in FIG. 159). Thereby, it is possible to execute the sign effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

Although detailed description is omitted, when executing a precursor effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, the effect data of the precursor effect executed in the previous special figure fluctuation and the effect data at the time of execution When setting the effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time (S6502 in FIG. 159), referring to the effect data stored in the above-described storage means, the last time It is configured so that the precursor effect executed in the special figure fluctuation is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the sign effect that is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

In addition, in this control example, the configuration is such that the precursor effect is set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the configuration is such that the precursor effect is executed as part of the variation pattern). Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating execution of an indication effect is received, regardless of the variable display contents, the indication effect is displayed during the period indicated by the command, or the display indicating that the indication effect is stopped. It may be configured to display until a command is received.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2M seconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 238, 199, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After the startup winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is displayed. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51B for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: YES), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: NO), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (number N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is greater than 0 (S204).

When it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is greater than 0 (S204: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (S205), A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E changed by the calculation is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203B are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (S204: NO), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 0 (S209: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is not 0 (S209: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

As described above, in this control example, when executing the process of starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is obtained. When the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is acquired. . By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be preferentially executed.

In addition, the processing for starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example. And, without setting the priority to the special symbol 2, for example, the special symbols may be changed according to the order in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. In this case, a storage area is provided to store the order in which the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, and the special symbol 1 is provided according to the order (ball entrance order) stored in the storage area. The value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter may be acquired, or the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to use a common reserved ball number counter. .

Furthermore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary independently and at the same time. In this case, when it is determined that one of the special symbols is in the middle of a jackpot, the other special symbol stops changing (stops subtraction of the variation time until one jackpot ends), or the other (Even if the fluctuation time has not passed, the lottery result is rewritten to be out and forced to stop). By constructing in this way, in the constitution in which a plurality of special symbols are varied at the same time, when one becomes advantageous to the player, the game can be played without worrying about the variation of the other special symbols. can.

Returning to FIG. 127, the description continues. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variable time has passed (S214: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and when the special symbol jackpot is determined, the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol The jackpot types (jackpots A to K) are determined according to the symbol 2) and the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In this control example, by varying the lighting pattern of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the jackpot types (jackpots A to K), it is possible to identify the hit jackpot type. Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by lighting or extinguishing each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first pattern display device 37 . The lighting pattern of the first pattern display device 37 may be configured to have different lighting colors. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is fluctuating by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and is used in this blinking display. So that the lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stop state of the special design) displayed from the stop of the special design to the execution of the next special design variation is longer than the lighting period of the LED. It consists of Thereby, it is possible for the player to grasp whether the special symbols are fluctuating or stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: YES), an opening scenario for the specific winning opening 65A is set based on the jackpot type (S217). After that, the variable probability flag 203G is reset to OFF, the value of the time saving medium counter 203H is reset to 0 (S218), and the start of the jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1104) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed, branch to S1201: YES, and the opening command is set. be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

When the process of S219 is completed, next, a stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of information about the stop pattern is set (S220), and this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is a loss (S216: NO), the change count subtraction process is executed (S221). Note that the change count subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129 . After that, the process proceeds to the above-described S220 process, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203A. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, a first hit random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B). Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203G of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The variable probability flag 203G is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol. If the flag 203G is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) of special symbols.

If the variable probability flag 203G is on (S302: YES), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the number for the high probability time A lottery result as to whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot is acquired based on a random number table (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, five random numbers from "5 to 9" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random numbers for these winnings. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the determination value for the big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 It is also possible to vary the determination value for a big hit. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be a loss in the special symbol 1 is determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and bias in the big win can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number. The number of determination values that become a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this manner, the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 can have different probabilities of winning a big hit, and when the lottery is executed with the special pattern with a higher probability of a big win, the player wins the big prize. can have expectations of

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the variable probability flag 203G is off (S302: NO), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of special symbols, the first per random number acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first winning random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big win is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value for the special pattern jackpot, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 coincides with "7", the special pattern jackpot is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). ), based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202C, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot Among A to K), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the jackpot A (the number of rounds In the 15th round, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is determined to be the jackpot type set to the probability variable state of the special symbol (see FIG. 107), and "20 to 79". If it is within the range, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot is set to a probability variable state of special symbols regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won).

Also, if the value of the acquired first win type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 114", the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends) It is determined that it is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times), and if it is in the range of “115 to 164”, the jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot) It is determined that the game state after the end is a jackpot type set to a probability variable state of special symbols).

Furthermore, if the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state and not a time saving state In the case (if it is in a normal state), the normal state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot, and if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the end of the jackpot As a game state, it is determined that the time saving state is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Also, when the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 2 (special figure 2), as in the case of special figure 1 described above, based on the contents defined in the first per type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107) Then, the jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37A) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to K). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (jackpots A to K) are set as the stop types.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until the big winning symbol stops. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202D (see FIG. 108) as described above. After the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot (no) (S305: NO), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area) is set. 203B), based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203B), the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is front-rear off-reach, non-front-rear off-ready, or complete. Set whether it is out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S308, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table 202D (see FIG. 108), normal reach, Determines the variation time of symbol variations such as super reach and special reach. After the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 ( S310). Next, a stop type command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127).

Next, the variation count subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this change count subtraction process (S221). In this fluctuation frequency subtraction process (S221), the counter 203H during time saving and the specified number counter 203J are subtracted based on the end of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time saving medium counter 203H is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times the time saving state is set, and the number of time saving times is set when the game state shifts to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot. The stipulated number counter 203J is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202F (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and is a stipulated number of times based on the content of the state transition table set after the end of the big win. is set.

When the process of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203H is greater than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203H is greater than 0 (S401: YES), that is, when the current state is the time saving state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203H (S402), and the time saving counter 203H A remaining time reduction command indicating the value of is set (S403). The command for reducing the remaining time set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136), these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current game state, that is, the remaining time reduction count of the time reduction state from the remaining time reduction count command received as part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223E.

When the processing of S403 is finished, next, whether the value of the counter 203H during time saving is 0, that is, as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the counter 203H during time saving by the processing of S402, the value of the counter 203H during time saving becomes 0 (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203H is 0 (S404: YES), the game state is changed to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. .

On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203H is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: NO), the process of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. Also, in the processing of S401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203H is not greater than 0 (is 0), the processing related to the time saving counter 203H (S402 to S405) is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. .

In the processing of S406, it is determined whether or not the value of the prescribed number counter 203J is greater than 0 (S406). In the processing of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is greater than 0 (S406: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203H (S407), and the remainder indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203J A change count command is set (S408). The remaining variation count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (see FIG. 136). The sound lamp control device 113 extracts the remaining variation count of each state status from the remaining variation count command received as part of the state command, that is, the remaining variation count until the game state and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to are switched. , is stored in the state storage area 223E.

After the processing of S408 is completed, next, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is 0, that is, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number of times counter 203J by the process of S407. (S409). If it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is 0 (S409: YES), state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202F, and the corresponding state command is set (S410).

In this process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202F4 is set as the state transition table 202F, and the value "4" of the specified number counter 203J set for the state status ST3A is subtracted to become "0". When the state status changes from ST3A to ST3, information indicating the state status ST3 and information indicating the newly set specified number of times "96" are set as the state command.

When the process of S410 is finished, the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is set according to the set state transition table 202F (S411), and this process is finished. In the process of S406, if it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203J is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S406: NO), the processes related to the specified number of times counter 203J (S407 to S411) are skipped. End this process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, When there is a starting prize, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is added, the corresponding various counter values are stored in each reserved ball storage area, and from the stored various counter values, the special symbols To execute pre-reading processing for determining a lottery result in advance.

When the starting winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S501: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit (4 in this first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 (S503: YES), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (S504). . Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 136) described later. In the external output process (S1101), it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S505, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the ball has not won (entered) the first winning hole (entering ball hole) 64 (S501: NO), or in the process of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203D is not less than 4 (is 4) (S503: NO), the starting winning process for special symbol 1 is skipped and the process proceeds to S507.

Next, in each process of S507-S512, the same process as each process of S501-S506 is executed for winning (entering a ball) into the second ball entrance 140. FIG. Each of the processes of S507 to S512 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 140 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S507 to S512 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S513), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513). In this look-ahead processing (S513), when there is a new winning (ball winning) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the lottery result of the special symbol for the winning (ball winning) is announced in advance. A process of determining (reading ahead) and setting a command for outputting the result of the preliminary determination (reading ahead) to the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (ball winning) information command) set here, the effect for the pending and stored winning (ball winning) information is produced based on the winning (ball winning) information. It is possible to execute at a time before the special symbol variation is executed.

In this look-ahead processing (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new win (a winning ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new prize winning (entering a ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning (entering ball) at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: YES), from the special symbol reserved ball storage area, (special symbol 1 reserved ball Storage area 203A, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B) The value of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to this winning prize A value is acquired (S602).

Next, among the determination results defined in the first winning random number table 202A (see FIG. 106A), the winning determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Of the determination results defined in the first winning type selection table 202C (see FIG. 107), the winning type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

After the processing of S604 is finished, next, out of the determination results specified in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S605), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202D is obtained. (See FIG. 108) acquires the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 (S606).

Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the variation indicating the variation type determination result obtained in the processing of S603 to S606 described above. A winning information command including type information is set (S607), and this process is terminated.

Winning (winning a ball) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for indicating in advance the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (winning a ball). Good to have. The lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for lottery of special symbols, or the same selection table as the various selection tables described above may be provided for prefetching.

In addition, in the process of S607, the game state information for indicating the game state when the special symbol variation is executed based on the winning (ball winning) information to be the target of the current prefetch processing is added to the winning (ball winning) information command. may be included. Here, the game state information will be explained. In this control example, the game state is configured to be able to set the normal state, the probability variable state and the time saving state, and depending on each game state, the special symbol lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot type, and variation pattern ) and the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the sound lamp control device 113 are configured to be different.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured such that the game state is shifted based on the number of variations of the special symbols. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the game state, on the condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state. migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not the lottery of special symbols based on the winning (entering the ball) to be the target of the look-ahead process is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is the game state information is included in the winning (ball winning) information command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As a result, while the game state is the time saving state, the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol based on the ball that has won (entered) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 changes the game state to the normal state. Even if it is executed after the shift, it is possible to set the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the game state when the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. Further, as the winning (ball winning) information command, only the winning information command corresponding to the game state when the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed is set, and the voice lamp is set. Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data to be output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The method of setting the winning (ball winning) information command by the look-ahead process is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (ball winning) information command. It is sufficient that the content of the effect (read-ahead effect) to be performed contradicts the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the game state.

For example, when setting the winning (ball winning) information command in the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to a plurality of game states can be set, and the sound lamp control device 113 Determines the game state when the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) corresponding to the winning (ball winning) information command is executed, and sets the pre-reading effect based on the winning (ball winning) information corresponding to the determination result. may be configured to do so. This eliminates the need to prefetch the game state in the prefetch processing of the main controller 110, so that the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, as the winning (ball winning) information command corresponding to the above-described plurality of game states, for example, as a jackpot determination result, the first determination result that the jackpot is won in any game state, the game state can be changed Either the second judgment result that the jackpot is won only in the state or the third judgment result that the jackpot is not won in any game state is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 side is made to correspond to the game state. Alternatively, the information indicating the value of each counter obtained in the look-ahead process is output as it is as a winning (ball winning) information command, and the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to be able to determine the lottery result based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main controller 110 in the pre-reading process).

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140A.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140A associated with the second ball entrance 140 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S701: YES), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S702: NO), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (S704: NO), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (S704: YES), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708). Specifically, the value of the counter 203H during time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203G is ON, it is determined that it is a time saving state of normal symbols, and the value of the counter 203H during time saving is 0, And, if the variable probability flag 203G is off, it is determined that it is in the normal state of normal symbols (not in the time saving state).

In the processing of S708, when it is determined that it is normal symbol time saving state (S708: YES), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second winning random number table 202B for high probability time Based on , the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S709). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202B for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202B in FIG. 106(B)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S708, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708: NO), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 and the second winning for low probability time Based on the random number table 202B, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202B for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a winning of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202B in FIG. 106(B)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S709 or S710 is a normal symbol win (S711), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S711: YES). , set the display mode at the time of winning (S712). In the process of S712, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S711, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S711: NO), the display mode at the time of out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal design is in effect (S714). is set to 3 seconds (S715), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S714, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal design (S714: NO), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second design display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), and this processing exit. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability (time saving state), compared to the normal pattern when the probability is low (normal state), the time of the fluctuation display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds". As a result, the lottery frequency of normal symbols increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 140A attached to the second ball entrance 140 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 140. state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the game state of normal symbols is configured to be set to the normal state when winning during the jackpot of special symbols. By constructing in this way, the game state of the normal symbols becomes advantageous during the big winning that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player. In addition, the period during which the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol jackpot period) and the period during which the electric accessory 140A is easy to open (ordinary symbol winning period) overlap, and the variable winning is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric accessory 140A obstructs the winning of the ball to the device 65. - 特許庁

To explain the above contents in detail, when the electric accessory 140A is provided in the first flow path through which the ball flows so that the variable winning device 65 can win a prize, the electric accessory 140A is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path wins the electric accessory 140A, and there is a problem that the ball cannot sufficiently win the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 140A is arranged at the lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open) Although the above-mentioned problem can be solved by using a configuration that makes it easier for the variable winning device 65 to win, in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

On the other hand, in this control example, normal symbols are shifted to a low-probability state (normal state) during the special symbol jackpot, so that the electric accessory 140A becomes difficult to open during the jackpot period, thereby solving the above-described problem. can do.

In the processing of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the processing of S717, if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S717: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S717, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S717: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S718, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the variation display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. (S719). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S719: YES), next, it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving state of the normal design (S720), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state. (S720: YES), sets the opening time and number of opening times of the electric accessory 140A associated with the second entrance 140 to "1 second x 2 times" (S722), and proceeds to the process of S723. . On the other hand, in the processing of S720, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal pattern (not the time-saving state) (S720: NO), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 140A associated with the second entrance 140 is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

In the process of S723, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140A is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and this process ends. By the process of S723, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140A is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the electric accessory 140A The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140A is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S719, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S719: NO), the process of S720 to S723 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: YES), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit (4 in this first control example) (S803).

The ball does not pass through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: NO), or even if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F is If it is not less than 4 (S803: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: YES) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (S803: YES), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203F (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in this first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: NO), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: NO). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. 136, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: NO), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: YES), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: YES), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4M seconds, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 130). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the first control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65A is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65A has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65A. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65A is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 140A associated with the second entrance 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 140A is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 140A is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140A is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this first control example, among the LEDs 37A of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends, the first symbol display device 37 ends the variation display being executed, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 128). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 or the process of S716 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the variable display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S712 or S713 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4M seconds in this first control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time ( S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: YES), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: NO), the second main processing is performed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the timing of executing the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (238 and 239 in this first control example), they are reset to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1108: YES), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 134 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S1001 in FIG. 135) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65A.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: YES), an opening command is set (S1202), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: NO), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1203: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1203: YES), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1204). If it is time to start a new round (S1204: YES), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1206). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1204: NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A is met (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1207, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is established (S1207: YES), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is closed (S1208), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A are not met (S1207: NO), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, when a special game state (all round games set as jackpots (for example, 15 rounds)) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than normal is completed, it is the start timing of the ending effect. and discriminate.

In the processing of S1209, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1209: YES), an ending command is set (S1210), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: NO), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211), and if it is not the end time of the ending effect If it is determined (S1211: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing that all the jackpot games have ended, the first winning type selection table 202C is used. Then, the contents of the variable probability flag 203G and the time saving medium counter 203H are set (S1212). By the processing of this S1212, the game state (presence or absence of variable probability state, presence or absence of time saving state and setting of time saving number of times) after the end of the jackpot corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set.

Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202E, a state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type won this time and the game state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination Based on the table 202F, the state status and the specified number counter 203J are acquired (S1213). For example, in the state where "with high probability time saving (probability variable state)" is set as the gaming state, if you win the "jackpot G" as the jackpot type, "state transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination, the state Of the transition tables 202F (see FIG. 111A), the state transition 2 table 202F2 (see FIG. 111C) corresponding to "state transition 2" is referenced.

After that, set a state designation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the special symbol game state (high probability state (variable probability state), low probability state (normal state)) after the jackpot is completed ( S1214), the end of the jackpot is set (S1215), and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 138, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, initial setting is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S3118 (see FIG. 139) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S3115 in FIG. 139: YES), it executes power-off processing in S3118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: NO), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and S3118 of FIG. , or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAH" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAH", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAH", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003:YES), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: NO), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAH" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: YES), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAH" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: NO), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is ON (S3002: YES), the current start-up process is performed after the momentary power failure, and the power-off of S3118 is performed. It is started when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset during execution of the process. In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFH" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFH", and if it is "0FFH", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFH", "55H", "0AAH", and "00H". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: YES), the keyword "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAH" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: NO), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: YES), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: NO), S3009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010.

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 through the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S3010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing is executed to set reference timing information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time presentation (S3012). , to the main processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 139, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1M seconds or more have passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S3101 was executed (S3101), and 1M seconds or more has passed. If not (S3101: NO), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1M seconds have passed because S3102 to S3112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1M seconds). , command determination processing in S3113, and variable display setting processing in S3114 are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1M seconds or more have elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: YES), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223B1 and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223B2 is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting effects. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) will be described.

In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not an effective period flag indicating a period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively handled is set to ON. Here, if the validity period flag is set to ON, next, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected, the display pressing command corresponding to the pressing of the button is set, and this processing ends.

Note that the valid period flag described above is provided for each effect executed based on pressing of the frame button 22 . For example, if the background of the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81 can be varied based on the depression of the frame button 22, the valid period flag (first valid period flag) is turned on to indicate that effect. If it is a period during which an operation effect that changes the variation effect mode of the third symbol is executed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (a period in which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), that A validity period flag (second validity period flag) for indicating this is set to ON.

Furthermore, in the plurality of valid period flags described above, priority is predetermined corresponding to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of valid period flags are set to ON. When the valid period flag is set to ON, processing based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the valid period flag having the highest priority among the plurality of valid period flags set to ON.

By configuring in this way, when the period during which the pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted overlaps, for example, the period during which the background can be changed (the period during which the first effective period flag is set to ON) and the operation effect is executed (the period in which the second valid period flag is set to ON) overlaps, based on the second valid period flag set with a higher priority based on the pressing of the frame button 22 Since the processing is executed, an effect with a high privilege value can be executed for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81 is also configured to execute the effect for indicating that the second validity period flag is set to ON. Since only the effect corresponding to the validity period set with a high priority is executed, the player can operate the operation timing while watching the effect being executed in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

In this control example, as a method of setting priority to each valid period flag, a configuration is used in which priority is set to each valid period flag in advance, but other configurations may be used. In the button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107), it may be determined whether or not the effective period flag is set to ON in descending order of priority. As a result, even if a plurality of validity period flags are set to ON at the same time, processing based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the validity period flag with the highest priority. It is possible to execute an effect with a high privilege value for the player, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

After frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) ends, lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the process of S3110 ends, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In this various counter update processing, processing for updating various counters used in the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, each counter value of the first effect counter 223Y1 to the sixth effect counter 223Y6 included in the effect counter group 223Y is updated so as not to be synchronized. The first production counter 223Y1 to the sixth production counter 223Y6 are counters used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various productions, and the like. The first effect counter 223Y1 to the sixth effect counter 223Y6 are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1M seconds). each time), an update process is performed so that the values are different.

In this first control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, a plurality of effect counters with different update values are used, so when selecting a plurality of effects in the main process , the same counter value is referred to, and the selection of effects is prevented from being biased. are desired to be synchronized, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in the first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223Y1 to sixth effect counter 223Y6) with different update patterns are used. may be calculated and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the production counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the second digit, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate each value without regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the processing of S3111 ends, next, effect update processing (S3112) is executed. This effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), the effect executed regardless of the variation of the special symbol (for example, the display extension effect executed after the end of the jackpot) is controlled. A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process is executed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S3113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to execute the production corresponding to the special design fluctuation in the third design display device 81 (variation production of the third design and other production), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 Then, a display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . In the processing of S3115, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed. (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: NO), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3116: YES), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S3201). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3201: YES), the variation start flag 223C provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S3203) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to for determining the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S3204). When the stop type command is received (S3204: YES), the stop type selection flag 223D of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: NO), then it is determined whether or not the pending pitch command has been received from main controller 110 (S3207). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (S3207: YES), the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received pending ball number command is displayed in the pending ball number counter. , stores the value contained in the received pending ball count command (S3208), and terminates this process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223B1 of sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B2 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the value of either the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B1 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 is changed in the process of S3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114. A command for the number of pending balls for display is set. Since the actual number of reserved balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this display reserved ball number command, the correct number of reserved symbols can always be displayed in the reserved display area DN4 of the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S3207: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: YES), the winning information command process is executed (S3210), and this process ends.

Here, the winning information command process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process (S3210). This winning information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a winning information command is received from main controller 110, and the information included in the received winning information command is stored in corresponding winning information storage area 223A. Execute processing for storing in the area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command).

Here, the information included in the winning information command is information for winning balls, such as information on the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong, information on the stop type, and information on the variation pattern, but other information is also included. For example, it may include winning information about a ball that has already won a prize (for which a winning information command has been received in the past).

When the winning information command process (S3210) is executed, first, information (prefetch information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223A (S3231). As described above, the winning information storage area 223A can store up to 4 winning information commands for special symbol 1 and up to 4 winning information commands for special symbol 2, for a total of 8 winning information commands. Winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area in accordance with the order in which the winning information commands are received.

Next, as information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time, it is determined whether or not there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232). In the processing of S3232, if it is determined that there is no variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or more) with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is variation type information with a variation time of 60 seconds or more (variation pattern information of reach or more) (S3232: YES), then a specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, a predetermined amount from the start of variation It is determined whether or not there is variation type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that there is a specific effect C (S3233: YES), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the currently executed variation display is 10 seconds or longer (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time) managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113 A remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined.

In the processing of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 10 seconds or longer (S3234: YES), it means that a period is secured for adding a precursor effect to the variation display being executed, so addition for display. A portent command is set (S3235), the portent setting flag 223T is set to ON (S3236), and this processing ends. By executing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute an indication effect across a plurality of variable displays as a suggestive effect targeting the specific effect C to be executed in the next and subsequent variable displays. As a result, the specific effect executed at the beginning of the variable display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the variable display), that is, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed with only one variable display is reduced. Since suggestive effects can be executed using multiple variable displays even for specific effects that are executed at timings that cannot be secured, the frequency of occurrence of suggestive effects can be increased, and the range in which specific effects can be set can be increased. It is possible to widen it, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of presentation regarding the variable display.

In the process of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: NO), that is, if the period during which the suggestion effect can be added to the variation display being executed cannot be secured, This processing ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, if it is not possible to secure a period during which a suggestive effect can be added to the variable display being executed (S3234: NO), the variable corresponding to the winning information determined to have a countdown effect in the current winning information command process (S3210). When setting the display, a specific performance is set within a range in which the suggestive performance can be executed with only one variable display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more have passed since the start of variation), and the suggestive performance is set.

By configuring in this way, the timing (first ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance 64 or second ball entrance) at which the winning information is generated is Depending on the timing at which the ball enters 140, the presentation mode of the countdown presentation can be changed, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display) is changed to a specific effect set in another period (for example, It is defined to be an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. In other words, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is stipulated so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more likely to be selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize in the next and subsequent variations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player ambitiously accumulate special symbols so that a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are displayed. , but other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). may be determined whether or not to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, an omen effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and at the timing of starting the next variable display, a specific effect may be set. , a specific effect is set based on the contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the portent effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Also good. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation after the suggestive effect is started (the lottery result of the next change, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)), the suggestive effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the presentation as compared with the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display that is executed one after another, or it will be executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. A suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the number of pending balls of special symbols is displayed in the pending display area. In DN4, in order to suggest a pending display (a pending pattern) corresponding to winning information indicating a big win, a pending change notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to winning information indicating a big win is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that makes a big hit expected as a special symbol effect that starts to change before.

In addition, in the first control example, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the prize information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (whether or not there is an on-hold renso), and based on the result of the determination, an effect is set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the variable probability state, the content of the effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (read-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the prefetching effect in progress flag) is set to ON and the prefetching effect in progress flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the winning prize included in the prize information command is displayed. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. This suppresses the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without an interval, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In order to solve the above-described problem, control other than the contents described above may be used. Comparing the priority rank of the pre-reading effect currently being given and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command, the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank may be controlled to execute In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead performance is higher, the look-ahead performance switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead performance being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the look-ahead effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the end timing initially set. You can

Further, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. should be set to be high. Thus, when the read-ahead performance being executed ends in the middle, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the big win, and can be made to pay attention to the new read-ahead performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. In the processing of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: NO), then it is determined whether or not a winning related command has been received (S3211), and if a winning related command has been received ( S3211: YES), the hit related command process (S3212) is executed, and after the end of the hit related command process, this process ends.

Here, the contents of the hit-related command process (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process (S3212). In the hit-related command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: YES), the process for setting the effect during the jackpot is executed (S3302). An opening command is set (S3303), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

Here, when the opening command is received (S3301: YES), the content of the effect setting process (S3302) during the jackpot executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S3302) during the big hit. In this jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302), the reservation status at the time of jackpot winning (contents of winning prize information stored in winning prize information storage area 223A and counter value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2 (number of reserved balls)) A process for setting an effect to be executed during the jackpot is executed based on.

Specifically, the result of determining the presence or absence of winning information indicating that the special symbol jackpot has been won, and the result of determining whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit (4) The effect to be executed during the big win is selected using the effect selection table 222C (see FIG. 115(C)) during the big win.

When the jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

Here, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; NO), the reserved rank corresponding to the extracted winning information and the number of reserved balls is read from the reserved rank selection table 222B (S3404), The process proceeds to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0, "1" is read as the pending rank, and the process proceeds to S3406.

A reserved rank selection table 222B is stored at the time of winning a jackpot in order to select a reserved rank based on the degree of expectation that winning information for winning a jackpot again (continuously winning a jackpot) may exist during the reservation at the end of the jackpot. The result of determining whether or not the received prize information includes jackpot winning information, and whether or not there is a possibility that new prize winning information will be stored during the jackpot (whether the number of pending balls is the upper limit or not) ) is determined, and the pending rank is selected. Further, when the jackpot is won, if the number of reserved balls is "0", there is no winning information, so the reserved rank "1" is set without using the reserved rank selection table 222B.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting the effect to be executed during the jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of pending balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, , and the result of the judgment of suitability. Based on the reserved rank selected here, an effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected in the processing of S3406, which will be described later.

By configuring in this manner, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the contents of the winning information, that is, the winning/failing determination result, are executed during the big win. In addition to the effect of congratulating the player for winning the big win, the effect of suggesting the contents of the game after the end of the big win can be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the effect executed during the jackpot is configured to refer to the reservation rank selected by the above-described content. , The type of variation pattern and the transition of the game state (probability variable state, time saving state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all the variations of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved ball are completed) Suspended rank based on information such as may be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described pending rank, the type of jackpot being executed this time, the number of times the winning of the jackpot is continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is within 50 times), and the player's advantage It is also possible to use the so-called number of consecutive games, such as the number of times a jackpot has been won while the game state is continuing, or the operation information indicating the details of the player's operation on the operation means. As a result, more various effects can be executed during the jackpot.

In addition, in this control example, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-described pending rank is executed using the entire main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86(A)). The mode is not limited to this as long as the player can grasp the content during the big win, and the entire main display area DM is used to execute the common big win performance, and a partial area of the main display area DM is executed. It may be possible to execute the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-described reservation rank as a secondary effect executed using , or a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub display device, a lamp device, frame of pachinko machine 10, voice output device). As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the contents of the game after the end of the big win based on the reserved rank, while the production for showing that the big win has been won (the production for showing that the big win is in progress) is shared. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the big win is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and to execute an effect that gives the player expectations after the big win is over.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description is continued. In the process of S3406, based on the read reservation rank and the value of the first effect counter 223Y1, the effect during the big win is read by referring to the effect selection table 222C during the big win (S3406). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect during the jackpot read this time is an additional effect (S3407), and if it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3407: YES), the additional effect flag 223H is set to ON (S3408). , sets a display jackpot middle effect command corresponding to the read jackpot middle effect (S3409), and ends this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S3407, when it is determined that the effect during the jackpot read this time is not the additional effect (S3407: NO), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process of S3409 described above is performed.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: NO), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3304). Here, if the round number command is received (S3304: YES), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the addition effect flag 223H is set to ON (S3306 ).

Here, if the add-on effect flag 223H is set to ON (S3306: YES), at the timing at which a new round is started (that is, at the timing at which the round number command is received), the process for the add-on effect is executed. Since it is necessary to do so, the processing during the addition effect is executed (S3307), then the display addition effect command is set (S3308), and the display round number command is set according to the number of rounds extracted this time (S3309 ), the process ends. The additional effect command for display and the number-of-rounds command for display set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (see FIG. 136) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( S3102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Here, the contents of the process during addition effect (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process during addition effect (S3307). This process during the addition effect (S3307) is a process executed when the effect for addition is selected as the effect during the big hit in the above-described effect setting process during the jackpot (see FIG. 143). This is a process for selecting the display mode of the round number display mode DM10 (see FIG. 86(A)) displayed when the game is being executed.

This process during the addition effect (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined that the round number command is received (S3304: YES) in the hit related command process (see FIG. 142). That is, during the jackpot, every time a new round is started, the above-described process during the addition effect is executed. As a result, the round number display mode DM10 corresponding to the progress of the determined round number display mode DM4 and the running round number display mode DM3 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected.

In this control example, the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional effect is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A in the number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) set for the jackpot being executed. It is configured to add up the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the jackpot. In this control example configured as described above, by executing the processing during the addition effect (S3307) every time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored during the big win corresponds to the big win. Even if there is, it is possible to immediately execute an additional performance reflecting the contents thereof, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

When the process during addition effect (S3307) is executed, first, the number of big winning rounds stored in the big winning information storage area 223F, that is, the number of rounds set for the currently running big winning is read (S3501), and then Then, all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is prize winning information corresponding to a big win in the prize winning information (S3503).

Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: YES), the number of rounds read by the process of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the currently running jackpot) and the winning information A summing process (S3508 to S3511) for summing the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the sum is executed. Note that the addition processing will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the big hit (S3503: NO), the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223G, that is, the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 The number of displayed rounds (“10” in the case of FIG. 86A) displayed in the fixed round number display mode DM4 is read out (S3504), and the number of winning rounds read out in the process of S3501 is read out in the process of S3506. The displayed number of rounds is subtracted (S3505). By the processing of S3505, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed so as to be recognized by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds to be internally executed, that is, the number of rounds The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence or absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, the number of display rounds is selected by referring to the number of addition selection table 222D, and stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223G. (S3506), superimposed display processing is executed (S3507), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, if it is determined that there is prize winning information corresponding to the big win (S3503: YES), the addition process is executed. In this summation process, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read out (S3508). is calculated (S3509).

Next, the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223G, that is, the display round number displayed as the fixed round number display mode DM4 in the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 86 ( In the case of A), "10") is read out (S3510), and the number of display rounds read out in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total number of rounds added up in the process of S3509 (S3511). By the processing of S3511, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed so as to be recognized by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds to be internally executed, that is, the number of rounds The number of unrecognized rounds (number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the processing of S3506 described above, the overlay display processing is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, among the processing during the addition effect (S3307) described above, the processing of S3501 to the processing of S3511 are the processes for setting the display mode of the number of round display mode DM10 during the execution of the effect for addition, and are described above. As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the jackpot. Thereby, the processing for setting the display mode of the effect related to the number of rounds can be executed at the optimum timing.

The execution timing and processing details of the processing for setting the display mode for displaying as the round number display mode DM10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. is started, by configuring to execute the processing during the addition effect, the winning information determination processing (S3502, S3503 processing) and the display round number setting processing (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506 process) and are integrally executed, the above-described winning information determination process is executed in advance at the timing of receiving the winning information command, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. may be configured to execute the display round number setting process described above.

In addition, in this control example, when the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142: YES), it is configured to execute the processing during the addition effect, but during the round game (interval period), the addition effect It may be configured to execute intermediate processing. By configuring in this way, during the jackpot in which various control processes are executed, during a round game (interval period) with a relatively small amount of processing, it is possible to execute the processing during the additional effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load of

In this case, the number of rounds to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command already received, and the above-described processing during the addition effect is performed based on the determination result. good. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to execute the processing during the additional effect each time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even round, a multiple of 5 round) is started Alternatively, a lottery may be conducted to determine whether or not to execute the process during the addition effect, and the process may be executed based on the result of the lottery.

In this control example, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is executed each time a new round is started. A process for determining whether information has been added may be provided, and if no new winning information has been added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the processing that is executed each round.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description continues. After the processing of S3506 is finished, next, the additional display processing (S3507), which is the processing for executing the effect display related to the number of display rounds set in the processing of S3506, is executed, and this processing is finished. Here, the superimposed display processing (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the contents of the superimposition display process (S3507). This addition display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for an addition effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the process during addition effect (see FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds during the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of rounds N (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, i.e., 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of display rounds (fixed number of rounds display mode DM4 ) is updated, and when the number of rounds (i.e., 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) is one before the predetermined number of rounds N (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5), the next round (the predetermined number of rounds N ), an indication effect (see FIG. 85(B)) suggesting that the number of displayed rounds (determined number of rounds display mode DM4) will be updated is executed.

When the additional display processing (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds N (specifically, 5 rounds, 10 rounds , a multiple of 5 such as 15 rounds), which is N−1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that the number of rounds this time is N-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: YES), an omen effect for displaying the fixed number of rounds in the next round (Fig. 85 (B )), a corresponding display selection command is set (S3602), and the process ends.

In this control example, based on the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223G, the effect mode of the aforementioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85(B)) is set. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223G is 10 or more, a production mode in which the number of "treasure chests" displayed during the omen production is reduced (see FIG. 86(B)) or A presentation mode (see FIG. 86(B)) is displayed in which the display mode of the "treasure box" displayed is gorgeous. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict the effect contents of the additional display effect at the time when the precursor effect is executed.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the precursor presentation is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223G. It may be configured to set the performance mode of the portent performance based on the number of rounds (when the number of rounds on hold is determined, the number of rounds including the number of rounds set for the jackpot on hold is also added). As a result, the player can predict the number of rounds internally determined based on the performance mode of the sign performance and the performance mode of the additional performance for adding the number of displayed rounds, and is executed during the big win. You can continue to keep them interested in the production.

Furthermore, in this control example, by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images DM5 to DM7)" displayed during the omen effect, the player can see the future development of the additional effect executed during the big win. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed. For example, display of "arrow (selected image DM8)" for selecting "treasure box (selected images DM5 to DM7)" The aspect (for example, color and size) may be varied, and the sound and LED lighting pattern may be varied. Also, it may be configured such that the period during which the portent effect is executed is varied.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3601, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not N-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: NO), then the number of rounds this time is N rounds ( 5th round, 10th round, 15th round) is determined (S3603), and if it is determined to be the Nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: YES), the number of displayed rounds is stored. An additional display command for display corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223G is set (S3604), and this process is terminated. Also, in the processing of S3603, if it is determined that the current round number is not the Nth round (S3603: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

The superimposed display command for display set in the processing of S3604 described above is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the additional display command for display, it displays the round number display mode DM10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in this control example, the number of display rounds set in the process of adding effect during a specific round (the number of rounds N) is displayed (the display mode of the fixed round number display mode DM4 is changed (added)). However, the display mode of the fixed round number display mode DM4 may be varied (added) at other timings. The lottery means may perform a lottery each time a new round starts, and may set the timing for executing an effect for additionally updating the fixed round number display mode DM4 based on the result of the lottery. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of updating the contents of the determined round number display mode DM4 irregular, and to make the player continue to play the game during the big win while giving the player a sense of anticipation.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the processing of S3306, if it is determined that the addition production flag 223H is not ON (is OFF) (S3306: NO), since there is no need to execute the processing during addition production (S3307), the processing of S3307 and S3308 is executed. It skips and executes the process of S3309 mentioned above, and ends this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the round number command has not been received (S3304: NO), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S3310). When it is determined that an ending command has been received (S3310: YES), an ending command for display is set (S3311), a jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process ends. The ending command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

Here, the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: YES) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the contents of the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312). This post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is a process for continuing to execute the effect executed during the big win in the period in which the big win ends and the variation of the special symbol is executed. This is a process for setting a post-jackpot production corresponding to the executed production.

When the post-jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the jackpot is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223E (S3701), and then the additional effect flag 223H is set to ON. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether the effect executed during the current jackpot is an additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that it is an additional effect (S3702: YES), then it is determined whether or not there is prize winning information indicating that a jackpot has been won in the prize winning information storage area 223A (whether or not the winning information is retained) (S3703).

In the processing of S3703, if it is determined that there is prize winning information indicating that a jackpot has been won (S3703: YES), a post-jackpot command for displaying additional effects is set (S3704), and this processing ends. That is, in the processing of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information that the jackpot has been won (S3703: YES), all the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the processing during the addition effect (S3307) of FIG. 144 is displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the additional effect will continue until the next jackpot is executed (until the change in the special pattern corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information ends). Set the command after the extra production jackpot for display so that it will be displayed.

The post-jackpot command for display that is set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136). , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the command after the display additional effect jackpot, while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the additional effect (Fig. 88(A)). By configuring in this way, even after the end of the big win, the performance executed during the big win can be continuously executed.

In addition, in this control example, the number of display rounds (determined number of rounds display mode DM4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) for the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) set for one big win. Since it is configured, from the production contents of the additional production displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to determine whether the additional production is being executed during one big win or between a plurality of big wins (the first big win is It is difficult to grasp whether it is an additional effect executed during a special symbol fluctuation period executed between the end of the game and the start of the second big win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the number of times of winning big wins or the number of rounds set for one big win while the performance for addition is continuously executed, in an incomprehensible manner to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while making the player expect that the additional effect will continue for a long time (the big win will continue for a long time).

Returning to FIG. 146, the description continues. In the processing of S3703, if it is determined that there is no winning information that the jackpot has been won (S3703: NO), all the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the processing during the addition effect of FIG. 144 (S3307) is the number of display rounds , the addition effect flag 223H is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223G is cleared (S3706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not an additional effect (S3702: NO), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is a continuous winning effect. (see FIG. 84) (S3707). Here, when it is determined that it is the effect for continuous winning (S3707: YES), the command after the big win for the effect for continuous winning for display is set (S3708), and this processing ends.

The post-jackpot command for display continuous winning effect set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the command after the display continuous win effect after the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variable display of the third symbol, and starts the display of continuously executing the continuous win effect. do. By configuring in this way, even after the end of the big win, the performance executed during the big win can be continuously executed.

In the processing of S3707, if it is determined that it is not a continuous winning effect (S3707: NO), that is, if the normal winning effect is executed during the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is a variable probability or a time saving state. It is determined whether there is (S3709), and if it is determined that it is a probability variable or time saving state (S3709: YES), the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is set to "4000" It sets (S3711) and ends this processing.

Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In this control example, the effect during the big win is selected with reference to the effect selection table 222C during the big win shown in FIG. 115(C). As shown in FIG. 115(C), the normal winning effect is the state of all the pending ranks "1" to "4", that is, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured as an effect that can be executed both when the (reserved pattern) contains the information that the jackpot is won (in the case of holding the reservation) and when it is not included (in the case of not holding the reservation). there is

Then, when the game state after the jackpot in which the production for the normal win is executed is the variable probability or the time-saving state, the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the jackpot is changed to a predetermined value after the jackpot. The display is continued until the conditions are met (see FIG. 89(A)). By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbols is executed while the ending display of the jackpot is displayed, and when the jackpot is won, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the ending display screen (Fig. 89 ( B)). As a result, even when the performance for normal win is executed, expectations can be given to the performance during the reservation, and the performance during the big win can be continued and executed in the case of the reservation.

Furthermore, in this control example, as a period during which the jackpot ending display is continued even after the jackpot ends, the number of times the special symbol changes is four times or four seconds after the jackpot ends until any condition is established. The period is set, and in the process of S3711, by setting the value of "4000" to the elapsed time counter 223K, the time elapsed after the end of the big hit (after the special symbol can be changed) are counted.

In this way, the period for executing the jackpot ending display is not set based on the number of variations of the special symbol (for example, four times), but is set based on the elapsed time after the jackpot ends. Even when the special symbols are not varied after the end (when the special symbols are not reserved), the jackpot ending display can be performed only for a limited period.

In addition, in this control example, when a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the end of the big win without the variation of the special symbol being executed after the end of the big win, the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is configured to be displayed.

In the processing of S3709, if it is determined that the game state after the end of the big win is not the variable probability or the time saving state (S3709: NO), the effect executed during the big win is continued during the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed after the big win. The value of the display round number storage area 223G is cleared (S3712) without executing the process of displaying the number of rounds to be displayed, and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 142, the description continues. In the processing of S3310, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3310: NO), processing according to other commands is executed (S3313), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. In the processing of S3211, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3211: NO), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S3213), and if it is determined that the state command has been received (S3213: YES), the current game state is extracted from the received command and stored in the state storage area 223E (S3214).

Incidentally, in the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main controller 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current game state Separately, a process of storing the game state set after the end of the jackpot is executed. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state is distinguished from the state designation command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is established (when the jackpot ends). can be stored as After the jackpot is completed, a state command indicating the current game state is received. At that time, the content of the state command indicating the current game state and the content of the state designation command indicating the scheduled game state are combined. It is also possible to provide determination means for determining whether or not they match, and to determine whether or not the game state is appropriately set based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior such as illegally changing the game state after the end of the big win to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

If it is determined in the process of S3213 that no status command has been received (S3213: NO), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3114). This variable display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223C provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223C is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3801: NO), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S3813. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223C is ON (S3801: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223C is set to OFF (S3802), and then in the processing of S3203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140) , the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 .

Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223I is set to ON (S3803), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S3803: YES), extension management processing is executed (S3804), and S3811 is executed. Go to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extension display effect for continuing (extending) the ending display during the big win even after the end of the big win. This extension management process (S3804) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, if it is determined that the display extension flag 223I is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3803: NO), then the game stored in the state storage area 223E Information indicating the state is read out, and it is determined whether the current game state is a variable probability or a time saving state (S3805). When it is determined that the variable probability or the time saving state (S3805: YES), the continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) executed in the variable probability or time saving state. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3805, if it is determined that the game state is not the probability variation or the time saving state (S3805: NO), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the expectation effect. Determine (S3807). In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the expectation effect (S3807: YES), the expectation effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3811. The expectation level effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 102) for suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. A detailed description of the degree-of-expectation setting processing will be given later with reference to FIG. 151 .

On the other hand, in the processing of S3807, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the expectation effect (S3807: NO), the current variation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. (S3809), and if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a countdown effect (S3809: YES), a countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and S3811 to process. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) informs the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed to suggest that the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit is high during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect (refer to FIG. 98) for playing. This countdown effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3809, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute the countdown effect (S3809: NO), or if the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, S3810 is completed, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222A of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

After completing the processing of S3812, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223D provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S3813). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223D is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3813: NO), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display setting is performed. The process (S3114) is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223D is on (S3813: YES), the stop type selection flag 223D is turned off (S3814). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and if it is determined to be a jackpot type (S3816: YES), acquired in the jackpot information storage area 223F Hit information corresponding to the type of jackpot (number of rounds of jackpot, information on game state set after jackpot) is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, when it is determined that the type is not the jackpot type (S3816: NO), the process proceeds to the process of S3818.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted by the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S3819). ), the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the content of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), a process for managing whether or not the termination condition relating to the number of times of variation of the special symbol is met among the termination conditions for the jackpot ending display that is continuously displayed after the jackpot ends is executed.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter 223J is 0 (S3901). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is 0 (S3901: YES), that is, if it is time to set the first fluctuation display after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON, the fluctuation number counter The value of 223J is set to "5" as a display termination condition (display extension termination condition) for the jackpot ending display (S3902), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S3901: NO), that is, the second to fourth times after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. If it is time to set the second variable display, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable number counter 223J (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variable number counter 223J is "1" (S3904). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is "1" (S3904: YES), that is, it is determined that it is time to set the fifth rotation display after the display extension flag 223I is set to ON. If this is the case, the display extension flag 223I is set to OFF (S3905), and the present process is terminated because one of the end conditions for the display extension is "up to 4 changes in the special symbol". do.

In the process of S3904, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is not "1" (is "2" or more) (S3904: NO), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this process is executed. finish. By configuring in this way, while the end display of the big win is being extended and executed, if the number of times of variation of the special symbol satisfies the end condition of the display extension, the variation corresponding to the next special symbol variation The display extension flag 223I is set to OFF at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ending display from ending during the variable display of the special symbols and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In this control example, when the probability variation or time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, by using a special variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202D4), for a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the end of the jackpot) , a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, if the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit (4) after the end of the jackpot, the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols (4 rotations) rather than the elapsed time (4 seconds) as the end condition of the extension effect The termination condition based on is satisfied first.

Therefore, during the period in which the ending display of the jackpot is extended and executed, many special symbols are varied, and in order to see the special performance (see FIG. 89 (B)), the game is always played with the reserved balls secured. can be performed, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the termination conditions of the extended effect, the effect update process ( S3112). The effect update process (S3112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). This continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) executed during the variable probability or time saving state. Specifically, as a continuous effect (battle effect), the effect mode of the final mode effect (battle reach) that informs whether the probability change or the time saving state ends, and the final mode effect (battle reach) are executed. The effect mode of the effect (pre-battle effect) up to is stored in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 based on the determination result of the special symbol, the variation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle effect. A setting process is executed with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222E, the continuous value main selection table 222F, the continuous value secondary selection table 222G, and the final mode selection table 222H.

This control example is configured such that the above-described continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the variable probability or the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, when the variable probability or time saving state continues for a long period of time, each production (for example, It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the performance of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value).

In addition, when the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final state production (battle reach) occurs at the timing when the game state does not shift from the probability change or the time saving state, the final state production ( "Draw" is selected as the production result of the battle reach), and the pre-battle production starts again. When trying to suppress the change, the final state production (battle reach with victory or defeat) other than the final state production (battle reach with victory or defeat) for indicating that the game state is shifted is frequently executed. , there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the final mode presentation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (the number of fluctuations of special symbols) after the last final mode production (tie battle reach) was executed last time is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol is less than 6 times), the final mode effect (tie battle ready-to-win) with no winning or losing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting tired of the performance due to frequent execution of the draw battle reach in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured to suggest to the player the success/failure determination result in the suspension of the special symbols and the remaining period of the probability variation or time saving state depending on the production mode of the draw battle reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the entire continuous production.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, when the variable probability or time saving state continues for a long time and the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, the continuous production (battle production) of different production modes can be executed, and the player can quickly start the production. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Here, to briefly explain the processing executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example, first, in this variable display, the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect, or before the battle. A process for determining whether or not to execute an effect (execution effect selection process) is executed, and based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process, a process for setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process) or , a process for setting the effect mode of battle reach (second (final) effect mode setting process) are executed.

As described above, in this control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is determined whether the pre-battle effect or the battle ready-to-win effect is to be executed in this variable display. It is possible to smoothly switch the presentation from the pre-battle presentation to the battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a winning variation (variation of winning a special symbol jackpot) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (S4001: NO), next, whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a variation pattern that can execute Battle Reach) ) (S4002), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: YES), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223P is 6 or more (S4003).

In the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter 223P is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: NO), it is determined whether the continuation effect flag 223R is set to ON (S4004). , When it is determined that the continuous production flag 223R is not ON (S4004: NO), that is, when the continuous production is not executed, the continuous production mode is selected based on the continuous production mode selection table 222E (S4005). , The selected continuous production mode is stored in the continuous production mode storage area 223M (S4006), the value of the continuous production setting counter 223Q is incremented by 1 (S4007), and the continuous production flag 223R is set to ON (S4008).

If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223R is not turned on in the processing of S4004 described above, if the first variable display is set after the variable probability or time saving state is set as the gaming state, or the previous variable display is the final This is a mode production (battle ready-to-win), and a case where a new continuous production (pre-battle production) is set in the current variable display.

In such a case, in the process of S4005, an effect mode (effect mode) of pre-battle effect to be executed from the current variable display is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222E. Here, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the continuous effect mode selection table 222E includes the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q) and the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223A. Based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223Y3, a continuous effect mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set, and the selected continuous effect is displayed until the next final mode effect (battle reach) is executed. A pre-battle production based on the mode is executed.

In this control example, when the continuous effect flag 223R is set to OFF, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is prefetched, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the result of the prefetching. A configuration is used in which a process for setting a variable display mode is executed based on the set continuous effect mode each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, but the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read in advance. However, any configuration other than that used in this control example may be used as long as it is configured to execute an effect based on the look-ahead result. For example, when the continuous effect flag 223R is set to OFF, The stored winning information is read in advance, and the display mode of the variable display to be executed this time and the display mode of the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A are set in advance based on the result of the prefetching. It may be configured to

On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223R is set to ON (S4004: YES), or when the process of S4008 is completed, the value of the duration counter 223P is incremented by 1 (S4009). . As a result, the value of the continuous performance setting counter 223Q can be varied when the continuous performance mode is selected next time, and it is possible to suppress the continuous selection of the same continuous performance mode.

In addition, in this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous effect mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is 1), a specific condition (holding hit ) is established, in order to be able to execute a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is added by 1, but the same continuous effect mode continues. Other configurations may be used to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection by

For example, the value to which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is added may be determined by lottery (for example, a lottery value from -5 to 5). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity of selecting the continuous effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q may be increased based on the operation result of the frame button 22 by the player. The value of the continuation effect setting counter 223Q may be added based on the number of times the jackpot has been won consecutively without being hit) or the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuation effect mode is selected.

After the process of S4009 is completed, next, a continuation value setting process is executed (S4010). Details of the continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4011, an effect command indicating the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as a pre-battle effect among the continuous effects. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuation effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. .

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. , and transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a pre-battle effect.

The processing from S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting processing (S3806) described above corresponds to the execution effect selection process, and the processing from S4004 to S4011 is the process of setting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode setting process).

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the current variation is a winning variation (S4001: YES), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223Q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. Also, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: YES), that is, if the pre-battle effect continues for 6 special symbol variations or more, the process proceeds to S4013. Transition.

In the process of S4013, the performance mode of battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (S4013), and the corresponding display final mode command is set (S4014). The final mode command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display final mode command, the third symbol display device 81 performs battle reach using the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 93(A)). is executed. By configuring in this way, the effect can be switched from the pre-battle effect to the battle ready-to-win effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

After finishing the processing of S4014, next, the continuous production flag 223R is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous production mode storage area 223M is cleared (S4016), and the value of the duration counter 223P is cleared to 0 (S4017). , the process ends.

As described above, in this control example, a pre-battle effect is executed as a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations that are executed while the game state is set to a variable probability or a short time state, and a specific one It is configured to execute the final mode production (battle reach) for special pattern fluctuations (hit fluctuations of special patterns and loss fluctuations in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected), but other than that Also, for example, it may be configured to execute the final mode effect (battle reach) using the variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (results of winning/failure judgments in the hold and variation patterns) (based on the results of prefetching), the production mode of the final mode (battle ready-to-win) is displayed in each variable display. It is preferable to configure the setting so as to correspond to . Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the final mode effect (battle ready-to-win) which is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

Also, when using a configuration that executes the final mode production (battle reach) across a plurality of special symbol variations, all the display modes displayed in the final mode production (battle reach) are targeted. It may be configured to be set in advance for each special pattern variation, or only the production contents of the battle reach, that is, the attack pattern and the production result are set in advance, and the continuous value (HP value) increase/decrease display control is performed. may be configured to be set each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of final mode effects (battle ready-to-win) preset based on the look-ahead result.

Next, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process (S4010). This continuous value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuous value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuous effect. In this control example, when setting the value of this continuous value (the value of the continuous value after variable), the value selected based on the lottery of the special symbols (the value of the hundred's place of the HP of the opponent), and the production It is set so as to add up the value selected based on the lottery (tenths place value of the opponent's HP). This makes it possible to increase the variation of displayed continuation values.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is time to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222A of the sound ramp control device 113 is continued based on the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. Determine if it is a pattern that changes the value.

In this control example, as described above, the timing for changing the continuous value (HP value) is determined based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222A of the sound ramp control device 113. In addition, a measurement means is provided for measuring the number of times that a variation pattern that does not change the continuous value is continuously selected, and when the number of times measured by the measurement means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), forced Forcible change means for continuously changing the continuous value, and change control means that does not change the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern when the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measuring means is a specific number (for example, once). You can set it. By configuring in this way, the continuous value (HP value) is not changed at all during the continuous effect (during the pre-battle effect) and the player gets tired of the effect (pre-battle effect), and the continuous value is frequently increased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which (the HP value) is changed and the content of the presentation becomes difficult to understand.

Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the operation result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 or the result of prefetching the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. Further, the continuous value change timing is set based on the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuous value (HP value) selected from the continuous value main selection table 222F. It is also possible to change the frequency of

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the time to change the continuation value (S4101: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to change the continuation value (S4101: YES), the value in the hundreds place of the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuation value The continuous value selected based on the main selection table 222F) is stored in the continuous value storage area 223N (S4103). Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) executed when the continuation value is changed is set to the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N, that is, the continuation value main It is configured to refer to and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222F.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104). Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222G1 (see FIG. 117B), the effect value (ten's place value) is selected (S4105), and if it is determined to be less than 200 (S4104; Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222G2 (see FIG. 117(C)), an effect value (tens digit value) is selected (S4106). A continuous value is calculated by summing the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 117(B) and 117(C), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222G1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222G2 are selected effect values (tens digit values). ) are configured differently, the first continuous value sub-selection table 222G1 defines the range of selectable effect values as "-20 to +20", and the second continuous value sub-selection table 222G2 is selectable. The range of effect values is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222G2 is configured so that a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. This is because, in the pre-battle effect, for example, when "0" is selected as the continuation value (the value in the hundred's place) based on the continuation value main selection table 222F, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223N Although "0" is set as a stored value, the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not "0" (for example, "20 ”) This is a configuration for suppressing execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort due to the value being displayed.

In this way, the value of the continuation value (hundreds digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F is discriminated, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the discrimination result. In the normal mode (continuation value is 200 or more), the value of the continuation value (HP value) can be varied in both positive and negative directions, increasing the variation of effects and increasing the continuation value. If it is less than 200, the value of the continuous value (HP value) is changed only in the negative direction, thereby suppressing contradictions in the presentation.

Then, after the processing of S4105 or S4106 is completed, the continuous value (value in the hundreds place) selected in the processing of S4102 and the effect value (value in the tens place) selected in either S4105 or S4106 are are added to calculate a continuous value (HP value) (S4107), a display sum command corresponding to the calculated continuous value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this control example, variable management of the continuation value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increase or decrease display) while the continuation effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (hundreds' value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F and the continuation value (HP value) selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222G 10's digit) and , but only the continuation value (100's digit) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F. By configuring in this way, the number of patterns for performing variable management of the continuous value (HP value) can be reduced with respect to the display pattern of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can reduce the processing load.

Furthermore, in this control example, even if the continuation value (HP value) is variably managed only with the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation value (HP value ) and the display contents of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to be different, so that the processing load is reduced while the continuation effect is suitable. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the sound lamp control device 113 of this control example, a continuous value is selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222F and the continuous value sub-selection table 222G, and information (command) indicating the selected continuous value is displayed by the display control device. 114. Then, only the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222F is stored in the continuation value storage area 223N, and the continuation value is repeatedly managed to increase or decrease based on the stored continuation value.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but in this control example, the display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the attack pattern display mode to be executed and a variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) are set and displayed by the display control device 114 . In other words, the display control device 114 has an area (total value storage area) for storing the summed continuation value when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the sound lamp control device 113. and calculating the difference between the total value stored in the total value storage area and the total value calculated from the command related to the continuation value received this time, and attack pattern display mode based on the calculated difference value; A variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferably execute the continuous effect while reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a continuation value sub-selection table 222G for selecting the continuation value for effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuation value for effect. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration for selecting a continuous value for effect (for example, a continuous value sub-selection table 222G). By configuring in this way, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

Further, in this control example, when a continuation value is selected from the continuation value main selection table 222F, the continuation value secondary selection table 222G is also referred to to select the continuation value for effect. Other configurations may be used. For example, even if no continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F (for example, S4104 in FIG. 149: NO), the continuation value for effect ( It may be configured to increase or decrease only the tens place value). As a result, it is possible to finely set the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this control example, only values that are less than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N) are selected as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that a value increased from the current continuous value is selected. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuation value is selected, as the effect mode of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value is selected instead of the normal attack effect. It is preferable to configure so that a recovery effect for recovering (HP value) is executed. In this way, by using the configuration for increasing the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect, it is possible to increase the variation of the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, It is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit (for example, “0”) even if the value (HP value) is frequently varied (increased or decreased).

In this control example, the HP of the character is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation effect. ) is set to the player based on a variable value. The number of operations performed (times) may be used.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is "0", the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is In order to prevent a value greater than "0" from being set, if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222F is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), Although it is configured so that a positive value is not selected as the continuation value, other configurations may be used. may be configured so as not to select the effect continuation value (selection using the continuation value sub-selection table 222G).

Further, as in this control example, out of the different control devices (sound lamp control device 113 and display control device 114), the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) performs the process of setting rough presentation contents. In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing a process for setting a specific display mode of the effect in the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control device 114) is output to the first control device (sound lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (sound lamp control device 113) performs processing for setting rough presentation contents. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the allowable range, and if it is within the allowable range, the next performance content is set as it is. Execute the process, if it is out of the allowable range, correct the information about the rough effect content set at the time of setting the previous effect content, and based on the correction result, execute the processing to set the next effect content, When the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) has not been received at the timing of setting the next effect content, a process of postponing the timing of setting the next effect content is executed. It may be configured as

By configuring in this way, the next effect can be set in correspondence with the effect mode already displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114). The performance can be continuously executed without giving a sense of incompatibility. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is outside the allowable range, the processing result is within a wider range than the error range set as the allowable range. It is determined whether it is within the limit range, and if the determination result is within the limit range, the effect can be set continuously by performing the above-mentioned correction, and if it is outside the limit range, the above-mentioned It is preferable to forcibly end the presentation without performing correction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the expectation effect setting process (S3808) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the contents of the expectation effect setting process (S3808). This expectation level effect setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation level display mode displayed during the special symbol change effect to determine whether or not the current special symbol change wins the jackpot. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, three types of expectation degree display modes DK1 to DK3 (see FIG. 102(A)) are displayed as the expectation degree effect in response to the elapse of time of the special symbol variation. Then, an expectation increase mode DK4 for changing any of the expectation level display modes to a display mode with a high expectation level is displayed, and any one of the expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 is displayed. Execute the production so that is variable. In addition, processing for setting the display timing for setting the timing at which the expectation degree increasing mode DK4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, since the three types of expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3 described above are configured to be displayed at different timings, depending on the timing at which the expectation level increase mode DK4 is displayed, the expectation level rise The target of the expectation level display mode whose display mode is variable can be changed according to the mode DK4. As a result, even when the same expectation level rising mode DK4 is used, different performance contents can be achieved only by changing the timing of displaying the expectation level rising mode DK4, and the storage capacity of image data can be reduced. can do.

In this case, only a still image (for example, a character image) having a small amount of image data may be displayed in correspondence with the expectation degree display mode that increases the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, in the present control example, display modes that serve as references for the three types of expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 are determined in advance according to the level of the expectation effect mode. As a result, it is possible to form a set of display modes of three types of expectation level display modes DK1 to DK3, which are composed of a plurality of combinations, and to reduce the processing load of display processing. In addition, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is determined according to the level of expectation rendering mode, it is possible to prevent the level of increase in the level of expectation from becoming biased.

In addition, it is set according to the final display mode (display mode that can be displayed after the end of the expectation performance) of the three types of expectation display modes DK1 to DK3 set based on the variation pattern, and the level of the expectation performance mode. If there is a difference between the standard display mode and the standard display mode, the expectation level increase mode DK4 is displayed when there is a difference in any of the expectation level display modes. The effect can be executed while expecting that the display mode of the degree-of-expectation display mode will change to a display mode showing a higher degree of expectation.

When the expectation effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the current level of expectation is selected based on the expectation level selection table 222I (S4201), and then the standard display mode is displayed based on the expectation level effect selection table 222J. is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation level presentation mode level, the display mode of each expectation level display mode predetermined for the expectation level presentation mode level and the actual expectation level presentation mode (each expectation level display set based on the variation pattern display mode) is extracted (S4203).

After completing the processing of S4203, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and if it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation degree display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference The display timing of the expectation level increasing mode DK4 is determined (S4206). Next, the difference for each expectation degree display mode is summed up (S4207), the display contents (display mode, display timing) of the expectation level increase mode are determined based on the summed difference (S4208), and the expectation level effect is displayed. is set (S4209), and a high-display expectation level target mode notification command for informing the expectation level display mode targeted for the expectation level increase mode is set (S4210).

Specifically, the processing of S4208 described above will be described first. executed. Further, the difference discriminating means discriminates the degree of expectation display mode in which the difference occurs, determines a plurality of timings at which the degree of expectation display mode can be set based on the discrimination result, and selects one of the determined plurality of timings. , one timing is selected based on the degree of expectation selected by referring to the degree of expectation selection table 222I. As a result, the difference between the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation level display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by the expectation level increasing effect. Therefore, it is possible to set one timing to set the degree-of-expectation increase mode DK4, so that variations of effects can be increased without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above example, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation level display mode DK4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. , the display mode of the expectation level display mode DK4 is set based on the expectation level selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222I, and the display contents of each expectation level display mode are determined based on the set content. It may be configured as follows.

Next, referring to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). This countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the received variation pattern is the variation pattern for executing the countdown effect. A countdown effect that accurately informs the execution timing of the specific effect as a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player the execution timing of the specific effect that is executed during the variable display. A process of setting a performance mode, a process of setting a performance mode of a sign performance for suggesting that the countdown performance will be executed, and a specific performance determination process of determining a specific performance to be the target of the countdown performance are executed. do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223T is set to ON (S4301). If it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223T is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4301: NO), the suggestive effect can be executed among the plurality of specific effects included in the current variation pattern. One specific effect set in the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects A and B (see FIG. 100B)) other than the specific effect (specific effect C (see FIG. 101)) executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggestive effect, set any.

When the processing of S4302 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is a winning variation pattern (S4303: YES), the indication display A (timing 10 seconds after the start of variation (Fig. 100 (B) (see)) is set (S4304), and in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not win (no) (S4303: NO), as the start timing of the precursor effect Precursor display B (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific effect (the start timing of the premonition effect) can be set based on the lottery result of the variation (result of determination).

In the above-described example, based on the lottery result of the variation (result of judgment), the configuration is used to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the precursory effect), but based on other conditions It may be configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect), for example, the operation result of the player's frame button 22 or the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) based on the result (prefetch result), the time measurement result of the time measuring means (for example, real time clock) for measuring time, the past game history, etc. You can

In this way, in one variable display (variation pattern), a plurality of timings (suggestive effect start possible points) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestive effect (predictive effect) are prepared, and the various conditions described above are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one of a plurality of suggestive performance start possible points is set based on the point, the degree of freedom of the suggestive performance to be executed can be increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the process of S4304 or S4305, when the start timing of the precursor effect (suggestive effect) is set, next, a countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the predictive effect (suggestive effect) ( S4306).

This process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. specified effect), and in the process of S4304, when the portent display A (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100B)) is set as the start timing of the portent effect, the countdown period is 7 Seconds are set, and in the processing of S4302, the specific effect targeted for the suggestive effect in the current variable display is set to the specific effect A (the specific effect to be executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and in the process of S4305, the predictive effect is set. 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(B))) is set as the start timing of , 3 seconds is set as the countdown period.

Next, the timing for starting the countdown effect (display timing for the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing for the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the timing for starting the precursor effect and the display timing for the countdown effect are calculated. The interval, that is, the predictive effect period during which the predictive effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the processing of S4307, it is determined whether or not the calculated interval (prediction effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308). If it is determined that the interval (predictive effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: NO), the long effect is set as the predictive effect mode (S4309). A mode is set (S4310).

When the process of S4309 or S4310 is completed, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, portent effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the portent setting flag 223T is set to ON (S4301: YES), that is, in the winning information command process (see S3210 in FIG. 141), the portent effect has already been executed (a plurality of If the precursor effect is executed across the variable display), the multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, then the above-described process of S4311 is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this multiple variation effect setting process (S4312), the predictive effect continuation execution process for continuing the predictive effect executed during the previous variable display and the countdown effect for the specific effect corresponding to the predictive effect are set. and the processing to be performed.

When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display precursor command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the precursor effect simultaneously with the start of the current variation (including a time difference that the player cannot identify). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the portent effect continuously from the previous variable display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example is means for determining whether or not the portent effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends (the port setting flag 223T is turned on from the sound lamp control device 113). means for determining that a command indicating the setting is received), and when it is determined by the determining means that the predictive effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends, the predictive effect being executed is determined. A performance data storage area for temporarily storing the data together with time data indicating the timing at which the variation ends; restart display means for restarting and displaying from the time when the variable display of is completed, and when the predictive effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a series of predictive effects (for example, the car to the destination The effect of running toward the target (see FIG. 98(A))) can be executed without interruption.

Furthermore, in this control example, since it is configured to output a display precursor command as a display variation pattern command indicating the variation display of the special symbol, a plurality of variations are straddled in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing of the effect (continuous effect) executed in . Therefore, based on the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect mode of the period until the special symbol variation is completed is displayed. A continuous effect can be executed using the process, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in such a configuration, when executing a continuous effect that continues the dynamic display even during the special symbol stop period (symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds)), based on the variation pattern command A continuous effect is set with a length obtained by adding the symbol fixing period described above to the calculated fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to smoothly execute the continuous effect even during the period during which the special symbols are determined, that is, during the period between the continuous variation patterns.

It should be noted that a configuration other than this control example may be used as long as it is possible to execute a series of predictive effects without interruption when the predictive effects are executed across a plurality of fluctuations. Execute the precursor effect without setting the precursor effect period (end timing of the precursor effect) in the previous variable display, and set the end timing of the precursor effect based on the timing at which the countdown effect is executed in the current variable display. can be configured to

Returning to FIG. 153, the description continues. After completing the processing of S4403, next, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223T is set to OFF (S4405), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the rendering update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing effect update processing (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the variation of the special symbols. This is a process for setting effects.

When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is greater than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5101: NO), that is, if the elapsed time is not being counted, processing related to elapsed time measurement is executed. It skips and shifts to the processing of S5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is greater than 0 (S5101: YES), the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is decremented by 1 (S5102). It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S5103: NO), the process proceeds directly to S5108.

In the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223K is 0 (S5103: YES), then the display extension flag 223I is set to OFF (S5104), and the special symbol is currently fluctuating. It is determined whether there is (S5105). In the processing of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S5105: NO), normal display for notifying the display control device 114 of ending the extended display of the ending display of the jackpot A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently fluctuating (S5105: YES), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5107. By configuring in this way, when the extension effect (effect of extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot) is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time condition (4 seconds elapsed), which is one of the termination conditions of the extension effect ) is established, if the special pattern does not fluctuate, the extension performance is immediately terminated, and if the special pattern fluctuates, the display extension flag 223I is set to OFF, and the next special pattern fluctuation starts. When the extended performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extended performance suddenly ends during the variation of the special symbols and confuse the player, and at the same time, complicated performance setting processing when the extended performance ends during the variation of the special symbols can be eliminated. Since there is no need to execute this, the processing load can be reduced.

In the processing of S5108, processing related to updating of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, processing related to presentation based on time information acquired from a real-time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231A provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D in the buffer RAM 234C. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the character ROM 234 stores that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234A and set in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234D, thereby speeding up the NOR-type ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234C and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 156, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234A capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233B is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR-type ROM 234D and set in the buffer RAM 234C after the system reset is released is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234A1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233A (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A by the process of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231A to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233A by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231A is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231A is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A among the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A are transferred to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233B.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231A is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are all configured by the DRAM. The program storage area 233A and the data table storage area 233B of the work RAM 233 are transferred and stored. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234A. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234D with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233A. 231A may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently transferred to the program storage area 233A. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233A, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set in the command pointer 231A at step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234D1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233A at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233A. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A.

In this control example, the first program storage area 234D1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in one program storage area 234D1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233A, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233A, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 155 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. Transferred to image area 235A.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235B, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235B is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233C is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233C indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157B), the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 157B) and the simple display setting processing are performed so that the power-on image is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157B) is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234A for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is mainly When received from the control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and the simple variation presentation is performed. It can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(A). FIG. 157A is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(B). FIG. 157B is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: NO), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the command determination process (S6302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233D. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233C is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236, even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. - 特許庁Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172 .

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to (out) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233C is ON (S6301: YES), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: YES), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 159(A). FIG. 159(A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, it is determined whether or not the portent effect flag 233M is set to ON (S6501). Here, when it is determined that the portent effect flag 233M is set to ON (S6501: YES), that is, when the portent effect is executed continuously from the previous fluctuation, the portent effect is executed from the start of the fluctuation. To do so, the variable display data table corresponding to the portent effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the portent effect flag 233M is set off (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation is obtained. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extraction information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the precursor effect executed during the previous special figure fluctuation is configured to be executed in this special figure fluctuation. . As a result, the portent effect can be displayed smoothly even when the portent effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In this control example, the content of the precursor effect executed during the previous variation is stored, and the continuation of the stored precursor effect is executed in the current variation, but other configurations may be used. Also, for example, the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and in the current change, the previous change It may be constructed such that the effect block set next to the effect block executed in the middle is executed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the management of the portent effect that is executed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In addition, in this control example, as the precursor effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only two variations of the precursor effect can be executed. If it is determined that there is, the current fluctuation is the end fluctuation of the predictive effect, so the predictive effect flag 233M is set to OFF in the processing of S6503. If it is configured to be executed across, a counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period (number of times of special symbol fluctuation) during which the portent effect flag 233M is set to ON and storage means (for example, performance continuation number storage means) for storing how many fluctuations the predictive effect being executed continues, and the value of the predictive effect counter is set each time the variation pattern command process is executed. is updated, whether or not the updated value matches the value stored in the performance continuation frequency storage means is discriminated, and when it is discriminated that they match, the portent performance flag 233M is set off.

In the process of S6501, if it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233M is not ON (is OFF) (S6501: NO), or if the process of S6503 is finished, then the variable effect indicated by the display variation pattern command A variable display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, the determined variable display data table is read out from the variable effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B, and set in the display data table buffer 233D ( S6504).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233D, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect having time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233D is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S6505).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6504, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (S6506), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 159A), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S6507, the display data table buffer 233D is stored by the process of S6504. From the set variable display data table, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E by the processing of , and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233H to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable performance in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

In this control example, when the portent effect flag 233M is set to ON (S6501: YES), the variation display data table corresponding to the portent effect and the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern command are displayed. is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the indication effect is preferentially displayed where the display data overlaps. Specifically, the layer in which the precursor effect is executed and displayed is provided with priority over the layer in which the normal variable effect is executed and displayed. The player can visually recognize the contents displayed on the effect layer.

It should be noted that any configuration may be used as long as the aspect corresponding to the precursor effect is displayed with priority over the aspect corresponding to the normal effect. The display data for the normal effect set based on the above may be discriminated, and only the display data to be visually recognized by the player may be set in the display data table buffer.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: YES), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 159B. FIG. 159B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, or complete loss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (B)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S6603), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235D of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: NO), then it is determined whether there is a win-related command for display among the unprocessed commands. The win-related command for display is a command to be referred to when the jackpot is won, and specifically, an opening command for display for indicating the start of the jackpot, a number-of-rounds command for display, and an ending for display. Executed when a command or the like is received.

Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the win-related command process (S6409) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process (S6409). The hit-related command processing (S6409) executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

When the hit-related command process (S6409) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display (S6701), and if there is an opening command for display (S6701: YES), the opening command process is executed. (S6702), and the process ends. This opening command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161(A). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is no display opening command (S6701: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703).

In the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: YES), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process ends. The round number command processing (S6704) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161(B). Then, in the process of S6703, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: NO), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705), and if there is a display ending command (S6705: YES), an ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process ends. This ending command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6705 that there is no ending command for display (S6705: NO), this process ends.

Next, the opening command process (S6702) executed in the win-related command process of FIG. 160 will be described with reference to FIG. 161(A). FIG. 161(A) is a flow chart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S6801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S6803), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S6801, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233F and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233E is transferred by the processing of S8702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236A.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234A for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the ending command for display instructing the start of the ending effect is matched with the timing when all the round effects (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. Therefore, if the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect will end. A lot of waiting time occurs between the start of the ending effect and the start of the ending effect, which may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or to have a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 16 rounds). , or for two rounds), the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player may feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel uncomfortable. do not have. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in this control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third pattern display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, when the variation performance that becomes a big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the opening performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. 161(B). FIG. 161B is a flow chart showing the content of the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number rendering table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S6901). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233H (S6903), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the present process is terminated.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command process (S6706) executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ending command process (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233B for the ending effect. It reads from the table storage area (not shown) and sets it in the display data table buffer 233D (S7001). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7001, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S7003), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot has ended. can be made

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hit-related command (S6408: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an image change command (S6410: YES), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 163, the details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the back image change command process (S6411). The back image change command processing (S6411) is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the back image change command process (S6411), first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S7101). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C and special back faces A to C corresponding to time effects), the back face corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command The image determination flag is turned on, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S7102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image determination flag set by the process of S7102 is used to determine the post-change image. Specifies the back image type of the . If the specified back image type is back B or C, image data corresponding to the back images are not resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is not stored. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. If the back image type after change is back A, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so no image transfer is performed.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any one of the back faces A to C and the special back faces A to C corresponding to the time effect according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, Based on the background image determination flag set by the processing in S7102, the type of the background image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the range of the background image is determined. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there is no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the rear image change command. In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233X corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). Otherwise (S6412: YES), error command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163B is a flowchart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the error command process (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning to the description of FIG. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: NO), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: YES), continuation value-related command processing (S6415) is executed, processing corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 164, the details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing continuous value related command processing (S6415). This continuation value related command processing (S6415) executes processing corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the continuous value related command processing (S6415), first, the continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7301). A value (total value set when the previous command was received) is read out (S7302), and a difference from the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, the display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the processing of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233K. (S7305). The total value storage area 233K is configured to be able to store the total values indicated by the commands received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed in the order in which the commands are received. Furthermore, the value of the difference calculated in the process of S7303 can also be stored.

As a result, for example, when the received total values continuously satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, when 7 is added to any of the total values in succession), A special attack pattern display data table can be set when the number of consecutive differences is a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more).

After completing the process of S7305, the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233E are cleared by writing NULL data (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S7307), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S7309), the continuation value-related command processing is terminated, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the sound ramp control device 113 only outputs a command indicating the total value of the continuous value (HP value), and the total value set in the previous continuous value-related command process is , and the value of the difference is determined on the display control device 114 side, and the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the determination result is executed by the display control device 114 Running. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced while diversifying the display of the continuation value (HP value) in the continuation effect (battle effect).

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 has means for setting the total value, and the display control device 114 has difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the total value set last time and the total value set this time. and a means for setting the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 has means for setting the first continuation value (the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222F) to vary the continuation value (HP value). and all other means (means for setting the second continuation value (continuation value selected using the continuation value sub-selection table 222G) for varying the continuation value (HP value), the previously set sum Means for setting the difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the value and the total value set this time, and the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Display control device 114 or only the attack pattern among the above means may be set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

Returning to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: NO), then it is determined whether there is an expectation level effect related command (S6416), and if it is determined that there is an expectation level effect related command (S6416: YES), the expectation effect related command process (S6417) is executed, and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the expectation level effect related command process (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the expectation level effect related command process (S6417). This expectation effect related command processing (S6417) executes processing corresponding to the expectation degree related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the expectation level effect related command process (S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation level effect related command is set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7402).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7402, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (S7403), and the pointer 233F is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404) and returns to command determination processing.

In this control example, in the expectation effect setting process (see S3803 in FIG. 151) set and executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the display mode at the start of the expectation effect (see FIG. 102A) and , the display mode (see FIG. 103(A)) that is the effect result (final display mode), the expectation level effect command for display to indicate the expectation level effect display mode, and the expectation level display mode to be notified in the expectation level effect. A display expectation level target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103B) is set including information indicating display timing.

Then, in the expectation level effect related command process (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display mode corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode (see FIG. 102A) at the start of the expectation level performance is displayed corresponding to the timing at which the expectation level performance is started, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation level performance is displayed. (see FIG. 102(B)) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the current expectation level increase effect includes information for notifying the expectation level display mode to be notified, the display mode is displayed corresponding to the display timing information included in the command. display in time. After that, the display mode (see FIG. 103A), which is the effect result (final display mode), is displayed.

In addition, if the player is configured to be able to select which of the plurality of displayed expectation level display modes is the expectation level display mode that is the target of the expectation level increase effect, the selection result (correct answer or A command for indicating incorrect answer) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and whether or not to display the final display mode is determined based on the contents of the received command. That is, if the player's selection result is correct, each information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) is sent to the expectation effect related command process (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect, each information included in the display expectation effect command (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing), The setting information regarding the display of the final display mode is cleared, and display processing is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no expectation level effect related command (S6416: NO), then it is determined whether there is a countdown effect related command (S6417). In the process of S6417, when it is determined that there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417: YES), the command process related to the countdown effect is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the countdown effect related command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command process (S6419). This countdown production related command processing (S6419) executes processing corresponding to the countdown production related command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the countdown effect-related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether or not there is an additional precursor command for display (S7501). In the case of executing the sign effect continued from the display, the additional sign data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the additional sign command for display is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and corresponds to the display data table set in S7502. The transfer data table to be used is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7503).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S7503, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (S7504), and the pointer 233F is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to command determination processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7501, if it is determined that there is no display use precursor command (S7501: NO), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S7507).

Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S7507, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (S7508), and the pointer 233F is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509) and returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description continues. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect-related command (S6418: NO), it is determined whether there are other display commands. The corresponding process is executed (S6420). Here, other display commands include, for example, a display reserved ball number command indicating an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, or an effect (so-called continuous notice) that targets a specific change across a plurality of changes. There are a continuous notice command for display and a time effect command for display that indicates a time effect based on the result of measurement by time measuring means (so-called real-time clock) of the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the command for the number of pending balls for display is received, the flag for the number of new pending balls is set to ON. Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command for display, and the number of reserved balls displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is updated by updating the number of reserved balls counter based on the extracted number of reserved balls. Display update. In addition, when the display continuous notice command is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back surface of the school of fish and the back surface of the bubble is extracted from the continuous advance notice command for display. Next, based on the extracted distribution, the continuous announcement information storage area is updated, and the continuous announcement corresponding to the updated contents is displayed.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: YES ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (A)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159 (B)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and other commands , the command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and Since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on variation image area 235B of the resident video RAM 235, In the process, NULL data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233E and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7602 and S7603 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7601: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7602), an error occurrence flag is on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: YES), warning image setting processing is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the details of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: NO), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Details of the pointer update processing (S7605) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing (S7605). This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is the process of updating the pointer 233F that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233F (S7801). That is, the pointer 233F is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the START information is described at address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233D, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233F is updated by the process of S7801, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D is END information. is determined (S7802). As a result, if it is END information (S7782: YES), it means that the pointer 233F has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is a demonstration display data table (S7803). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233D is set in the clock counter 233H (S7804), the pointer 233F is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7805), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is not the demonstration display data table (S7803: NO), the value of the pointer 233F is decremented by 1 ( S7806), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the previous address in which the END information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F is not the END information (S7802: NO), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 167 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7606). Here, along with the previously developed warning image and the like, based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7606, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and the display coordinate position and Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233H is decremented by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233H after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233H is 1 or more (S7608: NO), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233H is 0 or less (S7608: YES), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7609).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7609: NO), the production of the confirmation display has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the production of the confirmation display. The processing of S7615 is executed. In the process of S7610, the confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7610), and then NULL data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233E. By doing so, the contents are cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233H (S7612).

When the processing of S7612 ends, the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S7614), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In task processing, until a predetermined time elapses after the start of variation, from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the specified The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7609, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7609: YES), the processing of S7616 to S7621 is executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7616). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7616: NO), the demonstration display data table is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S7617), and then NULL data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233H (S7619).

When the processing of S7619 ends, the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7621), this processing ends, and V division is performed. return to load processing.

As a result, even after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after starting the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be set so that the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 170A is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is ON (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233C is on (S7901: YES), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing is performed. is executed (S7902), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233C is not ON as a result of the process of S7901, that is, if it is OFF (S7901: NO), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7902), which is a part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 170B. FIG. 170B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S8001). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S8002). In the process of S8002, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S8002 that the transfer process has not ended (S8002: NO), the resident image transfer setting process is executed because the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8002: YES), the process proceeds to S8003. Also, as a result of the processing of S8001, even if a transfer instruction for image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: NO), the process proceeds to S8003.

In the process of S8003, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S8003). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237A, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237A while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S8003, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S8003: YES), the simple image display flag 233C is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157B), the command Since the judgment processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the normal image. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: NO in FIG. 170A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 171, normal image transfer setting processing (S7903), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to S8105.

Also, in the process of S8102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but NULL data (S8102: NO), the processes of S8103 and S8104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: YES), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S8106 that the transfer process has not ended (S8106: NO), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8106: YES), the process proceeds to S8107. Also, as a result of the process of S8105, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S8105: NO), the process proceeds to S8107.

In the processing of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107). is turned off (S8108), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S8107: NO), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233W is on (S8109). Then, if the back image change flag 233W is not ON, but OFF (S8109: NO), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233W is on (S8109: YES), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233X in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S8111). Further, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233X in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The top address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S8111, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233I. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233I, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S8113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: YES), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S8113 (S8113: NO), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S8114). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S8114, the stored image data determination flag 233I is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233I is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236A as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer process in this way, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process. When the received stop type information is determined to be a big win stop type, the image data used in the big win performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235C can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233F of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236A so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated (S8201). That is, in the processing of S8201, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233J includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236B as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 1 includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236C as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237A is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S8202, the rendering target buffer flag 233J is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The draw target buffer flag 233J is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 157B) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. , the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236C earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the special symbol lottery result to the player, a specific effect (for example, "PUSH display" for operating the frame button 22 ”) as a suggestive effect to notify the timing of occurrence, a countdown effect that is set based on the timing at which the specific effect is set, and the period from the start of the suggestive effect to the start of the countdown effect It is configured to execute an omen effect that is set to

Therefore, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed (the period during which the predictive effect is executed) can be freely set as compared with the case where the suggestive effect for notifying the timing of occurrence of the specific effect is executed for a predetermined period. .

In the first control example, the timing for starting the suggestive effect and the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect are configured to be selectable from a plurality of options. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variously set the period in which the suggestive effect is executed by various combinations.

Further, it is determined whether there is a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing at which the suggestive effect is started and the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and based on the determination result, the form of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is determined. configured to be variable. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the effects to be executed in the future based on the contents of the effects to be executed.

In addition, based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, it is configured so that the aspects of the portent effect and the countdown effect can be varied. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, it is configured such that a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is likely to be set as the period during which the countdown effect is executed. As a result, the game can be played while expecting that the variable display of this time corresponds to the special symbol won as a win by the mode of the countdown effect.

It should be noted that, as the form of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a mode other than the mode of the first control example may be used. Any aspect may be set. In this case, a part of the performance mode is configured to be variable according to the period during which the suggestive effect is executed (suggestive effect period), and the length of the suggestive effect period and the lottery result of the special symbol are different for the player. For example, the color of the display mode such as characters displayed during the suggestive effect is variable (blue → yellow → red → rainbow color) according to the length of the elapsed time. Alternatively, the stage index (for example, degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestive effect may be configured to vary according to the length of the elapsed period.

Moreover, it is also possible to set each of a plurality of specific effects to have different degrees of expectation for big wins, and to vary the degrees of expectation for big wins depending on the specific effects to be targeted. In this case, a plurality of points during the variable display period are provided with places where the specific effect can be executed, and among the plurality of points, the specific effect to be executed at the point targeted for the suggestive effect is selected by lottery of special symbols. It may be configured to be set based on the result. As a result, the countdown effect is started, and even after it is grasped at which timing (point during the variable display period) the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect executed for the player, the specific effect It is possible to make it difficult to understand which production will be executed, and to enjoy the suggestive production until the end.

In addition, in the first control example, the effect executed as the precursor effect among the suggestive effects uses the effect mode (the effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effect) for indicating the period of the predictive effect. In this way, in addition to the effect for indicating the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for suggesting to the player the content of the specific effect that is the target of the current suggestive effect, and the current variable display , an effect mode (notification mode) for notifying the player that the countdown effect will be executed may be set.

In addition, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the omen effect) and the end timing of the suggestive effect (end timing of the countdown effect) are set separately. Suggestive effects can be executed across a plurality of variable displays. As a result, even for a specific effect set at a point at the beginning of the variable display (for example, 5 seconds from the start of the variable display), the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set during the preceding variable display. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom when setting the suggestive effect.

In the case of using the above-described technology, based on the contents of the plurality of prize winning information already reserved and stored, the suggestive effect may be set across a plurality of variable displays, or the variable display of the special symbols may be executed. A means for discriminating the winning ball (winning ball to be the next fluctuation) is provided while the game is being played, and the discriminating means performs a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period. May be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140), and the special symbol is Even when the first reserved memory (the reserved memory used for the next fluctuation) occurs during the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

The fluctuation time of the special pattern is generally configured such that a long fluctuation time is likely to be selected when the jackpot is won. configured to be high. In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem that the degree of expectation for a big win for the current variable display is predicted depending on the timing when the suggestive effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends are provided at a plurality of points, respectively, so that the suggestive effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestive effect starts. It consists of Also, even if the suggestive effect period is the same, the period during which the sign effect is executed and the period during which the countdown effect is executed are configured to be variable. Further, as the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect, any one of the specific effects with different degrees of expectation for big wins can be selected.

In this first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestive effect is started, the current suggestive effect period, the target specific effect, the sign effect period, and the countdown effect period. can be suppressed from being predicted early and the production effect being lowered.

In the first control example, the countdown display in which the number is regularly decreased (for example, every second) is used as the effect mode executed during the countdown effect. For example, it may be configured such that a plurality of partitioned areas are filled regularly (for example, every second) and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. may In this case, the number of partitioned areas becomes a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Also, other configurations may be used.

In this first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) are stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as display data to be displayed during the countdown effect, and are executed this time. Based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set in the suggestion effect to be performed, the corresponding display data is displayed. Storage capacity can be reduced by having display data in this way.

In this first control example, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) is configured to be set based on the start timing of the specific effect set in the target variable effect, but the countdown The end timing of the production should match the start timing of the specific production. For example, in the case where the specific production is to be executed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), it is set based on the end timing of the specific production. may be configured.

As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestive effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the countdown effect period is set by calculating back the period (time) during which the countdown effect is executed from the set end timing. This makes it possible to easily set the countdown effect for the predetermined period in correspondence with the execution timing of the specific effect.

In the first control example described above, as the period for executing the suggestive effect, the sign effect period in which the predictive effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestive effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts (the timing at which the premonition effect starts) and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends (the timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started is set in advance, and the timing at which the portent effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestive effect is executed.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to perform display control so as to switch from the portent effect to the countdown effect based on execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the portent effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the game so as to execute the countdown effect as soon as possible. A period during which the countdown performance can be executed is determined in advance based on the lottery result of the special symbols, and the countdown performance can be executed at the timing when a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the omen performance. It is preferable that the portent performance is switched to the countdown performance only when it is timing, and the operation performance of operating the frame button 22 during the portent performance is executed at various timings. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Also, it may be configured to execute a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect during the omen effect. By executing this pseudo-countdown effect, the player can be made to think that the precursor effect has ended, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect is configured to be easily executed when a big win is won, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the executed countdown effect is pseudo. Until the countdown effect (pseudo-countdown effect) is finished, the player can pay attention to the continuously executed effect.

In the first control example described above, the length of the precursor effect period to be executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the effect mode of the precursor effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration in which the execution length is not determined may be used, and for example, it may be configured so as to set the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the portent effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use, as the effect mode to be executed as the portent effect, a performance mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort even when the end is made at any timing. It is preferable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a fixed rule, such as an effect in which a car continues to run on a road at a constant speed.

By using such a performance mode, even if the portent performance is executed without determining the length of the portent performance period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown performance without making the player feel uncomfortable. Even in the case of using such an effect mode, the display mode (for example, the color) of part of the effect mode (the car in the above example) changes depending on the elapsed period of the omen effect as described above. Naturally, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, instead of determining in advance the length of the portent effect period in which the portent effect is to be executed, the length of only a part of the period may be determined. For example, it may be divided into a first precursor effect period of the first half and a second precursor effect period of the latter half, and the length of only the second precursor effect period may be determined in advance. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific predictive effect only during a predetermined period (second predictive effect period) retroactively from the end timing of the predictive effect (the start timing of the countdown effect), so that the specific predictive effect can be executed more smoothly. The production can be switched from the omen production to the countdown production.

As described above, in the above-described first control example, the game state (variable probability state (high probability, with electric sapo), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo), It is configured to execute a production (battle production) to indicate that the time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo)) is set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

Furthermore, the above-described battle effect is composed of a effect (battle ready-to-win) that suggests whether or not a game state advantageous to the player will end, and a effect (pre-battle effect) to determine the effect mode of the battle ready-to-win. Configure. By configuring in this way, when the game state that is advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is decided that the game state shifts to the normal state by lottery of special symbols), the battle is performed during the period other than. Since the performance can be continuously executed, the player feels anticipation for the continuation of the game state advantageous to the player and an uneasy feeling that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. The game can be continued while holding the robot.

Furthermore, during the above-described battle effect, an effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases to suggest whether or not the game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player will continue to be set. . This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbols, the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set, or the like.

Here, when increasing the pattern of increase and decrease of the continuous value (HP value) described above and executing a production rich in variation, the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the advantageous state is set. It was necessary to perform complex management that associates the remaining period of time displayed with the displayed continuous value (HP value). Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase the variation of effects while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the expected value (HP value) described above is set based on the currently set game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set ( The sum of the main continuation value (e.g., the value in the 100th place) and the value (secondary continuation value (e.g., the value in the 10th place)) set for the purpose of increasing the production variation is continued. It was configured to be displayed as a value (HP value).

In this way, by summing the value actually managed and set and the value set for performance, the number of display patterns of performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be increased.

Further, in the above-described first control example, a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually inform the player of the degree of increase or decrease of the continuous value, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be executed.

In the first control example, as the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value, the display mode corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, the range of 50 to 150) is "weak attack", and the display mode corresponding to the large difference amount ( For example, the display mode corresponding to the range of 350 to 550) is "strong attack", and the display mode corresponding to the difference between them (for example, the range of 151 to 349) is "medium attack". , When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, different effects are executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

That is, by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player roughly grasps the amount of decrease (difference value) of the continuation value (HP), and after that, the updated continuation value can be used as a specific value. You will get a realistic numerical value. By displaying the information in such an order, it is possible to notify the player of the information regarding the game step by step, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, in the above-described first control example, when setting the above-described display mode (attack pattern) in order to reduce the control load of the effect, the main continuation It is configured to set a display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the values. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of continuation values (pre-update continuation values, post-update continuation values) or difference value patterns used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuous value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuous value, the displayed continuous value (third symbol The difference value of the continuation value (sum of the main continuation value and the sub continuation value) displayed on the display device 81 does not match the difference value of the main continuation value, and the display mode differs from the apparent range of the difference value. (attack pattern) was set.

In order to solve the above-described problem, in the first control example, when the value of the continuation value (HP) is continuously updated a plurality of times, the difference value of the continuation value (HP) on the display and the main continuation value , the set display mode (attack pattern) is the same. By configuring in this way, the problem described above can be solved.

Further, in the first control example, main continuation value determining means for determining the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and the secondary continuation value set for the effect is determined based on the determination result of the main continuation value determining means. The selection tables for selection are configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the primary continuation value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), a selection table that defines "-20 to +20" as a selectable range for the secondary continuation value is referred to, and a predetermined If the value is less than 200 (eg, 200), a selection table that defines "-30 to 0" as a selectable range for the secondary continuation value is referred to.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the selection of a positive value as the secondary continuation value when the primary continuation value is 0.

In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle ready-to-win) are effects for indicating a period (advantageous period) during which the game state is set to be advantageous to the player. ) to execute a unit effect (battle effect). In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for informing the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the above-described unit effect is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. By configuring in this way, the second effect can be executed a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play the game during the advantageous period while keeping the player feeling tense. .

Further, by making it possible to execute a plurality of unit performances while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one unit performance continues for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the presentation from being slowed down.

In addition, in the first control example, as the condition for ending one unit effect (condition for executing the second effect), the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (the opportunity to end the advantageous period) In addition to the case of a lottery result), the case that the remaining period of the advantageous period is 0, and the case that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number or more. As a result, the second performance is executed even when the advantageous period is not terminated, but the second performance is executed when other conditions are satisfied. good too.

In addition, if the second effect for informing whether or not the advantageous period is over is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player quickly becomes bored with the second effect, so the first control is performed. In the example, the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of effect is suppressed from being executed multiple times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of variations of the special symbols after the unit performance is executed is counted, and the pseudo second performance is not executed when the counter value is less than a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the second effect early.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation level performance modes are provided for stepwise suggesting the expectation level that the lottery result of the special symbol during fluctuation is a big hit, and any one of the expectation level performance modes displayed as the expectation level performance mode is provided. The expectation level variable (increase) performance is executed to change the performance mode to a performance mode in which the expectation level is set higher than the performance mode.

Then, at least one of the plurality of expectation level presentation modes described above is configured to be displayed at a different timing, and the expectation level variable (increase) presentation determines which expectation level presentation mode the expectation level is to be varied. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to comprehend.

In the first control example configured in this manner, execution of the expectation level variable (increase) effect informs that the effect mode of any of the expectation level effect modes is variable (increased). In this state, the player watches the performance while expecting further variation (increase) of the desired expectation level performance mode (for example, the expectation level performance mode in which the expectation level that is already a big win is set high). can be done.

In addition, in the first control example, by varying the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, it is configured to vary the target expectation level effect mode. Specifically, it is configured to target the expectation level effect mode displayed after the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the timing at which the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed.

In addition, in the first control example, the variable expectation (increase) effect is configured to be able to vary the effect modes of the plurality of expectation effect modes, and the variable amount to be varied for each expectation level effect mode It is configured to display a variable amount for indicating the sum of (steps). As a result, the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, and after grasping that one of the expectation level effect modes will be changed, the player can grasp the amount by which the expectation level effect mode is changed in the current effect. can.

Furthermore, after the expectation level variable (increase) effect is executed, a notification mode is displayed for informing the player of the target for which the expectation level is to be increased in the current effect, so that the player can receive the target expectation level effect mode. can be easily comprehended.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of expectation level performance modes having a performance mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation level in stages are provided, and each expectation level performance mode is configured to be able to display different stages, and displayed. It is constructed so as to predict whether or not the current variation wins the jackpot by combining and grasping the display contents of each expectation performance mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the aspect of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting. There is a problem that the processing load for control increases. Furthermore, when the performance modes for increasing the expectation level are biased, specifically, only one expectation level performance mode among the plurality of expectation level performance modes is changed to a performance mode indicating that the expectation for the big win is high. When the remaining expectation degree performance mode remains the performance mode indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is low, the player is made to have excessive expectations for the winning of the big win, and the player feels distrust in the content of the performance. There was a problem of giving

On the other hand, in the first control example, in the plurality of expectation level performance modes, the expectation level performance mode before being varied by the expectation level variable (increase) performance is set in a plurality of patterns, and the special symbols are set. According to the expectation degree set based on the lottery result of (1), the expectation degree of the expectation degree performance mode set by the pattern is configured to be variable (increased). By configuring in this way, the plurality of problems described above can be solved.

<Example of addition of effect to first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181, an effect addition example of the first control example will be described. In this additional example, an effect (title giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content of the frame button 22 is added to the above-described first control example. This title giving effect includes the number of times an operation effect requiring a frame button operation has occurred, the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (the number of effective operations) for that operation effect, and the number of times the operation effect has been operated during a period in which the operation effect is not executed. Based on the number of operations of the frame button 22 (the number of invalid operations), it is executed so that the benefits (titles) given to the player are varied.

By using such an effect, the player can not only operate the frame button 22 as instructed, but also can be provided with the enjoyment of performing other operations (including non-operating), thereby allowing the player to enter the game early. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect (for example, the effect of dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) for operating the frame button 22 is variable based on the privilege (title) granted to the player. It is configured to allow As a result, for a player who is willing to operate the frame button 22, the operation effect appears frequently, and for a player who does not want to operate the frame button 22, the appearance frequency of the operation effect is reduced. can be lowered.

In addition, compared to the case of using a technique in which the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation presentation in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation presentation can be matched to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation presentation executed during the game. Therefore, the operations performed by the player can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173(A) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the content.

As shown in FIG. 173(A), in this additional example, a character unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover an upper part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details). ). Then, the characters "You can talk with the button PUSH" are displayed in the sub-display area DS to prompt the operation of the frame button 22 . Here, when the frame button 22 is operated, as shown in FIG. 173(B), the characters "Hello" are displayed in the main display area DM as if the character unit 450 were commenting. In this way, in this additional example, a conversation effect is executed in which the character unit 450 and the character unit 450 can have a conversation. Note that the accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, determining means for determining the role object position and comment display position setting means for displaying the comment in the display area corresponding to the role object position determined by the determining means may be provided. . As a result, regardless of the position of the character object, the character "Hello" can always be displayed in the main display area DM as if the character object unit 450 were commenting.

Further, as a determination means for determining the position of the role product, a means for directly detecting the position of the role product unit 450 using a proximity sensor may be used, a drive motor for driving the role product unit 450, or a drive motor for driving the drive motor may be used. A detecting means for detecting the drive state (for example, the number of steps) of a force transmitting means (pulley, etc.) may be provided, and means for determining the role object position based on the detection result of the detecting means, or a role object unit. In the case where the 450 is driven based on an action scenario, means for determining the position of the character object based on the progress of the action scenario may be used. When the latter configuration is used, it is possible to grasp not only the current character object position but also the future character object position based on the contents of the action scenario, so the display position of the comment is adjusted according to the character object position. Can be set in advance. Further, it may be configured such that the operation scenario of the role product unit 450 is associated with the information regarding the display position of the comment in advance and stored, or a plurality of the above means may be combined.

A level display area DR1 for indicating the current level (set value) and a title display area DR2 for indicating the current title are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area DM. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (raised) based on the game history (game period, game result, effect content, etc.). 176(C)), and in FIG. 173(A), the lowest level, "3rd grade", is displayed.

A title is a benefit that is set based on the level (set value) described above and the details of the operation of the frame button 22 . Although a detailed description will be given later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set according to game contents (operation contents of the frame button 22). A unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level is set for each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173(A).

In FIG. 173(B), based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173(A), a comment is displayed from the character object unit 450 and the level displayed in the level display area DR1 increases. Then, "2nd grade" is displayed, and "half serving" is displayed in the title display area DR2. Note that the content of the comment of the role item unit 450 is variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous the player is to information (for example, the degree of winning expectation during fluctuation, the current game state, etc.). It is set so that information related to games such as As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, the contents of the character object-driven presentation, which is one of the operation presentations executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174(A). FIG. 174(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the character-driven presentation. As shown in FIG. 174(A), when the character object drive effect is executed, as an effect to prompt the operation of the frame button 22, the characters "Press the button to drop the character object" are displayed in the main display area DM. At the same time, an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Also, in the first display area DS1 of the sub-display area DS, the characters "Chance if you fall" suggesting the detection result of the character product driving effect are displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated during the period during which the character object driving effect is being executed (while the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), and the character object falls to the position covering the main display area DM, the changing It suggests that there is a high possibility that the special pattern has won the jackpot. In this manner, in the operation presentation for operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, the player can be motivated to quickly perceive that he or she has won the big prize. A frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, as described above, different benefits (titles) are given depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated intentionally or not. In addition, the player can voluntarily choose whether or not to operate the frame button 22, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this additional example, since different benefits (titles) are given according to the title system set as described above, even if the game is continued with one title system, It is configured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain all the benefits (titles) granted to the player, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, since the title system is set according to the content of operation of the frame button, it is configured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be acquired unless the content of operation of the frame button 22 is devised. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain all the benefits (titles) granted to the player, and to provide the player with various effects that are executed based on the details of the operation of the frame button 22. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Here, in order to obtain various benefits (titles) as described above, it is necessary to set a different title system, so the current title system is initialized (the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). However, if all the histories based on the games that have been continuously played so far are initialized, there is a possibility that the motivation of the player will decrease. .

Therefore, in this additional example, there is a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all histories or erase histories up to a stage where a different title system can be set. FIG. 174B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during this change operation.

As shown in FIG. 174(B), in the main display area DM, the characters "from the beginning" and part of the history are displayed as the all-delete selection mode DR3 indicating the selection portion to be selected when all the histories are initialized. As a partial erasure selection mode DR4 indicating a selection portion to be selected when erasing a , characters "from the middle" are displayed. Here, when the all-clear selection mode DR3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area DR1 and the title displayed in the title display area DR2 are set to initial values. This all-delete selection mode DR3 is mainly selected when erasing operation histories of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial deletion selection mode DR4 is selected, a display going back to the stage where a different title system can be set is displayed in the level display area DR1 and the title display area DR2. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the same privilege (title) is granted regardless of the title system as long as the level (set value) is low. becomes higher, one title system among the plurality of title systems further branches into a plurality of title systems.

As a result, the contents retroactively displayed when the partial deletion selection mode DR4 is selected can be made different depending on the level (set value) or title when the partial deletion selection mode DR4 is selected. It should be noted that a title system may be provided that is not set unless this partial deletion selection mode DR4 is selected. As a result, it is necessary to not only add (increase) the level (set value), but also subtract (decrease) it, so that it is possible to provide a game with more variations.

As described above, in the first control example, as an effect during the jackpot game, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect spanning the multiple times of the jackpot game (continuous jackpot performance) is executed, and the content of the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game suggests to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game ends. However, if the gaming machine has a special game state other than a big winning game, for example, a gaming machine having a small winning game in which the privilege that can be given to the player is set less than that of the big winning game, during a predetermined period When a small winning game or a big winning game (hereinafter referred to as a winning game) is executed a plurality of times, a winning performance (continuous winning performance) spanning the multiple winning games is executed. can be In this way, in the above-described first control example, the contents described for the big win may be executed for game results other than the big win (for example, the small win). The game results include various game results that exist as conventionally well-known configurations.

In addition, in the first control example, as a game result after the end of the currently executed jackpot game, it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (within reserved memory). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by a winning effect executed during the winning game, for example, the number of winning big wins (including small wins) in the reserved memory, the number of winning big wins ( (including small hits) privilege content (number of rounds), the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) after the jackpot (including small hits) won in the reserved memory, and multiple game results (jackpots, small hits) If it is targeted, the type of the game result or the order of execution may be suggested.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the content of the big win performance is varied based on not only the ball entry information stored at the timing of executing the big win game but also the ball entry information newly stored during the big win game. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball-entering information, to facilitate the execution of consecutive big win effects, and to make the players interested in the big win effects.

In addition, in this control example, as a continuous jackpot effect, the content of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the number of pieces of entering information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of winning ball information stored at the time when the jackpot game is executed, there are a plurality of different timings for suggesting (announcing) that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within reserved storage). It is configured so that the jackpot production of is executed.

Of these, in the specific jackpot performance (additional performance) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of ball entry information) of special symbols is not the upper limit, new ball entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the ball entry information is obtained. is won as a big win, the contents of the big win performance can be changed so as not to be noticed by the player.

In the above-described specific jackpot effect, the jackpot game (multiple round games (eg, 15-round game)) to be executed during one jackpot is partially notified (eg, 5 rounds). Since the performance is executed, it is possible to inform the player incomprehensibly how many rounds of the big winning game have been executed while the specific big winning performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the game state after the big win, depending on the number of rounds set for the big win game.

In this control example, it is configured to perform an additional display (additional display of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game by the additional effect every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). The length of the inter-round interval period in a predetermined round is set longer than the length of other inter-round interval periods. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts whether or not the big win will end in every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since the variation of the special pattern for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the big win is executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval period and the special symbol variation period between big wins.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the variation period of the special symbols for a predetermined period, which is executed after the end of the big win, is always constant regardless of whether or not the big win is won. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for four rotations after the end of the big win is defined to fluctuate by 0.5 seconds for the entire period when the lottery result is lost, and when the lottery result is a big win. , a 2-second variation for the first rotation, a 1.5-second variation for the second rotation, a 1-second variation for the third rotation, and a 0.5-second variation for the fourth rotation. As a result, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbols for four rotations after the end of the big win, the predetermined period (the period until the special symbols fluctuate four times or the period until the big win is won) is fixed (2 seconds). be able to. In this case, by configuring the interval period of each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) to coincide with the above-described predetermined period (2 seconds), the interval period of each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the interval between the jackpots are increased. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol fluctuation period.

Also, in the first control example, as a jackpot effect executed during the jackpot, during the jackpot game (while the round game is being played), a normal jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within the reserved memory) have a performance. When this normal jackpot production is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is a predetermined period after the jackpot ends (4 variations of special symbols, or 4 seconds) is displayed continuously. Then, when a big win is won again within a period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the end of the big win, the performance for continuous winning is executed in which the big win performance is started again via the end display mode.

By constructing in this way, the ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during a predetermined period (4 variations of special symbols or 4 seconds) after the end of the big win game is acquired after the end of the big win game, Even when the acquired ball entry information has won a jackpot, the performance for consecutive wins can be executed. In other words, since it is possible to include the ball entry information obtained after the end of the big win as a condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect indicating that the big win is continuously executed, it is possible to increase the rate at which the continuous jackpot effect is executed. , can enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in the first control example, whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot performance is determined based on whether or not there is ball entry information for winning a jackpot in the reserved memory. When there is ball entry information for winning a big win, it is determined whether or not the big win is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous big win presentation. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a game state (for example, a variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set as a game state after the big win in the reserved memory is executed, and based on the determination result, continuous It may be determined whether or not to execute the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the game state (normal state (low probability state)) that is once disadvantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win to be executed this time, the game state after the big win in the reserved memory is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous game state (for example, variable probability state) is set, and whether or not to execute continuous jackpot effects may be determined based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, as in the above-described second control example, in a gaming machine having a drop lottery configuration, it is difficult for a player to grasp the game state when a big win is won, so the drop lottery is performed using the above-described continuous jackpot effect. The result of the lottery may be notified to the player.

Specifically, means for discriminating the game state at the time when the current jackpot is won, means for discriminating the game state set after the end of the current jackpot, and a falling lottery executed until the next jackpot is won. and a means for discriminating the lottery result, and whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined based on the discrimination result of each discriminating means described above. Only when the state is a low-probability state of the special pattern, that is, when the game state of the special pattern has fallen by the falling lottery, the continuous jackpot performance is executed, or after the end of this jackpot, the special pattern is high. A probability state is set, and only when it is determined that the game state of the special pattern shifts to a low probability state by a drop lottery until the next big win is won, a continuous jackpot performance is executed or a fall is made. The game state of the special pattern does not shift to the low probability state by lottery, and the continuous jackpot performance is executed in the case of the high probability state of the special pattern even when the game state of winning the current big win and winning the next big win. It may be configured as follows.

In this control example, as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot effect to be executed during the jackpot game, the winning information at the time the jackpot game is executed is used. The timing may be any timing as long as it is the timing after it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed. or a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the jackpot effect. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the variation of the special symbol that has won the jackpot is started, or a predetermined timing during the period during which the variation is being performed.

In addition, in this control example, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric sapo) (variable state (high probability, with electric sapo), time saving state (low probability, with electric sapo) )), an effect (battle effect) is executed to indicate that the game state is continuing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state that is advantageous to the player is continuing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. FIG. 175A is a block diagram showing the structure of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175 (A), the ROM 222 in this additional example has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114), the content of the fluctuation pattern table 222A is partially changed, The difference is that a title system selection table 222AA, a title selection table 222AB, and a character action level selection table 222AC are added. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176(A), the contents of the variation pattern table 222A for role product motion added in this addition example will be described. FIG. 176A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222A (for character goods). As shown in FIG. 176(A), the variation pattern table 222A (for role product) includes role product action levels (1 to 3) selected by role product action level selection table 222AC, which will be described later, and extracted variation patterns ( A to Z), the frequency of action of the role product (low) to (high) and (no) are defined. By configuring in this way, even when the same variation pattern is selected, the frequency of the action of the character product can be varied.

Next, referring to FIG. 176(B), the contents of the title system selection table 222AA will be described. FIG. 176(B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222AA. In this title system selection table 222AA, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of valid and invalid operations of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio during execution of the operation effect.

FIG. 176(C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222AB. This title selection table 222AB prescribes titles that are privileges given to the player in association with the current level (set value) (“3rd grade” to “hermit”) and the title system (1 to 3). there is The title selected here is displayed in the title display area DR2 (see FIG. 173(A)).

As shown in FIG. 176(C), while the level (set value) is low (third class to first dan), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set. Unable to grasp the set title system. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently set title system from being grasped immediately after the start of the game, and the execution of an operation to change the title system.

Next, referring to FIG. 177(A), the contents of the role product action level selection table 222AC will be described. FIG. 177(C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the role product action level selection table 222AC. The role product action level set in this role product action level selection table 222AC is referred to when using the variation pattern table 222A (for role product) described above with reference to FIG. 176(A).

As shown in FIG. 177(A), the role action level selection table 222AC defines role action levels in association with set values (levels) and title systems. Among them, only the title system 3 in which the setting value can reach "hermit" is configured so that the character action level 3 can be selected. In this way, by providing a role action level that is selected only when the level (set value) is increased while a specific title system is set, It becomes possible to impart a special feeling, and to enhance the production effect.

FIG. 175B is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175(B), the RAM 223 in this modification differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114) in that an effect setting group 223AA is provided. . Other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223AA will be described with reference to FIG. 177(B). As shown in FIG. 177(B), the effect setting group 223AA includes an operation effect number counter 223AA1, a valid operation number counter 223AA2, an operation ratio storage area 223AA3, a title system storage area 223AA4, a set value storage area 223AA5, and an invalid operation number. A counter 223AA6, a change flag 223AA7, and a role product action level storage area 223AA8 are stored.

The operation effect number counter 223AA1 is a counter for counting the number of times an operation effect requiring operation of the frame button 22 is executed. This operation presentation number counter 223AA1 is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) that the variation pattern is to execute an operation presentation (S3851 in FIG. 178: YES), and the frame button input is performed. It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when the history of operation effects is changed (deleted), it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The effective operation number counter 223AA2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223AA2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of the operation effect. 179), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective period of the operation effect, 1 is added (see S5054 in FIG. 179), referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179), and further , is also referred to when calculating the valid operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), when the history of operation effects is changed (deleted), it is cleared (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In this additional example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223AA2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the operation presentation. Determination is made as to whether or not operation conditions are satisfied, such as pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the case of an operation presentation to cause the frame button 22 to be pressed, and a success rate (for example, 50%) in the case of an operation presentation in which the frame button 22 is operated multiple times with good timing. However, if the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the effective operation number counter 223AA2 may be incremented by one. As a result, the value of the counter can be added fairly regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the value of one effective operation number counter 223AA2 is added regardless of the instruction content of the operation presentation for the frame button 22 (press, repeated press, timing press, long press, etc.). However, for example, a valid operation number counter 223AA2 may be provided for each operation presentation instruction content for the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding valid operation number counter 223AA2 may be added. With this configuration, the operation history indicating the details of the player's operation on the frame button 22 can be classified more finely, so that the details and frequency of the operation performance can be varied to suit the player. can be done.

The operation ratio storage area 223AA3 stores all operations of the frame button 22 based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223AA2 (value of valid operation number) and the value of invalid operation number counter 223AA6 (value of invalid operation number) described later. This is an area for storing the ratio (button operation ratio) of the number of valid operations to the number of times. This operation ratio storage area 223AA3 stores the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4007) and the valid operation ratio calculated in S5061 (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223AA4 is an area for storing the title system selected using the above-described title system selection table 222AA.

The set value storage area 223AA5 is an area for storing game content and a level (set value) set based on a change operation.

The invalid operation number counter 223AA6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation valid period (the operation valid period of the frame button 22 during operation presentation).

The change flag 223AA7 is a flag that is set to ON when the partial deletion selection mode DR4 is selected by a change operation. By setting this flag to ON, an effect is executed that suggests to the player how to operate the frame button 22 for setting a different title system.

The role product action level storage area 223AA8 is an area for storing the role product action level selected using the above-described role product action level selection table 222AC. By referring to the role product action level stored in the role product action level storage area 223AA8, the appearance frequency of the role product action effect (operation effect) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222A (for role product).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the additional example of the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. Elements that are the same as those of the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 178, variable display setting processing 2 in this additional example will be described.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing 2 in this additional example. In each of the processes of S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817 of the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example, the same process as the variable display setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 147) is executed.

When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are executed, and then the current variable pattern is a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: YES), the value of the operation effect number counter 223AA1 is incremented by 1 (S3852). , S3853. On the other hand, in the processing of S3851, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: NO), the processing of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the processing of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the character action level (S3851). Specifically, based on the role product action level selected based on the role product action level selection table 222AC and the extracted variation patterns (A to Z), a variation pattern table for role product action (FIG. 176 ( (see A))), and determine the current variable display mode (variation effect display and presence/absence of character action). Among the variable display modes determined here, for the contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the variable pattern command for display is set by the processing of S3812, and set by various processing of the sound lamp control device 113. In the same way as the display command, the display control device 114 is notified of the contents of the action of the character product, and the command output processing (see FIG. 139) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 139) of the sound lamp control device 113. (see S3102 of )) sets the role product operation command to be notified to the device that drives and controls the role product unit 450 (the other device 228 (see FIG. 4)). After completing the processing of S3853, the same processing of S3812 to S3817 as in the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107).

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S3107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). Here, if the pressing is not detected (S5051: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051: YES), then it is determined whether or not the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) of the operation effects is valid (S5052). If it is determined that the effective period of the conversation effect has expired (S5052: YES), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), and S5060 to process.

The display press command set in the process of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the role product unit 450, the role product action level, and the selected title. sets the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the role product unit 450, and determines the content of the comment to be displayed based on the role product action level and the selected title. is set. The display press command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the character product unit 450 in the third pattern display device 81. An effect of having a conversation with the unit 450 can be displayed.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation effective period of the conversation production, the display press command is set so that the comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. However, if the role object unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the role object unit 450 and the position of the third symbol display device 81 The display content displayed on the display screen may be discriminated, and the timing of executing the conversation presentation (comment display) based on the discriminated result may be made different from the pressing timing of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加That is, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450, and the main part of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot, When it is determined that the above-described display areas do not overlap, that is, when the position of the character product unit 450 moves. The display area of the comment is changed, or the display area of the main part is changed by the progress of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the comment is made until the timing when each display area does not overlap. display may be delayed.

By constructing in this manner, both the variation performance displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the conversation performance, which is one of the operation performances, can be suitably executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. can be done. In addition, without using the above-described configuration, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450 and the main part of the variable effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, If it is determined that the display area for displaying the degree of expectation for a big win and the display area for displaying a pattern to be stopped overlaps, the conversation production may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5052, when it is determined that the conversation effect is not valid (S5052: NO), it is determined whether the current is the valid period of the character action effect among the operation effects (S5055). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the role object action effect (S5055: YES), a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5056), and the value of the effective operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054). , S5060.

In the process of S5055, if it is determined that it is not the validity period of the character action effect (S5055: NO), then it is determined whether it is the change valid period (S5057), and if it is the change valid period (S5057: YES), change processing is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. Details of the change processing (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, in the processing of S5057, if it is determined that the change valid period is not reached (S5057: NO), the value of the invalid operation number counter 223AA6 is incremented by 1 because the current pressing operation is not during the valid period of the operation effect. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223AA1 and the value of the valid operation number counter 223AA2 (S5060). Next, based on the value of the valid operation counter 223AA2 and the value of the invalid operation counter 223AA6, the valid operation ratio is calculated (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and valid operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223AA3. (S5062). After that, title setting processing is executed (S5063), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the change processing (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of the change operation (see FIG. 174(B)), and various information is displayed based on the details of the player's operation. This is a process for clearing (the title system, the set value (level), and information on the button operation ratio and information on the valid operation ratio that are referred to when selecting the title system).

When the change processing (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation is all reset (whether the all erasure selection mode DR3 is selected) (S5101). If it is determined to be a full reset (S5101: YES), all information in the set value storage area 223AA5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation presentation number counter 223AA1 and valid operation number counter 223AA2. All the values of the invalid operation number counter 223AA6 are cleared (S5103), the information of the title system storage area 223AA4 is cleared (S5104), and this processing ends. As a result, all the information based on the operation contents of the player is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area DR1, and the initial value "beginner" is displayed in the title display area DR2. (See FIG. 173(A)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the reset is not complete (S5101: NO), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial deletion selection mode DR4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined to be a partial reset (S5105: YES), the change flag 223AA7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the setting value storage area 223AA5 is set to the first level (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. . In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the reset is not partial (S5105: NO), the process ends.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the details of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, a title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222AA (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223AA4 (S5202), then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect counter 223AA1 and stored in the set value storage area 223AA5 (S5203).

Thereafter, a display setting value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222AB (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223AA7 is set to ON (S5207), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5207: YES), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223AA7 is set to OFF (S5209), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5207 that the change flag 223AA7 is not ON (it is OFF) (S5207: NO), this process ends.

As described above, in the above-described additional example, the effect mode (for example, appearance frequency and effect content) of the operation effect, which is the effect for operating the frame button 22, is changed to the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. ), it is configured to be configurable. As a result, a desired presentation mode is set without making the player feel troublesome, compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation presentation to the frequency desired by the player is executed separately from the game. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 that changes the effect mode of the operation effect based on the player's operation history, in order to be able to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players, Although a plurality of presentation modes are prepared, while the same operation for the frame button 22 (for example, when the operation presentation is executed, the frame button 22 must be operated more than the required amount) is repeatedly executed. , there is a problem that only the same effect mode is set, and various operation effects cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the above-described additional example, by accumulating game contents, a different privilege (title) is given to the player, and furthermore, the type of the privilege (title) is set at least by the player's frame button 22 It is configured to be different in accordance with the operation content (operation history) to.

With this configuration, various operations are performed on the frame button 22 in order to acquire different benefits (titles). Then, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set based on the content of various operations executed with respect to the frame button 22 . Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that can be variably set based on the operation contents (operation history) of the frame button 22 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which different benefits (titles) are granted by accumulating game contents, set values (for example, levels) are variably set in stages according to the accumulation status of game contents. It is common to use a configuration that grants a privilege (title) corresponding to the set value (level), but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, a higher privilege (title) is obtained. There is a possibility that the player will not be able to play the game, and the desire to play will decrease. Moreover, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

Therefore, in the above-described addition example, one of a plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22. In this way, the privilege (title) given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, since it is not possible to acquire all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating the game contents, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the above-described additional example, since there is an erasing means for erasing the past game contents, when setting a system different from the currently set system, the contents of operations executed in the past (operation history) It is possible to suppress the system from being set based on. In addition, in this additional example, in order to suppress the system from being set based on the details of operations (operation history) executed in the past, a deletion means for deleting the details of past operations (operation history) is used. , Other configurations may be used, for example, inputting the desire to set a different system (input by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), in that case, for a predetermined period A new system may not be set until (the period of the operation history referred to when setting the system) elapses.

Further, in the above-described additional example, the erasing means includes a total erasing means for erasing all past game contents and operation contents and a partial erasing means for erasing a part of them. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and the different system can set the past operation contents (operation history) referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase up to the state. This eliminates the need to restart the game from the beginning when setting a different system, so that the player can be motivated to set a different system.

In this additional example, when the partial deletion means is operated, a part of the past operation contents (operation history) is deleted, and an initial value is set as a set value (level). However, by operating the partial erasing means, rather than restarting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the all erasing means), it is sufficient if a system different from the currently set system can be easily set. The set value (level) may be maintained and only part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be erased. Alternatively, the player may designate a desired system, and part of the past operation contents (operation history) may be erased until the designated system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to erase a part of the past operation contents (operation history) in an attempt to set a system different from the currently set system, the operation to be executed later is performed. If the frame button 22 is not properly operated for the effect, a different system will not be set, which may give the player a sense of dissatisfaction. Specifically, after operating the partial erasing means, if the operation effect is completed in the same operation mode as in the conventional art, the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is

Therefore, in this additional example, after operating the partial erasing means, there is provided guidance notification means for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player so that a different system is set. A different system can be easily set by executing the operation presentation based on the content notified by the guidance notification means. In addition, in order to set a different system, the guidance notification means notifies operation contents different from the conventional operation contents. The contents are also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation presentation different from the one up to now, and enhance the presentation effect.

The content notified to the player by the guidance notification means may be content that simply prompts a different operation from the operation presentation, or content that specifically indicates the content of the operation to be executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guidance notification means, a progress notification means may be provided for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is met. As a result, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation effect is completed so that a different system is set.

Furthermore, when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined conditions for the system set in the additional example described above, the setting is possible only when the predetermined erasing means is operated. You can add system. By providing such a system, for example, when the set value reaches the upper limit, a dedicated system can be set only when the all erasing means is operated, or the set value is one lower than the upper limit. , a dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

In addition, based on the erasing timing of the erasing means, it is also possible to change the system that can be set. Only a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable that the specific variable performance described above is executed only when the variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the additional example described above, a configuration is used in which the privilege (title) is preset in correspondence with each set value (level) of each system, but other configurations may be used, and already acquired A storage means for storing the privilege (title) may be provided, and the privilege (title) to be given may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage means.

In the above-described additional example, as the content of the privilege (title) given to the player (the content of the title), the content suggesting the setting condition of the currently set system is used. As a result, by grasping the content of the acquired benefits (titles), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary to set different systems.

Furthermore, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the player may be notified of the conditions necessary for setting the desired system, or the previously acquired benefits (titles) among the available benefits (titles) may be The number or ratio of (titles) may be notified to the player. As a result, the player's willingness to participate can be increased to obtain all the benefits (titles).

As described above, based on the operation contents (operation history) of the frame button 22, one of the plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set, In the case where the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system, the currently set system based on the granted privilege (title) There is a problem that it becomes easy for the player to grasp the

On the other hand, in the additional example described above, the same privilege (title) is granted until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage, regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is executed for a certain period of time after the predetermined system is set), the player cannot grasp which system is set. can be made difficult.

In addition, as the operation contents (operation history) to the frame button 22 referred to in the above-described addition example, for example, operation effect count information for indicating the number of times the operation effect has been executed, the frame button corresponding to the executed operation effect 22, operation success count information for indicating the number of successful operations (the number of times a predetermined operation condition is satisfied), and the period during which the operation effects are not executed (operation Information indicating the state of operation of the frame button 22 by the player, such as invalid operation count information indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (outside the effective period), may be used.

Furthermore, as the content of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect of simply pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, the timing operation effect of operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing, and the operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period. It is also possible to provide a repetitive-hit operation effect for making an operation, and a long-press operation effect for continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or longer. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the operation contents (operation history) to the frame button 22 are managed for each type of the executed operation presentation.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player simply dislikes operating the frame button 22 or dislikes predetermined operations (continuous hits, long presses, timing presses) on the frame button 22.例文帳に追加becomes possible. Therefore, when setting the operation presentation corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation presentation more suitable for the player, and to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of operation means, each information may be managed for each operation means, or the operation contents for all the operation means may be combined and managed. may be configured. Furthermore, when an operation performance is executed to operate different operation means according to the degree of expectation of a big win, information indicating the number of times of execution of the operation performance and the number of times of operation of the operation means is managed in association with the degree of expectation of a big win. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation presentation executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-described additional example, based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect, it is referred to when determining the operation effect mode (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) and the privilege (title) to be given. system and a set value (level) are set. , only one of the above-described system or set value (level) may be set.

In the additional example described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. Alternatively, a lever-shaped operation means that can determine that the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or back and forth, or a touch that can determine that it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A sensor-type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-described operating means may be provided.

As in the above-described additional example, when using a configuration that varies the mode of operation presentation based on the player's operation content (operation history) or grants a predetermined privilege (title), another day It is preferable to configure so that the game can be played while continuing the operation contents (operation history) of the game performed on the day. Information on game content and operation content is configured so that the player can acquire it (password issuing processing), and output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10, thereby continuing from the acquired information. It is preferable to configure so that a game in the state can be played.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. FIG. In the above-described first control example, when a special pattern jackpot is won and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot ends, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in the second control example, in addition to the jackpot lottery for judging whether or not special symbols ) (hereinafter referred to as a drop lottery) is executed each time the condition for judging whether a special symbol is true or not is established. In this way, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state continues reliably is not set, so the special symbol variation is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state in which the probability of the jackpot becomes high and the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 140A is easy to open Even if you win the drop lottery and fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, for a predetermined period (for example, after the big win, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times until ) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the falling lottery is won immediately (for example, 3 rotations) after the end of the big win, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (100 rotations), so that the falling lottery is won depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140A. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the fact.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the fall lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed in a low probability state. be done. That is, if the falling lottery is won in a state exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the game state is normal at the time when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the drop lottery by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the drop lottery, the player falls just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140A. There is a problem that it is easy to determine whether the lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state exceeding the above-described predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot ends), a special The game state is shifted to the normal state before the pattern variation is started.

By configuring in this way, the operation content of the electric accessory 140A suddenly becomes the operation content of the non-time-saving state in a state exceeding a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big win lottery, and to make the player have a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player whether the fall lottery is successful or not by using the continuous effect explained in the first control example. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect that is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 182A is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 182(A), the ROM 202 in this control example is different from the ROM 202 in the first control example in that a falling lottery table 202BA and a falling state transition table 202BB are added, and a first winning type selection table 202C is added. (See FIG. 107), the game state after the end of the jackpot was stipulated as "probability variable time short next time", but it is different in that it is stipulated as "probability variable until falling lottery winning, or falling lottery winning or short time until 100 times". , are otherwise the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The falling lottery table 202BA is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the variable probability state to the normal state in the variable probability state of the special symbol (falling lottery). counter value) is stored. In the probability changing state of the special symbols, every time the lottery of the special symbols is executed, the falling lottery table 202BA is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Here, the details of the drop lottery table 202BA will be described with reference to FIG. 182(B).

FIG. 182B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the drop lottery table 202BA. As shown in FIG. 182(B), a random value (counter value) that is determined to be a fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, in the special symbol probability state (high probability state), two random numbers (counter value ) are stipulated. In the special symbol probability variable state, when executing the special symbol lottery, the value of the fall lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random number (counter value) corresponding to the fall defined in the fall lottery table 202BA. , falls to the normal state if the values match. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is periodically updated within the range of "0 to 299" (for example, each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed). Of the 300 possible random numbers (counter values) of the drop lottery counter, two random numbers determined as a fall are specified, so the probability of being determined as a fall in one drop lottery is 1/150. is. It should be noted that the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the variable probability state is 5 of "5 to 9" (see FIG. 106 (A)), and becomes a big hit during the variable probability state Since the probability is 1/48, it is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher than the probability of being determined to fall in the falling lottery during the variable probability state. Therefore, once the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can expect to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game during the variable probability state can be improved. can.

The falling state transition table 202BB is a state transition table that is referred to when the falling lottery is won during the variable probability state. The description of the same elements as those of the state transition table 202F described in the first control example is omitted.

FIG. 182C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the falling state transition table 202BB. As shown in FIG. 182(C), the fall state transition table 202BB stores a fall state transition 1 table 202BB1 and a fall state transition 2 table 202BB2. Here, the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202BB1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(D).

FIG. 182D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall state transition 1 table 202BB1. This fall state transition 1 table 202BB1 differs from the state transition 1 table 202F1 described in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the falling lottery is added to each state status. are identical.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (maximum 100), if the falling lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3 (with low probability and short working hours). The value of the number counter remains unchanged. In addition, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (no low-probability short working hours).

In other words, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters, and the drop lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counters is decremented to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of counters is decremented to 0. status is given.

Next, the fall state transition 2 table 202BB2 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(E). FIG. 182(E) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 2 table 202BB2. This fall state transition 2 table 202BB2 is different from the state transition 2 table 202F2 described in the first control example in that a state status in the case of winning the falling lottery is added to each state status. are identical.

Specifically, when the state status is "ST2A" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (maximum 4), when the falling lottery is won, the state status is set to ST3A (special with low probability and short working hours), The value of the specified number counter is maintained as it is. Also, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is greater than 0 (up to 96), if you win the fall lottery, the status status is set to ST3 (with low probability and short working hours), and the value of the specified number of times counter continues as is. In addition, when the state status is "ST2" and the specified number of times counter is 0, and the fall lottery is won, the state status is set to ST1 (no low-probability short working hours).

In other words, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters, and the drop lottery is won before the value of the specified number of times counters is decremented to 0, the time is shortened until the value of the expected number of counters is decremented to 0. status is given.

FIG. 183A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 183 (A), the ROM222 in this control example is provided with a continuous production mode selection 3 table 222E instead of the continuous production mode selection table 222E in place of the ROM222 in the first control example, and final mode selection. The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222H is provided instead of the table 222H, and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(A), the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E will be described. FIG. 184(A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E. This continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E is associated with the value of the remaining period (number of remaining fluctuations) stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB for the continuous effect mode selection table 222E of the first control example described above, The difference is that the response to the continuous effect mode is selected. In addition, if there is winning information indicating jackpot winning in the hold at the time of falling winning, it is a special state that the jackpot is won immediately after winning the falling lottery (jackpot in low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period Instead, the special mode B can be selected to give the player a special effect.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222H will be described with reference to FIG. 184(B). FIG. 184(B). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a final mode selection 3 table 222H; This final mode selection 3 table 222H is different from the final mode selection table 222H used in the above-described first control example in that the final mode is changed according to the setting state of the fall flag 222BA. The points are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184(B), even if the winning/failing judgment result is a failure, if there is prize winning information indicating a jackpot winning in the reserve, it is possible to suggest that in the final mode of this time.

Returning to FIG. 183(B), the description continues. FIG. 183B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183(B), the RAM 223 in the second control example differs from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223BA and a remaining period storage area 223BB are provided, and other points are the same. be. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Drop flag 223BA is a flag for indicating that the drop lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a state command indicating that the drop lottery has been won is received from main controller 110 .

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, control processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. This control example is different in that a special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, and other points are the same. . The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special fluctuation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed in the same manner as the special fluctuation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. , and the random number (counter value) corresponding to the fall defined in the fall lottery table 202BA (S351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number corresponding to the fall (the lottery result corresponding to the fall) is compared (S351). (S352).

In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to falling (S352: YES), the game state is set to the normal state by setting the variable probability flag 203G to OFF (S353), and the falling ( (S354).

Then, in the same way as the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot has been won after a short period of time (S355). Here, when winning after the short period of time (S355: YES), the counter 203H during the short period of time is reset (S356), and then S310, S311 in the same manner as the special fluctuation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128) , and terminate this process.

As described above, in the second control example, when an advantageous state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, when the special symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, a special symbol lottery (jackpot Before the lottery is executed, a drop lottery is executed for determining whether or not the game state is to be shifted from an advantageous state to a normal state (a game state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in a state (probability variable state or time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability state of normal symbols)) in which the electric accessory 140A is easy to open, The high probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low probability state before starting the variation of the target special design.

According to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example described above, there are two end conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first end condition is that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number (the number of time saving times given to the set state), and the game state is a probability change. When the state is set, the falling lottery is won as the second end condition, and when the two end conditions described above are met, the high probability state of the normal pattern is ended. . It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned two end conditions are established, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the end condition of the time saving condition is established.

In other words, for example, if you win a jackpot in which the probability variable state (next time) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, and the number of times of time saving is set to 100 times, the special symbol has changed 100 times The above-mentioned first end As a condition, winning the fall lottery is the second termination condition described above. Specifically, in the above example, if the fall lottery is won in the 10th round of special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not established, the high probability state of the normal design is continued until the first end condition is established (the special design fluctuates 100 times) (until both of the two end conditions are established). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches 100 times, both of the two end conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state.

On the other hand, in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot ended exceeds 100 times (the first end condition is satisfied), the falling lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied) If not), the high probability state of the normal pattern continues until the fall lottery is won. Then, when the falling lottery is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the normal symbol high probability state is shifted to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality of (two) conditions necessary for shifting the high probability state of the normal design to the low probability state, the state transition timing of the normal design can be diversified. In addition, if only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, if the high probability state of normal symbols is set in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times ), since it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the normal pattern will be shifted to the low probability state (whether the falling lottery will be won), the normal pattern is kept in the high probability state for as long as possible. The game can be played while expecting that

In addition, in this second control example, as one of the conditions for shifting the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design to the low-probability state (normal state), 100 special design fluctuation times are set. However, a plurality of times may be set according to the type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings for ending the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal design together with whether or not the falling lottery is won. Specifically, if the fall lottery is won before the number of special symbol variations after the end of the big hit reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times), the number of special symbol variations is a predetermined number ( For example, when reaching 1, 25, 50, 100 times), the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern ends, and for example 25 times is set as the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, When the falling lottery is won in the time saving when the number of times of special pattern fluctuation exceeds 25 times, the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is terminated immediately.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) ends.

Furthermore, in the second control example, as one of the conditions for ending the high-probability state (time-saving state) of normal symbols, the number of fluctuations of special symbols is used, but other end conditions may be provided, For example, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (so-called small winning) in which a game that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time is executed (the number of times the variable winning device 65 operates). Or, the number of fluctuations of the special design is measured separately for the special design 1 and the special design 2, and the number of fluctuations of the special design 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of fluctuations of the special design 1 and the special design 2 reaches 100 times. You may set what was done as end conditions.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and command determination processing 3 (see FIG. The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub-process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed in the same manner as the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

After the processing of S3214 is finished, the state determination processing (S3251) is executed next, the processing of S3215 is executed after that, and this processing ends. Here, details of the state determination processing (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 are executed when the falling lottery is won.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). This fall command is set (see S354 in FIG. 185) when the drop lottery is won (S352 in FIG. 185: YES) by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main controller 110. If the command indicating the fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: NO), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the command indicating the fall is received (S3252: YES), it is determined whether the present is in the short period of time (S3253). Here, if it is determined that it is in the short working hours (S3253: YES), then the fall flag 223BA is set to ON (S3254), and the number of remaining short working hours is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated remaining time reduction count is stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that a jackpot has been won in the reserve (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: YES), special condition fulfillment information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB (S3258). Here, when the special condition satisfaction information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223BB, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222E (see FIG. 184).

When the process of S3258 is finished, it is next determined whether or not a command indicating that the game state is normal is received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state is received (S3260), the player falls It is determined whether the flag 223BA is set to ON (S3261). In the process of S3261, if it is determined that the drop flag 223BA is set to ON (S3261: YES), that is, when the game state has shifted from the time-saving state to the normal state while winning the drop lottery. If so, the fall flag 223BA is set to OFF (S3262), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3260, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: NO), or the fall flag 223BA is not set to ON in the processing of S3261 (it is set to OFF). ) (S3261: NO), this process ends.

As described above, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for judging whether a special symbol is appropriate, the variable probability state (that is, a high probability state with a high jackpot probability) to a low probability state with a low jackpot probability. A transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) that shifts (falls). will be explained about the game machine which is executed every time the condition for judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is established. In this way, in a gaming machine having a falling lottery function, even if a variable probability state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state continues reliably is not set, so the special symbol variation is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state in which the probability of the jackpot becomes high and the time-saving state in which the electric accessory 140A is easy to open Even if you win the drop lottery and the high probability state falls to the low probability state, for a predetermined period (for example, after the end of the big win, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times until ) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the falling lottery is won immediately (for example, three times) after the end of the big win, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period of time, so the player can be notified that the falling lottery has been won depending on the operation status of the electric accessory 140A. It is possible to suppress being grasped by

In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the special symbol jackpot lottery, and when the fall lottery is won, the special symbol jackpot lottery is executed in a low probability state. be done. That is, if the falling lottery is won in a state exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the end of the jackpot, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the game state is normal at the time when the special symbol variation is started. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) will be set.

In this case, even if an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won the drop lottery by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol that wins the drop lottery, the player falls just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140A. There is a problem that it is easy to determine whether the lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the fall lottery in a state exceeding the above-described predetermined period (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot ends), a special The game state is shifted to the normal state before the pattern variation is started.

By configuring in this way, the operation content of the electric accessory 140A suddenly becomes the operation content of the non-time-saving state in a state exceeding a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times after the end of the jackpot). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big win lottery, and to make the player have a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player whether the fall lottery is successful or not by using the above-described continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the effect that is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described second control example, if the fall lottery is won during the variable probability state and the fall timing is during the short time period, the variation pattern table that is used during the short time period even after the fall is continued. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the fall lottery has been won by selecting the variation pattern using the . Alternatively, another example may be used in which a variation pattern is selected using a special variation pattern table upon winning the drop lottery.

Now, with reference to FIG. 188, the content of the above another example will be described. FIG. 188(A) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202D provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 when using another example described above. As shown in FIG. 188(A), in the above another example, a post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202D5 is added.

The contents of this post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202D5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(B). FIG. 188B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202D5. As shown in FIG. 188(B), the post-fall variation pattern table 202D5 is a variation pattern table that is used for four rotations of the special symbols after winning the drop lottery during a short period of time. The post-fall variation pattern table 202D5 is configured so that the variation pattern for 60 seconds is likely to be selected even in the case of misalignment. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, every time a battle reach occurs, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance while having a sense of tension.

In this case, depending on the effect mode of the battle reach, it is preferable to notify the player of the effect of notifying that the fall lottery has not been won at a predetermined rate. Specifically, depending on the battle reach opponent (opponent character) selected, it may be possible to suggest whether or not the fall lottery will be won, and depending on the production (attack pattern) performed during battle reach, the fall lottery The presence or absence of winning may be suggested, or the presence or absence of winning of the fall lottery may be suggested based on the result of the battle reach (remaining HP value at the time of the tie battle reach). As a result, as the outcome of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, whether or not the falling lottery is won is also a matter of concern, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, when a big win is won during the period when the after-fall fluctuation pattern table is used, it is preferable that a special performance mode is executed as a special win. As a result, the player can easily understand that he or she has won a big win in a low probability state immediately after winning the falling lottery by watching the performance mode executed as a special win. In this case, the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the special win may be set to a variation time that cannot be set in other variation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the immediate hit after the fall due to the sense of incongruity due to the difference in the variation time.

<Description of another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestive effect explained in the above-described first control example will be explained. In the above-described first control example, the effect mode of the suggestive effect composed of the precursor effect and the countdown effect is set in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure change is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is part of the process, was used. On the other hand, in this another example, in the countdown production setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, only the start timing of the suggestive production (the start timing of the omen production) is set, It is configured to set a specific effect to be the target of the current suggestive effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the precursor effect.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor production that is the trigger for the start of the suggestive production is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor production is being executed (while the suggestive production is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the effect mode of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the suggestive effect as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect.

Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, as suggestive effects, there are a sign effect that roughly informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the portent performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Lamp Control Device 113 in Another Example of Suggestion Effect>
Next, referring to FIGS. 189 and 190, control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in this example will be described. In this example, the countdown setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used in place of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152) in contrast to the first control example described above, and the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 139 S3107) is changed to the processing content of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). Other elements are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 189, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in this example will be described. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the first control example described above are executed, and then the current variation pattern is set. Based on the variable time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect), the effect mode of the predictive effect is set (S4351), the command for starting the predictive effect for display is set (S4352), and this processing is terminated. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223T is ON in the process of S4301 (S4301: YES), the multiple variation effect setting process is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is executed. finish.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the suggestive effect The start timing of the premonitory effect that serves as a start opportunity is set. As a result, the precursor effect is set without setting the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect.

In addition, in this additional example, it is configured to vary the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the omen effect) depending on whether or not the special figure change of this time is a variation pattern that wins the jackpot. Other conditions may be used to set the trigger for the start of the suggestive production (timing to start the predictive production). ) may be set, or a plurality of suggestive performance start timings (starting timings of predictive performances) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and the plurality of suggestive performance start timings (starting timings of predictive performances) are provided. A lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing of one suggestive performance (the start timing of the omen performance) may be provided and set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Furthermore, the start timing of suggestive effect (start timing of predictive effect) may be set based on the contents of the operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 before the start of the current variation of the special symbol.

Furthermore, based on the currently set gaming state, the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing to start the prognostic effect) may be varied. Specifically, for example, if the currently set game state is a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variable state), the sign A ( It is preferable to set a point with a short period from the start of fluctuation (see portent pattern A shown in FIG. 100(A)). As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, the currently set game state can be suggested to the player according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, so that the player is interested in the suggestive effect to be executed. can let In addition, as in the above-described second control example, the pachinko machine 10 having transition (fall) means for transitioning (falling) from the variable probability state most advantageous to the player to the time-saving state without the player noticing. In , since the effect is to suggest the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method of setting the start timing of the suggestive production (the start timing of the omen production), when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the fluctuation pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of fluctuation (for example , 5 seconds later, and 10 seconds later), the timing for starting the suggestive effect (starting timing of the prognostic effect) may be set.

As in this additional example, when the suggestive effect is started when the suggestive effect end trigger (countdown effect end timing), that is, the specific effect start trigger (start timing) to be the target of the suggestive effect is not set. Since the effect period of the suggestion effect is not set, there is a problem that the effect mode of the precursor effect cannot be set based on the effect period that is set as in the first control example described above. be.

On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the effect mode of the predictive effect is set based on the change time of the change pattern to be executed this time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect). It is configured to Specifically, when the current variation pattern is 60 seconds or more and the trigger for starting the suggestive effect (timing to start the predictive effect) is omen A, a long-term predictive effect is selected as the effect mode of the predictive effect. A long production mode (second route DC2B in FIG. 98(A)) corresponding to the production is set, and in other cases, a short production mode (first route DC2B in FIG. route DC1A) is set.

In this way, by roughly setting the effect mode of the precursor effect based on the period in which the suggestive effect can be executed (the effect executable period based on the start trigger of the suggestive effect and the fluctuation time of the variation), it will be set later. It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the specific effect (the effect period of the suggestive effect).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107) executed in this example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggestion effect is changed based on the pressing operation to the frame button 22 which is executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. Setting processing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). ), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5051 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051; YES), then it is determined whether or not it is currently in the prognostic effect period (S5071).

In the processing of S5071, if it is determined that the present is not during the premonition effect period (S5071: NO), other processing related to frame button operation is executed (S5078), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5071, if it is determined that the present is in the premonitory effect period (S5071: YES), next, a specific effect corresponding to the content of pressing the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

Here, the processing of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the omen effect is being executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98(A) is displayed), the player presses the frame button 22 in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81. An operation presentation to operate is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of varying the movement mode (moving speed and movement position) of the car-like character DC1 displayed in the sub-display area DS is executed as an omen effect based on the operation of the frame button 22. . Then, in the secondary display area DS that scrolls in correspondence with the movement of the character DC1, a specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the current suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion obtained by the character DC1 is displayed. A specific effect corresponding to the mode is set.

Here, the specific effect suggestion mode displayed in the sub display area DS during the precursor effect is a mode (for example, with the characters "PUSH" attached) that allows the player to grasp the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, PUSH effect). displayed). Then, this specific effect display mode is set based on a specific effect (specific effect corresponding to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery) that can be set in this special figure variation pattern. ), a specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation is displayed. be done.

In this additional example, the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed are associated, but the mode of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect is executed can be set separately. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of specific performance display modes displayed in the operation performance executed during the precursor performance should be acquired to set the suggestive performance period longer. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is grasped by a person. Therefore, even after the end of the operation performance, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the entirety of the suggestive performance, so that the player can continue to enjoy the suggestive performance.

Further, it is also possible to set the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode obtained during the operation effect based on the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result). good. As a result, it is possible for the player to select a desired specific effect, and to motivate the player to participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance executed during the variation of the special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. After finishing the process of S5072, the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (three seconds in this additional example) is calculated by calculating backward from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated. calculate. That is, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened by quickly operating the frame button 22 during the operation effect executed during the omen effect.

Next, it is determined whether the interval calculated in the processing of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074). The mode is set to the short presentation mode (S5075), and on the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: NO), the presentation mode of the premonition presentation currently being executed is changed to the long presentation. The mode is set (S5076).

That is, in this additional example, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, first, based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern of this time (variation time, jackpot lottery result), the production mode of the precursor production is roughly set (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), the precursor effect is executed in accordance with the set effect mode. Then, during the execution of the predictive effect, at the time when the specific effect to be the target of this suggestive effect is set, the predictive effect is performed based on the remaining period of the suggestive effect (remaining period of the predictive effect). It is configured so as to vary the mode of presentation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the suggestive effect without discomfort toward the specific effect that is executed during the variable display. In addition, since it is possible to change the display mode of the predictive effect based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the predictive effect mode (the remaining period of the predictive effect is short). ) The frame button 22 is operated at the end of the operation performance, which is the timing, and you can enjoy whether or not the long performance mode is set (whether or not the current variation pattern is a long variation time), or conversely. A frame button 22 is operated at the beginning of the operation performance, which is the timing when the long performance mode is likely to be set intentionally as the portent performance mode (the remaining period of the portent performance is long), and the portent performance is executed in the long performance mode. can be enjoyed, and an effect can be executed according to the player's request.

After setting the precursor effect mode in the process of S5075 or S5076, the countdown effect command for display corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the process of S5078 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown production setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is started, the start timing of the suggestive production (the start timing of the omen production) only is set, and a specific effect to be the target of the current suggestive effect is set based on the operation of the frame button 22 executed during the omen effect.

By configuring in this way, the start timing of the precursor production that is the trigger for the start of the suggestive production is set to the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and while the precursor production is being executed (while the suggestive production is being executed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the effect mode of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the suggestive effect as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect.

Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, as suggestive effects, there are a sign effect that roughly informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed, and a countdown effect that specifically informs the timing at which the specific effect is to be executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific performance is set after the suggestive performance is executed (during execution of the portent performance), the suggestive performance can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to variably set the effect mode of the precursor effect, which is a part of the suggestive effect (effect executed in the first half) in stages, the effect mode of the entire suggestive effect can be changed. It can be set without discomfort. In this additional example, the effect mode of the countdown effect executed as part of the suggestive effect (effect executed in the second half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but it is not limited to this. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing (see S5073 in FIG. 190) at which the specific effect to be executed this time is set is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and based on the determination result, the effect of the countdown effect It may be configured to set the period (eg, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configuration and technical idea described in the above-described first control example may be added to this additional example described above. You may provide the pachinko machine 10 which respectively has.

<Description when the various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents when the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the preliminary determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the prize winning information storage area 223A, the first control described above is performed. A description will be given of the contents of setting the effect mode of the various effects described in the example.

In the first control example described above, in the effect setting process during the big hit (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the effect during the big hit, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the entering ball information that wins the big hit in the reserved ball Based on the determination result of whether or not there is, the continuous jackpot performance can be set by referring to the jackpot medium performance selection table 222C. Alternatively, it is preferable to set the effect during the jackpot with reference to the pre-determined result of the falling lottery pre-determined based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A.

Specifically, a second pre-determining means capable of determining by associating winning information for winning a jackpot and winning information for a falling lottery as look-ahead information in the order in which special symbol variations are executed is provided, and If it is determined as a result of determination that the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information winning the jackpot will be executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information winning the fall lottery will be executed, continuous jackpot performance is set. It is better to configure it so that it does not. As a result, when the continuous jackpot performance is executed, the prize information retained and stored at that point in time does not include the prize winning information for winning the falling lottery. value can be increased.

Further, when it is determined by the second advance determination means that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information winning the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information winning the falling lottery is executed, continuous It may be configured to set a jackpot effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the continuous jackpot performance without executing the fall suggestion performance suggesting that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy due to the execution of the fall suggestion effect.

In addition, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the end of the jackpot among the look-ahead information at the time of winning the jackpot includes information indicating that the player wins the falling lottery, the information indicating the winning of the falling lottery is determined. As an effect, it is preferable not to execute an effect suggesting that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win. In other words, when the fall lottery is won at the start timing of the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the end of the big win, the player never receives the special symbol big win lottery in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect suggesting that a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set after the end of the big win during the big win, the player will be given an excessive sense of expectation. It will be. When the above-described configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation.

Next, in the above-described first control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) for informing the player of the period in which the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is continuously set can be executed. , the production form of the continuous production (the production form of the production before the battle and the production form of the battle reach), the lottery result of the special symbol this time, the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A, and The display mode of the continuous production (battle production) is set based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the variable probability state or the time saving state). In a game machine having a fall lottery configuration, refer also to the result of the fall lottery or the prior determination result of the fall lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode of the continuous effect.

In each control example described above, the variation pattern (variation effect) is set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. That is, the setting of the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbols. In this case, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E) is subtracted by 1 in order to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the prize is won. There is a problem that the variation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set when the information (read-ahead information) stored in the information storage area 223A reaches the upper limit number.

In order to solve the above-described problem, as a configuration for setting a variation pattern (variation effect) by the sound ramp control device 113, regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A, A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a win in the hold), and use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, only the above-described first variation pattern is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140).

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (prefetch information ), and executes a variable performance in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variable performance executed in the first variation pattern. By constructing in this way, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation presentation) based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special pattern.

Therefore, when the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A has reached the upper limit, a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the look-ahead information can be set. read-ahead effect) can be made easier to execute.

It should be noted that, by the second variation pattern setting means described above, the timing at which the process of setting the second variation pattern is executed, even if it is set after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variation of the special symbol is started Alternatively, the setting timing of the second variation pattern may be varied in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means. By configuring in this way, the timing of setting the look-ahead effect can be changed according to the variation pattern to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to reserve the reserved balls.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long variation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) as the first variation pattern When set, the setting timing of the second variation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of variation, and when a relatively short variation time (variation time of 30 seconds) is set as the first variation pattern, the second variation It is preferable to set the pattern setting timing to 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

In addition, if the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting means may not be executed. By constructing in this way, when a variable time period during which it is difficult to execute a look-ahead performance is set, the look-ahead performance is not added during the variation, and a performance that is difficult for a player to understand is executed. can be suppressed.

In addition, as a second variation pattern (prefetch effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, comment display notice) executed in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, 20 seconds) and a long effect (for example, chance eye stop notice) can be set, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), by configuring not to execute the second variation pattern setting means, the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is a predetermined period In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) can be easily executed by the second variation pattern setting means.

In addition, as described above, when configuring so as not to execute the second variation pattern setting means according to the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means, in the winning information storage area 223A Of the stored winning information, the winning information for which the second variation pattern setting means has already determined whether or not to set the second variation pattern and the winning information for which the second variation pattern has not been determined are identifiably stored. When the second variation pattern setting means is executed, whether or not the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting means among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A It is preferable to perform the setting determination of the second variation pattern by excluding the winning information for which the determination has been performed.

Further, in addition to the above-described example, a prefetch effect execution command indicating that the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) set by the second variation pattern setting means is executed by the display control device 114 is sent from the display control device 114 by a voice lamp. If it is configured to output to the control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 has set the second variation pattern (prefetching effect), the prefetching effect execution command cannot be received (prefetching effect was not executed case), the second variation pattern setting means may be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

Storage means capable of storing (holding) a plurality of starting prizes (first entrance 64 or second entrance 140) of special symbols, and special symbols based on information (winning information) stored in the storage means. Before the lottery (variation) is executed (before the special symbol lottery conditions based on the winning information stored in the storage means are established), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means In a gaming machine having a pre-determining means (pre-reading means) that determines in advance, when executing a variable effect (pre-reading effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, advance There is a configuration of providing an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol variation of this time based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to set the effect mode based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means as the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. and the determination result of prize winning information stored in the storage means, and the performance that makes the player interested can be executed. However, since the effect mode is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination result at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the effect mode is set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has not reached the upper limit number. I had a problem that I had to In other words, the timing of setting the effect mode is the timing of executing the variation of the special symbol using the oldest winning information (winning information used for the next special symbol variation) stored in the storage means (stored in the storage means (the timing when the winning information stored in the storage means is reduced by one), the presentation mode cannot be set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, and the preliminary determination means There is a problem that the execution frequency of the variable effect (prefetching effect) based on the determination result is lowered.

Furthermore, in the configuration described above, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbols, the processing of determining the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means, and the processing of setting the effect mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbols. Therefore, there is a problem that the processing is concentrated in a short period of time and the processing load increases.

Further, as a configuration for executing a variable effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the prior determination means, in addition to the above-described configuration, the above-described prior determination means based on the fact that new winning information is stored in the storage means There is also a game machine that executes a determination by and based on the determination result, performs an effect (prefetch effect) for showing a pre-determined result different from the variable display of special symbols.

With such a configuration, since the prefetch effect can be executed at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, the effect can be smoothly performed based on the determination result of the advance determination means. However, since the effect to be executed is an effect for indicating the determination result of the preliminary determination means, the effect indicating the determination result of the special symbol currently being executed and the display content overlap, and the player is not notified. However, there is a problem that the display becomes difficult to understand. Moreover, since control is performed to execute the look-ahead effect at the timing when new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem that the processing load increases temporarily.

In order to solve the above-described problem, as a configuration for setting a variation pattern (variation effect) by the sound ramp control device 113, regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A, A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It is preferable to have a second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a win in the hold), and use the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration. That is, only the above-described first variation pattern is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140).

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (prefetch information ), and executes a variable performance in which information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variable performance executed in the first variation pattern. By constructing in this way, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation presentation) based on the information (read-ahead information) stored in the winning information storage area 223A can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special pattern.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuation effect explained in the above-described first control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 90, the above-described first control example is configured such that the battle production (pre-battle production and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during the high probability (during the probability variable state or the time saving state). . In the control content of the first control example described above, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or more) that can execute battle reach, and a variation pattern that cannot execute battle reach (Variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) may be selected continuously. In the above-described first control example, in order to prevent the player from losing interest in the production, a variation pattern that can execute Battle Reach (a deviation variation pattern in which the variation time is 60 seconds or more) is set within a predetermined period. When multiple selections are made (for example, within an interval where the special symbol fluctuates six times), the battle reach is not executed for the latter fluctuation pattern, so that the battle reach is executed unnecessarily. Although it is configured to solve the problem of lowering the performance effect, the variation pattern that can execute the battle reach and the variation pattern that cannot execute the battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery results of the special symbols. In the first control example to be selected, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds) that does not allow battle reach to be executed is continuously selected, resulting in a pre-battle effect. However, the problem of long-term persistence remained.

Therefore, in the third control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) is configured to be executed during the variable probability state as the game state, and a special symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state. As a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of variation, a variation pattern table in which pre-battle production is (easily performed) and a variation pattern table in which battle reach is (easily performed) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to the rules (fluctuation scenario).

By configuring in this way, when the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, when the special symbol variation frequency is the predetermined number (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the big win), the battle reach is always executed. can solve the problems mentioned above. Furthermore, in the third control example, the variable scenario used while the variable probability state is set is configured to be selected from a plurality of variable scenarios with different contents. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game even when using a configuration in which a variation pattern is selected in accordance with a predetermined variation scenario.

Furthermore, in the third control example, a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of the jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot ends), and the selected jackpot type A variation pattern to be executed after the end of the jackpot is selected based on a variation scenario corresponding to. As a result, the variation scenario to be executed after the end of the big win can be set according to the type of the big win, so that the variation pattern in accordance with the variation scenario can be surely selected from the special pattern variation of the first rotation after the end of the big win. be able to.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the content of the ROM 202 and the content of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the voice lamp control The difference is that the content of the ROM 222 and the content of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are partially changed, and the content of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed. are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 191A is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 191(A), the ROM 202 in this control example has a variable scenario setting table 202CA added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the content of the first hit type selection table 202C is partially changed. The difference is that the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202D is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202C in the third control example will be described. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202C in the third control example. In addition, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted about the element same as the 1st hit classification selection table 202C used in the 1st control example mentioned above.

In the first hit type selection table 202C in the third control example, the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) corresponding to the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed. Subdivided jackpot types (jackpots AA to AJ) are defined. Specifically, among the values of the first winning type counter C2 "0 to 19" that are defined in association with the "jackpot A", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0, 1" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot AA", in the range of "2, 3" is defined in association with "jackpot AB", and in the range of "4, 5", "jackpot AC” is defined in correspondence, the range of “6, 7” corresponds to “jackpot AD”, and the range of “8, 9” corresponds to “jackpot AE”. The range of "10, 11" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot AF", and the range of "12, 13" is defined in correspondence with "jackpot AG". The range of "14, 15" is defined in association with "jackpot AH", and the range of "16, 17" is defined in association with "jackpot AI". 18, 19” is defined in association with “jackpot AJ”.

That is, in the third control example, out of 200 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 kinds of random numbers for 20 random numbers for which "jackpot A" is selected. The jackpot types (jackpot AA to jackpot AJ) are stipulated so as to be evenly distributed, and the percentage of each jackpot type (jackpot AA to jackpot AJ) selected is 1%.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third control example, when any one of "jackpot AA" to "jackpot AJ" is selected, the jackpot game (15 rounds) defined in "jackpot A" game) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a game state defined as "jackpot A" is set. The variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the selected jackpot type (jackpot AA to jackpot AJ). .

By configuring in this way, when a specific jackpot game is set, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game ends can be made different. Selection of ``jackpot AJ'' makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time as a variation pattern of special pattern variation to be executed after the completion of a jackpot game than when . That is, even if the same game state is set for the same jackpot game content, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot game is finished can be varied depending on the jackpot type. A player who wants to win the next big win as soon as possible can have expectations for the winning big win type until the timing when the special pattern variation is executed after the end of the big win game.

Like the above-described "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I" defined in the first win type selection table 202C, that is, after the jackpot game ends, the probability is high. State and time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as probability variable state) are given to the jackpot types, and it is defined that "A to J", which are small classifications of each jackpot type, are evenly allocated. On the other hand, "jackpot C", "jackpot H", "jackpot J", "jackpot K", that is, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state and the time saving state are not given (the low probability state and the time saving state are given ) For the jackpot type, a common fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the jackpot game is completed without defining the small classification (A to J) of the jackpot type. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(A), the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202D in the third control example will be described. FIG. 193(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202D in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (A), in this third control example, the special variation pattern table 202D4 is deleted from the first control example, and the big hit (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC1, for the first deviation The difference is that a (probability variable) variation pattern table 202DC2, a second outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3, and a special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4 are added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 193(B), the (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC1 for big hits will be described. FIG. 193(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC1. This big hit (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC1 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the game state is the variable probability state and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 193(B), it is configured to select one of the variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" in association with a variation pattern (various types of super reach) with a variation time of 60 seconds, and "180 to 198" The range is defined in association with a variation pattern (various types of special reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds. In this third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected, the voice ramp control device 113 executes a battle reach (winning battle) in which three attacks are performed (see FIG. 94). When the variation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (victory battle) is executed in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks are performed (see FIG. 96).

Next, referring to FIG. 193(C), the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC2 will be described. FIG. 193(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC2. This first loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. is one.

As shown in FIG. 193 (C), in the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC2, the variation pattern with a short variation time (eg, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) has a long variation time (eg, 60 seconds). It is configured to be more easily selected than the variation pattern. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with a variation pattern (short deviation A) with a variation time of 3 seconds, and "150 to 197". The range is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation B), and "198" is defined in association with a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation A). It is

That is, in the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC2, among 199 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the variation type counter C1, for 198 random values (range of "0 to 197") , a short deviation (short deviation A, short deviation B), which is a variation pattern with a short variation time, is defined, and a long deviation pattern, which is a variation pattern with a long variation time, is defined for the remaining one random value (“198”) Since the deviation (long deviation A) is defined, in most cases (about 99.5%) when selecting a variation pattern with reference to the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC2, the variation time is short A variation pattern is selected.

In the third control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds (short deviation A) or a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation B) is selected, the sound ramp control device 113 performs a pre-battle effect (Fig. 91, see FIG. 92) are executed, and when "short out B" is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) for increasing or decreasing the opponent's continuous value (HP value) is executed. It should be noted that, when the "short out A" is selected, without executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent, A production for switching the characters of is executed. Also, when "Long out A" is selected, a battle reach (tie battle) in which three attacks are performed is executed (see FIG. 94).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(D), the contents of the second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3 will be described. FIG. 193(D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC3. This second loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a loss. There is one, and as shown in FIG. 193(D), it is configured to select one of the variation patterns with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds.

Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 197" in association with a variation pattern (long deviation A) with a variation time of 60 seconds, and "198" A variation pattern (long deviation B) with a variation time of 90 seconds is associated and defined.

FIG. 193(E) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4 is a variation pattern table referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot gaming state is a probability variation state, and regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, the variation time A variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra-short deviation) corresponds to the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the entire range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (ultra-short hit) are defined in association with each other.

Returning to FIG. 191(A), the description continues. The variation scenario setting table 202CA defines the variation pattern selection table 202D (see FIG. 193(A)), which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, in correspondence with the number of variations of the special symbol. It is defined in association with the jackpot type. This variation scenario setting table 202CA, in the jackpot control process executed by the main controller 110 (see S1104 in FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect, that is, the jackpot game end timing (FIG. 137 (S1211: YES), reference is made to set a variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time, and the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type won this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203CA.

Here, the contents of the variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202CA will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. FIG. 194(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable scenario setting table 202CA. As shown in FIG. 194(A), this variation scenario setting table 202CA is associated with each variation scenario (variation Scenarios 1 to 11) are defined.

That is, in the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot (the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot is completed) is determined according to the type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state when the jackpot is won. The range for selecting the variation pattern of ) can be made different. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game, the variation pattern set after the jackpot game can be made different, and the game is played. Interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 194(A), the variation scenario set after the end of the big win is configured to differ depending on the gaming state when the big win is won. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is no time saving state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state common), any jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (A to J)) Even if is set, a common variation scenario (variation scenario 1) is set, and if the game state when winning the jackpot is in a time-saving state (special pattern high probability state, low probability state common) , It is configured to set variation scenarios (variation scenarios 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot types (small classifications of jackpot types (A to J)).

By configuring in this way, the number of times of special pattern fluctuations per unit time is greater in the case of winning the jackpot (probable variable jackpot) in the time saving state than in the case of winning the jackpot (variable probability jackpot) in the state without time saving. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make the player more conscious of the game state when winning the jackpot, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this third control example, if you win a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) in a time-saving state than in a variable scenario (variation scenario 1) set when you win a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) in a time-saving state Each variation scenario is configured so that the set variation scenario (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) has more special symbol variations per unit time, but not limited to this, for example, no time reduction Each variation scenario may be configured so that the number of times of special symbol variation per unit time increases when a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is won in the state. By configuring in this way, for example, in the production mode that can be set only when winning the probability variable jackpot in the time-saving state, it is possible to run the privilege video for a long time.

In addition, some of the variable scenarios (variable scenarios 2 to 11) that are set when the jackpot (variable jackpot) is won in a time-saving state are changed to a jackpot (variable jackpot) in a time-saving state. It may be set so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is less than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning, or when winning a jackpot (probable variable jackpot) without time saving. , It may be configured such that a plurality of variation scenarios are set based on the jackpot type (small classification (A to J) of the jackpot type).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 194(B) to 196(D), the contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202CA will be described. FIG. 194B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 1. FIG. First, the contents defined in the variable scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194(B). The variation scenario is referred to when selecting the number of variations of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot game (that is, one special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game becomes the number of variations 1) and the variation pattern of the variation. is defined in association with the fluctuation pattern table.

Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the corresponding variable scenario is set by the variable scenario setting table 202CA, and the variable scenario is set. It is configured so that the variation pattern is selected according to the contents specified in .

As shown in FIG. 194 (B), in variation scenario 1, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC4) is defined as a variation pattern table to be referred to when the number of variations is "1 to 4", and the number of variations A table B (outlier (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3) is defined as a variation pattern to be referred to when is "5-".

This variation scenario 1, as shown in FIG. 194 (A), is set when all the jackpots to which the jackpot type (small classification) is given are won in a state where the time saving state is not given as the gaming state. be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (E)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit, and the special symbol A variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the lottery.

Then, after the 5th round of special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3 (Table B) (see FIG. 108 (D)) is used, and the variation time is 7 seconds to 90 seconds. A variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type CS1. Since the variable scenario 1 is a scenario set when the game state is a variable probability state, if the special symbol jackpot is won in the state where the variable scenario 1 is set, as described above, A variation pattern is selected using the (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC1.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(C). As shown in FIG. 194 (C), in the variation scenario 2, the number of variations is in the range of "1 to 4", similar to the above-described variation scenario 1, the table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC4) is associated. table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of "5 to 13" for the number of variations, and table D (for the second deviation ( A probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "199", a table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in association with nine fluctuations, and a table D (second A deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in association. That is, during the period when the number of fluctuations in the special design after the jackpot is "5 to 199", the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C after executing the special design fluctuation 9 times, and the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, in the battle production executed during the period in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the special symbol variation in which the pre-battle production is executed (short out (short out A , Special symbol variation in which short deviation B) is selected) and special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed (Special symbol variation in which long deviation (long deviation A, long deviation B) is selected using table D) , can be set in advance, it is possible to change the effect mode of the pre-battle effect toward the special symbol variation in which the battle ready-to-win is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when selecting a variation pattern using the table C, it is configured such that a long deviation A (loss variation of 60 seconds) is selected although it is slight. As a result, when a variable scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, when the battle ready-to-win is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when a variable time (60 seconds or more variable time) that allows the battle ready-to-reach is selected), the player will receive a big hit. A game can be played while expecting that the player has won the lottery.

In addition, as described above, by setting a variable scenario and making it possible to set in advance the period during which the pre-battle effect and the battle ready-to-win are executed, a long period of time (for example, suspension It is possible to set the production mode of the pre-battle production during the period in which the number of special symbol variations greater than the upper limit of memory is executed), but every time the battle production is executed, the same variation scenario is set every time. There is a problem that the player gets tired of the battle production itself if the production based on the game is executed.

In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot ends are the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"). , a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "jackpot AA" to "jackpot AJ") in which different fluctuation scenarios are defined are provided so that the player cannot easily grasp the contents of the fluctuation scenario during the battle production. Configure.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the demerit of scenario creation (monotonous presentation) while having the advantage of creating a scenario of variation patterns (providing a long-term presentation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable). In addition, since the jackpot game content (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot is the same for the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"), a plurality of variable scenarios are configured, To make it difficult for a player to grasp in which variation scenario the special figure variation is executed after the end of the big win even when the player comprehends the game contents of the big win and the game state set after the end of the big win. . Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, it is difficult to understand whether it is a predetermined battle reach (a draw battle) based on a variable scenario or a battle reach (a battle of victory or defeat) based on winning a jackpot. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, for all of the "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot G", and "jackpot I", the jackpot type with "A to J" is specified. However, the type of jackpot defined for each jackpot may be different. For example, when a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A" is executed, a specific variation scenario (for example, a variation scenario It may be configured such that only 2) can be set. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing for a long time to understand the relationship between the content of the big win game and the variable scenario. Therefore, when a battle ready-to-win is executed at a timing different from usual after a specific big win game (for example, a big win game corresponding to "big win A") is finished, expectations for a big win can be heightened.

Then, a table B (loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations of the special symbols from "200". By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot as in this control example, it is not necessary to infinitely create variable scenarios, so that the data capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced. can be done. It should be noted that, in this third control example, the variation reached when the lottery of 4 times or more of the probability is executed for the special symbol jackpot probability in the variable probability state (about 1/48 (see FIG. 106 (A))) When the number of times "200" is exceeded, the table B (loss (variable probability) variation pattern table 202D3) is executed. ) fluctuation pattern table 202D3) may be executed, for example, when the number of fluctuations reaches “500” when a lottery with a probability of 10 times or more of the jackpot is executed, table B is used. It is also possible to configure such that selection of the variation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the third control example, when the number of fluctuations "200", which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed. A table may be used, for example, the selection of a variation pattern using Table A may be configured to be executed until the next jackpot is won, or the number of variations from "200", which is the upper limit of the variation scenario. Selection of the variation pattern using the table A is performed during the period of the number of times "399", and when the number of variations exceeds "400", selection of the variation pattern using the table B is performed until the next jackpot is won. It may be configured as follows.

As described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is executed based on the variation scenario for the special symbol variation within the range of the number of lotteries that can normally win the jackpot. However, when the upper limit of the variation scenario (the number of variations "200") is exceeded, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable to perform a privilege effect such as providing video and audio that the player cannot normally see, or awarding the points collected by the player. As a result, it is possible to give a special benefit to a player who has not been able to win the jackpot for a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-described privilege effect is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set in order to smoothly execute the battle effect executed during the variable probability state. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the privilege presentation.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(D). FIG. 194(D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation scenario 3. As shown in FIG. This variation scenario 3 is configured such that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using the tables C and D is different from the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194(C)). Specifically, in fluctuation scenario 3, the number of fluctuations is defined in the range of "1 to 4" in association with table A (special (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC4) similar to fluctuation scenario 2 described above, and the number of fluctuations Table C (first outlier (probable variable) variation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of "5 to 9", and table D (second outlier (probable variable) variation pattern table when the number of fluctuations is "10" 202DC3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "190", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations five times, and the table D (second A deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period of "5 to 190" after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table C is executed 5 times, and then the variation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variable scenario is executed can be varied depending on the type of the set variable scenario, so the battle reach based on winning the jackpot ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory battle or a defeat battle), and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Then, as in the above-described variation scenario 2, the table C (first deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of the number of variations "190 to 198", and when the number of variations is "199" A table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined, and a table B (loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3) is defined in the range of the number of variations from "200 to".

In this way, the period of the pre-battle production corresponding to the last battle reach (the battle reach executed when the number of fluctuations is "199") (the period when the number of fluctuations is "190 to 198") regardless of the jackpot type By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the performance contents to be executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to prepare for each jackpot type a production that suggests to the player that the battle production is over (a production that makes the production mode before the battle or the battle reach different from the usual), so the capacity of the production data can be reduced. can be reduced.

It should be noted that there is no need to unify the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effects will end (the effects that make the effects before the battle and the effects of the battle reach different from normal) for all the jackpot types. The variation scenario must be configured so that the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effects will end for each of the two jackpot types (the effects that make the effects before the battle and the effects of the battle reach different from normal) are unified. , the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195(A), the contents of the variation scenario 4 will be described. FIG. 195(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 4. FIG. In this variation scenario 4, the same contents as the above-described variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (C)) are defined in the period from "1 to 14" for the number of times of variation, and the contents defined after that is configured to be different from the variation scenario 2. In this way, a plurality of variable scenarios define the same content for a predetermined period after the end of the big win, and change the content after the predetermined period. It can make it more obscure what the volatility scenario is.

FIG. 195(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of variation scenario 5. As shown in FIG. This variation scenario 5 is different from the variation scenarios 2 to 4 in that the variation pattern is selected using the table D after the variation number "1 to 4" in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A. is executed. That is, a battle reach (a draw battle) is executed without executing a pre-battle production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of incongruity with respect to the battle presentation as compared with the case where other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big win for the battle ready-to-win that is executed immediately after the start of the battle production. Other contents are the same as those of the fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 195(C), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which a variation pattern is selected using table A, and a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using table D. is set continuously, which is different from other variable scenarios. Other elements are the same as those in the above-described fluctuation scenarios 2 to 4, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, for the above-described variation scenario 6, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the variation scenario, the variation pattern table defined in the variation scenario is made the same, and each variation pattern table is associated with the same variation pattern table. A variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195(D)) is provided in which only the number of times of variation is different. As a result, even when a variation pattern is selected using the table C after the end of the big win (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the end of the big win), the currently set variation is applied to the player. It can obfuscate what the scenario is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196(A), the contents of change scenario 8 will be described. FIG. 196(A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of variation scenario 8. FIG. Variation scenario 8, as shown in FIG. 196(A), is different from the above-described variation scenarios 1 to 7 in that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using table A is set longer. . Specifically, the table A is defined in association with the range of "1 to 10" for the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the end of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting a variation pattern using the table A in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. jackpot can be provided in a short period of time.

Also, during the period defined in association with this table A, the third symbol display device 81 displays the same display as the extended display of the first control example, that is, the ending screen showing the end of the jackpot game. configured to be displayed. As a result, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, variation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(B). FIG. 196(B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(B), this variation scenario 9 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the variation pattern table initially defined after the end of the jackpot is changed from table A to table B. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the variable probability state is not set as the game state after the end of the big win. After that, when the period defined in association with table B (the period of the number of fluctuations "1 to 4") has passed, the fluctuation pattern using table C and table D will be selected in the same way as other fluctuation scenarios. , and since the battle performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the selected variation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

FIG. 196(C) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(C), variation scenario 10 is different from other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting a variation pattern using table D is not set. That is, in this variable scenario 10, since the variation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period in which the battle effect is executed, a predetermined battle reach (tie battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. never be done.

In this variation scenario 10, when the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 when selecting the variation pattern using the table C is "198" and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation A) is selected Alternatively, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit and a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the variation pattern table 202DC1 for the big win (probability variation), the battle reach is executed. . Therefore, when this variable scenario 10 is set, the probability of winning a jackpot when battle reach is executed can be made higher than when other variable scenarios are set.

In addition, in the third control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, and the probability variable big win in which the probability variable state is given as the game state after the big win, and the big win As a game state after the end, there is a normal jackpot in which a normal state is given, and in the battle reach executed during the battle production, a winning battle is executed when the probability variable jackpot is won, and the normal jackpot is won. In this case, a losing battle is executed, and a draw battle is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out.

In other words, when this variable scenario 10 is set, the frequency of execution of draw battles can be reduced compared to when other variable scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the effect when the battle ready-to-win is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Note that if a variable scenario is set without using the table D like the variable scenario 10, there is a risk that the pre-battle effect will be executed for a long period of time. It is preferable to use a table (table C2) that can select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 to 1 second) than a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 to 5 seconds. . Thereby, the period during which the pre-battle effect is continuously executed can be shortened.

Next, variation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(D). FIG. 196(D) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 11. FIG. In this variation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196(D), the variation pattern table that is specified first after the end of the big win is the table C. It is different from the other fluctuation scenarios in that Table A is defined in 1) and that the upper limit number of fluctuation scenarios is set to "400".

According to the variation scenario 11, as with the variation scenario 10 described above, there is no period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be won when the battle reach is executed. (the possibility that a winning or losing battle will be executed) can be increased, and the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the battle ready-to-win production.

In addition, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot exceeds a predetermined number (399 times), the table A, which has the highest number of fluctuations per unit time, is set as a game state. Dissatisfaction felt by the player when the period during which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time (for example, the period during which the special symbol variation is performed ten times as many times as the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability). Feelings can be suppressed.

As described above, in the third control example, a plurality (10 types) of variation scenarios can be set for the same jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (draw) based on the variation scenario Battle) and battle reach (victory or defeat battle) based on winning a special pattern jackpot are difficult to understand, but the type of variable scenario is not limited to this, and there are more types. A variable scenario may be configured to be settable.

Further, in the third control example, a variable scenario is determined for all periods during which the battle effect is executed, and the content of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be determined in advance. Only a part of the period during which the battle production is performed (for example, the period between the end of the jackpot and the execution of 50 special symbol fluctuations, or the period of 10 special symbol fluctuations calculated backward from the timing at which the battle production ends) It may be configured to define a variable scenario.

In the third control example, a configuration is used to set the variation scenario of the special symbol variation based on the winning jackpot type, but other elements may be used to set (change) the variation scenario. Although the lottery result of the special pattern is a failure, the variable scenario may be set (variable) in the case of a lottery result (so-called small win) that gives a small amount of benefits to the player rather than the big win. Alternatively, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above may be configured to set (variable) a variation scenario when a fall is won. Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery for varying the fluctuation scenario is provided, and the fluctuation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result. It may be configured to

Next, referring to FIG. 191(B), the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 used in the third control example will be described. FIG. 191B is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 191B, the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a variable scenario storage area 203CA is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variable scenario storage area 203CA is an area for storing variable scenarios set using the variable scenario setting table 202CA. In this third control example, a special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203CA. In this variation scenario storage area 203CA, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a variation scenario corresponding to the winning jackpot type is stored, and variation frequency subtraction processing 4 ( 204) (see S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, after the jackpot is won (after the process of starting the variation of the special symbols to indicate that the jackpot has been won), until the special symbol variation after the jackpot is completed. Since the variation scenario is stored in between, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed after the end of the big win can be reliably selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203CA.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197(A), the ROM 222 of the third control example has the continued value main selection table 222F and the continued value sub-selection table 222G deleted from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. points, a variable scenario storage area 222CA, a first continuous value main selection table 222CB, a second continuous value main selection table 222CC, a third continuous value main selection table 222CD, and a continuous effect mode selection 2 table 222CE. The difference is that they are added. Note that the third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above. Descriptions of elements that are not related to the production are omitted, and other elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Variation scenario storage area 222CA is an area in which information indicating the contents of a plurality of variation scenarios defined in variation scenario setting table 202CA of main controller 110 is stored, and is output from main controller 110. Based on a command for indicating the setting status of the variation scenario (for example, a command for indicating the type of jackpot or a command for indicating the set variation scenario), the voice lamp control device 113 side updates the variation scenario. Information used for management is stored.

This variable scenario storage area 222CA is stored when it is determined in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the sound lamp control device 113 that a state command including related information related to the variable scenario has been received (S3271 in FIG. 205: YES ), the variable scenario corresponding to the received command is read and set in the variable scenario update area 223CA (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to synchronize the variation scenario set by the main controller 110 and the variation scenario managed by the audio lamp control device 113, the variation pattern selected in the future by the main controller 110 (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third winning information is Winning information for which special symbol variation is executed), long term using the fluctuation period of special symbol variation (special symbol variation performed first and second among winning information) performed before that However, if, for example, a plurality of pieces of winning information are not stored in the winning information storage area 223A, it becomes difficult to execute long-term rendering. In addition, since the maximum value of the range in which long-term performance can be executed becomes the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223A, there is a problem that the performance period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) is scenario managed, and the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom for long-term production.

In addition, in the third control example, since the sound lamp control device 113 has the variable scenario storage area 222CA, it is not necessary to output all the contents of the variable scenario set by the main controller 110, and the set Information for indicating the variation scenario (for example, information indicating the winning jackpot type, identification information that can specify the variation scenario to be set from among a plurality of variation scenarios) may be output, so the main controller 110 The amount of data to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in this third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted (when power failure occurs), when the power supply is restored, the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 immediately before the power supply is interrupted (or after the power supply is interrupted until the processing of the main controller 110 is stopped). In the information for indicating the gaming state output in the restoration process, at least the type of jackpot that was previously won and the type of jackpot that is currently set as information for indicating the currently set variation scenario. Information for indicating any of the variation scenarios, information for indicating any of the update status of the currently set variation scenario, and the number of variations of the special symbols executed after the previous jackpot is completed, and It is configured so that As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, after the restoration, the update contents of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the variation managed by the sound lamp control device 113 It can be easily synchronized with the update contents of the scenario.

In this case, for a predetermined period after the update management process of the variation scenario by the audio lamp control device 113 is restored based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the recovery processing (for example, the special symbol is changed multiple times (5 times) and the period until the variation pattern table specified in the variation scenario is switched) are managed by the update contents of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. It is good to use it as a confirmation period for determining whether the update contents of the fluctuation scenario have been correctly updated. As a result, it is possible to more accurately restore the update management process of the variable scenario. It should be noted that during the confirmation period described above, to indicate that it is in the process of recovery and the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 without being based on the variation scenario It is preferable to configure so that the recovery display of is executed. As a result, since the third symbol display device 81 can display the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The first continuation value main selection table 222CB is a table that is referred to when updating the continuation value (HP value) when the continuation effect (battle effect) is being executed. period (remaining period) is a predetermined period or more (for example, when the number of special symbol variations until execution of special symbol variations corresponding to battle reach is 4 or more), it is a table to be referred to.

Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described first control example. The first control example described above sets the main continuation value for updating the continuation value in the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. by referring to the corresponding table, calculating a total value by adding the set main continuation value and the sub continuation value, and issuing an information command for indicating the total value to the display control device 114, in the third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the sound ramp control device 113 is indicated. An information command including information for is output to the display control device 114, and based on the information command received by the display control device 114 side, a secondary continuation value is set and a total value is calculated.

That is, in the third control example, when the continuation value is repeatedly increased or decreased, only the main continuation value, which is the value to be managed in order to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbols and the variation scenario, is selected by the sound lamp control device 113. , and all other processes are executed by the display control device 114 . As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

The contents of the first continuous value main selection table 222CB will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuous value main selection table 222CB. In the first continuation value main selection table 222CB, the ratio of the selected value (main continuation value) to the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223N) is different. is stipulated to be

This selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) that the value of a dedicated effect counter (not shown) can take. In addition, the first continuation value main selection table 222CB defines the lower limit of selectable selection values to be "400". As described above, the first continuation value main selection table 222CB indicates that when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, at least four special symbol This is because the table is used when it is necessary to perform a change, so that unnecessary low selection values are set and the progress of the continuous value increase/decrease effect is prevented from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining counter 223CB becomes 3 or less, that is, when the battle ready-to-win battle is about to start, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value can be performed without discomfort.

To explain the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223N is '1000', the rate at which '1000' is selected as the selected value (main continuation value) is is 5%, "900" is selected by 50%, "800" is selected by 30%, "700" is selected by 10%, and "600" is selected by 3 %, and the rate at which "500" is selected is defined as 2%.

Here, the content of the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the increase or decrease of the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, an effect corresponding to the increase or decrease of the total value obtained by summing the main continuation value selected by the sound lamp control device 113 and the secondary continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. . Since the effect to be executed is configured such that the secondary continuation value is selected so that the range of increase/decrease of the main continuation value and the range of increase/decrease of the total value are the same as in the first control example described above, Substantially, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222CB.

Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selected value is "1000", a "check-in" effect is executed to prevent the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen from increasing or decreasing. be done. When a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222CB, a command to that effect is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, The display control device 114 is configured so that the secondary continuation value is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value does not decrease, and the displayed continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases.

Next, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" effect is executed to decrease the opponent's continuation value (HP value). The detailed effect mode of this "attack" effect is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value. In the case of 300, "strong attack" is set, in the case of 400, "strong attack", and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict the extent of decrease in the continuation value (HP value) according to the content of the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can be of interest.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "900", the rate of selecting "900" as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected is 10%, and "800" is selected as 50%, "700" is selected as 30%, "600" is selected as 5%, and "500" is selected as 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223N is "800", the rate of selecting "800" as the selected value (main continuation value) is 20%, and the rate of selecting "700". is 50%, "600" is selected at 20%, and "500" is selected at 10%.

Further, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "700", the rate of selecting "900" as the selection value (main continuous value) to be selected is 10%, and "700" is The percentage of selection is 30%, the percentage of selection of "600" is 40%, the percentage of selection of "500" is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "600". , the rate of selecting "800" is 10%, the rate of selecting "600" is 40%, and the rate of selecting "500" is 40%. If the stored value is "500", the percentage of "900" selected is 10%, the percentage of "700" selected is 10%, and the percentage of "500" selected is 80%. When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "400", the rate of selecting "900" is 30%, the rate of selecting "700" is 20%, and the rate of selecting "500" is The percentage of selection is defined as 10%, and the percentage of selection of "400" is defined as 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223N is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, as an effect executed on the display screen, a "recovery" effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent increases. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuous value (HP value) decreases unexpectedly, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As described above, the first continuation value main selection table 222CB, which is used when the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 4 or more, shows the rate at which the effect (weak attack) that gradually decreases the main continuation value is selected. is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. As a result, even when the pre-battle effect is executed over a long period of time, the continuous value increase/decrease effect can be advanced. Also, even if the percentage of "weak attacks" selected is set high, similar to the first control example described above, the effect mode executed on the display screen is varied in accordance with the selected secondary continuation value. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentation modes, and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The second continuous value main selection table 222CC is used when selecting the effect mode of pre-battle effect when the pending win flag 223CC is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol fluctuates several times and then the big win occurs. table used. Next, referring to FIG. 199, the contents of the second continuous value main selection table 222CC will be described. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222CC. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuous value main selection table 222CC has "777", "333", The difference is that "300" to "0" are added. The following description will focus on the differences from the first continuous value main selection table 222CB. Among the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222CC, the detailed description of elements that are the same as those in the first continuous value main selection table 222CB or that differ only in selection ratio will be omitted. .

The second continuation value main selection table 222CC is configured so that '777' and '333' can be selected as the main continuation value in order to inform in advance that there is winning information corresponding to a big win in the reserve. there is When "777" and "333" are selected as the selection values, a dedicated command indicating this is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 performs secondary continuation. Configured so that no value selection occurs. As a result, the secondary continuation value is selected even though the main continuation value for indicating the winning of the jackpot is selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222CC, and the displayed continuation value (HP value) can be prevented from increasing or decreasing.

In addition, in the third control example, when a main continuation value is selected to indicate that the player will win the jackpot, the selection of the secondary continuation value is prohibited. Although the values ("777", "333") are configured to be able to be notified, other configurations may be used, and when a command related to the main continuation value for indicating the winning of the jackpot is received Then, the display control device 114 is configured to select a secondary continuation value using a dedicated selection table, and when the value (secondary continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0" Only "777" and "333" may be displayed as continuous values (HP values) on the display screen. In this case, the values that the dedicated selection table described above can take include, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", a value obtained by adding "23" and "13", or "7" and "17". It is preferable that the value to be subtracted from is selectable. With this configuration, when a value other than "0" is selected as the secondary continuation value, the value of the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to "0". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that '777' is selected as the continuous value, and the added value is that the continuous value (HP value) is displayed on the display screen to indicate that the jackpot is won. can increase

Further, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222CB, the second continuous value main selection table 222CC is configured so that selection values from "300" to "0" can be selected. As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect becomes less than "300", the player can predict that the battle ready-to-win will be executed soon. . Although the details will be described later, the third continuous value main selection table 222CD (a table used when the value of the remaining count counter 223CB is 3 or less) also uses "300" to "0" as the selection values, and the second It is configured to be selectable at a selection rate lower than that of the continuous value main selection table 222CC. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for the big win.

In FIG. 199, multiple values such as "1000 to 800" are collectively described as current continuous values and selection values, but in reality, "1000", "900", and "800" have independent contents. are specified, and since the content specified for each is the same, multiple values are listed together.

In addition, in the second continuation value main selection table 222CC, a value of "1000 to 800" is selected as a value to be selected when the resurrection effect is executed, regardless of the currently set main continuation value. Set a high percentage. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222CC is configured so that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation values to indicate that the jackpot will be won, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle production after the game, the continuation value (HP value) is increased to a range in which the main continuation value for indicating that the player will win the big win can be selected, thereby prompting the player to win the big win again. The game can be played with the expectation that the main continuation value will be selected to indicate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The third continuation value main selection table 222CD is for when the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 3 or less, that is, when the number of remaining variations until the Battle Reach is executed set based on the variation scenario is 3 or less. This is a table used when selecting an effect mode of pre-battle effect. Next, referring to FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222CD will be described. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuous value main selection table 222CD.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuous value main selection table 222CD has similar contents to the second continuous value main selection table 222CC shown in FIG. The percentage of selecting the main continuation values (“777”, “333”) is set to “0”, the percentage of selecting “0” as the selection value is set to “0”, and the overall The difference is that the rate of selecting low values (“300” to “0”) as the selection value is reduced, and the content other than that is the same with a slight difference in the selection rate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description continues. The continuous production mode selection 4 table 222CE is a table for selecting the production mode (production mode) of the pre-battle production in the continuous production. Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222CE will be described. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222CE. Continuation production mode selection 4 table 222CE, with respect to the continuation production mode selection table 222E of the first control example described above, when the upper limit of the variation scenario is reached (in a state where the probability variation state is set, the number of times of special symbol variation is 200 It is different in that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times is exceeded). Other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in the third control example, a variation scenario is set for the special symbol variation after the end of the big hit, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is determined using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. configured to be selected. Then, in view of the data capacity of the main controller 110, the variation scenario is set to a range where the number of variations of the special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, the number of times of the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability by 5). is constructed so that a variation pattern is selected using a specific variation pattern table (table B) until the next big win is won (see FIG. 194).

In this third control example configured in this way, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the above-described predetermined number of times, it becomes difficult to execute the continuous performance using the variation scenario, so a special performance mode "Mode 6" is selected as the When "mode 6" is selected, the battle production ends, and the variation pattern (see FIG. 108 (D)) defined in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202D3 (table B) is specified. A performance is performed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot be seen normally is executed, such as an effect in which a party is held after reconciliation with an opponent with whom no settlement has been reached during the battle effect.

In addition, in this third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when the period during which the jackpot is not won in the variable probability state is long It is configured to execute the above-mentioned specific effect and give the player a sense of satisfaction, but in addition to that, for example, it is set when a specific jackpot type (for example, small category "K") is won. The number of times of variation of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the variation scenario, may be set to "20" only for the specific variation scenario to be performed, so that the above-described privilege effect can be easily seen. As a result, when a plurality of jackpot types (small classifications "A" to "K") are provided for jackpots (for example, large classification "jackpot A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, games are played for each small classification. It is possible to differentiate the privilege (ease of execution of the specific performance) to be given to the person, and to make the player interested in the winning jackpot type even after winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197(B), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example in that the duration counter 223P is deleted, the variable scenario update area 223CA, the remaining number counter 223CB, the on-hold hit flag 223CC, and the continuation setting flag 223CD The difference is that the In addition, in the third control example, since another control example related to the continuous effect of the first control example described above is explained, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuous effect are Description is omitted.

The variable scenario update area 223CA is an area updated and managed so that the sound lamp controller 113 side can grasp the variable scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variable scenario. This variable scenario update area 223CA is displayed when it is determined in command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 205) that variable scenario related information for indicating a variable scenario set in main controller 110 has been received (FIG. 205: S3271 : YES), a variable scenario corresponding to the received variable scenario-related information is selected from a plurality of variable scenarios stored in the variable scenario storage area 222CA, the selected variable scenario is set, and a variable display setting process ( 147) is executed, the progress of the variable scenario is updated. Based on the update status of the variable scenario set in the variable scenario update area 223CA, the value of the remaining counter 223CB is set in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207). Then, when the jackpot is won, the set variation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number counter 223CB is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach is performed. is configured to run. This remaining number counter 223CB calculates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until next execution of the battle reach in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) based on the information of the fluctuation scenario update area 223CA. The value obtained is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223CB (S4052 in FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining counter 223CB is decremented by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207) each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed, and the battle ready-to-win is executed as the continuous effect or the pre-battle effect. It is referenced when determining whether to execute Also, in the winning information command process (see FIG. 206), when it is determined that there is a winning prize in the pending state (S3251 in FIG. 206: YES), the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is referred to correspond to the winning state in the pending state. ( S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The pending winning flag 223CC is a flag for indicating whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223A. This indicates that there is prize-winning information for winning a jackpot.

This reserved winning flag 223CC is not always set to ON when there is winning information for winning a big win in the winning information storage area 223A. , is set to ON when it is determined to be executed before the value of the remaining counter 223CB becomes "0" (S3253 in FIG. 206: YES). In the continuous value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether the pending hit flag 223CC is set to ON (see S4151 in FIG. 208). S4151: YES), the hundreds digit of the continuation value is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222CC.

The continuation setting flag 223CD is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set in the variable probability state, and the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set when set to ON. It indicates that

This continuation setting flag 223CD is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) by determining the setting status (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and determining that it is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4051 in FIG. 207: NO), after the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the process of S4051 of FIG. 207, if it is determined that the setting is ON (S4051 of FIG. 207: YES), the process of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining counter 223CB is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent resetting the value of the remaining number counter 223CB in a state in which a value has already been set in the remaining number counter 223CB. As a result, after setting the value of the remaining number counter 223CB, every time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is subtracted by 1 (see S4057 in FIG. 207). The update status of the variable scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variable scenario managed by the audio lamp controller 113 can be easily synchronized by simply executing .

Also, in the process of S3254 executed in the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), a value that does not correspond to the variation scenario, that is, a value that indicates the number of special symbol variations until the winning information for winning the jackpot is executed. When it is set in the remaining number counter 223CB, subtraction based on that value can be reliably executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example is different from the display control device 114 of the first control example described above in that a continuous value storage area 233CA is added to the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 The difference is that a first continuation value sub-selection table 234A3 and a second continuation value sub-selection table 234A4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234A.

The continuous value storage area 233CA is an area for storing the continuous value calculated based on the display continuous value command received from the sound ramp control device 113. In the continuous value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command process (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode to be executed this time is not the winning battle (S8305 in FIG. 211: NO), the stored value is referred to (see FIG. 211). (see S8306 of ).

The first continuation value subselection table 234A3 and the second continuation value subselection table 234A4 are the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 (FIG. 117(B)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. ) and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222G2 (see FIG. 117(C)), which is the fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223Y4.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, the special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used instead of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127), and the variation count subtraction processing (see FIG. 129) is used in place of the first control example described above. (see FIG. 204) in place of the change count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204), and other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). This special symbol variation process 4 is different from the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the content of the processing to be executed when it is determined (S216: YES) is partially different, and the same processing is executed for other elements. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the processes of S201 to S216 which are the same as the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) are executed. Then, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S216: YES), then the first hit type selection table 202C (see FIG. 192) is selected with reference to the jackpot type Set the opening scenario of the specific winning mouth based on. Specifically, the game contents of the jackpot to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, the last round (for example , 15th round), a scenario is set in which the specific prize winning opening is opened in the current jackpot, including the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot.

When the processing of S217 is finished, next, the variable probability flag 203G and the time saving medium counter 203H are reset (S218), the start of the jackpot is set (S219), and the state command based on the jackpot type is set (S251). Then, the process of S220, which is the same as that of the first control example described above, is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S216, even if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (no) (S216: NO), the same process of S221 as in the above-described first control example is executed, and the process of S220 is executed. and terminate this process.

In the process of S251 described above, a state command is set that includes at least information for indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time. The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 136). It is sent towards device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, it extracts information about the jackpot type from the state command, and responds from the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 222CA of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variable scenario is selected, and the selected variable scenario is stored in the variable scenario update area 223CA.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbols after the end of the big win at the timing when the big win game is started. . As a result, for example, compared to the case of simultaneously outputting the information command indicating the variation pattern at the timing when the big hit ends and the variation of the special symbol starts and the command for indicating the variation scenario set this time, the variation is more reliable. You can set the production corresponding to the scenario.

In addition, in the third control example, the state command set at the start of the jackpot game includes information for indicating the variation scenario set after the jackpot ends. You can also set the production during the jackpot. Therefore, since the effect executed during the big win can suggest to the player the variable scenario to be set after the end of the big win, the player can be interested in the effect executed during the big win. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the content of the variation count subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flow chart schematically showing the content of the variation number subtraction process 4. As shown in FIG. The change count subtraction process 4 differs from the change count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above in that the process (S451, S452) for updating the change scenario stored in the change scenario update area 223CA is added. The difference is in the added point, and the others are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the change count subtraction process 4 is executed, the processes 401 to S411 of S3709, which are the same as the change count subtraction process of the first control example (see FIG. 129), are executed. Next, it is determined whether a variable scenario is stored in the variable scenario update area 223CA (S451), and if it is determined that a variable scenario is stored (S451: YES), the stored variable scenario is updated ( S452), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S451 that no variation scenario is stored (S451: NO), this process ends without executing the process of S452.

Here, the contents of updating the variable scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is started, the variation scenario can be reliably updated.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 to 208, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, command determination processing 4 (S205) is used instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 140), and instead of the winning information command processing (see S141), , Winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, and variation count subtraction processing 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of variation count subtraction processing (see FIG. 129). are identical. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as in the first control example described above are executed. After the processing of S3214 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the received state command contains relevant information for setting the variation scenario (S3271), and if the relevant information for setting the variation scenario is included, (S3271: YES), the variable scenario corresponding to the variable scenario related information included in the received status command is selected from the variable scenario storage area 222CA and stored in the variable scenario update area 223CA (S3272). . Then, a display status command is set (S3215), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3271 that the relevant information for setting the variation scenario is not included (S3271: NO), the processing of S3272 is skipped, the processing of S3215 is executed, and this processing is terminated. finish.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, winning information command processing 4 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning information command process 4. FIG.

When the winning information command process 4 is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231). (S3251). In the processing of S3251, if it is determined that the prize is a winning prize (S3251: YES), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning prize information received this time is based on the place where the prize winning information received this time is stored in the prize winning information storage area. is calculated (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223CB is greater than the order of variation calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223CB is greater (S3253: YES) , the value set in the remaining number counter 223CB, ie, the value indicating the remaining number of times (special symbol variation number) until the battle reach is executed based on the content of the set variation scenario, is won as a jackpot. is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until battle reach is executed based on (S3254).

As a result, it is possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the battle reach is actually executed, so during the battle production, the pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed The content (increase or decrease content of the continuous value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next Battle Reach is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

After completing the processing of S3254, the on-hold hit flag 223CC is set to ON (S3255), other prefetch processing is executed (S3256), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3251, when it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: NO), the processing of S3252 to S3255 is skipped, the processing of S3256 is executed, and this processing ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. FIG. This continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting the effect mode of a plurality of effects to be executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223CD is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223CD is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S4051: YES), then the remaining counter is set based on the information stored in the variable scenario update area 223CA. 223CB is set (S4052).

Here, the processing of S4052 will be described. The variable scenario update area 223CA stores a variable scenario corresponding to (synchronized with) the variable scenario set by the main controller 110. FIG. Then, using the table D, the number of variations of the special symbol until the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected is executed is calculated, and the calculated number of times is set in the remaining number counter 223CB. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbols until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is discriminated, and the table for setting the continuation value is varied based on the discrimination result. As a result, it is possible to vary the continuation value set corresponding to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of variations of the special symbols). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the continuation value is greatly decreased even though the battle ready-to-win is not executed for the time being (the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is large).

In addition, in a situation where the battle reach will soon be executed (a situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is small), the continuation value can be greatly reduced in order to make the player expect that a winning battle will be executed in the battle reach. can.

Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of times of special symbol variation until the special symbol variation in which Battle Reach is executed is determined in advance based on information (variation pattern information) defined in the variation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation of the special symbol that the battle reach is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the content of the winning prize information that is reserved and stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause discomfort.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the variation pattern stored with hold, in the special symbol variation that is executed before the battle reach (draw battle) that is determined in advance using the variation scenario is performed, variation Variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is out at 60 seconds (first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table (table C) Variation pattern selected when the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired. ) or when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) or more before the special symbol variation is executed, the special symbol A value corresponding to the number of special symbol variations until is varied is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223CB. As a result, even if the battle reach is performed without being based on the variation scenario, that is, even if the battle reach is performed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol variation performed by the battle reach (battle in the pre-production), the continuous value can be increased or decreased appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description continues. After completing the processing of S4052, next, the continuation setting flag 223CD is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223CD is set to ON, the determination processing of S4051 is configured so that the processing of S4052 is not executed. This prohibits the value of the remaining number counter 223CB from being set again in a state in which a value has already been set in the remaining number counter 223CB. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB that is not based on the variation scenario (the value of the remaining number counter 223CB that is set corresponding to the special symbol variation that becomes the big hit when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win) is set. Even if the value is

When the processing of S4053 is completed, then, it is determined whether the current variation (special symbol variation) is a hit variation corresponding to a big hit (S4054), and if it is determined to be a hit variation (S4054: YES), the battle In order to set the effect mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of the effect, the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a hit variation (it is a loss variation) (S4054: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining counter 223CB is 0 (S4055).

Here, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is 0 (S4055: YES), that is, the special symbol variation of this time is a special symbol variation in which battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario (Table D If it is a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using, the process proceeds to S4013 described later, and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: NO ) then determines whether the current variation pattern is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the process of S4056, it is determined whether the variation pattern (long deviation A) with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected using the first outlier (probable variation) variation pattern table (table C), and the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds If so (S4056: YES), the process proceeds to S4013, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of 60 seconds (long deviation A) (S4056: NO), the process proceeds to S4057.

That is, in the determination process of S4054 to S4056 described above, whether to set the pre-battle effect or set the battle reach as the variable effect (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set corresponding to the special symbol change this time. Whether or not to set is discriminated, in S4054 it is discriminated whether or not a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055 it is discriminated whether or not the battle reach is set based on the special symbol variation scenario. However, in S4056, it is determined whether or not it is a specific lottery result even though the winning lottery for the special symbol is out of the lottery.

When the variation performance to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle performance, the value of the remaining number counter 223CB is subtracted by 1 (S4057), and then S4004 as in the first control example described above. The processing of S4008 is executed, then the continuation value setting processing 2 is executed (S4058), and this processing ends. The contents of this continuous value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the variation production to be executed in response to the special symbol variation this time is Battle Reach (if YES is determined in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), the final mode selection table 222H is used. A mode is selected (S4013), the corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014), the continuation effect flag 223R, the continuation setting flag 223CD, and the on-hold winning flag 223CC are set to OFF (S4059), and the remaining counter 223CB is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuation effect mode storage area 223M are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process ends.

Next, the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058). In this continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value according to the value of the remaining number counter 223CB and the setting status of the on-hold hit flag 223CC is executed. Thus, by varying the selection range of the continuation value set as the effect mode of the pre-battle effect according to the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 A player can be interested.

When the continuous value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the continuous value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, in the first deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202DC2 (table C), when the short deviation B with a variation time of 5 seconds is selected, it is determined that it is the continuous value variation timing. . In addition, in this third control example, as the variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern (short deviation B) that is determined to be continuous value variation timing, and a variation pattern that is determined not to be continuous value variation timing (short deviation A ), but without being limited to this, if a lottery means is provided for determining whether or not to vary the continuous value in the sound ramp control device 113, and the continuous value is varied with respect to the same variation pattern. It may be configured such that it is possible to set whether or not to allow it. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be determined that it is time to change the continuous value. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that it is time to change the continuous value (S4101: YES), in order to execute the process of setting the effect mode for increasing or decreasing (variable) the continuous value in the current variable effect, S4151 is executed. Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing (S4101: NO), the process ends.

In the process of S4151, it is determined whether the on-hold hit flag 223CC is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the on-hold winning flag 223CC is set to ON (S4151: YES), that is, if the winning information corresponding to the special symbol that wins the jackpot exists in the holding, the second A main continuation value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222CC (S4157). It is determined whether there is (S4158).

In the processing of S4158, if it is determined that the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: YES), display control is performed to display the selected value on the third symbol display device 81 as it is. The device 114 sets a display specific continuation value command to which the effect continuation value (secondary continuation value) is not added (S4159), and ends this processing. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol that will win a big hit in the reserve of special symbols, it is possible to wait until the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed based on the variation scenario. When a battle reach (tie battle) is executed, the pending win flag 223CC is not set to ON, so the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222CC. As a result, it is possible to execute the battle reach (win or lose battle) immediately after the battle reach (tie battle) based on the variable scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

As described above, in the third control example, based on the variation order of the special symbols that win the jackpot existing in the reserve and the special symbols in which the battle reach (tie battle) is executed based on the variation scenario, the specific Technically, it is configured so that the value of the main continuation value is selected according to the contents corresponding to the special symbol variation to be executed first, but other configurations may be used, for example, it exists in the reserve. If the type of jackpot is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a probability variable jackpot in which a winning battle is performed), or a predetermined determination result (for example, a defeat battle is The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different between the determination result corresponding to the executed normal hit and the determination result.

Specifically, for example, when the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the variation scenario is performed rather than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot that exists in the reserve is executed first sets a new value of the remaining number counter 223CB to the number of times of variation until the variation of the special symbols corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is executed, and creates a variation scenario rather than the variation of the special symbols corresponding to the normal winning that exists in the reserve. If the variation of the special symbols in which the battle ready-to-win (draw battle) based on is executed is executed first, the value of the already set remaining number counter 223CB is not changed. In this way, by varying the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probable variable jackpot or normal jackpot), pre-battle production It is possible to predict the type of jackpot by the presentation mode of (1), and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, it may be configured such that the continuation value finally displayed in the battle ready-to-win, which is a draw battle, is inherited as it is to set the effect mode of the next battle effect. As a result, the relevance can be given to the battle effects that are repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and the players can be interested in the effects that are executed over a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the process of S4151, if it is determined that the on-hold hit flag 223CC is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4151: NO), then the value of the remaining counter 223CB is 4 or more. (S4152), and if it is determined to be 4 or more (S4152: YES), the value of the main continuation value (hundreds place of HP) is selected based on the first continuation value main selection table 222CB. (S4153), and the process proceeds to S4154.

Further, in the process of S4152, if it is determined that the value of the remaining count counter 223CB is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: NO), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222CD. A value (hundreds digit of HP) is selected (S4156), the process proceeds to S4154, a display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time is set (S4154), and the process proceeds to S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the values of the main continuation values selected in the processes of S4153, S4156 and S4159 are stored in the continuation value storage area 223N. As a result, at the next timing of setting the continuation value, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read out and a new continuation value can be selected. After finishing the processing of S4155, this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the third control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. FIG. In this control example, command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) is used in place of the command determination processing (see FIG. 158) in contrast to the above-described first control example. ) instead of continuation value-related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210) and the addition of the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), but other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the third control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuation effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) is configured to be set by the display control device 114 . By setting the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114 in this manner, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the main continuation value set based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the variable scenario is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for indicating the lottery result of special symbols, information for indicating the update status of the variable scenario) information) is not required to be output. Therefore, the load of processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (processing for setting a continuation value, processing for setting a command to be output to the display control device 114) can be reduced.

First, the contents of command determination processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 4. FIG. In this command determination process 4, in contrast to the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, the process executed when there is a continuous value-related command and whether or not there is a display final mode command are executed. The difference is that a process for determining is added.

When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158) are executed, and in the process of S6414, it is determined that there is a continuation value related command. If so (S6414: YES), the continuation value-related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to S6401. Continuation value related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: NO), then it is determined whether there is a display final mode command (S6452), and it is determined that there is a display final mode command. If so (S6452: YES), display final mode command processing is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

Details of the display final mode command processing executed in the processing of S6453 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6452 that there is no display final mode command (S6452: NO), after executing the same process of S6420 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158), It shifts to process 6401 of S3709.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of the continued value related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the above-described command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuation value-related command process 4. FIG. In this continuation value related command process 4, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed is set and displayed. A process for displaying the effect to be executed during is executed.

When the continuation value-related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time includes a specific continuation value command for display (S7351). This specific continuation value command for display is a specific value ("333 , "777") is selected. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this processing, when it is determined that there is a display specific continuation value command, the main continuation value output from the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed as it is on the display screen. are doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) for indicating that a jackpot is won is selected as the main continuation value, the display control device 114 sets the secondary continuation value and sets the main continuation value. To prevent a situation in which a continuation value obtained by summing a continuation value and a secondary continuation value is displayed on a display screen so that a player cannot be notified of a specific value ('333', '777') for indicating winning of a jackpot. can be done.

In the process of S7351, if it is determined that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: NO), that is, if a display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the command received this time ) is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). If it is determined in the process of S7353 that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (is 100 or more), a secondary continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub-selection table 234A3, and the process proceeds to S7356. Transition. Note that each secondary continuation value specified in the first continuation value subselection table 234A3 is the same as the first continuation value subselection table 222G1 (see FIG. 117B) of the first control example described above. , the description of which is omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7353 that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: YES), the secondary continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value subselection table 234A4, and the processing of S7356 is performed. Move to Note that each secondary continuation value specified in the second continuation value subselection table 234A4 is the same as the second continuation value subselection table 222G2 (see FIG. 117(C)) of the first control example described above. , the description of which is omitted.

Then, in the processing of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the secondary continuation value selected by the processing of S7354 or S7355 are added (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is greater than 0. Since it is configured to use the second continuation value sub-selection table 234A4 that defines sub-continuation values that cannot be values (that is, positive values cannot be selected as sub-continuation values), the audio lamp control device For the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (the content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to "0" and that the probability variable jackpot is won in this battle production) , the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than "0" is displayed) can be suppressed.

After completing the processing of S7356, next, the sum value stored in the sum value storage area 233K is read (S7357), and the sum value calculated in the processing of S7356 and the sum value read out in the processing of S7357 are stored. A difference is calculated (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233K (S7360), and the process of S7365 is performed. Move to

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is a specific continuation value command for display (S7351: YES), then the total value is read out from the total value storage area 233K (S7361), and the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is read. The difference between the value and the total value read out in the process of S7361 is calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and the current calculated The continuous value is stored in the total value storage area 233K (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

After the processing of S7360 or the processing of S7364 described above is finished, the continuation value calculated in the processing of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233CA (S7365). The same processing of S7306 to S7309 as the command processing (see FIG. 164) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the final mode command processing (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the contents of final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, there is a process of setting a battle ready-to-win effect mode (display mode of the continuous value (HP value)) for indicating the result of the continuous effect (battle effect), and the set effect mode is displayed on the display screen. and a process for displaying are executed.

When the final mode command processing (S6453) is executed, first, the final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (see FIG. 118(A)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the sound lamp control device 113. The final mode data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the total value stored in the total value storage area 233K, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read (S8302), and the initial value of the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, data related to the continuous value (HP value) that can be set to various values is additionally set for the effect data corresponding to the predetermined number of patterns of the Battle Ready effect effect mode (attack pattern mode). By enabling the configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the effect mode of battle reach.

After completing the processing of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is then read (processing 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, information for indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222H (see FIG. 118A) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the display final mode command process may be executed including dedicated information for indicating the final result of the battle.

In the process of S8305, if it is determined that the final result is not victory (defeat or draw) (S8305: NO), the continued value stored in the continued value storage area 233CA and the total value storage area are stored. Calculates the difference from the calculated total value (S8306), and changes the subtraction value of the first own attack effect data among the determined effect data of the final mode data table to the subtraction value to which the calculated difference is added. (S8307), and the process proceeds to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the main continuation value set by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the special symbol lottery result. , and the secondary continuation value set for the effect in the display control device 114 are added together. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113, thereby enhancing the performance effect. However, in battle ready-to-win where the results of continuous effects (battle effects) are displayed, a situation may occur in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is infinitely close to “0”.

In such a case, for example, even if the main continuation value (HP value) of the opponent is not set to "0" based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 There is a risk that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will become "0" due to the effect secondary continuation value set in . That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the performance, and rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the performance. An error between the main continuation value set and managed at 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes contradiction in the performance result, and execution of performance that makes the player feel distrustful. There is a problem that there is a possibility that

Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the effect mode of the final mode (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the current continuous effect (battle effect) is determined. In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuous value (HP value) does not become "0", the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is used as an attack during battle reach. I'm trying to solve it by directing.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem caused by displaying the result of the continuation effect (battle effect) while leaving an error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. can be done. In addition, in the third control example, in the first own attack pattern set as the final mode (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect), the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen value), it is possible to share the effect mode of the remaining attack patterns (for example, the second and third attacks).

In addition, if the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time is set to the mode where the attack pattern is 0 times, the effect that the opponent's continuation value does not decrease during the battle reach. Since it is a mode, even if the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the error with the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen will be produced. In order to avoid the problem of inconsistency in the results, the process of S8307 is configured so that the process of changing the attack effect data is not executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8305, when it is determined that the final result is victory (S8305: YES), the processing of S8306 and S8307 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S8308). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final mode data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S8309, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S8310), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command process is terminated, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. FIG. In the third control example described above, by setting a variation scenario based on the jackpot type and selecting a variation pattern based on the set variation scenario, during the period in which the continuous production is being performed, the pre-battle production and , Battle Reach and was configured to be able to execute effectively. In addition, in order to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the continuous performances executed in accordance with the predetermined variable scenario, a plurality of variable scenarios are prepared and different according to the type of jackpot. It was configured to select the variable scenario.

The third control example configured in this manner was configured to be able to enhance the production effect of the continuous production, but the storage capacity for storing a plurality of variable scenarios and the setting corresponding to the plurality of variable scenarios. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, the main controller 110 needs to store various processing related to games and data within a limited memory capacity. There is a risk that the players will be put under pressure and, as a result, lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of variation scenarios is reduced, in order to provide a rich variety of continuous effects, the jackpot type In addition to the variation scenario set corresponding to, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, a variation using a different variation scenario during a predetermined period (for example, 10 rotations of the special symbol variation) Configured for pattern selection.

By constructing in this way, even when one variable scenario is set, the contents of the continuous performance to be executed can be varied depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a specific lottery result. can. In addition, since the performance mode during the continuous performance is set by combining a plurality of variable scenarios, even if the number of stored variable scenarios is reduced, the continuous performance can be executed in a wide variety.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, the electrical configuration in this specific control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described third control example in that the content of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is partially changed and the content of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. are doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 212(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (A), in this another control example, the content of the small hit type selection table 202DA is added to the third control example described above, and the content of the first hit random number table 202A is partially changed. The difference is that the content of the variable scenario setting table 202CA is partially changed. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The first winning random number table 202A in this control example provides a range for determining "small winning" in a part of cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is out. The first hit random number table 202A in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213(A). FIG. 213A is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202A in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 213(A), in the above-described third control example, the range of the first hit random number counter value C1 ("5 to 299”), a “small win” is defined for the range of “295 to 299”. When a "small win" is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbols, a privilege which is less than the above-mentioned big win but advantageous to the player is given.

Specifically, control is executed to open the variable prize winning device 65 for a short period of time so that the ball can enter the specific prize winning port 65A. In addition, as described above, since the "small win" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is not a big win, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when the "small win" is won. It is possible to prevent the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202DA will be described with reference to FIG. 213(B). FIG. 213(B) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202DA. As shown in FIG. 213(B), in another control example of the third control example, a small hit type is set from a plurality. Specifically, among the 100 counter values in total of "0" to "99", the acquired value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any value is in the range of "0 to 49" , “small win A” are defined in association with each other, and “small win B” is defined in association with the range of “50 to 99”.

Then, when the ``small win A'' is won, a variation scenario for executing a specific variation pattern is additionally set, and when the ``small win B'' is won, the specific variation pattern is performed. It is configured so that additional fluctuation scenarios are not set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214A and 214B, the contents of the variable scenario setting table 202CA in this specific control example will be described. FIG. 214(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable scenario A1 stored in the variable scenario setting table 202CA, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stored post-small hit variation scenario.

In the variable scenario setting table 202CA in this control example, only the two variable scenarios described above are stored, and when winning a probability variable jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the variable scenario A1 is set after the jackpot ends. , is stored in the variable scenario storage area 203CA. In addition, when a small win is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2 executed during the variable probability state, a change scenario after the small win is set and stored in the change scenario storage area 203CA. After the end of the small win, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the contents specified in the post-small win variation scenario for the number of times of special symbol variation prescribed in the post-small win variation scenario. there is

Although detailed description is omitted, even in this control example, as in the above-described third control example, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed, and each time a special symbol variation is performed ( Each time it is determined that the special symbol variation time has passed in special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203CA is updated. .

The variable scenario storage area 203CA is configured to be able to store both the variable scenario A1 and the post-small win variable scenario, and when a small win is won during the probability variable state, both variable scenarios are subjected to the variable frequency subtraction process 4. (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the variation scenario A1 can be updated irrespective of the number of winning small wins during the variable probability state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the big win reaches 200 times. .

As shown in FIG. 214 (A), the variation scenario A1 is defined in association with the above-described table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC4) in the range of the number of variations "1 to 4", and the number of variations Table C (first deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of “5 to 13”, and table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in the number of fluctuations “14”. is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches "195", the table C (first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in association with nine fluctuations, and the table D (second A deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in association. In other words, during the period when the number of fluctuations in the special design after the jackpot is "5 to 195", the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C, and after executing the special design fluctuation nine times, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, the table C (first deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202DC2) is defined in the range of the number of variations "195 to 198", and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation A pattern table 202DC3) is defined. Then, the range of the number of fluctuations from "200 to" is defined in association with Table B, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 214 (B), the variation scenario after the small hit is defined by the above-described table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC4) associated with the range of the number of variations "1 to 9", The table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202DC3) is defined in the range of the number of variations "5 to 13", and the table D (second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table is defined when the number of variations is "10". 202DC3) is defined. The variation scenario is terminated when the number of variations exceeds 10 times. When the post-small hit variation scenario ends, the variation pattern of the special symbols is continuously selected in accordance with the content defined in the variation scenario A1, in which the variation scenario is updated at the same time.

As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a special symbol lottery result, different variation scenarios occur during a predetermined period (for example, 10 variations in special symbols). Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to vary the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the timing of winning the small prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide continuous effects of various patterns without preparing a plurality of variable scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, at the end of the variation scenario used when winning a small win, a variation pattern table (table D) in which battle reach is executed (easily) is defined, so by winning a small win, This will prevent situations where Battle Reach will not run for a long period of time.

In addition, in this another control example, a configuration having one variation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as a variation scenario set after the end of the probability variable jackpot, but a plurality of variation scenarios are used as in the third control example described above. configuration may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide continuous effects of more patterns. In addition, in this separate control example, when a small hit is won, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets a different variation scenario and the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set a different variation scenario are the same. Although it is configured to be the ratio (50%) of may be set based on the intervals defined in the variation pattern table (table D) in which is (easily) performed, and the content of the privilege (prize ball) provided when a small win is won.

In addition, in this control example, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened in the case of winning a special symbol jackpot and in the case of winning a small prize. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable prize winning device which is opened only when a small prize is won. In this case, the fact that the second variable prize winning device has been opened should be more difficult to grasp than the fact that the variable prize winning device 65 has been opened. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend this fact, it is possible to provide the player with continuous effects of various patterns without a sense of incongruity. In addition, in this case, the display mode of the third symbol to indicate that the small win has been won is also difficult for the player to understand, for example, at the third symbol stop timing, the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size, or the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size. In the main display area DM of the 3-pattern display device 81, it is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the 3rd pattern.

In this control example, the first winning random number table 202A is configured so that only the special symbol 2 wins a small win, but the special symbol 1 may also be configured to win a small win. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities of winning a small prize.

In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a variation scenario (variation scenario after a small hit) different from the variation scenario (variation scenario A1) predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol , shows the case where the special symbol wins a small hit, but when other conditions are met, it may be configured to set a different variation scenario, for example, in the above-described second control example It may be configured such that a different variation scenario is set when the falling lottery used is won.

<Regarding another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately, and the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is configured to be adjustable. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect, which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the first half part, the omen The start timing of the performance can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestive performance is executed without presetting the execution period, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive performance. In the suggestive effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect targeted for the suggestive effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestive effect (countdown effect) is set based on the execution timing of the suggestive effect. By setting the end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggestive effect, various combinations of suggestive effects can be executed.

On the other hand, in this another control example, the suggestive effect is executed without setting the end timing of the suggestive effect, and the predetermined condition (contents of operation to the frame button 22) is satisfied during the period when the suggestive effect is being executed. Based on this, a specific effect to be a target of the suggestive effect is determined, and a countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. By constructing in this way, the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be changed according to the operation contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the execution of the suggestive effect, so that the player can be motivated to participate in the game. can be done.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of suggestive effect in this specific control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is changed according to the operation content of the frame button 22 during the suggestive effect execution. The same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of suggestive effects in the first control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the variation of the special symbol capable of executing the suggestive effect is started, 10 seconds after the start of the variation, the precursor display (see FIG. 98(A)), which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is executed for 13 seconds. be done. A button operation effective period is set for the last 8 seconds of the display period during which the foreshadow is displayed, and the frame button 22 is activated during the button operation effective period. Depending on the content of the operation to , the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the second half of the suggestive effect, is determined.

Specifically, during the valid period of button operation, the comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 in response to the display. The timing is discriminated by the operation timing discriminating means. The operation timing discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 is operated with the best timing (for example, within a range of 0.2 seconds before or after the specified timing). When the operation (hereinafter referred to as button operation B) is performed, and the range deviated from the specified timing from button operation B (for example, the range of 1 second before or after the specified timing, excluding the range of button operation B) The frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A) in the range where the frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A), the frame button 22 is operated at other timings, or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, button operation is not performed). (referred to as ) can be at least discriminated.

Here, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is A, that is, if the button operation is performed during the valid period of the button operation, but the operation timing is slightly deviated, it is executed during the current variation effect. A countdown effect is set for the specific effect B (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of variation) among the specific effects to be performed. Specifically, a three-second countdown display is executed as the countdown effect (the values displayed in the second display area of the display screen in FIG. 98(B) are "3", "2", "1", " 0” is executed to count down). Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes "0", the cut-in display as the specific effect B is displayed.

Next, when the operation timing determining means determines that the button operation is B, that is, when the button is operated with good timing during the valid period of the button operation, the specified A countdown effect is set for effect A (PUSH display executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 99)). Specifically, a countdown display for 7 seconds is executed as the countdown effect. Then, at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes "0", the PUSH display, which is the specific effect A, is displayed.

Further, when the operation timing determination means determines that no button operation is performed, that is, when the button operation is not performed during the button operation valid period, or when the button operation is performed at a significantly deviated timing, a countdown effect is executed. Without doing, the suggestive effect ends at the timing when the sign effect ends (fake suggestive effect).

As described above, in this control example, similar to the above-described first control example, the execution timing and end timing of the suggestive effect are set at different timings (conditions). Based on the predetermined conditions (determined result of the operation content of the frame button 22) that are satisfied during the execution period of the precursor effect, which is the first half part, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect being executed is determined, and the second half part of the suggestive effect is determined. is configured to set the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in this control example, the later the timing at which the specific effects (specific effects A, specific effects B) executed at a plurality of timings are executed, the higher the expectation that the special symbol variation of this time will win the jackpot. configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed with good timing during the valid period of the button operation, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect with a high expectation for the big win, so that the player can be relieved.

In other words, FIG. 215 shows an example of a variation pattern in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed. 215. Therefore, in the variation pattern shown in FIG. In this case, it is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern in which both the specific performance A and the specific performance B are executed, and the performance proceeds while making the player feel uneasy. Become.

However, when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing during the effective period of the button operation, the countdown effect for the specific effect A is executed, so that the player can play the game without feeling uneasy. can let Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in which the frame button 22 is operated.

In addition, in this separate control example, in the variation pattern in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed as one variation pattern, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set to a predetermined condition ( However, it may be configured not to display a specific effect that is not the target of the suggestive effect. Further, in the variation pattern in which only the specific performance A is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific performance A targeted for the suggestive performance is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is established after the suggestive performance is executed. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated with good timing, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content of the suggestive effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing, so that the player is motivated. can be made to operate the frame button 22 .

In the other control example described above, as the content of the operation of the frame button 22 after the suggestive effect is started, an operation effect for operating the frame button 22 in a timely manner is executed during the precursor effect, which is the first half of the suggestive effect. Then, based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance, the specific performance to be the target of the suggestive performance is determined, and the performance mode of the countdown performance corresponding to the determined specific performance is set. ing.

In this case, as the operation effect, the display screen of the third pattern display device displays the characters "press the button at the right time" as a display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and displays an index for indicating the designated timing of the operation effect. It is preferable to display the mode and the movement display mode that moves with the passage of time so as to indicate to the player that the timing at which the movement display mode overlaps the index display mode is the best timing. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the operation presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a result of operation of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error from the indicator display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is preferable to display characters of "excellent" or "good" for notifying whether the error range is within the allowable range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the operation presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to change the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the details of the operation of the frame button 22, the configuration determines the error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the specified timing specified in advance. However, other configurations may be used as long as the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation can be varied based on the specified conditions determined in advance and the actual operation content. The number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (depressed) may be discriminated, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the determination result. An operation means other than 22 may be provided, it may be determined whether or not a specific operation means is operated among a plurality of operation means, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the determination result.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, the effect mode of suggestive effect (the effect mode of countdown effect, which is the second half of the suggestive effect) is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the valid period of the button operation. However, in order to achieve the same effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be set based on the timing at which the pressing operation is performed during the valid period of the button operation. A detailed description will now be given with reference to FIG.

FIG. 216A is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is varied depending on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during execution of the suggestive effect. The same elements as in the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of suggestive effects in the above-described first control example and another control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this specific control example, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period, which is the first half of the suggestive effect, is determined to be the first half (2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds). separated as possible. 216(B) to 216(D), the effect mode of the suggestive effect set based on the operation timing (press timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period will be described.

FIG. 216(B) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the first half (two seconds) of the button operation effective period. 216(D) is a timing chart showing the effect mode of the suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a presentation mode of a suggestive presentation when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the valid operation period; FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(B), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the first half (two seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is the specific effect A. Then, set the precursor period (8 seconds) from the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later, and set the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period to It is set as an execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect A is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) of the switch timing between the first half (2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation effective period (8 seconds). By delaying the timing of switching the effect mode of the suggestive effect (switching from the precursor effect to the countdown effect) by 1 second, it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds). Even if there is, it is possible to execute the process of switching the effect smoothly using the period (1 second) until the effect is switched.

In this case, the button operation valid period changing process is executed to invalidate the operation of the frame button 22 for the latter half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation effective period is set in advance, the operation to the frame button 22 during the execution can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(C), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) during the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is specified. B, and is set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation effective period ends to the timing when the specific effect B starts. Then, if there is no operation to the frame button 22 during the valid period of the button operation, as shown in FIG. An omen effect (13 seconds) is executed, after which the suggestive effect is terminated without performing a countdown effect (a false suggestive effect).

As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if it is configured to set the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period, An effect similar to that of FIG. 215 can be obtained.

Note that in the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half, second half), and different times (first half ( 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)), but it is sufficient if the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period can be identified. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three periods), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. Also, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are set alternately. You can As a result, even if the timing of the button operation on the frame button 22 is slightly deviated, a different suggestion effect is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example explained with reference to FIGS. Presence or absence of operation, details of operation, timing of operation) are set, but other conditions may be set. Even if the generation timing of the ball entering the opening 140, the ball entering the general prize winning opening 63, and the ball entering (passing) the through gate 67, and the contents of the occurrence are set as predetermined conditions. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player stops shooting balls while the special symbols are changing.

Also, in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example explained using FIG. 215 and FIG. , As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of the suggestive effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided with respect to the first control example described above. The difference is that process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 217, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. FIG. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a win (S4303), and if it is determined to be a win (S4303: YES), 26 seconds after the start of the variation, it is specified. Effect B (cut-in) is set, and after 30 seconds, specific effect A (PUSH) is set (S4371), and the process proceeds to S4373.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4303, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not winning (S4303: NO), a specific effect B (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the variation starts (S4372), and the process proceeds to S4373. Transition.

In the process of S4373, the button operation effective period is set in the period of 15 to 23 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S4373), the precursor effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and the precursor effect command for display is set. (S4375), and the process ends.

Next, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5. As shown in FIG. When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of frame button 22 has been detected (S5051). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: YES), it is determined whether or not the first predictive effect is currently valid (S5081), and if it is determined that the first predictive effect is valid, (S5081: YES), frame button operation-related processing (S5082 to S5088) during the first precursor effect is executed, and if it is determined that the first precursor effect is not valid (S5081: NO), the second It is determined whether the validity period of the omen effect is valid (S5089), and if it is determined that the second omen effect is valid (S5089: YES), processing related to frame button operation during the second omen effect. is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the effective period of the second precursor effect (S5089: NO), this process is terminated.

Next, the process (S5082 to S5088) related to frame button operation during the first omen effect will be described. First, the error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set for the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 second (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: YES), the specific effect A is set as the effect object (S5084), and the period from 23 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5085 ), a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: NO), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086). If it is determined (S5086: YES), the specific effect B is set to the effect mode (S5087), the period from 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of fluctuation is set to the countdown effect period (S5088), and the processing of S5077 described above to end this process. In the process of S5086, if it is determined that it is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: NO), the process proceeds to the process of S5077 described above as it is, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 219, the second precursor effect setting process executed in frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second precursor effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the current period is the first half period, that is, whether the period during which the frame button 22 was operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, if it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: YES), the specific effect A is set as the object of effect (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. A period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: NO), then it is determined whether the current period is the second half period, that is, whether the period during which the frame button 22 was operated is the second half period (S5095). , If it is determined that it is the second half period (S5095: YES), the specific effect B is set as the object of effect (S5096), the sign effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of fluctuation. The period until is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the second half period (S5095: NO), the portent effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and this process ends.

<Regarding another example of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the extended display described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display processing set after the end of the big win (processing to display the ending display of the big win by extending it even during the special symbol variation period after the end of the big win) will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extended display is executed, or a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the extended display is executed When the end condition of the extended display is determined to be satisfied, and if the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol, the third symbol is used. A demonstration display is performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display is continued until the special symbol variation for which a short period of time (0.5 seconds) is set is completed.

On the other hand, in this another example, before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, the end condition based on the elapsed period is established, and after the extended display ends, a short period (0.5 seconds) fluctuation When the special symbol variation with a set time is executed, the variation performance is set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation with a short-term (0.5 second) variation time. there is

Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which a variable effect is executed for a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds). Including), 2 seconds of variable production is set, and if the number of remaining fluctuations in the special design is 3 times (including this fluctuation), 3 seconds of variable production is set, and the remaining fluctuation of the special design When the number of times is 4 (including the current variation), a 4-second variation effect is set.

Then, when the next special symbol variation is executed while the variable performance which is the performance for the specific period is being executed, the performance period of the variable performance in which the remaining period of the already executed variable performance is newly executed. It is set so that the variable effect is rewritten so that

By constructing in this way, when the extended display is executed after the end of the big win, and the special pattern variation executed during the predetermined period (four special pattern changes or 4 seconds) after the end of the big win wins the big win. On the other hand, in the case of setting a short-term (0.5 second) variation time for special pattern variations for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big win, in order to continue the performance during the big win without discomfort, after the end of the big win Even if the special symbol variations are not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within a predetermined period (4 seconds) of , the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variations can be executed without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Here, with regard to the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this example, differences from the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 220 . This example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) is partially changed, and other processes are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 6 in this example. When the variable display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147) are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223I is not ON (it is OFF) (S3803: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses from when the extended display is executed after the end of the jackpot to when the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times).

In the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J is not 1 or more (is 0), S3811 to S3817, which are the same as the fluctuation display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 147), are executed. Execute the process and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223J is 1 or more (S3871: YES), then the specific period effect corresponding to the value of the variation number counter 223J is determined (S3872). , sets a specific period effect command for display (S3873), subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter 223J (S3874), and steps S3812 to S3817 which are the same as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. , and terminate this process.

As described above, in this example, after the end of the jackpot, the extended display is executed and the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times), in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has passed. , When the special symbol variation is started, since it is configured to execute the specific period production corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (the value of the variation counter), a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 Even if the special symbol variation is not performed a predetermined number of times (four times) within a second), the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation can be performed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, when using the configuration of another example described above, the period for executing the extended display (the number of special symbol fluctuations) may be greater than the upper limit number of reserved symbols 2 (4), for example, the extension Set the maximum number of special symbol variations (for example, 0.5 second variation 8 times) that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display termination conditions, is set as the extended display termination condition. You can As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the performance during the big win, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, after the end of the jackpot, the display is executed after a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (4 times). When a jackpot is won by the special symbol variation, the big win game is started after the special symbol variation of 0.5 second variation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5. In addition to the special symbol fluctuation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute the fluctuation performance using the opening period of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the variable production using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand production.

<Regarding another control example of the expectation level suggesting effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225, another control example of the expectation degree suggesting effect of the first control example described above will be described. In this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, an effect period in which the expectation level 1 display DK1 to the expectation level 3 display DK3, which are the expectation level display modes displayed in one variable effect, can be displayed respectively. and a period in which the expectation level increase mode DK4 obtained by adding up the variable amount that each expectation degree display mode varies during the variable performance is set during one variable performance (see FIG. 221), and each performance period It is configured to be able to set an operation effective period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective.

Furthermore, when setting the variable production, when the production mode that does not display the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved pattern can be changed using the points acquired by the expectation level increase mode DK4. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to use the points acquired by the expectation degree increasing mode DK4 for the game result other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, thus motivating the player. You can participate in games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, description will be given of the effect contents in the control example for each book. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the expectation degree suggesting effect in this specific control example. It should be noted that description of elements that are the same as those of the expectation degree suggesting effect of the first control example described above will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221, when the variable effect in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed is executed, the expectation for notifying the expectation level increase mode DK4 in the current variable effect is held for 10 seconds from the time point 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. A degree-variable suggestion effect is executed (see FIG. 102(B)). At the timing shown in FIG. 221(B), the display screen shown in FIG. 222(A) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222(A), the display contents displayed during the expectation degree suggesting effect will be described.

FIG. 222(A) is a diagram schematically showing a display example during a period from when the expectation level increasing mode DK4 is notified until the expectation level increasing effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 222(A), the value (“3UP” in this figure) obtained as the expectation level increasing mode DK4 is displayed in the second sub-display area DS2. Returning to FIG. 221, the description continues. After that, when 33 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, an expectation increase effect is executed in which the first operation effective period of 5 seconds is set (Fig. 221 (C). In this state, the The display screen shown is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation effective period, as shown in FIG. The value is displayed as a subtraction. By operating the frame button 22 during each operation valid period in this way, the display mode of the corresponding expectation degree display can be changed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. It becomes possible. In addition, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation level 1 display is displayed across a plurality of operation effective periods, even if the frame button 22 is operated in any operation effective period, , the display mode may vary. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation effective period, if the display mode of the expectation level 1 display DK1 does not change or if the amount of change is small, that is, in the middle stage of the variable effect (first It is possible to suppress the player's early loss of expectation for the big win during the effective period of one operation.

Next, referring to FIGS. 224 and 225, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in another control example of this expectation level suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the content of the expectation degree effect setting process 7. FIG. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, similarly to the first control example described above, the degree of expectation is selected based on the degree of expectation selection table 222I (S4251). Then, based on the selected degree of expectation, points to be given in the degree of expectation increase mode DK4 are set (S4252), and based on the degree of expectation, effects are executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period. A mode is set (S4253).

When the process of S4253 is finished, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) during which the production mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the production mode is set. If there is a period (vacant period) during which no game is played (S4254: YES), then it is determined whether or not there is winning information indicating a win among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (S4255). Here, if it is determined that there is prize winning information indicating a win (S4255: YES), during a period (idle period) during which the performance mode is not set, a pending design variable performance mode for varying the pending design is set. (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, in the process of S4254, if there is no period during which the effect mode is not set (S4254: NO), or if it is determined in the process of S4255 that there is no winning information indicating winning (S4255: NO), S4257 is performed as it is. to process.

In the process of S4257, the operation valid period (first operation valid period, second operation valid period, third operation valid period) for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the effect mode is set. It sets (S4257), sets an expectation effect command for display (S4258), and terminates this processing.

As described above, in the expectation degree effect setting process 7 (S3808), using the degree of expectation selected based on the degree of expectation selection table 222I, the given points used in the current variable effect and the given points are determined. It is configured to set the effect mode used. Then, whether or not the effect mode using the given points is selected for each of a plurality of periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the variation pattern of the variable effect to be executed this time. (whether or not to set an effect mode) and the effect mode is set based on the content of the effect mode (the type of expectation level display mode to be set, the display mode).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp in which period (first period to third period) which performance mode is to be executed. In addition, since the number of the expectation level display modes whose display mode can be changed using the value acquired as the expectation level increase mode DK4 during the expectation variable suggestion production period is also indeterminate, it is acquired as the expectation level increase mode DK4. Even if the value obtained is small (for example, 2UP), if the number of displays of the expected degree display mode to be executed is small, the value acquired as the expectation degree increase mode DK4 for the expectation degree display mode is used. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the performance result during the expectation level variable suggestion performance period.

In addition, in another control example of this expectation level suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. It may be provided in the middle stage of the variable effect (for example, between the second operation valid period (see FIG. 221(D)) and the third operation valid period (see FIG. 221(E))). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the period for which the production using the value acquired as the expectation level increase mode DK4 during the expectation level increase mode DK4 during the expectation level variable suggestion performance is reduced, so that the expectation level increase mode DK4 has a large value ( For example, when 3) is obtained, the degree of expectation for the big win can be further increased. Also, it may be configured such that the expectation level variable suggestive effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variable effect.

Furthermore, in another control example of this expectation degree suggesting effect, when the effect mode using the given points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the display mode of the pending symbol as an additional effect However, other contents may be used as the additional effect, for example, values collected by the player (for example, another example of the first control example described above) It is also possible to add an effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176(C)) explained above or an effect for suggesting the current game state.

Further, the effect selection means that allows the player to select the effect to be executed even when the effect mode using the given points is set for all of the plurality of periods for which the operation valid period can be set. (For example, means for displaying a selection screen for selecting the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and selecting the effect to be executed by the operation means that the player can operate) Based on this, the effect to be executed may be varied.

In the expectation effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expectation level variable suggestive effect period is a fixed period of the variable effect (a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221). Although it is configured so that the expectation effect command is set, as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination means that determines the expectation selected by referring to the expectation selection table 222I, The period during which the variable expectation suggestion effect is executed is set to a plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 to 25 seconds from the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 221, a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds to A period of 50 seconds)) may be provided with an expectation level variable suggesting performance period setting means for setting any period. As a result, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expectation level variable suggestive effect is executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the period in which the variable expectation level suggesting effect is executed is set by the above-described variable expectation level suggesting effect period setting means based on elements other than the level of expectation selected by referring to the expectation level selection table 222I. For example, it is possible to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggestion effect is executed based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means, or the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223A. It may be configured to set a period during which the expectation level variable suggestion effect is executed based on information included in the information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 will be described. FIG. 225 is a flow chart showing the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 . When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 7 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051). It is determined whether it is during the period (S5901), and if it is determined that it is during the suspension variable effect setting period (S5901: YES), a display variable command for varying the suspension design is set (S5902), and subtraction A display command indicating the points to be given later is set (S5903), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, if it is determined that it is not in the hold variable effect setting period (S5901: NO), it is determined whether it is the first operation effective period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation effective period. If so (S5904: YES), set a display variable command for varying the first expectation level display (expectation level 1 display) DK1 (S5905), and set a display command indicating the given points after subtraction. (S5903), this processing ends.

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that it is not the first operation effective period (S5904: NO), it is determined whether it is the second operation effective period (S5906), and if it is determined that it is the second operation effective period (S5906: YES), a display variable command for varying the second expectation display (expectation degree 2 display) DK2 is set (S5907), and a display command indicating the given points after subtraction is set (S5903) , the process ends.

In the process of S5906, if it is determined that it is not the second operation effective period (S5906: NO), it is determined whether it is the third operation effective period (S5908), and if it is determined that it is the third operation effective period (S5908: YES), a display variable command for varying the third expectation display (expectation degree 3 display) DK3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating the given points after subtraction is set (S5903) , the process ends.

As described above, in this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the expectation degree 1 display DK1 to expectation degree 3 display, which are the expectation degree display modes displayed in one variation effect A performance period in which DK3 can be displayed respectively, and a period in which an expectation level increase mode DK4 can be displayed by summing up the variable amount in which each expectation level display mode is varied during the variable performance are set in one variable performance ( (See FIG. 221), it is possible to set an operation valid period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 for each performance period.

Furthermore, when setting the variable production, when the production mode that does not display the three expectation level display modes is selected, the display mode of the reserved pattern can be changed using the points acquired by the expectation level increase mode DK4. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to use the points acquired by the expectation degree increasing mode DK4 for the game result other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, thus motivating the player. You can participate in games.

It should be noted that the points given in this control example are set so that they can all be used when the frame button 22 is operated during the entire operation valid period, and the fluctuation ends when the frame button 22 is not operated. It may be configured so that time remains, and the contents of the above-described title granting performance may be varied with respect to the remaining grant points at the end of the variation.

<A1 embodiment>
Hereinafter, the A1th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. For the sake of convenience, the same configurations as those explained in the above embodiments and control examples will be explained again. First, referring to FIGS. 226 to 296, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as the A1 embodiment. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment. is a rear view of the.

As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the outer frame 11 . In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112A (see FIG. 229) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112A to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 226). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14C having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 14C. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 227) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14C. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that could not be fully stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51A for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112A, a shooting stop switch 51B for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51A is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51A and the firing stop switch 51B are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always urged rightward, and by sliding it leftward against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills (movable members 310 are shown). not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol starting port ( Through gate) 67, variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in a hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14C (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14 . Mainly referring to FIG. 227, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112A (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 227) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 227). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first prize winning port 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80 . The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into the left and right sides. A right channel is formed through which the ball can flow down. A game ball that has flowed down the left flow path is configured not to flow down the right flow path. The first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the left channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right channel can enter.

The second prize winning port 640 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right side channel is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the left side channel. The second prize winning port 640 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening in the game board 13, and a flow path is formed in the opening through which the game ball can flow down. A photosensor is provided to detect a game ball. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640A is attached as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that can close the opening, and the variable opening/closing plate is used as an axis to open and close the front side. and an open-mouth solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning port 640 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the normal pattern (second pattern) is won, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640A to the front lower side, and the ball is temporarily opened to easily enter the opening of the second winning port 640. It operates so as to repeat the state of the open state and the normal closed state for a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, the 5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (jackpot A) set in correspondence with the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner when the first winning opening 64 is won, 5R time reduction (Three times) jackpot (jackpot B) and 15R normal jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. In addition, a 15R time-saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) that is set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variably displayed when winning the second prize opening 640 is prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "5R time saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot A)" means that the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed 95 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and 95 During the period until the fluctuation of the round stops, the lottery probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) shifts to a high probability state, and a short time game state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) is easily selected. It's a big hit. "5R time saving (3 times) jackpot (jackpot B)" means that the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed three times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and the third change During the period until is stopped, the lottery probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) shifts to a high probability state, and a short-time game state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) is easily selected is set. is. In addition, "15R normal jackpot (jackpot C)" is a jackpot in which a low probability state is set after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a time-saving game state is not set.

During the time saving (during the time saving game state), not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640A associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640A is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640A associated with the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640A is may be changed to increase the number of times the is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time during which the electric accessory 640A associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640A is opened in one hit. Either one may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, only the winning probability of the second symbol is determined without the time when the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640A is opened per hit. , may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, with the winning (starting winning) of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation of the third symbol is displayed. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for display and the passing of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are used as triggers to variably display the second symbol. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640A associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the time saving, so that the winning lottery (the number of times of variable display of the second pattern) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessary 640A of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 . When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray 17, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640. , the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player, and the lottery of special symbols can be performed for a short period of time while suppressing the investment for additionally lending the balls. .

It should be noted that during the time saving, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the time saving by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640A for one time. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640A may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the left channel of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, some of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board are configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first prize winning port 64 is provided through which balls can win. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 229), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640A is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640A is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640A is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640A will be in an open state, and the ball will be in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640A is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, when the ball enters the second winning port 640 as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won (when the ball wins in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R at a rate of 100%. When a time-saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) is selected and a ball enters a first prize-winning port 64 (a jackpot is won in a lottery corresponding to a first special symbol), a time-saving game state is provided. The jackpot is a maximum 5R jackpot (61% of the jackpot), and is configured to select a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加It is By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (the state in which the time saving is not given in the low probability game state), it is easier for the ball to win in the first winning port 64 than in the second winning port 640. By making the game ball enter the first winning hole 64, the ratio of selecting the jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B) to which the time saving is given is set to be low, and the time saving is given and the ball goes to the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加When it becomes easy to win a prize, the second special symbol can easily make a big win, and the time-saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of giving time saving.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65A is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. Also, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V winning door 600 capable of guiding a ball to the V ball entrance 600A of the V winning device 620 is arranged. The V winning door 600 stands upright and the ball does not enter the V ball opening 600A when the lottery result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a big win B or a small win. A ball can be entered into the V-ball opening 600A by changing from an upright closed state to an open state rotated about 90 degrees to the right.

In the case of a small win, a 1R (round) small win game is executed in which the V winning door 600 is open for 1.2 seconds or until 10 balls win the V ball opening 600A. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B, the V winning door is opened until the 1st round as in the small winning game, and the variable winning device 65 is changed to the opened state from the 2nd round. Here, from the 2nd round, the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65A is set in advance as 1R (round) for 30 seconds or until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65A. A round game is repeatedly executed up to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

By configuring in this way, whether it is a small win or a big win B, the third symbol display device 81 or the like does not notify whether it is a small win or a big win B, and the small win is not reported. By configuring to shift to a game or a jackpot game, the game ball is similarly entered into the V winning device 620, and the game is played in anticipation of the game ball entering the V winning hole 624 described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, when a small win is made, a game ball enters a V winning opening 624 of a V winning device 620, which will be described later, so that a big win game is executed after the small win game. . It should be noted that the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1R for the big winning that starts when a game ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the small winning game.

In the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, winning control is executed so that when the game ball enters the V winning device 620 in the 1Rth jackpot game, the game ball enters the V winning port 624. is configured to As a result, even in the case of a jackpot game in the jackpot B, it is possible to make it seem as if the variable prize winning device 65 has been opened after winning the V prize opening 624 (actually, the 2R game in the jackpot game). eye is running). In addition, when a ball enters the V ball entrance 600A or the specific winning hole 65A, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls for one ball. In the jackpot games other than the jackpot B, since the variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state from the 1R (round), the start of the jackpot game instead of the jackpot game is defined as the content of the jackpot game. can also be identified.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol (for example, a crossover symbol such as 333). In addition, when the big winning lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a small win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the small winning stop pattern is set. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit, and a stop symbol (for example, a crossed symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 similarly displays the third symbol in the ready-to-win display mode (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same third symbol) regardless of whether it is a small win or a big win B. A chance symbol composed of a combination of a display mode in which three symbols are suspended) and a middle symbol is a chance symbol (the third symbol with the word "CHANCE") is displayed stopped. It is notified by being As a result, the game (corresponding to a small win game or a big win game) in which the 1R V winning door 600 is opened by stopping and displaying the third symbol in the symbol of the chance symbol is executed at least for the player. This can be recognized, and the ball can be expected to enter the V winning opening 624 . In addition, when a specific pattern (for example, 777 zorome pattern) is stopped and displayed among the third patterns, the execution of the jackpot game is notified, and the specific pattern is displayed. is displayed, the player may be made to recognize at an early stage that a high-value-added jackpot game will be executed.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65A is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big win B, a large opening solenoid is driven from the 2nd R, and in the case of a non-big win B, from the 1st R, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front, and an open state in which the ball easily enters the specific winning port 65A. is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

Next, the V winning device 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. FIG. The V winning device 620 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 and attached to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 . As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guide member 622, a rotating distribution member 621, a V winning opening 624, a left discharge passage 623A, a right discharge passage 623B, a first retention member 622D, and a passage switching. It is configured by the member 622E.

Normally, the rotary distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and when the power is turned on, the rotary distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left and right direction at a constant cycle. is configured as follows. When the V winning door 600 is opened with the start of the small winning game or the big winning game, the game ball can flow into the V ball opening 600A of the V winning device 620 . A V ball entrance 600A into which a game ball can enter is formed at the abutting portion of the V winning door 600 and the V winning device 620, and the game ball enters the V winning device 620 from the V ball entrance 600A. A guideway is formed to guide the A photosensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged in the V ball opening 600A, and is configured to be able to count the number of winnings to the V winning device 620 (V ball opening 600A). It is configured such that prize balls (three balls) are paid out to the player based on the ball being detected by the photosensor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the V winning device 620 will be described in detail according to the timing chart of the operation control of the V winning device 620 in the small winning game. When the small winning game is started, after the opening period (T1: 0.1 seconds) has passed, the opening period (T2: 1.2 seconds) V winning opening solenoid operates (operates ON) V winning Door 600 is changed to an open state. When a game ball enters the V ball entrance 600A in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the guideway is configured to stay while being restricted from flowing down by the first staying member 622D shown in FIG. This first retention member 622D is configured so that the retention 1 solenoid is operated (operated ON) for 4 seconds so as to project to the front side so as to retain the ball at the top based on the start of the small winning game. . In addition, when one ball is retained in the first retaining member 622D, the game ball that flows down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is discharged to either the left or right. After 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V prize door 600 have passed, the V prize door solenoid is turned off, and 2.7 seconds after the V prize door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, When the stay 1 solenoid 209A is turned off, the first stay member 622D retreats toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls staying at the top flow downward. Below the first retention member 622D, a channel switching member 622E that always operates in the horizontal direction is arranged.

The channel switching member 622E is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at intervals of 0.4S by the channel solenoid 209B. When turned off, it moves to a position that closes the inflow port of the movable guide member 622 so that the ball cannot enter the movable guide member 622 . In the off state, the balls flowing down from the upstream are guided to the right by the inclined portion formed on the upper portion of the channel switching member 622E and are discharged out of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow channel solenoid is on and the flow channel switching member is retracted to the left side of the inlet, the ball can flow into the movable guide member 622. It is configured.

At the timing when the first retention member 622D is retracted and the retained game ball flows down, the channel switching member 622E is in an open state (a state in which the channel solenoid is turned on and the channel switching member is retracted to the left). , the ball flows into the movable guide member 622 . As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guide member 622 is configured in a cylindrical shape that allows one ball to flow down, one end of which is formed with an inlet into which the ball flows, and the other end of which the ball is discharged. A discharge port 622A is formed. A recess 622C for holding one ball is formed in front of the discharge port 622A (upstream side), and a second retention member that prevents the ball that has entered the recess 622C from flowing down is formed on the downstream side of the recess 622C. 622B are arranged. The second retention member 622B protrudes upward when the retention 2 solenoid 612 is activated (turned on) to prevent the ball entering the recess 622C from flowing down. 622B rotates to the left to change to a released state in which the ball entering the concave portion 622C is allowed to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 253, the second retention member 622B is changed to a restricted state by the activation (ON) of the retention 2 solenoid 612 for 2 seconds (T6) after 5 seconds from the start of the small winning game. , restricts the ball that has entered the concave portion 622C from flowing down. The movable induction member 622 is rotated leftward so that the inflow port side rises as shown in FIG. Thereafter, for 1.5 seconds (T5), the residence 2 movable motor 610A is operated to raise the movable guide member 622 to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231(B)). As described above, the retention 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be turned off at the timing 6 seconds after the start of the small winning game, so the second retention member 622B is released while the movable guide member 622 is rising. In this state, the movable guide member 622 is tilted downward to the left, and when the tilt angle is increased, the ball entering the concave portion 622C is configured to easily flow downward to the left.

As shown in FIG. 229(A), when the ball that entered the recess 622C starts to flow down, the ball that entered the recess 622C is discharged to the rotary distribution member 621 through the discharge port 622A. The ejected balls roll on the rotating distribution member 621 and are ejected downstream. The rotary distribution member 621 is rotated left and right at a constant cycle after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. When the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621A at the same timing as the downstream discharge port 621A, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the V winning port 624.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621A in a state where the downstream discharge port 621A and the V winning port are not aligned in parallel, the V winning device 620 is discharged by the left discharge passage 623A or the right discharge passage 623B arranged on the left and right. It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, a V effective period is set for two seconds (T7) from 5 seconds after the start of the small win, during which it is determined that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 as valid. It is configured. Only when the photo sensor detects that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the winning detection is validated, and when winning is performed during the other period, the control process is made invalid. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine only the period during which it is possible to win a prize in the V winning opening 624, and damage caused by fraud such as when the ball is illegally entered into the V winning opening 624 by manipulating the ball with a magnet or the like. can be reduced. In this embodiment, when the winning to the V winning opening 624 is detected during the V valid period, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game. The jackpot game given when the ball normally passes through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is the type of the executed small hit game (small hit A or small hit B (Fig. 244 (B) to (C) See)) is configured to set the jackpot type corresponding to.

In addition, the timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown for the case of not passing through V in the small hit. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the channel switching member 622E is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the movable guide member 622 by releasing the first staying member 622D V winning It shows an example of not doing so. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart for entering the V winning port 624 in the case of the jackpot B, and FIG. An example. Also, FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state set when a big win or a small win is made in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 244 (B), when the small hit A in the special figure 1 is executed, a 5R (time saving 95 times) jackpot is set, and when the small hit B is executed, 10R normal ( No time saving) Jackpot is set. Also, as shown in FIG. 244 (C), when the small hit C in the special figure 2 is executed, a 15R (95 times short time) jackpot is set, and when the small hit D is executed 5R ( Time saving 95 times) is set, and when a small hit E is executed, a 5R (no time saving) jackpot is set. In addition, the time reduction in the name of each jackpot indicates that the time reduction gaming state is set, and the subsequent display of the number of times indicates the number of times the special symbol changes as the period in which the time reduction gaming state is set. Normal indicates that it is a jackpot in which the time-saving gaming state is not set.

In the present embodiment, when the small winning game is executed, by winning the V winning opening 624, the big winning type corresponding to the small winning type is executed. A counter value (for example, the first winning type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning, and may be selected from a predetermined selection table. The predetermined selection table may set a different selection table for each game state (normal game state, time saving game state), may set a different selection table depending on the type of special symbol, or may set a different selection table depending on the type of special symbol. A different selection table may be set depending on the winning type.

It should be noted that here, when the variable display is stopped and displayed when it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are small hits or big hits, the small hit type , the LED of the first symbol display device 37A is lit and displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to the jackpot type. Since it is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are combined and displayed, even if the player visually recognizes the first pattern display device 37A, it is configured so that it is difficult to identify the details of the small winning type and the big winning type at a glance. It is Furthermore, in the case of a big win, the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37 are displayed corresponding to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the big win. As for the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by characters or the like, but is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the type of the jackpot, so that it is more difficult for the player to identify the number of rounds. As a result, even if the first pattern display device 37 notifies the player of the big win type, the small win type, and the number of rounds of the big win to maintain the fairness of the game, the information is difficult for the player to understand. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the small winning game and the big winning game before the execution thereof, and the player can distinguish the small winning type, the big winning type, etc. even during the big winning game in the small winning game and the big winning B. It is configured so that a game can be played while making predictions. As a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the type of the big winning game given when winning the V winning opening 624 differs depending on the type of the small winning, so a big winning that is disadvantageous to the player. When the small winning game corresponding to the small winning type to which the type is given is executed, the shooting of the game ball is stopped and the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the V ball entrance 600A. Although there is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor increases, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured in a notification mode in which the type of the small win is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the way of playing the game that suffers from the disadvantages described above.

Furthermore, 0.1 seconds after the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined as a small hit is stopped and displayed, the V winning door 600 is opened and the open state is maintained for 1.2 seconds. Therefore, even if the player can identify by analyzing the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the game ball is launched after the identification, the V ball entrance 600A is not reached. It is configured so that it is difficult to shoot a game ball to reach it. Specifically, in this embodiment, 100 game balls are fired at equal intervals per minute regardless of the firing intensity, so one shot is fired every 0.6 seconds. Since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V ball entrance 600A after being shot from the launcher, if the game ball is not continuously shot to the right side area, the V ball entrance 600A It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the V ball entrance 600A, and if control is performed so that the ball is not entered into the V ball entrance 600A at the time of the small win, the game ball will enter the V ball entrance 600A for the small winning game corresponding to any small winning type. will not be able to enter the ball. Therefore, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed and a right-handed notification (a notification mode for notifying the player that the game ball is to be shot to the right area) is given, the player immediately starts right-handed. You can play the game so that you can do it.

An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 226).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65A, 600A and 640 are guided through the out hole 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the variable winning device 65 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 228, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol and is configured to be variably displayed, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time. It is

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that they are not variably displayed at the same time. It is good also as possible composition. By configuring in this way, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained. The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns consisting of numbers "0" to "9".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row with three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each symbol row, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. The symbol rows are displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

In addition, the third pattern is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each pattern row. The middle part of the third pattern is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left pattern row→right pattern row→middle pattern row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. One identification pattern (reserved pattern) of "circle pattern" is displayed for one reserved ball, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols. A maximum of four balls are set for each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, and each ball is reserved for the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in distinguishably different colors (for example, black for the first winning opening 64 and red for the second winning opening 640).

In the display area of the third pattern display device 81, in addition to the third pattern and the reserved pattern, character patterns, characters, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode to be displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third pattern. be done. Further, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the ready-to-win display mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area DS1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 239, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202A, a first winning type selection table 202B, a normal symbol random number table 202C, a fluctuation pattern table 202D, a small winning type selection table 202E, a big winning scenario table 202AA, and a small winning. A scenario table 202AB is set for each. Data necessary for other games are also stored, but since they are unnecessary in the description of the invention in this embodiment, their description will be omitted.

The first winning random number table 202A, the first winning type selection table 202B, the normal winning random number table 202C, the variation pattern table 202D, and the small winning type selection table 202E will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The jackpot scenario table 202AA is a data table that defines a jackpot scenario in which the operation contents during the jackpot game are set. period until), round period (maximum period in which one round of round game is set), inter-round interval period (period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game) are the jackpot types. It corresponds to the value of the scenario counter 203AA which is defined correspondingly and which is set when a jackpot game is started and periodically (every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed) the value is incremented by 1. Motion control is performed.

The jackpot scenario table 202AA defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of jackpots won. Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202AA will be described with reference to FIG. 248(A). FIG. 248(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot scenario table 202AA. As shown in FIG. 248(A), the jackpot scenario table 202AA defines different scenarios corresponding to jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(A), for the jackpot types A and C in which the jackpot game for opening the specific winning opening 65A is executed, the jackpot scenario A202AA1 corresponding to the jackpot game for 5R is the jackpot type. In D, a jackpot scenario 202AA6 corresponding to a jackpot game for 15R is defined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 248(A), for the jackpot type B that opens the V winning port 624 or the specific winning port 65A according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game, as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game, A winning scenario A202AA2 showing the action contents of the first half of the first round, a winning scenario B202AA3 and a winning scenario C202AA4 showing the action contents of the latter half of the first round, and action contents of the round game from the second round to the fifth round. A jackpot scenario B202AA5 indicating is defined.

In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. ), and when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B is started, the V prize door 600 is opened and the round game (V challenge) aimed at the V prize mouth 624 is executed. be done.

Furthermore, by opening the V winning door 600 during this V challenge, a game ball can easily enter the V ball entrance 600A, and the game ball that has entered the V ball entrance 600A is transferred to the channel switching member. 622E, based on the detection result of the second retention sensor (not shown) whether or not the game ball is retained by the second retention member 622B of the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231 (A)) , and based on the result of the determination, the contents of the action in the second half of the first round of the round game are changed.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 274). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning to the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four reservation areas (reserving first to fourth areas). A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B corresponding to winning a prize is provided. Each value of the per-1 random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any of the normal starting ports (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 274).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. The value of the random number that becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table (see FIGS. 242A to 242C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number When the value of the counter C1 coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the special symbol big win. Here, the first winning random number table 202A1 includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202A2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Here, the first winning random number table 202A will be described. The first winning random number table 202A is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242(B), in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 3". 3”, it is determined to be a jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined to be other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is lost), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "4". If the result is "4", it is determined to be a small win. Here, when it is determined that there is no small win, it is determined that the lottery result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 242 (C), in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the same manner as the first special symbol is "0 to 3". 0 to 3”, it is determined to be a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is lost), the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is either "4 to 997" If it is any of "4 to 997", it is determined to be a small win. Here, when it is determined that there is no small win, it is determined that the lottery result is a loss.

In this way, the big winning probability in the big winning lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same, but the second special symbol has a smaller winning probability than the first special symbol with respect to the small winning probability. is set high. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which the game ball is easily entered into the second prize winning port 640, the lottery is likely to be executed with the second special symbol, so the probability of winning a small prize is increased, and the V winning port 624 is entered. can increase the opportunities for Therefore, since it is possible to set the time-saving game state more advantageous to the player, it is expected that the jackpot game to which the time-saving game state is given will be executed even when the normal game state is set. It is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol jackpot is won. ), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203A, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot or small hit, that is, If it is a random number that causes the special symbol to come off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. Become.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol for the jackpot. It is stored in the table 202A1 and the special symbol 2 per random number table 202A2. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 1000, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/250".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is a jackpot, the first hit type selection table 202B (see FIG. 241 (A)) for determining the type of the jackpot to be executed. It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . The first hit type selection table 202B includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202B1 which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202B2, which is a data table for determining the jackpot game type for the symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 243(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202B1. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, three types from the jackpot A to the jackpot C described above are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "0 to 44" is "jackpot A (5R short time 95 times jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 44" of the first win type counter C2 is set as the judgment value. The jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "45 to 60" is "jackpot B (5R short time three times jackpot)". That is, the value of "45 to 60" of the first win type counter C2 is set as the judgment value. The jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "61 to 99" is "jackpot C (10R time-saving no jackpot)". That is, the value of "61 to 99" of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the judgment value.

In this way, in the normal game state, the game is played mainly by winning the game balls into the first winning hole 64, but the time-saving game state is 61% of the first special symbol jackpot. It is a jackpot (jackpot A and jackpot B) to be given. Therefore, even when the first special symbol is a big hit, the time-saving game state is not necessarily given, so the player is interested in whether it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving game is given even when the big win. You can have it, and you can improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 243(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202B2. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of the jackpot D described above is set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "0 to 99" is "jackpot D (15R short time 95 times jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 99" of the first win type counter C2 is set as the judgment value.

In this way, when a big win is achieved for the second special symbol (according to the big win determination for the winning to the second winning port 640), the big win which always gives the time-saving game is provided. there is Furthermore, the number of time reduction is set to 95 times, which is more advantageous than the jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set to 15R, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpots A to C. It is configured. As a result, when a big win is achieved by the lottery of the second special symbols that are likely to be executed mainly in the time-saving game state, the big-win game that is more advantageous than the first special symbols is executed, thereby reducing the time. It is configured to increase the value when the game state is executed.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol hits. 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203 It is stored in the storage area 203A, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. And, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202E for determining the type of the small hit to be executed (see FIG. 244 (A)) are set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . The small hit type selection table 202E includes a special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202E1, which is a data table for determining the type of small hit game for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. A special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202E2, which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the special symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 244(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small per type selection table 202B1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, two types of the small hit A and the small hit B described above are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 64", the small hit type is "small hit A (5R short time 95 times big hit when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 64" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "65 to 99" is "small hit B (10R short time no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "65 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small winning A and the small winning B, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game to be executed after that is set. In the case of the small win A, a 5R time-saving 95-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable prize-winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state to execute a big win, and then 95 as a time-saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period from when the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times to when it is stopped and displayed). In the case of the small win B, a 10R time-saving no big win is set, and after the execution of the small win B, a big win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state, but after the big win game is configured such that the time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set. In this way, the number of rounds executed in the big winning game is large, and the small winning B is set more advantageous than the small winning A, but since the time-saving game state is not set after the big winning game, It is difficult to execute the lottery with the second special symbol that is advantageous, and overall, it is set to be advantageous to the player when the small winning A wins the V winning opening 624 rather than the small winning B. It is

FIG. 244(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small per type selection table 202B2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, three types of the above-described small hit C to small hit D are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is either "0 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit C (15R short time 95 times big hit when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "50 to 79" is "small hit D (5R short time 95 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 79" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "80 to 99" is "small hit E (5R short time no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small wins C to E, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small win game, the type of the big win game to be executed after that is set. In the case of the small win C, a 15R time-saving 95-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute a big win, and then 95 as a time-saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period from when the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times to when it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in the case of the small win D, a 5R time-saving 95-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win D, a big win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then the variable winning. A jackpot is executed in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then 95 times of the time saving game (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time saving game state. It is configured. In addition, in the case of the small winning E, the 5R time-saving no big winning is set, and after the execution of the small winning E, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and the big winning game is executed. is configured such that the time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set.

In this way, for the small winning type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 624 is won than the small winning type for the first special symbol, the time saving game state that is advantageous to the player is set. The percentage of types selected is set high. As a result, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is set higher than the lottery for the first special symbol. It is determined as a small win and winning a prize in the V winning opening 624 makes it easy to execute the big win game in which the time-saving game state is set again. As a result, while continuing the time-saving game state, the jackpot game can be given to the player, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a small hit and the fluctuation display stops, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. is configured as follows. Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, the player wants to play the game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining time-saving number of times. . Then, the small winning game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is discriminated, and only when it is the small winning type to which the time-saving game state is not given, the shooting of the game ball is stopped to enter the V ball entrance 600A. There is a possibility that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game parlor side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game, is executed. However, in this embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variable display determined as the small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the configuration of this embodiment, which takes 2 seconds to reach the V ball entrance 600A, the game ball is shot after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V entrance 600A. It seems difficult to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600A in the small winning game in all the small winning types unless the game is played by immediately launching the game ball to the right side area when it is executed. is configured to As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that is extremely disadvantageous to the game parlor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 247, each winning type and winning game operation will be described. For the jackpot A and jackpot C, 1R is repeated until 10 game balls enter the variable prize winning device 65, or until the open state continues for 29 seconds.

As for the jackpot B, in the 1Rth round game, the V winning door 600 is opened and the V ball opening 600A is opened for 1.2 seconds. If 10 balls are won in the 1st round, the ball will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed. It has become. In the 2R-th to 5R-th round games, a round game that continues until 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65 or until the open state continues for 29 seconds is executed.

For the jackpot D, 15 round games are repeated until 10 balls enter the variable winning device 65 and game balls win or until the open state continues for 29 seconds.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Depending on the variation type counter CS1 and the lottery result (off, big hit type, small hit), so-called short off (7 seconds), goose off (30 seconds), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), special reach Rough display mode (90 seconds), no pseudo development (30 seconds), 1 pseudo development (34 seconds), 2 pseudo development (38 seconds), 3 pseudo development (42 seconds) variation time) is determined. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 245 (A)) that stores a random number that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 245(A), the variation pattern table 202D includes a normal variation pattern table 202D1 used in the normal gaming state and a time saving variation pattern table 202D2 used in the time saving gaming state. are set respectively.

FIG. 245B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern table 202D1. Normal fluctuation pattern table 202D1, as a fluctuation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, short out (7 seconds), false out (30 seconds), various normal reach ( 30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are set. A pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", short out (7 seconds) is selected, and when it is "140 to 149", false out (30 seconds) is selected. If it is "150 to 179", normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is "180 to 194", super reach (60 seconds) is selected, "195 to 198" In each case, the determination value is set so that various types of special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

The lottery result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a jackpot, and as a variation pattern selected when the jackpot types are jackpots A, C to D (that is, other than jackpot B), various normal reach (30 seconds) , various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding variation pattern is selected by comparing the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value. be done. Here, when the variation is stopped, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol-matched big win) so that the player is notified of the big win. It should be noted that the number "777" is displayed only in the case of the jackpot type in which the time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type in which a time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game, a lottery for determining the stop pattern of the third pattern is configured to determine the zoromi other than the zoromi of "777". It is configured so that it is not known whether the time-saving game will be given until after the jackpot game.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 40", normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and when it is "41 to 179", super reach (60 seconds) is selected. The determination values are set so that when the range is "180 to 198", various types of special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

In addition, each variation pattern selected in the case of a big hit is configured with the same variation time as each variation pattern selected in the case of a loss, and finally a stop pattern (zorome) indicating a big win. It is configured differently depending on whether it is displayed or not. As a result, even if the judgment result is a failure, the player can expect a big win by selecting the same variation pattern (variation pattern that becomes a reach) that is also selected in the case of a big win. can.

As a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small win or a big win, and the jackpot type is a big win B, pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), pseudo-development once production (34 seconds), pseudo-development 2 times effect (38 seconds), pseudo-development 3 times effect (42 seconds) are set respectively, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are Matching and corresponding variation patterns are selected. Here, when the variation is stopped, the chance number (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, so that the player is informed that at least a small win has been won. As a result, even the big win B is displayed in the same stop pattern as the small win, so the player can play the game expecting that the game ball will enter the V winning hole 624 in the small win game. can.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", the pseudo development non-effect (30 seconds) is selected, and when it is "50 to 99", the pseudo development once effect ( 34 seconds) is selected, if it is "100 to 149", a pseudo development twice production (38 seconds) is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", pseudo development three times production (38 seconds) Judgment values are set so that they are selected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236, in the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment, there is no fake (30 seconds), no pseudo-development effect (30 seconds), and one-time pseudo-development effect (34 seconds). The presentation mode to be displayed will be described. Figures 232 and 233 are diagrams showing the flow of variation of the third symbol in the case of misalignment (30 seconds). When the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be out of range starts to change, each third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (left, middle, Right symbol) starts scrolling in the vertical direction. In addition, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is a display area smaller than the area where the third symbol is displayed (the area where each third symbol is displayed). ” and “X” are alternately displayed in two columns on the left and right. The fourth pattern is configured to be variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display period of the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable period. (Loss: A combination of a circle pattern on the left row and an X pattern on the right row, a big hit: a combination of a circle pattern on the left row and a circle pattern on the right row, a small hit: a combination of an x pattern on the left row and an x pattern on the right row) is configured to stop at Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 232A and 232B, the state in which three lines are drawn above the fourth symbol indicates that the fourth symbol is being variably displayed.

In the case of false deviation (30 seconds), when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the temporarily stopped third symbol is fixedly stopped (displayed stopped from shaking fluctuation) as shown in FIG. is also configured to be displayed as a stop.

In the pseudo-development non-effect (30 seconds), the symbols to be temporarily stopped are the ready-to-win display mode for the left and right symbols as shown in FIG. The difference is that a chance symbol with a character "CHANCE" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of variation of the third symbol in one pseudo-development effect (34 seconds). When it is determined as a small hit or a big hit B, and the pseudo-development once production is selected, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is triggered to start changing. As shown in A), each third pattern (left, middle and right patterns) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 starts to be scrolled in the vertical direction. After that, after being displayed in a scroll display at high speed (speed or mode at which the type of the third symbol is difficult to identify), the chance symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. After being displayed, each third pattern is shaken and fluctuated up and down.

After that, in the pseudo-development once effect, as shown in FIG. 234(A), the middle symbol "5" symbol and the right symbol "4" symbol are variably displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of "345", it is set as a symbol of the combination that informs the player that the re-fluctuation will be executed. As shown in FIG. 234(B), by moving to and displaying the combination of "345", scrolling display in the vertical direction is started again. After that, through high-speed scroll display, the chance number is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Here, in the case of the pseudo-development 2-time production (38 seconds) and the pseudo-development 3-time production (42 seconds), after the temporary stop, if it is the pseudo-development 2-time production, it will change again. In the case of the three-time pseudo-development effect, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the effect of executing the re-variation twice is executed. In this way, by executing the pseudo-variation a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the small winning game or the big winning B starts.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, the SW (switch) effects in the false, 1-time pseudo-development effect, 2-time pseudo-development effect, and 3-time pseudo-development effect will be described. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the variation pattern command. Detailed performance contents are selected by the voice lamp control device 113 by lottery based on the variation pattern command indicating false-false, one-time pseudo-development performance, two-time pseudo-development performance, and three-time pseudo-development performance. As one of the effects, when the temporary stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. An effect prompting the player is executed.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235(B), if one of the pseudo-development once effect, the pseudo-development twice effect, or the pseudo-development three-time effect is selected, it is changed again. A symbol of "345" is displayed to suggest that the change is executed again. On the other hand, in the case that the out of sync is selected, as shown in FIG. 236, the pattern temporarily stopped does not change, and is stopped and displayed as it is at the timing when the fluctuation period has passed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the "CHANCE" symbol of the chance eye is displayed as the final stop symbol that has changed again. "4" symbols) may be displayed alternately, or by displaying both symbols and scrolling, the "CHANCE" symbol may be displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, when the "CHANCE" symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, the symbol that has stopped may be re-varied. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to discriminate each variation pattern before the player is fixed and stopped, and the start timing of the small winning game and the big winning B can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that the small win and the big win are displayed in a recognizable manner in the fourth pattern, attention to the fourth pattern can be reduced by the performance of the third pattern, and the small win game is started. can be difficult to identify. Furthermore, since the fourth symbol is configured so as not to be able to identify the type of the small win, the first symbol display device 37 must be confirmed, and the shooting of the game ball in the specific small win game is stopped. Special game method (strategic attack) can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 until the fixed stop symbol in the small win or the big win B will be described. As explained earlier in the pseudo development no performance, pseudo development 1 time performance, pseudo development 2 times performance, and pseudo development 3 times performance, when the chance symbol indicating the final stop symbol stops temporarily, the chance symbol fluctuates. In this state, the text "Prepare to aim right" is displayed above the chance symbol. Furthermore, the outline of the right-handed informing symbol N is displayed thinly on the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 to inform the operator to operate the shooting handle with the shooting intensity to shoot the game ball to the right side area. Two seconds before the fluctuation time elapses, the words "Now, let's aim right" are displayed, and the outline of the right-handed informing symbol N is displayed with a high density (Fig. 237). (B)). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 238, the right-handed informing symbol N is displayed not only in outline but also in color, and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the left side.

In this way, the game ball is shot to the right area in accordance with the timing when the small winning game is started by stepwise reporting before the right hitting report is fixed and stopped, and the V winning door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is not fired in time during the period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the re-fluctuation is performed a specified number of times, when the confirmed pattern is displayed, the right-handed notification pattern is configured to be displayed step by step, but not limited to this, it is temporarily stopped. Every time at the timing, the step display of the right-handed information pattern N is started, and if it is lost or changed again, before switching to the display mode of the fixed right-handed information pattern N (see FIG. 238), right-handed information pattern N may be hidden, and the third pattern may be changed again. In this case, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and when it is changed again, it is scrolled again without being confirmed and displayed, and if it is out, another second symbol is displayed. It is also possible to replace the 3 symbols with a fixed stop pattern (for example, scroll (shift) by one frame and stop) to notify the deviation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further make it difficult to understand the start time of the small hit, and to make the player prepare for hitting to the right every time a temporary stop is made, and to prevent the player from firing with a specific type of small win. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the time reduction variation pattern table 202D2 will be described. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202D2. The time saving variation pattern table 202D2 is a data table used for selecting a special symbol variation pattern when the game state is the time saving game state. In the time saving variation pattern table 202D2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving game state is out, short out (2 seconds), short out pseudo once ( 6 seconds), short-out false twice (9 seconds) are set, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 and the set determination value are compared to select the corresponding variation pattern.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 90", short deviation (2 seconds) is selected, and when it is "91 to 189", short deviation pseudo once (6 seconds ) is selected, and when the value is "190 to 198", the judgment values are set so that the pseudo-short-time deviation is selected twice (9 seconds).

Short deviation (2 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 2 seconds, and after a high-speed variation for 1 second from the start of the variation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle pattern is “CHANCE” and the pattern is greatly shaken). After changing and temporarily stopping for 1 second, it switches to a lost pattern (the middle pattern scrolls (slips) one frame downward from the “CHANCE” pattern), stops, and announces that it is off. It is a variation pattern that is In addition, the middle symbol during the temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANCE" symbol and the symbol "1" symbol next to it are alternately displayed at the stop display position. , so that the player does not misunderstand that it is a lottery result such as a small prize.

The variation pattern of the short-out pseudo once (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 6 seconds, and the pattern is fast again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short-out (2 seconds) temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and changing again, temporarily stop for 2 seconds at the chance eye (temporary stop mode similar to short off (2 seconds)), lose pattern (the middle pattern scrolls down one frame from the “CHANCE” pattern) It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the pattern is switched to (slipped) symbol, fixed and stopped, and the deviation is notified.

The variation pattern of short-out pseudo twice (9 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 9 seconds, and after the temporary stop of the above-described short-out pseudo once for 2 seconds, the pattern fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds again. After starting and fluctuating again, after temporarily stopping for 1 second at the chance eye (temporary stop mode similar to short off (2 seconds)), the missing pattern (the middle pattern scrolls down one frame from the "CHANCE" pattern ( It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed to switch to a slipped () symbol), stop, and notify that it is out.

In the time-saving variation pattern table 202D2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is a small win, short-small win (2 seconds), short-small win pseudo once. (6 seconds), pseudo 2 times per short and small (9 seconds), pseudo 3 times per short and small (12 seconds), and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are collated Then the corresponding variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", short and small hits (2 seconds) are selected, and when it is "68 to 136", pseudo once short and small hits (6 seconds) are selected. ) is selected, if it is "137 to 167", pseudo 2 times per short and small (9 seconds) is selected, and if it is "168 to 198", pseudo 3 times per short and small (12 seconds) is selected Each judgment value is set as follows.

The short and small hit (2 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 2 seconds, and after the high-speed variation for 1 second from the start of the variation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle pattern is “CHANCE” and the pattern is greatly shaken). This is a variation pattern in which a variation performance is executed in which the game is temporarily stopped for one second after variation, and then the game is fixed and stopped to notify that a small winning is achieved. Note that the middle symbol during the temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANCE" symbol and the symbol "eg, "1" symbol" arranged one frame after that are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

The variation pattern of pseudo once per short and small (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 6 seconds, and the pattern is fast again for 2 seconds after the short and small per (2 seconds) temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and re-fluctuation, a temporary stop for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to the short and small win (2 seconds)), and then a fixed stop and a small win are notified. It is the variation pattern that is executed.

The variation pattern of pseudo twice (9 seconds) per short and small is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 9 seconds, and after the temporary stop of the pseudo once per short and small mentioned above for 2 seconds, the pattern fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds again. After starting and changing again, temporarily stop for 1 second at the second chance (temporary stop mode similar to short and small wins (2 seconds)), then fixed stop, execution of variable production to notify that it is a small win It is a variation pattern that is

The variation pattern of pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) per short and small is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 12 seconds, and after the temporary stop of 2 pseudo per short and small mentioned above for 1 second, the pattern fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds again. After starting and changing again, temporarily stop for 1 second at the second chance (temporary stop mode similar to short and small wins (2 seconds)), then fixed stop, execution of variable production to notify that it is a small win It is a variation pattern that is

Thus, in this embodiment, during the time-saving game, when the lottery result is out and when it is a small hit, it is configured with the same variation time, and at the same variation timing (timing of passage of variation time) The third pattern is configured to be temporarily stopped at the chance eye. As a result, even when the lottery result is a loss, it is possible to make the player feel as if every variable small winning will occur, and the player can be made to prepare for hitting right in preparation for the start of the small winning game. Further, the first pattern display device 37 confirms whether the type of specific small win (for example, a small win E, which is a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player among the small win types), and launches the game ball. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that a special game method is performed to avoid the game ball from entering the V ball entrance 600A by stopping the game.

It should be noted that the stepwise notification of the right hitting notification symbol in the normal game state may be configured to be executed for each temporary stop even during the time saving game. By constructing in this way, it is possible to play a game expecting a small win even if the fluctuation is far off.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202C (see FIG. 242 (D)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is equal to the value of the random number set by the second winning random number table 202C, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). In addition, this second random number table 202C is for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability normal design hit probability (normal design) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state, and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

FIG. 242(D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-described second winning random number table 202C. In this second winning random number table 202C, there are 24 random numbers that are winning normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64 . A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 262). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 274).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 240, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 274) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 273) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 241(B), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F, time saving counter 203G, jackpot start flag 203H, jackpot medium flag 203I, small hit start flag 203J, small hit medium flag 203K, V passing ground jackpot type value 203M, V flag 203N, and other memory area 203Z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 obtained based on winning in the first winning port 64 are respectively stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 ~ C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 640 are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is set to zero. are added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 of FIG. 263, of FIG. 266 S305). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223B of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second winning opening 640 is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is based on the passage of the ball through the normal starting port 67. The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the number of reserved balls (waiting number of times) is up to 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. . On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C.

The counter 203G during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. A counter value corresponding to the number of times of time saving is set in the time saving medium counter 203G, and by subtracting 1 at the timing when the variation of the special pattern stops, the time is shortened until the number of times of variation of the special pattern set in the time saving game state is completed. It is configured so that the game state is set.

The jackpot start flag 203H is a flag indicating that it is time to start a jackpot game. When the lottery result is determined to be a big win and the variation of the special symbol stops, the big win start flag 203H is set to ON (see S219 in FIG. 263). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203H is ON and it is identified that it is time to start the jackpot, it is set to OFF. Note that the jackpot start flag 203H is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power failure when power failure or the like occurs.

The jackpot middle flag 203I is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (Fig. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This jackpot flag 203I is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. is configured as

The small winning start flag 203J is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. It is determined that the small winning start flag 203J is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF. This small winning start flag 203J is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203K is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This small hit medium flag 203K is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure etc. configured to be

The V passage time jackpot type value 203M stores data for determining the jackpot type set when a ball wins in the V prize opening 624 within the V valid period when a small win game is being executed. area. As the V-passing jackpot type value 203M, a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored when the variation of the special symbol in which the determination result is a small hit stops. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the V flag 203N corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type value 203M is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V-passing big winning type value 203M is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203M is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

In the V flag 203N, when a ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period in the small winning game, the flag corresponding to the big winning type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. be. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203N is on, whereby it is identified that the V winning port 624 has won during the V valid period, and the flag is set to on. Then, the type of jackpot to be executed is discriminated, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203N is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

In the other memory area 203Z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

The scenario counter 203AA is a counter for progressing various scenarios (jackpot scenario, win scenario) defining operation control contents of the jackpot game or the small win game, and when the jackpot game or the small win game is started. , "1" is set as the counter value, and then the big hit control processing (see S1004 in FIG. 275) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110, or the small hit control processing (see FIG. 278 S1005) is executed, the value is incremented by "1". The counter value is reset to "0" when the value is added up to the end of various scenarios (jackpot scenario, winning scenario).

The specific controlled flag 203AB is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276), which is executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, is completed, and is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has ended.

This specific controlled flag 203AB is set to ON when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) is completed (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the setting status of the flag is the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). ) (see S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203AB is set to ON (S1118: YES), when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the first round in which a special round game is executed It is determined that the game has ended, and a normal round game (a round game for opening the specific winning port 65A) from the second round onwards is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

Returning to FIG. 239, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112A so that when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The sphere firing unit 112A has a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51B is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 251(A), the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222A and various data and programs required for game control.

In the variation pattern selection table 222A, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251(B). As shown in FIG. 251(B), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223A, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, a fluctuation start flag 223D, At least a stop type selection flag 223E, an effect counter 223F, a SW effective time counter 223G, and a memory area 223Z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223A has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. From the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223A, the lottery result of the ball on hold can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203D after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203D.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223B, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area DS1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223D is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. When the fluctuation start flag 223D is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223E is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223E is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223F is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW valid time counter 223G is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written according to the FIFO (FIRST IN FIRST OUT) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 282) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the A1 control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 261. FIG. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231A, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231A is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231A.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (DYNAMIC RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . MPU 231 directly accesses character ROM 234 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, and transfers a control program stored in second program storage area 234A1 of character ROM 234 to program storage area 233A of work RAM 233 . An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234A2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, in a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234A, a ROM controller 234B, a buffer RAM 234C and a NOR type ROM 234D.

NAND type flash memory 234A is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234A1 for storing data and a character storage area 234A2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234A2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

The NAND flash memory 234A can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234A2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234B is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234A or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234A, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234B applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234A. data address translation.

This ROM controller 234B corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234B analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234A and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234A. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234C is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234A. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234B reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234C. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234A (or NOR ROM 234D) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234C. do. Then, the ROM controller 234B outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234C is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234A can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234B, for example, uses the other bank with data set in one bank to output the data in the NAND flash memory 234A to the outside, or the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234A to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234D is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234A. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234D stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234A. At least a first program storage area 234D1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234D1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234A), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231A to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231A, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234C from the NOR ROM 234D while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234D. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234A, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234D. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234A is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234A and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234C. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D into the buffer RAM 234C. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR ROM 234D. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234A). 233A and data table storage area 233B. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234C, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C is transferred to the program storage area 233A. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234D1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 again in the buffer RAM 234C, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 transfers the command pointer 231A to the program storage area 233A. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233A. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234A1. The instruction pointer 231A is programmed to be included in the program storage area 233A, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233A. Specifically, the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or data table storage area 233B. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234D with a very small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 261) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws a frame in either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288(B)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237A composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234A.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237A, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237A when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234C to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235E and an error message image area 235F are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235B and a third pattern area 235D are provided.

The power-on main image area 235A is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variable image area 235B, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A from the character ROM 234 when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

The power-on fluctuation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on varying image area 235B. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235A to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "o" and "x" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the variable performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a certain period of time after the suspension of the variable performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235A until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The MPU 231 sends a signal to the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in 235B, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description continues. The third symbol area 235D is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235D, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the variable performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235E is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by storing data corresponding to these characters in the character design area 235E. When device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from sound lamp control device 113, device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from character ROM 234, but stores it in character design area 235E of resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235F is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235F. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235F, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the error message corresponding to the error command is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236A, a first frame buffer 236B and a second frame buffer 236C.

The image storage area 236A is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236A is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 in subareas provided in image storage area 236A of normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated sub-area of the image storage area 236A via the buffer RAM 237A.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. be. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233A, a data table storage area 233B, a simple image display flag 233C, a display data table buffer 233D, a transfer data table buffer 233E, a pointer 233F, a drawing list area 233G, a timer counter 233H, and a storage image data discriminator. It has at least a flag 233J and a drawing target buffer flag 233K.

The program storage area 233A is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233A. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233B includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233B. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233B. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable production is started, if the stop type of the variable production is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, and if the stop type of the variable production is a jackpot, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is finally stop-displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the short period of time of the normal design by informing the short period of time of the normal design in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the through gate 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. As a result, there are more opportunities for the electric accessories to be released as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning opening 640, and the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233B stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Here, with reference to FIG. 259, details of the display data table will be described. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, A blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The A blending information is information for specifying a known A blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "START" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 259) describes the data table. "END" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and the pointer 233F is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233F is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236A of normal video RAM 236 are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233B can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 260). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 260).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 260, "02F0H") describes "END" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233B and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233E of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233F is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233F is "0002H", NULL data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236A, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233C is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233C is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235A or power-on variation image area 235B of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 288(B)).

The simple image display flag 233C is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288B). If the image display flag 233C is ON, the simple command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288B) and the simple display setting process (see S3308 in FIG. (see S3309 of H.288(B)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233C is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170A), and when the simple image display flag 233C is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(B)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233C is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233D stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233B. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233F by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D.

While incrementing the pointer 233F one by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233E stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233B, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233E. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233E by writing NULL data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233F one by one, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. (that is, if NULL data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 261) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236A.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233F is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233F to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (see FIG. 288 (B)). ), the pointer update process (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233F is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233F is updated in this way, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and stores it in a drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 261), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233G allows the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Here, with reference to FIG. 261, details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, A blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. A blending process is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to the A blending information, color tone correction is performed according to the color information, and filtering is performed according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233K.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 stores the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F and other image contents to be drawn (for example, the holding number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The clock counter 233H is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288 (B )) is executed, the timer counter 233H is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 288B). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233H becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233J is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233J is generated by initial setting processing (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233J generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236A.

The stored image data determination flag 233J is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236A as the one sprite is always unstored by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233J and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236A, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233K selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233K is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236B as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236C. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233K is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233K to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 288B) is executed (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. be. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the A1 control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 262 to 279. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2M seconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

262 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment When reaching 999, 99, 239) respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the through gate passage processing, the V entrance passage processing is executed (S108), and then the V passage processing (S109) is executed. Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271. FIG.

After executing the V-passing process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51B for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: YES), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: NO), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (the number of times N2 of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is not 0 (S204: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203B are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (S204: NO), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (N1) (S208), and determines whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 0 (S209: NO), that is, when there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, the main End the process.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is not 0 (S209: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted (S210), and by the processing of S210 A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed, and this process ends.

Further, in the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: YES), the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. will be More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is changed. Accordingly, any one of the big hits A to D is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol (determination result of each type of counter) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit. , a red LED and a green LED are lit.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display blue LEDs to indicate the jackpot A (for example, the alphabet "A" ), and when the jackpot B is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot B (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "B"), and when the jackpot C is determined Lights up in a manner indicating a C (for example, a manner imitating the alphabet "C"), and when a jackpot D is determined, lights in a manner indicating a jackpot D (for example, a manner imitating the alphabet "D"). Let

In addition, even when the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win, the red LED is lit in a manner corresponding to each small win type (small win A to small win E) in the same way as when the above-mentioned big win is won. Let The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, the mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) that indicates the contents of each hit type so that the player can grasp the hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to light up in a mode formed from a lighting mode corresponding to each hit type), but other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol of this time and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode classified to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery result of the special symbol is different. .

After the processing of S215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is a special symbol jackpot ( S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: YES), based on the jackpot type, V winning is performed to allow the ball to enter a specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65A, V winning opening 624). An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and thereafter, setting of the start of the big win (setting of the big win such as 15 rounds) is executed in correspondence with the type of the big win determined in the current big win (S218). ).

When the process of S218 is completed, next, the jackpot start flag 203H and the jackpot flag 203I are set to ON (S219), the value of the time saving counter 203G is set to 0 (S220), and a stop command is set (S225 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: NO), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S221), and it is a small win. If it is determined (S221: YES), after executing the small winning start setting process (S222), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. Details of the small winning start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S221, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (no) (S221: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (S223). . When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203G is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S223: NO), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203G is 1 or more (S223: YES), that is, if the current time is in the time saving state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203G (S224), and S225 Execute the process and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, a lottery ( It is a process for determining the performance pattern (variation performance pattern) of the variation performance performed by the first design display devices 37A, 37B and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, a first hit random number counter C1 stored in a common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B). , the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the special symbol lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202A1, special symbol 2 random number table 202A2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 (see FIG. 242(B)). are compared one by one with the four random values set in . As described above, as the random number value for the first special symbol jackpot, four numbers of "0 to 3" are set. If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Similarly, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the random value "4" which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 (see FIG. 242(B)) match, It is determined that it is a small hit of a special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined as a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied according to the type of the special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make a game by itself.

In this embodiment, the first winning random number table 202A is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol will win a small winning, but only one of the special symbols will win a small winning. The first winning random number table 202A may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202A1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with the random number value for the small hit of the special symbol, and only the special symbol 2 random number table 202A2 corresponding to the second special symbol is special. It is better to set a random value that will be a small hit for the design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege (small winning game) that can be given to the player according to the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in this embodiment, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in a predetermined range (0 to 3) corresponds to the special symbol jackpot, and the other range (4 to 999) according to the type of special symbol. However, as another configuration, for example, the value of a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202A are used to perform a special symbol lottery (big win, small win, loss). As an alternative configuration, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. is discriminated, and if the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big win, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win using the second random number table. You can By performing the special symbol lottery using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the special symbol lottery result can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the special symbol lottery result can be suppressed. .

In this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used when performing the lottery for the special symbols, but other configurations may be used. A special symbol lottery may be performed using the random number table 202A. In this case, for example, based on the value of the first random number counter, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and based on the value of the second random number counter, the special symbol lottery result is small. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 264, the description continues. In the process of S233, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S232 is a special symbol jackpot (S233). When it is determined to be a special pattern jackpot (S233: YES), the jackpot type is acquired based on a jackpot type selection table corresponding to the type of special pattern corresponding to this special pattern lottery (S234), A display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special pattern and the big win type is set (S235), a big win variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S236), and a variation pattern corresponding to the big win variation pattern determined this time. A command is set (S243), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S233: NO), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S237). If it is determined (S237: YES), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the special design type corresponding to this special design lottery (S238), and the special design and the small hit type are obtained. set the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to and, determine the small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter, set the variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time (S243), End this process.

Also, in the process of S237, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (S237: NO), that is, if it is determined that the result of this lottery is a loss, the loss corresponding to the type of special symbol Set the display mode of the time (S241), determine the variation pattern at the time of loss based on the number of held balls (S242), set the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of loss determined this time (S243), End this process.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending balls, whereas the special symbol If the result of the lottery is lost, the variation pattern is different according to the number of held balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a shorter variation time. As a result, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the period until the lottery result (loss), in which the special pattern lottery result does not give a benefit to the player, is displayed. In order to increase the number of lotteries of the special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the special symbol variation time for one time, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a state in which the special symbols are not varied during the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play.

In this embodiment, it is configured to vary the variation pattern based on the number of held balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed. On the condition that the number of held balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more during variation, the variation time set in the variation pattern being executed may be shortened. . By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbols are fluctuating.

In addition, in this embodiment, only when the lottery result of the special pattern is out, the variation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern may be varied based on the number, or it may be configured such that the larger the number of held balls, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Of the 2 special symbols, only the value of the number of held balls of the second special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be sufficient, or the special symbol on the side to be the target of the special symbol variation start processing to be performed this time. Only the value of the number of retained balls in the design may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the small winning start setting process (S222) will be described. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S222). In this small winning start setting process, a solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 is V A first retention member 622D (see FIG. 231), a movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), a second retention member 622B (see FIG. 231), and a rotation distribution member provided in a flow path flowing down toward the winning opening 624 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed to set a scenario for driving solenoids for operating each.

In the small winning start setting process (S244), first, based on the small winning scenario table 202AB (see FIG. 248(B)), a scenario (winning scenario A) corresponding to the set small winning type is set (S241). . Next, set the small winning type corresponding to the small winning type determined to the V passing time jackpot type value (S242), set the start of the small winning corresponding to the small winning type (S243), and set the small winning start flag 203J. , set the small hit medium flag 203K to ON (S244), and terminate this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 266, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in this embodiment. This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing the holding process of the values when there is

When the starting winning process (FIG. 266, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 (S301: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S302). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S303).

Then, if there is no winning to the first winning hole 64 (S301: NO), or even if there is a winning to the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 If not (S303: NO), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S301: YES), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 (S303: YES), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203D (S304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (S305).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 (S306). In addition, in the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S307 to S312, the same processing as in the processing from S301 to S306 is executed for the winning of the second winning port 640 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S307: NO), a look-ahead process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 267, the prefetching process (S313) will be described. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S313). When the look-ahead process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (S321). If there is no new winning (S321: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S321: YES), then it is determined whether or not the new winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322).

In the process of S322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: YES), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big win selection table and the special symbol 1 small win selection table. The lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

On the other hand, in the processing of S322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S322: NO), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big win selection table and the special symbol 2 small winning selection table Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the process of S323 or S324 described above is set ( S325). Then, the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 268, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640A, and the like are displayed. It is a process for controlling.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S401). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the electric accessory 640A is controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S401: YES), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S402: NO), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is greater than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (S404: NO), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (S404: YES), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (S405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is obtained (S407).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203G during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203G is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal-symbol time-saving state. , and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203G is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

When the value of the time-saving counter 203G is 1 or more (S408: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S409). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S409: YES), the process proceeds to S411.

In the process of S409, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S409: NO), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S407. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S410). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 8(B)).

In the process of S408, when the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 0 (S408:NO), it transfers to the process of S411. In the process of S411, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S407 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S411). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 8(B)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S410 or S411 is the normal symbol win (S412), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S412: YES). , set the display mode at the time of winning (S413). In the process of S413, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203G is 1 or more (S414), and if the value of the time saving counter 203G is 1 or more (S414: YES), the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. (S415). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S415: YES), the process proceeds to S417.

In the process of S415, if the jackpot of special symbols is not in effect (S415: NO), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of special symbols and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols. The open period is set to 1 second and the number of open times is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the process of S414, when the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 0 (S414:NO), it transfers to the process of S417. In the processing of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbols or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbols, the opening period of the electric accessory 640A is set to 0.2 seconds, The number of opening times is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S412, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S412: NO), the display mode at the time of out is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 1 or more (S419). The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203G is 0 (S419: NO), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640A becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S422). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S422, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S422: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S422, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S422: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of S413, the "O" symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S423, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S413 or the process of S418.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S424). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S424: YES), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640A is set (S425), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640A is set by the process of S425, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the electric accessory 640A The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S416 or S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S424: NO), the process of S425 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In this through gate passage processing, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and reserved. This process is for

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S431: YES), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S433).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431: NO), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (S433: YES), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F 1 is added to the value (M) of (S434). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203. area (S435), and the process ends.

In addition, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty reservation areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is referred to, and the value is If 0, make the first reserved area the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the first retention sensor 622F is on (S501), and if not (S501: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first retention sensor 622F is on (S501: YES), then during the V winning opening opening period, that is, the first round of the jackpot game in which jackpot B is set as the jackpot type It is determined whether the set scenario is the winning scenario A202AA2 (S502). In the processing of S502, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (S502: YES), the V entrance passage command is set (S503), and this processing ends. If it is not during the small winning (S502: NO), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S504) and this process is executed. finish.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620 .

Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the V passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

When the V passing process (S109) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is V passing, that is, whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 (S601). ), and then it is determined whether the V valid period is currently in effect (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203AA that counts the progress of the scenario (winning scenario B222AA3) set to the small winning game or the big winning type B is "1" to "501", It is determined that it is in the V valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that it is not in the V valid period.

In the process of S602, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S602: YES), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is in progress (S603), and if it is in the small winning game (S603 : YES), acquire the V passing time jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game this time (S604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (S605), and set the time saving medium counter to 0 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

That is, in the processing of S604 to S606, the processing for executing the big winning game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of S603, if it is determined that the small winning game is not being performed (the big winning game corresponding to the big winning type B is being played) (S603: NO), it is necessary to perform a new process for executing the big winning game. , the processing of S604 to S606 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S607.

In the processing of S607, a V passage command is set (S607), and this processing ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during the small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game succeeds, and following the small winning game , an effect is executed to indicate that a jackpot game is to be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big winning game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the small winning game is executed.

On the other hand, when the V pass command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a disappointing effect for indicating that the V challenge has failed is executed, and the V passing command is received at a predetermined timing during the big winning game. If not, the resurrection performance from the disappointing performance is executed, and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In this embodiment, only the command (V passing command) for indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 is set. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) to indicate that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game ball that can enter the V winning opening 624 is only the game ball (for example, one) retained by the second retention member 622B, so the second retention member 622B A number measuring means for measuring the number of retained game balls, and a left discharge path 623A and a right discharge path 623B (see FIG. 229) through which the game balls flowing down from the rotating distribution member 621 can flow down. and a detecting means for detecting the above-described V non-passing command may be set when the detecting means detects the number of game balls counted by the number measuring means. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 620 .

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (S602: NO), an error command is set (S607), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of S607, a state in which the game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally made to enter the V winning opening 624 with the game ball, or when the V winning It is possible to quickly notify the outside when a member (for example, the second retention member 622B) attached to the port 624 is malfunctioning.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: NO), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: NO). , there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A command is transmitted (S912).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on, power failure occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: YES), the data is backed up in the RAM 203. While retaining the data, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Then, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted, and the main processing, which will be described later, is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4M seconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262). Send a prize ball command to In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process (see Figure 263), start winning process (see Figure 266), V entrance passing process (see Figure 270) and V passing process (see Figure 271) can be sent to the voice lamp control device. 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, various commands set in the opening command, round number command, ending command and small hit control processing (see FIG. 278) set in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 275) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65A is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65A has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65A. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65A is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

Next, a small hit control process (S1005) is executed. A detailed description of this small winning control process (S1005) will be given later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640A associated with the second winning port 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S425 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 268), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S416 or S417 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. It starts with the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) ends, the 1 symbol display device 37A, 37B to end the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S235, S239, S241 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 264), stop symbol (first symbol ) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 or the process of S421 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S413 or the processing of S418 of the normal design fluctuation start processing (see Figure 268), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4M seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: NO), the second main processing is performed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1009, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1009: YES), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 274). This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65A.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263) or the processing of S1406 of the small winning ending control processing (see FIG. 279) to be described later is executed to determine whether a big winning scenario is set. do. In other words, the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, and the big win scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big win scenario is set based on passing through the specific area (V winning opening 624) during the small win game. Determine if it is set. In the processing of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: NO), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set (S1101: YES), the jackpot start flag 203H is set to OFF, and then the set scenario is that of jackpot B. (S1102).

In the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario of jackpot B is set (S1102: YES), it is determined whether or not the specific controlled flag 203AB is ON (S1117).

In the processing of S1117, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203AB is off (S1117: NO), the processing of the specific jackpot control processing (S1118) is executed, and the jackpot control processing ends. The specific jackpot control process (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario other than jackpot B is set in the process of S1102 (S1102: NO), or when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 233AB is turned on in the process of S1117 (S1117: If YES), 1 is added to the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA (S1103), and it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario A is set (not shown), since the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, it is checked whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is 1. discriminate.

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the opening start (if the jackpot scenario A, the counter value is 1) (S1104: YES), the jackpot opening command is issued. It sets (S1105) and terminates this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1104: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the start of the round (if the jackpot scenario A , the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

In the processing of S1106, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the start of the round (S1106: YES), the processing of S1107 sets the specific winning port 65A to be opened (specific winning The special prize winning opening solenoid is set to ON so that the opening/closing door 65B of the opening 65A is in an open state), then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1108), and this processing is finished.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the start of the round (S1106: NO), then it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65A are satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening 65A in this embodiment, when 29 seconds have elapsed since the specific winning opening 65A was opened, or after the specific winning opening 65A was opened, a predetermined number of balls ( For example, when 10 wins are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65A is satisfied (S1109: YES), the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is changed to the counter value corresponding to the end of the round currently being executed. is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value (S1110), and the process ends. In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of S1109, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control processing after the next time. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the specific winning opening 65A and the closing condition is satisfied, that is, the specific winning opening 65A is closed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (renewal of the counter value). In this case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process). configured as follows).

By doing so, the operation control (for example, the operation control to close a specific winning hole when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) can be turned into a jackpot scenario. can be executed based on Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65A, operation control is performed based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and when a predetermined number of prizes have been won, the jackpot scenario is not used. There is no need to perform complicated control such as execution of motion control, so that the design can be facilitated and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which both motion controls are mixed.

In the processing of S1109, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65A is not satisfied (S1109: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is the value corresponding to the end of the round (whether it is the jackpot scenario A). For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750 (S1111).

In the processing of S1111, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: YES), in the processing of S1112, the specific winning opening 65A is set to be closed (specific winning The special prize winning opening solenoid 65F2 is turned off so that the open/close door 65B of the opening 65A is closed), and this process is terminated. Incidentally, the determination process from S1106 to S1111 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the end of the round (S1111: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the start of the interval (jackpot). If it is scenario A, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). In the process of S1113, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the start of the interval (S1113: YES), the interval command is set (S1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1113, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is not the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1113: NO), then the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the variation of the special symbols. .

The contents of this jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is finished, next, an operation process based on other scenarios is executed (S1116), and this process is finished. Here, as the processing of S1116, for example, when driving and controlling the V distribution motor 620A for driving the rotation distribution member 621 based on the jackpot scenario, the operation processing of the motor is executed.

Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). This specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is the winning scenario A (S1201). In the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the winning scenario A is set (S1201: YES), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203AA (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203AA after addition is performed. Execute (S1203).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203AA, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario A (S1204). In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the end timing of the winning scenario A is not reached (S1204: NO), the process returns to the big winning control process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that it is time to end the winning scenario A (S1204: YES), the value of the scenario counter 203AA is set to 0 (S1205), and the second staying member 622B stays. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (staying ball) that is stuck (S1206).

In the process of S1206, when it is determined that there is a staying ball in the first staying member 622D, the winning scenario B is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the first staying member 622D, the winning scenario C is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. As a result, at the end timing of the winning scenario A, the type of the winning scenario to be set thereafter can be varied depending on whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622B.

In the process of S1209, an operation is executed according to the value of the scenario counter 203AA (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario B or C (S1210).

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is time to end the winning scenario B or C (S1210: YES), the big winning scenario B is set (S1211), and the specific controlled flag 233AB is turned on ( S1212), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1210: NO), the processing of S1211 and S1212 is skipped and the present processing ends.

In the process of S1201, if it is determined that winning scenario A is not set (S1201: NO), then it is determined whether winning scenario B or C is set (S1213). In the process of S1213, when it is determined that the winning scenario B or C is set (S1213: YES), the process proceeds to S1209. Accordingly, when the winning scenario A is set, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is executed, and when the winning scenario B or C is set after that, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing of S1209 is performed. You can do the following.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that neither of the winning scenarios B and C is set (S1213: NO), this process ends.

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1115). This jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (the counter value is 40751 in jackpot scenario A) (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the start of the ending (S1301: YES), a jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1301: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the end of the ending (if the jackpot scenario A , the counter value is 42000) (S1303). In the process of S1303, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1303: NO), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the end of the ending (S1303: YES), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter 203AA is reset to 0 (S1305). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is terminated.

Next, the big hit medium flag 203I is set to OFF (S1306), and the specific controlled flag 203AB is set to OFF (S1307). Then, the value of the time-saving counter 203G corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), the jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 278, small hit control processing (S1005) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), setting a command for executing various effects according to the small hit in the audio lamp control device 113, V entering ball This is processing for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600 associated with the mouth 600A and the flow path solenoid 209B. In addition, in this embodiment, since the scenario set during the small winning game is the same as the specific big winning control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not the winning scenario A is set (S1401). In the process of S1401, if it is determined that the winning scenario A is set (S1401: YES), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203AA (S1402), and an operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203AA after addition is performed. Execute (S1403).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203AA, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario A (S1404). In the processing of S1404, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario A (S1404: NO), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that it is time to end the winning scenario A (S1404: YES), the value of the scenario counter 203AA is set to 0 (S1405), and the second staying member 622B stays. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (staying ball) that is stuck (S1406).

In the process of S1406, when it is determined that there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622B, the winning scenario B is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the second staying member 622B, the winning scenario C is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. As a result, at the end timing of the winning scenario A, an effect can be set according to whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622B.

In the process of S1409, an operation is executed according to the value of the scenario counter 203AA (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario B or C (S1410).

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1410: YES), a small winning ending control process is executed (S1411), and this process ends. The details of this small winning ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1410, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario B or C (S1410: NO), the processing of S1411 is skipped and the present processing ends.

In the process of S1401, if it is determined that winning scenario A is not set (S1401: NO), then it is determined whether winning scenario B or C is set (S1412). In the process of S1412, when it is determined that the winning scenario B or C is set (S1412: YES), the process proceeds to S1409. Accordingly, when the winning scenario A is set, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is executed, and when the winning scenario B or C is set after that, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing of S1409 is performed. You can do the following.

On the other hand, in the process of S1412, if it is determined that neither of the winning scenarios B and C is set (S1412: NO), this process ends.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing this small winning ending control process (S1411). This small hit ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is 751) (S1501). In the process of S1501, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (S1501: YES), a small winning end command is set (S1502), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1501: NO), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the end of the ending (if the scenario counter 203AA , the counter value is 1500) (S1503). In the process of S1503, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1503: NO), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203AA corresponds to the end of the ending (S1503: YES), the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203AA is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to S1505.

In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203N is set to ON (S1505). In the processing of S1505, if it is determined that the V flag 203N is not set to ON (S1505: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203N is set to ON (S1505: YES), then a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203N set in S705 of FIG. Set (S1506). Then, the jackpot start flag 203H and the jackpot mid-jack flag 203I are set to ON (S1507), the V flag 203N is set to OFF (S1508), and the process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning port 624 in a small winning game, a big winning game corresponding to a preset big winning type corresponding to the small winning is executed. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 and determine the jackpot type based on the detection of a game ball by the V winning hole 624.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Embodiment A1>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 280, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S2018 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), it executes power-off processing in S2018. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2018 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1402: NO), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1514. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAH" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAH", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAH", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1403:YES), it will transfer to S1404 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: NO), the process proceeds to S1408.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAH" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: YES), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAH" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: NO), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: YES), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the power-off processing of S2018, the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFH" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFH", and if it is "0FFH", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFH", "55H", "0AAH", and "00H". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: YES), the keyword "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAH" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: NO), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S2017 in FIG. 281). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2018 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the current start-up processing is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: YES), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1409) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), an interrupt Permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: NO), S1409, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the process of S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 281, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1M seconds or more have passed since the main process started or since the current process of S2001 was executed (S2001), and 1M seconds or more has passed. If not (S2001: NO), the process proceeds to S2013 without performing the processes of S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, it is determined whether or not 1M seconds have elapsed because S2002 to S2012 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1M seconds). , S2014 and the command determination process of S2013 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2013 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2014 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1M seconds or more have elapsed in the processing of S2001 (S2001: YES), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2002 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2005 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. It is a process of setting so that the corresponding effect is performed when the input of is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 . The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2008), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2009, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In the various counter update processing of S2011, various counters used in the control processing of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, the process of updating effects and the like is executed.

After effect update processing, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2013). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2014. In the process of S2014, a variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2015 (S2015: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off processing is executed (S2018). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2019), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: NO), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2016: YES), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the variation pattern command is received (S2101: YES), the variation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2103), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S2101: NO), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2104). When the stop type command is received (S2104: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: NO), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2107). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2107: YES), the reserved ball numbers of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding special pattern 1 reserved ball is extracted. Stored in the number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, respectively. In addition, when the process of S2108 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the processing of S2107, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2107: NO), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2109). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2109: YES), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223A (S2110). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2109: NO), it is determined whether a win-related command regarding a big win, a small win, etc. has been received (S2111). When it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2111: YES), a win-related process is executed (S2112). This winning-related process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but a process based on each command output from main controller 110 is executed in a big win or a small win. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S2111, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2111: NO), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2115) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the winning-related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing this win-related process (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the hit related process (S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, a display jackpot start command is set (S2202). Although omitted, when the jackpot start command is received also in the sound lamp control device 113, various lamps, sounds, and other necessary processes are executed at the start of the jackpot. After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2203). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2203: YES), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the received command (S2204). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: NO), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2205). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: YES), a display jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot end timing is set (S2206). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S2205: NO), it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S2207). When it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S2207: YES), a display small hit start command indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game is set (S2208). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S2207: NO), it is determined whether the small hit end command is received (S2209). When it is determined that the small winning end command is received (S2209: YES), a small winning end command for display indicating that it is the end timing of the small winning game is set (S2210). After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2209: NO), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211: YES), a display V entrance passage command indicating that the first residence sensor is ON is set (S2212). After that, this process ends. The fact that the first residence sensor is ON indicates that the game ball has entered the V ball entrance 600A.

If it is determined that the V entrance pass command has not been received (S2211: NO), it is determined whether or not the V entrance pass command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the V passing command is received (S2213: YES), the game ball passes through the V winning opening 624 and the V effect (the effect of displaying characters such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2214). After that, this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2014). This variable display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2221). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2221: NO), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2226. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is on (S2221: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223D is turned off (S2222). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2223).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2224). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the processing of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2225). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is not ON (that is, is OFF) (S2225: NO), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is on (S2225: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E is turned off (S2226). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process proceeds to S2229. In the process of S2229, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2229). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2007) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 285, S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time (SW valid time counter 223G>0) is set (S2301). . As for the SW valid time, as shown in FIG. 235, the SW valid time of the selected variation pattern is automatically set at the timing corresponding to the case where the effect of the variation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. set. If it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S2301: YES), the value of the SW valid time counter 223G is updated by subtracting a value corresponding to the elapsed time (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303; YES), a display chance command is set based on the set variation pattern and pressing timing. This second chance command for display causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform a re-variation (see FIG. 235), or an effect in which a temporary stop display of shaking variation is performed again without re-varying. The SW valid time counter 223G is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223G is 0 (S2301: NO), if it is determined in the process of S2303 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S2303: NO ), the process of S2306 is executed. In the process of S2306, other processes (background change, etc.) related to SW effects are executed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 286, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231A provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D in the buffer RAM 234C. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the character ROM 234 stores that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234A and set in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234D stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby increasing the speed of the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234C and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 287, the boot processing (S3001) will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234A capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234A has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233B is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR-type ROM 234D and set in the buffer RAM 234C after the system reset is released is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234A1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233A (S3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A (S3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A by the process of S3101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231A to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233A by the process of S3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231A is set by the process of S3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231A is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A among the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A are transferred to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B by a predetermined amount (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233B.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3104), the instruction pointer 231A is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S3001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A and data table storage area 233B. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234A. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234D with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the process of S3101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233A. 231A may be executed. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently transferred to the program storage area 233A. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233A, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set in the instruction pointer 231A at step S3101. and the processing of S3102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234D1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233A at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233A. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234D1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in one program storage area 234D1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233A, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233A, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process (S3002), after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to display an image of a specific color on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Instructs execution of image drawing and display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. Transferred to image area 235A.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235A. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235B, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235B is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233C is set. is turned on (S3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in transfer setting processing (see S3305 in FIG. 288B), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer to the RAM 235 .

Further, the simple image display flag 233C indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288(B)), the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 288(B) S3308) and simple display setting processing (see S3309 in FIG. 288(B)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234A for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S3005, interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288(A), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 288A is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 288(B), V interrupt processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 288B is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 288B, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233C is on (S3301), If it is off (S3301: NO), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S3302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the command determination process (S3302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233D. The details of this display setting process are the same as those of the display setting process of the first control example (see FIGS. 167 and 168), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the display setting process (S3303) is executed, task processing is executed (S3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S3303) or the simple display setting processing (S3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233C is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236, even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. - 特許庁Details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 170 and 171) of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3305), 261, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process (see FIG. 172) of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S3302), when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to D, front and rear out reach, front and back reach other than front and rear out, complete out , Chance) are compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233C is ON (S3301: YES), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S3309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, details of the command determination process (S3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S3403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: YES), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S3405) and returns to the processing of S3401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 290(A), the details of the variation pattern command process (S3405) will be described. FIG. 290(A) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233B to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233D (S3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233D as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect having time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233D is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3504), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S3505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S3501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233F, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233E The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236A.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233H to which the time data is set by the process of S3504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S3406), If there is a stop type command for display (S3406: YES), stop type command processing is executed (S3407), and the process returns to S3401.

Details of the stop type command process (S3407) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 290B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpot A to D, front and rear out reach, reach other than front and rear out, complete loss, and chance) is created. Determined (S3601), comparing the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(B)) is executed, the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 3602 is set.

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3602. In the above-described task processing (S3304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S3602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S3603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235D of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3406: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408). If there is an image change command (S3408: YES), back image change command processing is executed (S3409), and the process returns to S3401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 291A, the details of the back image change command process (S3409) will be described. FIG. 291A is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to ON ( S3701). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3702. . Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

In the task processing (S3304), if it is specified to display one of the back faces A to C according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S3702 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3408: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3410). Otherwise (S3410: YES), error command processing is executed (S3411), and the process returns to S3401.

Details of the error command processing (S3411) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 291B is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3802). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3802, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3410: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a win-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412), and if there is a win-related command If (S3412: YES), hit-related command processing is executed (S3413), and the process returns to S3401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the details of the win-related command process (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing the win-related command processing.

In this hit-related command process, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command in the hit-related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command, (S3901: YES), a jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S3903.

Here, with reference to FIG. 293(A), the details of the jackpot start command process (S3902) will be described. FIG. 293(A) is a flow chart showing a jackpot start command process. In this jackpot start command process, a process corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the jackpot start command process, first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3921). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3922).

Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3921, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3923), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3925), the jackpot start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this jackpot start command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S3924, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S3921 , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233F, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. 233E, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236. FIG.

Also, when this jackpot start command process is executed, a jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the big win start effect is being performed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234A for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effects (jackpot start effect, round effect, and jackpot end effect) It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the big winning start effect in the third pattern display device 81 is finished, so that the first round is performed. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the command for the number of rounds for display is received, there will be a lot of time between the end of the jackpot start effect and the start of the round effect. , and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped, or feel a sense of discomfort.

In addition, since the display jackpot end command for instructing the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third pattern display device 81 are finished, the display jackpot end command is transmitted. If the image data required for the jackpot end performance is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the end command, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round performance to the start of the jackpot end performance. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the command for starting the big win for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the end effect of the big win is started from there, and the fluctuation display of the big win on the third pattern display device 81 ends. Control is performed so that the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is completed by the end of the game. As a result, when the big win start effect is finished in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be started in the third pattern display device 81 immediately. In addition, when the round effect is completely completed in the third pattern display device 81, the big win end effect can be started immediately in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped or not. It never makes you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display is determined to be the stop type of the jackpot, the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot end effect is started from there. , the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the big win start effect is completed before the big win variation effect is completed. As a result, when the variation performance for the big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the big win start performance can be started immediately in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is asked if the operation has stopped. It never makes me feel uneasy or uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the hit-related commands (S3903), and displayed If there is a round number command for use (S3903: YES), the round number command process is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

Details of the round number command processing (S3904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 293(B). FIG. 293B is a flow chart showing the round number command process. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233D (S3931). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S3932).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3933), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3935), the round number command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot end command in the hit-related commands (S3905), and displayed If there is a jackpot end command (S3905: YES), the jackpot end command process is executed (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

Here, with reference to FIG. 294(A), the details of the jackpot end command process (S3906) will be described. FIG. 294(A) is a flow chart showing a jackpot end command process. In this jackpot end command process, a process corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the jackpot end command process, first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the jackpot end command for display is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B. and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3941). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S3942). It should be noted that the jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be made distinguishable. Specifically, the data table determination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set by the processing of S3941 is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other jackpot end display data table is turned off. As a result, by referring to the data table discrimination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D in processing such as display setting processing corresponds to which jackpot end effect display mode. can be easily determined.

Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3941, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3943), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3945), the jackpot end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: NO), then, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command in the hit-related commands (S3907), If there is a small hit start command for display (S3907: YES), small hit start command processing is executed (S3908), and then the process proceeds to S3909.

Here, with reference to FIG. 294(B), the details of the small winning start command process (S3908) will be described. FIG. 294(B) is a flow chart showing small winning start command processing. This small winning start command process executes the processing corresponding to the display small winning start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the small winning start command process, first, the small winning start display data table corresponding to the received small winning start command for display is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3951). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit start display data table set in S3951 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (S3952).

Then, based on the small winning start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3953), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3955), the small hit start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this small hit start command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the process of S3954, the small hit start display set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of S3951 From the data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified. From the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233E, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted, and the sprite image data required in the set small winning start display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236A.

In addition, when this small hit start command processing is executed, the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the small win end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the small win start effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234A for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, small win effects (small win start effect, round effect, small win effect) It takes a lot of time to transfer the image data used for the ending effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

Since the display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the small winning start effect in the third pattern display device 81 is finished, the first round is performed. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command indicating There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur in the game, and that the player will feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel a sense of incongruity.

In addition, since the display small winning end command for instructing the start of the small winning end effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third pattern display device 81 are completed, it is displayed. If the image data necessary for the small winning end performance is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the small winning end command is received, the small winning ending performance is started after the round performance is completed. There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur in the game, and that the player will feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the small winning start command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small winning end effect is started from there, and the small winning fluctuation display is performed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled so that the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the small win end effect is completed by the time the is completed. As a result, when the small win start performance is finished in the third pattern display device 81, the round performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round performance in the third pattern display device 81 is all finished. In such a case, the third pattern display device 81 can immediately start the small winning end effect, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the operation is stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display is determined to be the stop type of the jackpot, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit end effect is started from there. Then, the transfer of the image data used in the small win start effect is completed by the time the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect of the big win. As a result, when the small winning variation performance is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the small winning start performance can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not stop the operation. There is no such thing as anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3907, if it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S3907: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a small winning end command for display in the winning related commands (S3909) , If there is a small hit end command for display (S3909: YES), small hit end command processing is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to S3911.

Here, with reference to FIG. 295(A), the details of the small winning end command process (S3910) will be described. FIG. 295(A) is a flow chart showing a small winning end command process. This small hit end command process executes the process corresponding to the small hit end command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the small winning end command process, first, a small winning ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small winning ending production indicated by the small winning ending command for display is determined, and the determined small winning ending display data table is converted to the data table. It reads from the storage area 233B and sets it in the display data table buffer 233D (S3961). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S3962). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each small winning end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small winning end effect, the data table discrimination corresponding to the small winning end display data table set by the processing of S3961 The flag is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other small winning end display data table is set to off. In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, the small winning end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D corresponds to the display mode of which small winning ending effect. You can easily determine what it is.

Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3961, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3963), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3965), the small hit end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3909, if it is determined that there is no small winning end command for display (S3909: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a V entrance passing command for display in the winning related commands (S3911). If there is a V entrance passage command for display (S3911: YES), V entrance passage command processing is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

Details of the V entrance passage command process (S3912) will now be described with reference to FIG. 295(B). FIG. 295B is a flow chart showing V entrance passage command processing. This V entrance passage command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display V entrance passage command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the V entrance passage command processing, first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is stored in the data table. It reads from the storage area 233B and sets it in the display data table buffer 233D (S3971). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S3972). It should be noted that the display mode of the V-entrance passage performance may be made distinguishable. Specifically, a data table determination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, the data table determination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the processing of S3971 is turned on, and other V entrance passage display data tables are turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table is set to off. As a result, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the processing of S2703, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D in the processing such as the display setting processing is used for which V entrance passage end rendering. It is possible to easily judge whether it corresponds to the display mode of .

Next, based on the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3971, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3973), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3975), the V entrance passage command is terminated, and the process returns to the winning-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S3911: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command in the hit-related commands (S3913), If there is a V effect command for display (S3913: YES), V effect command processing is executed (S3914), and then the hit-related command processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 296, the details of the V effect command process (S3914) will be described. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing. In this V effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the V effect command processing, first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B. , is set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3981). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S3982).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3981, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3983), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3985), the V effect command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S3412: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display chance command (S3414), and if there is a display chance command (S3414) : YES), execute the second chance command process (S3415), and return to the process of S3401.

Details of the second chance command process (S3415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 291(C). FIG. 291(C) is a flowchart showing second chance command processing. This chance command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display chance command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the chance eye command processing, first, the chance eye display data table corresponding to the display mode of the chance eye indicated by the display chance eye command is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read from the data table storage area 233B. , is set in the display data table buffer 233D (S3851). Next, by writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E, the contents are cleared (S3852).

Next, based on the chance eye display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of S3851, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233H (S3853), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3855), the second chance command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3414, if it is determined that there is no second chance command (S3414: NO), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3416), and the process returns to S3401.

In the process of S3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: YES ), and the processing of S3402 to S3416 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3401 to S3416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary to display a power-on image (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command, are extracted from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 290 (A)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 290 (B)), which are the processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290A) executed in this case, in the process of S3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on varying image area 235B of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3502, the process of writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

<A2 Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299. FIG. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region) compared to the above-described A1 embodiment. is different in that the configuration of Specifically, a distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and among the game balls flowing down the right-handed area, the game balls that flowed down the first flow path B701A and flowed into the distribution device B700 are distributed to two flow paths ( It has a configuration for distributing to the second flow path B701B and the third flow path B701C).

Next, the distribution device B700 provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 of the present A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299. FIG.

FIG. 298 is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged right-handed area of the game board 13. FIG. A ball that is shot to the right-handed area and flows down the first flow path B701A passes through the distribution device B700 and is distributed to the second flow path B701B or the third flow path B701C. The detailed configuration of this sorting device B700 will be described later with reference to FIG. It is configured to be distributed at a ratio of 1. By configuring in this way, it is necessary to shoot a plurality of game balls in order to surely enter the game balls into the V ball entrance 600A during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. , it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot singly, and to improve the operation of the game. In addition, since at least one ball out of four balls that flowed into the sorting device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701C, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously shot, , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V ball entrance 600A during the period in which the V winning door 600 is open.

The second flow path B701B is configured so that the falling ball flows down to an area that can pass through the through gate 67, and the third flow path B701C allows the falling ball to enter the V ball entrance 600A. When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the second flow path B701B passes through the open V winning door 600 and enters the V ball entrance 600A. To flow into (ball). On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, the through gate 67 is configured to flow down to a passable area.

In this embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701C is always entered into the V ball entrance 600A. For example, a distributing member (nail, distributing device, etc.) for distributing the flowing direction of the ball is provided between the outlet of the third flow path B701C and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 is open, only a portion of the ball flowing out of the third flow path B701C may enter the V ball inlet 600A.

By configuring in this way, among game balls distributed regularly (at a ratio of 3:1) by the distribution device B700, game balls flowing into the V ball entrance 600A are generated irregularly. Therefore, in order to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600A while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be continuously shot more willingly.

Next, the structure of the distribution device B700 for distributing incoming balls to two channels will be described with reference to FIGS. 299(A) to (D). Figures 299 (A) and (B) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of the sorting device B700, and Figures 114 (C) and (D) show the spherical flow downward and sorting FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship with the device B700;

As shown in FIG. 299(A), the sorting device B700 is a rotating body configured to be rotatable around the axis, and in four directions of the rotating body (four directions at intervals of 90 degrees) A blade member (first blade member B700A, second blade member B700B) that can come into contact with the ball is provided. The first blade member B700A is configured in a flat shape so that the balls that have flowed down to the sorting device B700 flow down to the third flow path B701C (flow down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the sorting device B700) The second blade member B700B is arranged so that the balls that have flowed down to the sorting device 700 flow down to the second flow path B701B (so that they flow down directly below the rotating body of the sorting device B700) It is configured in the shape of a flat plate.

In this embodiment, as the sorting device B700, a rotating body having one first blade member B700A and three second blade members B700B is used. The number of balls distributed to the path B701C is configured to have a ratio of 3:1. Further, a metal piece B700C is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting device B700, and a detection sensor (not shown) can determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating. As a result, the act of illegally remodeling the sorting device B700 and causing the balls that have flowed into the channel unit B720 to flow down only to one of the channels (second channel B701B or third channel B701C) is executed. can be easily determined.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 299(C) and (D), the arrangement relationship between the first channel B701A and the sorting device B700 will be described. FIG. 299(C) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the second blade member B700B is positioned within the flow path. In this state, when a ball flows down the first flow path B701A, the ball contacts the second blade member B700B and is distributed to the third flow path B701C. Then, the second blade member B700B in contact with the ball rotates 90 degrees (rotates downward 90 degrees) along the flowing direction of the ball (downward direction in FIG. 299(C)), and the first blade member B700A moves to the flow path. will be located inside.

When two balls pass through the sorting device B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299(C), the state shown in FIG. do.

In this way, by bringing the balls flowing down the sorting device B700 into contact with the blade members provided on the rotating body, the flowing direction of the balls is changed and the rotating body is rotated. Since the rotating body rotates every time the ball passes through the ball, the blade member that can come into contact with the ball can be changed, so that the ball can be distributed reliably.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and the flow path (third flow path 701C) that allows the ball to enter the V-ball opening 600A and the V-ball opening 600A Since it has a configuration in which game balls are distributed to the flow path (second flow path 701B) where it is impossible (difficult) to enter the ball, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, the V ball entrance Since it is necessary to shoot a plurality of game balls in order to reliably enter the game ball into 600A, the game in which the game ball is shot singly can be suppressed, and the operation of the game can be improved. .

In addition, since at least one ball out of four balls that flowed into the sorting device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701C, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously shot, , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot be entered into the V ball entrance 600A during the period in which the V winning door 600 is open.

As described above, in the A2 embodiment described above, the configuration having the sorting device B700 is used to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot single-shot, but other configurations may be used. A delay means is provided in the right-handed area to make the period during which the game ball flows irregularly so that the period from when the ball is shot until it reaches the V ball entrance 600A is irregular, and the game ball is shot. A configuration may be used in which a game in which a game ball is shot singly is suppressed by making it difficult to comprehend the period from when it reaches the V ball entrance 600A, or when a plurality of game balls are continuously shot. In order to prevent the game ball from reaching the V ball entrance 600A unless the game ball is flowed down, a retention means for retaining the game ball for a predetermined period is provided in the right-handed area, and when the game ball is retained in the retention means Alternatively, the subsequent game ball may collide with the stagnant game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600A.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the sorting device B700 is configured to sort one out of four balls to the third flow path 701, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other ratios may be used. The sorting device B700 may be composed of a windmill or the like, and may be configured to distribute at random ratios.

<A3 embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300-301. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A3 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region) compared to the above-described A1 embodiment. The difference is that the configuration of Specifically, it is different in that a croon member 1700 for delaying the downflow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right hitting area, but the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this embodiment, by providing the croon member 1700, by flowing down the inside of the croon member 1700 as the path of the game ball flowing down the right hitting area, the flow of the game ball is delayed to the V winning door 600 and a normal route that flows down to the V winning door 600 by flowing down the outside (right side) of the crew member 1700 .

With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops shooting the game ball.

Here, for example, when the player determines the type of small win and a small win of a small win type disadvantageous to the player occurs, it is illegal to refrain from shooting the game ball so as not to flow down to the V winning door 600. Gaming is possible. In this case, the loss of the game parlor is increased because the V prize is not generated by the small winning game which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, with the above-described configuration, even if the player stops shooting the game ball after judging the type of the small hit, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crew member 1700 (delay path) is placed in the V winning door 600 Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a V winning due to a small winning game disadvantageous to the player does not occur.

Also, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to reliably enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600A during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, enter the game ball even if it flows down the delay path), It is necessary to launch game balls before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

Referring now to FIG. 301, details of the croon member 1700 will be described. The croon member 1700 is configured in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion 1710A into which a game ball flowing down the right-handed hitting area enters. This ball entry portion 1710A is an opening that is slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, the diameter is 12MM).

In the interior of the croon member 1700, a spiral flow path 1710D is formed in which the game ball entering the ball entry portion 1710A spirally flows down along the inner wall of the croon member 1700. At the end of the spiral flow path 1710D is formed with a bottom surface portion 1710C gently sloping toward the center in a mortar shape. The spiral flow path 1710D is configured so that a game ball entering the ball-entering portion 1710A spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom portion 1710C to the outer end portion of the bottom portion 1710C. there is The bottom portion 1710C has the same shape as the bottom surface of a known krunn, and guides the game ball gradually toward the center portion while circularly moving the game ball along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom portion 1710C, a ball outlet 1710B slightly larger than one game ball (diameter 12MM in this embodiment) protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 1710B, a spiral flow path is formed by a flow path wall protruding 0.5MM, and the game ball rotates spirally inside the ball outlet 1710B to the outside of the ball outlet 1710B. configured to be ejected.

In the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 1710D is formed inside the croon member 1710, but this is not limiting, and the spiral flow path 1710D may not be provided. may be configured only by the spiral flow path 1710D without forming the . Alternatively, instead of the spiral flow path 1710D, a deceleration section may be formed which is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball. As long as it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be selected as appropriate.

As a result, the game ball entered into the entering ball portion 1710A of the croon member 1700 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the croon member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710D and is guided to the bottom portion 1710C. The game ball guided to the bottom portion 1710C is gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710B while making a circular motion on the bottom portion 1710C from the outer peripheral side to the center. In addition, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710B is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710B protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. while being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710B. With this configuration, it takes about 6 seconds for a game ball entering the ball entering portion 1710A of the crew member 1700 to be ejected from the ball exit 1710B.

Here, in the present embodiment, the time from when the small winning type is displayed to when the V winning door 600 is opened is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if you refrain from launching a new game ball after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball flowing down inside the croon member 1700 is delayed and flows down to the V prize door 600. - 特許庁As a result, the player refrains from shooting the game ball after judging the type of the small winning, and can prevent the fraudulent game in which the V winning due to the small winning game disadvantageous to the player is not generated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that a lot of variation times shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crew member 1700 (delay path) are selected. there is As a result, the game ball entered into the ball entry part 1710A of the crew member 1700 before (or during the variation performance) the small winning variation performance ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. With timing, it becomes easier to discharge from the ball outlet 1710B. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to control the entry of game balls into the V ball entrance 600A, thereby suppressing fraudulent games, and making it easier for game balls to enter the V ball entrance 600A in normal games. , can improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that, of course, it may be configured such that it is difficult to select a variation time shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) in which the game ball passes through the crew member 1700 (delay path).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to select a plurality of variation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) as the variation time of the small hit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened and enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600A. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V ball opening 600A greatly changes depending on whether the game ball flowing down the right-handed area flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot singly, and to improve the operation of the game.

In addition, the variation time of the small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned, it may be only a variation time shorter than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the croon member 1700 (or the same), or only a long variation time Naturally good.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing two routes, the delay route and the normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball reaches the V ball entrance 600A. Of course, three or more paths may be provided.

As described above, in the A3 embodiment, the crew member 1700 is provided on the upper part of the V winning door 600 (V ball entrance 600A), so that the game ball flowing down the right-handed area As a route to enter the ball, a delay route and a normal route with different flow times are provided.

With this delay path, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops shooting the game ball. That is, even if the player stops shooting the game ball after judging the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crew member 1700 (delay path) enters the V ball entrance 600A. become. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games in which the player discriminates the type of the small win and does not allow the game ball to enter the V ball opening 600A during the small win game that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to reliably enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600A during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, enter the game ball even if it flows down the delay path), It is necessary to launch game balls before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the crew member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time from when the small win type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened. are doing. Therefore, even if the launch of new game balls is stopped after the small hit type is displayed, the game balls flowing down inside the croon member 1700 are delayed and flow down to the V winning door 600. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent game in which the game player stops shooting the game ball after judging the type of the small win and does not generate a V winning due to the small win game disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that a lot of variation times shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crew member 1700 (delay path) are selected. there is As a result, the game ball entered into the ball entry part 1710A of the crew member 1700 before (or during the variation performance) the small winning variation performance ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. With timing, it becomes easier to discharge from the ball outlet 1710B. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to control the entry of game balls into the V ball entrance 600A, thereby suppressing fraudulent games, and making it easier for game balls to enter the V ball entrance 600A in normal games. , the interest of the player can be improved.

<A4 embodiment>
Next, the A4 embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. FIG. In the A4 embodiment, in contrast to the A1 embodiment, a distribution device 720 for distributing game balls is arranged in the right channel of the variable display unit 80 so that the balls flowing down the right channel are alternately distributed. After the fluctuation of the special symbols determined to be a small win or a big win is stopped and displayed in one of the distributed passages, a gate that starts the small win or big win game is arranged, and the ball is placed in the right channel. The difference is that the ball can enter the V winning device 620 at the start of a small win or a big win by continuing to shoot. Since other configurations are the same, the other configurations are omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. FIG. In this A4 embodiment, the sorting device 720 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600 . The sorting device 720 has a ball entrance 720C at the top, through which a ball flowing down the right channel can enter, with a width that allows one game ball to pass through. When it flows down, it is configured to distribute the balls that turn left and right and alternately flow down to the left flow path 720D and the right flow path 720E. At the lower end of the right channel 720E is arranged a start gate 720A, which is composed of a photosensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball. By passing the ball through the start gate 720A, the start of the small winning game or the big winning game is set. Thus, in the second embodiment, even when the variation of the special symbol for which the small hit or the big hit has been determined stops, the ball moves through the start gate 720A without shifting to the small hit game or the big hit game. Execution of the small winning game or the big winning game is on standby until it passes.

The distribution rotation member 720B receives the entering game ball in the left housing portion or the right housing portion arranged on the left and right. When the game ball is received by the left storage portion, the weight of the game ball causes the distribution rotating member 720B to rotate counterclockwise in a front view to guide the game ball to the left channel 720D. Here, each of the distribution rotation members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet is provided on the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion.

On the base body provided on the back side of the sorting device 720, the magnet of the sorting rotation member 720B is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the distribution rotation member 720B and the base-side magnet are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution rotation member 720B.

The magnet is also a bar-shaped magnet, similar to the base-side magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotation member 720B so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet. When the distribution rotation member 720B rotates and the boundary wall between the left housing part and the right housing part is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage opening), the base This is the position where the side magnets and the magnets of the distribution rotation member are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution rotation member faces directly upward. , and is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet is on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet repels the base-side magnet, so that the distribution rotation member 720B moves to either the left or the right. It rotates so that either the left housing part or the right housing part faces the side of receiving game balls entering the distribution device 720 (the upper side of the gaming machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring as a result of a game ball entering the game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet and the base side magnet, for example, the left housing part receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after guiding the game ball to the left flow path 720D, it is distributed and rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 720B from rotating to the right (the left accommodating portion faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the left flow path 720D, the right housing portion faces upward, and the game ball entered into the sorting device 720 is received by the right housing portion, and the game ball is received by the right housing portion. The distribution rotation member 720B rotates about 180 degrees to the right due to the weight of , and guides the game ball to the right flow path 720E. In this way, the distribution rotation member 720B can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution device 720 to the left flow path 720D and the right flow path 720E. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute and guide the game balls to the left channel 720D and the right channel 720E.

After being distributed to the right flow path 720E by the distribution rotation member 720B, the ball passing through the ball entrance 720C is moved to the left flow path 720D by the rotation of the distribution rotation member 720B to the left. distributed. When distributed to the left flow path 720D, it is guided to a flow path that can enter the V-ball opening 600A. When the ball passes through the start gate 720A, a small win or big win game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to the open state, so the ball distributed to the left flow path after that goes to the V ball entrance 600A. And it becomes possible to enter the ball. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds after 1 second from the start timing of the big win game in the small win or big win B (timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720A). Here, 100 balls are fired by the launcher at the same interval per minute, so one shot is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the balls are continuously shot to the right area, after passing through the start gate 720A, the game balls are discharged from the left flow path 720D about 0.6 seconds later (distribution device The flow paths are formed so that the time for the spheres to flow down the left flow path 720D and the right flow path 720E of 720 is the same).

Since the flow time from the lower end of the left flow path 720D to the V ball entrance 600A is about 0.1 second, the ball will flow down before the V winning door 600 is opened. , the ball ejected from the left channel 720D (1.2 seconds after being ejected from the left channel 720D first) can win the V ball entrance 600A because the V winning door 600 is open. Become. Also, next, even the ball discharged from the left flow path 720D can win the V ball entrance 600A.

In this way, after the ball is passed through the start gate 720A, the shooting of the ball is stopped, the small winning type is confirmed by the first pattern display device 37, and the big winning type with a small number of times of time saving is selected. Even if an attempt is made to avoid winning the V ball opening 624 in , the number of balls that can be awarded is limited to two even if they are shot continuously, and even if they are shot after confirmation, they are not allowed to enter the V ball opening 600A. It is difficult.

In the present embodiment, a game ball that has passed through the left channel 720D can enter the V ball entrance 600A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that game balls that do not enter the sorting device 720 among the game balls flowing down the right channel can enter.

Further, although the distribution device 720 in the present embodiment is configured to alternately distribute incoming game balls, the distribution rotation member 720B may be constituted by a windmill or the like so as to randomly distribute left and right balls. .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the A4th embodiment>
The A4 embodiment differs from the A1 embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 307(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this A4 control differs from the A1 embodiment in that a condition device flag 203AC is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Condition device flag AC is a flag indicating that start gate 720A has been passed. This is a flag for determining whether or not after passing through the start gate 720A by referring to when the power is restored in the event of a power failure or the like. It is set to OFF based on the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306 and 308 to 309, description will be given of the mode of presentation displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined as a small win or a big win B in this embodiment.

FIG. 308(A) is a timing chart showing the contents controlled by the main controller 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small winning game and the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81. is.

When the success/failure determination is executed from the state where the special symbols are stopped and displayed and a small hit is determined, the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol) is started by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. be done. At the start of the variation, characters "Roulette Chance Start" are displayed as shown in FIG. 304(A). After 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 304(B), the third pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the roulette display is started. An arrow pattern is displayed on the left side of the roulette display, and the roulette pattern stopped at the arrow position indicates the result of winning/failure determination (big win, miss, small win) and a "V" symbol indicating that the player has won a prize in the V winning slot 624. In the V winning slot 624, a "BIG" symbol indicating that a jackpot game has started, and a "skull" symbol indicating a failure are arranged. After that, during the fluctuation time of the special symbols, the roulette display is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 305(A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 305(B), when the variation period has elapsed and the variation of the third symbol has stopped, the roulette display is scrolled (rotated display) in slow motion, and a right-handed informing symbol is displayed on the upper left. displayed to inform the player that it is time to hit right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306(A), at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning hole 624, the "V" pattern of the roulette display is stopped and displayed at the position corresponding to the arrow pattern. In addition, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the winning judgment result is out at the timing when the V valid period has passed, the "skull" pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 306 (B). It is stopped and displayed at a position where the position matches the arrow pattern. Also, although not shown, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit (jackpot B), the position of the "BIG" symbol stops at the position corresponding to the arrow symbol. It is informed that the game displayed and actually being executed is a jackpot game.

By constructing in this way, whether the result of winning/failure determination is a big win or a small win is constituted by a series of effects until the period in which the ball can be entered into the V winning opening 624 passes, and the period up to the V winning. The interest of the game can be improved by directing using .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, the pachinko machine 10 in the A4th embodiment will be described. In the A1 embodiment, after the special symbol fluctuation period has passed, if the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot game is started after 0.1 seconds. It is different in that a jackpot game is started by passing. In addition, the description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

The special symbol variation process 2 (S140) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), the processes from S217 to S220 are deleted from the special symbol variation process (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment, and the condition device determination process (S250) is added. The difference is that Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device determination process (S250) in the A4th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the contents of this condition device determination process (S250). In the condition device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 720A (S251). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate 720A (S251: YES), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The jackpot start flag 203J, jackpot middle flag 203K, and condition device flag 203AC are set to ON (S254). The time-saving counter 203G is set to 0 (S255), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720A (S251: NO), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720A, the jackpot game can be started according to the intention of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the start of the big winning game is started by passing the starting gate 720A, but the small winning game may also be started by passing the starting gate 720A. . By configuring in this way, the game ball that has passed through the start gate 720A can be easily entered into the V ball entrance 600A, and the specific small winning game type is avoided so that the game ball does not enter the game ball. Can be difficult to fire.

Also, in the present embodiment, the starting gate 720A is provided in the left channel 720E, but it is not limited to this and may be arranged in the right channel 720D. In the case of such a configuration, the period from when the game ball passes through the start gate 720A until the V winning door 600 is in an open state can be entered from the passage of the start gate 720A to the V ball entrance 600A. It may be configured to be a period of By configuring in this way, in the small winning game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600A, it is possible to suppress the game method of avoiding the winning of the game ball in a specific small winning type.

<A5 embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 314, the present A5 embodiment and its modification will be described. In the A1th embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in this embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of the big win B. They are different in that respect.

In FIG. 312(A), the jackpot B in the present A5 embodiment is executed, the game ball enters the V ball entrance 600A, and the game ball is guided to the rotation distribution member 621 by the movable guide member 622. It is the figure which showed the case where it is. At the timing when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the rotation distribution member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (the position that guides the game ball to the V winning opening 624).

Also, FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the present A5 embodiment. The difference is that the processing of S1281 to S1282 is added to the specific jackpot control processing (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S1203, the processing of S1281 is executed after the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether it is time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600) (S1281). If it is determined that it is time to turn off the V prize solenoid (S1281: YES), data for stopping the V sorting motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the win scenario A (S1282). After that, the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to S1204.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the big win is B, the rotating distribution member is configured to stop at the central position in accordance with the V winning timing, so the game was thought to be a small winning game. It is possible to perform a fresh production for the person. Furthermore, since the jackpot B can always be won to the V winning opening 624, it can be made to think that the 2nd round has started by winning the V winning opening 624.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 312(B), a modification of the A5 embodiment will be described. In the A5th embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of the jackpot B, but this is not limiting. The fixed flow path 660 newly protrudes and the movable guide member 622 releases the retention 2 solenoid in the middle position, the game ball is dropped on the movable guide member 622, and the fixed flow path 660 moves to the V winning opening 624. The difference is that it is configured to guide the sphere. The fixed flow path 660 is configured to be protruded by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 624 with a high probability or 100%.

FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modified example of the A5 embodiment. The difference is that the process of S1283 is added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1207, when the winning scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the fixed flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable guide member 622. It is changed to a position where it is possible to receive the game ball to be played on the upper surface (S1283). After that, the process of S1209 is executed. Although not shown, the movable guide member 622 is also set so that the residence 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

As a result, in the case of a big win B, it is possible to enter the V winning port 624 via a different guideway than in the case of a small win. As a result, the winning control to the V winning opening can be switched between the case of the small win and the case of the big win B, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The wording "at the start of the jackpot (jackpot game) (execution time)" used when describing each control example and each embodiment described above is that the jackpot lottery with special symbols is won and the jackpot game is started. It is used as a concept that indicates the timing when the is confirmed, and specifically, the combination of special symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbols is a big hit. It is a concept that includes the timing, the timing at which the jackpot opening period is started, the timing at which the jackpot round game is started, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (jackpot game)" used in describing each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. Specifically, is a concept that includes the timing at which the final round of the big win ends, the timing at which the ending period for the big win ends, the timing at which the first lottery for special symbols is performed after the end of the big win, and the like.

For each term used in such a concept, if a specific timing is not specified in each control example and each embodiment described above, one of the above timings is appropriately adopted. can be

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in each control example and each embodiment described above may be combined as appropriate and implemented. A small winning lottery means for executing the small winning lottery used in the above-described third control example may be provided for the pachinko machine 10 having the small winning lottery.

In addition, the falling lottery means used in the above-described second control example executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the special symbol jackpot probability from a high probability state to a low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the content set for the element of, for example, the probability of hitting the normal pattern (second pattern) is shifted (falled) from a high probability state to a low probability state. A lottery for the purpose or a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state may be executed.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that the player can operate. Lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player in the forward and backward direction, touch sensor type operation means that detects the player's contact (or proximity), and photographing results of the photographing means that photographs the movement of the player. A camera-type operating means or the like may be provided for determining the . Also, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each control example described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more of the various effects described in the above control examples , the player may select an effect to be actually executed from two or more executable effects.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the same elements as those in each control example and each embodiment described above will be repeatedly described for convenience of description. In the gaming machine of the fifth control example, as in the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 226), as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous, a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot. The opportunity (first opportunity) to execute the jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) by winning, and the special pattern lottery wins the small hit, and the game ball is in a specific area (during the small win game (2nd opportunity ) and two opportunities.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game at various opportunities, so that a game with improved playability can be provided. Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to make it easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). And, during the time saving state which is a game state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed. Thereby, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the big win game than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that the above-mentioned second opportunity can be easily established. . Therefore, since the time saving state can be set as a game state advantageous to the player, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth control example, in the state where the normal state is set, it is configured to be able to temporarily appear the period during which the lottery of the special figure 2 is likely to be executed. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 315, but when a specific win (long open win) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640A is held for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to set a period in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special figure 2 lottery. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed even for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, so the game can be played without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 5 times during the time saving state, or the small winning game end), and the second condition (hard to end) that is easier to continue the time saving state than the first condition times execution, or the end of the small winning game), can be set. Then, when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state, the time is reduced. The setting ratio of the state continuation condition (termination condition) is made different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, than after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state , It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that makes it easy for the time saving state to continue (it is difficult to end) is likely to be set.

By constructing in this way, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the fifth control example, as described above, the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state than the case where the game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. is set, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is easy to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, even when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, up to four pieces of winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be able to be held and stored, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to inform the player of the result of prefetching of the winning prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored using the variable performance. In other words, as a result of the variable production performed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state It is configured to inform the result of the lottery for the prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored at the time of shift). By configuring in this way, when the production result of the variable production is a production result indicating that a win (for example, a small win) has been won, whether the small win of this time has been won in a time-saving state or in a normal state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he or she has won the lottery.

Further, as described above, in the fifth control example, when the small winning is won in the time saving state and when the small winning is won in the normal state, the big winning game (V big winning game ) is set after the end of the time saving state is different, and specifically, if you win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state, the special figure in the time saving state 2 It is configured to facilitate setting of a continuation condition (termination condition) to facilitate the continuation of the time-saving state (difficult to end) than in the case of winning a small prize in the lottery, and furthermore, after shifting to the normal state. When the look-ahead result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the determination result that the small hit that the time saving state is likely to continue is won, the variation performance showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state , It is configured to notify the prefetch result (the prefetch result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state).

By configuring in this way, when it is notified that a small win has been won by the variable performance executed during the time saving state, the ratio of the small win that is won is a small win that makes it easy to continue the time saving state. can be enhanced. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, pachinko machine 10), in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio of setting the game state (for example, time saving state and probability variable state) advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends By setting the (so-called continuation rate) low (for example, 65% or less), the gambling aspect of the game may be suppressed. In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a win (for example, a big win or a small win) is won in a state in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make players feel expectations for the winning notification effect during the advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, in the winning notification effect (variation effect) executed during the advantageous game state (time saving state), the winning (small win) during the advantageous game state (time saving state) In addition to the notification of, in the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 lottery that is executed after the transition from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), if you win a small hit that is likely to continue the time saving state It is configured to notify the user when the determination is made. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning rate of small wins that tend to continue the time-saving state when the winning notification performance is executed during the advantageous game state (time-saving state), and the player's expectation for the winning notification performance during the advantageous game state. can heighten your senses.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), or the special figure 2 variation (residual feature that exists at the time of normal state transition) executed after the end of the time saving state (after normal state transition) It is configured to execute a variation performance that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figures 2 variation corresponding to FIG. Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth control example, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, by the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period of the time saving state, after the end of the time saving state (after normal state transition) It is configured to notify the prefetch result of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists at the time of normal state transition) executed in the normal state, and after the time saving state ends (after the normal state transition) The variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of normal state transition) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short time variation ends Until then, it is configured to display the performance result of the variable performance executed corresponding to the final variable period of the time saving state. In this way, the final variation of the time saving state, special figure 2 variation that is executed after the time saving state (after the normal state transition) (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists during normal state transition) and By executing a series of productions using the period during which is executed, and displaying the production results of the series of productions across multiple fluctuations, this series of productions corresponds to which special figure fluctuation It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is being notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 315 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 227) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described A1 embodiment. A game area (left game area) formed on the left side is also provided with a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 that triggers a lottery of normal symbols (second symbol), and is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. V winning opening 600A, V winning door 600, and V winning opening 600A provided in the game area (right game area), and the point that the flow path for the ball that entered the V winning opening 600A is deleted, The difference is that the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 650, which are opened when a jackpot or small win is won, are arranged downstream of the right game area. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the left side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described A1 embodiment. As described above, in the fifth control example, the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass is formed in the midstream portion of the left game area (left side of the variable display unit 80). As a result, the lottery for normal symbols (normal symbols) is executed even while the player is playing a game (left-handed game) in which the ball flows down to the left game area. Although the detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, while the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, if you win a specific general pattern, It is configured so that a normal game per game that can easily enter the ball into the second winning hole 640 is executed.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is used without shifting the game state to the time saving state by configuring to be able to provide a period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal state. It is possible to provide a player with a game property, that is, a game property in which a big win game is executed based on winning a small win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing the game in the normal state for a long time from getting bored with the game without experiencing the game property using the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning hole 64, and the ball to the through gate 67. A game aiming for a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be executed simultaneously based on the passage of the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, as in the above-described A1 embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute (the second winning prize that triggers the special figure 2 lottery (because it becomes easier for the ball to enter the opening 640), a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right game area where the second winning opening 640 is arranged is performed.

In this fifth control example, a through gate 67, a second prize winning port 640 (electric role 640A), a variable prize winning device 65, and a V prize winning device 650 are arranged in the right game area, and a lottery of normal symbols (normal patterns) is provided. , a game for drawing a lottery for the second special pattern (special figure 2), and a game during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) can be executed in a right-handed game. there is This eliminates the need for the player to change the shooting direction of the ball (direction of the left game area, direction of the right game area) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small winning game and the big winning game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complicated changes in the shooting direction of the ball and allow the player to play the game comfortably. In addition, in the fifth control example, when a game state (time-saving state, small win game state, big win game state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set as the game state is set. In addition, since it is configured so as to play a right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small winning game is executed, and is variable between an open state in which a ball can enter the V winning port 650A and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. It has a winning door 650B. This V winning door 650B is configured so that a ball passage is formed on the upper surface thereof when it is positioned in the closed state, and when the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball is shot in a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650B toward the variable winning device 65. - 特許庁In addition, inside the V winning opening 650A, there is a specific area (V area) not shown, and a ball that has entered the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game (including the ball handling period after the small winning game is finished). passes through a specific area (V area), a jackpot game is executed.

The configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known general technique in the industry, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As in, a plurality of flow paths through which balls can pass may be provided in the V winning device 650, and only the balls that have passed through a specific flow path may pass through a specific area (V area). A distribution member that distributes the flow direction of the balls flowing down in the V winning device 650, for example, a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or a distribution member that is preliminarily driven after the jackpot game is started. A distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule or a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a specific number of round games of a jackpot game is provided, and distributed by the distribution member It may be configured such that a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area).

Furthermore, a plurality of types of small winning games are provided to be executed when winning a small winning game. It may be configured to be able to set the small hit type to be executed and the small hit type to execute the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area). In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650B is changed according to the type of the winning small winning, and when executing a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area), the V winning opening 650A is used. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650B that makes it difficult for the ball to enter is set, or the ball is distributed to areas other than the specific area (V area) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650B may be set so that the ball reaches the sorting member at the right timing. In addition, as the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning, the small winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened instead of the V winning device 650 can be set, and the small winning game is executed. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the ball cannot physically pass through a specific area (V area) within the V winning device 650 .

The variable prize winning device 65 is a prize winning device that is operated to be opened during a jackpot game, and has a prize winning door 65B that can be changed between an open state in which a ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65A and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter. have. This prize winning door 65B is constructed so that a ball passage is formed on its upper surface when it is positioned in a closed state. is configured to flow down in the direction of the outlet 66 from the upper surface of the winning door 65B.

<Regarding the Game Features of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Control Example>
Next, referring to FIG. 316, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 316, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) and the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, High probability state of the normal design) is configured to be set.

When a left-handed game is played in the normal state and a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), a time saving state is always set after the jackpot game is finished. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state which is set when winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the normal state will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Different time-saving termination conditions are stipulated. The time-saving end condition is a condition for ending the time-saving state, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state.

When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. The jackpot type (jackpot AA) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when it reaches is set at a rate of 1%, and the time-saving end condition is The jackpot type (jackpot AB) that is established is set at a rate of 15%, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the second special pattern (special pattern 2) changes once. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if you win the special figure 1 jackpot during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but depending on the set jackpot type, the ease of continuing the time saving state (time saving end conditions) are different.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the fifth control example, since it is configured so that up to four pieces of winning information of special figure 2 can be reserved and stored, one time saving is set as a time saving end condition Even if it is, while the first special figure 2 variation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 variation stops), the time saving state is set, and the electric accessory 640A is easy to open. Since it is in the state, it is possible to make it easier to hold and store the winning prize information of the special figure 2. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition of one time saving is set, during the period when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state is executed once, the winning information of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 pending) is retained and stored By playing the game, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation up to 4 times after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. By configuring in this way, when a big win is won, a lot of special figure 2 lotteries can be executed, so that a player can easily experience a big win game via a small win.

On the other hand, when winning a special prize in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state (small hit probability 1/500), the ball passes through the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. A time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AA) is set at a rate of 10%, and the small hit type (small hit AB) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reaches 5 times is 40%. is set at a ratio of 50%, and the small hit type (small hit AC) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special 2) reaches 1 time is set at a rate of 50% It consists of

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won (when the symbol jackpot is won) and the small hit is won by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, When the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game and the big winning game is executed (when the V big winning occurs) or when the big winning game is executed at any of the occasions, the big winning game ends. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 lottery, the easiness of continuing the time saving state is varied depending on the execution trigger of the jackpot game. there is As described above, among the execution triggers of the jackpot game, in the case of an execution trigger that is likely to be established (jackpot winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends is 2.58 times. In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to materialize (small hit winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is 12.4 times.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot game execution opportunities, by associating the ease of establishment of the execution opportunity with the ease of continuation of the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that can be set after establishment, any Even if a jackpot game is executed at the execution opportunity of , the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, it is configured so that the lottery of normal symbols (normal symbols) is executed even during the execution of the left-handed game in the normal state. , It is configured to be elected per normal figure with a probability of 1/10. Then, it is configured to execute a game per normal pattern (long open per game) in which the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 1/100 when winning per normal pattern. there is In other words, a state (long opening per game) that can execute the special figure 2 lottery is set with a probability of about 1/1000 of the normal figure lottery that is executed while the normal state is set.

When the ball is entered into the second winning port 640 during the long open winning game, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game in the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In the fifth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. And if you win a jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special pattern (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (jackpots AD to AF) that satisfies the end condition is set (see FIG. 335). That is, in the normal state, among the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery with the same jackpot probability, the execution opportunity of the special figure lottery is difficult to establish (it is difficult to win the ball in the corresponding start winning opening) special figure 2 lottery. is configured to facilitate the setting of a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, when winning is won by the normal drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can be motivated to execute the special drawing 2 lottery. can.

Next, the flow of the game when winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be explained. In this control example, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (about 1/7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery (1/500). (See FIG. 334). Then, the time saving state is always set after the big winning game executed by passing the ball through the specific area (V area) during the small winning game. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reaches 5 times is 60% It is configured to be set at a ratio of In other words, in the normal state, the average number of continuations of the time saving state set via the small hit of the special figure 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and when the jackpot game is executed via the small hit of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state It becomes easy to set the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be established (easier to continue).

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although it is a low probability, it is possible to win the winning by the normal drawing lottery, and when the long opening winning game is executed (1/1000), it is better to win the jackpot in the special drawing. By making it easy to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing in the normal state is allowed to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. A game aiming at a big win or a small win in the special figure 2 lottery can be played with the winning of the figure lottery as an opportunity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 315, when a left-handed game is performed to win the ball into the first winning hole 64, the ball launched into the game area (the ball flowing down the left game area) can pass through Since the through gate 67 is arranged in the normal state, the game that performs the special figure 1 lottery and the game that performs the normal figure lottery without changing the shooting direction of the ball for the player who is playing in the normal state. can be performed in parallel.

In addition, in this control example, the more the jackpot game is executed with the opportunity that is difficult to be established, the easier it is to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. When a jackpot game is executed, it may be configured to make it easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, or a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, a special figure 1 lottery small winning ), it may be configured such that when a jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is easily set.

In addition, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small winning game (special figure 1 lottery or small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery) (In the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the end of the small winning game (corresponding to the flow indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 315). As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to a player who plays an illegal game by intentionally not allowing a ball to enter a specific area (V area) while a small winning game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be described. In this control example, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640A is easily opened, and it becomes easy to win the ball in the second winning hole 640. Therefore, a right-handed game that mainly executes the special figure 2 lottery is executed. be.

This time-saving state continues until a predetermined time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to a normal state. This time-saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won in the special lottery or the small hit type set for the small hit won. there is Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, a common time-saving end condition set as a common condition and a different condition depending on the hit type are set. A time-saving end condition is defined, and common time-saving end conditions include a first end condition that is established when a jackpot is won (at the start of a jackpot game), a second end condition that is established when a small win game ends, and a time-saving end condition. The third end condition that is established when the number of special symbol (special figure) fluctuations executed during the state (accumulation of the number of special figure 1 fluctuations and the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) reaches 99 times is set, The corresponding time-saving end conditions are short end conditions that are established when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time saving state is 1, and medium end that is established when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the winning type.

As described above, the corresponding time-saving end conditions are set based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that are mainly varied during the time-saving state, so, for example, when the time-saving state is set. Based on the reserved memory of the special figure 1 variation, even if the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, although the time saving state advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without executing the special figure 2 lottery. In addition, since it is configured so that the corresponding time reduction end condition is established based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time saving state can be easily defined, and the player It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special figure 2 lottery) to.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as the time saving end condition, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition are configured to be settable with the above-described contents, but not limited to the setting contents of this control example, For example, in the fifth control example, as the end condition for the small winning game that is set in the common time saving end condition, the end condition is when the number of times the small winning game is executed becomes a specific number (for example, 3 times) It may be constituted so as to be established, the end condition regarding the small winning game is set as the corresponding time shortening end condition, and the number of executions of the small winning game in which the ending condition related to the small winning game is established is changed according to the winning type. may be configured. In addition, in this control example, regardless of the small winning type set at the time of winning the small winning, it is configured so that the second end condition is established when the small winning game is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type is executed, the second end condition may be established. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured so that the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game ends, but not limited to this, the second end condition at the start of the small hit game (when the small hit is elected) may be configured so that

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small prize during the time saving state, so that the player is given a sense of tension as to how long the time saving state will continue. You can play games.

Returning to FIG. 316, the game flow during the time saving state will be described. If you win a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, as in the normal state, the number of variations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Any one of the jackpot types (jackpots AD to AF) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 335). That is, only common time-saving end conditions are set as time-saving end conditions.

On the other hand, if a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the jackpot game executed via the small win winning is completed, in addition to the above-mentioned common time saving end condition, according to the small win type A time saving state is set in which the corresponding time saving end condition is set. Specifically, during the time saving state, a special figure 2 lottery is won, and after the jackpot game executed via the small winning is completed, the special figure 2 changes as a corresponding time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and it is configured so that the response time reduction end condition is not set at a rate of 90% (substantially 99 times is set).

As described above, in the fifth control example, the setting ratio of the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the small win of the special figure 2 lottery is changed to the game state at the time of the small win It is different depending on the situation, and if you win a small hit in the special 2 lottery during the normal state, it is more difficult to establish the time saving end condition than if you win a small hit in the special 2 lottery during the time saving state (correspondence The time saving end condition is not set) It is configured so that the time saving state can be easily set.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time saving state, which is an advantageous game state that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the small winning is won by the special figure 2 lottery held and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state. By doing so, the time saving state advantageous to the player can be easily set, so that the game can be motivated to acquire many reserved memories of the special figure 2 until just before the time saving state ends.

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the time saving end condition is satisfied) By the fluctuation production (final fluctuation production) executed in correspondence with the In addition to the variable lottery result, it is configured to notify the prefetch result of the winning prize information of the special figure 2 that is reserved and stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery with the effect result of the final variation effect at maximum five times. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that winning (small winning, big winning) will be announced as the production result of the final variable production higher than the variable production that only informs the lottery result of one special 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the presentation with interest.

In addition, since it is configured to notify the lottery results (including prefetch results) of the special 2 lottery in the time saving state and the special 2 lottery in the normal state at once, the final variation effect will win It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state when is reported. By configuring in this way, as in this control example, when the time-saving end condition is set at a different rate according to the game state at the time of winning the small hit, the big win executed based on the small win of this time It is possible to prevent a player from easily grasping what kind of time-saving end conditions a time-saving state is set after the end of a game by a performance mode (performance timing) of a variable performance.

In addition, in this control example, configured to set a short (0.5 seconds) variation time as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the It is configured to display the effect result of the final variable effect described above as the variable effect of short-time fluctuation. As a result, even if it is configured to notify the prefetching result of the winning information of the special figure 2 that is reserved and stored in the final variation performance that is executed in correspondence with the final variation of the time saving state, the target of the prefetching result It is possible to continue to display the final variation production until the special figure 2 variation ends. Then, when the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation in the normal state) corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state ends (when the special figure 2 retention memory number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery A left-handed game aiming at execution is performed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, even if the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long open per normal drawing lottery), The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small prize than the special figure 1 lottery. Thereby, in the normal state, the player can play the game of executing the normal drawing lottery in parallel with the game of executing the special drawing 1 lottery by aiming at the first winning hole 64, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

<Regarding the flow of production in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 331, the characteristic performance contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. During the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation, if you win a long open per normal figure lottery, the general figure fluctuation production is displayed so as to interrupt the fluctuation production of the special figure 1 fluctuation. It is

Here, the normal pattern fluctuation production is, after the normal pattern per game (opening of the electric accessory 640A) period from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, the ball is won in the second winning port 640, and the winning ball is corresponded. It is executed as a part of a series performance using a period until a small win is won by the special figure 2 fluctuation and a big win game is executed based on the small win.

Here, in recent years, during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time (for example, 1.5 seconds) per normal pattern (per long open) There is one that sets the lottery contents of the normal figure lottery so that it can be won, and tries to execute a temporarily advantageous special figure lottery (for example, special figure 2 lottery) in the normal state. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an advantageous special figure lottery for a player who has been playing a game for a long time in a normal state, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in such a gaming machine, a normal pattern fluctuation effect for indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is executed before the winning game per long opening is executed for the player. A production that can provide the pleasure of predicting is executed using a part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (a display area smaller than the display area where the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is executed). There is also

However, in recent gaming machines that execute only normal figure fluctuation effects that can inform the player that the winning game will be executed per long opening, the fluctuation production of the special figure 2 lottery acquired by the winning game and the above-mentioned The special figure 2 lottery was executed by executing the privilege given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening. There is a problem that it is not possible to notify the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is impossible to enhance the performance effect of the normal pattern variation performance.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, after the normal pattern per game (opening of the electric accessory 640A) period, the ball is won in the second winning port 640, and the winning ball A series of performances is executed using a period until a small winning is won by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation and a big winning game is executed based on the small winning. Thus, by executing a series of performances, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game up to execution of the jackpot game in an easy-to-understand manner based on the result of the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, thereby enhancing the performance effect. can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-described series of effects, during the winning game per normal long open, that is, when the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time, the ball is won in the second winning port 640 In addition, the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning prize is started is greatly different depending on the fluctuation situation of the special figure 1 fluctuation occurs. Specifically, for example, when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special figure 1 variation is being executed, and if the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation is 120 seconds , The period (waiting period) from when the ball is won to the second winning hole 640 until the special figure 2 fluctuation is started is 120 seconds. If the series of effects is continuously executed in such a situation, the effect mode of the series of effects is delayed, and the player becomes bored with the effects.

To address such a problem, in the fifth control example, when the above-described waiting period is 60 seconds or more, after the series of effects are simulated to end, the series of effects are simulated again. It is configured so that the mode is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of the series of productions is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the flow of the variation effect|presentation regarding special figure fluctuation|variation performed during a normal state, and the variation effect|presentation regarding normal figure fluctuation|variation is demonstrated. Figure 317 (A) shows the flow of the effect executed when the waiting period from when the ball enters the second winning port 640 until the special figure 2 variation is started is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds) 317(B) is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more) of the waiting period from when the ball wins to the second winning hole 640 until the special figure 2 fluctuation starts It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation performed in a case.

As shown in FIG. 317 (A), the main display area DM Variation performance (special 1 performance) corresponding to special figure 1 variation is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 319 (A), the display screen of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation will be described. Figure 319 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of variation production corresponding to special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation production). As shown in FIG. 319(A), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is divided vertically into a main display area DM and a sub-display area DS. Small display areas DM1 and DM2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area DM). The small display areas DM1 and DM2 are areas where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area DM1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area DM2.

By providing the small display areas DM1 and DM2 in this way, it is possible to display the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas DM1 and DM2 (see FIG. 319). (A) is displayed with a downward arrow) to show the situation in which the special pattern is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth pattern in the small display areas DM1 and DM2 (see FIG. 322 (A) ), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but it is not limited to this, for example, using a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, a figure can be displayed. It is configured to indicate the result of lottery of the special symbols by indicating that the special symbols are changing by the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific pattern or color. You can

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 319(A), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas DM1, DM2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery situation is displayed is displayed as the main display. Although an example is shown in which the fourth pattern display area is formed on the upper right side of the area DM, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area DM. can be different.

Specifically, in the variable performance executed using the entire surface of the main display area DM, it is possible to know whether the variable performance being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When the effect mode for making it difficult is set, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas DM1, DM2) so as to make it difficult for the player to see. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol, or displaying only one display area, the player can see the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured so that the type of the special symbol being executed cannot be easily discriminated only by it. By configuring in this way, the type of the special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable performance performed in the main display area DM is lowered. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as described above, although it is notified that the special figure is fluctuating by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period during which the special symbol (special figure) is fluctuating, the fluctuating special figure When it is configured to be variably displayed in a display mode in which the type is difficult to distinguish, the result of the corresponding special figure variation (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the end of the variation display. For example, when a red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol corresponding to Special Figure 1 (Special 1 4th In the symbol), when the blue stop display mode is displayed, it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special figure 2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variable effect is executed, thereby reducing the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display unit 80. should be configured to run

Furthermore, a small display area DM1A is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area DM1, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area DM2A is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area DM2, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 319 (A) to be described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area DM1A, DM1B), the number of reserved balls of each special figure in a display mode using numbers Although it is configured to display, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow identification of the number of retained balls in the acquisition diagram.

A small display area DM4 is formed in the upper left of the main display area DM when viewed from the front (in the upper left direction from the center of the main display area DM). In this small display area DM4, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 320(B)).

In the fifth control example, the small display area DM4 is used as the guidance display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area DM4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guide display area (small display area DM4), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during the time-saving state, during the jackpot game, and during the small win game, and the display mode of ``left-handed'' is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is finished. ing. Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 319(A), the description is continued. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned small display areas DM1A and DM2A are the result of pre-discrimination of the winning information reserved and stored in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol (prefetch result ) is displayed in a display mode that allows a suggestion notification to the player. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbols reserved and stored).

A small display area DM3 is formed below the small display areas DM1 and DM2. This small display area DM3 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) of the normal pattern (normal pattern) is displayed. The fourth pattern (the fourth pattern of the general pattern) for indicating the lottery situation of the pattern (the general pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area DM3.

In addition, a small display area DM3A is formed in the vicinity of the small display area DM3, and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is displayed. The small display area DM3A mentioned above can suggest and inform the player of the result (prefetch result) of preliminarily discriminating the prize information retained and stored in addition to the value for indicating the number of retained balls of the corresponding normal symbol. It is configured to display such a display mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the normal symbols retained and stored).

Furthermore, a sub-display area DS is formed below the main display area DM. As shown in FIG. 319(B), this sub-display area DS is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. The sub-display area DS may be used for another purpose. For example, the sub-display area DS may display information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas DM1A and DM2A. may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area DS. Then, it is preferable that the game player can grasp the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each reserved special symbol, and to vary the corresponding pending display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played with the expectation of winning a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is varied among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of individual reserved memories, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable pending symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area DM. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing and operation result of operating the frame button 22, and the win related information display mode for displaying information related to the big win game are displayed in the sub display area DS. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area DM and the sub display area DS is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area DS.

Further, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a reserved ball, the third symbols are stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a loss. After that, the fixed display is performed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is maintained until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until the ball wins the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which there is no winning (ball winning) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 despite the fact that the player shoots balls continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) It is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the newly entered ball is executed. be done.

In FIG. 319A, for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) DM4 is shown to be displayed in the main display area DM. The small display area DM4 itself is not displayed when the guidance display mode is not displayed. In this way, when there is no need to guide the game method (direction), by deleting the display area where the guide display area is displayed, an area for displaying other display modes (for example, variable effect display mode) can be displayed. Since it can be widened, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 317(A), the description continues. While the special figure 1 variation is being performed, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and when the normal figure long open variation is performed, a part of the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation production for showing normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation is executed using (see point A in FIG. 317 (A)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point A in FIG. 317(A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319(B).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation passes a predetermined time, the display area of the special pattern fluctuation effect displayed in the main display area DM of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the normal pattern fluctuation effect A process of switching the size is executed, a normal figure variation effect is performed using the entire main display area DM, and a special figure variation effect is performed in a part of the main display area DM (Fig. 317 (A) point B). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point B in FIG. 317(A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(A).

In this control example, the timing of switching the size of the display area between the special figure fluctuation effect and the normal figure fluctuation effect is set to 10 seconds after the start of the normal figure fluctuation effect. Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in a part of the case where the result of the normal drawing lottery is out, it is configured to set a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and the normal drawing for 10 seconds It is configured so that the normal pattern variation effect (see FIG. 319 (B)) is executed even when the deviation variation is set.

By configuring in this way, when the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the display area between the special figure fluctuation production and the general figure fluctuation production is not switched, and the general figure An effect is executed in which the variable effect ends. Therefore, after the normal figure fluctuation production is executed, the display area of the special figure fluctuation production and the normal figure fluctuation production is switched and displayed (see FIG. 320 (A)), so that the normal figure fluctuation production being executed is normal. It is possible to increase the expectation that the figure is long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation passes, the normal pattern per game (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the normal pattern per game is displayed (see point C in FIG. 317 (A)) . The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(B).

Here, the display contents of the normal pattern fluctuation effect executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation will be described with reference to FIGS. 319(B) to 320(B). FIG. 319(B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the normal pattern variation effect is started (see point A in FIG. 317(A)). As shown in FIG. 319(B), when the normal figure variation effect is executed, a small display area DM5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area DM (the lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area DM). , Normal figure fluctuation production is started.

In other words, the small display area DM5 becomes a normal figure fluctuation effect display area in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed. Then, as the normal pattern variation effect, the effect that the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches it is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 319 (B), the special figure 1 variation and the normal figure variation are being executed, so the display mode (Figure 319(B), a “downward arrow”) is displayed, and a display mode (in FIG. 319(B), “downward arrow”) is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area DS, characters to the effect that the normal map variation effect has been executed and a comment indicating the content of the normal map change effect are displayed: "Treasure box found! Chance to reach!" . As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how the normal pattern variation effect executed in a part of the main display area DM should develop into future effects.

After that, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern variation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 320(A) is displayed. FIG. 320(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect displayed immediately after the display area of the normal figure fluctuation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 317(A)). As shown in FIG. 320 (A), when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation effect, the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first A variable display effect of a special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in a small area DM6 formed in a part (lower left part) of the main display area DM. Then, in the sub-display area DS, a comment of "great chance" indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation effect has progressed (indicating that the result of the normal pattern lottery was not a normal pattern deviation fluctuation) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 319 (B) and Figure 320 (A), fluctuation production (special figure fluctuation production, normal figure fluctuation production) for showing the lottery results of a plurality of pattern lotteries (special figure lottery, general figure lottery) are executed at the same time, the size of the display area in which each variable performance is executed is changed in accordance with the suggestive state of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, so that a plurality of pattern lotteries are drawn for the player. To notify that the variable performances for showing the results are simultaneously executed, and to easily inform which variable performance should be observed according to the size of the display area in which each variable performance is executed. can.

Although illustration is omitted, if the executed normal pattern fluctuation effect is normal pattern deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the small display area DM5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 319 (B) and finally An effect in which the small display area DM5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is notified that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the current normal pattern variation performance is lost. In this way, when the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation, only the general figure fluctuation production using a display area smaller than the special figure fluctuation display production is executed, so the normal figure for the out The figure fluctuation production does not hinder the special figure fluctuation production.

In other words, according to the above-described example, the production result of the normal figure fluctuation production (the result of the general figure lottery that triggered the execution of the general figure fluctuation production) is out (normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected. Possible period, that is, the period from the start of normal figure fluctuation production to 10 seconds, by executing the display mode shown in FIG. The player is notified that the variable effect is being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have passed since the normal pattern variable effect was started, the effect result of the normal pattern variable effect (normal pattern that triggered the execution of the normal pattern variable effect) As a result of the figure lottery), there is no possibility that the off (normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected, so the possibility that this normal figure lottery is a hit increases, so Figure 320 (A) As shown in , a display mode in which the display area of the normal figure fluctuation production is large (larger than the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed) is executed.

As a result, the lottery result that is advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation effect, that is, the electric accessory 640A is likely to be the lottery result in which the winning game is executed in the long open, the normal pattern fluctuation Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the normal pattern variation effect appropriately. Also, for example, if the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the normal figure fluctuation executed in a display area (see FIG. 319 (B)) smaller than the special figure fluctuation production Since it ends only with the production, it does not hinder the visibility of the special figure fluctuation production. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the general figure lottery, the size of the display area at the start of the general figure variation production is unified, so the general figure lottery lottery will be drawn according to the display mode immediately after the general figure variation production is started. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting the result.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIGS. 319(B) and 320(A), the display area in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed is more than the display area in which the special figure fluctuation effect is executed. A small display area (small display area DM5 (see FIG. 319 (B))) and a display area larger than the display area (small display area DM6 (see FIG. 320 (A)) in which the special figure variation effect is executed (see FIG. 320 (A)) and, are provided in two sizes, but without being limited to this, three or more sizes of the display area of the normal figure fluctuation effect may be provided, for example, a special figure variation effect A display area of the same size as the display area in which is performed may be used.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as the normal pattern variation effect progresses, the display area in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed gradually increases. After the display area in which the variable effect is executed is reduced from the initial range (see FIG. 319(B)), it may be configured to be variable to the size of the final range (see FIG. 320(A)). . By constructing in this way, it is possible to continue the normal pattern fluctuation performance while making the player think that the normal pattern fluctuation performance will end, so that the performance with unexpectedness can be provided. can.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, when the special figure variation effect and the normal figure variation effect are executed at the same time, by varying the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed, the player can watch. However, without being limited to this, for example, the aspect of the display area in which each variable effect is executed (for example, the color of the outline of the display area, the color of the background of the display area, etc. variable mode), output mode of sound corresponding to each variable effect (for example, output only the sound corresponding to one variable effect, or change the output level (volume) of the sound corresponding to each variable effect By setting the output mode), the player may be made to pay attention to one of the plurality of variable effects.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed is configured to be variable according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the normal pattern fluctuation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed is variable based on the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, and the normal pattern fluctuation Based on the development status (elapsed time) of the production and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery (result of determination), it may be configured to set the variable range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed. .

By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery during the normal pattern fluctuation performance, the normal pattern lottery is based on the range of the display area that can be changed based on the operation of the operating means. For players who want to quickly grasp the lottery results of the normal pattern fluctuation production and want to grasp the normal pattern lottery result with the production result of the normal pattern fluctuation production, the display area where the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed by not operating the operation means It is possible to execute the normal figure fluctuation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation has passed, and it is displayed that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is long open per, then long open per is executed, shown in FIG. 320 (B) A display screen appears. FIG. 320(B) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the normal figure long open win is won and the long open win game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 320(B), when winning the normal long open win, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area DM, and from within the treasure box 852, to show that the normal open long open win has been won. , the effect that the capsule 853 appears is executed. Then, in the small display area DM3, a display mode (in the figure, "three circles") is displayed to indicate that the result of the general drawing lottery is a long open hit, and in the small display area DM4 , "Right-handed" is displayed in order to perform a game (right-handed game) to win a ball in the second winning hole 640, and the small display area DM5 visually indicates the position where the ball is won by the right-handed game. As a guide display mode for notification, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area of the game board 13 (in the vicinity of the second winning opening 640) is displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 320 (B), the special figure 1 variation is being executed even while the normal figure long open per game is being executed, so the special figure 1 is being varied in the small display area DM1 The special figure 1 fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation effect is reduced in the small display area DM6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area DM (display of FIG. 320 (A) displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even without changing the size of the display area where the normal figure fluctuation production is executed, by reducing the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed, the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed Since the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation performance is executed can be relatively enlarged, the performance contents of the normal pattern fluctuation performance can be made more conspicuous to the player.

Then, a comment "Challenge GET" is displayed in the sub display area DS to inform the player that the normal pattern variation effect will progress further. Here, in the fifth control example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the general figure lottery is a hit, the variation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning the general figure long open is the same variation time as the general figure lottery It is configured to set short-circuit open variation (60 seconds). When the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed corresponding to this normal pattern short open fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production progresses until the display mode similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 320 (B) is displayed, and the treasure box An effect of displaying a loss mode for indicating that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is out of 852 is executed.

In other words, when winning is won in the normal drawing lottery and the short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessary 640A is opened to such an extent that the ball cannot enter the second winning port 640. ing. In this case, even if a right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot (is difficult) enter the second winning hole 640, so the comment "Right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area DM4. .

In addition, in this control example, as a winning game (a game that opens the electric accessory 640A) that is executed when winning is won in the normal drawing lottery, a long opening winning game that can win a ball in the second winning port 640 and a short-open winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, but not limited to this, three or more types of winning games can be executed. For example, as a long open winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning hole 640, a winning game with different opening timings and opening times of the electric accessory 640A can be executed. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640A during the normal long open game, so that the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the winning game. It is possible to suppress the execution of a game in which a ball enters the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加Also, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal pattern fluctuation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying that the normal pattern per game is started) may be configured to be different. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning ball launch timing of the second winning opening 640 based on the presentation mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 317(A), the flow of production will be described. When the right-handed game is performed while the normal game is being executed, and the ball wins the second winning opening 640 (see point C in FIG. 317 (A)), the display mode indicating that is the third It is displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81 . The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(A).

Here, in the fifth control example, the special figure 1 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel ) can not be executed, it is configured to preferentially execute the special figure 2 variation with respect to the special figure 1 variation.

Therefore, when the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal game, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the winning information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored, and the special figure 1 being executed Period until the end of the variation (waiting period), the execution of the special figure 2 variation is on standby. After that, when the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed, the special figure 2 variation based on the pending and stored winning information is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 that develops the production mode of the normal figure variation production described above. A variable effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 317(A)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point D in FIG. 317(A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(B).

After that, when the special figure 2 fluctuation ends and the special figure 2 is stopped in the display mode indicating the small winning election (see point E in FIG. 317 (A)), the special figure 2 for showing the small winning winning Variation production is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point E in FIG. 317(A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(A). Then, while the small winning game is being executed, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 (see point F in FIG. 317 (A)), a small After the winning game ends, a display mode indicating that the big winning game will be executed is displayed (see FIG. 322(B)).

Here, referring to FIG. 321 (A) to FIG. 322 (B), the normal pattern long open winning game is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol is executed before the big winning game is executed based on the winning game. The content of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In the fifth control example, a series of games (normal pattern fluctuation, normal pattern per, special pattern 2 fluctuation, special pattern 2 small per , a game executed in the flow of a big win), a series of effects with a story is executed. Specifically, the effect content of the general pattern variation effect described with reference to FIG. 319 (B) to FIG. It is possible to suggest

By constructing in this way, as the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, the presence or absence of establishment of the execution opportunity more complicated than the execution opportunity established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols (special symbols) is determined using a series of performances. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Fig. 321(A) shows the state shown in Fig. 320(B), ie, the state in which the long open winning game executed during the special figure 1 variation is being executed, and the ball has won the second winning port 640. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen for indicating that; As shown in FIG. 321(A), when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open game, the capsule 853 is broken, and the capsule 853 suggests the contents of the game to be executed in the future. A ticket 854 stating "challenge game" as a mode is displayed. Then, in the secondary display area DS, a comment "Challenge game GET" is displayed to notify that the challenge game will be executed in the future.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 321 (A), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is immediately executed based on the ball winning the second winning opening 640 Without being done, the prize information of special figure 2 will be retained and stored. Therefore, "1" is displayed in the small display area DM2A, which indicates that one piece of special-figure 2 winning information has been obtained. Then, when the special figure 1 variation that has been executed in the state of FIG. (See FIG. 321(B)).

FIG. 321(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during the challenge game. As shown in FIG. 321(B), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during execution of a series of effects, a challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area DM of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. 861E are rotated in order, and the result display modes 861A to 861E stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 are produced as the result of the present effect.

In the fifth control example, the result display mode is a result display mode 861A with a "cross mark" to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is "missing" and a "small win". A result display mode 861D with "V" to indicate that it is, a result display mode 861C with "777" to indicate that it is a "jackpot", and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is not notified. It has a result display mode 861B with "?" and a result display mode 861E with "NEXT" indicating that the challenge game will be executed again.

Here, as the effect result of the challenge game, the result display mode 861B with "?" , and an effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is not notified in the challenge game. Note that even when the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "Right shot" is displayed in the small area DM4.

By configuring in this way, when the result display mode 861B is stop-displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is played without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball shot in the right-handed game wins the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, or wins the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big winning game, Does it win the second winning port 640 that is opened during the normal game, or does not win the special prize (big hit, small hit) and the normal prize, and does not win any prizes Since it is possible to determine whether the ball is actually flowing down while watching the actual flow-down behavior of the ball, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the fifth control example, when the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game. For example, after the result display mode 861B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, by varying the display mode of the result display mode 861B, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time is notified as the effect result of the challenge game. You may make it possible.

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the challenge game, it is possible to inform the game that the result display mode 861B corresponds to the lottery result of which special figure 2 lottery is difficult to understand, and the challenge game is completed. Then, the effect result of the current challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 can be notified to the player.

A result display mode 861E (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 321B is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the fifth control example, when a plurality of winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during the long open winning game, the lottery of special figure 2 continues until a big hit or a small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2. is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is out, the second special figure 2 lottery will be executed continuously, so the challenge executed in response to the first special figure 2 fluctuation A result display mode 861E is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the game, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is a hit (big hit, small hit), one of the result display modes 861B to 861D for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860. be.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 acquired during the game per long opening without discomfort. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, as the variable time set in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, the variable time corresponding to one challenge game (10 seconds) and the variable time corresponding to two times (20 seconds ) can be set, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out, the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is configured to be less likely to be selected than the fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, when the challenge game is executed twice in the variation performance of one special figure 2 variation, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning the special figure 2 lottery (big win, small win). . In addition, when the result display mode 861E to which "NEXT" is attached by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is one special figure 2 It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it was executed within the fluctuation time or whether it was executed across two special figure 2 fluctuations.

The state shown in FIG. 321 is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so in the small display area DM1, the special figure 1 variation that was fluctuating at the time shown in FIG. Stopped display in the display mode "451" shown, in the small display area DM2, in the display mode (indicated by the downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed special figure 2 4th symbol is is displayed. In addition, since the special figure 2 variation was executed using the special figure 2 winning information that had been reserved and stored at the time shown in FIG. is displayed.

Then, as a series of productions, the special figure 2 fluctuation production is executed using the display area where the normal figure fluctuation production was executed, so the special figure fluctuation production (special figure 1 fluctuation production) is executed in FIG. 321 (A) The small display area DM6 that has been displayed is erased from the main display area DM. In addition, in the small display area DM4, the characters "right-handed" are continuously displayed to prompt the player to play the right-handed game. A comment "What will come out?" is displayed.

Incidentally, according to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 321(B), the small display areas DM1 to DM3 and DM1A to DM3A are displayed in a visible size in order to explain the current game situation. Actually, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) executed in the continuous main display area DM.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 321 (B) is, as described above, the normal figure long open per game is finished, and the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so at that timing it is provided in the right game area It is in a state in which it is not easy for the ball to win any of the winning holes (the second winning hole 640, the specific winning hole 65A, and the V winning hole 650A). However, until just before the state shown in FIG. , or when a jackpot is won, the ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 650A or the specific winning opening 65A.

In this way, the right-handed game is continuously performed even if the right-handed game that causes the ball to flow down to the right game area momentarily does not become an advantageous game method for the player. By displaying the characters "Right-handed" in the small display area DM4, the player's annoyance of frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a right-handed game cannot be performed in a state where a small winning game is executed, and a ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game.

In this control example, for the reason described above, in the case where the right-handed game can be executed with a predetermined interval (the period during which the special figure 2 variation is executed), the small display area DM4 is continued during the predetermined interval However, it is not limited to this, and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area DM4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display, and the state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (normal figure long open per period, small per game period) and the period between the states (special figure 2 fluctuation It may be configured such that the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area DM4 in different display modes depending on the period).

By configuring in this way, a player who is not accustomed to the game is made to continuously play the right-handed game, and a game situation disadvantageous to the player (during the small winning game, the ball is inserted into the V winning opening 650A It is possible to make it difficult for a skilled player to select a game method according to the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the small display area DM4. Therefore, the game can be played according to the skill of the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

322 ( A) will be referred to. FIG. 322(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a small win is reported in the challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 322 (A), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the small hit, the special figure 2 4th pattern in the display mode "341" indicating the small hit winning in the small display area DM2 is displayed, and the result display mode 861D is stopped in the result display area 860 . Then, the sub-display area DS displays a comment "Get a small win!!" indicating that you have won a small win, and the small display area DM7 of the main display area DM displays what the player aims for during the small-win game. As a guide display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram showing an enlarged display of the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is displayed.

And, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game, to notify that the right to execute the big winning game has been obtained after the small winning game is finished. The display screen shown in FIG. 322(B) is displayed as the display screen of . FIG. 322(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the right to play the big win game is acquired during the small win game.

As shown in FIG. 322(B), characters "777" are displayed in the main display area DM to indicate that a jackpot game will be played, and in the sub-display area DS, "Big win!! Congratulations!" congratulating the player. !” is displayed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the normal pattern (normal pattern) long open per variation is started in the normal state normal pattern fluctuation effect (see FIG. 319 (B)) , The electric accessory 640A is opened during the general pattern per game effect (see FIG. 320 (B)) executed during the normal pattern per game, and the second winning port 640 during the normal pattern per game to win the ball, Special figure 2 pending acquisition effect (see FIG. 321 (A)) executed when special figure 2 winning information is acquired, Special figure 2 variation effect executed when special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started (See FIG. 321 (B)), Small hit winning effect (see FIG. 322 (A)) indicating that a small hit has been won in the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery), Acquired the right to play the jackpot game during the small hit game Since the production during the small winning game (see FIG. 322 (B)) executed in the case is configured to be executed as a series of productions with a story, the big win is established when a plurality of conditions are met. In a pachinko machine 10 having a game execution opportunity, it is possible to inform a player of the game property in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description continues. As described above, according to the game flow shown in FIG. Depending on the game state when the ball is made to enter the second prize-winning hole 640, it may not be possible to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner in the above-described effect mode of the series of effects.

Specifically, at the timing of point C in FIG. 317 (A), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the start timing of the special figure 2 variation is a predetermined period (remaining period of the special figure 1 variation during execution) The display screen when waiting (see FIG. 321 (A)) is used to produce a series of production modes that are displayed, for example, in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed, during the normal figure per game When the ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation will be started immediately. Therefore, when the effect mode of the series of effects described above is used, the display screen of FIG. 320(B) directly shifts to the display screen of FIG. There was a problem that the relevance of the production was weakened.

Therefore, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is being performed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects are being performed. Based on, it is configured to vary the effect mode after acquiring the winning prize information of the special figure 2. Here, at the timing when winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which a series of presentations are executed, the contents of presentation when special figure 1 variation is not executed will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 323 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 non-fluctuation, and FIG. , FIG. 323(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in FIG. 323(A) is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 323 (A), when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 in a state where the special figure 1 variation is not executed, the special figure 2 variation is immediately started, so FIG. 320 (B) 2, the character 851 uses the hammer 851AA to destroy the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852. As shown in FIG. And, when reaching the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 323 (B) is displayed. Figure 323 (B) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the special figure 2 variation executed based on the fact that the ball won the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 variation was not changed It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in Figure 323 (B), when the special figure 2 variation stops, the result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation appears from within the capsule 853 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 323(B), since the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a small hit, the result display mode 855 with "V" indicating the small hit winning is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 321 (B) Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, during a series of effects, if the ball wins in the second prize opening 640 during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the effect that the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the normal figure winning period (first stage production), and the production of acquiring a ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation acquisition period (the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1) (second stage production), and the challenge game production is the special figure 2 fluctuation. While the presentation mode is set so as to correspond to the period (third stage presentation), when the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the special figure 1 non-variation, the capsule 853 from the treasure box 852 Production mode is set so that the production that appears corresponds to the normal figure per period (first stage production), and the production that destroys the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 fluctuation period (second stage production). Configure.

In this way, depending on the game situation during a series of performances, different performance modes can be set depending on whether the standby period for the special figure 2 fluctuation occurs or not, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort. An easy-to-understand series of performances can be executed without any trouble.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation of the flow of the effect is continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 319 to 323, the contents of effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed in the state where the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, the contents of the effect when the ball normally enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game, and the contents of the effect when the ball enters the V winning hole 650A during the small winning game explained.

Here, description will be given of the content of the effect that is executed when the normal game is not executed while the series of effects are being executed. First, with reference to FIG. 324, the effect contents when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open per game will be described. FIG. 324(A) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the second winning hole 640 when one second has passed since the normal long open per game was started. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 324 (B) is displayed when the normal long open per game ends without the ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open open per game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display screen typically.

As shown in FIG. 324(A), until the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game, the effect that the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 is displayed in the main display area DM. At the same time, the sub-display area DS displays a comment "Hurry!! In addition, it is possible that the player does not play the right-handed game as a cause of the situation where the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 even after the predetermined period of time has passed after the normal long open per game. The guidance display mode of "Right shot" displayed in the small display area DM4 is displayed in a display mode that is emphasized more than usual (in FIG. 324(A), the outline of the small display area DM4 is displayed with double lines). be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that a right-handed game will be played.

In addition, in the fifth control example, after the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1 second as a normal long open winning game, the electric accessory 640A is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds. It is configured so that a winning game (opening action) is executed. Therefore, when one second has passed from the start of the game per normal long open, the attention screen shown in FIG. 324 (A) is displayed. It is configured so that the ball can enter the second winning port 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 to a player who has played a right-handed game after visually recognizing the display contents of the attention calling screen.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) of the normal pattern long open per game has passed without the ball entering the second winning hole 640, the series of effects has ended as shown in FIG. 324 (B). A production indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 324(B), a character 851 who regrets not being able to acquire the capsule 853 is displayed in the main display area DM, and "end" indicating that the series of effects has ended is displayed in the sub display area DS. comment is displayed. In addition, in the small display area DM4, characters of "left shot" for executing the normal game for executing the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state are displayed. By configuring in this way, if a normal game (a game in which the ball is entered in the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open per game) is not executed in the middle of the series of effects, the series of effects will be performed. Since the effect to end is executed, for example, it is possible to suppress the fact that the series of effects progresses to the end while the winning information of the special figure 2 is not obtained, and the player has excessive expectations. .

Next, as the effect contents to be executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the continuous effect is being executed, when the ball does not win the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game, or The content of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 325(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650A when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game. FIG. 325(B) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the small winning game ends without the ball entering the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 325(A), if the ball has not won the V winning opening 650A when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, the small ball formed in a part of the main display area DM In the display area DM8, characters "Last 5 seconds!!" are displayed as remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small winning game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases with the passage of time. Then, in the main display area DM, a situation in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small winning game is wrapped in smoke is displayed. In addition, similarly to the above-described FIG. 324(A), a highlighted display mode is displayed in the small display area DM4 to emphasize the guidance of the right-handed game, and in the sub display area DS, it is displayed that the small winning game is currently in progress. , a comment of "Hurry up!!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small winning game ends without causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game, the same screen as in FIG. B)). In this manner, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data when the series of effects ends at each time point of the series of effects. In addition, since it cannot be displayed when the game is played normally, even if the same image data is used, it is difficult for the player to think that the same image data is being used repeatedly. It is.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description continues. Depending on the variation situation of the special figure 1 during the series production, the state in which the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set and the state in which it is not set occur, and the production mode of the series production in each state was described above. A new problem occurred even in the state in which the waiting period of FIG. 2 variation is set.

That is, the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning opening 640 is the special figure It is set irrespective of the fluctuation timing of 1. Furthermore, since the length of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is various, for example, there is a possibility that the standby period of the special figure 2 variation during the series of productions will exceed 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen showing the standby period of special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 321 (A)) is displayed continuously, the same display mode will continue to be displayed for 100 seconds, There is a problem that the player feels a sense of incongruity, and the series of performances is delayed, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, the presence or absence of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation are determined at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the series of effects. When the remaining variation time of FIG. 1 variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (60 seconds), it is configured to execute a special series of effects.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317(B), the flow of the game when executing the special series of effects will be described. In Figure 317 (B), the period from the ball winning the second winning hole 640 during the normal game to the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation period during execution) is 60 seconds It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation (special series production|presentation) performed in the above case. Note that detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those in the flow shown in FIG. 317(A) will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 317 (B), when a series of production (normal figure fluctuation production) is executed based on the normal figure long open fluctuation, special figure 1 as special figure 1 fluctuation (shown as special 1 fluctuation in the figure) Long off variation (special 1 long variation (off)) is being executed, and at the time the ball enters the second winning port 640 during the normal figure long open per game, the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation being executed is determined to be 60 seconds or longer, the series of performances being executed is terminated with a pseudo-loss performance (see point G in FIG. 317(B)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation fluctuation under execution reaches 10 seconds, a series of pseudo effects are executed, and the challenge game is matched to the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 321 (B)) is set (see point H in FIG. 317(B)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 326, the effect content of the above-described special series effect will be described. FIG. 326(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at point G in FIG. 317(B). As shown in FIG. 317 (B), when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed is 60 seconds or more at the time when the ball wins in the second winning port 640, in the small display area DM2A In spite of the fact that "1" indicating that one winning prize information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored is displayed, in the main display area DM, the end screen indicating that the series of effects has ended is displayed. be.

After that, as a series of special performances, once the series of performances is finished, the special figure variation performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation under execution is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds (when the special figure 2 variation is executed after 10 seconds), the display mode shown in FIG. 326 (B) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. Fig. 318 (A) schematically shows the flow of production executed when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state and a time saving state (once) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is a timing chart, and FIG. 318 (B) is a time saving state (5 times) after winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and after the jackpot game executed based on the small hitting is completed. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation performed when.

As shown in FIG. 318 (A), when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, there is a special figure 1 suspension (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 suspension), and a special figure 2 suspension (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 suspension If there is no special figure 1 lottery, that is, if a jackpot is won by a game (left-handed game) that executes the special figure 1 lottery, the special figure 2 lottery is executed by playing the right-handed game during the time saving state. It is configured so that all the reserved and stored special figure 1 lotteries are executed before.

Specifically, it is executed in a state where the time saving state is set than the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time set during the high probability state of the normal pattern) executed in the state where the time saving state is set It is configured so that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is shorter. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game during the time saving state in the state of having the special figure 1 reservation. Therefore, while various performances are being executed in the time saving state, the special figure 1 variation that makes it more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation is performed, and the problem that the performance balance of various performances is lost. can be suppressed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this fifth control example, if the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery, 0.2 seconds It is configured so that the variable time is set. Then, a jackpot game end screen showing the end of the jackpot game is displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game ends, or until special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the period in which the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 reservation that was already acquired at the start of the jackpot game is executed (when the number of special figure 1 reservations is 4, about 1 second), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 reservation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Also, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game), if the jackpot is won or the small win that can pass through V is won, the jackpot game is played again from the jackpot game end screen. The game information indicating the content of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds information indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or the number of rounds obtained during one jackpot game) The game information indicating the accumulated value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as the winning ball number information indicating the number of balls won, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that a plurality of jackpot games are just one jackpot game, so that the second jackpot game (the period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed) A variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation and variation of the third symbol that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game) No display), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information of one big win game can be increased, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for winning the big win. Furthermore, the fifth control example is configured so that the right-handed game is appropriate for both the jackpot game and the game during the time saving state, so the jackpot game is finished internally and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 fluctuation period (during the special figure 1 fluctuation period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area DM4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the game is currently in a jackpot game or in a time saving state, depending on the display mode of the small display area DM4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured such that the special figure 2 reserve is preferentially digested over the special figure 1 reserve. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and acquires the special figure 1 reservation with the special figure 2 reservation, the special figure 1 until the special figure 2 reservation is lost Toku-zu variation based on the hold (Toku-zu 1 variation) is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, it is configured so that the special figure 2 reservation will not be lost. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the special figure 1 variation is unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as the corresponding time-saving end condition, which is part of the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set. , Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (maximum 4 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the game situation is updated until the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special figure 1 variation. there is nothing to do.

In addition, as described above, in the fifth control example, special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed with priority over special figure 1 variation, and special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the time saving state is set By changing the special figure 1 variation for a short time during the period when it is not done, it is configured so that the special figure 1 suspension is eliminated during the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, special figure 1 variation is better It may be configured to be executed with priority over the FIG. 2 variation.

As the corresponding time saving end condition after the end of the jackpot game, when "special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time" is set, using the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving state, the special figure 2 fluctuation The time-saving final variable performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time-saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 327 to 331, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the fifth control example will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the first time-saving variation production set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation of the time-saving state as the production during the time-saving state, and the special It is configured to execute the second time-saving variation production set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation that is the final variation of the figure.

Then, the first time-saving variable performance is a variable performance for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the second time-saving variable performance is the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation. is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 327(A), the display contents of the first time reduction variation effect will be described. FIG. 327(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content in the variable effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 327(A) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state in which the time saving number of times "5 times" is set.

As shown in FIG. 327 (A), in the main display area DM of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the characters "time saving mode" are displayed to indicate that the current time saving state is displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. An effect is executed to get one of lottery result modes 871A to 871C showing the results of the current special figure lottery while the imitated character 851 runs. In the fifth control example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, the character 851 tries to get the lottery result modes 871A to 871C according to the variation time set during the time saving state (excluding the final time saving change). The get performance is configured to be executed a plurality of times during one variation period, and the lottery result of this special figure variation increases as the number of times of the get performance executed during one variation period increases. It is configured to increase the probability that the lottery result will be advantageous to By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the effect result of each get effect, but also to the number of executions of the get effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the small display area DM4, the characters "Right shot" for guiding the game method during the time saving state are displayed, and in the first display area DM20, "Last 4" indicating the period until the time saving state ends times” is displayed. In other words, it is notified that the time saving state ends when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In addition, in the fifth control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions that are established based on the number of special figure fluctuations can be set, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions , is configured to display the remaining period until the time-saving end condition, which is most likely to be satisfied, is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, all of the time-saving end conditions that exist are displayed, and the period until all the displayed time-saving end conditions are satisfied (remaining period) is displayed. To easily inform a player of an easy time-saving end condition in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when the ease of establishment of the time-saving end conditions overlaps, all the overlapping time-saving end conditions may be displayed, or only one of the overlapping time-saving end conditions is displayed. It may be configured to

In addition, in this control example, in FIG. 327(A), as the lottery result modes 871A to 871C, the first lottery result mode 871A with "777" indicating jackpot winning and "V" indicating small win winning are added. A second lottery result mode 871B and a third lottery result mode 871C with a "cross mark" indicating failure are displayed. An action that acquires the result modes 871A to 871C but cannot be acquired is performed, and an effect of finally acquiring one of the lottery result modes 871A to 871C and notifying the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, lottery result modes 871A and 871B indicating a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect are attached with "chance" indicating that the expectation of obtaining is high. Alternatively, the character 851 executes the get effect to acquire the lottery result suggesting mode and the effect number suggesting mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get effect is executed. may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can perform the action of acquiring any display mode a plurality of times during one variable display effect, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the effect. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of this special figure variation in the middle stage of the special figure variation period, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 327 (A), the display mode for showing the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation as the remaining period for which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area DM20. Without limitation, for example, it may display a display mode for showing the remaining time the time saving state is set based on the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, get production executed during this time saving state A display mode for indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed. Furthermore, the number of remaining executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time the time saving state is set, that is, the time saving end condition set in this time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation number) and the special figure executed during the time saving state 2 It may be configured such that a display mode indicating the number of fluctuations is displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327(B), the display contents of the time saving final variation performance (second time saving variation performance) executed in the final time saving state variation will be described. FIG. 327(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the first half period of the time saving final variable effect. In this fifth control example, as a variable effect for the final time-saving change, the reserved ball acquisition effect for letting the player acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball, the lottery result of the variation, the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation, A second time-saving variation effect for informing the player of the , 25 seconds) to execute the second time-saving variation production.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect, as shown in FIG. is displayed, and an effect is executed in which allied characters gather around the character 851 in the main display area DM. In FIG. 327B, a state is displayed in which an ally character 851A imitating a "turtle" and an ally character 851B imitating an "elephant" are gathered. Then, in the small display area DM20, characters "Last" are displayed in order to notify the player that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state.

This ally character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of acquired special-figure 2 reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area DM2A, in FIG. Since it shows a state in which two reserved special figures 2 are obtained, two ally characters 851 are gathered. Then, in the small display area DM7, a gathering history display is displayed in the order in which the gathered ally characters 851 were gathered, and "turtle" is displayed as the first history 872A and "elephant" is displayed as the second history 872B. .

In this small display area DM7, a set history display is displayed, but the order displayed here is associated with the order of digestion of the special figure 2 reservation, and the friend character used in the second time-saving variation production described later Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, when winning, it is configured to be able to suggest which special figure 2 reservation has won.

Then, when the number of special 2 reservations reaches the upper limit (4 pieces) during the execution of the reservation ball acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. A presentation mode is displayed. Specifically, an ally character 851C imitating a "snake" and an ally character 851D imitating a "lion" are newly added around the character 851, for a total of four ally characters 851A to 851D. A collective performance is displayed. In addition, in the small display area DM21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872C, and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872D. A comment of "All members gathered!!" is displayed. As described above, during execution of the pending ball acquisition effect, the group number of teammate characters 851 is associated with the number of special 2 pending balls, so the number of special 2 pending balls is displayed in the small display area DM2A. "4" indicating the upper limit (4) is displayed.

After that, when the first half period of the time saving final variable effect has passed and the second half period is reached, the second time saving change effect shown in FIG. 328(B) is started. FIG. 328(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time saving variable effect) displayed when the second half period of the time saving final variable effect is started. As shown in FIG. 328 (B), in the second time-saving variation production, any of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time-saving final variation production challenges the mission, and notifies the successful winning of the mission, and the mission failure. At , an effect for informing non-winning is executed. Then, the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance is configured to be set by reflecting even the foreseeing result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the time when the first half period of the time-shortening final variable performance has passed. .

According to the example shown in FIG. 328(B), the mission effect using the ally character 851A imitating the "turtle" is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time-saving variable effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed ("endure falling rocks" in FIG. 328(B)) is configured so that a plurality of patterns can be set. And, depending on, mission success expectations are different. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction variable effect, but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

Then, when the mission effect is successful, the mission success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 329(A). In the example shown in FIG. 329 (A), the first special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 hold to be executed next), that is, the first rotation special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting to the normal state In anticipation of winning a small hit, and the result of the foreknowledge is used as the production result of the second time-saving variation production, as shown in FIG. At the change stop timing of the time saving final change being displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of this special figure 2 lottery is out is displayed in the small display area DM2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 329(B), while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the winning is hit in the main display area DM is oscillatingly displayed, the special figure 2 variation that wins the small hit is displayed. A notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time reduction variable effect is displayed until the end. In addition, at the time of FIG. 329 (B), the normal state is set as the game state, and the special figure 2 is fluctuating (during the non-jackpot game, non-small hit game), so the right-handed game is actually performed. Although it is in a state where it is not possible to play an advantageous game for the player, it is a state in which a small winning game is executed immediately after, so it continues from the time saving state to guide the right-handed game. A display is displayed in the small display area DM4. As a result, the game can be played smoothly without requiring the player to change the shooting direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 reservation is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time saving variation production is executed, it is shown in FIG. 330 (A) As described above, the display mode for displaying the small win to the player is displayed, and in the main display area DM, the third pattern is "777" to indicate the small win type set for this small win. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, when the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above with reference to FIG. ), the mission failure effect shown in FIG. 330 (B) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, at the timing when the first half of the time saving final fluctuation production ends, the special figure 2 suspension has not reached the upper limit, and since the second time saving fluctuation production has started (second time saving After the production result of the fluctuation production is set), if you acquire a new special figure 2 reservation, after the final fluctuation of the time saving, at the first special figure 2 fluctuation start timing in the normal state, the newly acquired special Prefetching processing is executed for FIG. 2 reservation (special figure 2 reservation not reflected in the effect result of the second time-saving variation effect), and if the result of the prefetching process is winning, the display of FIG. 331 An effect is executed in which a small winning winning screen (see FIG. 330(A)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, referring to FIG. 332, the configuration of the counter buffer in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 332, in the fifth control example, a second winning type counter C6 and a second variation type counter CS2 are added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 240) in the fourth control example described above. And, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B are provided with a variable type counter storage area for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C. , a second winning type counter storage area for storing the value of the second winning type counter C6, a second variation type counter storage area for storing the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and each The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol reserved ball execution area and the normal symbol reserved ball execution area are changed in correspondence with the counter value stored in the reserved ball storage area. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in this example of control, once per timer interrupt processing of the main controller), and the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203 at the timing. And, the value of the random number which becomes the hit of the normal design is defined in the normal design random number 5 table 202EC provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 334(D)). When the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the random number to be a winning normal pattern defined in the random number 5 table 202EC per normal symbol, it is determined as winning a normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334(D), the normal 5-per-symbol random number table 202EC will be described. The normal symbol random number 5 table 202EC is a table in which random numbers (determined values) that are determined to be winning in each game state (normal symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) are set in the normal symbol lottery. is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 334(D), when the game state is a normal symbol low probability state (normal state), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the normal symbol lottery is within the range of "5 to 28", and if within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a hit. In addition, when the game state is a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), in the normal pattern lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204". Then, if it is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal figure.

In other words, in the fifth control example, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design, it is elected with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design, with a probability of 5/6 It is configured to be elected by chance. And, although the detailed explanation will be described later, during the normal state, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 as a game per normal pattern with a probability of 1/100 when winning the normal pattern (per normal pattern). It is constructed so that an easy long opening winning game is executed. In addition, during the time saving state, it is constructed so that a long open winning game is always executed when winning a normal game.

By configuring in this way, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game that allows the ball to enter the second winning port 640 with a probability of 1/1000. To simultaneously execute a game for executing a special figure 1 lottery and a game for executing a special figure 2 lottery (a game aiming for a specific win in a normal figure lottery) for a player who is playing can be done.

The second variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). By the second fluctuation type counter CS2, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined from the set normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF. In this normal figure fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136) of the main controller 110 described above is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. . In addition, from the value (random value) of the second variation type counter CS2, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202EF (see FIG. 338) storing a random value for determining one variation time of normal symbol variation is provided in the ROM 202 of the

Returning to FIG. 332, the description continues. In the fifth control example, a variation type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, and the winning information stored in the reserved storage is stored in advance (special symbol fluctuation (before), the actually executed variation pattern (variation time) can be read ahead. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine the timing at which the special figure variation corresponding to the reserved and stored special symbol winning information is executed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the normal symbol winning information, that is, the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is the first winning random number counter used for the normal symbol winning lottery. C2, the second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and used when setting the type of the winning game per normal symbol.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 333(A). FIG. 333 is a schematic diagram schematically showing regulation adoption of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 333(A), in the above-described A1 control example, instead of the first winning random number table 202A (FIG. 242(A)), the first winning random number 5 table C202EA is selected as the first winning type. A first winning type selection 5 table 202EB is provided instead of the table 202B, a normal per symbol random number table 202EC is replaced with a normal per symbol random number table 202C, and a variation pattern 5 table 202EE is replaced with a variation pattern table 202D. A small winning type selection 5 table 202EG instead of the type selection table 202E, a big winning scenario 5 table 202EH replacing the big winning scenario table 202AA, and a small winning scenario 5 table 202EI replacing the small winning scenario table 202AB; It is different in that it has newly provided a normal pattern per type selection 5 table 202ED and a normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202EF.

The first winning random number 5 table 202EA differs from the above-described first winning random number table 202A (see FIG. 242) in that the prescribed value for determining a big win is different, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334, the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202EA will be described. FIG. 334A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 5 table 202EA. As shown in FIG. 334(A), the first per random number 5 table 202EA includes the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 and the second special symbol that are referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It has a special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery of (special figure 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(B), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 will be described. FIG. 334(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1. As shown in FIG. 334(B), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines a "big win" in the range of "0 to 3" and a "minor win" in the range of "10, 11". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery of special figure 1 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(C), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 will be described. FIG. 334(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2. As shown in FIG. 334(C), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines a "big win" in the range of "0 to 3" and a "minor win" in the range of "10 to 149". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is about 1/7.1.

That is, in the fifth control example, the same big-hit probability is set for the special-figure 1 lottery and the special-figure 2 lottery, and the small-hit probability is higher for the special-figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, since it is configured so that the small winning can be the execution trigger of the big winning game, the special figure 2 lottery is more likely to execute the big winning game than the special figure 1 lottery. It will be a drawing lottery.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 A different jackpot probability may be set for the lottery. In addition, although the big win probability and the small win probability are set to a constant value regardless of the game state, it is not limited to this, and according to the game state, the high probability state ( A special symbol high probability state) and a lower low probability state (special symbol low probability state) may be set.

The first winning type selection 5 table 202EB is different from the above-described first winning type selection table 202B (see FIG. 243) in that the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is different. Other than that, they are identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 335(A), the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table 202EB will be described. FIG. 335(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table 202EB. As shown in FIG. 335 (A), the first hit type selection 5 table 202EB includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1 and a special figure 2 lottery, which are referred to when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in .

Here, with reference to FIG. 335(B), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1 will be described. FIG. 335(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is set so that three types of jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery. there is Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is set to "0", "jackpot AA (15R short time 99 times jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "jackpot AB (7R time-saving 5 times jackpot)” is defined, and “jackpot AC (7R time-saving 1 time jackpot)” is defined in the range of “16 to 99”.

In other words, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed and the special figure 1 lottery is executed, if the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (given) after the jackpot game ends. there is And according to the set jackpot classification, it is comprised so that the end conditions of a time saving state may be changed and set.

Specifically, when the jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the common time-saving end conditions described above are set, so the special lottery wins (jackpot or small hit), or the special figure fluctuation (Total of Toku-zu 1 variation and Toku-zu 2 variation) The time saving state continues until it reaches 99 times. In the fifth control example, a right-handed game that executes the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state is performed, and in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is 1/250. Because it is set to 7.1, for example, when a time-saving state based on a jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation is a predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the jackpot AA is selected, substantially, it becomes a game state in which the time saving state is set until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the common time-saving end conditions described above, as the corresponding time-saving end conditions, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. . In other words, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning the winning before the time saving end condition is satisfied (continuous chance probability) about 54%.

Also, when the jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the common time saving end conditions described above, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure variation reaches a predetermined number of times (once) without winning the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is 85%. In other words, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning the winning before the time saving end condition is satisfied (continuous chance probability) about 15%.

As described above, according to the type of jackpot set when the jackpot is won in special figure 1, the degree of advantage of the set time saving state (consecutive chance probability) is configured to be different, and the jackpot AA is the most advantageous jackpot type, then jackpot AB is the most advantageous jackpot type, and jackpot AC is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games to be executed as jackpot games also has different values depending on the type of jackpot. stipulated in The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the larger the number of balls (the number of prize balls) that the player can acquire. It becomes an advantageous jackpot type.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the jackpot type (jackpot AA) with the highest consecutive chance probability is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but it is not limited to this, The jackpot type with the highest consecutive chance probability and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the most advantageous game state according to the game situation. For example, if the jackpot is won just before the game hall closes, the jackpot type that allows you to win more prize balls in one jackpot game than the jackpot type that gives (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of consecutive chances. is a more advantageous jackpot type, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit value (limit) for the number of times the time saving state is set across the jackpot games, one jackpot game is played in the jackpot election immediately before reaching the limit. A jackpot type that can acquire a large number of prize balls is a more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chances (the number of times the jackpot game is executed without ever shifting to the normal state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the player receives a privilege (for example, a valuable In the pachinko machine 10 capable of providing the image), a jackpot type in which a time-saving state with a high consecutive chance probability is given (set) is a more advantageous jackpot type for a player who wants to obtain a privilege.

In addition, the above-mentioned consecutive chance probability indicates the probability of winning a winning lottery based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the fifth control example, the special figure 2 lottery is (4 pieces) is configured to be able to be reserved and stored. Therefore, even after the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the transition to the normal state is performed, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 reservations that are reserved and stored (number of remaining special figure 2 reservations). It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small winning by special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1/7.1, so the number of remaining special figures 2 pending (maximum 4) By the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the number of times, it is possible to sufficiently aim for small winning.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special figures 2 reserved is 1, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation (return probability) is about 14%, and the remaining special figure If the number of 2 holds is 2, the pull-back probability is about 28.5%, and if the number of remaining special figures 2 holds is 3, the pull-back probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special figures 2 holding balls is 4, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery can be held and stored, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation is executed even after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state, Regardless of the special figure 2 lottery result during the time saving state, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Also, once the time saving state is set, the game period during the time saving state described above (continuous chance period) and the period during which the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state (pull back Period) and, in two periods, it is possible to aim for a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, so even though the time saving state is set, the special figure is never executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to the normal state aiming at one lottery, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, during the time saving state, the small winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the big winning game (continuous big winning game) is executed based on the small winning during the normal state. It is configured to make it easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to the player when a small win is won in a special figure 2 lottery and a big win game (pull-back big win game) is executed based on the winning of the small win. . As a result, the player can play the game while expecting to win a small prize during the pull-back period even after the period of successive chances has passed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335(C), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2 will be described. FIG. 335(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first win type counter C2. there is Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, and “jackpot AD (15R short time 99 times jackpot)” is defined as the jackpot type, and the range of “20 to 69” “Jackpot AE (12R short time 99 times big hit)” is defined in “70 to 99”, and “jackpot AF (7R short time 99 times big hit)” is defined.

In other words, when a big win is won by the special figure 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set so that the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation reaches 99 times without fail after the end of the big win game. As a result, in the special figure 2 lottery whose execution frequency is lower than that of the special figure 1 lottery, when a big win set at a probability three times or more lower than the probability of winning a small win is won, it is advantageous to the player. A game state can be reliably provided. Therefore, for a player who has a special experience with a low occurrence frequency of winning a jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a setting of one time reduction) is set, and the motivation to play is set. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

In addition, each jackpot type specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2 is executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, like the above-described special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1. The number of round games to be played is different, and it is stipulated that a round game of "15R" for the jackpot AD, "12R" for the jackpot AE, and "7R" for the jackpot AF is performed. Since the number of balls (the number of prize balls) that the player can obtain increases as the number of round games in one jackpot game increases, the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It will be a big hit type.

The normal per symbol random number 5 table 202EC changes the value of the second per normal symbol random number counter C4 defined corresponding to the normal per symbol with respect to the normal per symbol random number table 202C (see FIG. 242(D)). are different, and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. Here, with reference to FIG. 334(D), the contents of the normal 5-per-symbol random number table 202EC will be described. FIG. 334(D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal 5-per-symbol random number table 202EC.

As shown in FIG. 334(D), the normal per symbol random number 5 table 202EC includes a value to be referred to when performing a lottery per normal symbol in a low probability state of normal symbols, and a normal value in a high probability state of normal symbols. A value to be referred to when executing a lottery per figure is defined, and specifically, in a low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28". "Hit" is defined, and in the high-probability state of normal symbols, "hit" is defined in the range of "5 to 204" for the value of the second winning random number counter C4.

The normal pattern per type selection 5 table 202ED is a data table for selecting the normal per pattern type, and when the normal pattern (normal pattern) lottery is executed with reference to the normal per pattern random number 5 table 202EC and the winning is won. is referred to. In this fifth control example, as a general pattern winning game that is executed when winning a normal pattern in a low probability state of normal patterns, the electric accessory 640A is operated so that the ball can win the second winning hole 640. A long opening winning game in which an opening operation is performed and a short opening winning game in which the electric accessory 640A is opened so as to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 than in the long opening winning game can be executed. Then, different winning games are executed according to the type of normal pattern selected at the time of winning the normal pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 336, the contents defined in the per normal figure type selection 5 table 202ED will be described. FIG. 336(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the per-universal figure type selection 5 table 202ED. As shown in FIG. 336(A), per normal pattern type selection 5 table 202ED, according to the probability state of the normal pattern and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6, two types per normal pattern ( It is configured so that A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal pattern is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "per normal pattern A", " 1 to 99” is defined as “per normal figure B”. In addition, the probability state of the normal pattern is a high probability state (high probability of normal pattern), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "per normal pattern A" in the range of "0, 1", "B" is defined in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the normal pattern per type selected in the normal pattern per type selection 5 table 202ED and the game state at the time when the normal pattern per game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 336 (B). do. FIG. 336(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation contents of the electric accessory 640A based on the normal figure winning type and the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the normal pattern (normal pattern) winning lottery is executed according to the game state set at the timing of executing the normal pattern (normal pattern) winning lottery (normal pattern fluctuation start timing). When winning, it is configured to set the game content per normal pattern according to the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal pattern (timing to stop fluctuation of normal pattern). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, since the game state is configured to shift according to the special symbol (special figure) lottery situation and fluctuation situation, the special figure lottery game is independent In the general pattern lottery game to be executed, different game states are set at the timing of executing the general pattern lottery and the timing of executing the general pattern winning game executed when winning in the general pattern lottery. I have a case.

For example, if the general pattern lottery is executed during the special pattern fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal pattern of the random number 5 table 202EC per normal pattern (normal pattern high A winning lottery is executed using the judgment value specified in the definite). And, when it hits and is elected, after the lapse of a predetermined normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds), the normal pattern fluctuation is stopped, and then the normal pattern per game is executed. Here, when the time saving final variation ends during the normal figure fluctuation and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed It will be.

In such a case, if you set the game mode of the normal figure per game according to the game state that is set at the time the normal figure lottery is executed, even though the normal state is set, There is a problem that a normal game per game (long open per game) executed during the time saving state as a normal game per game is executed, and an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery) is provided to the player. there were.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, the game state that is set at the timing of executing the game per normal pattern is determined, and the content of the game per normal pattern is set based on the determination result, As in the above-described example, when the game state shifts to the normal state during the normal pattern fluctuation, it is possible to execute the normal pattern per game corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery).

Specifically, when per normal pattern A is selected (set) as per normal pattern type, the game state that is set to the execution timing of the per normal pattern game (at the time of opening operation of electric auditors 640A) Regardless, the game per normal figure long opening is executed. On the other hand, when the normal pattern per B is selected (set) as the normal pattern per type, the game state set at the execution timing of the normal pattern per game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A) is the normal symbol. If it is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), normal pattern short open per game, if the normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern high probability), normal pattern long open per game is executed is defined as

Here, the per game per normal pattern long open per game and the normal pattern short open per game, which is the normal per pattern game, will be described for the contents of the per game. The normal pattern long open winning game is a normal pattern winning game in which the electric accessory 640A is opened for a long time (positioned in an open state) so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and 0.1 After a second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1 second (first open period), and then opened again for 0.5 second after a closed state (waiting period) of 1.5 seconds. (Second open period) per normal game is executed. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when a game per normal long open is executed, two open periods are set so as to secure a period in which the ball can win the second winning opening 640 are doing. Then, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second winning port 640 when the first opening period has passed among the two opening periods, and the determination result indicates that the ball has not won the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加When it is determined, a warning screen (see FIG. 324(A)) for calling attention to the player to play the game of winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 is displayed. there is

By configuring in this way, in the state in which the normal state is set (the state in which the left-handed game is performed), the player who does not notice that the normal figure long open per game (right-handed game) has been executed In response to this, it is possible to perform notification for executing a right-handed game again, and to suppress the game result that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in the fifth control example, after the warning screen (see FIG. 324(A)) is displayed and a waiting period of a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) passes, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed. configured to run.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) required for the ball shot by the player to reach the second winning hole 640. It is As a result, it is possible for the player who has played the right-handed game after viewing the warning screen (see FIG. 324(A)) to easily win the ball into the second winning hole 640 .

In addition, in this fifth control example, when the scenario per normal pattern is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the game per normal pattern is terminated, and the second winning during the game per normal pattern Two types of normal pattern per end conditions are set in the case of ending the normal pattern per game when the number of balls that have won into the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1 piece).

Then, when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 during the first opening period and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 during the second opening period, the ball wins the second prize winning port 640. It is configured so that the notification modes for indicating that the event has occurred are different. Specifically, when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that a proper game (right-handed game) is not being executed from the start stage of the game per normal pattern. , It is configured to display a game explanation (comment such as "Be sure to hit the right during the game per normal long open game") so that an appropriate game can be played at the time of the next normal pattern per game. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period, the game content that the player has already grasped is repeatedly notified, and the game is not played. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the general pattern short opening per game, the general pattern per game that opens the electric accessory 640A for 0.1 seconds after the closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds is executed. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640A is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned normal pattern short opening winning game is a normal pattern winning game in which the ball can not be substantially won into the second winning hole 640. . In addition, this general pattern short open per game is, as shown in FIG. As the normal pattern short opening per game is started 0.2 seconds after the normal pattern per game ends, the normal pattern short opening per game is executed in a state where the player is executing the left-handed game , Even if a right-handed game is performed, the normal game will be completed before the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 during the game per normal short open.

In addition, the electric role product 640A may be configured so that the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal short open game. In the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is configured so that the ball can flow down from one end side to the other end side, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A can win. It is preferable to dispose the second prize winning port 640 at a position such that the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is 0.5 seconds at the shortest. By configuring in this way, when the game per normal short-circuit opening is executed, the ball that flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640A is in the open state cannot reach the other end side, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the winning game content of the normal pattern winning game is set according to the game state set at the timing at which the normal pattern winning game is executed. Therefore, even if you win per normal pattern in a short time state (high probability state) that wins per normal pattern with a high probability, the game per normal pattern based on winning per normal pattern is normal state (low probability normal pattern) state), it is possible to make it difficult to execute the game per normal pattern long open.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 336 (A), in this fifth control example, regardless of the gaming state, the ratio of selecting the normal pattern per type (normal pattern per A) in which the normal pattern long open per game is executed is different between the low probability state of normal patterns (low probability of normal patterns) and the high probability state of high probability of normal patterns (high probability of normal patterns). It is configured to be selected with a probability of 2% at the time of probability. By configuring in this way, it is elected per the general pattern at the time of the low probability, and the general pattern is elected at the time of the high probability, compared to the case where the game per the general pattern is executed at the low probability of the general pattern. When the normal pattern per game is executed at the normal pattern low probability, the probability of executing the normal pattern long open per game at the normal pattern low probability can be increased. Therefore, even when using the configuration for setting the game contents of the game per normal pattern according to the game state at the timing when the game per normal pattern is executed, it is executed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state It is possible to increase the probability that the normal pattern per game will be the normal pattern long open per game, and allow the player to pay attention to which game content the normal pattern per game is executed.

The variation pattern 5 table 202EE is a data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and includes the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery ( Various variation patterns (variation time) are configured to be selected based on the lottery result of special figure lottery) and the set game state. The basic technical idea of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE is the same as that of each control example or various variation patterns used in each embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. The description will continue focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE used in the control example.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202EE will be described with reference to FIG. 339(A). FIG. 339(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 5 table 202EE. As shown in FIG. 339 (A), the variation pattern 5 table 202EE is referred to when the game state is the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1 and the game state is the time saving state. A variable pattern 5 table 202EE2 for time reduction is provided, and a special symbol variation pattern is selected using a data table corresponding to a game state set when selecting a special symbol variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339(B), the contents of the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1 included in the variation pattern 5 table 202EE will be described. FIG. 339(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1. As shown in FIG. 339(B), the variation pattern 5 table 202EE includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations after the normal state is set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different variation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is configured so that the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is performed, and the second special symbol ( The pattern in which the special figure 2) lottery is executed is the pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed according to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time saving state, and the long open in the normal figure lottery. There is a pattern in which a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on winning a ball in a second winning port 640 during a long open winning game.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the time of the start of the time saving final variation can be notified. It consists of Then, the performance result of the time saving final variation performance is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed (to the normal state) after the time saving state ends.

The variation pattern 5 table 202EE corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery that is performed between 1 to 4 special figure variations as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation that is performed during the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, when the first special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the acquired variation type counter CS1 "Short win A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of , and "Short win A (2 seconds)" is selected in the case of "win (big win, small win)". Also, if the second special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short out A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Hit", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, special symbol fluctuation after the normal state is set If the third time is the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is "off", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "short off A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "win", "short win C (1 second)" is selected. Then, if the fourth special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "short miss A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

By configuring in this way, when the number of special 2 reservations is the maximum number (4) when the time saving state ends, the special 2 lottery corresponding to the special 2 reservation is hit (small hit , jackpot) (the period during which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the winning), and the lottery results of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are all It is possible to unify the period until it is out and the period to two seconds.

Therefore, for example, even if there is winning information that will be a hit in the special figure 2 reservation, even if there is no winning information, just by controlling to display the result for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final variation, the player feels uncomfortable. Special Figure 2 variation during normal state can be performed without granting. Also, no matter how many special figures 2 are held and won, it is possible to unify the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (2 seconds after the normal state is set). Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special figure 2 reservations have been won.

Also, as shown in FIG. 339 (B), as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, if the number of special symbol fluctuations is "5 times or more", the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the time saving state ends Since it exceeds, the normal figure long open per game is executed in the normal state, and since it is a special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning of the ball in the second winning port 640, the above-mentioned series of effects A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode for indicating that the current is a special figure 2 variation period in a series of productions ( production mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 5 table 222EE2 referred to when the time-saving state is set will be described. Figure 340 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern of the special figure lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In the fifth control example, when the time saving state is set, the special figure 2 lottery, which tends to be a lottery result advantageous to the player for the special figure 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 is configured such that when a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first winning port 64 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is a special figure executed based on the special figure 1 reservation already acquired at the jackpot game end timing when the time saving state is set 1 will be a lottery.

Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving initial setting state), the ball wins in the second winning port 640. Since the easy game is not played, the special figure 2 reservation cannot be acquired, and when there is the special figure 1 reservation at that time, the special figure 1 lottery is executed.

In this case, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long time (for example, 60 seconds) variation time If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 variation cannot be executed until the special figure 1 variation ends, and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state. As a result, even if the time saving state is set in a state where the maximum number (four) of the special figure 1 reservation is secured, the special figure 1 variation can be executed without hindering the special figure 2 variation.

Further, in the fifth control example, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation is executed even after the jackpot game is finished. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 1 fluctuation is fluctuating in a short time during the time saving state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big win, the continuously displayed end screen of the big win game is shifted to the big win game screen.

Normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202EF is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation), and the game state at the time of executing normal pattern variation, Based on the lottery result of normal figure fluctuation and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained, different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) are configured to be selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202EF will be described. FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202EF. As shown in Figure 338, in this fifth control example, as the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation, a short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and a long fluctuation in which a longer fluctuation time than the short fluctuation is set (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is configured to be selected.

And, when the long fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production is configured to be executed. In addition, in this fifth control example, only during the period in which the normal state is set that it is difficult to win per the general pattern long opening, the general pattern fluctuation effect for suggesting that the general pattern long opening is won is executed. Therefore, long variation (30 to 60 seconds) is specified only in the data table referred to during the normal state.

Specifically, if the game state at the time the normal pattern fluctuation is executed is a normal state (normal pattern low probability state), and the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern A", The value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0 to 499" in the range of "Normal long fluctuation A (30 seconds)", and in the range of "500 to 999" "Normal long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" are defined respectively, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern B", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999", "normal pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)” is defined. Also, if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "out", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", "normal pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" 997, 998” and “Normal long fluctuation A (30 seconds)” are defined in “999” and “Normal long fluctuation B (60 seconds)”, respectively. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed is a time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), regardless of the lottery result of normal pattern fluctuation and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, "Normal figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is defined.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern A", that is, the normal pattern long open per, the normal pattern long fluctuation is the normal pattern fluctuation time It is designed to be easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to be elected per normal pattern long opening by executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect. In addition, it is configured so that a different variation time (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long variation in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed. As a result, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation effect to the start of the normal pattern long open game, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation effect is started It is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the shooting of the ball is stopped and the shooting of the ball is restarted after waiting for a specific period of time (for example, 60 seconds) to elapse.

Also, although it is slight, even if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is out, it is configured so that the normal pattern long fluctuation is selected, so even if the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed, the normal pattern It is possible to leave the possibility of not winning per Figure Long open. Therefore, the player can be entertained with the normal pattern variation effect to the end.

It should be noted that, in the fifth control example, when winning the "normal pattern hit A" which is a normal pattern long open per, it is configured so that long variation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected. , Not limited to this, for example, in some cases when winning "A per normal figure", "short fluctuation" or "middle fluctuation (10 to 15 second) may be configured to be selectable.And, when a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it is preferable to configure so that the normal figure variation effect is not executed.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the normal pattern long open per game without executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player, It is possible to predict the execution timing of the game per normal pattern long open, and make it difficult to perform the game of shooting the ball in accordance with the predicted timing.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern B" in which "per normal pattern short game" is executed as a per game per normal pattern, "long fluctuation" Although it is configured not to be executed, it is not limited to this and may be configured so that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small hit type selection 5 table 202EG is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the special figure lottery. This small hit type selection 5 table 202EG differs from the small hit type selection table 202E (see FIG. 244) of the above-described A1 embodiment in that the contents of the defined small hit type are changed, Other than that, they are identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 337, the small hit type selection 5 table 202EG will be described. Figure 337 (A) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per type selection 5 table 202EG, Figure 337 (B) is a schematic representation of the contents defined in the special figure 1 small per type selection 5 table 202EG1 FIG. 337(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small per type selection 5 table 202EG2.

The 5 jackpot scenario table 202EH and the 5 small jackpot scenario table 202EI are different from the jackpot scenario table 202AA and the small jackpot scenario table 202AB in the above-described A1 embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the content of the big winning game or the small winning game executed in the control example.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 333(B). The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fifth control example deletes the scenario counter 203AA and the specific control flag 203AB from the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 241(B)). , The difference is that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is added, and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The special figure 2 variation counter 203EA is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. And, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving end conditions that are set in plurality.

In this fifth control example, it is configured to vary the counter value set in the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA according to the jackpot type that has been elected. Thereby, according to big hit classification, the ease of completion|finish of a time saving state can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot, but also in the type of jackpot to be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 341(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341 (A), the ROM 222 in this control example is the variation pattern selection 5 table instead of the variation pattern selection table 222A for the ROM 222 of the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 251 (A)) 222EA is provided. Here, differences from the variation pattern selection table 222A described above will be mainly described, and detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 342, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA will be described. Figure 342 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA, FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in H.222EA3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 342(A), the variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA has three variation pattern selection tables associated with the game state and variation status. Normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA1 that is referred to in a certain case, time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA2 that is referred to when it is in the time saving state, and time saving final use that is referred to when it is the final variation of the time saving state It has a variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA3.

Regarding the normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA1 and the time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA2 described above, the same technical idea as the variation pattern selection table described in each control example or each embodiment described above It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected. , the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222EA3 is the final variation in the time saving state, that is, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation, refer to when selecting the production mode of the variation production for the special figure variation. In addition to the pattern type of the change, the lottery result, the number of special 2 reserved balls (value of the special 2 reserved ball counter 223C), the presence or absence of a hit in the reservation (winning prize information storage area 223A Different variation patterns (effect mode) are selected based on the determination result of whether or not winning information indicating winning is included in the winning information stored in .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342 (B), if the time saving final variation is a special figure 1, that is, among the time saving end conditions, one of the common time saving end conditions "Special figure fluctuation number 99 times If the special figure fluctuation when ” is established is the special figure 1 fluctuation, regardless of the lottery result of the variation, the number of special figure 2 pending balls, “Special figure 1 short time final” is selected as the variation pattern be done.

Next, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, the lottery result of the variation (response judgment result) is "hit", and the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final A" is selected, the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "1, 2", and if the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special figure 2 pending, "time saving final A" is selected as the variation pattern , If the prize information indicating the hit is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final B" is selected as a variation pattern.

Then, if the lottery result of the change (result of winning or not) is "hit", the number of special 2 pending balls is "3", and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special 2 pending, the change When "time saving final C" is selected as a pattern and winning information indicating a win is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final D" is selected as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, the lottery result of the variation (response judgment result) is "off", and the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final E ” is selected, and the number of special 2 pending balls is “1, 2”, and if the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special 2 pending, “time saving final B” is selected as the variation pattern, If the winning information indicating the hit is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "shortening final F" is selected as a variation pattern.

Also, if the lottery result of the change (result of judgment) is "out", the number of special 2 pending balls is "3", and the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special 2 pending, the change "Time saving final D" is selected as a pattern, and when winning information indicating a win is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "Time saving final E" is selected as a variation pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 341(B). FIG. 341B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341(B), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example has a state storage area 223EA, Series production flag 223EB, pseudo series production flag 223EC, time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED, small hit caution flag 223EE, non-fluctuation win prize flag 223EF, special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG, general figure fluctuation time counter 223EH, continuous series production flag 223EJ, The difference is that a series effect counter 223EK is added.

The state storage area 223EA is a storage area for temporarily storing the current game state, and stores information included in state commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. In this control example, in the state storage area 223EA, information indicating the game state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating the time saving end condition of the time saving state, and the hit type (jackpot type, Information indicating a small hit type) is configured to be stored. Based on the various information stored in the state storage area 223EA, the effect mode is configured to be variably set.

Although detailed description is omitted, the state storage area 223EA is configured to temporarily store the game state set in the past in addition to the information indicating the current game state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute variation based on the state of transition of the game state (from which game state to which game state).

The series effect flag 223EB is a flag for indicating that a condition for executing a series of effects is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing a series of effects is satisfied. Here, in this control example, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as the variation pattern of the special figure lottery that has been won, or when the long variation of the normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series of effects is configured so that

This series effect flag 223EB is, in the normal figure effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 371), when a series effect is set (C4207 in FIG. 371), or in the hit fluctuation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 373) , When a series of effects is set (C4402 in FIG. 373: YES), it is set to ON (C4208 in FIG. 371, C4403 in FIG. 373), and in the small hit related command process (see C3504 in FIG. 366 (A)) , It is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small winning game (C3701 in FIG. 366(A)). Also, it is referred to when determining whether or not a new series of effects can be executed in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370) and the normal figure effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371). Then, in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375), when it is determined that the continuous execution condition of the series effect is not established, it is set to OFF (see C4613 in FIG. 375).

As described above, in this control example, a series of effects are executed by a plurality of opportunities (special figure lottery, general figure lottery). Even in the case of such a configuration, by using the series effect flag 223EB, it is possible to suppress the repeated setting (execution) of the series of effects.

The pseudo series production flag 223EC is a flag for indicating that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is out and the execution condition of the series production is established, and the series production is set as the fluctuation production of the special figure fluctuation. It is set to ON when This pseudo series effect flag 223EC has a lower priority than the above-described series effect flag 223EB. , and when the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to ON, different effect setting processing is executed.

Specifically, when the series production flag 223EB is set to ON in the normal figure production setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) (for example, a series production is executed as a special figure fluctuation hit variation production case) is configured so that a new series of effects is not executed even if the normal pattern fluctuation satisfies the execution conditions of the series of effects, whereas the pseudo series of effects flag 223EC is set to ON. If it is (for example, if a series of production is executed as a variation production out of the special figure fluctuation), the normal figure fluctuation meets the execution conditions for a series of production, and meets the special conditions In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 371).

In this way, in a state in which the same series of effects is being executed, the process of executing a new series of effects (the process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed) based on the execution trigger of the series of effects being executed. Since it is possible to change whether to perform or not, it is possible to diversify the contents of the series of effects. Further, only when it is possible to display an effect result that is more advantageous to the player than the effect result of the series of effects being executed, the effect mode of the series of effects being executed is replaced. It is possible to make the player pay attention to a series of performances while expecting that .

The time saving final variation flag 223ED is a flag for indicating that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state, and is set to ON when the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state. . By setting the time saving final variation flag 223ED to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for the time saving final variation.

The small hit attention flag 223EE is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through the specific area even after a predetermined period of time has passed during the small hit game, and is a predetermined period (1 second) after the small hit game is started. is set to ON when the sphere has not passed through the specified area even after the elapse of . And, by setting the small hit caution flag 223EE to ON, the guidance display mode (see FIG. 325 (A)) for performing the right hitting game during the small hitting game is displayed. Then, it is set to OFF at the timing when the small winning game ends.

The non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67 It is set to ON when special figure 1 variation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, to enter a ball into the first winning port 64 and execute a special figure 1 lottery. Then, the normal pattern lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is the normal pattern long open hit, the electric accessory 640A. Since the normal figure long open hitting game is executed in which is long open, a right-handed game is performed in order to win the ball in the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

In other words, when the game is played normally, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in a state in which the normal state is set, when a game is played in which the ball is only passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right side game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when it is made. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth control example, the rate at which the ball fired by the left-handed game passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left-hand side game area is higher. It is constructed so that the percentage of balls passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the normal state, if you play a right-handed game and try to execute only the normal drawing lottery, even if you win the long open by the normal drawing lottery, the normal drawing It is configured so as not to execute the variable production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the normal pattern long open per game is executed for the player who performs the right hitting game in the normal state.

The special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG and the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH are counters for measuring each design fluctuation time, and when the design fluctuation is executed, the value corresponding to this fluctuation time is set. be. Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 . By using the values of the special figure variation time counter 223EG and the normal figure variation time counter 223EH, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each design variation time during design variation.

Continuous series production flag 223EJ is, during the period in which the series production is being executed, the continuous series production that is executed when the waiting period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more (see FIG. 317 (B) ) is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series effect counter 223EK is a counter for updating the effect scenario of the series effect, and when the series effect is set, a value corresponding to the effect period of the series effect to be executed this time is set. , is updated in effect update processing 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) that is periodically executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the series effect counter 223EK is set so as to indicate a period until the series effect is completed to the end (the effect (see FIG. 322(B) of FIG. 322B) for executing the jackpot game is executed). A rendering mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of a series of effects, the condition to end the effect (for example, the condition that is established when the ball does not enter the second winning port 640 during the normal game and the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained) is established. On the other hand, when the series of effects is to be terminated, the effect mode for indicating the end of the series of effects is set, and the value of the series of effects counter 223EK is reset to zero.

The re-read-ahead flag 223EM is a flag for indicating that it is necessary to re-execute the pre-reading process on the prize-winning information stored in the prize-winning information storage area 223A. set to on if In the fifth control example, as a variable production corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, a variable production (time saving final fluctuation production) in which the production mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation is set is configured to be executed. It is configured to execute the prefetching process for the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period, and to set the effect mode corresponding to the result of the prefetching.

The above-mentioned re-prefetching flag 223EM is set on when the final special figure fluctuation is being executed, and when a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period has elapsed, and is set on In the case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 variation of the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the prefetching process for the special figure 2 hold is executed again, and the variation effect based on the result of the prefetching process is executed.

Reservation upper limit flag 223EN is a flag for determining whether the number of special 2 reservation balls has reached the upper limit (4), and when the number of special 2 reservation balls reaches the upper limit (4) set to on. And it is referred when setting the production|presentation mode of time-saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation. Specifically, in the fifth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, the holding ball for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation during the first period of the final special figure fluctuation period To make it possible to execute the acquisition production, and during the second period after the first period, to make it possible to execute the time-saving final fluctuation production for showing the result of the lottery of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation. It is configured, and when the reservation upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON at the start time of the first period, the first period and the second period are used to execute the time saving final variation effect. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for acquiring a new special figure 2 hold for the player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit. The execution period of the time-saving final variation performance is lengthened for the player who is able to suppress the game and continuously acquires the special figure 2 reservation to the vicinity of the upper limit value, that is, the player who is continuously executing the right-handed game. can be set. Therefore, the player can continue to play the game, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223EQ is a flag for indicating that the time saving final variation performance is being executed as the variation performance corresponding to the final special figure variation, and is normally executed from the second period of the time saving final variation period. It is set to ON when the time saving final variation effect is executed from the first period set before the second period. In other words, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of special 2 reservations has reached the upper limit, and the time-saving final fluctuation production during the first period (production using the first period and the second period) is set to ON when it is determined that the second period is to be executed, and it is determined whether or not the execution completion flag 223EQ is set to ON at the start of the second period. Since the effect mode to be executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. And it is set to OFF when the stop command corresponding to time-saving final fluctuation|variation is received.

The special 2 winning flag 223ER is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the second winning port 640 during the normal game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A), and during the normal game ( It is set to ON when a ball wins in the second winning port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A. This special 2 winning flag 223ER is, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 in the updating process (see FIG. 376 (A)) during the game per normal figure (C4701 in FIG. 376 (A): YES), is set to ON (see C4705 in FIG. 376(A)), and is referenced in the series of effect update processing (see C4503 in FIG. 375) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see FIG. 375 C4608). In the process of C4608, if it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF) (C4608: NO in FIG. 375), it becomes a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed, and the end condition of a series of effects is established. Therefore, a process (C4612) for ending the series of effects is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 343 to 359. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2M seconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process 5 and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described. In addition, in the fifth control example, for convenience of explanation, the contents explained in each of the control examples and each embodiment described above are duplicated with different reference numerals attached. For portions where detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as the contents described in each control example and each embodiment are omitted, the contents described in each control example and each embodiment described above are applied. is. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the fifth control example, and are described in each control example and each embodiment described above. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the fifth control example.

343 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The timer interrupt processing 5 is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process 5, first, various prize winning switches are read (C101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 is executed (C103). Specifically, 1 is added to the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, the small per type counter C5, and the second per type counter C6. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999, 99, 239, 239, 99, 99 respectively in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process 5 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). . After that, the starting winning process 5 associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 5 and the starting winning process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process 5 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 5, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process 5, the through gate passage process 5 associated with the ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passage processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352. FIG.

After executing through gate passage processing 5, V entrance passage processing 5 is executed (C108), and then V passage processing 5 (C109) is executed. Details of V entrance passage processing 5 and V passage processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the V-passing process 5 (C109), the firing control process is executed (C110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 5 is terminated. . Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51A detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51B for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, special symbol variation processing 5 (C104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 5 (C104). This special symbol variation process 5 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the three-pattern display device 81 .

In this special symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big win (C201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (C201: YES), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (C201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (special symbol fluctuation) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37A and 37B is not fluctuating (during special figure fluctuation) (C202: NO), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is greater than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is not 0 (C204: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is set (C206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203B are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process 5 for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (C213). In addition, special symbol variation start processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (C204: NO), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D A value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is greater than 0 (C209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 0 (C209: NO), that is, when there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, this processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is not 0 (C209: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted (C210), and by the process of C210 A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is set (C211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of C211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (C212). After that, the process of C213 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when executing a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation), the special symbol 2 is set before the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). It is configured to determine the value of the number of reserved balls counter (N2), and when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls counter (N2) is greater than 0, the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is configured to execute processing for starting special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (special symbol variation start processing 5 (see C213)). Thereby, the second special symbol can be preferentially varied over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (C202: YES), the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (C214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C214: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (C214: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (C215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 5 is executed, a special symbol lottery is drawn based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. done. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is changed. According to this, any one of jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE and jackpot AF is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win is determined according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Any one of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE and small hit E is determined.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol (determination result of each type of counter) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit. , a red LED and a green LED are lit.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot AA is determined, the blue LEDs in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B indicate the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "A" ), and when the jackpot AB is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot AB (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "B"), and when the jackpot AC is determined It is lit in a mode indicating AC (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "C"), and when the jackpot AD is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot AD (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "D"). Let

Also, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is a small hit, the red LED is displayed for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit Lights up in a mode corresponding to AD, small hit AE and small hit E). The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, the mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) that indicates the contents of each hit type so that the player can grasp the hit type (big hit type or small hit type) determined as described above. , The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to light up in a mode formed from a lighting mode corresponding to each hit type), but other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol of this time and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode classified to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery result of the special symbol is different. .

After the process of C215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is a special symbol jackpot ( C216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (C216: YES), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot is awarded in correspondence with the jackpot type determined in the jackpot this time. Start setting (setting of jackpot such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

When the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202EH. Since the method for updating the jackpot scenario table is the same as the content described above with reference to FIG. 248 of the A1 control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of C218 is finished, next, the jackpot start flag 203H and the jackpot flag 203I are set to ON (C219), the value of the time saving counter 203G is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (C216: NO), the time saving update process is executed (C221). Details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters (second special symbol (special figure 2) A process of updating the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of special symbols) is executed. After executing the process of C221, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C222), and if it is determined to be a small hit (C222: YES), a small hit start setting process 5 (C223) is executed. Then, the processing of C225 described above is executed later, and this processing ends. Details of the small winning start setting process 5 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (C222: NO), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the time saving update process is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation ends (the timing when the special symbol variation time elapses). By configuring in this way, for example, when "1 special figure 2 fluctuation number of times" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition which is part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set, and the special figure 2 change is executed Even if it is done, the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation stops can be made into a time saving state, so it is possible to secure the period to acquire the special figure 2 hold.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the fifth control example, it may be configured to execute the time saving update process at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, in this case, the period of one special figure 2 fluctuation is secured as a time saving state In order to do so, it may be configured to set "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times 2 times" as the corresponding time saving end condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small win", or "special symbol loss". Lottery (whether judgment) is performed, and the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed by the first design display devices 37A, 37B and the third design display device 81 is determined.

In the special symbol variation start process 5, first, a first hit random number counter stored in a common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B). C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type counter C5, to obtain each value of the variation type counter CS1 (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special design is determined based on the special design jackpot random number table (special design 1 random number 5 table 202EA1, special design 2 random number 5 table 202EA2) corresponding to the type of special design (special design 1, special design 2). Acquire (C232) and move to the process of C233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is changed to the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 ( 334(B)) are compared one by one with the four random values set. As described above, as the random number value for the first special symbol jackpot, four numbers of "0 to 3" are set. When the numerical values match, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is obtained. Similarly, the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 and the two random numbers "10, 11" that are small hits set in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 (see FIG. 334 (B)) If they match, it is determined to be a small hit of a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined as a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied according to the type of the special symbol, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with the higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make a game by itself.

In addition, in this control example, the first winning random number 5 table 202EA is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the small winning, but only one of the special symbols wins the small winning. The first winning random number 5 table 202EA may be set so as to win . Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 corresponding to the second special symbol is It is better to set the random number value that will be the small hit of the special symbol only. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege (small winning game) that can be given to the player according to the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is in a predetermined range (0 to 3), and the special symbol jackpot is made to correspond to the other range (4 to 999) according to the type of special symbol. However, as another configuration, for example, the value of a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Furthermore, in this control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number 5 table 202EA are used to perform a lottery (big win, small win, loss) for a special symbol. Alternatively, a plurality of winning random number tables may be used to draw a special symbol. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit using the second random number table. may be configured. By performing the special symbol lottery using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the special symbol lottery result can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the special symbol lottery result can be suppressed. .

In this control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used when performing the lottery for the special symbols, but other configurations may be used. A random number 5 table 202EA may be used to draw a special symbol. In this case, for example, based on the value of the first random number counter, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and based on the value of the second random number counter, the special symbol lottery result is small. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

Returning to FIG. 345, the description continues. In the process of C233, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of C232 is a special symbol jackpot (C233). If it is determined to be a special pattern jackpot (C233: YES), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 5 table 202EB corresponding to the type of special pattern corresponding to this special pattern lottery ( C234), set the display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type (C235), determine the big win variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (C236), and follow the determined big win variation pattern. A corresponding variation pattern command is set (C243), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: NO), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (C237). If it is determined (C237: YES), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 5 table 202EG corresponding to the special design type corresponding to this special design lottery (C238), and the special design and the small A display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), a small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (C240), and a variation corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time. A pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of C237, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (C237: NO), that is, if it is determined that the result of this lottery is a loss, the loss corresponding to the type of special symbol Set the display mode of the time (C241), determine the variation pattern at the time of loss based on the number of held balls (C242), set the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of loss determined this time (C243), End this process.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending balls, whereas the special symbol If the result of the lottery is lost, the variation pattern is different according to the number of held balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a shorter variation time. As a result, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the period until the lottery result (loss), in which the special pattern lottery result does not give a benefit to the player, is displayed. In order to increase the number of lotteries of the special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the special symbol variation time for one time, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a state in which the special symbols are not varied during the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play.

In this control example, it is configured to vary the variation pattern based on the number of held balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) is executed. On the condition that the number of held balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the is fluctuating, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed may be shortened. good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbols are fluctuating.

In addition, in this control example, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern may be varied based on the number, or it may be configured such that the larger the number of held balls, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Of the 2 special symbols, only the value of the number of held balls of the second special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be sufficient, or the special symbol on the side to be the target of the special symbol variation start processing to be performed this time. Only the value of the number of retained balls in the design may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346, the time saving update process (C221) will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203G during the time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). In addition, the time-saving medium counter 203G is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state of normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203G is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state of normal symbols. In addition, in the fifth control example, two game states can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set two game states: normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) and time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) It consists of That is, in this control example, the probability state of the special symbol is always constant, and only the probability state of the normal symbol can be variably set. Therefore, there is a case where the normal state is used as a term indicating the low probability state of the time saving state and the normal symbol as the term indicating the high probability state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 0 (C251: NO), since the time saving state is not set, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203G is 1 or more (C251: YES), that is, if it is determined that the current time is in the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203G is subtracted by 1 (C252), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation of this time is the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). If the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure 2 fluctuation (C253: YES), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time short number command indicating the value of various counters is set (C255), and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C255, the value of the counter 203G during the time saving, the remaining time shortening command indicating the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is set. Remaining time reduction number command set here, by the external output process (see C1001 in Figure 357) of the main process (see Figure 357) to be described later, to the voice lamp control device 113 as part of the state command indicating the gaming state output. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined that the state command (remaining time reduction command) is received in the command determination process 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360) (C3212 in FIG. 360), included in the received command Information is extracted, and the current game state (remaining time reduction count) is stored in the state storage area 223EA. This makes it possible to predict (discriminate) the remaining time period of the time saving state currently set in the voice lamp control device 113, and to set the effect mode according to the remaining time of the time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, every time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 346) is executed, the remaining time saving number command for indicating the remaining time saving number of times is output from the main controller 110. , Without being limited to this, for example, when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game is finished) time saving end condition command for indicating the time saving end condition set at the time the time saving end condition is output to the voice lamp control device 113 Configured to extract the time saving end condition from the time saving end condition command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side, and then the command indicating the special figure fluctuation output from the main control device 110 side (variation pattern command) received number of times may be accumulated, and it may be determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the accumulated value. By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main controller 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if the current special figure variation is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C253: NO), the process of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203G is 0 (C256). If the value of the time-saving counter 203G is 0 (C256: YES), it means that the time-saving end condition (common time-saving end condition) is satisfied, so it is determined whether the corresponding time-saving end condition is satisfied among the time-saving end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA for the purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the counter 203G during time saving is not 0 (C256: NO), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is 0 (C258). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is 0 (C258: YES), because the time saving end condition (corresponding time saving end condition) is established, the establishment of the common time saving end condition among the time saving end conditions The value of the counter 203G during time saving for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is not 0 in the process of C258 (C258: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of C260, the gaming state is set to the normal state (C260), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then the processing is terminated.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 346) is, among the time saving end conditions, a plurality of time saving end conditions that can be satisfied based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol (part of the common time saving end conditions, and It is constituted so as to be able to discriminate the establishment status of corresponding time reduction end conditions), and when any one of the time reduction end conditions is established, the value of a parameter for establishing the other time reduction end conditions is also reset. Thereby, even if time saving end conditions are satisfied based on the value of which parameter, the state after ending a time saving state can be unified.

In addition, in this control example, as a time saving end condition, a common time saving end condition that is set in common regardless of the time saving state set based on which jackpot type (first end condition that is established when the jackpot is elected, The second end condition that is established after the end of the game, the third end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations (total of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times) and the jackpot type It is configured to set the corresponding time-saving end condition (condition that is established when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined number), but the condition for ending the time-saving state is not limited to this For example, when the number of times of winning a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times, a small winning end condition may be set. In this case, the small winning end condition may be set as a common time saving end condition, or may be set as a corresponding time saving end condition. In addition, an end lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special figure variation) is provided, and when the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result for ending the time saving state. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, so that the game in the time saving state can be executed while giving the player a thrilling feeling. . In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation as a lottery result of a special symbol) is established during the time saving state, various parameters related to the time saving end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only the time saving state that is set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set (for example, until the special figure fluctuation number reaches 30 times), You may comprise so that the various parameters regarding time saving end conditions may not be updated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably set the period during which the time saving state continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

A discriminating means capable of discriminating that the ball did not enter the V winning port 650A despite the execution of the small winning game is provided, and the discriminating means determines that the ball does not enter the V winning port 650A. You may comprise so that the time-saving forced termination conditions satisfied when it is discriminate|determined may be set as common time-saving termination conditions. By configuring in this way, the small hit type set when the small hit is won is determined, and the determination result is a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a ball in a specific area in the V winning opening 650A If it is determined that it is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player (jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game that does not set a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the end), A penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an illegal game such as not shooting a ball during a small winning game and aiming for winning the next small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, small winning start setting processing 5 (C223) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing small winning start setting processing 5 (C223). In this small win start setting process 5 (C223), a scenario is set for opening and closing the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650B when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery. Processing is performed.

In the small winning start setting process 5 (C223), first, based on the small winning scenario 5 table 202EI, a scenario (winning scenario) corresponding to the set small winning type is set (C291). Next, set the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined to the V passing time jackpot type value (C292), set the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type (C293), and set the small hit middle flag 203K is turned on (C294), and the process ends. In addition, since the detailed update method of the small winning scenario (winning scenario) in this process is the same as that of the above-described A1 embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 348, start winning process 5 (C105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 5 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) in this embodiment. This startup winning process 5 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the winning to the first ball entrance (award winning opening) 64 or the second ball entrance (award winning opening) 640 It is a process for determining the presence or absence of (starting winning), acquiring various random number counters when there is a starting winning, and executing the holding process of the value.

When the starting winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance (winning opening) 64 (starting winning) (C301). Here, the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is changed. Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (C303).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: NO), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter If the value (N1) of 203D is not less than 4 (C303: NO), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: YES) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 (C303: YES), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (C304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in C103 of the above-described timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) , 2nd hit random number counter C4, small hit type counter C5, variation type counter CS1, each value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 out of the empty reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) Store in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from C307 to C312, the same processing as in the processing from C301 to C306 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning entrance) 640 as well. The only difference is that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is reserved for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640, and the other processes are the same. detailed description is omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of C307 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C307: NO), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is less than 4. If not (C309: NO), prefetching process 5 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 349, prefetching process 5 (C313) will be described. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing 5 (C313). When the look-ahead process 5 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (C321). If there is no new winning (C321: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (C321: YES), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C322).

In the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C322: YES), by the processing of C306 or C312 of the starting winning processing 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) Using the acquired various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202EA1 (see FIG. 334 (B)), special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB1 (see FIG. 335 (B)) and special figure 1 small per type selection Based on the 5 table 202EG1 (see FIG. 337(B)), the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C322: NO), special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202EA2 (see FIG. 334 (C)), special 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202EB2 (see FIG. 335 (C)) and special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table 202EG2 (see FIG. 337 (C)) Lottery results, jackpot type and small hit type are acquired based on (C324), the process proceeds to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-described C323 or C324 process is set ( C325). Then, this processing ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the look-ahead process 5 (see C313 in FIG. 349) in the fifth control example, in addition to the look-ahead result described above, when a special figure variation based on the corresponding winning information is executed The variation pattern (variation time) to be set is also configured to be discriminable in advance. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is also acquired by the processing of C306 or C312 of the start winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348), and C323 of the look-ahead process 5 (see C313 in FIG. 349) Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 5 table 202EE (see FIG. 339), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. there is As a result, it becomes possible to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure variation corresponding to the stored prize information will be executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, normal symbol variation processing 5 (C106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 350 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 5 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640A It is a process for controlling such as.

In the normal symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (C601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the electric accessory 640A is controlled to open and close. As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (C601: YES), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (C602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (C602: NO), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is greater than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (C604: NO), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (C604: YES), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203G during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203G is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal-symbol time-saving state. , and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203G is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203G is 1 or more (C608: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so obtained by the process of C607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random number 5 table 202EC for high probability (see FIG. 334 (D)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (C609 ). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal 5 per symbol random number table 202EC for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 334(D)).

In the process of C608, when the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 0 (C608: NO), the process proceeds to C610. In the process of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of C607 and the low Based on the normal symbol random number 5 table 202EC (see FIG. 334(D)) for probability time, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (C610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal 5 per symbol random number table 202EC for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 334(D)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of C609 or C610 is a normal symbol win (C611), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol win (C611: YES), Next, per general pattern type selection 5 table 202ED is used to set per general pattern type (per general pattern A, per general pattern B) (C612). Concretely, the value of the second hit type counter C6 is compared with the random value stored in the type selection 5 table 202ED per normal pattern. As described above, when the current game state is a time saving state (high probability state of normal pattern), if the value of the second per type counter C6 is in the range of "0, 1", it is per normal pattern A If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that it is a normal pattern hit B (see FIG. 336 (A)). Alternatively, if the current game state is a normal state (low probability state of normal pattern), if the value of the second per type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is per normal pattern A, " If it is in the range of 1 to 99", it is determined that it is a normal hit B (see FIG. 336(A)).

Next, the display mode for winning is set based on the setting result of C612 (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that it is not a normal pattern hit (C611: NO), this normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is a case of loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set. (C614), the process proceeds to C615.

In the process of C615, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 1 or more (C615: YES), the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF Among them, the normal pattern fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the prescribed contents corresponding to the time saving state (normal pattern high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C615, if the value of the counter 203G during time saving is 0 (C615: NO), out of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202EF, normal using the prescribed contents corresponding to the normal state (normal pattern low probability) The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and then various contents set in this process (the value of the normal design holding ball number counter 203F, the lottery result of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design ) is set (C623), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: YES), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (C618). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of C616 or C617 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of C618, if the variable time has not elapsed (C618: NO), the process proceeds to C623 and ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C618, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (C618: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the process of C619, if the normal symbol lottery wins and the display mode is set by the process of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of C619, when the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or C614.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 5 is a normal symbol hit. (C620). If the result of the lottery this time is a win for a normal symbol (C620: YES), the opening pattern of the electric accessary is set according to the type of normal symbol and the game state (C621), and the opening/closing control processing of the electric accessary is set. (C622), after that, it moves to C623, sets a command for showing the contents of the normal figure per game set by the process of C621, and ends this process. By the process of C621, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640A is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed, the electric accessory 640A The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the process of C616 or the process of C617 ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C620, if the lottery result of this time is normal symbol deviation (C620: NO), the processing of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process of C623 is shifted, and the normal symbol deviation fluctuation is stopped. A command indicating is set, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, through gate passage processing 5 (C107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. This through gate passage processing 5 (C107) judges whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, and when the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is changed. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (C431: YES), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: NO), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: NO), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (C433: YES), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F 1 is added to the value (M) of (C434), and the normal figure holding ball number command is set (C435). Then, the values of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit type counter C6 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt process 5 described above, and the second The value of the variation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203 (C436), and the process proceeds to C437. .

In addition, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty reservation areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is referred to, and the value is If 0, make the first reserved area the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of C437, normal map prefetch processing is executed (C437), and then this processing is terminated. In addition, although the details of this general pattern prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, before the normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern fluctuation) is executed, the process of determining in advance the lottery result of the normal pattern reservation and the fluctuation pattern is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 352, the normal map prefetching process (C437) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing normal map prefetching processing (C437) executed in through gate passage processing 5 (see FIG. 351).

In general pattern look-ahead processing (C437), first, per normal pattern random number 5 table 202EC (see FIG. 334 (D)), per general pattern type selection 5 table 202ED (see FIG. 336 (A)), and general pattern fluctuation pattern A lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), and a winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), after which this process is terminated. The prize information command set here (a prize information command indicating the result of prefetching of the normal map) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 357). ) is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (C1001). When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it determines whether the received winning information command is a winning information command relating to special figure fluctuation or a winning information command relating to normal figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223A. . The winning information stored here is actually the timing before the symbol variation (special figure variation or normal figure variation) corresponding to the winning information command is executed, the lottery result of the symbol variation. It is referred to when setting the suggestive effect to suggest.

Next, V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343). Note that this V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) has the same processing contents as the V entrance passage processing (see S108 in FIG. 270) of the above-described A1 embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V entrance passage processing 5 (C108), first, it is determined whether or not the present is during a winning game (during a small winning game) (C501). : NO), and the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current winning game is in progress (small winning game in progress) (C501: YES), next, during the V winning opening opening period, that is, it is determined whether or not the small winning game is in progress. (C502). In the process of C502, if it is determined that the V winning opening is open (C502: YES), the V entrance passing command is set (C503), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (C502: NO), it means that the ball has won the V winning opening 650A of the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (C504), and the process ends.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute the effect during the small winning game based on the winning to the V winning device 650 .

Next, V passage processing 5 (C109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing V passage processing 5 (C109) executed in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343). Note that this V passing process 5 (C109) has the same technical concept as the V passing process (see S109 in FIG. 271) of the above-described A1 embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the V passage processing 5 (C109) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is V passage, that is, whether or not the ball has won a prize in a specific area (V gate (V area)) within the V winning opening 650A (C601). , If it is determined that no prize has been won (C601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a prize has been won (C601: YES), then it is determined whether the current V valid period is in effect (C602). In the process of C602, when the progress of the small winning scenario set during the small winning game is within the specific period, it is determined that it is within the V valid period, and in other cases, it is not during the V valid period. and discriminate.

In the process of C602, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (C602: YES), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is in progress (C603), and if it is in the small winning game (C603 : YES), acquire the V passing time jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game this time (C604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and set the time saving medium counter 203G Set to 0 (C606), set the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA to 0 (C607), and proceed to the process of C608.

That is, in the processing of C604 to C607, the processing for executing the big winning game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the processing of C603, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (C603: NO), since there is no need to perform the processing for newly executing the big winning game, the processing of C604 to C607 is skipped. , C608.

In the process of C608, a V pass command is set (C608), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during the small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game succeeds, and following the small winning game , an effect is executed to indicate that a jackpot game is to be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big winning game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the small winning game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small winning game is executed.

In this embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning opening 650A is set. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) to indicate that the ball has not won a prize. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 650 .

On the other hand, in the processing of C602, if it is determined that the current period is not within the V effective period (C602: NO), an error command is set (C609), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of C609, the state in which the game ball has entered the V winning opening 650A outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally made to enter the V winning opening 650A with the game ball, or when the V winning It is possible to quickly notify the outside of the case where a problem (ball clogging, etc.) occurs in the ball flow path in the port 650A.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 355 is a flow chart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 356 is a flow chart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (C902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904). A payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (C904: NO), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if not stored (C905: NO). , there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). Send the command (C912).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: NO), If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (C912). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets the initial value, and is ready to start the game ball payout control. becomes. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (C914). After that, the processing shifts to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on, power failure occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: YES), the data is backed up in the RAM 203. While retaining the data, clear the power failure occurrence information (C908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (C909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Then, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (C910), and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (C911). Next, the interrupt is permitted, and the main processing, which will be described later, is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 357 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4M seconds, and counter update processes of C1011 and C1012 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 357), first, during execution of timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. (C1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343) is determined. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process 5 (see Figure 344), start winning process 5 (see Figure 348), V entrance passing process 5 (see Figure 353) and V passing process 5 (see Figure 354) It is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, various commands set in the opening command, the round number command, the ending command and the small hit control processing 5 (see FIG. 359) set in the jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 358) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 Send. In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, each variation type counter (variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2) is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the various fluctuation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203 . Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special figure variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 The value is used when referring to the variation pattern of normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation). And it is configured to be executed by the establishment of a separate and independent opportunity between the special figure fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation. As a result, even if the timing of updating the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the contents of updating are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation will not be synchronized. None. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing contents of the main controller 110 without affecting the game.

In addition to this, the processing for updating the values of the various fluctuation type counters may be configured not to be synchronized. For example, each time the main processing is executed a predetermined number of times, the value of one fluctuation type counter may be updated, and only the value of the other variation type counter may be updated each time it is executed a specific number of times different from the above-described predetermined number of times. By differentiating the update contents of the various fluctuation type counters in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of one fluctuation type counter from being determined based on the acquired value of the other fluctuation type counter.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the variation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation, and the second variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, Provided separately, configured to periodically update each counter value, but not limited to this, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of the special figure variation and the normal figure variation may be configured to select .

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003). , the execution of the jackpot effect and the jackpot control processing 5 for opening or closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65A of the variable prize winning device 65 (C1004). In the jackpot control process 5, the winning door 65B is opened for each round in the jackpot state to open the specific winning port 65A. Determine whether or not a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65A is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). Further, the details of this jackpot control process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, small hit control processing 5 (C1005) is executed. A detailed description of this small hit control process 5 (C1005) will be given later with reference to FIG. After that, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640A associated with the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of C622 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 350), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of C616 or C617 in the normal symbol variation process 5 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of C236, the process of C240 or the process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. , the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of C236, the process of C240 or the process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345) ends, The variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (the first 1 symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), it is executed in the second symbol display device. Ending the variable display, in the display mode set by the processing of C613 or the processing of C619 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 350), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device indicate.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4M seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: YES), the process proceeds to C1001, and the above-described processes after C1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (C1010: NO), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, various fluctuation type counters can be updated randomly.

In addition, in the configuration that updates the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 as in the fifth control example, in order to make the update timings of the various variation type counters different, for example, in C1002 of the main processing In the process, both fluctuation type counters are updated, and in the process of C1012, only one fluctuation type counter (for example, the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be updated.

In addition, in the process of C1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009: YES), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process has been executed, so the power-off process after C1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (C1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (C1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (C1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the process of C1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of C1001. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of C1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from C1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 358 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 5 (C1004). This jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, variable winning device This is a process for opening or closing the 65 specific winning opening 65A. In addition, in the jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the same control processing as the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 275) in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed. There is Therefore, detailed description of the content described in the above-described jackpot control processing (see FIG. 275), modification examples, and additional examples will be omitted, but regarding the content described in each control example or each embodiment described above are of course also applicable.

In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203H is on (C1201). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203H is ON (C1201: YES), the opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot middle flag 203I is set to ON, and the jackpot start flag 203H is set to OFF (C1203). , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203H is off (C1201: NO), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203I is on (C1204).

In the processing of C1204, when it is determined that the flag 203I during the big hit is off (C1204: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203I is on (C1204: YES), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the process of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: YES), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (Opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65A The specific winning opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65B is open), then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (C1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed while satisfying a predetermined continuous condition, the number of rounds executed during a plurality of jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds obtained is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the accumulated number of rounds is determined by determining whether a continuous condition is established when a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (that the jackpot has been won) is received on the voice ramp control device 113 side, and the number of continuous rounds is determined. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative round number counter that accumulates the received round number commands is not cleared, and the value of the cumulative round number counter is updated based on the newly received round number command. Then, the accumulated number of rounds is displayed in a display form showing the update result.

With this configuration, the player can be made to think that the consecutively executed jackpot games are one jackpot game. You can show a lot of the maximum number of rounds that can be played. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while having expectations for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one big winning game.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to perform the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds. A part of the processing for executing the number display may be configured to be executed by the main controller 110 side. A continuous condition that is established when the jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 5 special figure 2 fluctuations) is set, and the accumulated round number of the jackpot game is measured on the main control device 110 side. A cumulative round number counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round number counter is set as a round number command. Then, the value of the accumulated round number counter is cleared when the special figure 2 variation is executed five times after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, when the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, the value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. , When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (accumulated round number) information included in the command. The accumulated number of rounds can be notified to the player only by

In addition, as a continuous condition for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games, other conditions may be set. is executed, the period until 10 seconds have elapsed since the end of the jackpot game) If the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen that is continuously displayed is displayed ( For example, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery) and the condition established as the game state, the jackpot game is executed during the period when the specific game state (for example, time saving state) is set It may be configured to set a condition that is established when the In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the cumulative round number counter (accumulated round number) and the round number (single round number) of the current jackpot game are displayed. may be configured.

In the processing of C1205, if it is determined that the current timing is not the time to start a new round (C1205: NO), then it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208). If it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: YES), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65F2 is turned off so that the opening/closing door 65B of the specific winning opening 65A is closed) ) (C1209), and then the process ends. In the process of C1208, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not satisfied (C1208: NO), then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start of the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that now is the time to start the ending effect (C1210: YES), an ending command is set (C1211), and then this process ends.

In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of C1208, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process after the next time.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, when it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (C1210: NO), it is determined whether the current timing is the end timing of the ending effect (C1212). When it is determined that the current is the end timing of the ending production (C1212: YES), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the time saving medium counter 203G and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA (C1213), and the jackpot A state command corresponding to the subsequent game state is set (C1214), the end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the values set to the values of the counters in the process of C1213 are varied according to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see FIGS. 335 and 337). When the type AD ~ AF is set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203G, and "-" indicating that it is not set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is set. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, as the time saving end condition, the corresponding time saving end condition established based on the special figure 2 fluctuation number is not set, and the common time saving end condition (jackpot winning, small winning game End of, special figure fluctuation number reaches 99 times) only will be set.

When the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203G, "5" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA, and when the jackpot AC is set, the time saving medium counter "99" is set to 203G, and "1" is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203EA.

Further, when a jackpot game is executed based on the winning of a small hit, the value of the jackpot type corresponding to the set small hit type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. At the end of the big win game based on the small win winning in which the types AA and AE are set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203G, "5" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203EA, and the small win types AB and AD. At the end of the big hit game based on the set small hit winning, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203G, and "-" indicating that it is not set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA is set. On the other hand, at the end of the big win game based on the small win winning in which the small win type AC is set, "0" is set to the time saving medium counter 203G, and "0" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203EA.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current timing is not the ending time of the ending effect (C1212: NO), the process ends.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 359 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process 5 (C1005). This small hit control process 5 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), setting commands for executing various effects according to the small hit in the audio lamp control device 113, V winning This is processing for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600B attached to the mouth 650A.

In the small hit control process 5 (C1005), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the processing of C1301, it is determined whether or not the small winning scenario set in the processing of C291 of the small winning start setting processing 5 (see C223 in FIG. 347) indicates the start of the small winning game. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: YES), the opening command for the small hit is set (C1302), the flag 203K during the small hit is set to ON (C1303), and the operation for the small hit The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small winning middle flag 203K is ON (C1305). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203K is off (C1305: NO), it is not during the small hit game at present, so this process is terminated as it is. In the process of C1305, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203K is ON (C1305: YES), it is then determined whether or not it is time to end the small hit game (C1306). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning game (C1306), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306: YES), the small winning medium flag 203K is set to OFF (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203G is reset to 0 (C1308), and it is determined whether the V flag 203N is set to ON (C1309). As described above, in the fifth control example, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area during the small winning game, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203G after the small winning game ends. It is configured as follows.

One condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set by the processing of this C1308. In other words, when the small winning game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state also ends with the end of the small winning game, for example, during the time saving state, the small winning game being executed is disadvantageous to the player During the small winning game so that the big winning game based on the small winning game being executed is not executed when it is determined that it is the small winning type (for example, the small winning type in which the big winning game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed) It is possible to prevent a game in which the ball is not shot (the ball is not passed through the specific area) from being played.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the value of the time saving counter 203G is always set (reset) to "0" when the small winning game is completed, but it is not limited to this, for example, When a small winning game based on a specific small winning type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203G may be set (reset) to "0" after the small winning game ends.

In the process of C1309, if it is determined that the V flag 203N is off (C1309: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203N is ON (C1309: YES), then the start of the jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203N is set to OFF. (C1311), and then the process ends.

In addition, in this control example, all small winning games are set as one round games, so unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting commands related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in this control example, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, when the game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650A in the small winning game, the big winning game corresponding to the preset big winning type corresponding to the small winning is executed. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the jackpot type by acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650A.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 375. FIG. Among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example, the details of the control processes that are the same as those in the above-described control examples or the respective embodiments are described below. detailed description and illustrations are omitted.

In the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 317, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation (general symbol variation ), and the normal figure fluctuation production according to ) are configured to be executable.

Then, the normal pattern fluctuation performance is configured to be executed as a series of performances in which a series of performances are executed across the normal pattern fluctuation period, the normal pattern per game period, the special pattern 2 fluctuation period, and the small per pattern game period. there is By configuring in this way, the game when winning a specific normal pattern (per normal pattern long open) by the normal pattern lottery, that is, the ball during the normal pattern long open per game Wins the second winning port 640 Then, a small win is won by a special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning, and the ball passes through a specific area in the V prize opening 650A during the small win game to execute the big win game. The flow can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the performance mode of the series of performances.

In addition, the series of effects described above, the execution period is greatly different depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time of winning the ball in the second winning port 640 during the game per normal long open, It is configured to set different performance modes according to the game situation (presence or absence of special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640 during the long open per game. In other words, when the ball wins the second winning port 640 during the normal long open per game, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation after the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is completed Since is executed, the effect mode according to the length of the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation is set. Specifically, when the waiting period is less than the predetermined period, an effect mode corresponding to the normal series of effects is set, and when the waiting period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the series of effects are pseudo-finished and are being executed. When the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation reaches a specific period, a continuous series performance is set to execute a series of performances in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the effect mode of the series of effects to be variably set in accordance with the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of effects that do not make the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game due to the uselessly lengthening of the performance execution period.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open game, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed, the special figure 2 immediately after the ball enters the second winning hole 640 Since variation is executed, a shortened series of effects shorter than the normal series of effects is set.

That is, the fifth control example is configured such that when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the above-described series of effects is It is executed when the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery (lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67) executed during the normal state is a specific lottery result (per normal pattern long open). Since it is configured as such, while a series of effects are being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, the usual series of productions are the normal figure fluctuation period, the normal figure per game period, the waiting period (the period to wait until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed), the special figure 2 fluctuation period, and the small per game period. It is constructed so that it is executed straddling and the content of the effect is changed according to the stage to which each period is shifted.

Here, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, the above-mentioned series of effects are executed Among the periods, the standby period Since does not occur, after the game period per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation period will be set. While such a state can occur, regardless of the game situation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open game, the same production mode If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the standby period is in progress even though the standby period is not set) may be executed, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. .

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, during the standby period described above It is configured to execute a series of effects skipping the effects. In addition, even if the performance of the standby period is skipped, the performance mode does not give a sense of incongruity to the player when skipping from the normal figure per game period to the special figure 2 fluctuation period so that the performance effect does not decrease. is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the general pattern fluctuation production (series production) executed based on the lottery result of the general pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 318, as a variation effect indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the first suggestion effect that suggests only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery And, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, the judgment result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the prize information included in the special figure 2 reservation is determined in advance. Suggestive production and are configured to be executable.

Specifically, in the time saving state, it is determined whether the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) to be executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation) If it is determined, the above-described first suggestion effect (see FIG. 327 (A)) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined that it is a time saving final variation, the special figure 2 The above-described second suggestion effect (see FIGS. 327(B) to 329(A)) is executed as a change effect corresponding to the change.

By configuring in this way, in the variation performance corresponding to the final variation of the time saving, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state (after normal state transition) , Because the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) is executed, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state ends for the player is executed as if it were during the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery can be reminiscent, the winning probability (big winning probability, small winning probability) in the time saving state can be made to be higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set a production mode (success production mode shown in FIG. 329 (A)) indicating winning in a dedicated production (for example, mission production shown in FIG. 328 (B)) executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the performance effect of the dedicated performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the variation time (normal state It is configured so that a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during), and during the variation period of the special figure 2 variation, it corresponds to the short final variation It is configured to display the effect result of the second suggestive effect that is executed by doing. By configuring in this way, when the successful production is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small winning) winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation as the second suggestive production, the special winning small winning Until the change in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed, the second suggestive effect can be continuously executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the effect period of the variable effect executed corresponding to the time-saving final variation is divided into a plurality of effect periods, and each effect period is used for a different purpose. Specifically, during the first period from the execution of the time-saving final variation to the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the player acquires a large number of special figures 2 pending before the variation ends. It is configured to execute an effect (holding acquisition effect) for making the game available, and to execute the above-described second suggestion effect during a second period set after the first period.

Then, the production mode of the second suggestive production executed during the second period of the time saving final variation is the special figure 2 at the specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of pending and the result of prior determination.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends (when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out), the special figure 2 lottery can be executed the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the holding acquisition effect and the second suggestion effect are executed in the time saving final variation. This executes the pending acquisition effect during the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed before the time saving final variation, and acquired the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 suspension while the pending acquisition effect is being executed. Even so, when the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time saving final variation, the special figure 2 reservation is subtracted, so the player is allowed to execute the special figure 2 lottery the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to

In addition, in this fifth control example, as the second suggestion production that is executed in the time saving final fluctuation, a plurality of special figure 2 lotteries that are the target of production (special figure 2 lottery of time saving final fluctuation, special figure 2 reservation Although it is configured to set a production mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included in the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery), it is not limited to this, and is the object of production. It may be configured to set an effect mode for suggesting and informing the player of the number of winning lottery results included in a plurality of special figure 2 lotteries. In this case, for example, as the effect mode of the second suggestive effect, the fact that at least one win is included in a plurality of special 2 lotteries to be the target of the effect, is included in the effect mode of the normal second suggestive effect. It is also possible to set a special performance mode in which the player can be informed earlier than the above, and to execute a win number suggesting performance for suggesting and informing the player of the winning number in the special performance mode. In this way, by notifying the player that the winning is included as early as possible, the player can be given a sense of security, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect of suggesting how many winnings are included. can.

First, referring to FIG. 360, command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 360 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 5 (C3113). This command determination process 5 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example, and is executed during the main process (see FIG. 139). This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from.

In the command determination process 5, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (C3201). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: YES), the winning information command process 5 is executed (C3202), and this process ends.

Winning information command processing 5 (C3202) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 361 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning information command processing 5 (C3202). Winning information command processing 5 (C3202) is executed when a winning information command is received from main controller 110 during command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113. A process for storing the information included in the received prize information command in the corresponding area (reserved storage area corresponding to the prize information command) of the prize information storage area 223A provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

The information included in the winning information command includes information on the result of win/fail judgment, information on the stop type, information on the variation pattern, and the pattern type (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) corresponding to the winning information this time. However, other information may be included, for example, winning information on already winning balls (for which a winning information command has been received in the past) may be included. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this fifth control example, since the main control device 110 is configured to set the winning information command for indicating the prefetch result of the normal symbol (see FIG. 352), In the winning information storage area 223A, in addition to an area for storing special symbol winning information, an area for storing normal symbol winning information is also formed.

When the winning information command process 5 (C3202) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223A (C3401), and the winning status determination process (C3402) is executed. Execute. As described above, the winning information storage area 223A stores up to four winning information commands for the first special symbol (special figure 1), up to four winning information commands for the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured to be able to store up to 4 prize winning commands of normal symbols, totaling 12 prize winning information commands, and the prize winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area in accordance with the order in which the prize winning information commands are received. .

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command process 5 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the winning information of the normal design (general design) A game state at the time of receiving a command is discriminated, a process for setting a different performance mode based on the discrimination result, and a proper game (left-handed game) is discriminated in a normal state. process is executed.

In the winning status determination process (C3402), first, it is determined whether or not there is a general figure winning (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to the general figure) (C3451). When it is determined that it is not a normal drawing prize (C3451: NO), the process proceeds to C3458, which will be described later. If it is determined that it is a normal drawing prize (C3451: YES), then the current game state is read from the state storage area 223EA provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the game state is a normal state. (C3453). If it is determined that the game state is not the normal state (C3453: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is the time-saving state, this processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to winning information command processing 5.

On the other hand, in the processing of C3453, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: YES), then it is determined whether the current first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating (C3454 ). Here, by determining whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223EG corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is greater than 0, it is determined whether the current special figure 1 variation is in progress. If it is determined that the current is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (C3454: NO), the normal figure fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed during the normal state, so in RAM223 The provided non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF to ON in the processing of C3455, it is possible to memorize that the winning information command of the normal figure has been received during the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-fluctuation, this time When the general pattern fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the general pattern winning information command is received, by determining the setting status of the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223 EF, special figure 1 at the time of general pattern winning (passing through gate 67) It is possible to set different variable performance modes according to the variable situation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. C3204) is prioritized to execute the processing (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 360) to be executed when the winning information command is received.

Here, in the external output process (C1001 in FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357) of the main control device 110, the winning information command for the normal figure winning and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) And, even if is output in the same process, specifically, when the normal pattern winning occurs in a state where the normal pattern fluctuation is not executed, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 343) set the winning information command in the process of C105, and the variation pattern command is set in the process of C104 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 343) executed next (after 2 milliseconds) . Then, in the processing (external output processing) of C1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 357) of the main controller 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is output. From, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing and the execution timing of the main processing, when the winning information command for the general figure winning prize and the variation pattern command are output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same processing There is

In such a case, in the fifth control example, in the command determination processing (see C3113 in FIG. 360) of the audio ramp control device 113, winning information command processing 5 (C3202 in FIG. 363 C3204), so even if the winning information command and the variation pattern command are output at the same time from the main controller 110, when setting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, at the time of non-fluctuation The setting status of the winning flag 223EF can be used for determination without missing.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the current special figure 1 is changing (C3454: YES), then it is determined whether the variation time of special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456) . If it is determined that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: NO), then the process proceeds to C3458.

In the process of C3456, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: YES), set the display command indicating the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information (C3457), then C3458 to process.

When proceeding to the process of C3458, it determines whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C3458), and determines that it is the winning information command of special figure 1 If so (C3458: YES), then it is determined whether the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined to be set to ON (C3459: YES), non- The fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF is set to OFF (C3460), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of the special figure 1 (C3458: NO), whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is performed is received Determine (C3461). In the processing of C3461, for example, it is determined whether winning information indicating winning of a ball to each winning hole (general winning hole 63) provided in the left game area of the game board 13 is received.

In the process of C3461, when it is determined that the left-handed game is detected (C3461: YES), the process proceeds to the above-described C3459 process, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: NO), This process is terminated as it is.

As described above, this fifth control example determines whether the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the time when the normal figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 variation is being performed When it is determined that there is no change, the non-fluctuation prize winning flag 223EF is set to ON to indicate that fact. In addition, when the non-fluctuation winning flag 223EF is set to ON and information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or the left-handed game is performed is received, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223EF is set to OFF. It is configured to

And, although the details will be described later, when the normal pattern long fluctuation is executed in a state where the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF is set to ON, the fluctuation production (series production) corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation configured not to run.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the game situation where the normal figure fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through-gate provided in the right-hand side game area by the right-handed game 67), and in that case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation production corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation (the production suggesting that the normal pattern per game is executed). .

Further, in the fifth control example, even if the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning opening 64, special figure 1 at the timing when the normal figure winning occurs Since the variation may not be executed, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223EF, which is set to ON at the time of the normal drawing winning, can be set to OFF by the left-handed game. As a result, for example, by executing a left-handed game within a predetermined period from the normal figure winning to the start of the normal figure fluctuation, the variation production corresponding to the normal figure long fluctuation (the normal figure per game is executed It is possible to execute normally. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode that is disadvantageous to a player who is playing a proper game.

In addition, as long as it is possible to determine that a proper game (a left-handed game in a normal state) is being played, it is not limited to the configuration of the fifth control example described above. It may be possible to determine whether a left-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (fire intensity) of a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation by the change in electrical resistance, or the game board 13 Detecting means for detecting passage of balls is provided in a part of the left game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left game area pass), and a left-handed game is executed based on the detection result in the detecting means. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether the

Further, in the fifth control example described above, a configuration for determining whether or not a left-handed game is being executed is used, but not limited to this, a configuration for determining whether or not a right-handed game is being executed Use, in a state where it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, when the predetermined normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern long fluctuation) is executed, the variation production corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation (normal pattern per game It may be configured to limit the execution of the effect suggesting that the is executed). In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, through gate 67) provided in the right game area A configuration that determines that a right-handed game is being executed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 or the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) by changes in electrical resistance It may be configured to be able to determine whether a right-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing intensity).

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is executing a proper game in the period from the normal pattern winning to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. However, without being limited to this, the period used for determining whether or not a proper game is being executed (determination target period) may be set longer. In this case, for example, a game situation storage means capable of temporarily storing the game situation is provided, and the game situation (past history) indicating whether or not the player is playing a left-handed game is stored in the game situation storage means. It is preferable to configure so as to determine whether or not the regular pattern has been won during a proper game based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means at the timing of the regular pattern winning.

Furthermore, as a winning information command (normal drawing winning information command) set when a normal drawing winning is performed, a winning information command indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 disposed in the left game area Winning information command) and the normal figure winning information command (right normal figure winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area are identified by the audio lamp control device 113 side. Based on the type of the received general pattern winning information command and the game situation, the execution limit of the variation production corresponding to the general pattern long fluctuation (the production that suggests that the game per normal pattern is executed) may be configured to be variably set.

Returning to FIG. 361, the description continues. As information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time, it is determined whether or not there is special 2 winning information (C3403). In the process of C3403, if it is determined that there is no special 2 win information (C3403: NO), then the process proceeds to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is special 2 hit information (C3403: YES), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ED provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3404). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is off (C3404: NO), the process of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406.

When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is ON in the process of C3404 (C3404: YES), the information indicating the hit notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223A (C3405), and then the process of C3406 is performed. do.

In the process of C3406, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C3407), then this process is terminated and the process returns to command determination process 5.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display) is changed to a specific effect set in another period (for example, It is defined to be an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. In other words, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is stipulated so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more likely to be selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize in the next and subsequent variations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player ambitiously accumulate special symbols so that a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are displayed. , but other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). may be determined whether or not to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, an omen effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and at the timing of starting the next variable display, a specific effect may be set. , a specific effect is set based on the contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the portent effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Also good. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation after the suggestive effect is started (the lottery result of the next change, the change pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)), the suggestive effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the presentation as compared with the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display that is executed one after another, or it will be executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. A suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the number of pending balls of special symbols is displayed in the pending display area. In DN4, in order to suggest a pending display (a pending pattern) corresponding to winning information indicating a big win, a pending change notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to winning information indicating a big win is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that makes a big hit expected as a special symbol effect that starts to change before.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223A is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the prize information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (whether or not there is an on-hold renso), and based on the result of the determination, an effect is set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the variable probability state, the content of the effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (read-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the prefetching effect in progress flag) is set to ON and the prefetching effect in progress flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the winning prize included in the prize information command is displayed. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. This suppresses the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without an interval, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In order to solve the above-described problem, control other than the contents described above may be used. Comparing the priority rank of the pre-reading effect currently being given and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command, the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank may be controlled to execute In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead performance is higher, the look-ahead performance switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead performance being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the look-ahead effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the end timing initially set. You can

Further, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. should be set to be high. Thus, when the read-ahead performance being executed ends in the middle, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the big win, and can be made to pay attention to the new read-ahead performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: NO), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from main controller 110 (C3203). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (C3203: YES), variation pattern command processing 5 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 5 is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to for determining the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later. . Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. In addition, in the fifth control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for special symbols (special symbols) and a variation pattern for normal symbols (general figure), this time It is determined whether the received variation pattern command is for a special figure or for a normal figure, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 363 is a flow chart showing the contents of variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204). This variation pattern command process 5 (C3204) is executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. is.

In the variation pattern command process 5 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: NO), skip the processes of C3302 and C3303 and proceed to the process of C3304. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: YES), the variation start flag 223D for special figures provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON ( C3302), extracts the variation pattern from the received special figure variation pattern command (C3303), and then proceeds to the process of C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the normal figure variation pattern command (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not the normal figure variation pattern command (C3304: NO), skip the processes of C3305 and C3306 and return to the command determination process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern command for the normal figure (C3304: YES), the variation start flag 223D for the normal figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3305), the variation pattern is extracted from the received normal figure variation pattern command (C3306), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to command determination process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of C3203, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (C3203: NO), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (C3205). When the stop type command is received (C3205: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3205 that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: NO), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (C3208: YES), the pending ball number is extracted from the received pending ball number command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is generated. Store the value contained in the reserved ball number command received from the special symbol reserved ball number counter or the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (C3209), and then return to the main process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223B provided in RAM 223 of audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223C provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the process of C3208, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (C3208: NO), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received (C3210: YES), hit-related command processing 5 (C3211) is executed, and after completion of the hit-related command processing 5 (C3211), this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the win-related command process 5 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process 5 (C3211). Win-related command processing 5 (C3211) is processing executed in command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the hit-related command process 5, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3501). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has been received (C3501: YES), the jackpot related command process is executed (C3502), and then the process proceeds to C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot related command process (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command process (C3502). The jackpot-related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command process (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3601). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (C3601: YES), an opening command process for display is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

In the processing of C3601, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C3601: NO), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (C3603). Here, if the round number command is received (C3603: YES), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the round number command for display is set according to the round number extracted this time. (C3605), and then proceeds to the processing of C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game The number is configured to accumulate and display the number of round games of the jackpot game to be executed this time. Specifically, the period during which the time saving state is set, and after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the period flag is set to ON for the period until the special figure 1 variation is executed is provided. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to ON, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game (Number of rounds) is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3603 that the round number command has not been received (C3603: NO), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (C3606). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: YES), the display ending command is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of C3606, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: NO), the process proceeds to C3608. In the process of C3608, the process corresponding to other commands is executed (C3608), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the win-related command process 5.

Returning to FIG. 364, the description continues. In the process of C3501, if it is determined that the command related to the big hit is not received from the main controller 110 (C3501: NO), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the small win is received from the main controller 110. (C3503). And, when it is determined that the small hit related command is received (C3503: YES), the small hit related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to C3505.

Here, the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 366(A). FIG. 366(A) is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the hit related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the small hit related command process (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3701). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (not on) (C3701: NO), the normal small winning process is executed (C3702), then this process is terminated and the process returns to the winning related command process 5. .

As described above, in the fifth control example, the effect mode when the small winning game is executed is configured to be variably set according to whether the small winning game execution timing is in the middle of a series of effects. . That is, when a small winning game is executed during a series of productions, a small winning game production (see FIG. 324) is executed as part of the series of productions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Here, the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 366(B). FIG. 366(B) is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the normal small winning process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning start command is received from the main controller 110 (C3801). Then, when it is determined that the small winning start command is received (C3801: YES), the small winning start command for display is set (C3802), and then this process is terminated to return to the small winning related command process.

In the process of C3801, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3801: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3803). . When it is determined that the small hit end command is received (C3803: YES), the small hit end command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3803, if it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (C3803: NO), then it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3805). When it is determined that the V passing command is received (C3805: YES), the V passing command for display is set (C3806), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 366(A), the description continues. If it is determined that the series production flag 223EB is ON in the process of C3701 (C3701: YES), the small winning game of this time is a small winning game executed during the series production, so the small winning process for series production is executed. Execute (C3703), then terminate this process and return to win-related command process 5.

Here, the contents of the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703). A small hit process for a series of effects (C3703) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning start command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3901). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (C3901: YES), the series production hit start command is set (C3902), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3901, when it is determined that the command to start the small hit is not received (C3901: NO), next, it is determined whether or not the V passing command is received from the main controller 110 (C3903). When it is determined that the V passing command has been received (C3903: YES), it is then determined whether or not the small hit caution flag 223EE provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3904). When it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is off (C3904: NO), the V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

Here, the small winning caution flag 223EE indicates that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A even after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, even though the small winning game is being executed. A flag that is set on if not. In the fifth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball fired to reach the V winning device 650 in a right-handed game. When performing a right-handed game based on the execution of the game, the small hit caution flag 223EE is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if a left-handed game is played without noticing that a small winning game is being executed, or an inappropriate game is performed in which the number of balls fired during the small winning game is intentionally reduced (including 0). If it is, the ball may not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A after 3 seconds from the start of the small winning game, so the small winning caution flag 223EE is turned on. Easier to set. By setting this small hit caution flag 223EE to ON, the emphasis guidance display (see FIG. 325 (A)) for making the player play the right-handed game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. be done. Also, at the timing when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON or OFF. For example, when the V passing command is received in a state where the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON, in the next small hit game, a guidance effect for quickly performing the right-handed game is executed.

In the process of C3904, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is ON (C3904: YES), set the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects (C3906), then finish this process and small hit Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139). Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects, the third symbol display device 81, as part of the series of effects, indicates that the timing at which the ball passed through the V in the small winning game this time was late. The V effect including the effect mode shown (for example, the comment "Let's hit the right sooner next time") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (C3903: NO), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907 ). If it is determined that the small hit end command is received (C3907: YES), then it is determined whether there is a V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is a V passage (C3908: YES), a series of effects A small hit end command for display is set (C3909), after that, the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to OFF (C3912), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

On the other hand, in the process of C3908, if it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: NO), a display command indicating the end of the series of effects is set (C3910), the series of effects flag 223EB is set to OFF (C3911), The small hit attention flag 223EE is set to OFF (C3912), after that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small winning game during the series of effects, it is not possible to display the effect result indicating the occurrence of the big winning game as the effect result of the series of effects, so the end of the series of effects ( A rendering mode (see FIG. 325(B)) indicating failure) is set. Also, if it is determined that the small hit end command is not received in the process of C3907 (C3907: NO), then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 364, the description continues. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that the small hit related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3503: NO), then whether or not the general figure per related command has been received from the main controller 110 Determine (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the per-universal figure related command is received (C3505: YES), the display command corresponding to the per-universal figure related command is set (C3506), and then this process is terminated to determine the command Return to process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of C3210, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received from main controller 110 (C3210: NO), then it is determined whether a state command has been received from main controller 110 (C3212). If it is determined that a state command has been received (C3212: YES), the current game state is extracted from the received command, stored in the state storage area 223EA (C3213), and a state command for display is set (C3214). , and then terminate this process.

In addition, in the process of C3213, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main controller 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 in the first control example described above is received , a process of storing the game state set after the end of the big win is executed separately from the current game state. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state is distinguished from the state designation command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is established (when the jackpot ends). can be stored as After the jackpot is completed, a state command indicating the current game state is received. At that time, the content of the state command indicating the current game state and the content of the state designation command indicating the scheduled game state are combined. It is also possible to provide determination means for determining whether or not they match, and to determine whether or not the game state is properly set based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior such as illegally changing the game state after the end of the big win to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the processing of C3212, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (C3212: NO), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (C3215), and if the stop command has been received (C3215: YES ), the stop command process 5 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 5 ends, this process ends.

Here, the contents of stop command processing 5 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 5 (C3216). The stop command process 5 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the stop command process 5, first, it is determined whether the special figure stop command is received (C3951), and if it is determined that the special figure stop command is received (C3951: YES), then the special figure fluctuation time counter The value of 223EG is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to ON (C3953).

In the process of C3953, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to ON (C3953: YES), the stop command received this time is a special figure that executes a series of effects as a variation effect of the special figure deviation fluctuation Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to OFF (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, in the process of C3953, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is not set to ON (C3953: NO), the process of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3955.

In the process of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3955: YES), the re-read-ahead flag is set to ON (C3956 ), the time saving final fluctuation flag is set to OFF (C3957), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is not set to ON (C3955: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the process of C3215, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3215: NO), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (C3217), and this process ends. . For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 369, variable display setting processing 5 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 369 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process 5 (C3114). This variable display setting process 5 (C3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 to produce a variable effect. , a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

The variable display setting process 5 (C3114) of the fifth control example sets a normal pattern display variable pattern command for each control example described above or the variable display setting process used in each embodiment. It is largely different in that it is configured as described above and that the content of the variable effect to be set is changed, and the other elements (technical concept) are the same. Detailed descriptions of the elements (technical concept) that are the same as those of the above-described control examples or the variable display setting process used in each embodiment will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 5 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C4001). In the process of C4001, either the fluctuation start flag 223D for the special figure or the fluctuation start flag 223D for the normal figure in the process of C3302 and C3305 of the above-described fluctuation pattern command process 5 (see C3204 in FIG. 363) is set to on.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223D for the special figure and the fluctuation start flag 223D for the normal figure are both off) (C4001: NO), the main control Since no variation pattern command has been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is ON (C4001: YES), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223D is set to OFF (C4002), then C3303 of fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 363) And in the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the processing shifts to C4006. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the processing of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C4006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is not ON (that is, is OFF) (C4006: NO), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display End the setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is on (C4006: YES), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223E is turned off (C4007), and then in command determination processing 5 (C3207 in FIG. 360) , the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the processing of C4010, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (C4010). , and then terminate this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, the variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 370 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process (C4004). This variable effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variable effect mode of the special symbol, Alternatively, a process for setting a normal pattern variation effect mode is executed.

In the fluctuation production setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation production setting process of this time sets the fluctuation production of the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) (C4101). In the processing of this C4101, in the processing of C4001 of the variable display setting processing 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369), when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223D is set to ON, this time fluctuation effect setting processing Determines that is to set the variation effect of the special figure variation. Here, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation production is not set (set the normal figure fluctuation production) (C4101: NO), the general figure production setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process is terminated . Details of the general pattern effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect based on is executed.

In the process of C4101, if it is determined to set the special figure fluctuation effect (C4101: YES), information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223EA is read (C4102), and the current game state is the normal state. It is determined whether there is (C4103). When it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (C4103: NO), a time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. Production setting processing for time reduction (C4104) is processing for setting the production mode of the variable production to be executed in the time reduction state. A detailed description of this time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4103, if it is determined that the game state is the normal state (C4103: YES), it is determined whether the re-prefetching flag 223EM is set to ON (C4105), and the re-prefetching flag 223EM is set to ON. If it is determined that it is set (C4105: YES), that is, the current fluctuation production is a fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the time saving state ends, and during the time saving state If there is a special figure 2 suspension in which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time saving final variation performance executed in the time saving final variation among the special figure 2 suspension acquired in , the winning stored in the winning information storage area 223A Of the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), extract the winning information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2) that has not been prefetched (C4106), and hit the winning information in the extracted winning information It is determined whether or not there is winning information included (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: YES), a display command for replacing the display mode of the result of the time-saving variation effect with the display mode of the recovery win is set (C4108) , the re-read-ahead flag 223EM is set to OFF (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, in the process of C4105, if it is determined that the re-read-ahead flag 223EM is not set to ON (C4105: NO), the variable effect setting process of this time is executed at the timing of varying the result display mode of the time-saving variable effect. Therefore, the processing from C4106 to C4109 is skipped, and the processing shifts to C4110. Also, in the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including winning information in the extracted winning information (C4107: NO), the variable effect setting process of this time changes the result display mode of the time-saving variable effect. However, the condition for changing the result display mode (including that the new prefetch result is a hit) is not satisfied, so the process of C4108 is skipped, the process of C4109 is executed, and the process of C4110 is performed. Move to

In the process of C4110, it is determined whether the current time is within the extended display period of the time-saving variable effect executed during the time-saving state (C4110), and the game result during the extended display period, that is, during the time-saving state is displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 331) is displayed (C4110: YES), this process is terminated without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: NO), next, based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of C4003 in FIG. is discriminated (C4111).

In the process of C4111, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the winning variation pattern (C4111: YES), the winning variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process proceeds to C4116. In this hit variation effect setting process (C4112), the process of determining whether or not to execute a series of effects as this special figure variation effect, and when a series of effects are executed as a normal figure variation effect, the series of effects A performance result replacement process is executed. The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a winning variation pattern (C4111: NO), then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is on (C4113), If it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4113: YES), then the process proceeds to C4116.

In the processing of C4113, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4113: NO), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects ( C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: NO), then the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the process of C4114, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: YES), the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is set to ON (C4115), and then to the process of C4116 Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is set (C4116), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation display setting process 5.

Next, with reference to FIG. 371, the normal figure effect setting process (C4117) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 371 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose drawing effect setting process (C4117). This general figure effect setting process (C4117) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a variation effect based on the normal figure variation. A process for setting (a series of effects) is executed.

In the normal figure effect setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223EA provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is in the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not normal (C4202: NO), then this process is terminated.

In the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: YES), then it is determined whether or not the variation time is 30 seconds or longer (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (C4203: NO), then this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: YES), next, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4204: YES), then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4204: NO), then it is determined whether or not the non-fluctuation winning flag 223EF is on (C4205). is off (C4205: NO), next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is on (C4206). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is off (C4206: NO), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223EB is set to ON (C4208), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of C4206, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is ON (C4206: YES), set the normal figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation time (C4209), then this process exit.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, if it is determined that the non-fluctuation winning a prize flag 223EF is on (C4205: YES), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is greater than 0 (C4210 ), If it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is not greater than 0 (is 0) (C4210: NO), the normal figure fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed Therefore, this process is terminated as it is without setting the normal pattern fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the special figure fluctuation is not executed, it is configured not to set the normal figure fluctuation effect, but not limited to this, for example, the normal figure fluctuation effect may be configured to execute a normal pattern fluctuation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the normal pattern fluctuation effect to be executed, the electric accessory 640A is long open according to the lottery result of the current normal pattern lottery. It is only necessary to configure the timing to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the process of C4210, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is greater than 0 (C4210: YES), set the special series effect (C4211), set the series effect flag 223EB to ON (C4212 ), and then terminate this process.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in the case where the normal figure fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special figure fluctuation during execution It is configured to set the normal figure fluctuation production (normal figure production). By configuring in this way, when an effect that makes it easy to inform the player of the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is executed as a special figure variation effect for displaying the lottery result of the special figure variation, the normal figure effect is that. It is possible to suppress the situation of hindering the special figure fluctuation performance, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to Drawing 372, production setting processing for time saving (C4104) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing this effect setting process for time saving (C4104). This time saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

In the production setting process for time saving (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that this special figure variation is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C4301: NO), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (C4301: YES), then it is determined whether or not the special figure variation of this time is the time saving final variation (C4302). If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: NO), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: YES), the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ED is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read. (C4304), based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information, the variation pattern of the final variation is set (C4305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 373 is a flow chart showing this winning variation effect setting process (C4112). This hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4401). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4401: NO), next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of a series of effects (C4402: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for a series of effects (C4402: YES), the series of effects flag 223EB is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4401: YES), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: NO), this processing ends. If it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: YES), a replacement command for display indicating a change pattern for replacing the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the effect update process 5 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing effect update processing 5 (C3112). This effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example, regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the elapsed time It is a process for setting the effect controlled based on.

When the effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various variable time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4502). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is off (C4502: NO), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is on (C4504). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is off (C4504: NO), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223EB is ON (C4502: YES), and if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223EC is ON in the process of C4504 (C4504: YES), the series Effect update processing is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to C4505. Further, the details of the series of effect update processing will be described later with reference to the processing in FIG.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ED is ON (C4505). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is ON (C4505: YES), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to C4507.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4505, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is ON (C4505: YES), other effect update processing is executed (C4507), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, a series of effects update processing (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing this series of effect update processing (C4503). This series of effect update processing (C4503) is executed in the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the series effect update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: NO), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0. (C4604). When it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: NO), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: YES), the series effect flag 223EB is set to ON (C4612), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: YES), set the value corresponding to the current series effect to the series effect counter (C4602), and proceed to the process of C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the normal game (C4605). When it is determined that the game is currently per normal pattern (C4605: YES), update processing per normal pattern during game is executed (C4606), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently in the normal pattern per game (C4605: NO), then it is determined whether the normal pattern per game has ended (C4607). It is determined whether or not the normal figure per game has ended (C4607). When it is determined that the normal pattern per game has not ended (C4607: NO), the process proceeds to C4609. When it is determined that the game per normal pattern has ended (C4607: YES), next, it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is ON (C4608). When it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: NO), the series effect flag 223EB is set to on (C4612), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C4608, when it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is ON (C4608: YES), the process proceeds to C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being played (C4609). If it is determined that the game is currently playing a small hit (C4609: YES), update processing during a small hit game is executed (C4610), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current small winning game is not in progress (C4609: NO), a display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376, the contents of the update process (C4606) during the game per normal pattern executed in the series of effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) will be described. FIG. 376 is a flow chart showing the contents of the per normal game update process (C4606). In this general pattern per game update process (C4606), the player is alerted when the ball does not win the second winning hole 640 for a predetermined period of time despite being in the general pattern per game. The process to do is executed.

When the per normal game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. If so (C4701: NO), then it is determined whether 1 second has passed since the start of the game per normal pattern (C4702). Here, if it is determined that one second has passed (C4702: YES), a display warning command is set (C4703), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4702, when it is determined that the timing is not one second after the start of the game per normal pattern (C4702: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Here, in the processing of C4703, when the display attention calling command is set, the attention calling screen (see FIG. 324 (A) ) is displayed. In addition, in this control example, when the normal pattern long open per game is executed as a normal pattern per game, after the electric accessory 640A is opened for 1 second, after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, 0.5 again It is configured to execute a game per normal figure that opens the electric accessory 640A for a second. Then, the attention calling screen shown in FIG. 324(A) is displayed after one second has passed since the game per normal pattern is started. By configuring in this way, when a player who sees the attention calling screen plays a right-handed game, the ball shot by the right-handed game can easily enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the process of C4701, if it is determined that the ball has won the second prize winning opening 640 (the special 2 prize has been won) (C4701: YES), a display command for indicating the special 2 prize is set ( C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223ER is set to ON (C4705), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display command is set in the process of C4704, the display mode for notifying the special 2 winning is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special 2 prize has been won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376(B), the contents of the updating process during small winning game (C4610) will be described. FIG. 376(B) is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process during small winning game (C4610). In this small winning game update process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the small winning game was started. If the ball has not passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A despite the passage of time, a process for calling the player's attention is executed.

When the update process during the small hit game (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223EE is set to ON (C4751), and it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is not set to ON. If so (C4751: NO), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game (C4752). Here, if it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small winning game (C4752: YES), it is determined whether the ball is passing through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A at the present time (C4753), and it is not passing. When it is determined (C4753: NO), the small hit attention flag 223EE is set to ON (C4754), a display attention calling command is set (C4755), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4751, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223EE is already set to ON (C4751: YES), in the process of C4752, it is determined that it is not the timing when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game If (C4752: NO), in the processing of C4753, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A (C4753: YES), the processing of C4754 and C4755 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be described. FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final fluctuation production update process (C4506), a process for setting a fluctuation production corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state is executed. As described above, in this control example, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, as the variation effect during the time saving state, the special figure A second suggesting effect suggesting the result of prefetching of 2 reservations is executable, and the second suggesting effect is executed in the final change of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in the final variation of the time saving state of this control example, during the period when the time saving state is set, there is also a hold acquisition effect to encourage the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit (4 pieces) It is constituted so as to be executable, so that the holding acquisition performance is executed in the first half of the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation, and the second suggestion performance (shortening final fluctuation performance) is executed in the second half. And it is configured so that the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestive effect.

By constructing in this way, after the player acquires a large number of special 2 reserves, the second suggestive performance (shortening final variable performance) reflecting the look-ahead result for the acquired special 2 reserves is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the performance mode indicating winning as the performance mode of the time-saving final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, at the timing (starting timing of the first half period) until the pending acquisition effect is executed, if the number of acquired special 2 pending balls is the upper limit (4) or more, the pending acquisition effect is executed. Instead, the second suggestive effect is executed from the first half period. As a result, a useless performance for the player, that is, a suspension acquisition performance for trying to acquire the special figure 2 suspension even though the number of special figure 2 suspension balls has already reached the upper limit is executed. can be prevented, and a situation in which the player is puzzled by the contents of the performance can be suppressed. Further, by executing the second suggestive performance from the first half period, the performance period of the second suggestive performance can be lengthened, so that the second suggestive performance can be executed with more interest. Since the player can be motivated to play the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the interesting second suggestive effect, the operation of the game can be improved.

In the final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 377) described with reference to FIG. Determine the elapsed period of the final variation performance to be executed (elapsed period of special figure 2 variation), the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final fluctuation effect update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed (C4801: YES) Next, it is determined whether the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223C) is "4" which is the upper limit value (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (C4802: YES), the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON (C4803), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls is not "4", that is, "3" or less (C4802: NO), without setting the pending upper limit flag 223EN to ON End this process.

In the process of C4801, if it is determined that the current time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: NO), then it is determined whether the current time is the first period start timing (C4804). If it is determined that the If it is determined that the predetermined number (4 pieces), which is the upper limit number of special figures 2 reserved balls, is secured (C4805: YES), the first period and the second period are used as the time-saving final fluctuation production. Time-saving fluctuation production using is set (C4806), the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to OFF, the executed flag 223EQ is set to ON (C4808), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, if it is determined that the pending upper limit flag 223EN is not set to ON (C4805: NO), the pending ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 pending up to the upper limit (4) (C4809), and the present processing ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the timing when the waiting period elapses, and to provide various effects to the player. can do.

In the process of C4804, if it is determined that the current time is not the start timing of the first period (C4804: NO), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the second period (C4810). If it is determined that it is the start timing (C4810: YES), it is determined whether the execution completion flag 223EQ is set to ON (C4811).

Here, if it is determined that the executed flag 223EQ is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period, (C4811: YES), since there is no need to set a new effect mode, the executed flag 223EQ is set to OFF (C4812), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4811, if it is determined that the executed flag 223EQ is not set to ON (C4811: NO), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read (C4813), The lottery result (win determination result) and the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) included in the read prize information are set (C4814) to set a display effect command indicating a time-saving variable effect (C4814), and the process ends.

Thus, not the timing of execution of the time saving final variation, at the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed since the time saving final variation is executed (timing when the second period is set), production mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 pending By setting the special figure 2 reservation ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) that is subtracted when executing the change, is re-added to the special figure 2 reservation look-ahead result You can set the production mode based on. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of special figures 2 pending to be read ahead, so that in the production executed during the second period (time-saving final fluctuation production), the production result indicating the hit can be easily displayed, It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In the processing of C4810, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: NO), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: YES), it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired If so (C4816: YES), the re-prefetching flag 223EM is set to ON (C4817), and this processing ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the processing executed in C4816, the winning information storage area 223A is formed with storage areas corresponding to each symbol reservation, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol The storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special design (special design 2), and the storage area for the normal design (general design) are the number corresponding to the upper limit reserved storage number (4) of each design. formed. Each storage area stores pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, and a reference indicating whether or not the pre-reading result was referred to when setting various effects in the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the process of C4816, in addition to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814, whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223A is stored in each storage area It is determined based on the presence or absence of stored referenced information, and the prefetch information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223A, and the referenced information When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new Special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-prefetching flag 223EM to ON in the process of C4817, as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed next (the first special figure fluctuation after the end of the time saving), again, the special figure 2 is reserved A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4816: NO), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 reservation is prefetched, and the second in the effect mode based on the prefetch result Since it is the case where the time saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving change effect is set as it is (C4818), and this processing ends. In the processing of C4815, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: NO), next, display commands corresponding to other update contents are set (C4819), and this processing ends. In the process of C4819, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation and the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, the number of balls held in the second special symbol can be stored up to four, and the special figure 2 hold stored at the time when the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state (Up to 4 pieces), it was configured to execute the special figure 2 lottery with the lottery probability of the normal state.

Furthermore, the fifth control example described above is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player than the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. At the end of the game, the game was motivated to acquire a large number of special 2 reserves.

In the fifth control example described above, it is possible to easily acquire the maximum number of special figures 2 pending just by playing the right-handed game continuously during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so the player can play the game with confidence. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special 2 lotteries that could be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvement was required.

On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the maximum number of held balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set to "1", and a short variation is performed as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state A period in which time is likely to be selected can be set according to the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations during the time saving state, and a winning game period is set as a normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to set multiple types of long open winning games. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state, it is configured to be able to set a state in which short-time fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) is easily set.

By configuring in this way, the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after setting the normal state) can be varied according to the satisfaction of various game conditions. Therefore, the player can be entertained by what kind of game conditions are satisfied when the time saving state ends.

First, referring to FIG. 378, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 378 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example differs from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning hole 640 is changed. are different, and otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 378, in this sixth control example, the second winning port 640 is in a closed state (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 378) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter, and in an open state (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 378) in which it is easy to enter the prize. , and a variable electric accessory 640A are provided. When the electric accessory 640A (see FIG. 315) of the fifth control example described above is in an open state, the electric accessory 640A is designed to make it easier for a plurality of balls to win the second winning opening 640. is configured to Further, although detailed description is omitted, the period from passing through the electric accessory 640A in the open state to winning the second prize winning port 640 is configured to vary depending on the flow down state of the ball. For example, the ball that flows down along the structure having the second winning port 640 and reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric role object 640A (the side of the structure having the second winning port 640), and the tip of the electric role object 640A (the second The ball that reaches the vicinity of the structure having the winning opening 640 (the side away from the structure having the winning opening 640). difference is greater than 0.1 second.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the normal game in which the electric accessory 640A is positioned in the open state. can. Details will be described later, but in this control example, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the case where the normal state is set as the game state, the minimum fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set. there is

That is, in this control example, it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the generation time lag of the multiple winning balls in the game per normal figure. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning port 640 during one normal game, the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of winnings.

Note that, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 378, a time lag is generated for the winning ball depending on which part of the electric accessory 640A in which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640A positioned in the open state. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of openings (first opening, second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the balls that flow into each opening enter the second winning opening 640 It is configured so that the period until reaching is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further, in one normal game per game, it is configured to execute a normal game per game in which each opening is opened. Also good.

By configuring in this way, during the normal game per game, the period until the ball passing through the first opening and the ball passing through the second opening at approximately the same timing reach the second winning opening 640 can be made different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special figure 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

In this case, the electric accessory 640A may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640A may be configured to open and close a plurality of openings. .

<Regarding the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the display contents of the display screen in this sixth control example will be described. In this control example, when a predetermined game condition is established at the timing of the end of the time saving state, a state (support state) that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time saving state. In the final change of the time saving state (time saving final change effect), it is configured to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the support state will be set after the end of the time saving.

FIG. 379(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final time saving state variation. As shown in FIG. 379 (A), in the sixth control example, unlike the fifth control example described above, even in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, a fluctuation effect (first suggestion effect) is executed, an effect screen similar to the variable effect (see FIG. 327(A)) executed corresponding to the non-final change during the time saving state of the fifth control example is displayed. The same elements as those of the display screen of the fifth control example (see FIG. 327(A)) are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth control example, in addition to the lottery result modes 871A to 871C, it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the time saving on the display screen of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 327 (A)). The difference is that the state suggestion mode 871D with the characters "support" is displayed. This state suggesting mode 871D is configured to be more likely to be displayed each time the end of the time saving state approaches. An effect mode is set in which the character 851 obtains the state suggestion mode 871D. In addition, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is hit, the effect mode to get the lottery result mode 871A to 871B indicating the win is set.

When the support state is set after the time saving state ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 379(B) is displayed. FIG. 379B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display content displayed during the support state. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the normal figure per game elected during the time saving state is a long open per game, and the long open per game is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state A support state is set when the ball can enter the second winning hole 640 .

During this support state, which is a normal state, since the ball can enter the second winning hole 640, "Right shot" is highlighted in the small display area DM4. Then, in the small display area DM31, a guidance display mode is displayed to visually inform the player that the game of winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 will be performed, and in the sub display area DS, the support state is set. A comment "Support time rushed" is displayed to indicate that the support time has been reached.

Also, in the small display area DM6, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 variation being executed is variably displayed, and the information indicating the number of special figure 2 variations performed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area DM30. will be displayed as "Number of Supports". In the example shown in FIG. 379 (B), since the support state is set, since the first special figure 2 variation is being executed, "support times x 1" is displayed. In the main display area DM, an effect is executed in which the character 851 tries to stand up, and the comment "Do your best" is displayed. During this support state, it is configured so that a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases a large number of special figure 2 variations are performed. If winning is won in the special figure 2 variation in the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 383. FIG. In this control example, with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, and the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is set to 1 The difference is that the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 has been changed due to the change, and the rest is the same. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the detailed description of the difference of the RAM 203 is also omitted.

FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, for the fifth control example described above, instead of the random number 5 table 202ED per normal pattern, the 6 per normal pattern table 202FD, and the 6 variation pattern table 202FE instead of the 5 variation pattern table 202EE, It is different in that a normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202FF is provided instead of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381(A), the contents of the per-universal pattern type selection 6 table 202FD will be described. FIG. 381(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-universal pattern type selection 6 table 202FD. In this sixth control example, as shown in FIG. It is different from the selection 5 table 202ED.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal pattern is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "per normal pattern A", " "1 to 50" is defined as "B1 per normal figure", and "51 to 99" is defined as "B2 per normal figure". In addition, the probability state of the normal pattern is a high probability state (high probability of normal pattern), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "per normal pattern A" in the range of "0, 1", "B1 per normal map" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per normal map" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the normal pattern per type selected in the normal pattern per type selection 6 table 202FD and the game state at the time when the normal pattern per game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (B). do. FIG. 381(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation contents of the electric accessary product 640A based on the normal figure winning type and the game state.

In this sixth control example, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, instead of "normal pattern B" as the normal pattern type, "normal pattern B1" and "normal pattern B2" are provided. Although different, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessary product 640A for the "normal pattern hit B1" in this control example are the same as the opening operation contents for the "normal pattern hit B" in the fifth control example described above. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

If the type per normal pattern is "B2 per normal pattern" and the game state at the time the game per normal pattern is released is a time-saving state (high accuracy per normal pattern), the game per normal pattern is "Long The opening operation of "Opening B" is performed. When this "long opening B" is set, after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds, a normal game per game is executed in which the electric accessary 640A is opened for 1.5 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

In other words, in the sixth control example, when winning the normal pattern during the time saving state, either the normal pattern per game of "long opening A" or "long opening B" is executed as the normal pattern long opening per game. be. Even if any general pattern per game is executed, the period in which the electric accessory 640A is open is common with 1.5 seconds, and if the general pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, any It is configured to provide a state in which the same privilege can be given to the player even if the game per normal pattern is executed.

However, in "long opening A" and "long opening B", the electric accessary 640A is in an open state (a state in which it is easy to win a ball in the second winning port 640) after the normal game is started. is different, and when "long open A" is set, after the normal figure per game is started, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds later It is configured to open the electric accessory 640A to the open state in the period of .

Therefore, just before the time-saving state ends, if you are elected per normal pattern in which the opening action of "long opening A" is executed, per normal pattern in which the opening action of "long opening B" is executed at the same timing After the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, the electric accessory 640A can be easily brought into the open state than in the case of winning .

Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents of the normal variation pattern 6 table 202FE1 included in the variation pattern 6 table 202FE will be described. FIG. 382 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 6 table 202FE1, and the normal variation pattern 5 table 202EE1 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 339 (B) ), the difference is that the content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In this sixth control example, according to the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the end of the jackpot, the special figure that is executed before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number after the end of the jackpot It is configured such that the variation pattern (variation time) of the two variations is made different.

Specifically, when the time saving A (time saving 1 time, or time saving 99 times) is set as the time saving state, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 99 times" in the normal state If the special figure 2 variation in is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 and, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set, "100 to 151 times" In the range, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "out", "ultra-short out (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (jackpot, small hit)" is set to "long hit (20 seconds)", and in the range of "after the 152nd time", "short variation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery specified to be

Here, in the sixth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (common time-saving end conditions, corresponding time-saving end conditions) are set as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state. , for example, a time-saving state in which 99 times of working hours are set , When the small winning game is executed and the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game and the big winning game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is established and the time saving state ends. It is configured to Therefore, even if the time saving 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed when the special figure fluctuation frequency after the end of the big hit is shifted to the second time.

As shown in Figure 382, when the time saving A is set, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "100 to 151 times" when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 0.1 second fluctuation time is configured to be set. In other words, when the time saving state is set and the time saving 99 times is completed without winning, the variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. be done. In addition, when the normal figure per game is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is executed, even if a plurality of balls wins the second winning port 640 during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation of the number of times according to the number of winnings is configured to be easily executed. .

On the other hand, if the time saving state of the time saving number of times is set, even if the game per normal figure is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a special figure 2 fluctuation Since it is set, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game, the special figure 2 variation is executed only the number of times with the upper limit of the number of memories of the special figure 2 reservation. are doing.

Also, if the time saving B (time saving state in which 5 times of working hours are set) is set, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1st to 5th" special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and regardless of the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "6th to 20th", the variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", "ultra short off (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (jackpot, small hit)", "long hit ( 20 seconds)” is set, and in the range of “after the 21st time”, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, “short variation (10 seconds)” is set. It is

As described above, in this control example, among the three time saving states (time saving 1 time, time saving 5 times, time saving 99 times) in which different time saving end conditions are set, the time saving state in which the time saving 5 times is set , Time saving state in which 99 times of working hours are set, and in two types of time saving states, when the working hours saving state ends and the normal state is set by reaching the working hours saving number of times specified by the special figure fluctuation number, 0. 1 second special figure 2 variation is configured to be executable.

And 0.1 seconds set as the special figure 2 fluctuation is, as described above, from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640A in the normal figure long open per game Since it is also short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by winning a plurality of balls in the second winning opening 640 in one normal figure long open per game.

Therefore, according to the set time saving state and the established time saving end condition, the ease of execution of the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time saving state can be changed, so that the player, the time saving state It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play when the is terminated.

In addition, in this control example, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed within the period when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151" In the case, that is, the time-saving state of one time-saving is completed, and then, while the normal state left-handed game is being executed, the timing of winning the normal figure long open and executing the special figure 2 lottery is When the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is ``100 to 151'', a short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is lost. Therefore, it is possible to perform multiple special figure 2 fluctuations when elected per normal figure long open in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, not only after the end of the time saving state, but also at the time of winning the normal figure long open in the normal state, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in a normal state while being conscious of the special figure fluctuation frequency, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, players who have been playing for a long time can grasp the contents of the previous time-saving state (number of times of time-saving), and furthermore, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in the normal state long open winning. Since it is possible to predict the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game), and it is possible to play more advantageous than other players, motivation to continue playing can be raised.

In addition, in the sixth control example, when a specific time saving state is set, when the time saving state ends due to establishment of a specific time saving end condition, a short time (0. 1 second) is configured to be selected, but not limited to this, a short time (0.1 second) according to the timing of winning per normal long open in the normal state It may be configured to separately provide a range in which the variation pattern is selected. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed when winning the normal figure long opening per time, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

Furthermore, in this control example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation is configured to be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game, but it is limited to this Without, for example, it may be configured to select the variation pattern of special figure 2 variation based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends under any time saving end condition, it is possible to select the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation after the time saving state ends, and it is safe for the player You can play games with your heart.

In addition, when the same type of time saving state is set, different variation patterns may be selected. Of the time saving type, only when a specific time saving type is set, it may be configured so that the special figure 2 variation for a short time (0.1 seconds) can be executed after the time saving state ends. Thereby, when the time saving state is set (when the number of remaining time saving times is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game contents after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this control example, as a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed, the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set, but the electric power in the game per normal figure It suffices to set a variable time shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640A, and there are multiple types of variable times (for example, 0.1 second, 0.2 second, and 0.3 second). It may be configured such that one fluctuation time is selected from among. By configuring in this way, the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the support state by the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time set in the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed is variable, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the game during the support state.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202FF will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 383 (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202FF, Figure 383 (B) is a normal figure for time saving A that the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202FF has Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202FF2, and FIG. 383 (C) is defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B that the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202FF has FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the present invention;

As shown in FIG. 383 (A), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202FF includes the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202FF1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the type of time saving state " It has a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FF2 for time saving A that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. are doing.

For the contents defined in the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202FF1, the normal state of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF in the fifth control example described above (normal low probability) Because it is the same as the contents referred to , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table referred to during the time saving state (normal pattern high accuracy) is the type of time saving state set for the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF of the fifth control example described above, and the jackpot It is different in that it is configured to vary the normal figure variation pattern selected based on the special figure variation number after the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383(B), the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FF2 for time saving A will be described. This time-saving A normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FF2 is a data table referred to when "time-saving A" is set as the type of time-saving state, that is, the number of times of time-saving is 1 time or 99 times. As shown in (B), various normal figure fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)” is defined as “ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds)” in the range of “630 to 999”, and the number of special figure variations is “99 times”, and the acquired second When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 709", "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is defined, and in the range of "710 to 989", "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is defined. and "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined in the range of "990 to 999".

In other words, in the final time-saving change when one time-saving is set, 63% is configured to select 2 seconds and 37% is 0.1 seconds as the normal figure variation pattern, and 99 times of time-saving is set. In the time-saving final fluctuation in the case, as the normal figure fluctuation pattern, 71% is configured to select 0.1 seconds, 28% is 10 seconds, and 1% is configured to select 2 seconds. Here, as the short fluctuation time is set as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern per game is more likely to be executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. The time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set can make it easier to set the state (support state) in which the ball can be easily won in the second winning hole 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special figure fluctuations is "99 times", it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and this 10 second normal figure fluctuation time was selected. In that case, it becomes difficult to execute the normal figure per game so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, in this control example, when 99 times of working hours are set as the time saving end condition, as the normal figure fluctuation time during execution of the special figure fluctuation (99th special figure fluctuation) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, other Since it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is easier to select than the period of , the normal figure fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation of the time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult to play a game that excessively wins a privilege (a prize ball paid out by causing a ball to enter the second prize hole 640).

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special figure variation set as the time saving final variation and the normal figure variation are set with different triggers, and any execution trigger can be established by the ball fired in the right-handed game. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game that executes the normal pattern fluctuation (per normal pattern fluctuation) in accordance with the end timing of the special pattern fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383(C), the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B will be described. Normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202FE3 for time saving B is a data table referred to when "time saving B" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is set to 5 times, and shown in FIG. 383 (C) As you can see, various normal figure fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the special figure fluctuation number of times after the end of the jackpot and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)”, but in the range of “630 to 999”, “ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)” is defined, and if the number of special figure fluctuations is “5 times”, the acquired second Regardless of the value of the 2-variation type counter CS2, "ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds)" is defined. In addition, since the time saving state is set to 5 times at the maximum, the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation number 6th or later is not set.

As described above, when the time saving state of five times of working hours is set, it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation is always executed with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds during the time saving final fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the normal figure per game so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in this control example, according to the type of time saving state set (time saving A, B), the fluctuation time of special symbols and the fluctuation time of normal symbols can be set differently. The time-saving type (time-saving B) in which 5 times of time-saving is set makes it easy to set the state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time-saving state (support state), and then 99 times of time-saving and 1 time of time-saving. It is configured to be in the order of

As a result, when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are not established during the time saving state, a privilege (support state) can be given to the player, and further, according to the type of the set time saving state, the privilege is given. The interest in the game can be improved by varying the granting probabilities.

In addition, in this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation, or when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to select each variation pattern by referring only to the number of variations of the special figure 2 variation, or configured to refer to the number of variations of the normal figure variation You can Moreover, you may comprise so that each variation pattern may be selected with reference to the establishment condition of the set time saving end conditions.

Also, in this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation, or when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the small hit type elected during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting each fluctuation pattern may be changed, and after the small hit game ends It may be configured to select each variation pattern based on the special figure variation frequency and the normal figure variation frequency.

<Regarding control processing in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 384 and 385, the contents of control processing in this sixth control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the fifth control example described above, the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350) is replaced with the normal symbol variation processing 6 (see C136 in FIG. 384), and the main control 380 to 383) to be referred to in various determination processes in the device 110. Other than that, they are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, only the numerical values have been changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 384, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) will be described. FIG. 384 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136). When the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) is executed, the same processes of C601 to C611 as the normal symbol variation process 5 of the fifth control example (see C106 in FIG. 350) are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that this normal pattern lottery is a hit (C611: YES), refer to the normal pattern per type selection 6 table 202FD to set the normal per pattern type (C641), The display mode (at the time of winning the drawing) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the process of C611, when it is determined that the winning lottery of the normal symbols is lost (C611: NO), the display mode at the time of loss is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the process of C642, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern of this time is set based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table (C642), and the command corresponding to each setting content (hit lottery decision, normal pattern fluctuation pattern) is set. (C623), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the present is normal pattern fluctuation (C602: YES), C618 to the same as normal pattern fluctuation processing 5 of the fifth control example (see C106 in FIG. 350) The process of C623 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 385, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 of the sixth control example will be described. The content of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of this control example is the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fifth control example described above, instead of the normal figure production setting processing (see C4117 in FIG. 371) It is different in that it is configured to execute the effect setting process 6 for normal figure (see C4167 in FIG. 385). Other control processes are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

FIG. 385 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal figure effect setting process 6 (C4167). As shown in Figure 385, in the normal figure production setting process 6 (C4167), the above-mentioned normal figure production setting process (see C4117 in Figure 371) is executed during the special figure final fluctuation period of the time saving state The difference is that a process for setting the effect mode is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control process contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the general figure production setting process 6 (C4167) is executed, the same C4201 to C4212 processes as the general figure production setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and this process exit. Also, in the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: NO), then it is determined whether the current is in the final variation of the time saving state (C4251), the final variation If it is determined that it is not in the middle (C4251: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C4251, if it is determined that the current is in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (C4251: YES), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is obtained, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed Extract (C4252).

Then, it is determined whether the end timing of the special figure fluctuation being executed is during the normal figure long per game (C4253), and if it is determined that it is during the normal figure long open game (C4253: YES), this time reduction Since the normal figure long open per game is executed to cross the state end timing, set a display command to suggest that the special figure 2 fluctuation zone (support state) will be set after the end of the time saving (C4254) , the process ends. When the display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same process as other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 .

In the processing of C4253, when it is determined that the long opening is not performed at the time saving end timing (C4253: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that the long opening is not performed at the time saving end timing in the processing of C4253 (C4253: NO), this processing is configured to end as it is. The time-saving state that was set was a time-saving state (for example, time-saving B) that made it easy to set the support state. It is also possible to provide a means for determining whether a time-saving state (for example, time-saving A) in which it is difficult to set is set, and display a display mode that can notify (suggest) the determination result to the player. . In addition, at the end timing of this normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern per game executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, a means for determining whether the final fluctuation of the time saving state has ended Provided, at the end timing of this normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern per game executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, if it is determined that the final fluctuation of the time saving state has not ended, that The determination result may be suggested (notified).

As described above, in the sixth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is used rather than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, It is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than when the normal symbol low probability state) is set. A ball is made to enter the V winning port 650A which is in an open state during the small winning game, and when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), the opportunity to execute the big winning game is established. .

Then, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 5 times)) and When at least the second end condition (a condition that is met when a specific small hit is won a specified number of times (for example, once) by a special lottery during the time saving state), and the first end condition is met Only in this case, an advantageous state advantageous to the player can be given. Specifically, during the special figure fluctuation in which the first end condition is established, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is extremely shortened (normal figure fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many within one special figure fluctuation period It is configured to be able to execute normal figure fluctuations.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the establishment of the first end condition, the fluctuation period of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed is shortened by the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final fluctuation) be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the normal long open per game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final fluctuation), and in addition, the time saving state ends during the execution of the normal long open per game, normal Even after the state is set, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the normal pattern long open per game.

That is, in this control example, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small winning probability about 1/ 7)) While playing a game aiming to be awarded, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, It is configured such that a second privilege (a period during which a short variation is executed as a normal pattern variation) different from the first privilege is granted. By configuring in this way, even if a small hit is won as a game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state, even if it is not won, a privilege advantageous to the player can be given. It is possible to improve the game motivation of.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured so that the period during which the short fluctuation is executed as a normal figure fluctuation during the execution period of the special figure final fluctuation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 times of working hours) is set , When the time saving state ends, it is possible to make it easier to acquire the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) up to the upper limit (4 pieces). Furthermore, by shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period in which the electric role product 1640A is open per unit time, so that the state in which the game is being executed per normal pattern (electric role The normal state can be easily set in a state where the object 1640A is open, or a state where the electric accessory 1640A is left open.

As a result, even after the normal state is set, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 1640. Many special figure 2 lotteries can be executed, and players can be motivated to play games.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example changes from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter during a specific game (for example, a small winning game). A specific ball entry means (V winning opening 650A) is provided that is variable to a second state (open state) that is easy to open, and a ball that enters the specific ball entering means (V winning opening 650A) enters a specific area (V gate). However, it is not limited to this, and the ball enters the V winning opening 650A that is opened when the small winning game is executed. The technique described in this control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. Even in this case, by configuring the special figure 2 lottery so that the probability of winning a small prize is higher than the special figure 1 lottery, it is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned second privilege is granted. A game state can be provided.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 383, the period during which the above-described second privilege is granted is the period during which the final variation of the time saving state is executed (a specific time saving end condition is period to be established), but not limited to this, for example, when the time saving 99 times is set, immediately after the time saving state is set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set period of 1 to 5 times), or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time saving state was set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 45 to 50 times). As given, the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern 6 table 202FE may be configured. In addition, a plurality of time saving types are provided for the time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, and the period in which the second privilege is given may be changed according to the set time saving type. good.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second privilege is granted, so it is expected that the second privilege will be granted. It is possible to play a game in the time saving state while letting the player play.

<Regarding Modified Example of Sixth Control Example>
Next, a modification of the sixth control example described above will be described. In the sixth control example described above, when a predetermined condition is established in the time saving state, that is, in a state in which a specific time saving state (5 times of working time saving state) is set, when the fifth special figure variation is executed An advantageous game in which a short (0.1 second) variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the normal pattern (ordinary pattern) is executed, just before the end of the time reduction state or immediately after the end of the time reduction state. It is configured to make it easier to win the ball into the second winning port 640 at the . Then, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. It is constructed so that a ball can win in the second winning port 640 but cannot win in the first winning port 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in this modification, when the position below the second winning port 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640A is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game can win a prize and the electric accessory 640A is in an open state, the game board 13 having the first winning port 64 arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball fired in the right-handed game to win a prize is used. ing. Since the configuration of the game board 13 other than that is the same as that of the sixth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in this modification, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate in the order in which the acquisition information is acquired (the order in which the ball wins in the corresponding winning opening) It is different from the sixth control example described above in that (lottery) is configured to be executed and that the configuration for holding and storing the acquisition information of special figure 2 is deleted. Since other contents are the same as those of the sixth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 seconds) is likely to be set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is granted during the time saving state, and the normal figure during the game per normal figure When the state is set, it becomes easier for the ball shot by the right-handed game to win the second prize winning opening 640, and it is possible to make it difficult to win the first winning opening 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special figure 2 variation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at the timing other than during the normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game becomes easier to win the first winning hole 64. And since it does not have a configuration for storing the suspension of the special figure 2, even if the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation configured not to run.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A serves as guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning hole 640 and limiting means for limiting the winning of the ball to the first winning hole 64. configured to function. By configuring in this way, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set depending on whether the second privilege is given during the time saving state or when it is not given. Benefits can vary greatly. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the second privilege to be awarded.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 397. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, a series of performances can be executed as a variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of performances are executed. When it is done, it is difficult to understand whether the execution trigger of this series of production is a special lottery or a normal lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production result (lottery result). (See Figure 317).

However, the notification mode (small display area DM4 display mode) is displayed, there is a risk that it will be determined which pattern lottery the current series of effects is based on.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, in the effect (set effect) executed with the special symbol lottery (special lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (normal lottery), which pattern lottery However, the notification mode (display mode of the small display area DM4 of the main display area DM) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the same timing can be displayed. The characteristic configuration and control content of the seventh control example will be described below. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. FIG. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example differs in the configuration of the right game area from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 315). , are otherwise identical. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example. In this seventh control example, the ball flowing down the right side game area by the player playing the right-handed game, each winning opening that can win by each winning game (normal figure winning game, small winning game, big winning game) (Second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650A, specific winning opening 65A) are configured to have different times. It takes about 4 seconds to reach V, about 2 seconds to reach V winning opening 650A, and about 6 seconds to reach specific winning opening 65A.

Here, the configuration of the right game area in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. FIG. As shown in FIG. 386, a distribution means 700 capable of distributing balls to a plurality of ball paths is provided above the right game area. , and the second route 702 alternately.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering sphere path, and is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the sphere to pass through the first path 701 . Then, the ball that has passed through the first path 701 reaches the upper surface of the channel unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640A. The flow path unit is configured such that its upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 66, and as part of the flow path formed on its upper surface, the electric accessory 640A and the winning door 65B are provided. is provided. When both the electric accessory 640A and the winning door 65B are closed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the bottom end of the upper surface of the flow path unit (the end on the side of the out port 66) and is out. It is configured to flow into port 66 .

The time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is about 1 second. The surface forming the path) is provided with a delay member for delaying the flow of the ball, so that the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A is about 2 seconds. Configure. Here, in the seventh control example, a meandering flow path is formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640A so that the sphere does not flow down in a straight line. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flow into the opening 704A of the straight passage channel formed in the depth direction of the first path, and are provided near the outlet of the passage channel. It is constructed so that it flows down toward the V winning opening 650A, and a ball shot by a right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650A in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, each winning opening (first 2 winning opening 640, V winning opening 650A, specific winning opening 65A) are configured so that the time to reach them is different, and specifically, a ball fired in a right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640. It takes about 4 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650A, about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650A, and about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65A.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to sequentially confirm which winning hole the ball shot in the right-handed game will enter, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, when a small hit is won in a special figure lottery, and when a big hit is won, different special figure fluctuation times are set, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after hitting the ball, in order to win the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to perform notification to guide the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. Then, when a small win is won or when a big win is won, a set performance is executed after the special figure variation is started, and a right-handed game is notified at the same timing after a specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the lottery result of this time by the timing when the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of being elected per normal figure long opening by the general figure lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so as to notify the right-handed game at the specific timing of the set effect. Configure. By constructing in this way, even if the set effect is executed and the notification to guide the right-handed game is performed, it is difficult for the player to understand which winning game the effect result of the set effect this time indicates. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389, a series of effects used as a variation effect of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) in the present seventh control example, and a right-handed game that guides a right-handed game The relationship with the display timing of the notification will be explained. FIG. 389 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 389, in this control example, an effect (a series of effects) is executed for a predetermined period of time (54 seconds) after the start of symbol variation, and then a guidance notification is given to guide the player to a right-handed game. (Right stroke notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls shot by the right-handed game are released according to the lottery result of the pattern variation being executed this time. It is configured to win a prize through a prize-winning port (second prize-winning port 640, V-winning port 650A, specific prize-winning port 65A).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) that has been won, hit the right after 54 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (during the special figure 1 fluctuation) Notification is performed. Then, the jackpot game is started at the timing (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed) when the ball shot by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65A.

Also, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) that is winning a small hit, right-handed notification after 54 seconds from the start of fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is executed. Then, a small hit game is started at the timing (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed) when the ball shot by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650A. In addition, in this control example, when the ball enters the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game, it is configured to always pass through the V gate, and the ball enters the V winning opening 650A during the small winning game. In this case, the big winning game is started two seconds after the start of the small winning game. As a result, in the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 fluctuation and in the case of winning the small prize, the performance mode of the variable performance (series performance) executed from the start of the variation and the guide notification for guiding the right-handed game. In addition to the execution timing of , it is possible to make the timing from the start of variation to the start of the big winning game the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning normal pattern fluctuation (54 seconds), the right-handed notification will be executed 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (when the normal pattern fluctuation is stopped) be done. Then, at the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (2 seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the normal pattern per game is started. It should be noted that even if a series of effects are executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, the start timing of the jackpot game via the normal pattern per game is the same as when the jackpot is won in the above-mentioned special figure 1 lottery, or when the small hit is won. configured to be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, after the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game (right-handed notification) is executed, at a plurality of timings of the period (right-handed ball flowing down period) until the jackpot game is started, this time A failure effect for informing that the result of the effect is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed) can be executed. Specifically, failure notification timings are set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

In other words, although detailed description and illustrations are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special figure 1 lottery is out, the variation time is configured to set a variation pattern of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds , When the variation pattern is selected, the same variation effect as the above-described content is executed, and failure notification is performed at the timing when the variation time has elapsed. Then, the failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball could not be entered into the second winning port 640 during the normal game, and the ball was entered into the second winning port 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing of notifying the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed by the special figure 2 lottery, or the timing of winning the small winning and ending the small winning game as a result of the special figure 2 lottery.

By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the losing series performance executed when the result of the special figure 1 lottery is lost, and the series performance executed based on the winning of the general figure winning, In the game process after the game is played, it is possible to make the same performance mode as that set when the big win game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, for example, even if the big hit is won with the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the above-mentioned failure notification is executed or not. It is configured to execute the inciting production of. In this case, since the special figure 1 jackpot is won internally, a success performance mode for informing the player that it will not fail is set as a result of the fanning performance and executed as a performance.

In this way, by executing the fanning production, it is possible to reduce the difference in the production mode between the series of productions in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series of productions in which the failure notification is not executed. ) makes it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result indicates, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect to be executed (the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), based on the ball flow situation in the right game area, the current effect It can be difficult to determine in advance what the result will be.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. This control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 390(A), the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 390(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the seventh control example. In this control example, the variation pattern 7 table 202GE is replaced with the variation pattern 5 table 202EE, and the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202EF is replaced with the normal figure variation pattern selection 7 table 202GF. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 391, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202GE will be described. FIG. 391(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202GE. As shown in FIG. 391 (A), the variation pattern 7 table 202GE has a normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 and a time saving variation pattern 5 table 202EE2. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the state is set are made different.

Here, with reference to FIG. 391(B), the contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 will be described. FIG. 391(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1. As shown in FIG. 391 (B), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 is the first special symbol ( The contents defined in the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special figure 1) are different, and the data referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The contents defined in the table are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1, even if the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time ) is selected, and specifically, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is “out”, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 139” in the range of “short "Out (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Out (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", "Short set effect (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194" "Various types of Super Reach (60 seconds)" are defined in the range, and "Set effects (60 seconds)" are defined in the range of "195 to 198".

Also, if the lottery result of special figure 1 is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29" and "normal reach (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39" ``Short set effect (30 seconds)'' is specified in the range of ``40 to 179'', ``Various super reach (60 seconds)'' in the range of ``180 to 198'', and ``Set effect (60 seconds)'' in the range of ``180 to 198''. , If the lottery result is "small win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" in the range of "super reach (60 seconds)", "100 to 198" in the range of "small Hit set effect (56 seconds)” is defined.

As described above, in this control example, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, it is configured to select a variation pattern for executing the set effect at a predetermined rate. The variation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect is different between when the small win is won and when the big win is won. Specifically, when a big win is won, a variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as a set performance, and when a small win is won, a variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as a set performance. In other words, the variation time of the set performance at the time of winning the small prize is shorter by 4 seconds than the time of variation of the set performance at the time of winning the big prize.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 386, in the game board 13 of this control example, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning opening 650A which is opened during the small winning game. The time (about 6 seconds) required for the ball to reach the specific winning opening 65A which is open during the jackpot game is longer by 4 seconds than the time (about 2 seconds) required to complete the game. . And, as will be described later, in this control example, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed regardless of the set fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) It is configured to execute a notification (right-handed notification) that guides a right-handed game.

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set performance to the execution of the notification of hitting to the right can be the same for both the big winning and the small winning, so that the player can be informed of the performance result of the set performance. can be obfuscated. Furthermore, after 54 seconds from the execution of the set production, a right-handed notification is performed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, a special drawing lottery result that triggers the execution of the set production this time. No matter which one (big hit, small hit), the ball shot by the right-handed game can be won in any of the winning openings that are in the open state.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202GF will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202GF. As shown in FIG. 392, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202GF is defined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202EF (see FIG. 338) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the normal chart long fluctuation C (58 seconds) is specified in the range, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202GF, the game state is the normal state (normal pattern low probability), the result of the general pattern lottery is A per normal pattern, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is "500 ~ 999" range, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" when the game state is normal (normal figure low probability) and the result of the general figure lottery is out. "Normal figure long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is defined as a pattern.

Then, when the normal pattern long variation C is selected, it is configured so that the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the normal pattern long variation C, the right hitting notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays the right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the shot ball is configured to win the second prize-winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be the same for the jackpot winning, the small winning winning, and the normal drawing winning, so that the player can give the set effect. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the performance result of. Further, after 54 seconds have passed since the set effect is executed, a right-handed notification is performed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the pattern lottery result that triggers the execution of this set effect is determined. Any of the winning openings (specific winning opening 65A, V winning opening 650A, second winning opening) in which the ball fired by the right-handed game is released regardless of whether it was a jackpot, a small winning, or a normal game. 640) can be awarded.

Furthermore, in this control example, the special figure reservation and the general figure reservation are foreseen, and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation is for a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds). After a predetermined range period (for example, after 58 seconds to 62 seconds) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, when it is determined that it is the timing at which the winning is won in the general figure lottery and the long open winning game is executed. A set performance is executed from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and 54 seconds after the start of the set performance executed from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, the right hitting information corresponding to the normal figure long open winning game is notified. configured to run

In this way, the contents of the special figure fluctuation and the contents of the normal figure fluctuation are read ahead, and when it is determined that the set production can be executed at any of the pattern fluctuation start timings, the set production can be executed. The frequency of performance execution can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the performance result of the set performance executed at the start timing of the special figure variation can indicate winning per normal figure long open, so that the player can play a game with extra features.

It should be noted that the relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handed notification should not deviate greatly. It may be shifted back and forth for a few seconds (2 seconds), and in fact it is the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the winning opening 58 seconds after the execution of the set effect is executed, but the set effect is After 54 seconds from the execution, the right hitting notification may be executed. By enabling execution of the set effect while allowing a slight deviation in this way, the conditions for executing the set effect are more likely to be satisfied, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the set effect is configured to be executed at the start timing of the pattern variation, but without being limited to this, if the above-described set effect execution condition is satisfied, for example, a special figure It may be constructed such that the set effect is executed while the variation is being executed. In this case, before the set effect is executed, it is preferable to display a pseudo-stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to execute the set effect that is started from the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without a sense of incongruity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(B), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that an effect prohibition flag 223GA is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223GA is a flag for prohibiting setting of a new set effect, and is set to ON when prohibiting setting of a new set effect. In this control example, in addition to the period during which the set effect is being executed, it is configured so that the set effect is not executed during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including loss) is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation. , the production inhibition flag 223GA is set to ON even during the period in which the specific super ready-to-win production is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the effect being executed (especially, the effect with a high degree of expectation for winning) is switched to the set effect in the middle, and the player's desire to play is lowered.

<Regarding control processing in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 393 to 397, the contents of control processing in this seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the main controller 110 performs various determination processing (hit determination processing, etc.) and various selection processing (hit type selection processing, variation pattern selection processing, etc.) in contrast to the control processing contents in the fifth control example described above. ), the processing results are different, and the specifics of various processing (processing for setting commands, processing for storing processing results, etc.) executed based on the processing results. Although the content is different, the technical idea is the same, so detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, instead of the stop command processing 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368), the stop command processing 7 (see C3246 in FIG. ) instead of changing display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394), and effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) instead of effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374). are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, the contents of stop command processing 7 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 7 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 393, the stop command process 7 (C3246) differs from the above-described stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the stop command process 7 (C3246) is executed, first, the same C3951 to C3956 processes as the stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368) are executed, and then the stop command this time is the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON to indicate the stop of the target fluctuation (C3971), and if it is determined to indicate the stop of the target fluctuation (C3971: YES), the effect prohibition flag 223GA is turned off. Set (C3972) and terminate this processing. On the other hand, in the process of C3971, if it is determined that it does not indicate the stop of the target variation (C3972: NO), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 394, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 7 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 394, the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is added. , and the addition of processing for setting the effect prohibition flag 223GA to ON when the acquired variation pattern is super reach, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is executed, the same processes C4001 to C4004 as the variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting processing (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the set effects are satisfied, and when the conditions for executing the set effects are satisfied, the processing for setting the effect mode of the set effects is performed. executed.

Returning to FIG. 394, the description continues. When the process of C4041 is completed, it is then determined whether the variation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and if it is determined that it is super reach (CS24042: YES), the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON. Then (C4043), a display variation pattern command is set (C4044), and the same processing from C4006 to C4010 as the variation display setting processing 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4042, if it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: NO), skip the process of C4043 and proceed to the process of C4044.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described. FIG. 395 is a flow chart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), the process for setting the set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation or the normal figure fluctuation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (C4901), and if it is determined that it is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (C4901) , this process is terminated as it is because it is not in the game state for executing the set effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (C4901: YES), then this time fluctuation display setting processing 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) sets the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation (sets the effect) It is determined whether it is a process (C4902), and if it is determined that it is a process of setting the variation display of the special figure variation (C4902: YES), the process of C4003 of the variation display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) (C4903).

In the processing of C4903, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: YES), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to ON. If it does (C4904: NO), it is determined whether the present is in long fluctuation per normal pattern (C4905).

In the process of C4905, if it is determined that the current is per normal long fluctuation (C4905: YES), the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223EH and the value of the special pattern fluctuation time counter 223EG are compared ( C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of normal figure fluctuation is shorter than the special figure fluctuation time of this time (C4907). Then, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time this time is longer (C4907: NO), the normal symbol winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read (C4908), and in the read winning information Determine whether there is winning information corresponding to the normal long fluctuation (C4909), and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the normal long fluctuation (C4909: YES), set production according to this fluctuation pattern is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C4911), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4909, when it is determined that there is no normal/universal pattern long variation in the winning information read out in the process of C4908 (C4909: NO), this process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of C4907, if it is determined that the remaining period of the normal pattern fluctuation is longer (C4907: YES), set the set effect according to the normal pattern fluctuation stop timing (C4912), turn on the effect prohibition flag 223GA (C4920), and the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of C4905, the state of determining that it is in the process of long fluctuation per normal pattern, that is, in the processing of C4904, it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223GA is not set to ON, long fluctuation per normal pattern As the case of being in, for example, at the start timing of the long variation per normal figure being executed, it is the case where the super reach production is executed as the variation production of the special figure fluctuation.

As described above, in this control example, the processing of C4909 is provided, and when there is a normal/universal pattern long variation in the winning information, it is configured to set the set effect. By configuring in this way, when it is determined that there is a general pattern long variation in the winning information, the general pattern long variation is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special pattern variation, so the set effect is executed During the normal figure fluctuation is executed multiple times in a short time, for example, by executing the normal figure short per game, this set production is a set production executed based on the special figure fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping it. In addition, although the processing of C4909 is provided in this control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set effect may be set.

In addition, in the set effect set in the process of C4912, the set effect is executed at the timing of the normal figure fluctuation stop timing instead of the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, so the result of the set effect is the normal figure long open You will be notified of the outcome. In addition, if the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation at the start of this special figure fluctuation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) during which the production mode of the set production can be executed, instead of setting the set production, the general figure long open It is preferable to configure so that a dedicated presentation mode indicating winning is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the winning per normal pattern long opening.

On the other hand, in the process of C4904, if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C4904: YES), or in the process of C4905, if it is determined that it is not during long fluctuation per normal pattern (C4905: NO) acquires the lottery result of the general drawing lottery currently being executed (C4913), determines whether it is elected per normal drawing (per normal drawing long open) (C4914), per normal drawing (normal drawing) If it is determined that the long open per) is not won (or the normal drawing lottery is not executed) (C4914: NO), the process proceeds to C4910 described above.

In the process of C4914, if it is determined that it is elected per normal figure (C4914: YES), then it is determined whether this special figure variation is a per variation (C4915), and it is determined that it is per variation If (C4915: YES), the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the general figure fluctuation is from this special figure fluctuation time is also shorter (C4917). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of this special figure fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation being executed (C4917: YES), the set production that is being executed for the normal figure fluctuation is this time (C4918) is set to the set effect showing the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4915, if it is determined that this special figure variation is not per variation (C4915), or in the process of C4917, the variation of this special figure variation than the remaining period of the normal figure variation being executed If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: YES), this process is terminated without setting the set effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time.

In addition, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) is the process of setting the variable display of normal symbols (C4902: NO), normal pattern set effect setting The process is executed (C4919) and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 396, the contents of the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919) will be described. FIG. 396 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919). When the general figure set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined to be a set effect (C5001: YES), the next First, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C5002).

When it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is not set to ON in the process of C5002 (C5002: NO), the set effect corresponding to the current variation pattern is set (C5003), and the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON. (C5004), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON (C5002: YES), it is determined whether the normal pattern variation is per variation (long open per variation) ( C5005), when it is determined that it is per long open fluctuation (C5005: YES), the special figure lottery result being executed is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether it is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether the production prohibition flag 223GA is set to ON based on the special figure deviation fluctuation.

In the process of C5007, if it is determined that it is not per special figure (C5007: NO), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223EH and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG are compared (C5008), Determines whether this normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the special pattern fluctuation being executed (C5009), and if it is determined that this normal pattern fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: YES), during execution A replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the general pattern lottery result (long opening hit) is set (C5010) by the special figure effect (set effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation), and this processing is finished. do. On the other hand, in the process of C5007, if it is determined that the special figure variation being executed is per variation (C5007: YES), or in the process of C5009, the remaining special figure variation during the current normal figure variation time If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: NO), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 397, the content of effect update process 7 (C3142) will be described. FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 7 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 397, the effect update process 7 (C3142) is the right-handed notification process when the set effect is executed in contrast to the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the fifth control example. The difference is that the Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description of the same content is omitted.

When the effect update process 7 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the fifth control example are executed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is not set to ON in the process of C4505 (C4505: NO), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is finished, the set effect is executed. (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is made by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

In the process of C4541, if it is determined that the set effect is being executed (the effect time measurement counter is being measured) (C4541: YES), is it the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed since the set effect was started? is determined (C4542), and when it is determined that 54 seconds have elapsed (C4542: YES), a display guidance command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), the process proceeds to C4507, After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: NO), or in the process of C4542, when it is determined that the timing has not passed 54 seconds (C4542: NO) , C4543 are not performed, the process proceeds to C4507, and then the present process ends.

In addition, in the effect update process 7 (C3142) shown in FIG. 397, only when it is determined that the set effect is being executed, the right-handed game is shown at the timing of 54 seconds from the start of the effect. However, in practice, it is configured to set a display guide command for showing a right-handed game even at other timings. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202GE1 of FIG. 391 (B), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed At the timing when 24 seconds have passed since, a display guidance command for indicating a right-handed game is set. In addition, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is replaced in the middle, a display guide command for indicating a right-handed game may be set at a different timing. As a result, a right-handed game is notified at a timing different from usual, so that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 410. FIG. This eighth control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that the method of setting the effect mode of the series of effects is different. First, a method for setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 398 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 398, in the fifth control example described above, when winning per normal pattern (per normal pattern long open), and when winning a jackpot or small hit in the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery , a series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects are classified into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, the scenario 1 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 319 (B), FIG. 320 (A)) executed during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the production mode executed during the normal pattern per game (FIG. 320 Scenario 2 corresponding to (B)), Scenario 3 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 323 (A)) executed when the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal game per game, It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when the ball wins in the second winning port 640 during the normal game to when the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning ball is executed is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 321 (A)), Scenario 4 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 321 (B)) executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation, and during the small hit game Scenario 5 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 322 (B)) executed at the end of the production mode (see FIG. 324 (B) and FIG. 325 (B)). Corresponding scenario 7 and are stored.

Then, when a big win or a small win is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of performances using a plurality of performance data are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern command of the corresponding special figure 1 variation. there is Specifically, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, a variable production (series of productions) that sets the production data from the scenarios 1 to 5 described above collectively is executed, and a small win is made in the special drawing 1 lottery. , a variable performance (a series of performances) in which the performance data of the scenarios 1 to 4 are collectively set is executed.

On the other hand, the series of productions set based on the winning per normal figure sets each scenario that constitutes the series of productions individually, and sets the next scenario based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition for one scenario. It consists of Specifically, if you win a normal long open per normal lottery, and if the execution conditions for a series of effects are met, scenario 1 is set to indicate the start of a series of effects, and a normal long open per is set. Scenario 2 is then set when the indicated stop command is received. In addition, in the fifth control example, there is a case where scenario 1 is set (so-called fake effect) in a state where no winning is made for the normal long open, and in that case, the elapsed time of scenario 1 ends , the series of performances ends.

Next, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 2 is executed during the normal long open per game, and when the ball wins the second winning hole 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that A notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which the series of effects is output from the main controller 110 (sub display area in FIG. 321(A) DS). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, scenario 3 is set. If the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the period in which Scenario 2 is set, Scenario 7 is set in order to end the series of effects, and an end screen is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds). Is displayed.

In the fifth control example described above, when moving to scenario 3, that is, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed (waiting period) However, it is determined based on the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see FIG. 323(A)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see FIG. 321(A) reference) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or longer, the series of performances being executed is artificially terminated (scenario 7 is set), and a special series of performances (continuous series of performances) is restarted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. is executed (see FIG. 326). Further, when scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in a state where scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 is set, the conditions for transition to the next scenario are established, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and the production mode of the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed . Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the special figure 2 variation of this time indicates a hit, it moves to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation indicates the deviation, the process moves to scenario 7 and ends the series of processes.

Here, in this control example, the same variation time is set even if the special figure 2 variation being executed in the state where scenario 4 is set is a small hit or a big hit, and the transition to scenario 5 However, without being limited to this, for example, when winning a jackpot with special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the fluctuation time is a small hit fluctuation time (15 seconds) and a small hit game time (10 seconds ) to set a variation time of 25 seconds, and transition from scenario 4 to scenario 5 during the special figure 2 jackpot variation, and according to the timing of stopping the special figure 2 jackpot variation, the jackpot It may be configured so that a game is executed.

When the scenario 5 is set when the special figure 2 variation is a small hit, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 5 is executed until the V passing command is received during the small hit game or until the small hit game ends. When the V passing command is received, a notification mode indicating the fact is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which a series of effects are executed, and the game shifts to a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received after the small winning game period (10 seconds) has passed, the process proceeds to scenario 7 in order to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when executing a series of effects based on the special figure 1 fluctuation, a series of production scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the normal When the series of effects is executed based on the figure variation, the effect mode of the series of effects is updated according to the degree of establishment of the transition condition corresponding to each scenario. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of performances in the same performance mode, when the update of the performance mode is fixed, the processing for setting the series of performances can be simplified, and the update contents of the performance mode can be changed according to the game situation. In this case, the mode of presentation can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when executing a series of effects based on the general pattern lottery, the scenario of the series of effects is configured to be set individually, but not limited to this, for example, the general pattern Of the series of effects to be executed based on a lottery, a plurality of scenarios may be collectively set for portions where the update of the effect mode is confirmed. This simplifies the process of setting a series of effects.

The method of setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above with reference to FIG. In addition to simplifying the processing, if the contents of the presentation mode update are variable depending on the game situation, the presentation mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation. Since the effect mode that can be variably set is only the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3, the player feels a sense of incongruity when compared with the effect mode based on other scenarios in the series of effects executed in a predetermined period. I had a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-described problem, in this eighth control example, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern (first special pattern) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, Based on the prediction result, it is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation. In other words, when the normal figure fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed this time and the general figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal figure are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is determined whether or not the currently executed special figure 1 fluctuation is finished during the normal figure per game, and based on the determination result, the production mode of a series of performances corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation is set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the variation end timing of the special figure 1 variation being executed is the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period) After If it is, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) that can be executed by special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of executing normal figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the standby period as various effect modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, it is possible to lengthen the variably settable period of the effect mode of the series of effects according to the length of the standby period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400, the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described. The eighth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series of production scenario table 222HA is added to the ROM 222, and that a medium hit flag 223HA, a production scenario storage area 223HB, and a constant monitoring flag 223HC are added to the RAM 223. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 399(A), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 399(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 399(A), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a series of effect scenario table 222HA is added.

The series of effects scenario table 222HA is a data table that defines the effects of a series of effects to be executed corresponding to the progressing game situation. Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the normal pattern scenario table 222HA1, which defines the production scenario of the series of effects set based on the normal pattern variation, out of the series effect scenario table 222HA will be described.

FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the series of effect scenario table 222HA. Note that FIG. 400 shows only the characteristic contents of the eighth control example (the production scenario of the series of productions set based on the normal pattern fluctuation) among the contents defined in the series of production scenario table 222HA. The description and explanation of the same content as the fifth control example described above, that is, the content of the production mode of a series of productions set in correspondence with the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation, is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 400, in this eighth control example, when setting the production mode of a series of productions based on the normal pattern fluctuation, it is possible to set multiple normal pattern scenarios (normal pattern per scenario 1 to 4). It is configured, and based on the result of the first prediction (prediction on the length of the waiting period that can occur during the execution of a series of productions) executed at the time of normal pattern fluctuation, different normal pattern per scenarios are set Configure.

Specifically, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation that was elected per normal pattern long open, it is determined whether the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is fluctuating, and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 is fluctuating To determine the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation in execution. Next, compare the game period of the normal figure long open per game executed based on this normal figure fluctuation and the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed Determine whether it is later than the end time of the game per normal pattern long open to be executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, and if it is determined that it is later, special from the end of the game per normal pattern long open The waiting period until the FIG. 1 variation ends (the period until the special figure 2 variation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined by the above-described processing.

By configuring in this way, at the start of the normal figure fluctuation, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed, so depending on the length of the waiting period It is possible to execute a series of performances in a different performance mode.

In addition, in the first prediction described above, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not being executed at the start timing of the normal figure fluctuation, or the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is longer than the game period per normal figure long If it is before, because the standby period cannot be predicted in advance, only the production mode of the series of productions corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation time is set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 400, a series of performance scenario table 222HA defines a plurality of normal-pattern winning scenarios that are set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal-pattern fluctuation. As a result of the prediction, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, and if it is "2 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds" "Scenario 2 per normal map" is set, and if it is "30 seconds or more", it is defined so that "scenario 3 per normal map" is set. Moreover, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is defined that "scenario 4 per normal pattern" is set.

Here, I will explain the contents of each normal scenario. When "normal map per scenario 1" is set, as a production mode of a series of effects, "scenario 1" in "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" in "normal map per game", "special figure 2 fluctuation" The content of the winning scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to the "scenario 3" is set to "medium". In other words, when "normal figure per scenario 1" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period is short, without setting the special figure 2 waiting period exclusive production mode, the production mode showing the normal figure per game A series of productions that shift from to the production mode showing the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). can be done. In addition, in this control example, when scenario 1 per normal pattern is set, special pattern 2 standby period of less than 2 seconds generated when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during normal pattern long open per game Inside, it is configured so that the production mode that can be set during the game per normal figure is continuously set, but without being limited to this, the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds It may be configured so as to set an effect mode that can be set inside.

When "normal map scenario 2" is set, as a production mode of a series of effects, "scenario 1" for "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" for "normal map per game", "special figure 2 fluctuation" The content of the winning scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set for "waiting" and "scenario 4" is set for "during special figure 2 fluctuation". In other words, when "per normal figure scenario 2" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, it is configured to set the special presentation mode for the special figure 2 waiting period.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 standby period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort (pause). Furthermore, in this control example, when "scenario 1 per normal map" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special map 2 fluctuation" is set, and when "scenario 2 per normal map" is set is configured to be set in correspondence with "special figure 2 waiting". By configuring in this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period, it is possible to set a production mode that shifts from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of productions. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances that do not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, when "normal map scenario 3" is set, the series of production modes are "scenario 1" for "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" for "normal map game", and "special The contents of the winning scenario are defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 2", "scenario 3" in FIG. In other words, if "normal figure scenario 3" is set, that is, if the special figure 2 waiting period is greater than or equal to a predetermined period, the period during which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the normal figure game is It is configured to be longer than other normal scenarios.

By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long for the player, it is possible to make the player think that the one period is in the middle of the game per normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since it is configured to display the production mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the game per normal pattern for a long time, the game per normal pattern is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. I can make you think that it is.

Also, if the "normal pattern scenario 4" is set, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern 1 fluctuation during the game per normal pattern long open can not be predicted at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, so "normal pattern Only "scenario 1" corresponding to "during figure fluctuation" is set, and this process is terminated. In addition, when "normal map winning scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the fifth control example described above, and the scenario based on the determination result is set. It is configured as follows.

In addition, even when a different normal pattern winning scenario is set as the normal pattern winning scenario, the same performance mode is set during the small winning game and during the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, the flow in the case where scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 401 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when Scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects.

As shown in Figure 401, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period is "20 seconds" as the processing result of the first prediction process, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the production data corresponding to the "normal pattern winning scenario 2" defined in the series production scenario table 222HA. is set and stored in the production scenario storage area 223HB, which will be described later. Then, based on the lapse of time, a series of effects are executed in the effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB.

In this way, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, if the future game content can be predicted, by configuring to set a plurality of production data (scenario) collectively, to set the production mode of the series production processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, the flow in the case where scenario 4 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects will be described. FIG. 402 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when Scenario 4 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects.

As shown in Figure 402, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when normal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed as a processing result of the first prediction process is before the stop timing of the fluctuation per normal figure, it is possible to predict the length of the waiting period. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined as "unpredictable", and at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the production data corresponding to the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" defined in the series production scenario table 222HA. is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 402, after the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is stopped, during the period until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, a new Since it is not possible to predict whether or not Toku-zu 1 variation will be executed, it is a situation where the length of the waiting period cannot be predicted. In such a case, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, only the production mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation is set as the production mode of the series of effects, and when the normal pattern fluctuation stops (at the start of the normal pattern) ), the second prediction process is performed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the normal pattern fluctuation stops (at the start of the normal pattern), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This process is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time of normal figure fluctuation stop (normal figure per start time), and if it is determined that special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the special being executed The remaining period of FIG. 1 fluctuation is compared with the game period of the game per normal long open, and the length of the waiting period is determined. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the series of effects is set based on the contents defined in the series of effect scenario table 222HA.

As shown in Figure 402, if it is not possible to predict the waiting period even in the second prediction process (if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at the present time, the standby period cannot be determined, so the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the normal figure per game (normal figure long open per game), or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is always monitored. A constant monitoring process is executed for this purpose. And, by the constant monitoring process, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation is executed before the new special figure 1 variation is performed, the special figure 2 is made to correspond to the start of the special figure 2 variation An effect mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when setting the effect mode of a series of effects to be executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, the standby period in which an irregular period is set according to the game situation It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. By configuring in this way, even if a long standby period is set during the period in which the series of performances is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of performances that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in the eighth control example, since the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects is executed, the series of effects to be executed before the actual waiting period is set. It is possible to variably set the mode of presentation according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances without a sense of incongruity as compared with the case where only the performance modes set corresponding to the standby period among the performance modes of the series of performances are varied according to the length of the standby period. .

Furthermore, in the present eighth control example, in a state where the waiting period is set, it is configured to be able to set an effect mode indicating that it is a period other than the waiting period (for example, a game period per normal figure), It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a long waiting period is set. In addition, in the eighth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, since it is configured to perform a right-handed game during a series of effects, whether or not the present is the waiting period is determined by the game method. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to discriminate.

In addition, in this eighth control example, when the length of the standby period is difficult to predict (impossible) at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, at a different timing (per normal pattern game start timing), the waiting period again is configured to execute processing for predicting the length of (second prediction processing). In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the standby period before the standby period is set, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the length of the standby period.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, the game situation during the game per normal pattern is constantly monitored, and the waiting period is handled based on the results of constant monitoring. Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be played, the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects can be simplified.

In addition, in the present eighth control example, in the process for predicting the waiting period (first prediction process, second prediction process), the length of the waiting period using the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed Although it is configured to predict (discriminate), it is not limited to this, for example, the special figure 1 pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A is read ahead, and based on the look-ahead result, the next It may be configured to predict the length of the standby period also using the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in the second.

By configuring in this way, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 402, the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is before the start timing of the game per normal figure, that is, during execution When the special figure 1 fluctuation is completed, the start condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation (winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640) cannot be established, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next It is possible to look ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the look-ahead result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy with respect to the length of the waiting period.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, but not limited to this, For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and priority over the special figure 2 variation It may be configured so that special figure 1 variation is executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 403 to 410. FIG. In this control example, in place of the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361), the winning information command processing 8 (see FIG. 403) is executed in contrast to the above-described fifth control example, and a series of effect determination processing (see FIG. 404 reference), the point of executing the hit related command processing 8 (see FIG. 405) instead of the hit related command processing 5 (see FIG. 364), and the normal figure per related command processing (see FIG. 406) Point of execution, point of executing variable production setting processing 8 (see FIG. 407) in place of variable production setting processing 5 (see FIG. 369), and execution of production setting processing during constant monitoring (see FIG. 408) , the point of executing the effect setting process 8 for the normal figure (see FIG. 409) instead of the effect setting process for the normal figure (see FIG. 371), and the point of executing the series of effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 410) , and are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, the numerical values were simply changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 403, the contents of the winning information command process 8 (C3242) will be described. FIG. 403 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning information command process 8 (C3242) executed in the eighth control example. In this winning information command process 8 (C3242), in contrast to the above-described winning information command process 5 (see FIG. 361), a process executed when a winning information command is received during execution of a series of effects (a series of effects determination process ( C3441 in FIG. 404)) is added, and the rest is the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prize information command process 8 (C3242) is executed, after executing the same processes of C3401 to C3405 as the prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example, in the process of C3403, If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: NO), the process of C3441 is executed. In the processing of C3441, a series of effect determination processing is executed (C3441). The details of this series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the contents of the series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described. FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing the contents of a series of effect determination processing (C3441) executed in winning information command processing 8 (FIG. 403) in the eighth control example. In this series of effect determination processing (C3441), it is determined whether a series of effects are currently being executed, and if it is determined that a series of effects are being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal map) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223EK is obtained (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223EK is 0 (C5102). The series effect counter 223EK acquired in the process of C4101 is set to a value corresponding to the effect period when a series of effects is executed, and is decremented (updated) in the effect update process that is periodically executed, and the counter value is set to "0", the series of performances is terminated. That is, in the processing of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects are being executed.

In the processing of C5102, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223EK is not greater than 0 (is 0) (C5102: NO), since the series effect is not currently being executed, various display modes during execution of the series effect Skipping the processing of C5103 to C5110 for setting , the process proceeds to the processing of C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223EK is greater than 0 (C5102: YES), since the series effect is being executed, the winning information command received this time is the special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) (C5103), and if it is determined that the special 2 prize is won (C5103: YES), the information in the production scenario storage area 223HB is read (C5104). It is determined whether there is (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is off (C5105: NO), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is on (C5105: YES), that is, the waiting period in which the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation is waited out of the production period in which the series of productions this time is executed If the state cannot be predicted, the waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the contents of calculation executed in the processing of C5106 will be described. Since the process of C5106 is a process that is executed when a winning information command indicating special figure 2 winning (special figure 2 winning) is received, the present time is the second winning opening 640 (starting winning opening of special figure 2 variation) The ball wins, and the condition that is part of the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 fluctuation is established. In this control example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are configured not to be executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 variation is given priority over the special figure 1 variation. configured to run on

That is, when the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the present time, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed at the present time is extracted using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG, and the extraction result is calculated as the waiting period. Also, if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the present time, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be immediately executed, so "0" is set as the standby period .

In addition, in this control example, the number of balls winning the second winning opening 640 is configured to be one during the execution of one series of effects (during one normal long open game). Therefore, when receiving a winning information command indicating special figure 2 winning (special 2 winning) in the process of C5103, it is configured to always execute processing for calculating the waiting period, but this Without limitation, for example, during execution of one series of effects (during one normal long open per game) When configuring so that two or more balls can win in the second winning port 640 is set to ON in the process of C5106 to indicate that the standby period has been calculated (calculated flag), and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is ON in the process of C5105 (C5105: YES) , is configured to determine whether the above-described calculated flag is set to ON, and if the calculated flag is set to ON, skip the processes of C5106 and C5107 and proceed to the process of C5108. It should be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, while a series of effects are being executed, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning port 640 and the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received multiple times , Since the standby period can be calculated only based on the winning information command indicating the first received special figure 2 winning, it is possible to suppress unnecessary processing from being executed. In other words, in this control example, the period from the timing of the first special figure 2 winning during the execution of a series of effects until the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed is set as a waiting period, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period By setting , even if the period (waiting period) in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed despite winning the special figure 2 is long, the effect that is executed in the middle of the series of effects (during the waiting period A plurality of balls enter the second prize winning opening 640 while the series of performances are being executed, since the performance to be executed is slowed down and the performance effect is suppressed from being lowered. However, even if the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received multiple times, there is no need to calculate the length of the waiting period based on the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning received after the second time. processing.

It should be noted that, as in this control example, during the period in which a series of effects are being executed, every time a winning information command indicating a special figure 2 winning is received, if the standby period is calculated, first Figure 2 When receiving a prize information command indicating a prize, whether or not the special figure 1 variation is executed, and if it is being executed, it is sufficient to determine the remaining period and calculate the waiting period. When the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, it is determined whether the special figure variation under execution is the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation, and if the special figure 1 variation is being executed , Based on the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation in execution and the winning information command indicating the previously received special figure 2 winning, the waiting period may be calculated.

In this case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning previously received is read in advance, and if the result of the look-ahead is out, the winning indicating the special figure 2 winning received this time The remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the next executed deviation fluctuation Waiting period It is good to configure it to be set as By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation is executed as a waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 2 lottery is out. can.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description continues. In the process of C5108, the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to C5109. In the processing of this C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 has been won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode that directly displays that the special figure 2 has been won, and a display that suggests the remaining period until the special figure variation corresponding to the winning is executed A mode, that is, an indirect display mode for indirectly displaying that the special figure 2 winning is displayed.

In addition, in this control example, using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning, the above-described direct display mode and indirect display mode are configured to be settable, but not limited to this, for example , the effect mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the standby period of the series of effects. In addition, the notification mode indicating that the ball has entered the second prize-winning opening 640 for the first time during the series of performances and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second prize-winning opening 640 for the second and subsequent times are made different. Also good.

Next, in the process of C5109, it is determined whether or not the ball that has won the V winning opening 650A has passed through a specific area (V area) (whether there is a V winning) (C5109). When it is determined that the ball that has won the V prize opening 650A has passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: YES), a display command corresponding to the V prize is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. . When it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650A has not passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: NO), then the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C5112), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 405, the contents of the win-related command process 8 (C3261) will be described. FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process 8 (C3261) executed in the eighth control example. In this hit related command process 8 (C3261), the effect mode in each period of the series of effects is set based on the execution of the general pattern winning game during the period in which the series of effects is being executed.

When the hit-related command process 8 (C3261) is executed, the same C3501 to C3504 processes as the hit-related command process 5 (see FIG. 364) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and in the process of C3505, the main control If it is determined that the command per general pattern has been received from the device 110 (C3505: YES), per general pattern per related command processing is executed (C3551), and then this processing ends. The details of this normal per figure related command process (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the contents of the normal per figure related command process (C3551) will be described. FIG. 406 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal per figure related command process (C3551) executed in the eighth control example. This per normal per related command process (C3551) is executed when a per related command related to per normal per per normal is received (C3505 in FIG. 405: YES), and the start timing and end of per normal per game At the timing, various processes for setting the effect mode of the series of effects are executed.

In the normal per figure related command process (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5201). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (C5201: YES), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223EK is greater than 0, that is, whether a series of effects is currently being executed (C5202). . If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223EK is not greater than 0 (C5202: NO), the opening command process for display is executed (C5203), the normal pattern per middle flag 223HA is set to ON, and C5215 Go to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5202, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223EK is greater than 0 (C5202: YES), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223HB is read out (C5205), then the effect scenario It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223HB is the scenario 4 per normal pattern (C5206).

Here, in the production scenario storage area 223HB, information indicating the normal pattern winning scenario set in the series of production prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when executing the normal pattern variation (normal pattern lottery) is stored. , and in the process of C5206, when it is determined that it is "per normal pattern scenario 4 (see FIG. 400)" which is a scenario per normal pattern in which the production mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal pattern is not set , processing for setting an effect mode during a game per normal pattern in a series of effects is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223HB is not scenario 4 for the normal pattern (scenarios 1 to 3 for the normal pattern) (C5206: NO), the normal pattern is already displayed. Since the production mode during the game is set, that is, in the series of production prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when executing the normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern lottery), Since it is a case where the effect mode corresponding to the period is set, without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal pattern in this process (Skip the processing of C5207 to C5210 d) Move to the process of C5204.

On the other hand, in the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223HB is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206: YES), special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) The value of 223EG and the game period per normal pattern are compared (C5207). When the processing contents of C5207 are explained in detail, first, using the value of the special figure variation time counter 223EG, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated. For example, when the special figure 1 variation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the variation time 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 variation (in this control example, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223EG is , 1 is subtracted in effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 281), so the value corresponding to 60 seconds is "60000") is set. And, when this process is executed when 30 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 fluctuation was started, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is "30000" Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. Then, it is calculated based on the type of game per normal figure to be executed this time. In this control example, since the opening command output from the main controller 110 includes information indicating the type of game per normal pattern to be executed this time, the game period per normal pattern is calculated based on the information. In addition, here, as the game period per normal figure, the time defined as the end condition established based on the passage of time is calculated.

Specifically, when 3 seconds have passed since the normal pattern per game is started, or when the winning number of balls to the second winning hole 640 reaches 10, the normal pattern per game ends When the end condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time that the game per normal pattern can continue, is set as the game period per normal pattern. As a result, in the process of predicting the standby period in advance (the period from the special figure 2 winning to the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation) in order to set the production mode of the series of productions, the normal figure used for prediction Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game period per normal figure actually executed is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period in which the ball can win the prize to the second winning opening 640 After the elapse of, the ball enters the second winning hole 640, and it is possible to avoid the situation where the special figure 2 variation is executed. Therefore, even when the performance mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, the actual game content and the performance content to be executed are less likely to deviate from each other, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that, when the game period per normal pattern is calculated as described above, the game per normal pattern ends in a period shorter than the calculated game period per normal pattern, that is, the predetermined number within the game period per normal pattern ( 10) balls have won in the second winning hole 640, so that the general pattern per game may end. In this case, it becomes a case where the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern per game, and at the time when the normal pattern per game ends, the effect corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 fluctuation period Since the performance is executed, it is configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. When the processing of C5207 is finished, then, based on the comparison result of C5207, the special figure 1 remaining period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation) is larger (longer) than the game period per normal figure, that is, the feature being executed It is determined whether the timing at which the FIG. 1 fluctuation ends is later than the timing at which the general pattern per game to be executed this time ends (C5208). In the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: NO), the special figure at the time the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game Since there is a possibility that 1 change has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the normal figure per game period, that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed does not end during the normal figure per game that is executed this time (C5208 : YES), since it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game, the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223HC (C5209) is skipped and shifts to the processing of C5210.

In the process of C5210, the series production scenario during the game per corresponding normal figure is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to the process of C5204. In the process of C5204, set the normal per figure middle flag to ON (C5204), and then proceed to the process of C5215. Here, when the processing content of C5210 described above is described in detail, in the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the game period per normal figure (C5208: YES), the difference period, that is, , Calculate the period from the end of the normal figure per game to the end of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special figure 2 waiting period, selects the general figure scenario to which the special figure 2 waiting period corresponds from the general figure scenario table defined in the series production scenario table 222HA, and produces set the mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: NO), the effect mode (series effect , the same effect mode as in the fifth control example described above is set.

Next, in the process of C5201, if it is determined that an opening command has not been received (C5201: NO), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (C5211). Then, when it is determined that the ending command is received (C5211: YES), the normal per figure medium flag 223HA is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to off (C5213), and the display ending A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C5211 that the ending command has not been received (C5211: NO), the process proceeds to the process of C5215. In the processing of C5215, processing according to other commands is executed (C5215), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, the contents of the variable effect setting process 8 (C4044) will be described. FIG. 407 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) executed in the eighth control example. In this variable effect setting process 8 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON (the game is per normal figure executed during a series of effects, and the length of the waiting period is not set In the case), the point of adding the process for setting the variable effect to be executed and the point of changing the contents of the process for setting the variable effect of the normal symbol, and the variable effect setting of the fifth control example described above. It is different from processing 5 (see FIG. 370), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the fluctuation production setting process 8 (C4044) is executed, the same C4101 process as the fluctuation production setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and the special figure fluctuation production is not set (normal If it is determined (C4101: NO), the normal figure effect setting process 8 is executed (C4167), and then this process ends. The details of this general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4101, if it is determined to set the special figure variation effect (C4101: YES), then it is determined whether the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON (C4151). When it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is ON (C4151: YES), constant monitoring effect setting processing is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to C4102. The details of this constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of C4151 that the constant monitoring flag 223HC is not set to ON, the process of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the same processes of C4102 to C4116 as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 408, the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described. FIG. 408 is a flow chart showing the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the eighth control example. This constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed in the variation effect setting process 8 (see C4044 in FIG. 407), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to special symbol variation is received. It is.

In the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is received (whether it is the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301), and corresponds to the special figure 1 variation (C5301: YES), variation pattern command processing 5 (see C3204 in Figure 363) C3303 extracted in the variation pattern Based on, to extract the variation time of this special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation time) (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation time is greater than the period per normal figure (long) (C5303).

In the process of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the process of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the general figure per game during execution (per general figure period), and the end timing of the special figure 1 variation time is, It is determined whether it is later than the end timing of the period per normal figure. In this control example, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to ON, that is, at least during normal game per game, so C5303 The processing of is to be executed during the game per normal pattern, but when the processing of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where the game per normal pattern is not executed, the game per normal pattern is executed. As a state without, it may be configured to compare the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the period per normal pattern using the period "0" per normal pattern.

In the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: YES) , Since the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per normal pattern, the production mode (production scenario of a series of productions) during the normal pattern per game is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304), and constant monitoring The flag 223HC is set to OFF (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: YES), the difference Period, that is, the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation waiting period (special figure 2 standby period), and out of scenarios 1 to 3 per general pattern defined in the series production scenario table 222HA, the production mode is set based on the scenario per normal pattern corresponding to the special figure 2 standby period calculated this time. On the other hand, in the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303 : NO), even if this special figure 1 variation is executed, it is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period, that is, during this special figure 1 variation, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 If not, even after the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time is finished, since the normal figure per game is being executed, the special figure 1 variation is performed during the remaining normal figure per game, or special Since it is not possible to predict whether the variation in FIG. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223HC is not set to OFF, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is subsequently executed.

In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, period effects (a series of In the case of executing production), the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (ordinary figure fluctuation start timing, normal figure per game start timing), and production is performed based on the prediction result It is configured to set the mode. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined to be unpredictable, the production setting processing during constant monitoring (C4152) is executed, and whether the special figure fluctuation is executed during the normal figure per game is always monitored. Configure.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set the production mode of a series of productions at once for the range in which the previous game content (the length of the waiting period of special figure 2) can be predicted in advance, the production of a series of productions It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the presentation mode. In addition, since the processing for predicting the content of the game to be played is configured to be executable at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Further, when the preceding game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series of productions is executed based on the actual game content, so the production of the series of productions is performed. Aspects can be reliably set.

Returning to FIG. 408, the description continues. In the process of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is not received (it is not the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301: NO), then the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation It is determined whether the pattern command is received (whether it is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is received (it is the start of the special 2 variation) (C5306: YES), since the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the game per normal figure, as described above with reference to FIG. Scenario 3 is set as the effect mode of the corresponding series of effects (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223HC is set to OFF (C5308), the special 2 fluctuation command for display is set (C5309), and then the process proceeds to C5310. do.

In addition, the process of C5307 described above is a case where a series of effects are executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first prediction process executed at the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, and the normal pattern per game start timing. It is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period in any of the second prediction processes, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period when the production setting process during constant monitoring is being performed during the normal figure per game. This is done when In other words, it is a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. Thus, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, in the process of C5307, the production mode corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation period is configured to be set. Therefore, even if the previous game contents cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the series of effects is performed based on the actual game contents, so that the series of effects can be performed. It is possible to reliably set the presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5306, if it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: NO), the process proceeds to C5310. In the processing of C5310, processing according to other commands is executed (C5310), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, the contents of the general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described. FIG. 409 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) executed in the eighth control example. This general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) is a series effect prediction setting process for setting a series of effects by predicting the contents of the game to follow when the conditions for executing a series of normal pattern fluctuation effect are established. It is different from the normal figure effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above in that (first prediction process) is executed. Since other contents are the same as those of the normal figure effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167), first, the same C4201 to C4206 processing as the general pattern effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and in the process of C4206, a pseudo When it is determined that the series effect flag 223EC is off (C4206: NO), the series effect prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to C4208. The details of this series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after executing the same C4208 to C4212 processing as the normal figure effect setting processing (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223EF is set to OFF (C4252), then this End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) will be described. FIG. 410 is a flow chart showing the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the eighth control example. In this series effect prediction setting process (C4251), the future game contents (special figure 2 waiting period) are predicted (first prediction) at the time of the start of normal pattern fluctuation, and a series based on the prediction result (first prediction result) A process for setting the effect mode during the period during which the effect is executed is executed, and when the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result, and when it is not possible to predict , the processing for setting the effect mode is executed for a different period of the period during which the series of effects are executed.

In the series effect prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern variation of this time is a winning variation (C5401). If it is determined that the current normal pattern variation is not a winning variation (C5401: NO), the conditions for executing a series of effects are not established, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure variation of this time is a variation (C5401: YES), the value of the special figure variation time counter (special figure 1 variation time counter) 223EG is read (C5402), the special figure variation time counter 223EG is greater than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is 0, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: NO), this process is terminated as it is. In other words, in this control example, the conditions for executing a series of effects when the variation per normal pattern is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. , normal pattern low probability state), the current normal pattern fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series production counter 223GA is set to OFF, the non-fluctuation win prize flag 223EF is set to OFF, and the pseudo series In the state where the production flag 223EC is set to OFF, and further, as shown in FIG. If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time this process is executed, it is configured not to execute (set) a series of effects.

By configuring in this way, the presence or absence of the execution of a series of production that can be executed based on the normal per variation, because it is possible to set according to the execution status of the special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), the normal state It is possible to prevent a series of performances from being executed for a player who is playing a game in which a right-handed game is executed in and only normal pattern fluctuations are executed.

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG is greater than 0 (C5403: YES), that is, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223EG Calculates the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time based on (C5404), extracts and adds up the normal pattern fluctuation time of this time and the game time per normal pattern executed after the end of this normal pattern fluctuation (C5405). In the processing of this C5405, by adding the normal pattern fluctuation time and the game period per normal pattern, the period from the current time (starting time of normal pattern fluctuation) to the end of the game per normal pattern (end period per normal pattern) A process for calculating is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of C5404 and the total time (calculated) in the process of C5405 (total time per normal figure) are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is greater than the total time per normal figure (longer) (C5407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is greater than the total time per normal figure (longer) (C5407: YES), the normal figure per game ends before the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution ends. Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game. Therefore, with reference to the series production scenario table 223HA, set the scenario per normal figure based on the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure and the total time per normal figure (special figure 2 waiting period) (C5408), then this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of C5407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the total time per normal figure (C5407: NO), at the present time, the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period, and predict the length Since it is not possible, scenario 4 per normal pattern is set (C5409), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern (first special pattern) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, and based on the prediction result It is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation. In other words, when the normal figure fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed this time and the general figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal figure are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is determined whether or not the currently executed special figure 1 fluctuation is finished during the normal figure per game, and based on the determination result, the production mode of a series of performances corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation is set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the variation end timing of the special figure 1 variation being executed is the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period) After If it is, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) that can be executed by special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of executing normal figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the standby period as various effect modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, it is possible to lengthen the variably settable period of the effect mode of the series of effects according to the length of the standby period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production.

In the eighth control example described above, as in the fifth control example described above, as a game per normal pattern, a game per short opening (closed period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, open period is 0.1 seconds ) and long open per game (closed period (opening period) 0.1 seconds, first open period 1 second, closed period (waiting period) 1.5 seconds, second open period 0.5 seconds) And, since it is configured to be executable, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 410)) executed at the time of normal pattern fluctuation, it was elected in this normal pattern fluctuation It may be configured to determine the type of hit per normal figure and set the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can win in the second winning hole 640) based on the determination result. In addition, the aspect of the prediction range corresponding to the type per normal figure determined this time (the length and timing of the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640), that is, the game aspect of the per game per normal figure to be executed Based on this, the ease of winning the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game is determined, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the If it is not possible to predict the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning is executed, the winning difficulty determination means for determining the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 Based on the determination result of , it may be configured to set the production mode during the normal pattern fluctuation period.

Specifically, by the winning difficulty level determination means, the winning difficulty level is low (by performing a normal game, it is possible to win the ball in the substantially second winning hole 640) per normal game (for example, Normal pattern long open per game) corresponding to normal pattern per type (for example, normal pattern per A (see Figure 336 (B))) is set, as a production mode set during the normal pattern fluctuation period , a performance mode is set in which it is easy to shift to the next performance mode set as a series of performances, and the degree of prize winning is high (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to win a ball into the second prize winning port 640). When the normal pattern per type (for example, normal pattern per B (see FIG. 336 (B))) corresponding to the normal pattern per game (for example, normal pattern short open per game) is set, normal As the effect mode set during the figure fluctuation period, it is preferable to set the effect mode that suggests the end of the series effect (the effect mode that makes it difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as the series effect). . In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of executing the first prediction process, the production mode of the production executed during the normal pattern fluctuation period is varied based on the type of the normal pattern per game to be executed. Therefore, at the time when the normal pattern fluctuation is started, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed with the current normal pattern fluctuation as a trigger, so the first prediction process is executed It is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance executed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing to be performed.

In addition, it corresponds to the general pattern per game (for example, general pattern short open per game) that is determined to be difficult to win (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 640) If the type per normal pattern (for example, per normal pattern B (see FIG. 336 (B))) is set, it may be configured not to set the effect mode corresponding to the series effect. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, and the game for the big game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small winning, small winning game) It is possible to suppress the execution of a series of performances when it is difficult to proceed. In this case, when it is determined that the ball has won in the second winning port 640 during a normal game with a high winning difficulty, it is preferable to execute a series of effects from the winning timing. When the length of the waiting period (the period until the special figure 2 variation based on this winning is executed) at the time when the ball wins in the 2 winning opening 640 is a predetermined period or more (for example, 30 seconds or more) , Using a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time the ball wins in the second winning hole 640, it is preferable to set the effect mode normally set during the normal pattern fluctuation period.

In this way, when a normal game with a high degree of winning difficulty is executed, the start timing of a series of effects is not the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, but the timing when the ball wins the second winning hole 640. To suppress the frequency of ending a series of performances in the middle of the series of performances despite the execution of the series of performances.

Furthermore, in this control example, an example in which one type per normal pattern corresponding to the game per normal pattern with a low difficulty of winning is shown, but without being limited to this, it corresponds to a game per normal pattern with a low difficulty of winning a prize It may be configured to be able to set a plurality of types per normal pattern, and the game mode of the game per normal pattern executed corresponding to each type per normal pattern may be different, for example, it corresponds to a game per normal pattern with a low degree of winning difficulty. At least a general pattern per type A and a general pattern per type B can be set as the normal pattern per type, and a general pattern per game corresponding to the general pattern per type A (normal pattern per game A) game mode As, the closing period of 0.1 seconds, set the game mode of the open period of 3 seconds, as the game mode of the normal figure per game (ordinary figure per game β) corresponding to the normal figure per type B, closed period 0.1 seconds , a first open period of 0.1 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (2.9 seconds).

In this case, when the normal pattern per game with a low winning difficulty level is executed, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 differs according to the set normal pattern per type, so the normal pattern fluctuation start In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type of normal pattern, and the first prediction process is performed based on the determination result of the determination means. It is preferable to configure the range of prediction to be made different. Specifically, when the above-described general pattern game A is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is the range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the general pattern game ( open period range), and when the game B per normal pattern is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is 3.3 seconds to 6.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal pattern. It is preferable to configure the setting based on the range of seconds (the range of the second open period).

In this way, by setting the range to be predicted in association with the game mode (difficulty of winning, setting timing of winning period) of the game per normal figure to be executed, prediction to be executed in the first prediction process range can be narrowed. This makes it easier to predict the standby period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of performances and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, it is configured to be able to set a general pattern per type Γ as a general pattern per type corresponding to a general pattern per game with a low winning difficulty, and a general pattern per game (normal per pattern game Γ) corresponding to the general pattern per type Γ As a mode, when it is configured to set a game mode of a closed period of 0.1 seconds, a first open period of 1.5 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (1.5 seconds), That is, when the normal pattern per game is executed in which a plurality of open periods in which the ball can win in the second winning hole 640 is set, in the first prediction process, first, it corresponds to the second open period set later Compare the range and the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) during execution, and determine whether the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is later than the second open period , If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining variation period) is later than the end timing of the second open period, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the second open period It is configured to set up to the end timing of 1 fluctuation as a standby period, and on the other hand, it is determined that the timing of the elapse of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is earlier than the end timing of the second open period. If so, next, the timing of the elapse of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) and the range corresponding to the first open period are compared.

And, when it is determined that the elapse timing of the first open period is before the elapse timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining variation period), the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first open period The standby period is set to the end timing of one variation, and on the other hand, when it is determined that the timing of the first open period has passed after the timing of the first open period, that is, the first If the special figure 1 variation being executed is stopped and displayed before the 1 open period elapses, the second prediction process described above is executed assuming that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process. It should be configured as follows.

<Ninth control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 420. FIG. The ninth control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that the control processing for the final variation performance executed in the final variation of the time saving state is different.

In the fifth control example described above, using the final variation effect that is executed in the final variation of the time saving state, the lottery result of the variation, and the special figure 2 variation that is performed after the variation (the time saving state ends, normal It was configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation) executed in the state where the state is set. By constructing in this way, when a win (big win, small win) is won by the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to suggest that effect by the final variation presentation.

This ninth control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the processing for setting the effect mode of the final variation effect is described in detail. Specifically, when executing the final variation of the time saving state, based on the lottery result of the variation and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C), production of final variation production It is configured to set the mode.

Furthermore, when the final variation of the time saving state is a deviation variation, the production period of the final variation production is set based on the number of special 2 reserved balls (value of special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223C). there is In other words, if the final variation of the time saving state is a deviation variation, the next special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed during the normal state) that is the target of the final variation production after the end of the variation is executed Therefore, if the final variation of the time saving state is an off variation, at the start timing of the final variation of the time saving state, in advance for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension that has already been acquired It is configured to set the production mode (final variable production).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415. FIG. The ninth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and otherwise the same. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 411(A), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 411A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 411(A), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example stores the final variation effect table 222IA and The difference is that a final effect variable setting table 222IB is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final variation performance table 222IA is a data table that is referred to when setting the performance mode of the final variation performance, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. It is what is done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222IA will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413. FIG.

FIG. 412(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222IA. As shown in FIG. 412(A), the final variation effect table 222IA is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a win, and the final table 222IA1 for winning is referred to when the lottery result of the variation is a loss. and a final table 222IA2 for outliers.

Here, the effect period in the final variable effect will be described. In the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a "waiting period", a "first period", a "second period", and a "third period" are formed as the effect periods of the final variable effect. It is configured so that the effect mode can be set for each period. In the fifth control example described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (shortening final variation), the effect mode (standby effect) for notifying that the final variation effect starts in the "waiting period" is set. In the 1st period, the effect mode (acquisition effect) is set to acquire a lot of special figures 2 pending, and in the ``second period'', the lottery result of the change and the prefetching result of the special figure 2 reservation are suggested. A performance mode (mission performance) for performing is set, and a performance mode (result performance) for showing the performance result of the mission performance is set in the 'third period'.

Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether to execute the acquisition effect or the mission effect as the effect to be executed during the ``first period'' based on the number of special 2 reserved balls when the ``waiting period'' has elapsed. However, if the number of special 2 pending balls after the "waiting period" has passed is a predetermined number or more (if the upper limit number is (4)), the mission production is executed in the "first period". rice field.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed, it is configured to set the production mode of the final variation production. This is different from the fifth control example described above in that Also, based on the lottery result of the variation, the difference from the fifth control example described above in that the production mode of the final variation production set at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different are doing. Furthermore, it is different from the fifth control example described above in that a plurality of timings for setting the effect mode of the final variable effect are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 412(B), the contents defined in the winning final table 222IA1 included in the final variation effect table 222IA will be described. FIG. 412(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the winning final table 222IA1. As shown in FIG. 412(B), in the winning final table 222IA1, according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C (special figure 2 reserved ball number) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, A performance mode set in each performance period of the final variable performance is defined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "0" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 169", effect pattern A is used as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 189", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect, and in the range of "190 to 198", the effect pattern C is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect. ing. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "1, 2" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is specified as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect. Furthermore, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is "3", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 109", effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, In the range of "110 to 198", an effect pattern B is defined as an effect pattern of the final variable effect.

Here, detailed contents of various effect patterns defined in the winning final table 222IA1 will be described. In effect pattern A, the final variable effect similar to the fifth control example described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. In the waiting period (0th period), a production mode "standby production (production A)" for indicating that the final variable production is executed is set, and in the first period after the waiting period has passed , "acquisition effect (effect B)", which is a effect mode for guiding the game method for the player to advantageously execute the subsequent game (acquire the special figure 2 reservation), is set, and the first period In the second period after the elapse, the lottery result of the pattern that is the target of the final variation production (the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation that will be the final variation in time saving, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the moment) A "mission effect (effect C)", which is a effect mode for suggesting, is set, and in a third period after the second period has passed, the "mission effect (effect C)" executed during the second period is displayed. A “result effect (effect D)”, which is a effect mode for indicating the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The performance pattern B is a performance pattern set when the time-saving final variation wins (big win, small win), and is a performance for notifying the player of winning as the final variation performance. A mode "special effect 1 (effect E)" is set.

Production pattern C is a production mode that is set when the number of special figures 2 pending when setting the final variable production is a predetermined number or less (0), and the waiting period ( "Standby effect (A)" is set in the 0th period). When this production pattern C is set, after the standby period (0th period) ends, the production mode of the final variable production (production mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) is set again. (final effect variable process) is executed.

The detailed contents of this final effect variable process will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of special figures 2 reserved acquired during the waiting period (0th period), and the waiting period (0th period) at the end A process for setting a different effect mode to each of the first period to the third period is executed according to the special figure 2 reservation number.

As described above, in the ninth control example, in contrast to the setting method of the final fluctuation production in the fifth control example described above, the final fluctuation production is set at the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the time saving final fluctuation). The point that it is configured to set the production mode, and the lottery result (prefetch result) targeted for the final fluctuation production is the lottery result of the fluctuation and the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the final fluctuation of time saving ) is different in that it is limited to the prefetch result of the special figure 2 pending that has already been acquired.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to vary the production mode of the final variation production that is executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is possible to diversify the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, as in this control example, in the case of varying the production mode of the final variation production to be executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of special figures 2 reserved becomes a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. can be done.

Since the final table for winning 222IA1 described above is a data table that is referred to when the variation (final time-saving variation) is won, the final variation effect set by referring to the final table for winning 222IA1 is executed. The period is a period corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the time saving final variation. That is, after the end of the final variation effect set with reference to the final winning table 222IA1, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, if the time-saving final variation is hit and won, the final variation corresponding to the variation time of the variation without considering the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation Since the effect mode of the effect can be set collectively, the processing for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, the winning final table 222IA1 used in the ninth control example is such that the smaller the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C), the more easily the effect pattern C is selected. stipulated. In other words, the smaller the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the final variation of the time saving is executed, the more the number of special figures 2 pending that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period), so the waiting period (0th period ), it is configured to make it easier to select the production pattern C in which the production mode can be variably set according to the number of special figure 2 reservations acquired during. By configuring in this way, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation number is small, it is possible to execute a different final variation performance.

In addition, it is stipulated that the greater the special figure 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C), the more easily the production pattern B is selected as the final variation production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special performance 1 indicating that the winning is won, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reservations is large. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for acquiring the number of reserved special figures 2, and to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 413, the contents of the final table 222IA2 for failure included in the final variation effect table 222IA will be described. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table for failure 222IA2. This final table 222IA2 for loss is a data table referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation, which is the time saving final variation, is out, and is stored during the variation period of the variation. It is used to set the production mode of the final variable production with the period of adding the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the suspension as the production period.

In the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (final time saving variation), the lottery result of the variation, and the execution after the variation It is configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed in the state where the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set). And if the lottery result of the time-saving final fluctuation is won (jackpot, small hit), the winning game will be executed after the end of the fluctuation, so the final fluctuation production will be in the period corresponding to the fluctuation period of the fluctuation configured to run.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension stored after the end of the variation is executed. In this control example, it is configured to execute the final variation performance including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is retained and stored at the time when the time saving final variation ends.

As shown in FIG. 413, the final table 222IA2 for out is, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C), the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 reservation, and the value of the acquired production counter 223F , the effect mode of the final variable effect is defined. In addition, as the production period during which the final fluctuation production is executed, the fluctuation period of the time saving final fluctuation and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) end, normal state (low probability of special symbols The fluctuation period of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state, low probability state of the normal symbol) is defined.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the effect mode of the final variation performance is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations already acquired. are doing. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the production (final fluctuation production) executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (special figure 2 fluctuation), each special figure fluctuation It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the effect mode compared to the case of setting the effect mode of the final variable effect each time is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, if there is winning information indicating winning winning in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variable effect (if the look-ahead result is winning), When there is no winning information indicating winning (when the look-ahead result is lost), the execution contents (execution/non-execution, execution period) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect are configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning in the reserved special figure 2 that has already been acquired (if the result of the look-ahead is a win), it is more difficult to execute the acquisition effect than in other cases, Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is shortened.

By constructing in this way, the player can predict the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation according to the performance mode of the variable performance executed as the final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the state where the time saving state can end, that is, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the time saving final variation is a deviation variation, and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the time the time saving final variation is executed In the state of being out, the production mode (acquisition production (production B)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery during normal state) executed after the time saving state ends can be emphasized as compared with the case of . Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the advantageous game executed after the time saving state ends.

Here, when the contents stipulated in the final table 222IA2 for loss are specifically described with reference to FIG. , when the obtained value of the effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect A" is set in the standby period, "effect B" is set in the first period, and "effect C" is set in the second period. Directive data is specified. In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number (special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C value) is 0, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period, and the Effect data is defined in which "effect B" is set in one period and "effect C" is set in the second period. Further, when the obtained value of the effect counter 223F is in the range of "180 to 198", the effect data is defined so that "effect A" is set during the standby period.

In addition, in the final table 222IA2 for this error, the effect mode executed in the final effect period of the final variable effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 413, "○" is displayed as a display mode indicating that it is not set). It consists of In other words, if the hit is not included in the special figure lottery result (prefetching result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the final time saving variation, special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the final time saving variation Variation may be executed after the special figure 2 variation that is the target of the look-ahead process at the execution timing of the time saving final variation.

In this way, when it is necessary to vary the effect result (performance mode) of the final variable effect according to the lottery result of the special figure change that can be executed in the period from the execution of the final variable effect to the end of the final variable effect is configured to be able to variably set the presentation mode of the final variation presentation even at a timing other than the execution timing of the time saving final variation. Therefore, the final variable production can be executed in various production modes.

Returning to FIG. 413, the description is continued. If the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) is 1, and the special figure 2 reservation contains winning information indicating winning and is "with a reservation hit", that is, , The special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a deviation variation, and the next special figure 2 variation (the first special figure 2 variation to be performed after the normal state is set ) becomes a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect A" is performed during the standby period, and "effect B" is performed during the first period. , "Production C" in the second period, the third period, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set In the fluctuation period (common 1) Effect data in which "effect D" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) is 1, and the special figure 2 reservation does not contain the winning information indicating the winning, and it is "no hit in the reservation". In the case, that is, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) is an off variation, and the special figure 2 variation to be performed next (normal state is set first special to be executed 2 fluctuation) is also out of range, if the value of the acquired production counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 189", "production A" is in the standby period, and "production B" is in the first period. , "Continuous effect (effect F)", which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect C" in the second period and the effect result of "effect C (mission effect)" in the third period, is set. Production data to be executed is specified.

Here, the above-mentioned "continuous effect" is a effect mode that is displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. (See A)), that is, the result effect (effect D) is a effect mode executed when extending the period until it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Although the detailed display contents are omitted, for example, when the production mode shown in FIG. By reducing the speed, the period indicating the process until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed is extended, or the mission effect continues as the effect result of the mission effect being executed ( A display mode (for example, characters “Continue!”) for indicating that the second mission production is executed) is displayed, and a plurality of mission productions are performed in one final variation production. A performance mode is set for executing a pseudo-result display performance for temporarily displaying a display mode suggesting a performance result different from the actual performance result as the performance result of the mission performance.

In this way, by configuring to execute the "continuous effect" as the final variable effect, for example, after the final variable effect is executed, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and the execution period of the final variable effect being executed is extended, the performance period of the final variable performance can be extended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "Yes") If it is, that is, the special figure 2 variation (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) to be executed this time is a deviation variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the two special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired In the case of hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect A" is applied during the standby period, "effect B" is applied during the first period, and "effect B" is applied during the first period. "Production C" in the 2nd period, the 3rd period, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set (General 1), 2 Of the variation period (2) of the second special figure 2 variation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 variation 2), the effect data in which "effect D" is set in the period until the end of the hit variation is specified. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) is 2, and the special figure 2 reservation does not contain the winning information indicating the winning, and it is "no hit in the reservation". In the case, that is, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) is an off variation, and the special figure 2 variation to be performed next (normal state is set first special to be executed 2 fluctuation) is also out of range, if the value of the acquired production counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 189", "production A" is in the standby period, and "production B" is in the first period. , "Continuous effect (effect F)", which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect C" in the second period and the effect result of "effect C (mission effect)" in the third period, is set. Production data to be executed is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "Yes") If it is, that is, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a deviation variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the three special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired In the case of hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect A" is applied during the standby period, "effect B" is applied during the first period, and "effect B" is applied during the first period. ``Production C'' is set in the 2nd period, and ``Production D'' is set in the 3rd period and the period until the winning fluctuation ends among the 1st fluctuation period, the 2nd fluctuation period, and the 3rd fluctuation period. Data are specified.

In addition, if the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223C) is 3 and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "none") That is, if the special figure 2 variation (last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) executed this time is a deviation variation, and the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the three special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired are all deviations , regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), effect data is defined in which "effect A" is set during the standby period.

Returning to FIG. 411(A), the description is continued. The final production variable setting table 222IB is a data table used for selecting the production mode of the final variable production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation), and the production mode of the final variable production is When setting using the final variation performance table 222IA, if there is a performance period (unset period) in which the performance mode is not set, the performance mode is set for the unset period during execution of the final variation performance. It is used for Specifically, in the final variable effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863 in FIG. 420: YES), and the variable effect flag 223IC is set to ON. (C4864 in FIG. 420: YES), that is, when there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, it is referred (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

Here, the contents of the variable final effect setting table 222IB will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. FIG. FIG. 414(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222IB. As shown in FIG. 414 (A), the final effect variable setting table 222IB is a winning setting table 222IB1 that is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) being executed is a winning fluctuation, and the It has a setting table 222IB2 for deviation, which is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) is an off fluctuation, and according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) being executed , different presentation modes are set. In addition, although detailed description will be described later, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) being executed is a hit, and if it is off, the elements to be referred to when setting the production mode are different. I'm letting

By configuring in this way, the effect mode set as the final variable effect can be set in correspondence with the actual game content (the special drawing lottery result and the increase in the number of reserved balls), so that the player It is possible to make the audience interested in the performance contents of the final variable performance executed for.

Next, the contents of the win setting table 222IB1 will be described with reference to FIG. 414(B). FIG. 414B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win setting table 222IB1. As shown in FIG. 414(B), the winning setting table 222IB1 has the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA, that is, during the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the waiting period (0th period). Different production modes are defined based on the acquired special figure 2 reservation number and the acquired production counter 223F value.

Specifically, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is "0, 1" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 198", "effect B" in the first period, It is stipulated that "effect C" is set in the second period and "effect D" is set in the third period. In addition, without setting a new production mode for the period in which the production mode has already been set at the time of execution of the final variable production, an unset period (Fig. This table is referred to only for the period indicated by "○" in 412(B) to set the effect mode.

Next, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is "2" and the value of the acquired production counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 149", "production B" in the first period and in the second period If it is specified to set "effect C" and "effect D" in the third period, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", in the first period, the second period, and the third period, "Special effect 2 (effect G)", which is a high-expectation notification mode, is set to indicate that the effect result of the final variable effect is highly likely to be the effect result indicating the winning of the special symbol (special figure 2). It is stipulated to

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect G)" is a effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 328(B)) normally executed as the final variable effect is executed, and detailed description is given. Although will be described later, the selection ratio is defined so that the effect result of the final variable effect of this time is more likely to be the effect result indicating winning than the mission effect is executed.

The detailed display contents of this "special effect 2" will not be described, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will darken, and the result will be a effect indicating winning. A win display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a loss display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is the effect result indicating a lost win, are displayed, and are displayed to the end. An effect is executed in which the displayed mode is the effect result of the final variable effect. In this way, immediately after the waiting period ends, by informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect different from the usual one will be executed, the player can expect the effect to be executed while expecting a win. can be watched.

The contents of the "special effect 2" are not limited to those described above. For example, according to the example shown in FIG. , a character that is not displayed in the small display area DM21 (for example, a character that imitates a whale) may be set to execute a mission effect different from the usual one, or the same ally character (851A to 851D) may be used to execute an effect in which a special mission is executed.

By configuring in this way, image data used in normal mission effects can be diverted as part of the image data of effects executed as "special effect 2", so the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is "3" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 119", "effect B" in the first period and in the second period If it is specified to set "effect C" and "effect D" in the third period, and if it is in the range of "120 to 198", "effect G" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third period is specified to be set.

Finally, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is in the range of "0 to 149", the first period, the second period, and the third period " Effect G” is defined to be set, and if it is in the range of “150 to 198”, the effect result of the final variable effect being executed is a special symbol ( It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect H)" which is a fixed notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating the winning of special figure 2) will be set.

The above-mentioned "special effect 3 (effect H)" is usually executed as a final variable effect mission effect (see FIG. 328 (B)) different effect is executed, the time-saving final change ( It is executed only when the lottery result of special figure 2 fluctuation) is hit. The detailed display contents of this "special effect 3" will not be described, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will darken, and the result will be a effect indicating winning. An effect is executed in which a winning display mode (a display mode imitating the letter "V") is displayed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period of the final variable performance is finished, the player is notified of winning, thereby allowing the player to mentally prepare for the winning game. In addition, the display mode at the start of the special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of the special effect 3 are set to be the same (the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)). On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the final variable performance of this time is the special performance 2 or the special performance 3. As a result, the player watches the final variable performance while expecting that the special performance 3 will be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the ninth control example, as a benefit given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variable effect is notified before the final variable effect ends. Although it is configured to provide benefits, it may be configured to provide other benefits, for example, based on the prefetch result of special figure 2 pending acquired at the timing when special effect 3 is set It is also possible to provide a privilege for informing the player of the number of times the player wins the prize. Specifically, when there are two special figures 2 suspensions in which the look-ahead result is hit and won among the four special figures 2 suspensions, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the performance mode of the special performance 3. becomes dark, and an effect is executed in which a plurality of winning display modes (display modes imitating the letter "V"), which are the effect results indicating winning, are displayed, and finally the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number of winning display modes displayed may be configured to indicate the number of winning times. In this way, as a special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when a special effect condition is established, the first privilege (notification of winning) is given to the player based on the execution of the special effect. Then, after the first privilege is granted, a second privilege (notification of the number of wins) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted, so that even after the first privilege is granted, It is possible to make the player interested in the performance contents of the special performance (special performance 3) executed for the player, and to enhance the performance effect.

Now refer to FIG. The contents of the out-of-range setting table 222IB2 will be described. FIG. 415 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the setting table 222IB2 for failure. This out setting table 222IB2, when setting the final variation performance to be executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), when using the final table 222IA2 for out (see C4364 in Figure 419 ), the data table used for setting the effect mode for the unset period (the period indicated by "○" in FIG. 413) in which the effect mode is not set, and the final variable effect update process 9 (FIG. 420 C4566 in FIG. 420), if it is determined that it is time to end the standby period (0th period) (C4863 in FIG. 420: YES), it is referred to (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

As shown in FIG. 415, the setting table 222IB2 for loss includes the value of the number of pending balls increase counter 223IA (the number of special figures 2 pending acquired during the waiting period) and the presence or absence of additional hits ( acquired during the waiting period Based on the presence or absence of winning based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation), the setting status of the reservation upper limit flag 223EN, and the value of the obtained production counter 223F, it is set for each production period of the final variable production. Production modes are defined.

It should be noted that, when the final variation effect to be executed corresponding to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state is set using the final table 222IA2 for the out (see C4364 in Figure 419), the effect mode is already set It is configured such that the effect mode is set by referring to the setting table 222IB2 for failure only for the unset period without setting a new effect mode for the rendered effect period.

Next, the contents defined in the out setting table 222IB2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "0", that is, if the new special figure 2 pending is not acquired during the waiting period, the presence or absence of additional hits and the setting status of the pending upper limit flag 223EN , Regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F, various effect modes are set such that "effect B" is set in the first period, "effect C" is set in the second period, and "effect D" is set in the third period to the fourth period. is stipulated. That is, since there is no change in the number of special figures 2 pending when the final variable production is started, there is no need to set a special production mode, and the final result production (production D) is the production showing the deviation. Result is set.

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "1", the additional hit is "Yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect In a state where the number of reservations is 3 and the prefetch results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (3 pieces) are all out, if the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit , In the range of "0 to 169" of the obtained effect counter 223F, various effects are set such that "effect C" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance B) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is By configuring in this way, for the player, useless production (acquisition production to play a game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation even though the number of special figure 2 reservations has reached the upper limit) You can prevent what is happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the contents of the executed performance and lowering the effect of the performance. In addition, in the range of "170 to 198" for the obtained value of the effect counter 223F, various effect modes are defined such that "effect G" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

Also, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first Various effects are defined such that "effect B" is set for the period, "effect C" is set for the second period, and "effect D" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the final variable production is started, one new special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and if the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation is out, a dedicated production mode is set. There is no effect, and the effect result indicating the failure is set as the final result effect (effect D).

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "2", the additional hit is "Yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect In a state where the number of reservations is 2 and the prefetch results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all out, as the prefetch results of the two special figure 2 reservations newly acquired during the waiting period, at least If the look-ahead result of any special figure 2 reservation is a hit, regardless of the value of the obtained production counter 223F, the first period, the second period "production C", the third to four periods "production Various presentation modes are defined so as to set "D". That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance B) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

By configuring in this way, for the player, useless production (acquisition production to play a game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation even though the number of special figure 2 reservations has reached the upper limit) You can prevent what is happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the contents of the executed performance and lowering the effect of the performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 pending at the start of the final variation effect In a state where the number is 2 and the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 suspension (2 pieces) are all out, the prefetching results of the two special figure 2 suspensions newly acquired during the waiting period are also out. , regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223F, various effect modes are defined such that "effect C" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. there is That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance B) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Also, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final variation effect In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. If the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F, "effect B" in the first period, "effect C" in the second period, and the third to four periods Various production modes are defined so that "Production D" is set to . That is, when the waiting period ends, since the suspension upper limit flag 223EN is set to OFF, the acquisition effect (effect B) for making the player acquire the special figure 2 suspension using the first period. configured to run

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "0 to 109", various effects are defined such that "effect C" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition effect (effect B) is executed even though the reservation upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON. In this way, when the performance result indicating winning is displayed as the performance result of the final variable performance, the state in which the suspension upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, a new special figure 2 suspension is obtained. Even in a state in which it is not possible to do so, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the performance mode to be executed by intentionally executing the acquisition performance.

In addition, in the ninth control example, only when the effect result of the final variable effect is the effect result indicating the win winning effect (despite the above-described effect (holding upper limit flag 223EN being set to ON), the acquisition effect ( Since it is configured so that the production B) is executed, the production is executed with a difference between the actual special figure 2 reserved ball number and the production mode to be executed. , it is possible to notify that the effect result of the final variable effect becomes the effect result indicating winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, the value of the acquired effect counter 223F is "110 to 198 , various effects are defined such that "effect C" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance B) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to OFF, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F, Various effects are defined such that "effect C" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition effect (effect B) is not executed even though the reservation upper limit flag 223EN is set to OFF. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variable effect, the state in which the reservation upper limit flag 223EN is set to OFF, that is, it is possible to obtain a new special figure 2 reservation. Even if it is possible, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of special-figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed by configuring so as not to execute the acquisition performance intentionally.

Even in this case, by executing an effect with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed, the effect result of the final variable effect becomes the effect result indicating winning. can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

If the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 pending number at the start of the final variation effect In 2, in a state where the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 pending (2 pieces) are all out, if the prefetching result of the two special figure 2 pending newly acquired during the waiting period is also out , irrespective of the acquired value of the effect counter 223F, various effect modes are defined such that "effect C" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance B) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223EN is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final variation effect In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. If the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F, "effect B" in the first period, "effect C" in the second period, and the third to four periods Various production modes are defined so that "Production D" is set to . That is, when the waiting period ends, since the suspension upper limit flag 223EN is set to OFF, the acquisition effect (effect B) for making the player acquire the special figure 2 suspension using the first period. configured to run

Finally, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223IA is "4", that is, the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the final variation effect is executed is "0", and four special figures 2 during the waiting period When a new hold is acquired, the value of the production counter 223F acquired with an additional hit of "Yes" is in the range of "0 to 99" in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are defined to set "Production G", and in the range of "100 to 198", various production modes are set to set "Production H" in the 1st period, the 2nd period, and the 3rd to 4th periods. Production modes are defined. Then, when the additional hit is "none", regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223F, "effect C" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect D" is set for the third to fourth periods. Various presentation modes are defined as follows. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223EN is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance B) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 411(B). The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. The difference is that a variable effect flag 223IC is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding number increase counter 223IA is a special figure 2 acquired within a specific period (waiting period set as part of the production period of the final fluctuation production executed in response to the final fluctuation of the time saving state, and the first period) It is a counter for measuring the number of reservations, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time a new special figure 2 reservation is acquired within a specific period. This pending number increase counter 223IA receives the winning information command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning in the final winning process (see C3461 in FIG. 418) executed in the winning information command process 9 (see C3262 in FIG. 417) (C5501: YES), if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is set to ON (C5502: YES), that is, in order to set the effect mode of the final variable effect, special acquired during the standby period If it is necessary to count the number of pending in FIG. 2, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 418).

Then, in the final variable effect update process 9 (see C4566 in FIG. 420), when it is determined that the waiting period has ended (C4863 in FIG. 420: YES), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is changed to the final effect variable setting table 222IB. (see C4865 in FIG. 420). Furthermore, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: YES in the figure), the variation period of the special figure 2 hold obtained during the final variation performance is the performance period of the final variation performance. Therefore, the counter value is referenced (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration that counts the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during a specific period (for example, during the waiting period), a specific reserved memory at the end of the specific period Since it is possible to set a performance mode after a specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of reserved memories acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of performance modes. Further, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of acquiring a large number of reserved memories within a predetermined period of time, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this control example, as a configuration for counting the number of specific pending storage (eg, special figure 2 pending) acquired during a specific period (eg, during the waiting period), a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223IA) is used, but not limited to this, for example, a storage means is provided to temporarily store the number of pending memories at the start of the specific period, and the number of pending memories at the end of the specific period and the number stored in the storage means The number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period may be calculated by comparing with the number of reserved memories.

In addition, in this control example, a specific period (for example, waiting period) to measure the acquisition number of a specific reservation storage (for example, special figure 2 reservation) within one special figure fluctuation period (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation within the period), the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, and a configuration is used that simply adds the number of reserved memories acquired. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, it may be configured to set a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory may decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special figure 2 fluctuations), In this case, as a configuration that counts the number of specific pending memories (for example, special figure 2 pending), the counter value is added by 1 each time a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) is acquired, and a specific (For example, each time the special figure 2 variation using the special figure 2 suspension is executed) the counter value may be configured to be decremented by 1 each time the reservation storage decreases. In addition, in this case, than the start of the specific period, since it is possible that the number of specific pending memories at the end of the specific period is less, a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) of As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set the initial value of the counter to a value larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in a specific reserved memory. With this configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the specific reserved storage during the specific period, the counter value can be reliably prevented from becoming smaller than 0.

Also, as a specific period to measure the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory, set a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory can decrease (for example, a period set across multiple Toku-zu 2 fluctuations) , it is not a configuration that counts the number of specific reserved memories actually increased within a specific period as described above, but only adds the number of specific reserved memories newly acquired within a specific period. configuration may be used.

Furthermore, in the present ninth control example, based on the number of increases in the specific retention memory (special figure 2 retention) within a predetermined specific period (within the standby period), so as to set the effect mode after the specific period elapses However, without being limited to this, the specific period is set according to the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, the frame button 22) For example, a plurality of discontinuous periods may be set as the specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, by not notifying the player of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the reserved value is counted. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected production for the player.

In addition, the specific period is not set based on the establishment of a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation indicating that the specific period is not to be set using the operation means). may be configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect in a manner suitable for each player.

The fluctuation period storage area 223IB is a storage area for temporarily storing the production mode of the final fluctuation production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (time saving final fluctuation). In this variable period storage area 223IB, there are a standby period (0th period), a first period, a second period, a third period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state, and after the end of the time saving state (normal state setting Later) Toku-zu 2 variation (Toku-zu 2 variation based on Toku-zu 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) Corresponding to 1 period (the first Toku-zu 2 variation after the normal state was set Period), 2nd period (2nd special 2 fluctuation period after normal state is set), 3rd period (3rd special 2 fluctuation period after normal state is set), 4th period (normal A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation period after the state is set.

Then, the information indicating the effect mode of the final variable effect set in the time saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 419), and the final variable effect update process (See C4566 in FIG. 420), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the waiting period (C4863: YES in FIG. 420), and if it is determined that it is the set effect mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period (C4866 in FIG. 420: YES), the set effect mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 420). Then, although illustration is omitted, when the final variable effect ends, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, in the case of using a configuration in which the effect mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing to start the period effect, predetermined timing during execution of the period effect), the period effect By providing a storage area for storing the set performance mode each time the performance mode is set, it is possible to set the subsequent performance mode based on the contents of the previously set performance mode. Become. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect for one period using the effect modes set at a plurality of timings, it is possible to set the effect mode without causing discomfort.

The production variable flag 223IC is a flag for indicating that there is a period (unset period) in which the production mode is not set as the production mode of the final variation production executed in the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation). It is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the production setting process 9 for time saving (see C4164 in FIG. 419), the production mode of the final variation production is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 419), and the production mode is not set. If it is determined that there is (C4366 in FIG. 419: YES), it is set to ON (see C4367 in FIG. 419).

Then, in the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is the timing at which the waiting period ends (C4863 in FIG. 420: YES) and the timing at which the first period ends (C4866 in FIG. 420: YES). That is, when it is determined that it is the timing at which it is possible to set the effect mode of the final variable effect, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420), and when it is determined that it is set to ON , a new effect mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420). Then, it is set to OFF after setting the effect mode for the unset period (see C4871 in FIG. 420).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 416 to 420. FIG. In this control example, command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 416) is executed instead of command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360), and winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. (see FIG. 417) instead of executing the winning information command process 9 (see FIG. 417), the point of executing the final winning process (see FIG. 418), and the time saving production setting process (see FIG. 372) instead of the time saving The difference is that the effect setting process 9 (see FIG. 419) is executed, and the final change effect update process 9 (see FIG. 420) is executed instead of the final change effect update process (see FIG. 377). are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, only the numerical values have been changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) executed in the ninth control example.

When the command determination process 9 (C3163) is executed, after executing the same C3201 to C3209 processes as the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above, the special 2 pending number (special figure 2 number of pending) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223C is the upper limit value "4".

In the process of C3261, if it is determined that the special 2 pending number (special figure 2 pending number) is the upper limit (C3261: YES), set the pending upper limit flag 223EN to ON (C3262), then end this process If it is determined that the special 2 reservation number (special figure 2 reservation number) is not the upper limit (C3261: NO), the process of C3262 is not executed and the process ends.

Also, after executing the same processing of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the contents of winning information command processing 9 (C3262) will be described. FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning information command process 9 (C3262) executed in the ninth control example. In this winning information command process 9 (C3262), for the above-described winning information command process 5 (see FIG. 361), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is set to ON The difference is that the

When winning information command processing 9 (C3262) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3402 as winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then processing of C3403 is executed. First, in the process of C3404, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is ON (C3404: YES), the final winning process is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to C3406. The details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ED is off (C3404: NO), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3406. After that, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 418, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described. FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing the details of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the ninth control example. In this final winning process (C3461), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 while the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is being executed, and a new special figure 2 reservation (winning information) A process for setting an effect mode when a winning information command indicating that a prize has been won is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, the winning information command received this time determines whether the winning information command indicates that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning port 640 has not been received (not special figure 2 winning) (C5501: NO), this process is terminated as it is .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning hole 640 (the special figure 2 winning) is determined (C5501: YES), then the effect variable flag 223IC is on. (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is ON (C5502: YES), 1 is added to the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. When it is determined that the variable effect flag 223IC is off (C5502: NO), the process of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information in the variable period storage area 223IB is read (C5504), and then it is determined whether or not the acquisition effect is currently in progress (C5505). If it is determined that the acquisition effect is currently being performed (C5505: YES), a display command indicating pending acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this processing is terminated. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the acquisition effect is not currently in progress (C5505: NO), a display command indicating pending acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to execute the final variation effect in correspondence with the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), and a new special figure 2 hold as part of the final variation effect It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 327(B)) for causing the player to acquire. Then, when the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation (the timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning) is during execution of the acquisition performance, it is configured to execute the exclusive performance. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the content of the effect being executed with the actual game situation, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in this control example, at the timing of acquiring a new special figure 2 suspension (timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning), it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension has been acquired based on the production contents being executed. Although it is configured to vary the production mode shown, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing of acquiring a new special figure 2 hold and the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining variation time of the time saving final variation ) may be used to set the effect mode. In this case, for example, the winning determination means indicating that the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning has been received, and the remaining time determination for determining the remaining time of the time saving state at the time of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning means, and the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when it is determined that the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received by the winning determination means (there is a special figure 2 winning), that is, the special figure 2 hold If the remaining period that can be easily acquired is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 pending number has increased due to the special figure 2 winning (for example, "plus 1" comment ) is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, a display mode (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased due to the special figure 2 winning, in addition to special figures 2 pending It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased in a state where the remaining period that can be easily acquired is small.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to determine whether the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation is a timing with a margin, so it can be used as a reference for future games. can be done. Also, in this case, it is preferable not to notify the player of the remaining period of the time-saving state, ie, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 reservation can be easily acquired. As a result, the player determines the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, so the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired Aspects can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired may be configured to be different according to the number of special figure 2 reservations, for example, the number of special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired is predetermined In the state below the number (for example, "2" or less), when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the remaining period that can easily acquire the special figure 2 reservation is specified If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, "plus 1" comment) indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased due to the special figure 2 winning, special figures 2 pending It may be configured to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "It might be severe") suggesting that it is difficult to set the number of .

Also, as a method of determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special figure fluctuation of the time saving state ends) is set as the remaining time of the time saving state. Alternatively, the period until the end of the last normal figure per game executed in the time saving state may be set as the remaining period of the time saving state.

That is, in this control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 1 time, 5 times) When the time saving state ends It is configured to Therefore, it becomes possible to calculate the remaining period until the time saving state ends based on the number of times of variation and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the ball is easy to win in the second winning opening 640. It is structured to make it easier to win the election. In addition, the normal symbol is configured such that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the game per normal pattern is executed, specifically. If the time saving state is set when the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is executed, the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern fluctuation time setting are executed as a high probability state of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern per game If the time-saving state is set when is executed, the game per normal pattern is executed as a high-probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, even if it is elected per normal pattern by the normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, when the normal state is set at the time the normal pattern per game is executed based on the normal pattern, normally A normal pattern per game will be executed as a low probability state of the pattern.

In this control example configured in this way, depending on the variation timing of the special symbol and the variation timing of the normal symbol, before the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state ends Then, the state in which the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 may end. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second winning prize within the remaining period Since the opening 640 includes a period in which it is not easy for the ball to win a prize, there arises a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 ends, that is, the period during which the normal game can be executed during the time saving state is determined. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 is likely to be set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect of notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. Also, in the case of determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, a period advantageous to the player (a ball is placed in the second winning hole 640 If the period during which the winning state is likely to be set continues, the period until the end of the period may be determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. That is, when the general pattern per game (normal pattern long open per game) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the general pattern per game (normal pattern long open per It is preferable that the period until the end of the game is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 is likely to be set). When executing, the accuracy of the content of the notification can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the contents of the effect setting process 9 for time saving (C4164) will be described. FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) executed in the ninth control example. This time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is the effect mode when the special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change with respect to the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above The difference is that the processing for setting has been changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is executed, after executing the same C4301 and C4302 processes as the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above, in the process of C4302, If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the time saving final variation (C4302: YES), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) of this time is a variation (C4361). If it is determined that this special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a winning variation (C4361: YES), the final table 222IA1 for winning held by the final variation production table 222IA is referenced to set the presentation mode (C4362 ), and the process proceeds to C4365. Also, in the process of C4301, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the special figure 2 fluctuation (C4301: NO), or in the process of C4302, the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the final fluctuation of the time saving state If it is determined (C4302: NO), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that this special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is not a hit fluctuation (it is an off fluctuation) (C4361: NO), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223A (second Winning information related to the special design (special figure 2) is read (C4363), the final table 222IA2 for loss of the final variation production table 222IA is referred to set the production mode (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the effect content (effect mode) set by the above-described process of C4362 and the process of C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223IB (C4365). is determined (C4366). If it is determined that there is an effect unset period (C4366: YES), the effect variable flag 223IC is set to ON (C4367), and then this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: NO), the process of C4367 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 420, the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing the details of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) executed in the ninth control example. In the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566), the final variation executed corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state updated in the process of C4501 of the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) in the fifth control example Elapsed period of production (elapsed period of special figure 2 fluctuation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

When the final fluctuation performance update process 9 (C4566) is executed, first, the information of the fluctuation period storage area 223IB is read (C4861), and the information of the read fluctuation period storage area 223IB (set performance period) and the special figure Extract the current production situation based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223EG (value indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation) (C4862), then determine whether the current timing is the end timing of the waiting period Then (C4863), if it is determined that it is time to end the waiting period (C4863: YES), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223IC is ON (C4864). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is ON (C4864: YES), the effect mode is set using the final effect variable setting table corresponding to the determination result of the variation (C4865), and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is off (C4864: NO), the process of C4865 is skipped and the process ends.

In the processing of C4863, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the standby period (C4863: NO), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the first period (C4866), If it is determined that there is (C4866: YES), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223IC is ON (C4867). If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is ON (C4867: YES), then it is determined whether or not the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is greater than 0 (C4868). When it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is greater than 0 (C4868: YES), the performance period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223IB (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. In the process of C4868, when it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223IA is 0 (C4868: NO), the process of C4869 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the effect mode of the final effect period is set (C4870), the variable effect flag 223IC is set to OFF (C4871), and the process proceeds to C4872. Also, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223IC is off (C4867: NO), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the pending number increment counter 223IA is cleared (C4872), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4866 that the current timing is not the end of the first period (C4866: NO), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is time to end the second period (C4873: YES), it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired. If so (C4874: YES), the re-prefetching flag 223EM is set to ON (C4875), and this processing ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the processing executed in C4874, the winning information storage area 223A is formed with storage areas corresponding to each symbol reservation, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol The storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special design (special design 2), and the storage area for the normal design (general design) are the number corresponding to the upper limit reserved storage number (4) of each design. formed. Each storage area stores pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, and a reference indicating whether or not the pre-reading result was referred to when setting various effects in the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the process of C4874, in addition to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referenced by the processing of C4806 or C4814, whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223A is stored in each storage area It is determined based on the presence or absence of stored referenced information, and the prefetch information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223A, and the referenced information When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new Special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-prefetching flag 223EM to ON in the process of C4875, as a variation effect corresponding to the next special figure fluctuation (first special figure fluctuation after the end of time saving), again, special figure 2 hold A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4874: NO), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 reservation is prefetched, and the second in the effect mode based on the prefetch result Since it is the case where the time saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving change effect is set as it is (C4876), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4873 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: NO), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process ends. In the process of C4877, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation and the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

As described above, in the ninth control example, when the final variation production is set (at the time of starting the time saving final variation), the final variation is configured to set the production mode of the final variation production. The lottery result (prefetch result) subject to the effect is limited to the lottery result of the change and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the time of setting the final change effect (at the start of the final time-saving change). The difference is that

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to vary the production mode of the final variation production that is executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is possible to diversify the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, as in this control example, in the case of varying the production mode of the final variation production to be executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of special figures 2 reserved becomes a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. can be done.

In addition, in the ninth control example, it is configured to start the final variation effect described above from the timing at which the final variation of the time saving state is executed, but not limited to this, the remaining period of the time saving state is a predetermined period When it becomes, for example, when the number of remaining time reduction becomes two times, it may be configured to execute the final variable effect. In addition, in this ninth control example, the period for one special figure fluctuation in the time saving state and the period for several special figure fluctuations in the normal state are used to explain the configuration for executing the final fluctuation production. As for the increase and decrease of the number of special figures 2 pending while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the number of special figures 2 pending increases until the special figure fluctuation in the time saving state ends, and the number of special figures in the normal state increases. After the figure fluctuation has started, only the pattern in which the number of special figures 2 is reduced has been described, but as other patterns, for example, during the execution of the normal figure long open per game executed during the time saving state Time saving After the state ends (the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) stops) and the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) in the normal state is started, the ball wins in the second winning port 640 There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the normal pattern lottery situation (the result of the normal pattern lottery being executed, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the reserved and stored normal Figure information (win/fail result, winning game type)) is configured to be discriminable, and based on the discrimination result, it is determined whether the ball can win in the second winning hole 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination It may be configured to vary the production mode of the final variable production based on the result, for example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win the second prize winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. is a production mode that makes it easy to reflect the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning to the second winning port 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period in the final fluctuation production (using a still image that makes it easy to extend the production period It is also possible to set a performance mode in which the performance result can be suddenly changed).

Also, when executing the final variation production using a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions when executing the final variation production (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state ) is determined, and based on the determination result, the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuation times that can be executed during the final variation production is calculated, and the production mode based on the calculation result may be configured to be set. . In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation production may be less than the calculated maximum number (for example, stop the game during the final fluctuation production If the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the production mode based on the above-described calculation result, it is preferable to set the production mode in which the production effect does not decrease even if the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency suddenly decreases.

Furthermore, in the state where the final variation production is executed for the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the final fluctuation production is continued even for the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation It may be executed, or the final variation performance may be suspended temporarily, and the performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation may be executed during the suspension period.

<Tenth control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, the game (left-handed game ) is configured to be able to execute the normal drawing lottery, and a suggestive effect (series of effects) is executed to suggest that a specific hit (normal drawing long open hit) was won in the normal drawing lottery executed during the normal state. was configured to

Then, a guide display mode (right-handed display) for winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 provided in the right side game area is displayed (a series of (displayed during execution of performance), so that the player can easily win the ball in the second winning port 640 during the normal game long open winning game. In addition, while the player is playing an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game in the normal state), the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode are displayed when the winning is won in the normal pattern long open. First, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to enter the ball into the second winning port 640 during the normal long open winning game.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, while the normal pattern long open winning game is being performed by the normal pattern lottery, the ball fired by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side game area) An electric accessory 1640A to be opened during a normal game and a second winning port 1640 are arranged at a position where a ball fired by a hitting game (a ball flowing down the right game area) can also win a prize. is different.

Furthermore, the ratio of the balls that reach the electric accessory 1640A out of the balls shot in the left-handed game and the ratio of the balls that reach the electric accessory 1640A out of the balls shot in the right-handed game are made different. In the hitting game, the ball reaches the electric accessory 1640A at a higher rate than in the left-handed game.

In addition, in this 10th control example, in a part of the case of winning per normal long open during the normal state, rather than executing the game per normal long open Information that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the winning normal pattern fluctuation, or the period from the acquisition of the winning information of the normal pattern (normal pattern) to be won until the normal pattern fluctuation is executed) It is configured to execute a production.

By configuring in this way, in the case of winning per normal long open, the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 can be changed depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance to be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second prize winning port 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can also win a prize, the ball is made to win the second prize winning port 1640 even when the notification performance is not executed. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is extremely disadvantageous.

<Regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 421, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 421 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. In the tenth control example, the positions of the components arranged in the right game area are different from those in the fifth control example described above. 2 The positions of the winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 421, in the game board 13 of the tenth control example, the second winning port 1640 with the electric accessory 1640A is provided below the first winning port 64, and the left side game is played by the left-handed game. It is configured so that both the ball that has flowed down in the area and the ball that has flowed down in the right game area due to the right-handed game can reach the second winning hole 1640 .

Specifically, the first winning port 64 and the left end side (left side in front view of FIG. 421) of the electric accessory 1640A in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 421) and a regulating member (nail) in the area between is planted, and it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, of the balls flowing down the left game area, only the balls guided by the nails planted in the game board 13 and passing through the upper area of the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. Configured. In the tenth control example, the game board 13 is configured such that the percentage of balls reaching the second winning opening 1640 among the balls flowing down the left game area is approximately 10%.

On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right game area is the ball flow formed on the upper surface of the closed V prize door 650B and the closed state of the prize door 65B. The game board 13 is configured so that it flows down the path and most of it (about 100%) reaches the second winning opening 1640 .

By configuring in this way, during the normal long open per game, that is, in the state where the ball can win the second winning hole 1640, the number of balls flowing down the right side game area is higher than the ball flowing down the left side game area. It is possible to make it easier to make the second winning port 1640 win. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to play the left-handed game or the right-handed game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 421, in this control example, in the normal state, more It is configured so that there are more prize winning openings (winning openings that can give benefits (prize balls, lottery) to the player) in which the balls flowing down the left side game area can win prizes. Specifically, a ball flowing down the right game area can enter (pass through) the through gate 67 or the second prize winning opening 1640, while a ball flowing down the left game area can pass through the through gate 67. , the first winning port 64, the second winning port 1640, and the general winning port 63 can be won (passed through).

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, except for the period during which the ball can be won in the second winning hole 1640 (game period per normal figure long open), the ball is fired toward the right side game area From the right-handed game Also, a left-handed game in which a ball is shot toward the left game area is a game method more advantageous to the player. As a result, during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously playing the right-handed game, and to allow the player to play the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting at what timing the right-handed game will be played during the normal state.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the time required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the second winning of the ball fired by the right-handed game. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right hitting arrival time). Specifically, while the left-handed reaching time is about 4 seconds, the right-handed reaching time is about 3 seconds.

By configuring in this way, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, one second after the left-handed game executed before A ball shot by a right-handed game to be executed) can be made to reach the second winning hole 1640 at the same timing.

Therefore, when the normal pattern long open per game is executed, depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left hitting game to the right hitting game, the winning of the ball to the second winning port 1640 during the normal pattern long open per game Since the easiness of playing the game can be varied, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the game period per normal long open per game is 3 seconds (open period 1 second, closed period 1.5 seconds) as in the fifth control example described above seconds, open period 0.5 seconds). That is, when the right-handed game is executed after the normal long open per game is executed, the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to win the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640 It is configured so that the game may have ended when the ball reaches .

As a result, the ball is not fired until the normal long open per game is executed, and the ball is hit to the right after the normal long open per game is started. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grant the privilege (prize ball, special figure 2 lottery)) granted by winning the ball to 1640, it is possible to continuously shoot the ball to the player, and the game is improved. can improve performance.

In addition, as described above, in the tenth control example, even if the hitting game period of the normal long open per game is set to 3 seconds, and the right hitting game is executed after the normal long open per game is started, Although it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning hole 1640, it is not limited to this, and the winning game period of the normal long open winning game (for example, 5 seconds (open period: 1 second, closed period: 1 second, open period: 3 seconds)). As a result, the player can play the game during the game per normal figure long open without anxiety.

<Regarding the production content in the tenth control example>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect executed in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this tenth control example using the configuration of the game board 13 explained with reference to FIG. For this reason, guidance information (e.g., right-handed information) for guiding the game method to the player is configured to be executable, and as a notification mode of the guidance information, the player can easily identify the game method. A first guidance notification mode and a second guidance notification mode in which the game method is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode can be set.

By configuring in this way, depending on whether the notification mode of the executed guidance notification is the first guidance notification mode or the second guidance notification mode, the ball is placed in the second winning opening during the normal figure long open per game. 1640 It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode that is set as part of the special figure variation effect that is executed in response to the special figure variation, and during the general figure variation that is elected per general figure long open, It is set when a special figure variation is executed with a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 When the variation effect corresponding to the above-described specific variation pattern is being executed, the player can use a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area DM4 of the main display area DM). A guidance display mode (for example, a comment of "Right shot") for guiding the game method is displayed (see FIG. 320(B)).

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, before the game is executed per normal long open During the period during which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display), or after receiving the winning information command for winning the normal symbol long opening as the normal symbol winning information command, until the normal symbol long opening winning game is executed. During the period of ), the first guidance notification mode is configured to be displayable. By configuring in this way, even if a game corresponding to the display content of the first guidance notification mode (for example, "right-handed") is executed after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed, The ball can be easily reached to the second winning port 1640 which is in the open state where the ball is easy to win by the normal figure long open hitting game.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game is executed per normal long open, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode. It is a thing. Specifically, at the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a guidance display mode for guiding the game method smaller than the first guidance notification mode displayed in the small display area DM4 (for example, "Right shot ” icon) is displayed.

As described above, in the tenth control example, the game board 13 is formed so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640. After recognizing the notification content of the second guidance notification mode, if a game method (for example, right-handed game) is performed according to the notification content, depending on the ball flowing down situation, the ball may be played during the normal long open per game. A state in which it is impossible to reach the 2 winning opening 1640 occurs.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to win per normal pattern long open in the state that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied. In addition, in the present tenth control example, in the state in which the notification conditions of the first guidance notification mode are established, when winning per normal pattern long open, the normal pattern long open per game is executed based on the winning The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed at the time when the normal pattern long open winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the normal long open per game is actually executed, it is possible to indicate that the normal long open per game is being executed. The player can be notified in the second guidance notification mode.

In addition, in the tenth control example, it is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode that the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the variation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, a notification condition may be set that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, or the state of transition of the game state, Specifically, it may be set as the notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition satisfaction flag) is provided, and when the notification condition is satisfied, the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON, and during the period in which the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON is configured to be able to display the above-described first guidance notification mode and second guidance notification mode, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF. Also good. In this case, it is preferable to set a notification end condition for turning off the notification condition satisfaction flag that is set to ON, and set the notification condition satisfaction flag to OFF when the notification end condition is satisfied. .

Specifically, a predetermined period after the notification condition establishment flag is set to ON (the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes))) It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when it has passed, or a lottery that is executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (for example, execution of a special drawing lottery, winning of a ball to each winning hole) is established It may be configured such that the notification end condition is established when a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

In addition, multiple types (e.g., per normal pattern long A, per normal pattern long B) are provided per normal pattern long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type per normal pattern long opening that was elected. By making it different, it may be configured to be able to set the general pattern long open per which the first guidance notification mode is likely to be displayed and the general pattern long open per which is difficult to be displayed.

In addition, the notification condition may be varied based on the game situation of the player, for example, the elapsed period from the previous big hit game (small hit game) (the number of special figure fluctuations, the elapsed time) satisfies the predetermined condition In the case (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches the number of times corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), it may be configured to always display the first guidance notification mode when winning the normal figure long open per. .

In addition, a predetermined period after the player moves from an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when a normal state is set (a game state (short-time state) in which a right-handed game is performed) to a normal state )) is being performed, a warning display for correcting the game method for the player (for example, in the small display area DM4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, "Left-handed If it is determined that the inappropriate game is continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed, the notification condition may not be established.

The techniques for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above are not limited to the tenth control example, and can be applied to each of the above-described embodiments and control examples. Also, for example, as in the fifth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 unless a right-handed game is executed may apply. In this case, since the privilege provided to the player greatly differs depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed, the player is motivated to play a game to satisfy the notification condition. can let

In addition, a notification means may be provided for informing the player of the game method for establishing the notification condition. It should be configured to display the necessary necessary information (for example, show super reach). Further, it is preferable to share whether or not the necessary information is displayed as suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, when the game corresponding to the display content displayed as the necessary information is executed, whether the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is established or whether the special symbol lottery result is determined. Since it is possible to notify the player of whether or not a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating winning of a jackpot) has been obtained in an incomprehensible way, the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide notification means capable of informing the player that the first guidance notification mode is currently in a state in which notification is possible (a state in which the notification condition is satisfied). As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the first guidance notification mode as a guidance notification mode that suggests that the game will be executed per normal pattern long open, and the player discriminates the notification content from the first guidance notification mode. However, in the state where the first guidance notification mode can be notified, a special execution condition (for example, a special operation to the operation means (frame button 22) (Condition that is established when is performed) is established, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode for notifying the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and guidance is provided in the guidance notification mode. By executing a game method corresponding to the content of notification at the appropriate timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which an advantageous privilege is likely to be given to the player. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example is configured so that both the ball fired in the left-handed game and the ball fired in the right-handed game can reach the second winning hole 1640. The period required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640 is about 4 seconds, and the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640. is about 3 seconds. By operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be shot per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game according to the execution timing of the normal figure long open game, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 640 at substantially the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the game is executed per normal figure long open, from the game method being executed to the player (for example, left-handed game) according to the information content (for example , a right-handed game), and the timing at which a plurality of balls can reach the second winning port 640 at approximately the same time as the shooting timing of the balls of the game method being executed (for example, a left-handed game). A notification mode for notifying to is set.

By configuring in this way, the player will play the game with motivation so that a more advantageous guidance notification mode is displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In the example described above, when the notification conditions for the first guidance notification mode are satisfied, the special guidance notification mode described above can be set. A special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode may be established even when the notification condition of (1) is not satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification It may be configured such that when the notification condition of the mode is satisfied, the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is more likely to be satisfied than when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes. may be configured to set Furthermore, the easiness of establishment of notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes may be varied based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. Each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes are likely to be established each time a person performs a specific operation on the operating means. can be configured to As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and early boredom with the game can be suppressed.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the normal pattern per game (normal pattern long open per game) that allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 1640 is executed. It is configured to execute guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for informing the player during the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation, which is the result of the lottery to be executed, and the normal pattern per game is started. At the time before (before the normal figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to vary from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the normal figure per game is started. It is configured so that the game ball fired by the right-handed game before the normal game is won during the game per the normal long game, but not limited to this, for example, the normal game long A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance information (for example, right-handed information) is set during the opening period of the game per normal long open (after the per game is started) , until the electric accessory 1640A is opened).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the guidance notification (right-handed notification) after the normal figure fluctuation to be won is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so the guidance notification (right-handed notification) was executed In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game per normal pattern is not executed. Also in this case, similarly to the tenth control example, it is determined whether or not the notification conditions for the first guidance notification mode are established, and only when it is determined that the notification conditions are satisfied, the first guidance notification mode is set. It is preferable to configure so as to execute guidance notification. Also, if it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not established, the normal pattern fluctuation period and the opening period of the normal pattern per game are used to produce the result of the general pattern lottery lottery. is executed, and as a result of the effect, a display mode indicating that the game has been won in a general pattern is displayed at the end timing of the opening period of the general pattern game (opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640A).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not established, it is notified that the winning of the general-purpose winning game is performed at the timing when the electric accessory 640A is opened as the general-purpose winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball shot by the right-handed game to enter the second prize-winning hole 1640 even if the player who has identified that he has won the normal game by the notification plays the right-handed game. In the above-described example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not established, the winning per normal pattern is performed at the timing when the electric accessory 1640A is opened as a game per normal pattern. Although an example of notifying that is shown, without being limited to this, in the opening period of the game per normal pattern, when the remaining period of the opening period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) per normal pattern It may be configured so as to notify that the winner has been selected. In other words, even if the player who recognizes that he/she has been elected per normal game performs a right-handed game, the timing when it becomes difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 1640 during the normal game per game, for example, by a right-handed game Rather than the period required for the shot ball to reach the second winning hole 1640, the normal drawing game ends after notification of winning the normal game (the ball can win the second winning hole 1640) It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the period is shortened.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game per normal pattern is executed In the variable production corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation in the period, the production that suggests winning per normal pattern is executed, and the production in which the first guidance notification mode is set in the opening period of the game per normal pattern is executed. It may be configured to do so, and by combining the performance mode of the variable performance of the special figure fluctuation and the performance mode of the opening performance of the normal game, the player is notified of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It can be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery is performed by the special figure effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the general figure lottery is performed by the general figure effect executed based on the general figure fluctuation By executing the second notification for indicating the lottery result and further executing the first notification and the second notification with a relationship (continuous execution or overlapping execution) It may be configured to execute the third notification for showing the right hitting timing to execute the right hitting game to the player for the winning game.

In addition, depending on the type of game per normal pattern to be executed, the length of the opening period to be set is changed, and the period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more is set as the opening period Per normal pattern game , A normal game in which a period of less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as an opening period, and the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 during the normal game. Also, if the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per normal figure to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, than when the combination condition is not satisfied , Guidance information for making it easier to win the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game may be configured to be executed. As a result, different benefits for the player (to the second winning port 640 (ease of winning a prize) can be given, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the sixth control example, the setting method of the guide notification mode for making it easier to win the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the normal game per game was described, but a specific winning game (for example, normal game per game) is executed, a game (for example, a left-handed game) in which a ball is shot with one shooting intensity is changed to a game (for example, a right-handed shot) in which a ball is shot with a predetermined shooting intensity different from one shooting intensity. game) to make it easier for the ball to enter a specific winning hole (for example, the second winning hole 640), for example, a small hit by a special lottery executed during a left-handed game As a small winning game executed when winning, a winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) is opened during a small winning game at a position (for example, a right game area) where a ball fired by a right-handed game can win. 650A), using the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small winning game, it may be configured to set the guidance notification mode of the same idea as this control example.

<Regarding Modified Example of Seventh Control Example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 423 and 424. FIG. FIG. 423 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh control example. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification differs from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example in that the configuration of the right game area is changed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 423, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the flow velocity of the ball is reduced in the flow path of the first flow path 701 (the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed ), delay members 701Y and 701Z are arranged so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first channel 701 (ball passing time) is about 4 seconds. An operating gate 670 is provided at the downstream end of the first flow path 701 .

Operation gate 670 will now be described. In each of the control examples described above, when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the special symbols are stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot through a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined time. Then, a jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in this modified example, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating winning of the jackpot, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed through the operating gate 670. It is configured as follows. In other words, the operation gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing a jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is established (when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won).

With this configuration, not only the lottery result of the special symbol, but also the player can actually shoot the ball toward the predetermined area (operation gate 670) to execute the jackpot game. can be made to play games willingly. In addition, the operation gate 670 used in this modification is one of the execution conditions for executing the jackpot game only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot compared to the start gate 720A of the above-described A4 embodiment. (the start gate 720A is provided as an execution condition in any of the small winning game and the big winning game), and other configurations (the structure of the gate and the main controller 110 (condition device determination processing (see S250 in FIG. 311))) are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, this modification differs from the above-described seventh control example in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640A and the V winning device 650 are changed. Another difference is that the configuration of the second winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that the variation time of the special symbols to be selected and the variation time of the normal symbols are different from those of the pachinko machine of the seventh control example described above. Specifically, a special special figure with a variation time of 50 seconds as a variation pattern that can be selected when winning a big hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in a normal state or when winning a small win. 1 variation pattern is made selectable, and a special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when a small win is won in a second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery in a normal state. A special normal pattern variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds is selectable as a normal pattern variation pattern that can be selected when winning per long opening of a normal symbol.

Then, as the ending condition of the small winning game, the first ending condition established when the number of winning balls reaches one and the period during which the V winning opening 650A is opened in the small winning game are 1.5 seconds. and a second termination condition, which is satisfied when .

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example configured in this way, when the special figure variation in which the special special figure 1 variation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or the normal figure variation in which the special figure normal figure variation pattern is set When the stop display is displayed, a guidance notification (see FIG. 320(B)) for making the player play a right-handed game as a game method is executed.

Here, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the jackpot winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701 and passes through the operation gate 670, resulting in a big hit. A game is started. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the operation gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

In addition, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on small winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and enters the V winning opening 650A. A jackpot game is started. As described above, it takes about 4 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650A, and the small winning game ends when one ball wins during the small winning game. In addition, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650A, the winning ball always passes through the V gate (V area). A jackpot game is started.

Furthermore, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on winning per normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702, passes through the second winning opening 640, When the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after a fluctuation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the time it takes for the ball passing through the second winning opening 640 to reach the V winning opening 650A is about 2 seconds, a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery. In this case, the ball passing through the second winning hole 640 will win the V winning hole 650A. Therefore, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played.

That is, in this modification, the same variation time is set for the case of winning the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case of winning the small hit, and the variation time has passed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) for changing the game method at the timing is executed, the player performs a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, so that a jackpot game can be executed at the same timing. is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current big winning game is executed based on the winning of the big winning or through the winning of the small winning. can. Furthermore, as in the above-described control example, in the jackpot game that is executed when the special symbol jackpot is won and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed via the small hit, the player If the size of the benefits to be granted (the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the jackpot ends) is different, what triggered the jackpot game? By making it difficult to understand, the game can be played while expecting the game state set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this modification, as described above, even when winning a specific hit (per normal pattern long open) in the lottery of normal symbols, the jackpot game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. The period until winning is the same as when winning a big win or winning a small win of a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the execution trigger of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this modification, when a lottery result (special figure lottery result, general figure lottery result) that can execute a jackpot game is obtained, the same variation time (50 seconds) is configured to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variable effect using the same effect mode as the effect using the variable time. Thus, even while the special variation performance is being executed, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation performance being executed is the special variation performance based on the special pattern variation or the special variation performance based on the normal pattern variation. be able to.

In the above example, the case of setting a special variation effect for a special variation pattern in which a variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described. Of the variable effects corresponding to the set variable pattern, the above-described special variable effect may be executed when the remaining variable time of the variable time is 50 seconds. Further, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, a special loss variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a performance result of the special variation performance, a right-handed game is guided after the variation time has passed. An effect pattern (failure effect) in which notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, even when the special variation performance is executed, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided, so that the player pays attention to the contents of the special variation performance. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each control example, a specific hit (normal pattern long open hit) is won in the normal pattern lottery, and guidance notification to guide the right-handed game is executed, and the ball is awarded the second prize by the right-handed game. In the case of winning (passing) to the mouth 640, if the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure until the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed 2 A waiting period will be set in which no variation is performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed despite the guidance notification being executed. In addition, when the ball wins (passes) the second winning hole 640 by the right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is executed immediately, the above-mentioned failure effect is also performed when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out. should be configured to run

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the same performance mode in the case of winning the special figure 2 lottery and in the case of setting the standby period of the special figure 2 lottery. Then, if the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the waiting period has elapsed is a small hit, the small hit is won from the failure effect described above. It is preferable that an effect (resurrection effect) for switching to an effect mode indicating that the character has been played is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect capable of making the player have expectations until the end.

In addition, the waiting period of the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using various techniques used in each control example described above, and may be appropriately combined with various techniques used in each control example. Furthermore, when performing a right-handed game based on winning per normal, or when performing a small hitting game based on winning a small hit, similar to each control example described above, the ball is a specific winning opening (Second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650A) There are cases where winning (passing) is not possible. Also in this case, it is sufficient to display the effect mode (for example, see FIG. 324(B)) described in the fifth control example. In addition, even if the jackpot is won in the special lottery, the predetermined timing, for example, the timing at which the ball fired by the right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed) Approximately 1 second later) or at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650A (approximately 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed).

In the above-described modification, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a jackpot game with a plurality of opportunities, the player is notified that the conditions for executing a jackpot game have been established ("right hit notification" in this modification). By making the period from the start to the actual execution of the big winning game the same regardless of the timing until the big winning game is executed, the player is informed in advance that the big winning game will be executed. Since it is structured so as to make it difficult to understand when the jackpot game is executed while notifying, it is possible to determine which game mode the jackpot game is actually executed, or the game state after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which game state will be set.

In addition, the notification mode for notifying that the conditions for executing the jackpot game have been established is not limited to the configuration of the present modification. A performance mode may be set to indicate that a condition for executing a jackpot game is established, and a period from execution of notification based on the notification mode to actual execution of the jackpot game is unified. can be set, the notification timing and notification mode may be appropriately set.

Further, when using the opportunity to execute the big winning game through the small winning game, even if the ball wins the V winning opening 650A at any timing during the small winning game, it is determined in advance after the small winning game is started. It is preferable that the jackpot game is executed after the time has elapsed. As a result, the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is performed to when the big win game is actually performed can be made more uniform.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration for setting the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game to be executed later when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the small win game, A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in the V winning opening 650A where balls can win, and the winning balls in the V winning opening 650A are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates) on the upstream side thereof. By providing a distribution movable member and configuring the distribution movable member to be movable according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, after the small winning game is started, the swing in the V winning opening 650A is performed. The ball passes through different specific regions (V gates) depending on the time it takes for the ball to reach the movable member. Then, when each specific area (V gate) is passed, a jackpot type in which a jackpot game in which a different opening period is set is set is set, so that each specific area (V gate) is set. Even in the case of using a configuration in which a jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the , the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 is opened may be unified in the jackpot game.

<Regarding examples of how to respond to power failures in each control example>
Next, among the various effects executed in each control example described above, different game control (special figure fluctuation game, general figure fluctuation game, small hit game, jackpot game) is performed by the main control device 110 Multiple periods The control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during execution of period effects (series effects, final variable effects) that are executed over the period will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 (various information stored in the RAM 203) While the information can be temporarily held (backed up), the contents of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (various information stored in the RAM 223) are stored when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted. It is configured to be deleted when

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted while the above-described period effect is being executed based on the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (power failure state). ), when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power restoration), it becomes impossible to read out what period of performance was being executed immediately before the power failure state. There is a problem that the period production cannot be restarted.

Therefore, in this corresponding example, the return command indicating the gaming situation at the time of power recovery is configured to be set in the start-up process (see FIG. 356) of the main controller 110 (set after C910 in FIG. 356), As a command at the time of return, the presence or absence of special figure fluctuation, the presence or absence of normal figure fluctuation, the current game state, the presence or absence of big hit game, the presence or absence of small hit game, the presence or absence of right-handed notification, the remaining period until the game state shifts It is configured to set a command including each information of information, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the above-described return command, the current state (at the time of power restoration) is a state in which the period effect can be executed (power failure It is configured to be able to execute determination processing (pre-power-off performance determination processing) for determining whether or not it is in a state in which there is a possibility that the period performance was executed immediately before.

When it is determined in the pre-power-off effect determination process that the current state is such that the period effect cannot be executed (for example, during a jackpot game), the effect corresponding to the command output from the main controller 110 is executed. When it is determined in the power-off pre-effect determination process that the current period effect can be executed, the period effect is restarted later based on a command output from the main controller 110. A preparatory processing state is set, and a comment indicating that the effect is being prepared is displayed to the player indicating that the effect may be resumed.

Then, in a state where the preparation processing state is set, a command including information of a small winning type indicating a small winning winning (general figure long open winning game) in which a series of effects is executed as a winning related command from the main control device 110 is issued. When it is determined that it is output, the period performance is restarted from the start of the small winning game. By configuring in this way, different game control (special figure fluctuation game, general figure fluctuation game, small hit game, big hit game) is performed in the main control device 110 Period production executed over multiple periods When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during the execution of (a series of performances, the final variable performance), it is possible to suppress the abandonment of all the performances during that period.

Furthermore, in this example of correspondence, even if the conditions for executing a new effect (period effect) are satisfied while the preparation processing state is set, there is limit means for limiting the execution of the new effect (period effect). are doing. In other words, the restart processing of the performance (period performance) executed before the power failure is executed with priority over the processing of newly executing the performance (period performance) after the power is restored. By configuring in this way, the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with an effect that does not cause discomfort. . In addition, when the effect mode of the effect (period effect) being executed before the power cut is combined with the effect mode of the effect (period effect) that is newly set regardless of the effect (period effect), the game Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a performance result that is advantageous to the player.

Also, in the state where the preparatory processing state is set, every time various commands are received from the main controller 110, there is a possibility that an effect (period effect) was being executed immediately before the power failure. It is configured to repeatedly execute determination processing for determining whether or not there is, and based on the determination result, if it is determined that the effect (period effect) cannot be executed immediately before the power failure, It is configured to erase the comment during preparation for the effect indicating to the player that the effect (period effect) may be restarted, and to execute the normal control processing of the sound lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, if the state in which the preparatory processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from main controller 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after power is restored), the power is turned on. It determines that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the power failure (period effect) cannot be restarted, and displays to the player that the effect (period effect) before the power failure cannot be restarted (for example , and the comment ``All of the performance contents before the power failure have been invalidated'') are displayed, and the normal control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, it is possible to notify the player that it could not be restarted. , Before the power cut, a mission effect such as "If a reach of 3 occurs within 10 rotations, a big win!" ” and confusing the player. In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which the mission production can be set (the number of special figure fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)) can overlap the production result in the mission production. It may be configured such that the mode of presentation is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission can be set to establish a specific reach mode (for example, a reach of "3", "5", or "7") as a mission effect, a predetermined During the period, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is configured not to be set, and if the result of the special lottery is a hit, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It should be configured so that it can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect within a limited range even within a predetermined period after power is restored. Also, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, a specific reach mode can be set, so the mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power is cut off. Even if "reach of 3" happens to occur within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the result of the lottery is a win, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the above-described control examples, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous, a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is played. is executed (first opportunity), and a special symbol lottery wins a small hit, and the game ball is in a specific area during the small win game (V winning device 650 (Fig. 315 reference) provided in the V area (not shown)) based on the fact that the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed (second opportunity), gaming machine having two opportunities However, without being limited to this, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is executed by winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. The technique of each control example described above may be diverted to a gaming machine having only a trigger (first trigger).

In addition, in each control example described above, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), can be set, but without being limited to this, it is possible to set a high probability state of special symbols in which the winning probability of special symbols is increased after the end of the jackpot game, and a variable state (high probability of special symbols Probability state, high probability state of normal design) and latent probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) may be configured so as to be settable.

And, when a specific game state (latency state) is set as the game state, it is easier to execute a specific special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) than when another game state is set (special Fig. 2 Make it easier to enter the ball into the starting port that triggers the execution of the lottery.Or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently present a small winning game based on the small winning of the special figure 2 lottery. The game to be played may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, the player can play a game in which many prize balls can be obtained even if the player does not win a big prize in the special lottery, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fifth control example to the tenth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution triggers for executing a jackpot game is used, specifically, the first special symbol. The first jackpot execution opportunity triggered by winning the jackpot by the lottery of (Special Figure 1), and the small win by the lottery of the first special pattern (Special Figure 1), are executed based on the small winning. It has a second big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650A (see FIG. 315) that is open to the small winning game. In addition, as a special figure variation execution opportunity for executing the special symbol lottery, the first special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning the ball in the first winning opening 64 and the ball passing through the through gate 67 A ball is placed in the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 315), which is opened by the normal pattern winning game executed when the normal pattern (normal pattern) lottery is won by the normal pattern lottery. and a second special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning a prize. And according to establishment condition of each big-hit execution opportunity and each special-figure variation execution opportunity, it is comprised so that a big-hit game may be performed through various game processes. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to execute a jackpot game through various game processes, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the fifth control example described above, from one game state (time saving state) where it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (ball winning to the second winning port 640 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery), the one game When a transition condition to shift to another game state (normal state) in which it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than in a state is satisfied, an acquisition guidance notification is executed for acquiring a specific lottery right during one game state. By structuring to make it easier to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another game state, it is possible to make the player willingly play the game until just before the end of the one game state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during a big win game than in a game state set after the end of the big win game, the acquisition guide notification is given during the big win game. may be executed so that a specific lottery is likely to be executed after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the ease with which a particular lottery right can be obtained may be varied by varying the ease with which a ball enters a winning opening (starting prize opening) that is a specific lottery right, or the game state may vary. By varying the length of the set period, the easiness of obtaining a specific lottery right during the game state may be varied.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the easiness of acquiring a specific lottery right is made different between one game state and another game state. It is sufficient if the degree can be varied and the game content in another game state can be changed based on the benefits acquired during one game state. A storage member (retention member) is provided, and when one game state is set, it is easier to store balls in the storage member than when another game state is set. In other game states, playing a game with the balls stored in the storage member is more advantageous to the player than playing a game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Also good.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, an eleventh control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 505. FIG. Note that the eleventh control example will be described by partially changing the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments. are omitted.

FIG. 425 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 425, the game board 13 in the eleventh control example has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, and rails 76. , 77, general ball entrance 63, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80, sorting device 700, etc. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the opening 710A of the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. Further, although the details will be described later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entrance 64 and a right second ball entrance 640R, through which a ball can enter, are provided. A ball entering the opening 710A is sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R (see FIG. 426).

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5C of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 425, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112A (see FIG. 436) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 425) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 425) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 425). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 436), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the eleventh control example, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B determine whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640R. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance. When winning 640R, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal mode by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpots (jackpots A and C), the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B), or the winning pattern, or the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640R wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot types determined here, 16R time-saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot A), 16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot (jackpot B1), 16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot (jackpot B2), 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. ing. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R time-saving 100 times jackpot” (jackpot A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third pattern is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered pattern. After the round jackpot game, it shifts to a low probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), it is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state. "16R probability variable odd number jackpot" (jackpot B1) means that the third pattern is finally stopped and displayed with the same odd number pattern, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot" (jackpot B2) means that the third pattern is finally stopped and displayed with the same even number pattern, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variable jackpot" (jackpot C) means that the 3rd pattern is finally displayed in a combination of specific patterns (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds After the jackpot, the state shifts to a high probability state. (Until the next big winning game is executed) It is a probability variable big winning. It should be noted that, if the jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In addition, the "power supply state" in the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 640 refers to a game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the electric sapo (during the electric sapo game state) during the probability change and during the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. Changed and set to a longer time than normal. When the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640A is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640A associated with the second entrance 640 during the electric sapo during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 640A is opened in each round more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640A is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640A associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640A attached to the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640A is opened per time is not set, and the second symbol is used. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning (starting winning) of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640R. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . The center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from contacting the game ball.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 436), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 456). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the display symbol (second symbol (see Fig. 425)) for a predetermined period of time. It performs a variable display that makes it possible. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric role object 640A associated with the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the power support during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric power support and during the time saving during the probability change, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more opportunities to open the electric accessory 640A of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the electric sapo during the probability change and during the time saving.

In addition, during the electric sapo during the probability change or during the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640A for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640A may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured so that part of the balls flowing down the game board 13 among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a sorting device 700 in which balls can win is arranged. When a ball wins (enters) the sorting device 700 through the opening 710A, the entered ball is alternately sorted to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R. be done. When the ball enters (enters) the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 436) draws a jackpot lottery, and the first symbol display device 37A displays the result of the lottery. Also, when the ball enters the second right ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the second right ball entrance 640R. Then, due to the turn-on of the second entrance switch, a lottery for a big win is made in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 456), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided below the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 456), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. Normally, the second ball entrance 640 prevents (difficult to enter) the game ball by regulating the entry of the game ball in a state in which the left and right motorized accessories 640A, which are formed in the shape of wings, stand upright. ), and when a normal pattern to be described later is hit, the electric accessory 640A rotates about 45 degrees in the outward direction as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern and becomes an inverted eight. A game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 640 and is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640R, five balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second ball entrance 640 receives two balls. It is also one of the prize-winning openings that are paid out as balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 Although the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640R is set to a different number, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are different. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters right second ball entrance 640R may be the same number.

An electric accessory 640A is attached to the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 640A is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640A is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the electric sapo during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time taken to display the variation of the second symbol is short, so the variation of the second symbol In the display, the "○" pattern is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640A is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640A is opened is longer than during the normal time during the variable probability or during the time saving. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change or the time reduction than during normal times.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. A jackpot lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R.

On the other hand, during the electric sapo during the variable probability or during the time saving, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640A attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball hole 640, the ball entering the opening 710A is distributed to the first ball hole 64 or the right second ball hole 640R. A jackpot lottery associated with the entry of the ball into the mouth 640 is also facilitated to be executed. Therefore, the chances of winning the jackpot lottery are increased compared to during the normal period, which is more advantageous to the player than during the normal period.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides a , can change the way the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65A is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery conducted due to the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640R becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable After the elapse of time), the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. , indicates the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65A is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65A is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65A can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65A is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65A, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65A is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65A while the specific winning opening 65A is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning openings 65A is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. , for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the entrances 63, 64, 65A, 640, 640R are guided through the exit 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 456). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 456) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 436, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 436 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 473) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (FIG. 472) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 471) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112A so that, when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. . The sphere firing unit 112A has a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51B for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, and the like. there is

The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and sends the determined display mode to the command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 456). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. It should be noted that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the sorting device 700 will be described. 426 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 426, the sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13 . A through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow passage portion through which a game ball that enters the opening 710A flows down, and a flow passage portion through which a game ball that enters the second ball inlet 640 flows down. The base member of the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Through-holes (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and lower insertion holes (not shown) located below the through-holes and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. Formed by the Lord.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from a central position in the left-right direction in a front view toward both the left and right sides, a distributing member 762 that is arranged at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761, and a distributing member 762. and a ball-throwing opening formed above.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762A protruding outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and is inserted through the inside of the annular shape. and a shaft portion 762B.

The shaft portion 762B is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inner side of the circular ring of the distribution member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762B is sandwiched between the intervening member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762B.

The protrusion 762A is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball that has passed through the opening 710A is thrown. The ball is thrown to the left and right opposite sides. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710A can be thrown in the horizontal direction by the projection 762A in the central portion. The protrusions 762A protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the distribution member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes through displaces the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762A is positioned (distribution member 762 ), and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762A and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the projection 762A that is not in contact with the inclined surface is guided by the central projection 762A, the guided ball collides with the projection 762A and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762A on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the protrusion 762A that is displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface, thereby restricting the displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path along which the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throw route KR3”). It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the lower side.

At the end on the lower side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed to be inclined in the direction of approaching the interposition member so that the thickness increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 passes through the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R of the intervening member disposed in front of the sorting member 760. can be thrown to More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second ball entrance 640R.

The intervening member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the first ball entrance 64 which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. A right second ball inlet 640R penetrating in the front-rear direction and these first ball inlets 64 are mainly formed.

The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640R are formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, respectively, and on the rear side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640R. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entrance 64 and is thrown to the through hole of the prize winning member 730, and the right second ball entrance 640R. , and a path for throwing the ball to the through-hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. A ball entering from the opening 710A is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown by a distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction. A ball thrown through the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected.

On the other hand, a ball that is thrown along the leftward third ball path KR3 reaches the end of the third ball path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside the . Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640R.

In this way, game balls entering the opening 710A are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 are evenly distributed. It is possible to uniformly generate reserved balls by allowing game balls to enter the right second ball inlet 640R. Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes the upper limit, and the overflow that is not stored as the reserved balls can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to change at the same time. By configuring in this way, lotteries for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination results can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 456) to be described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit B1", one of the odd numbered main symbols "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is stopped and displayed in a grid. A variable display is performed. In addition, if it is a "jackpot A" or a "jackpot B2", a variable display is performed in which one of the even-numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned in a grid pattern. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, chance numbers composed of a combination of "341" are displayed. It should be noted that this chance combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a loss. In the present embodiment, the chance numbers are configured to be displayed in a combination of specific third symbols. ) may be displayed as one or a combination of a plurality of them, or characters such as "Chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 427 to 435, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 427(A), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area DS for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area DM is divided into three left, middle and right display areas DM1 to DM3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas DM1 to DM3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area DM is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols are stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area DS is provided horizontally below the main display area DM, and is divided into two sub-areas DS1 and DS2 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area DS1 is an execution display area in which, when the held balls held in the main display area DM are variably displayed (dynamically displayed), the held symbols to be changed are moved and displayed. be. The pending symbols moved to the execution display area are displayed as symbols larger than the pending symbols so that it can be identified that the variation of the corresponding special symbols is being executed. In addition, when the variation is executed, by varying the color of the symbol or varying the pattern of the symbol, it is configured to indicate the lottery result of the varying special symbol.

The small area DS2 is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640R, or the second ball entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and a preview effect image. In the small area DS2, a character display area C is set in which a notice effect image of the character is displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 427(B), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area DM. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the sub-display area DS, the small area DS1 displays an active pedestal symbol M0 indicating that it is an area in which the held ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is moved and displayed. As shown in A), when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied, a round symbol is displayed. Among the reserved patterns (circular patterns) displayed in the small area DS2, the leftmost circular pattern indicating that the reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area A circle design having a larger diameter than the reserved design is displayed on DS1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area DS2 are moved to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved pattern was displayed, followed by the reserved symbols displayed side by side. be done. When the reserved pattern moves to the small area DS1 and is displayed as the pattern being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern that starts to fluctuate, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and pattern of the pattern being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbols to start varying and the selected variation pattern from the symbols being executed displayed in the small area DS1. can improve the interest of In addition, the symbol being executed displayed in the small area DS1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of the variation, but the effect of changing the special symbol during the period when the special symbol is changing is also executed. For example, the timing when the third symbol switches from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, or the ready-to-win display mode (the display mode in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol and the middle symbol is scroll-displayed). It is executed at the timing or the timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 427(B), in the small area DS2, there is a first reserved symbol pedestal M1 indicating that it is an area in which a reserved symbol indicating that the reserved order with the highest variation order is displayed. displayed on the left side. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal M1, there are a second reserved symbol pedestal M2 indicating that the reserved order is second, a third reserved symbol pedestal M3 that indicates that the reserved order is third, and a reserved order. A fourth reserved symbol pedestal M4 indicating that the is the fourth, a fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5 indicating that the reserved order is the fifth, and a sixth reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is the sixth M6, the seventh reserved symbol pedestal M7 indicating that the reserved order is the seventh, and the eighth reserved symbol base M8 indicating that the reserved order is the eighth are in a state where no reserved symbols are displayed. is also displayed.

Above the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8, when a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are not displayed, a reserved number suggesting pattern P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggesting pattern P is formed in a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved pattern pedestal M5. Similarly, on the top of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal M6, the character "6" indicating that the reserved order is 6th is displayed, and on the top of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal M7, the reserved order is 7. A variable lid shape in which the character "7" indicating that it is the 8th reserved order is displayed, and the character "8" that indicates that the reserved order is the 8th is displayed on the upper part of the 8th reserved symbol pedestal M8. It is composed of the pattern of

As shown in FIG. 427(B), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number suggesting pattern P extends over the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8. It is displayed, and is constructed so that the player can recognize that the maximum reserved number is 8 in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of four is set for the first special design, and a maximum of four is set for the second special design. Also, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow by doing so.

A character display pedestal C1 is displayed on the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8 to indicate that it is an area in which the announcement character is displayed. With this configuration, the player can confirm in advance the area where the character is displayed even when the character for announcement is not displayed, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 428(A), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed in the main area DM (during the variable display period of the special symbol), the first entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640R or the second ball entrance 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entered special symbol is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserved order A reserved pattern is displayed in . FIG. 428(A) shows the display of reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 428(A), until the number of pending balls is 3, the pending number suggesting pattern P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th pending symbols are displayed. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 428(B), when the number of reservations is 4, the variable lid pattern that displays the 5th reservation of the reservation number suggesting pattern P is hidden and variably displayed. . By constructing in this way, when the reserved pattern is displayed up to the vicinity of the variable lid pattern, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid pattern as the reserved pattern and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. can. Also, as shown in FIG. 428(B), when the number of held balls reaches 4, not only is the variable cover design hidden in the display area for the fifth held ball, but a girl is displayed in the character display area C. It is configured so that a character pattern is displayed.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by using a speech balloon. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of pending balls reaches 7, the message "1 more ball" is displayed in the comment display. This suggests that the 8 held balls are in a memorized state. With this configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit, the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the right By entering a ball into one of the second ball entrances 640R (a ball entrance corresponding to a special symbol that is not the upper limit of retention), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not retained and stored.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710A of the distribution device 700, the game ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 (the first ball entrance 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640R (corresponding to the second special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily accumulated alternately and evenly. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710A without worrying about the overflow even when the total number of reserved balls (combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes seven. The game can be continued so as to enter the ball.

Furthermore, when the number of held balls reaches the upper limit, the character "MAX" is displayed to indicate that the number of held balls has been stored up to the upper limit, and the player can continues to shoot game balls and suppresses the problem of overflow of held balls.

In FIG. 429(A), the 4th reserved ball is stored, and the winning ball is determined by the look-ahead processing (Z320: see FIG. 467) in the starting prize-winning processing (Z105) of FIG. 466, Information on the selected variation pattern type is output as a winning command to the audio ramp control device 113, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that it is a big hit or a variety of super reach, the player The display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as an effect to make the player expect a big hit, and the fifth variable lid pattern of the reserved number suggesting pattern P is also non- Display as it is without displaying. Furthermore, an effect is executed in which a girl is displayed in the character display area C and the characters "as is" are displayed to suggest that the number of reserved characters should not be increased any further. Here, when the fifth held ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 429(B), the word "OVER" is displayed in a speech bubble from the girl in the character display area C, indicating that the character has not overflowed. In both cases, a notification is given as if an overflow had occurred. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the fourth held ball will be variably displayed. It is possible to suppress wasteful shooting and consumption of game balls by a player.

As shown in FIG. 430(A), when the number of 0 held balls is stored up to 4 in a short period of time (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the 4th held ball is stored, The 5th and 6th figures of the variable cover pattern P of the reserved number suggesting pattern P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the character "early" is displayed, and the reserved period is reached. Since it is short, the information suggesting that the reserved number suggesting pattern P is specially changed and displayed is executed. Here, normally, when the number of reserved balls is four, the fifth variable cover pattern of the reserved number suggesting pattern P is hidden, but 0 reserved balls are displayed within 5 seconds. Since the number has increased to 4, there is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable cover patterns are displayed as non-display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect to be executed depending on the period during which the number of held balls is increased or the interval at which the held balls are stored, and the player is notified that a predetermined number or more of the held balls have occurred in a short period of time. is easily recognizable. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is configured to be different from the normal display mode, but this is not restrictive. It may be configured to vary the color, pattern, and shape of the reserved design.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430(B), a variable display example of the variable lid pattern P in the time saving game state will be described. In the time-saving gaming state (high probability of success/failure determination of normal symbols), unlike the normal game state (low probability of success/failure determination of normal symbols), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 430(B) 2, the fifth (M5) and sixth (M6) variable cover patterns P are hidden. Then, a character of a girl is displayed, and characters are displayed to urge the player to play the game so as to memorize up to the 6th reserved ball, saying "Put up to 6" in a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the success/failure determination probability of the normal symbols is set to a high probability, and the variation time of the normal symbols is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessory (electric sapo) 640A is easily set to the open state, A game ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R. Therefore, during the time-saving game, overflow of the reserved balls is likely to occur. Therefore, during the time-saving game, unlike during the normal game, many variable cover patterns P are hidden, and the upper limit value of the reserved balls is 8. By urging the player to play so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of pieces, the game can be played so as to suppress the state in which the retained balls are stored up to the upper limit value and the overflow is likely to occur. can. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the ball is the fifth ball, the variable lid pattern P of the seventh ball (M7) is hidden, and when the ball is the seventh ball, the variable lid pattern of the eighth ball (M8) is displayed. P is hidden.

In addition, in this control example, during the time-saving game, the seventh variable cover pattern P is hidden when the fifth ball is held. The configuration may be such that the first and eighth variable lid patterns P are maintained in the displayed state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in an attempt to generate 6 or more reserved balls.

When the 4th reserved ball is stored, the 6th and 7th variable cover patterns are hidden according to the content of the prize winning command, and the girl is urged to increase the reserved balls up to the 6th ball. It may be configured to display the characters "Insert up to 6" suggesting that. In this way, by notifying the player in advance of the type of jackpot game (variable hit or normal hit) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player will be motivated to accumulate reserved balls. can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 431A and 431B, the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is configured to be variable according to the prefetch result (information indicated by the winning command) of the held ball stored. It is The example shown in FIG. 432(A) is an example in which a girl character that is normally displayed when there are four held balls is displayed, and the example shown in FIG. 431(B) shows four. Shown is an example in which a special girl character different from the usual one is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the eye ball is memorized. there is Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery that determines the type of girl different from the normal time, and if the result of the look-ahead is a big hit or a super reach, the winning probability is set high. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the level of expectations for a big win based on the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, with reference to FIGS. 432(A) and 432(B), a description will be given of the display mode in the case where the number of pending prizes reaches the maximum value and then an over-win is made. In FIG. 432(A), when the number of pending items is stored up to the upper limit value, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C displays a balloon comment indicating that the number of pending items is the upper limit value. characters are displayed. Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. is displayed, and the characters "overflowed" are displayed to indicate that it has overflowed. In this way, in the event of overflow, frequent occurrence of overflow can be suppressed by informing the player of the occurrence of overflow in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, the type of character is changed and displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow. Depending on the type and the content of the comment, the result of the judgment of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, the look-ahead result of the stored held ball (such as the judgment result), and the current game state (normal game state or probability variable game state ) may be configured to notify the type. By constructing in this way, the player can enjoy various performances by playing the game while generating the overflow, and the player can generate the overflow which is disadvantageous to the player while enjoying it.

With reference to FIGS. 433(A) and 433(B), the display mode when the in-reach pending effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 433 (A), when the fluctuation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) to be the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 480) is executed, and by lottery When it is determined to execute the special holding effect, as shown in FIG. 433, when the ready-to-win display mode is set, the display mode of the pending effect during the reach is set. When the ready-to-reach suspension effect is executed, regardless of the number of suspended balls, the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and a balloon comment says, "Save up to 6. ' is displayed to suggest to the player to store 6 held balls while the reach is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 433(B), when accumulating up to 6 pending balls during the ready-to-win display, the even-numbered symbol “6” is advantageous to the player, and the odd-numbered symbol “7”, which is the symbol type, becomes advantageous. Displayed as variable. In addition, a girl character J1 displays a character "Well done" in a balloon, and the color of the sixth pending pattern is changed (eg, from blue to red). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the shooting of the game ball and play the game even during the ready-to-win, and the profit of the game parlor side can be increased.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls becomes the specified number (6 pieces), an example of changing the reach pattern is shown, but the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even number pattern is shown. In some cases, instead of changing the ready-to-win pattern to odd-numbered patterns, a performance of swimming a shoal of fish from right to left in the main display area DM is displayed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to perform an advance notice display suggesting the success/failure determination result such as "Congratulations".

With reference to FIGS. 434(A) and 434(B), the display mode of the lucky hold effect will be described. When a specific variation (variation that wins the advance notice lottery that executes the lucky suspension effect) is executed, the number of retained balls when the retained balls corresponding to the variation were stored in the previous big hit is remembered. 434(A) is displayed on the variable cover pattern P corresponding to the number of held balls, and corresponds to the mark pattern N6 of "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to store the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 434(B), when up to 6 reserved balls are memorized during the lucky reserved effect, the text "Well done" is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the main display area DM is displayed. A character (announcement display mode) indicating that a probability variation jackpot is given in a special pattern during fluctuation called "probability variation confirmation" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot game is achieved. In this control example, it is configured so that the main effect is executed in the case of a big hit. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and the expectation of a big win may be made.

In the lucky holding performance, when the holding ball stored in the variable cover pattern P (5 to 8 holding) wins, the number of the holding balls is stored, and the lucky prize is executed when the next big winning variation is executed. It is configured to appear as a pending number. By constructing in this manner, the player can be made aware of how many reserved numbers were stored when the previous big win occurred, and the player can keep the reserved numbers as large as possible and make the lucky reservation. A game can be played so that the performance can be easily executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 434 (A), the reserved design has a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved number of the first special design and the second special design) (the number of reservations at the time of winning: Figure 434) is assigned and displayed. When the reserved pattern is digested (variation of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern is started), the number of reserved patterns at the time of winning is slid to the reserved pattern display area with a lower fluctuation order (variable). is displayed with the same number. By configuring in this way, even when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to confirm the number of pending prizes at the time of the fluctuation.

In addition, in the event of a jackpot, the number of pending prizes for the jackpot game that is executed in the production during the jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production, etc.) is displayed by numbers, patterns, etc., and notified. It may be configured as

Next, with reference to FIGS. 435(A) to (B), a long-time winning (a winning game in which the electric accessory 640A is in an open state for a longer period of time than normal winning) is one of the winning types of normal symbols. ), the display mode of the holding effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 435(A), when the long-time winning game of the normal symbol is won and the long-time winning game is started, a comment "It's open" is displayed in the main display area DM. This display informs the player that a long-time winning game is being executed, and the player can receive the first ball entrance 64 or the right second entrance without shooting a game ball during the long-time winning game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the problem of missing an opportunity for a game ball to enter the ball opening 640R. In addition, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R during this long-time winning game, the reserved pattern corresponding to the entrance ball is black different from the normal time. It is displayed as a reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish between the held balls stored during a long-time game and the held balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 435(B), when the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols stored during the long winning game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronism. , A treasure chest pattern is displayed in the main display area DM, and the characters "If the treasure chest opens, it's a big chance!" It is suggested to the player that there is a high expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big win.

By constructing in this way, when a long-time hit of a normal symbol is executed, the performance of the reserved ball is varied, and a special performance is also executed during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. , the performance of the game can be greatly varied by executing the winning for a long time, and the game with freshness can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 425, the description continues. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed with the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the variability ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display is provided in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640A is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. As a result, the configuration is such that a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example. And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls that pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640R, but is three times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

A sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80. Inside the sorting device 700, game balls entering the opening 710A are alternately sorted by a sorting member 762 to A first ball entrance 64 and a second right ball entrance 640R are provided. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640R, the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Then, due to the turning on of the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch, the main controller 110 draws the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the display according to the lottery result is the second. It is indicated by the LED 37A of the 1-symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the right second ball entry hole 640R are also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, three prize balls are generated, and when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640R, four prize balls are generated as a prize for the right second ball entrance 640R. The number of balls may be set larger than the number of prize balls for the first ball entrance 64 .

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65A is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37A of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot of 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65A, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65A is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65A is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65A can be repeated the number of times set for the type of jackpot game to be executed (for example, 16 times (16 rounds) for jackpot A). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65A, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65A is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65A, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65A is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37A corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65A is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65A while the opening 65A is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65A are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 436). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 436) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 436, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 436 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 437, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the special winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, out (outside length A, outfall short A), reach out type), variation pattern selection and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 473). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special pattern 2 holding ball storage area 203B consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is provided respectively, and a special pattern holding common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the right second ball entrance 640R.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67 .

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 957), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-957. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 473).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (see FIG. 439(A)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is equal to the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202A is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (see FIG. 439(A)) for special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A for special symbol low probability (see FIG. 439(A)) are , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is out. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. . In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C". One of "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2" and "jackpot C" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 957. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the special symbol probability is low, and the random number "0 to 2" is a special symbol big winning random number table for when the probability is low. 202A. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 3 among the total number of random number values of 958, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "3/958".

On the other hand, there are 27 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot when the special symbol has a high probability, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 27 out of the total number of random numbers of 958, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "27/958".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. In order to prevent duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. And, as shown in FIG. 440(A), the jackpot type selection table 202D for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1 and the first A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2 referred to corresponding to the lottery of 2 special symbols is set respectively.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the lottery result in the variation is a jackpot, and the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A judgment value for matching (judging) with the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in association with the big winning type.

FIG. 440(B) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1, the jackpot type when the random number in the obtained special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "40 to 75", the jackpot type was "jackpot B1", and when the value was "76 to 79", the jackpot types were "jackpot B2" and "80 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot C" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is

In addition, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202D2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the variation of the second special symbol stops and the lottery result in the variation is a big hit. A determination value for collation (determination) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the jackpot type.

FIG. 440(C) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2, the jackpot type when the random number in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "40 to 87", the jackpot type was "jackpot B1", and when the value was "88 to 91", the jackpot types were "jackpot B2" and "92 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot C" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type to be selected when the determination result is a jackpot between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the player can choose between the first special pattern and the second special pattern. can be of interest in which of the lotteries is being run. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special pattern is set low, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot being selected is set higher than in the first special pattern, which is advantageous to the player. there is

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 A pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 473) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202B (see FIG. 438B) that stores the random value for determining the variation time of the pattern variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

As shown in FIG. 439 (B), the variation pattern selection table 202B includes a normal variation pattern selection table 202B1 used in the game state (normal game state) when the success/failure determination probability of normal symbols is low. , and time-saving variation pattern table 202B2 used in the game state (high-probability game state or time-saving game state) when the success/failure determination probability of normal symbols is high, respectively. Further details will be given in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio ramp control device 113, which will be described later. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, variation pattern selection table 202B used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 441 and 442. FIG. FIG. 441 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set for each of the variation patterns. A value of CS1 is assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202D by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 441, when the win/loss determination result is a win, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the number of retained balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of retained balls regardless of), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation NO1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "51 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected, and the variation When the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", the super reach jackpot B (variation NO3) is selected, and when the value of the change type counter CS1 is "160 to 198", the super reach jackpot C (variation NO4) is selected. selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 60”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation NO1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "61 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected, and the variation The super reach jackpot B (variation NO3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and the super reach jackpot C (variation NO4) is selected when the value of the change type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the super reach jackpot D (variation NO5) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 100", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach for "101 to 198" A jackpot E (fluctuation NO6) is selected.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach, which is a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 1 to 4, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation NO7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When normal reach out A (fluctuation NO8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is When super reach out A (fluctuation NO9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 5 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , short deviation A (variation No. 11) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (fluctuation NO8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "240 to 245", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 supersedes "0 to 198" When out-of-reach A (fluctuation NO9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "246 to 250", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the judgment is out, the number of held balls is small (if it is 1 to 4) and the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is set to be easily selected, so during that time the second By entering the game ball into the 1st ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R, it becomes easier for the ball to be held, and there is a period in which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (the lottery game is not performed. It is configured to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game due to the occurrence of a period. In addition, when the number of held balls is large, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low, when the number of held balls is large, normal reach and super reach are changed, so that the player can see the success judgment result. can be expected to be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 442, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202B2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202B2, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a win, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202D by the value of the special hit type counter C2 that has been acquired) is set. Further, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 442, when the win/loss determination result is a win, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the number of retained balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of retained balls regardless of), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation NO1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "91 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected, and the variation The super reach jackpot B (variation NO3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and the super reach jackpot C (variation NO4) is selected when the value of the change type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 100”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation NO1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "101 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100", the super reach jackpot A (variation NO2) is selected, and the variation When the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", the super reach jackpot B (variation NO3) is selected, and when the value of the change type counter CS1 is "160 to 198", the super reach jackpot C (variation NO4) is selected. selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the super reach jackpot D (variation NO5) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 100", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach for "101 to 198" A jackpot E (fluctuation NO6) is selected.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach, which is a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for 1 to 2 pending balls, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation NO7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When normal reach out A (fluctuation NO8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is When super reach out A (variation NO9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 199" for the number of held balls 3 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When normal reach out A (fluctuation NO8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198" When out-of-reach A (fluctuation NO9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "230 to 239", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the variation time (variation period) in the short deviation B variation pattern is set to 2000 MS (2 seconds), which is shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. there is As a result, when the result of the judgment is out, and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the out short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbols can be changed a lot in a short time. , the period until it is determined to be a big win (the period between big wins) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the normal winning random number table 202C (see FIG. 439 (C)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number set by the normal winning random number table 202C matches, it is determined as a normal symbol winning. In addition, the normal winning random number table 202C (see FIG. 439(C)) is for when the probability of normal symbols is low (period in which normal symbols are in a normal state), and when the probability of winning normal symbols is lower than when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently. Further, as for the types of normal symbol wins, normal wins and long-time wins are set, and the values of the normal win random number counter C4 are set respectively.

Here, the normal winning of the normal symbol is in the normal game state (low probability game state), and in the jackpot game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640A to the open state with the opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the time saving period, during the probability variable period, the operation of opening the electric accessory 640A in the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time win is a win in which the action of opening the electric accessory 640A for 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the game state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640A that is executed in the probability variable period during the time saving in the normal winning and the opening operation in the long winning are set to be the same. may be opened. Specifically, for example, the open state operation may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the ball more into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R during a long winning period, and during the normal game, the variation in the second special symbol is possible. The execution of the display can be facilitated, and the player can enjoy the change of the game presentation by the variable display of the second special pattern in which the advance notice display with freshness is displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 439(C), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained is any one of 5 to 6, the normal winning of the normal symbol is determined to be Also, if it is one of 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a long time hit of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the value of the obtained normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal winning of the normal design. In addition, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the long-time hit of the normal pattern is not set. The hit is substantially the same as the long time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640A is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the players and increase the profit of the game parlor. On the other hand, during the short time period and the variable period with high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640A to operate can be given with a probability of “1/1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance It is possible to increase the chance of entering the 640R. Therefore, it is possible to suppress consumption of game balls by the player and set a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can spend more time playing the game.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal patterns, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the variable normal patterns. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , the symbol "○" is illuminated. Then, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640A is opened (opening operation) only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal winning. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640A is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times". Also, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second ball entrance 640R is opened only "2 seconds×2 times" as a long win.

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202C for high probability (see FIG. 439(C)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , and the electric accessory 640A is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds. Since the open period becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time -> 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the right second ball entrance 640R is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 461). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 473).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 436, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 437, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 473) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 472) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 471) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 438(A), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 contains the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202A (see FIG. 439), variation pattern selection table 202B (see FIG. 439(B)), In addition to the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439(C)) and the jackpot type selection table 202D (see FIGS. 440(A) to (C)), a winning command table 202E is set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, etc., in addition to the above.

FIG. 443 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202E. The winning command table 202E is determined in the pre-reading process (Z320: FIG. 467) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the determination results such as the variation pattern selected at the start of variation of the stored held balls are determined. It is a table for determining a winning command corresponding to a result. As shown in FIG. 443, when the result of the lottery in the look-ahead is a big win, a winning command corresponding to the determined big win type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. Thereby, not only the variation pattern type and the success/failure determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202E as a failure for each of the fluctuation pattern types of long loss A, short loss A, and short loss B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 438(B), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F, open number counter 203G, long open flag 203I, short time counter 203J, variable execution It has a flag 203K, a variable probability flag 203M, a mid-jackpot flag 203N, a fluctuation order storage area 203P, and a memory area 203Z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 ~ C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see Z305 in FIG. 466). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see Z206 in FIG. 462).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (holding number of times N of variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z207 in FIG. 462 and Z306 in FIG. 466). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the right second ball entrance 640R, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, whenever the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the displayed number of held balls deviates from the displayed actual number of held balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area DS1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203F counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( (See Z504 in FIG. 470). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 468).

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times M of variation display in normal symbols is reserved) is less than 4, the value of the normal random number counter C4. is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C (Z505 in FIG. 470). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C (Fig. 470 Z503: NO).

The number-of-opening counter 203G is a counter for counting the number of times the electric accessory 64C is opened. The opening time counter 203H is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64C.

The long time open flag 203I is a flag indicating that the long time is in progress. This long time open flag 203I is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal design fluctuation start process (Z408: FIG. 469) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol variation process (Z106: Figure 468), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game is executed for a long time, the variation of the next normal symbol is started is set to off).

The time-saving medium counter 203J is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203J is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203J is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203J during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203J.

The variation execution flag 203K is a flag for identifying whether the variation of the first special symbol is to be performed or the variation of the second special symbol is to be performed. In this control example, the variation is started according to the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second right ball entrance 640R (the order of being held and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol stops and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (Z204: FIG. 463) Based on the order data of reserved storage stored in the fluctuation order storage area 203P described later, it is determined whether the next stored fluctuation is the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 463, and the corresponding variation execution flag 203K is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 463).

The probability variation flag 203M is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This variable probability flag 203M is, in the processing of Z1113 in the jackpot control processing (Z1104: FIG. 474) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot A ( Z1111: NO), it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of Z220 in the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 462) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when stopping the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit.

The jackpot flag 203N is a flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game. This jackpot middle flag 203N is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 462) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of Z1114 of the jackpot control processing (Z256: FIG. 474) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game end timing comes.

The change order storage area 203P is an area for storing the reservation order when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640R and is stored as a reserved ball. In this control example, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. In addition, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640R, fluctuations are started in the order that is reserved and stored. As a result, even in the variation of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately executed, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203Z, flags, counters, storage data, etc. necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 are set, but the details thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65A. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 471) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112A so that when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot a ball, the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The sphere firing unit 112A has a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51B for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 444(A), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222A, a pending change selection table 222B, a pending effect mode selection table 222C, a pending lid range selection table 222D, and a pending lid command selection table. Table 222E, pending lid color change selection table 222F, lucky pending command table 222G, background mode selection table 222H, pending character selection table 222I, pending character change table 222J, balloon selection table 222K, ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222M, ready-to-reach start time A calculation table 222N and a lucky reservation lottery table 222P are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222A is a selection table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The pending change selection table 222B determines whether or not to variably display the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the content of the change. 2 is a selection table for obtaining a valid pending change value;

FIG. 445(A) schematically shows the contents of this pending change selection table 222B. In the pending change selection table 222B, the value of the effect counter 223H is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the display of changing the pending pattern of the sub-display area DS according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223H. A mode (see FIG. 429(A)) and a pending change value are set. In addition, the acquired suspension change value will be described in detail in a suspension effect mode selection table 222C, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the prize winning command type is out, when the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved pattern is not changed from the normal reserved pattern. is determined and the pending change value gets zero. When the value of the production counter 223H is any one of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from the white circle pattern (normal reserved pattern display mode) to the blue circular pattern (change A). and the pending change value gets 1.

When the winning command type is out of normal reach, when the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 50", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "51-100", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any one of "101 to 198", it is decided to change the white circular pattern to a green circular pattern and display it, and 2 is obtained as the pending change value.

If the winning command type is out of super reach, if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 30", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "31-90", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any of "91-198", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2;

When the winning command type is the normal reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 20", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "21-90", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any of "91-198", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2;

When the winning command type is the super ready-to-win jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 10", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere from "11 to 100", change A is determined and the pending change value gets one. If it is anywhere from "101 to 189", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2; If it is any one of "190 to 198", it is decided to change the white circle pattern to a red circle pattern and display it, and 3 is acquired as the pending change value.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved pattern is changed and displayed according to the contents thereof, so that not only the special pattern being changed but also the reserved pattern being displayed are reserved and stored. It is possible to predict the success/failure determination result corresponding to the reserved design. In addition, since it is possible to inform the player in advance that the ready-to-win display mode will be displayed when the variable display is performed by the change B, even if the special symbol is in the state before the change, it is possible to hold and store it. In this case, the player can expect that the variation will start, and even if the variation of the special symbol that is to be missed is executed during that time, it is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, even the same hold change can be developed into a ready-to-win production through different execution productions, and an unexpected production can attract the player. It is possible to attract.

The pending effect mode selection table 222C is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the pending changes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

FIG. 445(B) schematically shows the contents of this pending effect mode selection table 222C. In the pending effect mode selection table 222C, the pending effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the pending change value acquired in the pending change selection table 222B (see Z2404 in FIG. 484). Specifically, when the pending change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. The normal mode is when all the reserved patterns being displayed are not changed (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the interval between the reserved patterns and the variable lid pattern P is one. This is a variable display mode (see FIG. 428(B)).

When the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. Notice A mode is when any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the pending pattern being displayed (state), and if the number of pending balls is 4 or more, This is a holding effect mode in which the pattern and the display range of the variable lid pattern P are displayed without a gap (see FIG. 429(A)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 429(A) is not a display mode representing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of a pending effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the advance notice A mode, the contents of the displayed comment are different from those in the state of FIG. 429(A). In the advance notice A mode, when the reserved ball is generated after the reserved pattern whose color is changed and the reserved pattern is displayed, one variable lid pattern P is also hidden accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 429 (A) By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from , the variable cover pattern P with the letter 5 is hidden), and the comment indicating the expectation of the big hit for the reserved pattern with the variable color Display is performed by a callout. In this way, in the advance notice A mode, after the colors of the reserved symbols are changed, the game is played so as to generate the reserved balls. It is configured to inform the degree of expectation of.

When the pending change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the pending effect mode. Notice B mode is when there is a change in the reserved pattern being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, any change in the reserved pattern being displayed (Change A , change B, or change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P is displayed without a gap. Or (see FIG. 429(A)), it is a mode in which a reserved design is displayed on the display range of the variable cover design P (see FIG. 429(B)).

By configuring in this way, not only the color of the reserved design can be changed, but also the display range of the variable cover design P can be changed in various ways according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls. It is possible to spread the enjoyment of playing and attract players. In addition, unlike the advance notice A mode, it is a holding effect that allows the player to continue the game so as not to generate any more holding balls. Expectations can be heightened by concentrating on the start of the variation (dynamic display) of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The reserved lid range selection table 222D includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring the reserved lid range value necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third pattern display device 81. is set.

Here, the special effects performed during the normal mode will be explained. In the normal mode, as special effects, a short-term winning effect, a reach pending effect, and a lucky pending effect are provided.

The short-term prize-winning effect is a effect that is executed when the required time from when the number of reserved balls is 0 to when the number of reserved balls becomes 1 and when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the interval between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is set to be one reserved ball (the reserved lid pattern P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. The number of reserved lid symbols P is changed and displayed so that the interval between the reserved lid symbols P and the reserved symbols is two, and a girl character J0 indicating a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production in which the comment "It's early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), and the value of the number of pending balls has changed from 0 to 1 or more. , the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 1 (see Z2425 in FIG. 485) when the number of reserved balls reaches 4 before the short-term prize winning timer 223Q for measuring the elapsed time passes 5 seconds. ) and start execution (see FIG. 430(A)), and when the short-term prize winning timer 223Q has passed 5 seconds, the special effect status storage area is set to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 488), and the effect to end the execution is.

Retention production during reach is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play the game so that the number of reservations is accumulated to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 433 (A)) while the reach is fluctuating. . In this ready-to-reach pending effect, when the variation type is ready-to-win, whether or not to execute is selected based on a ready-to-win effect lottery table 222M to be described later, and when execution becomes possible, the ready-to-win start time calculation to be described later is performed. The value of the pending effect start timer 223R, which is set based on the variation type by the table 222N, becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, and at the timing when the ready-to-win effect starts, another special effect is executed. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), the special effect status storage area is set to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 480) to start execution (see FIG. 433 (A)), and the It is a production that ends when the fluctuation ends.

Lucky reservation effect is to store the number of reservations when the reserved balls (reserved patterns) are stored (displayed), and when it becomes a big hit (specific judgment result), the reserved ball that has become a big hit A predetermined mark pattern (see FIG. 434 (A)) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time the ball enters the entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to that mark pattern. This is an effect for displaying a notice display mode for prompting the player to play the game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark pattern, as shown in FIG. 434(B), by pressing the frame button 22, the current game state (probability variable game state (special game state) or low probability game An effect to notify the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky reservation performance, when other special performances are not executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223N is 0), and a big win is achieved as a result of the success/failure determination of the start prize in the past, the value of the number of pending balls is determined. is greater than or equal to 5, a lottery is drawn based on a lucky reservation lottery table 222P to be described later to determine whether or not execution is possible. , the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 479) to start execution (see FIG. 434(A)) and end at the start of the next variation.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no change in the hold, the hold effect related to the hold design can be set according to the time interval between the start winning prizes, the number of pending balls during reach fluctuation, and the result of winning or failing determination due to the past start winning prizes. Various presentations can be provided depending on the stored content and the like, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 446(A) is a diagram showing the structure of the reserved lid range selection table 222D. The reservation cover range selection table 222D includes a normal reservation cover range selection table 222D1, a notice A mode reservation cover range selection table 222D2, a notice B mode reservation cover range selection table 222D3, a short-term winning reservation cover range selection table 222D4, and a ready-to-win effect. A reservation lid range selection table 222D5 and a time saving reservation lid range selection table 222D6 are provided.

The normal pending lid range selection table 222D1 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 446(B) schematically shows the contents of the normal reservation lid range selection table 222D1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222D1, the reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), and the game state is the normal state (low probability game state (the jackpot probability is low probability and non-time saving In the case of acquiring the pending lid range value in the game state)) (see Z2354 in FIG. 481), and during the lucky pending effect (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3), the pending lid range value is acquired (FIG. 481 (see Z2346 of )).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", 2 is obtained as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "1", 0 is obtained as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The notice A mode pending lid range selection table 222D2 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the prior notice A mode. FIG. 446(C) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice A mode reservation lid range selection table 222D2. In the advance notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222D2, the reserved lid range value is obtained (see Z2351 in FIG. 481) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "4", 4 is obtained as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "2", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The notice B mode pending lid range selection table 222D3 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the prior notice B mode.

FIG. 446(D) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice B-mode reserved lid range selection table 222D3. In the advance notice B-mode reservation lid range selection table 222D3, a reservation lid range value is acquired (see Z2349 in FIG. 481) for the value (range) of the number of reservation balls and the value (range) of the reservation advance notice counter.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the value of the pending lid range value of 4 is obtained when the value of the pending notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of pending balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the pending notice counter is "1 to 4", 4 is acquired as the pending lid range value, and the value of the pending notice counter is "5". In this case, 3 is acquired as the holding lid range value, and 2 is acquired as the holding lid range value when the value of the holding notice counter is "6", and when the value of the holding notice counter is "7", 1 is acquired as the pending lid range value, and 0 is acquired as the pending lid range value when the value of the pending notice counter is "8".

The short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222D4 (FIG. 447(A)) is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 447(A) schematically shows the contents of the short-term prize winning lid range selection table 222D4. In the short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222D4, the pending lid range value is acquired (see Z2342 in FIG. 481) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "4", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", 1 is obtained as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The during-reach effect pending lid range selection table 222D5 is a table used for acquiring the pending lid range value in the case of the during-reach pending effect. FIG. 447(B) schematically shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222D5. In the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222D5, the pending lid range value is obtained (see Z2344 in FIG. 481) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "0 to 8", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The reservation lid range selection table 222D6 for time reduction is not in execution (the value of the special production status storage area 223N is 0). ) is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value.

FIG. 447(C) schematically shows the contents of the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222D6. In the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222D6, a reservation lid range value is obtained (see Z2353 in FIG. 481) for the value (range) of the number of reservation balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "0 to 6", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", 0 is obtained as the retained lid range value.

By configuring in this way, the display range of the variable lid pattern P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the winning/failure determination at the time of starting winning and the holding effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a production effect that enhances participation by using.

The reserved lid command selection table 222E sets the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area DS of the third pattern display device 81 from the reserved lid range value acquired in the reserved lid range selection table 222D. is a table used to select commands for

FIG. 448(A) schematically shows the contents of the reserved lid command selection table 222E. The reserved lid command selection table 222E sets the reserved lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the reserved lid range value (range) acquired from the reserved lid range selection table 222D.

Specifically, when the reserve lid range value is "0", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes the shortest display (see FIG. 432(A)). When the reserve lid range value is "1", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 1 (only the reserve 8 area). When the reserve lid range value is "2", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 2 (reserved 7 to 8 area (see FIG. 430(A))). When the pending lid range value is "3", the pending lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 3 (reserved 6 to 8 areas (see FIG. 431(A))). When the reserve lid range value is "4", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 4 (area from reserve 5 to 8 (see FIG. 429A)).

The setting of the reserve lid command is performed in the reserve lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the prize command reception process (Z2209) at the time of start winning, and in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting a display reserved lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 481) based on the reserved lid range value every time the number of reserved balls changes.

The reservation lid color change selection table 222F is for the instructed number (in the example shown in FIG. 429A, 4) is a data table for determining the reserved lid pattern P corresponding to the area where the reserved pattern is displayed when the reserved ball is generated. The reserved lid pattern P determined by the reserved lid color change selection table 222F is normally (normally, it has a black frame and a transparent white inside, and a number indicating the number of reservations corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside. Display mode) is changed to a specific color (internal color is green with transparency). In the reserved cover color change selection table 222F, the secondary display of the third design display device 81 is performed based on the reserved notice counter 223G for recognizing the display position of the reserved design whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of reserved balls. It is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the reserved cover design P displayed in the area DS.

FIG. 448(B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved lid color change selection table 222F. The reservation cover color change selection table 222F specifies a color change range for the value (range) of the reservation notice counter 223G and the value (range) of the number of reservation balls when the reservation effect mode is the notice B mode. set a hold lid command (see Z2348 in FIG. 481) for changing the display range of the variable lid pattern P from the normal white display mode to green according to the change range (see (B) in FIG. 429). do.

Specifically, if the value of the pending notice counter 223G is any one of "0 to 4", if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the pending lid command is Not set, no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area of the number of reserved balls of 5. When the value of the number of retained balls is "6", BF11 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 5 to 6 retained balls. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", the retained lid command is determined to be BF12, and the range of 5 to 7 retained balls is designated as the color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", BF13 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 5 to 8 retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223G is "5", when the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of retained balls is "6", BF21 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 6 to 7 retained balls. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", BF22 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 6 to 8 retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223G is "6", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "6", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area of the number of reserved balls of 7. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", BF31 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of seven to eight retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223G is "7", when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the pending notice counter 223G is "8", when the value of the number of pending balls is "8", the pending lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, by varying the display mode in an area different from the reserved symbols varied by the determination of the winning/failure determination result in the previous winning (pre-reading determination), it is possible to further increase the attention of the player. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is to be increased depending on whether or not to stop the launching, thereby making it possible to widely enjoy the state of the reserved symbols and the subsequent fluctuation notice effect.

The lucky reservation command table 222G is a table for selecting a command for varying the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 based on the target number of reserved balls.

FIG. 449 schematically shows the contents of the lucky pending command table 222G. In the lucky reserve command table 222G, when the lucky reserve effect is being performed, the region of the number of reserved balls to be targeted is stored by the lucky reserve storage value 223P, and the display reserve lid command is set based on the value (Fig. 479). (see Z2306 of ).

Specifically, when the lucky reserved storage value 223P is 5, the reserved lid command FB50 is determined, and the area of 5 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled. When the lucky reserved storage value 223P is 6, the reserved lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of 6 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled (see FIG. 434(A)). When the lucky reserved storage value 223P is 7, the reserved lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of 7 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved storage value 223P is 8, the reserved lid command FB53 is determined, and the area of 8 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by announcing the number of pending balls that resulted in a big win in the previous start-up prize, the interest in the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of pending balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. It is possible to work to encourage the player to win a prize, and to realize an effect that improves the operation.

The background mode selection table 222H is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223I. FIG. 450(A) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222H. The background mode selection table 222H selects the background mode for the value of the background mode storage area 223I.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 0, background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 1, background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 2, background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223I is 3, background D (city background) is determined. .

The reserved character selection table 222I selects the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the reserved effect mode, and the effect counter 223H. It is a table for selecting (determining) by

FIG. 450B schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222I. The pending character selection table 222I selects pending characters for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223I, the pending effect mode stored in the pending effect mode storage area 223M, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H. is set (see Z2363 in FIG. 482). The reserved characters are J0 a girl with short hair (see FIG. 428(B)), J1 a girl with tied hair (see FIG. 431(A)), and J2 a girl with long hair (see FIG. 431(B)). ), and J3 is a blond girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", when the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 428(B)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 431(A)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 431(B)) is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character when the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 50". If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is one of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 150". In either case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character when the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 50". If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, depending on the difference between the suspension production mode and the background that have changed since the start winning, by determining the suspension characters with high expectations, the display mode of the suspension production with high expectations can be displayed without spoiling the atmosphere of the background production. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize the announcement with high expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbols and the change of the reserved character.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of jackpot hits, the number of times super reach is executed, and the patterns and characters to which the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game performance are acquired. It is also possible to store history information such as the number of points obtained by , and change the character to be selected in consideration of the history information. By configuring in this way, the more the game is played, the more the character to be selected can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Also, an RTC (real time clock) may be provided so that the selected character can be changed according to the date and time information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the selected character according to the passage of time after the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game.

The pending character change table 222J changes the content of the pending character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area DS of the third pattern display device 81 into the background, pending effect mode, current pending character, and effect counter 223H. Table for selection based on

FIG. 451 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222J. The suspended character selection table 222I includes the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223I, the suspended performance mode stored in the suspended performance mode storage area 223M, the current suspended character in the display mode, and the value of the performance counter 223H. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of reserved character is selected when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit and the start prize is won and the prize is exceeded (Z2366: YES), and the character command for display is set (see Z2267 in Fig. 482). . Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. (Variable) It becomes a mode that does not.

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current pending character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223H is " 0 to 180”, J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 432(B)) is determined and changed as the pending character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the pending effect mode is either "Notice A" or "Notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 80" , J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

If the background mode is one of "background B", "background C", or "background D", if the pending effect mode is "normal mode", if the current pending character is "J0" , if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the pending effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 50" , J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means of confirming the winning result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and the interest in the game can be increased. can. In addition, the pending characters to be changed are set to characters with higher expectations after the change than before the change, and if the pending production mode is other than normal mode, the percentage of pending characters to be changed is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the pending effect mode, the player can have a means of knowing the result of the win/fail judgment through the means of intentionally generating an over-winning, and it is possible to provide a game feature that enhances the operation. becomes.

The balloon selection table 222K includes a plurality of data tables for setting the balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 429A) displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

FIG. 452(A) is a diagram showing the structure of the balloon selection table 222K. The speech balloon selection table 222K includes a normal speech balloon selection table 222K1, a notice A speech balloon selection table 222K2, a notice B speech balloon selection table 222K3, a short-term winning speech balloon selection table 222K4, a reach performance speech balloon selection table 222K5, a lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222K6, A time saving balloon selection table 222K7 is provided. The content of the speech balloon to be set is the content of the comment displayed by the reserved character in the character display area C. FIG.

The normal balloon selection table 222K1 is when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 428(B)), and the game state is the normal state. , is a table used to acquire balloon contents.

FIG. 452B schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222K1. In the normal balloon selection table 222K1, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2393 in FIG. 483) for the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is not acquired (see FIG. 428 (B)), and the value of the number of pending balls is "5". If the value of the number of pending balls is "6", two more balloons are acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 432(A)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The notice A balloon selection table 222K2 is a table used for acquiring the content of the notice balloon when the suspension effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 429(A)).

FIG. 452(C) schematically shows the contents of the announcement A balloon selection table 222K2. In the announcement A balloon selection table 222K2, balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the result of determination of whether the winning information command is correct.

Specifically, if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 3", the content of the balloon is not acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "4", the result of the judgment is not obtained. In the case of winning, heart-pounding balloon contents are acquired, and in the case of losing, heart-pounding balloon contents are acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is expected to be obtained when the result of the judgment is a win, and the content of the balloon is expected to be obtained when the result is a loss. When the value of the number of pending balls is "6", if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the content of the balloon is the expected degree of 70%? is acquired, and if it is out of line, the content of the balloon is the expected degree of 60%? is obtained. When the value of the number of pending balls is "7", if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the content of the balloon is the expectation level of 80%? is obtained, and if it is out of line, the content of the balloon is the expected level of 70%? is obtained. If the value of the number of pending balls is "8", and if the result of the win/fail judgment is hit, the contents of the balloon will be intense heat! is obtained, and if it is out, what happens to the speech bubble content! is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222K2 refers to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the winning information command determination result, as well as the value (range) of the effect counter 223H, and selects the contents of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as an effect to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222K3 is a table used for acquiring the contents of the notice balloon when the suspension effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 429(B)).

FIG. 452(D) schematically shows the contents of the announcement B balloon selection table 222K3. In the announcement B balloon selection table 222K3, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2388 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the pending effect counter.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is acquired as is (see FIG. 429(A)), and the value of the number of pending balls is "5". In the case of , if the value of the pending effect counter is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is OVER (see FIG. 429 (B)) is acquired, and the value of the pending effect counter is "5" If the value of the number of pending balls is "6", if the value of the pending effect counter is any of "0 to 5", the content of the balloon is OVER. When the value of the pending effect counter is "6", STOP is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the value of the pending effect counter is "0 to 6". In either case, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon, and STOP is determined as the content of the balloon if the value of the pending effect counter is "7", and if the value of the number of pending balls is "8", , MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the prize winning when the change in the highly anticipated reserved pattern occurs by the content of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls is increased by continuing the hitting from the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the determination as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the generation of useless launches, and make it possible to play the game efficiently. Moreover, even when a change in the highly anticipated reserved symbol occurs, the setting of the content of the balloon may be changed to continue the ejection.

The short-term winning balloon selection table 222K4 is a table used to acquire the contents of balloons in the case of short-term winning (see FIG. 430(A)).

FIG. 453(A) schematically shows the contents of the short-term prize balloon selection table 222K4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222K4, balloon contents are acquired (see Z2382 in FIG. 483) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! (See FIG. 430(A)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! is acquired and the value of the number of pending balls is "6", the content of the balloon is very fast! is acquired, and the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! ! is acquired and the value of the number of pending balls is "8", the content of the balloon is fast! ! ! is obtained.

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the extent to which the interval between the start prizes is short and the number of reserved balls has increased greatly by the balloon of the reserved character, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222K5 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon during the ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 433(A)).

FIG. 453(B) schematically shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222K5. In the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222K5, balloon contents are obtained (Z2384 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the pending effect counter and the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the pending effect counter is "0", if the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the contents of the balloon are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 433(A)) is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", OK is acquired for the balloon content, and "7-8 , if the value of the pending effect counter 223H is "other than 0", if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4" , Save up to 6 balloon contents! is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is acquired (see FIG. 433(B)) and "7 8”, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the suspended character during the ready-to-win production, it is possible to encourage the launch when the number of pending balls is small, and in the ready-to-win production during the pending production, the balloon is changed. You can play the game without getting bored by changing it.

The lucky pending balloon selection table 222K6 is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the lucky pending effect (see FIG. 434(A)).

FIG. 454(A) schematically shows the contents of the reserved lucky balloon selection table 222K6. In the lucky reserved balloon selection table 222K6, a value corresponding to the reserved ball number is set as the number of lucky reserved balls (refer to Z2444 of Z268) when the result of winning in the past is a big win. , the value (range) of the number of retained balls, and the value (range) of the retained change value (Z2386 in FIG. 483).

Specifically, when the value of the lucky pending storage value 223P is "5", if the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the pending change value is "0 to 3". In either case, the content of the balloon is acquired as aiming for 5, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "5", if the value of the pending change is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, If the hold change value is one of "1 to 2", the content of the balloon is acquired as GOOD, and if the hold change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired as well, and the number of pending balls is any of "6 to 8", and if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the balloon content.

If the value of the reserved lucky memory value 223P is "6", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any one of "0 to 5", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the balloon is aimed at 6 (see FIG. 434(A)) is acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "6", if the value of the pending change is "0", the content of the balloon is OK. If the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the content of the balloon is determined to be GOOD, and if the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired, If the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "7 to 8" and if the value of the pending change is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the reserved stored lucky value 223P is "7", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any one of "0 to 6", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the speech balloon is acquired as aiming for 7, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2”, the content of the balloon is GOOD, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is “Good job” and the value of the number of pending balls is “8”. ', if the pending change value is any of '0 to 3', OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the reserved lucky memory value 223P is "8", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 7", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the balloon is acquired as aiming for 8, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "8", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2”, the content of the speech balloon is acquired as GOOD, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired as well done.

In this way, by changing the contents of the balloon according to the difference in the number of reserved lucky balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to win. When the lottery result hits a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 reserved balls, the result of judging whether or not the number of reserved balls thus started winning a prize is a big hit, the display mode of the lucky reservation can be updated without getting bored. You can continue playing.

The time-saving balloon selection table 222K6 indicates that the special performance is not being executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223N is 0), the pending performance mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving medium counter is other than 0). This is a table used to acquire balloon contents.

FIG. 454(B) schematically shows the time saving balloon selection table 222K7. In the time saving balloon selection table 222K7, the content of the balloon is acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 483) with respect to the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 5", the content of the balloon is obtained up to 6 (see FIG. 430 (B)), and the number of pending balls is "6 to 7". In either case, OK is obtained for the content of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the optimum number of reserved balls during time saving, and the player can grasp the transition state of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If you can maintain the optimum number of balls on hold, you can avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the time is inefficient due to the standby state, and the occurrence of over-winning when the number of balls on hold exceeds the upper limit of the number of balls held. It can be used as a criterion for determining whether a game can be played efficiently.

The during-reach effect lottery table 222M is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the pending display effect during reach displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 433(A)).

FIG. 455(A) schematically shows the contents of the in-reach effect lottery table 222M. The during-reach effect lottery table 222M determines whether or not the during-reach pending effect can be executed with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H. (See Z2324 in FIG. 480) Specifically, when the value of the number of balls held is one of "0 to 3", when the value of the production counter 223H is "0 to 99", during reach The pending effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", it is possible to display the pending effect during reach. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "4 to 5", when the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 140", the pending effect during reach is not displayed, and "141 to 199" is displayed. , it is possible to display a reach pending effect. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "6 to 8", and when the value of the effect counter 223H is "0 to 199", the pending effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of display of the pending performance during reach when the number of pending balls is small, an effect is executed to urge the player to save the pending when the pending is small.

The ready-to-win start time calculation table 222N is a ready-to-win display mode (a display mode in which symbols in the left and right symbol columns are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the same third symbol) to be executed. It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) to start the pending effect during reach in the time (period) to be the display mode. In the ready-to-win start time calculation table 222N, a holding effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the ready-to-reach holding effect (see FIG. 433(A)) acquired by the ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222M and the variation type.

FIG. 455(B) schematically shows the contents of this reach start time calculation table 222N. The ready-to-win start time calculation table 222N sets the pending effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the ready-to-reach pending effect acquired by the ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222M can be executed (Fig. 480 (see Z2326 of ).

Specifically, when the fluctuation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000 MS, and when the fluctuation type is the super reach jackpot A, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000 MS, When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000 MS, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 12000 MS, and the variation type is super. When the ready-to-win jackpot D is reached, 12000 MS is determined for the pending performance start timer, and when the variation type is the super ready-to-win jackpot E, the suspended performance start timer is determined to be 20000 MS and the variation type is the normal reach deviation A.例文帳に追加In this case, 10000 MS is determined for the pending effect start timer, and 10000 MS is determined for the pending effect start timer when the variation type is out of normal reach B, and when the variation type is out of normal reach C, the pending effect A starting timer of 10000 MS is determined.

The lucky reservation lottery table 222P acquires whether or not the lucky reservation effect (see FIG. 434(A)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223H. FIG. 455(C) schematically shows the contents of this lucky reservation lottery table 222P. In the lucky reservation lottery table 222P, whether or not the lucky reservation effect can be executed is acquired (see Z2304 in FIG. 479) with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223H.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "0 to 2", and when the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 99", the lucky pending effect is executed. is not performed, and if the value is any one of "100 to 199", execution of the lucky holding effect becomes possible. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "3 to 4" and when the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 189", the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed, and " 190 to 199", it is possible to execute the lucky holding effect. If the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "5 to 8", and if the value of the effect counter 223H is any of "0 to 199", the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed. In this way, by setting the ratio of the lucky reservation effect to be high when the number of reserved balls is small, an effect is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls when the number of reserved balls is small.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 444(B), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B, a fluctuation start flag 223D, and a stop type selection flag 223E. , winning information storage area 223F, pending notice counter 223G, effect counter 223H, background mode storage area 223I, SW effective time counter 223K, pending effect mode storage area 223M, special effect status storage area 223N, lucky pending storage value 223P, short-term winning At least a timer 223Q, a pending effect start timer 223R, a sensor effective time counter 223S, a touch counter 223T, and a memory area 223Z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203E is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B (see Z2207 in FIG. 477). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223A of the audio lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223A The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223B is displayed in the sub display area DS of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area DS of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223D is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 478), and the third symbol. It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 487). When the fluctuation start flag 223D is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (Z2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 476), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223E is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 4770), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see Z2506 in FIG. 487). When the stop type selection flag 223E is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223F includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223F. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, in the main control device 110, based on various information obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting winning prize is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B in the various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command; various types of information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223F when the winning information command is received; A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223F is properly stored.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F.

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F, setting of an effect mode such as a change of the display color of the pending symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, various effects (read-ahead effects) are executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F, so that the player can see each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The reserved notice counter 223G changes the reserved number when the reserved color of the reserved symbol displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed (the display position of the reserved symbol whose reserved color has changed due to the digestion of the reserved ball). (Also changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color has been changed. The value of the pending notice counter 223G is 0 in the winning command receiving process (see Z2209 in FIG. 484) executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. If there is (Z2403: YES), the pending change value obtained from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: NO) If there is a change in the pending symbol (see FIG. 429 (A) ), the reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 484). For example, as shown in FIG. 429(A), when the value of the number of pending balls at the start winning is 4, the pending notice counter 223G is set to 4. The set pending notice counter 223G is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) executed at the start of fluctuation, and the subtracted value was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), by setting 0 to the pending change value and clearing the pending effect mode storage area (Z2226), the above-described pending effect mode is set to the normal mode.

The effect counter 223H is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 in the range from 0 to 198 and updated repeatedly. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223H include a pending change selection table 222B, a pending character selection table 222I (holding character), a pending character change table 222J (holding character), a reach There are an effect lottery table 222M (whether or not a reach pending effect is executable) and a lucky reserve lottery table 222P (whether or not a lucky hold effect is executable), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223H.

Also, when making these selections, in order to avoid synchronizing the update period of the effect counter 223H and other counters and timer values, the update range is set to a prime number (199), and the selection results are limited to I try not to be biased towards the selection results.

The background mode storage area 223I is a storage area in which numerical values necessary for distinguishing the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored. As for the switching of the background display mode, it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) whether it is in a standby state in which a demo screen is displayed (Z2801), and if it is determined to be in a standby state (Z2801: YES). , it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: YES), 1 is added to the contents of the background mode storage area 223I and set (Z2804). Then, a display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. For the background images, different background images recognizable by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountains, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW valid time counter 223K is a counter for counting the valid time (valid period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanying the depression of the frame button 22 performed during the fluctuation of the special symbols. In the SW valid time counter 223K, when the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is 0 (Z2801: NO) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), a variation pattern accompanying pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed. If set (Z2803: YES), SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set variation pattern. If the set SW valid time counter 223K is not 0 (Z2801: YES), the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is subtracted (Z2802), and if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: YES), the SW If the value of the valid time counter 223K is not 0 (Z2806: YES), if the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: YES), the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is reset (set to 0), and the notice display command for display is issued. is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The pending performance mode storage area 223M stores information for determining a plurality of pending preliminary announcement modes prepared according to the pending change when executing the preliminary announcement performance related to the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. remembered.

The pending effect mode storage area 223M is stored when the pending notice counter 223G is 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. In the case (Z2403: YES), the pending effect mode is set (Z2404) by the value (range) of the pending change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3" advance notice B mode is set.

The content of the pending effect mode storage area 223M is the value of the pending notice counter 223G that is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the variation pattern receiving process (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) executed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the pending effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting 0 to the pending change value and clearing the pending effect mode storage area 223M (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223N stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the pending effect mode is the normal mode. The special effects include, as described above, a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 430(A)), a ready-to-win pending effect (see FIG. 433(A)), and a lucky pending effect (see FIG. 434(A)). Yes, and a special effect is executed according to the change in the special effect status storage area 223N. Incidentally, the special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

The short-term winning effect is performed when the game state is normal (Z2421: YES) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0. Yes (Z2422: YES), the number of reserved balls in the special design is 4 (Z2423: YES), and the short-term winning timer that counts the time (5 seconds) generated from the time when the number of reserved balls in the special design is 0 is other than 0 (Z2424: YES), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2425), and the execution of the short-term winning effect is started. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, in the short-term winning management process (Z2111), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2604: YES) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: YES) , the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

Reach suspension production is performed when the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach suspension performance setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. When (Z2321: YES), when the pending effect mode is normal mode (Z2322: YES), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2323: YES), by the reach during effect lottery table 222M When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: YES), the pending effect start timer 223R is set based on the variation type (Z2326), and the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 2 (Z2327). With the passage of time, when the pending effect start timer 223R becomes 0 (Z2704: YES) in the pending effect management process during reach (Z2112), set the display command for advance notice to perform the pending effect during reach (Z2706) By doing so, the execution of the hold production during reach is started. During execution of the ready-to-reach pending effect, the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of ending the variation of the special symbol (Z2707: YES), and the ready-to-reach pending effect ends.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2301: YES), the normal mode is in progress (Z2302: YES), and the lucky reserve storage value is set. is 0 (Z2303: YES), and if the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky reservation lottery table 222P is allowed (Z2305: YES), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N. (Z2307) is performed, and execution of the lucky suspension effect is started. During execution of the lucky pending effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2308: YES) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation after the start of the effect, The special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky pending effect ends.

Lucky reservation storage value 223P is stored at the time of winning corresponding to the reserved ball determined as the big win when the result of winning information command output according to the timing of the start winning is determined as the big win (determined in advance). is a storage area in which the value of the number of held balls is stored. Lucky reservation storage value 223P is stored when the winning lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: YES ), if the value of the number of pending balls is 5 or more (Z2443: YES), the value of the number of pending balls is set in the lucky pending storage value 223P (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the pending effect mode becomes the lucky pending effect, the pending lid command for display is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 479) based on the lucky pending stored value 223P, and the lucky pending effect is displayed. (See FIG. 434(A)).

The short-term prize winning timer 223Q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of special symbols changes from 0 to 1 or more until it reaches 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223Q is set to 5 seconds as a timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: YES), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: NO), the short-term until it becomes 0 The winning timer 223Q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). As described above, the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223Q becomes 0 when the pending effect mode becomes the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 430(A)). In this way, the short-term winning effect is performed in the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223Q, so that the shorter (faster) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes. It is possible to recognize the quickness of the period required to win four prizes.

Note that the short-term prize effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after four prizes have been won. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that four prizes have been won within five seconds.

The pending effect start timer 223R is a timer for counting the timing of executing the pending effect during reach (see FIG. 433(A)), which is the effect related to the pending symbol during the ready-to-win fluctuation of the special symbol.

Retention effect start timer 223R is, in the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) that is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variation type of the special symbol is the reach variation. If yes (Z2321: YES), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: YES), and if the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2323: YES), the during-reach effect lottery table 222M (Z2325: YES), a timer value is set by the reach start time calculation table 222N (Z2326).

When the timer value is set to the pending effect start timer 223R, the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 ( In Z2701: YES), if the pending effect start timer 223R is not 0 (Z2702: NO), 1 is subtracted. Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: YES), other special effects are not performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2705: YES ), by setting (Z2706) the advance notice display command for performing the pending effect during reach, execution of the pending effect during reach is started.

The sensor valid time counter 223S is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The sensor valid time counter 223S gives an advance notice when the sensor valid time counter 223S is 0 (Z2821: NO) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (Z2107). When effect display is set (Z2822: YES), the sensor valid time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223S (Z2823). If the set sensor effective time counter 223S is not 0, it is decremented (Z2824), during which touch sensor detection becomes effective. When the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S is not 0 (Z2821: YES), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: YES), and the value obtained by adding 1 (Z2826) to the touch counter 223T reaches the upper limit value. (Z2828: YES) is reset (Z2809).

The touch counter 223T is a counter for counting the number of times the detection of the touch sensor 290 is ON during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor effective time counter 223S is not 0 (Z2821: YES) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (Z2107), the touch counter 223T detects that the touch sensor 290 is activated. If it is ON (Z2825: YES), 1 is added (Z2826), and if the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: YES), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223Z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (FIRST IN FIRST OUT) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 477) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 471).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 456, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 456 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231A, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231A is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231A.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234A capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (DYNAMIC RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . MPU 231 directly accesses character ROM 234 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, and transfers a control program stored in second program storage area 234A1 of character ROM 234 to program storage area 233A of work RAM 233 . An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234A2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234A, a ROM controller 234B, a buffer RAM 234C and a NOR type ROM 234D.

NAND type flash memory 234A is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234A1 for storing data and a character storage area 234A2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234A having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234A2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

The NAND flash memory 234A can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234A2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234B is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234A or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234A, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234B applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234A. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234B corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234A including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234B analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234A and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234A. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234A is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234C is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234A. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234B reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234C. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234A (or NOR ROM 234D) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234C. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 B outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234C is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234A can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234B, for example, uses the other bank with data set in one bank to output the data in the NAND flash memory 234A to the outside, or the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234A to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234D is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234A. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234D stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234A. At least a first program storage area 234D1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234D1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234A), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231A to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231A, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231A to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234C from the NOR ROM 234D while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234D. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234A, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234D. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234A is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234A and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234C. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234D. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D into the buffer RAM 234C. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR ROM 234D. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234A). 233A and data table storage area 233B. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234C, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234C, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234C is transferred to the program storage area 233A. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234D1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234D1 again in the buffer RAM 234C, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 transfers the command pointer 231A to the program storage area 233A. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233A. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 are stored in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234A1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234A1. The instruction pointer 231A is programmed to be included in the program storage area 233A, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or the data table storage area 233B is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233A. Specifically, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 493) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 to the program storage area 233A or data table storage area 233B. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234D with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 460) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 494(B)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237A composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234A.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237A, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237A. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234C to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235E and an error message image area 235F are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235B and a third pattern area 235D are provided.

The power-on main image area 235A is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235B, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A from the character ROM 234 when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 492).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on varying image area 235B. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 457) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235A. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a ``jackpot with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``missing special pattern'', the image showing it is stopped from the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235A until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235B, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235B. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 456, the description continues. The back image area 235C is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The third symbol area 235D is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235D, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 427) with numbers "0" to "9" as the third pattern are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640R, or the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235E is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boys" and "girls" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235E. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character data in the resident video RAM 235 is changed. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235E. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235F is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235F. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235F, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the error message corresponding to the error command is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236A, a first frame buffer 236B and a second frame buffer 236C.

The image storage area 236A is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236A is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 in subareas provided in image storage area 236A of normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the specified predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A via the buffer RAM 237A.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. be. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233A, a data table storage area 233B, a simple image display flag 233C, a display data table buffer 233D, a transfer data table buffer 233E, a pointer 233F, a drawing list area 233G, a clock counter 233H, a stored image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233I and a drawing target buffer flag 233J.

The program storage area 233A is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233A. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233A, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233A. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233B includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234A1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233B. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233B. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a jackpot of the normal symbol, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern consisting of the main patterns numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233B stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 458 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, A blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The A blending information is information for specifying a known A blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "START" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 458) describes the data table. "END" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233B, stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and the pointer 233F is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233F is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 460), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233D. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 459 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236A of normal video RAM 236 and transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233B can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 459). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 459).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

In the same manner as the display data table, "START" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table. "02F0H") describes "END" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "START" information is described and the address in which the "END" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233B and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233E of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233F is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and a drawing list (see FIG. 461) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 461, when the pointer 233F is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233F is "0002H", NULL data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236A. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236A, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233C is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233C is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235A or power-on variation image area 235B of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 492) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 492). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see Z4705 in FIG. 503(B)).

This simple image display flag 233C is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 494(B)). When the image display flag 233C is ON, the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 494(B)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3308 in FIG. 494(B) Z3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233C is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 495 to 500) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 501 to 502(B)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233C is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 503A), and when the simple image display flag 233C is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 503B) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233C is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 504) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233D stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233B. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233F by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 460) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D.

While incrementing the pointer 233F by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. A drawing list (see FIG. 460), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233E stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233B, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233E. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233E by writing NULL data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233F one by one, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. (that is, if NULL data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 460) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236A.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233F is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233F to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing (Z3303 in FIG. 501) is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. reference), pointer update processing (see Z4305 in FIG. 502B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233F is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233F is updated in this way, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, and stores it in a drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 460), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233G allows the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the draw list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 460 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, A blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. A blending process is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to the A blending information, color tone correction is performed according to the color information, and filtering is performed according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 stores the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F and other image contents to be drawn (for example, the holding number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233E, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233F, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236A where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The clock counter 233H is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 494 (B )) is executed, the timer counter 233H is decremented by one (see Z4307 in FIG. 501). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233H becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data discrimination flag 233I is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233I is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233I generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236A.

The stored image data determination flag 233I is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 504) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236A as the one sprite is always unstored by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233I and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 504). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236A, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 504). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236A, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233J is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236B as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236C. Then, the information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 505).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233J is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233J, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed (see Z4902 in FIG. 505) each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 494(B)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236C can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. be. After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 461 to 474. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2M seconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

461 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (Z101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, each is 299 , 99, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 462-474.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passage process associated with the ball passing through the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (Z108), and further, other processing to be periodically executed is executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51B for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 462, the special symbol variation process (Z104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 462 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (Z104). This special symbol variation process (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big win (Z201). Here, it is determined whether or not the big-hit flag 203N is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big-hit is in progress. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: YES), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (Z201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating. If not (Z202: NO), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E are acquired (Z203). . After obtaining the value of each counter, the change execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 463, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining the special symbol that will be the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) If so, subtract 1 from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (Z206), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by calculation ( Z207). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203A are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process is executed to start the variation display on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), processes such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting variation of the first special symbol are executed.

In the process of Z205, if it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not variation execution in special figure 1 (Z205: NO), special figure 2 (second special (Z210). In addition, if it is not the variation execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: NO), that is, since the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: YES), for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2, the same processing as the processing of the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 described above is performed.

Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E changed by calculation. A number command is set (Z212). According to the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203B are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process is executed for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device (Z214). Incidentally, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (Z215: NO), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z215: YES), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 464 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. , A lottery for special designs will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the special winning type counter C2 It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a big win B1, a big win B2, or a big win C, and if it is a big win of the second special symbol, it will be a big win A according to the value of the special win type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win B1, a big win B2, or a big win C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot with a special design (Z218). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (Z218: YES), a jackpot start is set (Z219), the variable probability flag 203M is turned off, and the value of the counter 203J during time saving is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203N is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the current lottery result is out of the special pattern (Z218: NO), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203J during time saving is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the counter 203J during time saving is equal to or greater than 1 (Z222: YES), the value of the counter 203J during time saving is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203J is 0 (Z222: NO), the process of Z223 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 463, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 463 is a flow chart showing the change execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B. This is a process for determining whether to execute

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203K is set to OFF ("0" as a value) to initialize (Z241), and the data in the variation order storage area 203P stored in the RAM 203 is obtained. (Z242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203P is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: YES), the variation execution flag 203K is set to variation execution with special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: NO), the data in the execution area determines whether the variation is performed in the special figure 2 (Z246), and in the special figure 2 If it is a variable execution (Z246: YES), the variable execution flag 203K is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (Z247), and this process ends. In addition, in the process of Z246, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 464, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 464 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 462) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not it is the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203M is on. This variable probability flag 203M is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, jackpot B2, and jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

When it is determined that the odds are changing (Z252: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is in the odds-changing state of the special symbols, so the process proceeds to Z253. In the process of Z253, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202A (see FIG. 439(A)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is determined. Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202A. As described above, 27 numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these If the winning random number matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

On the other hand, in the process of Z252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with special symbols (Z252: NO), the process of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202A, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202A. As the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the normal game state (low probability game state), three numbers of "0 to 2" are set, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number that is the hit of these If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

In the process of Z255, whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202A match the set judgment value) is determined (Z255), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (Z255: YES), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 Based on, the display mode at the time of the big win is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202D1, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 440(B)).

In this process of Z256, the display mode (LED 37A lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1 (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is specified in the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns for the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z255: NO), the display mode at the time of being out is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or Z259 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z275 or Z259 is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 465, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In this special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214), similarly to the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209), first, the special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B acquired by the process of Z271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (Z272). Since it is in the variable probability state, the process proceeds to Z273. In the process of Z273, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202A, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202A. As described above, 27 numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the hits match. In that case, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the process of Z272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (Z272: NO), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202A, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202A. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the random numbers for the jackpot of special symbols, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these winnings match, the special symbol is selected. It is determined that it is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the process of Z275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275). YES), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202D2, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot), and in the range of "92 to 99" If so, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 440(C)).

In the process of Z276, the display mode (LED 37A lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is specified in the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of Z275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z275: NO), the display mode at the time of being out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203B is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 ends, it returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 466, the start winning process (Z105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 466 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (Z105). This starting winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461) to determine whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (Z105: see FIG. 466) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: YES), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: NO), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 4 If it is not less than (Z303: NO), an over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: YES), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is less than 4 (Z303: YES), special symbol 1 reserved 1 is added to the value (N1) of the ball number counter 203D (Z305). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 473), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation area 1 to reservation area 4) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203A of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the process of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203P (Z308), and the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. The prefetching process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, for Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball entrance 64 is the right second ball entrance 640R or the second ball entrance 640. Since the same processing is executed only by changing the processing for each case, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that when a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 640R or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 It is acquired and stored in the empty reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203B.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640R or the second ball entrance 640, the same special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter as for the first special symbol By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so the first special symbol and The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of Z308 or the process of Z316, the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. Details of the look-ahead processing (Z320) will be described with reference to FIG. 467 as described above. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, a process for determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Also, of the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 467, the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process in the starting winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing this prefetch processing (Z320).

In the look-ahead process (Z320), first, based on the value of the obtained special hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not it is appropriate at the start of fluctuation (Z351). In this propriety determination, the processing of Z255 in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 464) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 465) are executed. . It should be noted that this propriety determination is the propriety determination (discrimination) at the start of variation (Z255 processing in special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 464), Z275 in special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 465) (preliminary determination) performed prior to the processing of Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a win (also called a specific determination result) (Z352). If it is determined that the determination result is a win (Z352: YES), the variation pattern type is acquired from the normal variation pattern selection table 202B1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 (discrimination) (Z353). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202E (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z352, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is out (Z352: NO), based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202B1 The type is acquired (Z355). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set out of the winning command table 202E (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, before the start of fluctuation, the result of the determination in advance is output as a winning command to the audio ramp control device 113 each time the ball is held, so the audio ramp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of hit. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, notice effect to inform the player in advance of the winning judgment result of the reserved ball (for example, change the color of the reserved symbol to a color that informs Production such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. In addition, since one winning command is output for each reserved ball each time a reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize establishment of a reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 468, the normal symbol variation process (Z106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 468 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (Z106). This normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640A.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (Z401). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640A associated with the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (Z401: YES), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (Z402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z402: NO), the long-time open flag 203I is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F (the number M of holding fluctuation display in normal symbols) (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is greater than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is 0 (Z405: NO), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is not 0 (Z405: YES), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203F is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203C is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C is acquired (Z408).

Next, normal design fluctuation start processing is executed (Z409), and this processing ends. In addition, although the normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit, the process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessary 640A (movement pattern of the normal figure winning game) corresponding to the hit type, etc. Execute.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: YES), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 in FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z410: YES), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the process of Z411, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 in FIG. The device 83 is set to stop display (light display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of Z411, when the second symbol display update process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 473) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of Z427, Z431, or Z435 of FIG. In this control example, it is configured to light up and display the "○" symbol even in the case of a long-time hit or a normal hit, but not limited to that, a symbol corresponding to the type of hit in the normal pattern is lit and displayed (for example, , "⊚" for long-time hits, and "○" for normal hits).

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (Z412: YES), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640A associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this process ends. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640A is set by the processing of Z412, when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see Z1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 473) is executed next, the electric accessory 640A The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640A is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of Z430 or Z434 of FIG. 469 are completed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: see FIG. 469) to be described later, since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640A corresponding to the normal symbol winning type is set, in Z413, the normal symbol winning type is configured to set open/close control corresponding to On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: NO), the process of Z413 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 469, the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 469 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation start process (Z408). This normal design fluctuation start processing (Z408) is the setting at the time of normal design fluctuation start executed in the normal design fluctuation processing (see FIG. 469) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461) It is a process for execution.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (Z421). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z421: YES), the process proceeds to Z424. In the process of Z421, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z421: NO), it is determined whether it is during probability variation or time reduction (Z422). If it is neither probability variation nor time reduction (Z422: NO), the process proceeds to Z424.

If it is during variable probability or time saving (Z422: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the normal winning obtained in the processing of Z407 in FIG. 468 Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439(C)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol hit is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202C (see FIG. 439(C)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 439(C)).

In the process of Z424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202C (see FIG. 439(C)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol hit is acquired (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202C for low probability (see FIG. 439(C)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239" , It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 439(C)).

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65A, so the electric accessory 640A associated with the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to enter the second ball entry hole 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65A is provided immediately below the second ball-entering hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second ball-entering hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second ball-entering hole 65A A large number of balls enter the ball entrance 640 . As a result, in most cases, the number of held balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of Z423 or Z424 is a normal symbol hit (Z425), and when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (Z425: YES) , It is determined whether the winning type of the normal symbol is a long time winning (Z426). The winning type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal winning type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) and the preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the normal per type counter is in the range of 0 to 198, and is repeatedly updated at the timing synchronized with the other special per type counter C2, and the value of the normal per type counter obtained is If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-time win, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal win.

When it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is long-time winning (Z426: YES), the display mode for long-time winning is set (Z427). In the processing of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time winning start command is set (Z428), and the long-time opening flag 203I is turned on (Z429). Then, the processing shifts to Z430.

In the process of Z426, when it is determined that the winning type of normal symbols is normal winning (Z426: NO), the display mode for normal winning is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not it is during probability variation or time saving (Z432). Then, if it is during probability variation or time saving (Z432: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently occurring (Z433). As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z433: YES), the process proceeds to Z434. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640A are set.

In the process of Z433, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (Z433: NO), the opening period of the electric accessory 640A associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to the processing of Z436. In the processing of Z430, 2 is set in the open number counter 203G, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203H.

In the process of Z432, if it is neither probability variation nor time saving (Z432:NO), it will transfer to the process of Z434. In the process of Z432, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640A associated with the second ball entrance 640 is The time is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203G, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203H.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (Z425: NO), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z435). In the process of Z435, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to Z436.

In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is in progress (Z436), and if the probability variation is in progress (Z436: YES), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). , the process ends. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 indicates that the probability is not changed (Z436: NO), the change time of the change display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening in a long time are the same operation as when the normal pattern hits in the variable probability state and the time saving state. It may be configured to set

Next, the through gate passage processing (Z107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 470 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (Z107). This thru gate passage processing (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the thru gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: YES), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: NO), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (Z503 : NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: YES) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is less than 4 (Z503: YES), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F 1 is added to the value (M) (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203C of the RAM 203. Store it in the area (Z505), and terminate this process. In the process of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203F is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

471 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 472, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 472 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 426) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: YES), the process proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: NO), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if not stored (Z905: NO). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to Z913.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: YES), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of Z1014 in FIG. 473, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (Z914, Z915).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: NO), power failure occurrence information is stored (Z905: YES), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( Z907: YES), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203I (Z908). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of Z911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the main processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 473, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 473 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4M seconds, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 461), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (Z1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in Z101 switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 461) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of winning balls. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 462) or the start winning process (see FIG. 466). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the starting winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 467). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). Details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640A associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640A is set by the processing of Z412 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 468), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640A is started.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, Z257 process or Z259 process of special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see Figure 464), or Z277 process or Z279 process of special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see Figure 465) When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37A of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4S. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 464) Z257 process or Z259 process, or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 465) Z277 process or When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 464) or Z258 process, or Z276 process or Z278 process of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 465), the stop symbol (first symbol) to the first symbol display device 37 Stop display (lighting display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the second symbol variation time is set by the Z437 process or the Z438 process of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 469), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of Z410 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 468), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the current variation display, and in the display mode set by the Z427 process or Z431 process of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 469), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4M seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: YES), the process moves to Z1001, and the above-described processes after Z1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009: NO), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of Z1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: YES), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 471 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (Z1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of Z1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. We can start with the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer will be saved in the initialization processing (Z901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from Z1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 474 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control processing (Z1004) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 473), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot open port) 65A is a process for opening or closing.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 474), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The process of Z219 of the special symbol variation process (Fig. 462) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: YES), the opening command is set ( Z1115), and the process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 473). sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (Z1101: NO), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of Z1102, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (Z1102: NO), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102: YES), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (Z1103). If it is time to start a new round (Z1103: YES), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1103, if it is not the time to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65A is met (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the process of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is satisfied (Z1106: YES), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65A is closed (Z1107), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65A are not met (Z1106: NO), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when a special game state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of Z1108, if it is time to start the ending effect (Z1108: YES), an ending command is set (Z1109), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 473). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F of the RAM 223 . Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing after a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. If it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1110: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1110, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (Z1110: YES), in the process of Z1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A (Z1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot A (Z1111: YES), the value of the counter 203J during time saving is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203N is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot A (Z1111: NO), the probability variation flag 203M is set to ON (Z1113), then the jackpot medium flag 203N is set to OFF (Z1114), and this End the process.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 475 to 491, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 475, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 475 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-off processing of Z2118 (see FIG. 476) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 476, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 476), it executes power-off processing in Z2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z2118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z2002: NO), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the Z2118 was powered off. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAH" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAH", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAH", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: YES), the process proceeds to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: NO), the process proceeds to Z2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAH" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003: YES), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, whether the startup process this time was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAH" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: NO), and the processing shifts to Z2208.

If the power-off processing flag is ON (Z2002: YES), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure and during execution of the power-off process of Z1318. It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFH" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFH", and if it is "0FFH", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFH", "55H", "0AAH", and "00H". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: YES), the keyword "55AAH" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAH" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z2005: NO), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 476). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power failure process of Z2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: YES), the work area of the RAM is cleared (Z2009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), an interrupt Permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because, for example, the startup process this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, and Z2008 is started via the processes of Z2004 to Z2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: NO), skipping Z2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the processing to Z2010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), and sets interrupt permission (Z2011) to shift to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (Z2012). In addition, this state command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-time hit based on the long-time open flag 203I in the process of Z908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. is a command. In the process of Z2012, if it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2012: YES), the long-time open flag 203I is set based on the received state command, and this process ends (Z2013). . Here, if the received status command indicates that the long-time hit is in progress, the long-time open flag 203I is turned on, and if it indicates that the long-time hit is not hit, the long-time open flag 203I is turned on. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of Z2009 is skipped is that when the process of Z2008 is reached from Z2004 via the process of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 476, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 476 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1M seconds or more have passed since the main process started or since the current process of Z2101 was executed (Z2101), and 1M seconds or more has passed. If not (Z2101: NO), the process proceeds to Z2113 without performing the processes Z2102 to Z2112. In the processing of Z2101, it is determined whether or not 1M seconds have passed, while Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1M seconds). , Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of Z2111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of Z2112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1M seconds or more have elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: YES), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Z2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223B is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (Z2110), and the process proceeds to Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of Z2110 ends, short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). This short-term prize winning management process (Z2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. ) is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the processing of the pending effect management process (Z2112) during reach is executed. This reach pending effect management process (Z2112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A process of setting a specific effect (announcement effect) for informing the player that the game will be played so as to accumulate up to is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 ends, command determination processing is executed (Z2113). Details of this command determination processing (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (Z2113), the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off processing is executed (Z2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: NO), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (Z2116: YES), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 477 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 477), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When a variation pattern command is received (Z2201: YES), variation pattern reception processing is executed (Z2202), and this processing ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, if no variation pattern command has been received (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (Z2203). If the stop type command is received (Z2203: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this processing is terminated. .

In the process of Z2203, if the stop type command has not been received (Z2203: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: YES), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, if the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208). When a special symbol winning command is received (Z2208: YES), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process ends. Details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed, and a setting process is executed for executing each pending effect determined to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. On the other hand, in the process of Z2208, when the special symbol winning command is not received (Z2208: NO), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 478, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing this fluctuation pattern reception processing. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), based on the received variation pattern command, a detailed special symbol variation pattern (effect mode), a notice display mode, a display mode of a pending notice, etc. are set.

In the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 478), first, the fluctuation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, the previous notice display command for display is set in the variation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the pending notice counter 223G provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the notice display command for display is a command for instructing display of various notice effects (for example, comment notice suggesting the result of success/failure judgment, mini character notice, etc.) determined based on the variation pattern.

When the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending notice counter 223G is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223G is 0 (Z2225), the pending change value is set to 0, and the pending performance mode storage area 223M is cleared (Z2226). When the value of the reservation notice counter 223G is 1 or more (Z2225: NO), the process of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, a lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 431(B), even when an effect of changing the color of the pending ball is performed based on the result of the prefetch determination, the value of the pending notice counter 223G determines the value of the pending ball. After the display position is changed according to the digestion and the change in the color of the reserved ball is changed, the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts to change, and then the display disappears due to the stop of the change, and the reserved change value. can also be set to an initial value of 0. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the player can be notified correctly of the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 479, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) performed in the variation pattern reception process performed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 479 is a flow chart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), the number of pending balls at the time of past big hits is determined, and processing such as setting a mark pattern (holding effect) to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the number of pending balls is performed. Execute.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 479), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2301: YES), it is determined whether the normal mode is in progress (Z2302). If the normal mode is not in effect (Z2302: NO), this processing is terminated. In the processing of Z2302, if it is determined that the mode is normal mode (Z2302: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky reserve storage value 223P provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky reservation storage value 223P is 0 (Z2303: YES), this processing is terminated. Here, when the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223P is 0, it indicates that the number of reservation balls at the time of winning of the special symbol determined as the big hit is not stored.

If it is determined that the value of the stored lucky reserve value 223P is equal to or greater than 1 (Z2303), it is determined whether or not the effect is possible based on the lucky reserve lottery table 222P provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 455(C)). Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky reservation lottery table 222P, a process of acquiring the value of the production counter 223H and determining whether or not to execute the lucky reservation production based on the judgment value of the production counter 223H set corresponding to the current number of holding balls. is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether or not the lucky reservation effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: NO), this processing ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: YES), based on the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223P, the display reservation lid command is set from the lucky reservation command table 222G (FIG. 449) (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2301 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 0 (Z2301: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2308). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky holding effect was executed in the previous variation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2308: YES), the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this process is performed. exit. If it is determined in the process of Z2309 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 3 (Z2308: NO), this process ends. In this way, the lucky pending effect is set at the start of the variation, and is ended by setting the special effect status to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In this control example, the lucky holding effect is performed during the period in which the special symbol is varied once, but it is not limited to this, and may be performed in the period in which the variation is performed multiple times. may The number of fluctuations of the special symbols to be executed at the start of the lucky reservation performance may be determined, and may be terminated when the variation of the number of times is executed, or a lottery may be conducted to decide whether to end the lucky reservation performance at each variation. is executed, and the effect may be terminated when the end lottery is won, or when all the reserved balls are consumed or a demonstration display is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 478, the description continues. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the during-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the ready-to-win pending effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 480), when the variation of the special symbol to be the ready-to-win display mode is executed, the ready-to-win pending to make the game to accumulate the pending balls during the ready-to-win display mode. A process for executing an effect (one of the special pending effects) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 480, the during-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 480 is a flow chart showing the on-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228).

In reach pending effect setting processing (Z2228: FIG. 480), first, it is determined whether or not reach is fluctuating (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not fluctuating (Z2321: NO), this process ends. If the reach is fluctuating (Z2321: YES), it is determined whether the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: NO), this process is terminated. If the change is normal mode (Z2322: YES), it is determined whether the value in the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 or more (Z2323: NO), this process is terminated. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it means that another special pending effect is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent further overlapping of the pending effect. . If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2323: YES), based on the number of pending balls and the value of the effect counter 223H, the during-reach effect lottery table 222M (see FIG. 455(A)) is executed. Acquire whether or not the effect is possible (Z2324). Here, in the ready-to-win effect lottery table 222M, the determination value of the effect counter 223H is set for the current number of pending balls, and whether or not the ready-to-win pending effect can be executed is determined based on the determination value.

By the processing of Z2324, it is determined whether or not the on-reach pending effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2325). When it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: NO), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: YES), based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol, the reach start time calculation table 222N (Fig. 455 (B)), the suspension effect The value of the start timer 223R is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2327), and this processing ends.

In this way, according to the ready-to-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the ready-to-win display mode is determined, and other special pending effects are not executed. If so, a lottery is executed as to whether to execute the pending production during reach, and the timing of starting execution of the pending production during reach is set by winning the lottery, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the ready-to-win display mode. When it is started, the execution frequency of the hold effect during reach is set to be higher as the current number of hold balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the shooting of game balls during reach, and the game parlor side Profits can be increased. Also, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, return to FIG. 478 to continue the description. After executing the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the holding lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this reserved lid setting process (Z2229), necessary processes for displaying the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area DS are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the reservation lid setting process (Z2229) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 481 is a flow chart showing this reservation lid setting process (Z2229).

In the reservation lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 481), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning pending effect), which is one of the special pending effects, is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2341: YES), the short-term win-time suspension in the suspension lid range selection table 222D (see FIG. 446(A)) provided in the ROM 222 A reserved lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222D4 (see FIG. 447(A)) (Z2342). Based on the pending lid range value acquired in the process of Z2342, the pending lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this process ends. Thus, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 430(A)) is set, the display range of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball By selecting and setting a value (display mode) from the short-term winning reserve lid range selection table 222D4 (see FIG. 447(A)), the display mode of the variable lid pattern P different from the normal time (normal time is reserved It is possible to set the display mode of displaying the pattern and the rule of displaying with a space of one reserved pattern, or the rule of displaying with a space of two reserved patterns.

As a result, when the period required for storing one to four held balls is within the predetermined period, the variable cover pattern P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time. From the display mode of P, it is possible to recognize that the period required for memorizing the ball on hold is short. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so as to memorize the reserved ball more quickly, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Also, the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2341: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the suspension effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2343: YES), the reach effect pending lid range selection table 222D5 ( (See FIG. 447(B)) to acquire the reserved lid range value (Z2344). Based on the pending lid range value acquired in the process of Z2344, the pending lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this process ends. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the holding lid command for display indicating the holding lid range value acquired in the ready-to-win production holding lid range selection table 222D5, the ready-to-win showing that it is the timing to execute the holding production during ready-to-win By receiving a notice display command for carrying out a middle reservation notice performance, the variable lid pattern P is changed and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display reservation lid command.

In this way, when execution of the ready-to-reach holding effect is determined, a mode of changing the display of the variable lid pattern P is set, and the display mode is set in accordance with the execution timing of the ready-to-reach holding effect. Since the variable lid pattern P is variably displayed in , it can be determined that a special holding effect different from the normal time is executed by the variable lid pattern P. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when it is determined in the action of Z2343 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 (Z2343: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2345). . That is, it is determined whether execution of a lucky pending effect, which is one of the special pending effects, is set. In the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: YES), the normal reservation lid range selection table 222D1 (see FIG. 446) in the reservation lid range selection table 222D (see FIG. 446) 446(B)), the pending lid range value is obtained (Z2344). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends. In this way, when the execution of the lucky holding effect (see FIGS. 434(A) and 434(B)) is set, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P (displayed A display mode is set in which one reserved pattern is vacated from the last reserved pattern that is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 3 (Z2345: NO), it is determined whether the advance notice B mode is selected (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 429(A) and 429(B), when there are four or more reserved balls and the colors of the reserved symbols are variable, the player is suggested not to enter any more reserved balls. It is determined whether or not a pending performance is being executed. If it is the advance notice B mode (Z2347: YES), the display showing the color change of the variable cover pattern P is based on the reservation cover color change selection table 222F (see FIG. 448(B)) provided in the ROM 222. A hold lid command for use is set (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 429(B), the reserved symbols are displayed in variable colors, and notice B notifies the player that the game will be played so as to restrict the number of reserved balls from increasing further. A variable cover pattern at a position where the variable cover pattern P and the displayed reserved pattern overlap when more reserved balls are stored in a mode (the number of reserved balls is four or more) being played. A setting is executed to change the display color of P to a different color (for example, green) from the normal display color. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize in an easy-to-understand manner that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the game is played without memorizing the reserved balls.

After executing the processing of Z2348, based on the advance notice B mode reservation lid range selection table 222D3 (see FIG. 446(D)), the reservation lid range value is acquired (Z2349), the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this End the process. According to the advance notice B mode reserved lid range selection table 222D3 (see FIG. 446(D)), as shown in FIG. It can be constructed such that the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the position of the item that is hidden is displayed according to a special rule such that it is displayed. As a result, in the advance notice B mode in which the reservation effect is performed to instruct not to increase the number of reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P is used to make the player feel as if the four reserved balls are the upper limit. can let Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the reserved balls is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2347 that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z2347: NO), it is determined whether the advance notice A mode is set (Z2350). That is, the number of reserved balls is four or more, the color of the reserved pattern is set or set in a variable manner, and the variable cover pattern P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved pattern. It is determined whether or not a holding effect to be displayed without intervals is being executed.

If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2351: YES), the reserve lid range value is acquired based on the advance notice A mode reserve lid range selection table 222D2 (see FIG. 446(C)) ( Z2351). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not the advance notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (Z2352). Here, whether or not the game is in the time saving mode is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 . In the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, in addition to the variation type (out of reach, winning) data, the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state), or a probability variable gaming state (high Data indicating whether the state is a game state with probability power supply) or a normal game state (game state without low probability power supply) is also attached and output.

(Z2352: YES), (Z2352: YES), based on the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222D6 (see FIG. 447 (C)) to acquire the reserved lid range value (Z2353). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends. In addition, during time saving (state with electric sapo), unlike the normal game state, in the state of 0 to 6 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P is the 7th reserved ball and the 8th reserved pattern. is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable cover pattern P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved pattern is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to non-display. As a result, the variable lid pattern P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal game state during the time saving with the electric sapo, which is likely to open the electric accessory 640A, and in the state where many reserved balls occur frequently. , an increase in the load of display control of the variable lid pattern P is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2352, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (Z2352: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is in the normal mode suspension effect, the normal suspension lid range selection table 222D1 (Fig. 446(B)), the pending lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 478, the description continues. After executing the pending lid setting process (Z2229), the pending character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), a process for determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub-display area DS is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 482, the pending character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 478) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 482 is a flow chart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the reserved character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the holding effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of held balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of held balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one held ball is digested by newly starting fluctuation, the first ball entrance 64 which is the starting port , right second ball entrance 640R, second ball entrance 640, the number of reserved balls was 3 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223A). 223B is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the sum of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B is 4). It is a state that is changing into a state.

When it is determined that the number of pending balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: YES), the content of the background mode storage area 223I provided in the RAM 223 and the set pending effect mode and the effect counter 223H, a suspended character is selected from the suspended character selection table 222I (see FIG. 450(B)), a display character command is set (Z2363), and this processing ends. Thus, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved performance mode, and displayed. . As a result, the character displayed can be changed according to the background type and the pending effect mode, and the pending effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, it may be configured such that the determined character type is variable depending on the determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a hit, depending on the character type, a special pattern during fluctuation or a hit while being held can be determined in advance. The player can recognize that the reserved balls that have been stored are stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set according to the character type when it is displayed in super reach, the display of that character will perform super reach, which is a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. can be expected early.

In addition, even in this control example, the notice A mode and notice B mode are set when the variation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is determined by the prefetch judgment, or when the result of the judgment in advance is a big hit. Therefore, by displaying the J2 character and the J3 character, the player can expect that the super ready-to-win type will be executed and that the success/failure determination result will be a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of held balls has not changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: NO), it is determined whether the number of held balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: YES), a display character command for clearing the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this processing ends. In this way, the character is set to be non-display at the timing when the number of reserved balls becomes less than four, so that the player can be notified of the decrease in the number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the process of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: NO), it is determined whether or not over winning has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not an over-winning has occurred is determined by determining whether or not an over-winning information command output from the main control device 110 when the starting winning exceeds the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is received. be. If it is determined that over winning has occurred (Z2366: YES), a change is made by a pending character change table 222J based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223I, the pending effect mode and the effect counter 223H. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and this processing is terminated. Incidentally, if it is determined at Z2366 that the over winning has not occurred (Z2366: NO), this processing is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when an over-win occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the pending character change table 222J (see FIG. 451), the character change is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or when the expectation of a big hit is high in the variation pattern type, when the J3 character, which is easy to be determined in the state where the notice A mode or the notice B mode is decided, is selected is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. Further, when the character J2 is selected, or when the character J0 or J1, which is difficult to be selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, is selected, the character J2 or J3 is selected. designed to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set as a high degree of expectation in which a big hit or a variation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the pending performance by causing over winning. configured to be able to The change of this character corresponds to a privilege advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 478, the description continues. After executing the reserved character setting process (Z2230), the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the contents of a comment to be displayed in a balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C, etc. is executed.

Next, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 483 is a flow chart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), first, it is determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize winning performance is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2381: YES), short-term winning balloon selection in the balloon selection table 222K (see FIG. 452(A)) provided in the ROM 222. Based on the table 222K4 (see FIG. 453(A)), the contents of the balloon are obtained (Z2382). After executing the process of Z2382, the balloon command for display is set (Z2394) based on the contents of the acquired balloon, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2381 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2381: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2383 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2383: YES), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222K5 (see FIG. 453(B)) (Z2384), and the above Z2394 Execute the process and terminate this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2383 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 (Z2383: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2385). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky holding effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 3 (Z2385: YES), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the lucky reservation balloon selection table 222K6 (see FIG. 454(A)) (Z2386), and the process of Z2394 described above is performed. and terminate this process.

In the process of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 3 (Z2385: NO), it is determined whether or not the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387: YES), the balloon content is acquired based on the advance notice B balloon selection table 222K3 (see FIG. 452(D)) (Z2388), and Z2394 described above is obtained. is executed, and the process ends.

In the process of Z2387, if it is determined that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z2387: NO), it is determined whether the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389: YES), balloon contents are acquired based on the advance notice A balloon selection table 222K2 (see FIG. 452(C)) (Z2390), and Z2394 described above is obtained. is executed, and the process ends.

In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the advance notice A mode is not set (Z2389: NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode (time saving game state or probability variable game state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time saving is set (Z2391), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the time saving balloon selection table 222K7 (see FIG. 454 (B)) (Z2392), and the processing of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

In the process of Z2391, if it is determined that the time saving is not set (Z2391: NO), the balloon content is acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222K1 (see FIG. 452 (B)) (Z2393), The processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In this way, since the comment corresponding to each reservation performance mode is controlled so as to be selected, the content of the comment corresponding to the reservation performance mode can be displayed to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 484, winning command reception processing (Z2209), which is part of the command determination processing (Z2113: see FIG. 477) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 484 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 477) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the winning command reception process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223F provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, a pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222B (FIG. 445(A)) provided in the ROM 222 based on the variation type of the received command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223H (Z2402). .

Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter 223G provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice A mode or the advance notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is variable is set. If the value of the pending notice counter 223G is not 0 (Z2403: NO), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223G is 0 (Z2403: YES), based on the pending change value, the pending effect mode from the pending effect mode selection table 222C (see FIG. 445 (B)) is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: YES), the process of Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending change value is not 0 (Z2405: NO), the pending notice counter 223G shows the current pending ball values (special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223A and special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223B). ) is set (Z2406).

After completing the processing of Z2406, short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). Details of the short-term winning judgment processing (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. If so), a process of setting the execution of the short-term winning pending effect is executed. Next, lucky reservation processing is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. Set the execution of the lucky hold performance. Next, the pending lid setting process (Z2409), the pending character setting process (Z2410), and the balloon setting process (Z2411) described above are executed, and this process ends. Note that the reservation lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 481, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Also, the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the contents already described with reference to FIG. 483, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 485, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 485 is a flow chart showing this short-term winning judgment process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 484) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined to be in the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state (during time saving) (Z2421: YES), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state (Z2421: NO), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223N is not 0 (Z2422: NO), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 0 (Z2422: YES), it is determined whether the number of pending balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: YES), it is determined whether the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223Q is not 0 (Z2424). When it is determined that the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223Q is 0 (Z2424: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223Q is not 0 (Z2424: YES), the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 1 (Z2425), and this processing ends. In this way, when the period required until the establishment of the four reserved balls is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 is set to indicate that the execution of the short-term winning pending effect is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 486, the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 486 is a flow chart showing this lucky reservation storage process (Z2408). This lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 484) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408), first, the winning lottery result is acquired according to the contents of the winning information storage area 223F provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the processing of Z2441, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big win (Z2442). When it is determined that the obtained lottery result is not a big win (2442: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: YES), it is determined whether the number of held balls is 4 or more (Z2443: NO). If it is determined that there are four or more (Z2443: YES), the value of the current number of pending balls is set in the lucky pending storage value 223P (Z2444), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of held balls is 4 or less (Z2443: NO), this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 487 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (Z2114). This variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 487), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z2501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: NO), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, Z2505 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is on (Z2501: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223D is turned off (Z2502), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (Z2504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223F is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223F are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to Z2505.

In the processing of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223E provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z2505). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2505: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223E is on (Z2505: YES), the stop type selection flag 223E is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, the short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 488 is a flow chart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term prize winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring a period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute a short-term prize pending effect is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of pending balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: NO), the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223Q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0 (Z2601: YES), the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223Q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the process of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize winning effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2604: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 1 (Z2604: YES), it is determined whether the number of pending balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of held balls is less than 4 (Z2605: YES), the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is set to 0 (Z2605), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2604 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 1 (Z2604: NO), or in the process of Z2605 it is determined that the number of held balls is greater than 4. If so (Z2605: NO), the process of Z2606 is skipped and this process ends.

In this way, when the short-term winning pending effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. In addition to this, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning reservation effect is completed (the timing when the remaining period has passed after 4 balls have been entered in less than 5 seconds) can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 489, the on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 489 is a flow chart showing the on-reach suspension effect start process (Z2112). In this on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the on-reach pending effect and setting the display mode of the on-reach pending effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the suspension effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 (Z2701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2701: YES), it is determined whether the value of the pending effect start timer 223R provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702 ). When it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223R is 1 or more (Z2702: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending effect start timer 223R (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending effect start timer 223R calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223R after calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223R after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: YES), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is not 2 (Z2705: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223N is 2 (Z2705: YES), an announcement display command indicating execution of the pending effect during reach is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

In the process of Z2702, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223R is 0 (Z2702: YES), the timing when the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the special symbol during fluctuation ends (the fluctuation period has passed (Z2707). If it is determined that it is time to end the fluctuation (Z2707: YES), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223N (Z2708), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: NO), this processing ends. In this way, in the ready-to-win suspension performance, the special performance status is set to 0 at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol, which is the ready-to-win variation mode, elapses, and the suspension performance is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 490, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 490 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is discriminated, and execution of the notice effect or the like is set based on the depression.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 490), first, it is determined whether or not a value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223K as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). ). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is 0 (Z2801: NO), if it is determined that the value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223K (Z2801: YES), the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: YES), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is 0 (Z2806: NO), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223I provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command for switching to the variation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is greater than 0 (Z2806: YES), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (during the announcement effect). (Z2809). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: YES), the value of the SW effective time counter 223K provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is displayed. Set a command (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 491, the sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described. 491 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing (Z2813) which is one processing in frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z1307: FIG. 490) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In this sensor input processing (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 491), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor valid time counter 223S is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is 0 (Z2821: NO), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). When it is determined that the advance notice effect display is set (Z2822: YES), the sensor valid time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223S (Z2823), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: NO), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2821 that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S is greater than 0 (Z2821: YES), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (Z2824 ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 by bringing his or her hand close to it (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: YES), the value of the touch counter 223T is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and the notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223T is displayed. A display command is set (Z2827). It is determined whether or not the value of the touch counter 223T is the upper limit value set for the selected touch announcement effect display (Z2828). If it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223T is the upper limit value (Z2828: YES), the value of the touch counter 223T is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223T is not the upper limit value (Z2828: NO), this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 490, the description continues. In the processing of Z2801, if it is not in the waiting state (Z2801: NO), or in the processing of Z2802, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: NO), the SW valid time counter 223K is 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is 1 or more (Z2805: YES), the SW valid time counter 223K is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: YES), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (during the announcement effect) (Z2808). If it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2808: YES), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is displayed. A command is set (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the sensor input processing (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 491, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z2808, if it is determined that the advance notice effect is not being performed (Z2808: NO), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z2807 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2807: NO), the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 are skipped, and the sensor input process (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 491 is performed. is executed to terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is 0 (Z2805: NO), it is determined whether a variation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that a variation pattern has been set (Z2811: YES), based on the set variation pattern, the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223K (Z2812), and sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and terminate this process. In addition, in the process of Z2811, when the variation pattern is not set (Z2811: NO), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Here, in the variation pattern, there are those in which an effect using the frame button 22 is set and those in which it is not set. be done.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 492 to 505. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 492, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 492 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231A provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231A is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234B of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D in the buffer RAM 234C. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234A, the character ROM 234 stores that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234A and set in the buffer RAM 234C. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234A, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234C. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234D stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby increasing the speed of the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR type ROM 234D. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234C and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 493, boot processing (Z3001) will be described. 493 is a flowchart showing boot processing (Z3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234A capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the program storage area 233A and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233B is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234D1 of the NOR-type ROM 234D and set in the buffer RAM 234C after the system reset is released is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234A1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233A (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234D1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233A (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A by the process of Z3101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231A to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233A by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234A having the second program storage area 234A1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233A and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231A is set by the process of Z3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231A is stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233A are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A or data table storage area 233B (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233B.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (Z3104), the command pointer 231A is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233A, that is, after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 493) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see Z3002 in FIG. 492) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234A1 of the NAND flash memory 234A are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233A and data table storage area 233B. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231A is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233A without referring to the NAND flash memory 234A. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233B, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234D, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234A. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234A1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233A. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234D with an extremely small capacity, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 493, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233A by the process of Z3101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234D1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233A. 231A may be executed. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233A.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently transferred to the program storage area 233A. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231A may be executed. A part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233A by a predetermined amount, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233A is set in the instruction pointer 231A by Z3101. and Z3102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234D1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233A at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233A. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234D1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in one program storage area 234D1. In this case, the MPU 231 may execute the processes Z3103 to Z3105 without executing the processes Z3101 and Z3102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233A, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233A, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is finished, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233A of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. Transferred to image area 235A.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235A is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235B, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235B is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235B is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233C is set. is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in transfer setting processing (see FIG. 503A), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 503A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233C indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 494B), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 457 is drawn. Determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 494(B)) and simple display setting processing (see Z3309 in FIG. 494(B)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234A for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via the device 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of Z3006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494(A), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 494A is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494(B), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 494B is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 460) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 494(B), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is on (Z3301). If it is off (Z3301: NO), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination processing (Z3302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display setting process (Z3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the command determination process (Z3302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233D. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (Z3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (Z3303) or the simple display setting processing (Z3309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233C is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233C is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the video RAM 236, even when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (Z3304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (Z3305), 460, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command; A stop type counter is compared with the stop type counter, and a stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233C is ON (Z3301: YES), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 457) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and the process of Z3304 is executed. Move to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 495 to 500, the details of the command determination process (Z3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 495 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 495), as shown in FIG. 495, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401). (Z3401: NO), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (Z3403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: YES), the variation pattern Execute command processing (Z3405) and return to processing of Z3401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (Z3405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 496(A). FIG. 496(A) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process (Z3405: FIG. 496(A)), first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233B and set in the display data table buffer 233D (Z3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233D as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect having time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233D is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (Z3504), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (Z3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233F initialized by the processing of Z3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z3501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233F, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236A.

In the display setting process, the time counter 233H to which the time data is set by the process of Z3504 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (Z3406), If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: YES), the stop type command process is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

Details of the stop type command process (Z3407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 496(B). FIG. 496B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (Z3407: FIG. 496 (B)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494(B)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the processing returns to Z3401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , Z3602 offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602. In the above-described task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop design set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235D of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description continues. In the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (Z3406: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice display command for display among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). When it is determined that the advance notice display command for display has been received (Z3408: YES), advance notice effect display processing is executed (Z3409). Details of the advance notice effect display processing (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. Also, setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of a big win or the like is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 497(A), the advance notice effect display processing (Z3409) will be described. FIG. 497A is a flow chart showing this advance notice effect display process (Z3409).

In the advance notice effect display process (FIG. 497(A), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received advance notice display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). A transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for advance notice set for display at a display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received advance notice display command for display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, the time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by the clock counter. 233H (Z3704), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this manner, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the notice display and the display timing, but not limited to this, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description continues. In the processing of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice display command for display (Z3408: NO), it is determined whether there is a switch command for display among unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: YES), mode switching processing is executed (Z3411). Details of this mode switching process (Z3411) will be described with reference to FIG.

Now, with reference to FIG. 497(B), the mode switching process will be described (Z3411). FIG. 497B is a flow chart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z3801). It is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbols are changing (Z3802: YES), the background mode display data table buffer corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set active (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: NO), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbols are changing, the display mode is switched to a changing pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbols are stopped, the background of the standby state display mode is set to be displayed in the set background.

Note that the process of changing the background etc. according to the background mode may be configured as follows.

A back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag to be set is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag to be set. Then, when the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the set back face image determination flag is used at that point in time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received first may be turned on, or A back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description continues. In the process of Z3410, if it is determined that there is no display switching command (Z3410: NO), it is determined whether there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserve lid command for display (Z3412: YES), a reserve lid command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, with reference to FIG. 498, the pending lid command process (Z3413) will be described. FIG. 498 is a flow chart showing this pending lid command process (Z3413).

In the pending lid command process (Z3413: FIG. 498), first, the display data table for the pending lid of the display effect corresponding to the received pending lid command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233D currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other holding lids are set to ON (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233D by the processing of Z3901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (Z3904 ), initializes the pointer 233F to 0, and (Z3905) returns to the command determination processing.

In addition, when the hold lid command is received, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table and set, but a new display data table may be set.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description continues. In the processing of Z3412, if it is determined that there is no display pending lid command (Z3412: NO), it is determined whether there is a display pending character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412: YES), a reserved character command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, with reference to FIG. 498B, the pending character command process (Z3415) will be described. FIG. 498B is a flow chart showing this suspended character command process (Z3415).

In the pending character command process (Z3413: FIG. 498), first, the display data table for the pending character of the display effect corresponding to the received pending character command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233D currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other reserved characters are set to OFF (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of Z4001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (Z4004 ), initializes the pointer 233F to 0 (Z4005), and returns to the command determination processing.

When a pending character command is received, the display mode of the variable pattern set corresponding to the additional time is specified based on the time data indicated by the pending character command, the set variable pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table and set, but a new display data table may be set.

Returning to FIG. 495, the description continues. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display reserved character command (Z3414: NO), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a balloon command for display (Z3416: YES), balloon command processing is executed (Z3417).

Here, with reference to FIG. 499, balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described. FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In balloon command processing (Z3417: Fig. 499), first, a display data table for balloon of display effects corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233D currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233B, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table is set to OFF (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the balloon display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D by the process of Z4101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233H (Z4104). , initializes the pointer 233F to 0 (Z4105), ends the variation pattern command, and returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the additional time is specified. , set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table and set, but a new display data table may be set.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: NO), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414). If (Z3414: YES), execute error command processing (Z3415) and return to the processing of Z3415.

Details of the error command processing (Z3415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 500 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process (Z3415: FIG. 500), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (Z4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of Z4202, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: NO), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the process of Z3401.

In the process of Z3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: YES ), and the processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processing of Z3401 to Z3416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 496 (A)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 496 (B)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 496(A)) executed in this case, in the processing of Z3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233D. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on varying image area 235B of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, the process of writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 501 and 502, the details of the display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 501, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the processing of Z4305 is performed. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is ON (Z4303: YES), warning image setting processing is executed (Z4304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 502A is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (Z4401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 501 . After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or when it is determined in the process of Z4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (Z4303: NO), the process proceeds to Z4305.

In Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 502(B). FIG. 502B is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233D and the transfer data table buffer 233E. This is the process of updating the pointer 233F that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233F (Z4501). That is, the pointer 233F is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, START information is described at address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233D, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233F by the processing of Z4501, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D is END information. is determined (Z4502). As a result, if it is END information (Z4502: YES), it means that the pointer 233F has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is a demonstration display data table (Z4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233D is set in the clock counter 233H (Z4504), the pointer 233F is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233D is not the demonstration display data table (Z4503: NO), the value of the pointer 233F is decremented by 1 ( Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233D, the previous address in which the END information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233F is not the END information (Z4502: NO), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 502 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D (Z4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of Z4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233H is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233H after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233H is 1 or more (Z4308: NO), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233H is 0 or less (Z4308: YES), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (Z4309: NO), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (Z4310), and then writing NULL data to the transfer data table buffer 233E to clear its contents (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233H (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), return to V interrupt processing.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233D, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various effects images.

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by Z4315, the stop design of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of Z4309, if the fixed display flag is ON instead of OFF (Z4309: YES), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (Z4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (Z4316: NO), it means that the value of the clock counter 233H has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. It is set in the buffer 233D (Z4317), and then NULL data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233E to clear its contents (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233H (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of Z4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (Z4316: YES), it means that the demonstration effect will be performed after the end of the confirmed display effect, and that demonstration effect will end, so the display setting process will end as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233C is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494(B)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 457) is set in the display data table buffer 233D.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504, the details of the transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 503A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233C is ON (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233C is on (Z4601: YES), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Execute the processing (Z4602), terminate the transfer setting processing, and return to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233C is not turned on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is turned off (Z4601: NO), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (Z4602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 503B. FIG. 503B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (Z4701). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4702: NO), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4702: YES), the process proceeds to Z4703. Also, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (Z4701: NO), the processing proceeds to Z4703.

In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (Z4703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237A, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237A while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing of Z4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (Z4703: YES), the simple image display flag 233C is set to OFF (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 494(B)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 495 to 500) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 501 to 502 (B)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed in 81 . Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 504) (see Z4601: NO in FIG. 503A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 504, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E, the pointer 233F updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303) is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Also, in the process of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but NULL data (Z4802: NO), the processes of Z4803 and Z4804 are skipped and the process proceeds to Z4805. In the process of Z4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: YES), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (Z4806).

In the processing of Z4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4806 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4806: NO), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: YES), the process proceeds to Z4807. Also, as a result of the process of Z4805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (Z4805: NO), the process proceeds to Z4807.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (Z4807). is turned off (Z4808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: NO), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233I. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233I, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: YES), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: NO), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233I is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233I is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236A as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235C can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233D in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233F of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236A so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236A before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236A according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236A without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 505, details of the drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (Z3304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 460 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233J are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233J includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236B as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233J is 1 includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236C as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237A. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237A is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of Z4902, the rendering target buffer flag 233J is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The draw target buffer flag 233J is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236B and the second frame buffer 236C each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 494(B)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236B can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236C. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236B is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236C is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236C earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236B. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236B or the second frame buffer 236C every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

In the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. After that, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the control example described above, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237A, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. Then, if unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. and when the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not NULL data at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233E or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in the display control device 114 is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies an address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234A can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and is composed of a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the control example described above, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234D, and the first program storage area 234D1 stores part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234A, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234D, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FERAM (FERROELECTRIC RAM), MRAM (MAGNETORESISTIVE RAM), or PRAM (PHASE CHANGE RAM). A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234D1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234D connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in this area. However, the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234A. , the memory may be provided with a first program storage area, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234D, FERAM (FERROELECTRIC RAM), MRAM (MAGNETORESISTIVE RAM), PRAM (PHASE CHANGE RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided thereon, and the MPU 231 may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234B detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 is set in the buffer RAM 234C. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234C and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234B detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234B sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 in the buffer RAM 234C, and then When the ROM controller 234B detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234C and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234D1 already set in the buffer RAM 234C? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234B detects that the address specified on the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234D1, the first program storage area 234D1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234D1 in the buffer RAM 234C may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. By connecting the resident video RAM 235 to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when the resident area and the normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, in response to a command received from main controller 110 or sound lamp controller 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on third pattern display device 81 is at least stored for resident use. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 retains its contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237A. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237A while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237A. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237A. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM determination value is checked before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234A with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237A is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237A is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234A. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237A may be such that the image data transfer from the RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237A to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above control example, a case where one buffer RAM 237A is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 into the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written into the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on varying image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235B, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237A has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235A when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237A. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237A.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237A. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235B has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A and power-on varying image area 235B of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237A. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237A. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237A.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. , from that resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235C.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the combined data table and the display data table, the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 detects the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on. A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 502(A)) when the is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

In addition, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when it is determined by the sound ramp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235F of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. Upon receipt of an error command conveying a magnetic field error from main controller 110 or audio ramp controller 113 , display controller 114 may display the warning image on third graphic display 81 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even if the NAND type flash memory 234A is used, the error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235F of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the error message image is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 to immediately inform the player of the magnetic field error. can be deterred.

When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third symbol display device 81 for one The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time are associated with the addresses expressed in units of the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for the frame is displayed. It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed has been defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233F in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data required when drawing an image according to the drawing contents defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 according to the drawing list in advance before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234A having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234A with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be used to specify The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be provided efficiently.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233F is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233F. A pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) of a one-frame image at which drawing processing ends will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and also determines the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above control example, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233D, by the time the finalized display effect is completed, the main controller 110 through the sound lamp controller 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233D Although it has been described, it is also possible to set the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect to the display data table buffer 233D again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, the fixed display effect is not performed. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233D each time it ends. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above control example, the explanation was given for the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and to stop display the third pattern consisting of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235A after the power is turned on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235B, displaying the main image at power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235A of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235B. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235B, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235B. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235B immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is defined, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is defined for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 FPS, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn which is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data discrimination flag 233I, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236A may be stored in the work RAM 233. FIG. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236A stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236A, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236A may be deleted.

In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233I. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233I is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236A of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is made resident in the back side image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach which appears frequently or is expected to be high resident in the back image area 235C of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233F, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", changes with time has been described. good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone over time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as the pending ball number command. Although the case of inclusion has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and information on various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) obtained at the time of starting winning by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 may notify you.

In the above control example, when the variable performance is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls for variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the design as identification information on the display screen of the third design display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the eleventh control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entrance 64, a right second ball entrance 640R, and a second ball entrance 640 as starting openings (ball entry means, starting means), and game balls enter the starting openings. By entering either ball, a lottery (judgment) is executed to win or lose with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (judgment result) is hit (specific judgment result), a jackpot game (privilege game advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types are set for the jackpot game, and different benefits are given to the player depending on the types. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the winning type in which a high-probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, and the time-saving game state after a jackpot game (when the player's profit is smaller than in the first special game state) A second special game state) is set, and the winning type and the like are set.

The success/failure determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After a variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the judgment result is notified to the player by stopping display in a display mode for showing the win/fail judgment result (judgment result). . When a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entered ball. Up to 4 balls can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 (first special symbol lottery), and up to four balls can be entered into the right second ball entrance 640R and the second ball entrance 640 (second special symbol). A total of four balls are stored as the upper limit value for each symbol lottery).

When the reserved balls are stored, one reserved pattern (identification pattern, identification information) is displayed for one reserved ball. For the reserved ball, prior to the variable display of the special pattern indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball, the success judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special pattern. (Variation pattern type) is pre-determined to perform pre-discrimination. When the preliminary determination result is a specific determination result (for example, hit or super reach type is determined), the color of the pending symbol is changed (changed to a specific display mode) and displayed. When the colors of the reserved symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special holding effects, when the color of the holding pattern changes, further holding balls are generated, or by generating an overflow prize that enters the starting port more than the maximum number of holding balls, variable holding A comment display (announcement display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the expected degree of hitting against the ball, the type of variation pattern to be executed, etc. is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can enter more game balls into the starting hole, and the profit of the game parlor can be increased. In addition, by entering a game ball into the starting hole, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the judgment result, the variation type, etc. can be determined from the contents of the comment, so that the player can receive benefits (information that will be benefits). It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, as one of the special holding effects, a holding effect (announcement B mode) is set so that the game is played so as not to generate the reserved ball from the state where the color of the reserved ball is changed. In this holding performance, the variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved pattern is displayed, and the position of the reserved pattern displayed when the variable lid pattern P wins next to the reserved pattern whose color is changed. By displaying , the player is notified that the game will be played so as not to cause the ball to be held. Furthermore, the content suggesting not to increase a ball on hold is also displayed by comment display.

In addition, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and the total number of reserved symbols up to eight is the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). , and an area in which the reserved pattern is displayed is secured and set in advance. In the area where the reserved design is displayed, the pedestal design is displayed at the position where the reserved design is displayed, and even if the reserved design is not displayed in the area where the reserved design is displayed configured to be identifiable. In the area where the fifth to eighth reserved patterns are displayed, four variable lid patterns P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved patterns are displayed even in the normal state, and each variable lid is displayed. In the pattern P, numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls are displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable cover pattern P in this way, it is possible to determine that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 8 even in a state where the reserved pattern is not displayed by the numerical information of the variable cover pattern P. can do. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is also varied by generating the reserved ball and displaying the reserved pattern. In the normal mode holding effect, the variable cover pattern P displayed at the position where the fifth holding pattern is displayed is changed to non-display when the number of the holding balls becomes three. After that, similarly, the 6th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 4 reserved balls, the 7th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 5 reserved balls, and the 8th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 6 reserved balls. The variable lid pattern P is variably displayed so as not to be displayed, that is, the variable lid pattern P is variably displayed so that two reserved patterns are available for three or more reserved balls. be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbols is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

In addition, it is configured to execute a special holding performance in which the variable rule of the variable cover pattern P is changed depending on the period during which the held ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the type of variation displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that a special holding effect is being executed according to the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P. In addition, the special pending effect is also set according to the result of the judgment result of the pending preliminary judgment, the variation type, and the result of the judgment result of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner and the variation type that is being executed. By varying the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a win or predict the type of variation.

In this control example, even if the game ball is shot to the left or right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640R, the second ball entrance 640 (electric role) 640A is in an open state), but the configuration is not limited to this. Arrangement of nails or the like may be set so as to form a flow path that easily bends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a lottery operation using only the second special symbols, or to perform a game such as a game in which the game ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Furthermore, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 506 to 542. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to alternately change, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example, the first special symbol is prioritized. It is different from the eleventh control example in that the state to be varied and the order of the first special symbol and the first special symbol are varied depending on the game state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 506 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example. In the eleventh control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when a ball enters from the opening 710A, the sorting device 700 moves the first ball into Although the balls are distributed to the port 64 and the second ball entrance 640, in the twelfth control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are used as they are. It is different in that it is configured to be installed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 507 to 511, the electrical configurations of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the above-described eleventh control example, and the content of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The difference is that the content of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 507 to 509. FIG. In the eleventh control example, the special symbols in which the start of variation is executed are configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the twelfth control example, the second special symbol is preferentially varied. The difference is that it is changed so that execution is performed.

Figures 507(A) and 507(B) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the twelfth control example. In this twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 509(A), when the special symbol variation continues the variation execution in the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 509(B), the effect display is continuous effect to run. A continuous effect is a period set for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, this continuous effect can be extended based on winning during execution of the continuous effect.

FIG. 509(A) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 509(A), in the twelfth control example, in the small area DS1 of the sub-display area DS provided under the third symbol display device 81, the pedestal symbol M0 being executed is displayed, and the small In the area DS2, the first reserved symbol pedestal M1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8 and reserved symbols are displayed. Characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area DM. By executing an effect having a story with these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Also, even during the continuous performance period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. - 特許庁A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be given later with reference to FIGS. 508 and 510. FIG.

Next, the flow of production when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous production will be described. Figures 509(C) and (D) are diagrams showing the flow of effects when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous effects. In this twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 507(C), when the second special symbol variation is executed during execution of the first special symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 507(D), the first special symbol is interrupted, and a special performance with a second special symbol variation is performed during the suspension period. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

FIG. 509(B) is a diagram showing how the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol changes during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 509(B), the ball on hold is displayed in red. In the display area DM, shellfish K1, shellfish K2, and shellfish K3 are displayed in a display mode with a story. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that it is the special effect execution period. Further, white reserved symbols are displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5, and the white reserved pattern of the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 moves to the small area DS to be the executing symbol. , the continuous effect period interrupted by the special effect period is resumed.

Next, the flow of production when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous production period will be described with reference to FIGS. 507(C) and (D). In the twelfth control example, if the second special symbol is entered into the second ball entrance 640 even during the execution of the variation with the first special symbol, the variation with the second special symbol is preferentially performed. As shown in Figure 507 (C), while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2, the first special symbol as shown in Figure 507 (D) The continuous performance during the execution of the variation is interrupted, and the special performance is executed during the variation execution in the second special pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 509(B), when there is a variation execution in the second special symbol and a special effect is started, the number of pending balls is configured to change color only during the special effect period. there is Shell-like characters K1 to K3 are displayed in the corners of the display area DM, and an effect with a story is executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the player has entered the special presentation period from the continuous presentation period, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous performance with the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special performance with the second special symbol, and is restarted as soon as the special performance period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal M3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal M5 are on standby to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol M0 to the second reserved symbol symbol M2 during the special performance period is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal M3 moves to the execution pedestal M0, and the special performance period The interrupted continuous performance period is resumed.

The relationship between continuous effects and background display will be described with reference to FIG. 508 . FIGS. 508(A) to (C) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during special symbol variation and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous effect period. In the twelfth control example, when the background mode in which the continuous effect is being executed is changed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 510 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous rendering period. As shown in FIG. 510, in the display area DM of the third symbol display device 81 during the variation of the third symbol, the background mode is set to the mountain mode from the sea mode which was the period of the continuous effect. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. . In the twelfth control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous performance period, the display area DMB displays "Continuous performance in the sea mode!" It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. Also, in the display area DMA, the message ``Push the button to change the background'' is displayed so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third pattern is fluctuating.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the twelfth control example, the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described eleventh control example is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 511(A). FIG. 511(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example. This twelfth control example differs from the above-described eleventh control example in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222AA is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222AA is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (Fig. 509(A)). In the winning information related process (see Z2255 in FIG. 518), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 518: YES), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to OFF. If there is (Z5004 in FIG. 518: NO), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 518) and used to determine execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 518).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222AA, corresponding to the value of one effect counter possessed by the effect counter group 223AA, the current number of pending balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time. Presence or absence of execution of continuous production is defined. Specifically, the greater the number of currently held balls, the easier it is for continuous effects to be executed. It is stipulated that the continuous effect is more likely to be executed than in the case of indicating .

By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to execute a continuous performance with a long execution period (the number of times of special symbol fluctuations to be executed), and when the continuous performance is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation for a big win. can be raised. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with high expectations for the big win, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102 in FIG. 519: YES), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value of the number counter 223A is read (Z5104 in FIG. 519), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 519: YES), it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect again. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA (Z5109 in FIG. 519).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the continuous production even for a game ball newly winning during the execution of the continuous production, so that the frequency of executing the continuous production can be increased. In addition, since the period in which the continuous performance is executed can be made longer than the reserved upper limit number (4) of the special symbol 1, the player is informed which reserved symbols the continuous performance is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In addition, in the present control example, the above-described contents of the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect are defined, but other contents may be defined. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a clock means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for clocking the current time, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in correspondence with the timing contents of the clock means. may be specified.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), it is preferable that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. With this configuration, even when the same continuous performance is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win varies depending on the timing (time) at which the continuous performance is executed, so that the player can play the game early. It is possible to suppress getting tired of. Furthermore, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guidance and notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect will be executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the remaining period (or elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is preferable to provide a period reporting means for reporting. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the continuous performance to be executed.

In addition, a means for discriminating the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) operable by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the game ball shooting situation (or ball entering situation) are provided. It may be specified to change the rate at which the continuous effect is executed in association with the determination result of (1), or the plurality of contents described above may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Furthermore, in this control example, stop command processing (see FIG. 519) using the continuous performance execution selection table 222AA referred to when determining whether or not to execute continuous performance in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 518) However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute continuous production, but when determining whether to execute continuous production with winning information related processing (see FIG. 518) and stop command processing (see FIG. 519) It is also possible to configure the selection table to be referred to differently. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 519) is a special symbol jackpot when the continuous effect is executed rather than the selection table referred to in the winning information related process (see FIG. 518) It is good to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous performance is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the big win, and the more the game becomes more interesting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511(B), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 511B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twelfth control example. In the twelfth control example, in contrast to the eleventh control example described above, a production counter group 223AA, a continuous production flag 223AB, a continuous production flag 223AC, a continuous production interruption flag 223AD, a continuous production update area 223AE, The difference is that an effect number counter 223AF, an effect setting prohibition flag 223AG, a setting prohibition release flag 223AH, a time reduction counter 223AI, a fluctuation number counter 223J, an operation invalid flag 223AK, and a state storage area 223AZ are added. ing.

The production counter group 223AA is composed of a plurality of production counter means. This production counter group 223AA is a plurality of counters used for selection of a production variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selection of various advance notice productions, and the like. Each of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223AA has a range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. A random value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC capable of operating at an operating clock (e.g., 1 MHZ) at least for each effect counter, which can be updated to separate random values and execute judgment. is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223AA are used by the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the effect variation pattern (the variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various types of advance notice effect. The counter values are updated so that they are not synchronized. A plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223AA are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time main processing 2 (see FIG. 516) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Every second (every 1 Msec), an update process is performed so that it has a different value.

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, since a plurality of effect counters with different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected within one main process. Even in such a case, the same counter value is referred to, and it is suppressed that the selected effects are biased. If it is desired to synchronize the aspects, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in this control example, a plurality of counters with different counter value update patterns are used. may be configured to select With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the production counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the second digit, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate each value without regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223AB is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, in the winning information related processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 518), when it is determined to execute the continuous effect (Z5007 in FIG. 518: YES), the stop command processing of the sound lamp control device 113 ( In FIG. 519), when it is determined that the continuous effect is executed (Z5110 in FIG. 519: YES), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 518), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 521) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) Z5204 of 522) is set to OFF when the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 of FIG. 523) is executed (see Z5401 of FIG. 523).

That is, the continuous effect flag 223AB determines whether the continuous effect is executed based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main controller 110 when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is determined, and the fact that the determination result indicates that the continuous performance is to be executed is held until the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

In this control example, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 518), it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 518: YES), and the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 518). ), the continuous effect is executed when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) is executed. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) is executed in the set state, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not the continuous performance is to be started in the current variable display, and the continuous performance is performed based on the lottery result. may be configured to determine the variable display to start. By configuring in this way, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous effect is started are made different (the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64). After that, the continuous performance can be started with a variable display in which the continuous performance is not executed), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous performance.

Further, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 518), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous performance is started can be brought close to each other, so that the ball entering the ball to be the target of the continuous performance can be brought closer. It is possible to make the player easily comprehend. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous performance, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 enthusiastically during the fluctuation of the special symbol (during the execution of the fluctuation display), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. .

In addition, when changing the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed to a continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed period of the variable display being executed is determined, and the conditions under which the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device The effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous effect only when the variable display displayed in 81 has a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It should be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous performance is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect flag 223AC is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 522) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 522) is executed to set the continuous effect command for display. If it does (Z5406 in FIG. 523), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 523).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 522) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 524), and in the stop command process (see FIG. 519), no more When it is determined that the continuous effect will not continue (Z5106: NO in FIG. 519, or Z5110: NO), it is set to OFF (see Z5116 in FIG. 519).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, a brief description will be given of an event in which the continuous effect is interrupted. In this control example, the game state is a normal state (not a variable probability state or a time saving state), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed. configured to run. In addition, in this control example, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is digested with priority. It is configured so that the game property (the type of special symbol variation to be executed) is different between the probability variable state and the time saving state in which the ball is likely to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, even if the game state is normal, in order to temporarily make it easier to receive the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit The electric accessory 640A attached to the second ball entrance 640A and regulating the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640A is opened for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to execute a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640A while performing continuous performance using a plurality of pieces of prize winning information relating to the first special symbol, There was a case where the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed in spite of the fact that the continuous effect executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. There is a problem that the content of the effect being executed differs from the result of the lottery for the special symbols, which gives the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the first special symbol ( It is configured to restart the interrupted continuous performance when the variation of special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the contents of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbols are different, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrustful.

This continuous effect interrupt flag 223AD is set when the continuous effect flag 223AC is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 522) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. If determined (Z5505 in FIG. 524: YES), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 524). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON, the "waiting" display (interruption display mode in FIG. MA) is set (Z5508 in FIG. 524). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 522), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 522: YES), it is set to OFF (Z5304 in FIG. 522 ).

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first special symbol (special figure 1) is preferentially changed (lottery ) is performed when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, the continuous production is interrupted, and the timing when the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2 Since it is possible to resume the continuous production that has been interrupted at the timing when the fluctuation of is completed), the fluctuation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) without being involved in the fluctuation situation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) It is possible to execute continuous production corresponding to.

In addition, when the continuous performance is interrupted based on the fact that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed during the execution of the continuous performance, the player is notified that the continuous performance is suspended. is configured to inform the player of the continuous performance, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the sudden termination of the continuous performance and allowing the player to play while expecting the continuous performance to be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223AE, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, the background of the display screen is changed to the "sea background". ” is changed to another background (“mountain background”, “river background”), data for internally updating the continuous effect is stored.

As described above with reference to FIG. 560(A), in this control example, only when the "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the continuous effect is performed. configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, the state in which the special symbol variation is not executed (standby state), or immediately after the start of the special symbol variation ( During high-speed fluctuation), the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background of the display screen to "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 560), or "river background ( river mode)”.

Then, as a variable effect corresponding to the set background, a variable effect dedicated to each background or a variable effect common to a plurality of backgrounds is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. Various performances can be provided for the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the sea mode is being set and the sea mode exclusive variable effect (for example, continuous notice) is being executed. Then, a process of rewriting the display data relating to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after being variably set is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Therefore, if the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous effect and switches the background of the display screen from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data relating to the continuous effect is erased. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed, and the effect of the effect is lowered.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223AE is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect execution data is temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE, and after switching the background of the display screen to a mode other than "sea mode" during execution of the continuous effect, the background of the display screen is changed to "sea mode" again. mode", the rest of the continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuous effect disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223AE, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 523), after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 523), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". If so (Z5405 in FIG. 523: NO), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 523).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" (Z2871 in FIG. 526: YES) in the effect return process (see FIG. 526) of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 525), the The stored information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 526). After that, when the continuous effect ends, the information stored in the area (display data indicating the mode of effect) is erased (see Z5310 in FIG. 522).

Effect frequency counter 223AF is a counter for indicating the period (the number of special figure fluctuations) during which the continuous effect is executed. This effect number counter 223AF, when it is determined that the continuous effect is executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 518) (Z5007 in FIG. 518: YES), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A corresponding to the received winning command is set (Z5010 in FIG. 518). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 522) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521), when it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 522: YES), continuous effect is set. Continuous effect setting processing for is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 522).

The effect count counter 223AF is decremented by 1 (Z5407 in FIG. 523) each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 523) is executed. With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the winning information related processing (see FIG. 518), that is, the continuous effect flag 223AB is turned on. The continuous performance can be executed by using the period from the variable display executed in the set state to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous performance.

In this control example, the above-described period is used to execute the continuous effect, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect. Continuous production may be started by varying the production mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1 ) is changed twice, the continuous effect may be executed. Also, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON, when setting the display mode of the new variable display (when executing the variable display setting process 2), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. Execution determination means may be provided, and the continuous performance may be executed when the execution determination means determines that the continuous performance is to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous performance is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected performance.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during execution of the continuous effect, and is set to ON during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 518) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 518) (Z5007 in FIG. 518: YES). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON, the processing (processing of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 518) for determining whether or not to execute continuous effect in the winning information related process (see FIG. 518) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied by starting a new continuous effect while the player is watching the progress of the continuous effect. Then, in the stop command process (see FIG. 519), when it is determined that the continuous effect has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 519: YES), it is set to OFF. (Z5103 in FIG. 519).

In addition, in this control example, determination as to whether or not to execute a continuous effect is made at the timing of receiving a new winning command, that is, at the timing at which the winning information related processing (see FIG. 518) is executed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is set to ON (Z5102: YES in FIG. 519) in the timing of receiving the stop command for termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 519) configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 519), it is also set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 519) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed.

The time saving counter 223AI is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times the time saving state is set (remaining variation number of special symbols) when the time saving state is set as the game state. This time saving counter 223AI is set to a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the number of time saving times to be set when a state command indicating that the game state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main controller 110. , In the stop command processing (see FIG. 519), when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101: YES in FIG. 519) is executed during time saving processing (see FIG. 520) each time it is executed 1 is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 520).

Then, in the time saving process (see FIG. 520), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223AI is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 520), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 520: YES), the fluctuation 5 is set to the value of the number counter 223AJ.

The variation number counter 223AJ is a counter for grasping the number of variations of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is the normal state, when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed, the special effect (see FIG. 509 (B)) is configured to be performed. ing. This is because in the normal state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is intended to give benefits and grants. However, if the game state is a time-saving state, that is, a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640A is easily opened), the special figure 2 hold is acquired, There is a case where the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is executed in the normal state after the end of the time saving. If the special performance is executed even in such a case, the special performance becomes frequent after the end of the time saving, and it becomes difficult to give the special feeling of the special performance to the player.

To solve the above-described problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol which is executed within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations in the special symbol executed after the end of the time saving has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. It is configured not to set a special effect when it is determined that As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the special performance is frequently generated after the end of the time saving.

In addition, in this control example, the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time saving is 5 times, that is, the value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set a predetermined number of times Because it is set as , even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern (special figure 2) at the upper limit, a special effect is executed by the special figure 2 holding ball acquired during the time saving state. However, conditions other than the above-described control example may be set as conditions for not executing the special effect, for example, the number of balls held in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) A value (for example, 3) smaller than the upper limit (4) may be set as the predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, if the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of time saving, special performance will be executed, so that the player will willingly hold the ball of special figure 2. It can be made to accumulate, and the operation of a game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the condition using the number of fluctuations of the special design is set as the condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state ends A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means does not exceed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special performance. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, if the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends and the game is played without changing the special symbol after it becomes a normal state is finished), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game played by the next player.

In addition, game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. When it is determined that the ball has been hit, it may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of the special effect as the variable display for the hit ball.

This variation counter 223AJ is, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223AI is 0 in the time saving process (see FIG. 520) (Z5152 in FIG. 520: YES), the execution of the special effect is restricted (prohibited) special A value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of times of pattern variation is set (Z5153 in FIG. 520), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 521) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 524) for setting the special effect, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is referred to, and if it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 530: NO) , the effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 530).

The operation invalidation flag 223AK is a flag for indicating a period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to ON during the period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is being executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, the player may mistakenly operate the frame button 22 during the period when the effect (special effect) that is difficult to be executed is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from being switched while the special performance is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 524) (Z5504 in FIG. 524), and the first special symbol in the effect setting process (FIG. 522) (Special Figure 1) When setting the variable effect (Z5301 in FIG. 522: YES), it is set to OFF (Z5302 in FIG. 522). While the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen (the process of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 525) is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 525). Skipped.

The state storage area 223AZ is an area for storing state information indicating the current game state based on a state command output from the main controller 110. FIG. Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 517) that a status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 517: YES), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 517). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 outputs a state command indicating the current gaming state. etc.), the game state can be appropriately determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the twelfth control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 512 to 515. FIG. In this 12th control example, the special symbol variation process (Figure 462) is special symbol variation process 2 (Figure 512), the special symbol 1 variation start process (Figure 464) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (Figure 465) are special. In the symbol variation start process 2 (Fig. 513), the starting winning process (Fig. 466) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (Fig. 514), and the look-ahead process (Fig. 467) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (Fig. 515). This is the main difference.

With reference to FIG. 512, special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: Figure 513) in the 12th control example, the process of Z203 to Z214 is changed to the process of Z330 to Z340 for the special symbol variation process (Z104: Figure 462) in the 11th control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 513), first, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: YES), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (Z201: NO), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (Z202: NO), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is obtained (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the obtained special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 1 or more (Z331). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z331: YES), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter changed by calculation. A pending ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203E is set (Z333). According to the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203A are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340).

On the other hand, in the process of Z331, when it is determined that the acquired value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203E is 0 (Z331: NO), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D (N1) (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: YES), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D changed by calculation is A pending ball number command indicating a value is set (Z338). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 476) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203A is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203A are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340). Incidentally, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: NO), this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 513, special symbol variation start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 513) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this twelfth control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: Figure 513) in the 12th control example, special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: Figure 464) and special symbol 2 variation start process (214: Figure 465) in the 11th control example The difference is that the processing of is collectively performed. Since the contents of the processing are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 514, the starting winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 514) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the starting winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 514) in the twelfth control example, Z308 and Z316 are not executed with respect to the starting winning process (Z105: FIG. 466) in the eleventh control example. The difference is that the processing is collectively executed by the processing of Z360. Since the contents of the processing are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 515, the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is one process in the starting winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing the contents of this prefetching process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new prize winning information (Z361: NO), this process ends. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: YES), a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol reserved ball storage area. Each value of the counter CS1 is obtained (Z362). Next, among the determination results defined in the special symbol big hit random number table 202A, the winning determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results defined in the jackpot type selection table 202D, a winning type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results defined in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results defined in the variation pattern selection table 202B, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained (Z366). Winning information including hit determination result information indicating the acquired hit determination result, hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and variation type information for indicating the variation type determination result. A command is set (Z367), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the twelfth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 516 to 526. FIG. In the twelfth control example, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), which is one process in the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, is performed in contrast to the eleventh control example. The main points are that the process 2 (Z2151) is changed from the command determination process (Z2113) to the command determination process 2 (Z2152), and the variable display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). This is the difference.

Command determination processing 2 (Z2152) in main processing 2 executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 517 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In command determination processing 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: YES), the fluctuation start flag 223D provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this processing ends. do. Note that the processing of Z2203 to Z2207 is the same processing as in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, if it is determined in the process of Z2206 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z2206: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: YES), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2254). Next, the winning information related process (Z2255) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the winning information related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of Z2253, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: NO), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). If it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: YES), the state information indicating the game state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223AZ (Z2257), and this processing ends.

In the process of Z2256, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: NO), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258).If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: YES), stop. Execute command processing (Z2259). Details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2258, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: NO), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 518, the winning information related process (Z2255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 518 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning information related process (Z2255).

The winning information related process (Z2255) first stores the information of the received winning information command in the corresponding winning information storage area 223F (Z5001). Next, the reading of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is executed (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not equal to or greater than 2 (Z5003: NO), this processing ends.

In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5003: YES), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is on (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is ON (Z5004: YES), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222AA is read (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: NO), the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007: YES), the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is read (Z5009), and the value of the read counter is It is set as the value of the number-of-effects counter 223AF (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 519, the stop command process (Z2259), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 519 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z5101: YES), the time saving process (Z5115) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the processing during time saving (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5101: NO), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223AH provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z5102). If the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is off (Z5102: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag AH is ON (Z5102: YES), the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG and the setting prohibition release flag AH are set OFF (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A. (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: NO), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5105, if it is determined that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: YES), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is 2 or more, winning information Read is executed from the storage area 223F (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information for a big hit (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no jackpot winning (Z5107: NO), the continuous effect flag 223AC is set to OFF (Z5116), and this process is finished as it is. When it is determined that there is jackpot winning information (Z5107: YES), the continuous performance execution selection table 222AA provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and the execution of continuous performance is determined (Z5109). After executing the processing of Z5109, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: NO), the process of Z5116 described above is executed, and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is time to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: YES), the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A corresponding to the big hit is set as the value of the effect number counter 223AF (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5114), and this process is executed. finish.

With reference to FIG. 520, the time-saving middle process (Z5115), which is one process in the stop command process (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 520 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time-saving process (Z5115).

In the time saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223AI provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: YES), the value of the fluctuation number counter AJ is set to 5 (Z5153), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223AI is greater than 0 in the process of Z5152 (Z5153: NO), the process of Z5153 is skipped and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 521, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 516) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 521 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the twelfth control example differs from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the eleventh control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z5202, the extracted variation pattern is obtained (Z5203). Next, effect setting processing (Z5204) is executed. Details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223F is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223AJ is greater than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is greater than 1 (Z5207: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ (Z5208). In the process of Z5207, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is 0 (Z5207: NO), the process of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

522, the effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 522 is a flow chart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special symbol (Z5301: YES), the operation invalid flag 223AK provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous production interruption flag 223AD is set to ON (Z5303: YES), the continuous production interruption flag 223AD is set to OFF (Z5304). On the other hand, in the process of Z5303, when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to OFF (Z5303: YES), the process of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the processing of Z5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect number counter 223AF is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (Z5305: YES), a continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, when the value of the number-of-effects counter 223AF is 0 (Z5305: NO), a variation pattern without continuous effects is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5308). If the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to OFF (Z5308: NO), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223AG is set to ON (Z5308: YES), the setting prohibition release flag 223AH is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE is cleared (Z5310), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5301, when it is determined that the current variation is not the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301: NO), special effect setting processing (Z5311) is executed. Details of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIG. 523, the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 523 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223AB is set to OFF (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-effects counter 223AF is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223AF is 1 (Z5402: YES), the continuous effect final mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223AF is other than 1 (Z5402: NO), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the background mode is currently set to sea mode (Z5405). If it is determined that the sea mode is set (Z5405: YES), a display continuous effect command for indicating the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). ), the continuous effect flag 223AC is set to ON (Z5408), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: NO), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is on standby is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the processing of Z5407 to Z5408 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 524, the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example, will be described. FIG. 524 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during working hours (Z5501). If it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5501: NO), it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223AJ is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is 0 (Z5502: YES), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223AC is set to ON (Z5505). If it is set to ON (Z5505: YES), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON (Z5506). When it is set to OFF (Z5506: NO), the continuous effect interruption flag 223AD is set to ON (Z5507), and a display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5501, if it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z5501: YES), or in the process of Z5502, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223AJ is not 0 (Z5502: NO), The production mode of the normal production corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the processing of Z5509 described above is executed, and this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of Z5505, if it is determined that the continuous production flag 223AC is turned off (Z5505: NO), or if it is determined that the continuous production interruption flag 223AD is set to ON in the processing of Z5506 (Z5506: YES), skip the processing of Z5507 to Z5508 described above, execute the processing of Z5509, and end this processing.

Frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 525 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (Z2151). The twelfth control example differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) of the eleventh control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added. Other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the processing of Z2851, it is determined whether or not the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223AK is off (Z2851: NO), the same processing as Z2803-Z2804 of the eleventh control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 526, an effect return process (Z2852) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth control example. will be explained. FIG. 526 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production return process (Z2852).

In the effect return processing (Z2852), first, it is determined whether or not the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: NO), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: YES), the effect modes stored in the continuous effect update area 223AE are read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: NO), this processing ends. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: YES), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 525, the description continues. Effect return processing (Z2852) is executed, then sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223AK is set to ON (Z2851: YES), sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed and this processing ends.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 527 to 530, the thirteenth control example described above will be described. In the thirteenth control example described above, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous performance is being executed, the continuous performance being executed is interrupted, and the variation of the special figure 2 A configuration is used in which the continuous performance that has been interrupted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol after the end of the is resumed. As a result, the continuous performance can be executed corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol, and the continuous performance can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the twelfth control example described above, if the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the predetermined period has elapsed (after the special figure 2 fluctuation ends), so whether the continuous effect is restarted Since it is not possible to make the player's heart beat faster, there has been a demand for further enhancing the presentation effect. On the other hand, in this thirteenth control example, based on the game content (the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2) and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous production, when the continuous production is interrupted It is configured to determine whether or not to resume the continuous performance in the middle, and to resume the continuous performance based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the continuous performance is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous performance will be resumed while enjoying the special performance executed as the variable performance of the special figure 2. You can increase the effect.

Further, in the thirteenth control example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous performance, is a big hit, the continuous performance is easily restarted. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the continuous performance to be resumed. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of times of special performance execution) executed while the continuous performance is interrupted, the more easily the continuous performance is restarted. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous performance to the restart is short, the continuous performance can be easily restarted, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, when a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous performance, is not successful, the player does not have unnecessary expectations for the big win. In order to do so, it is configured to make it difficult for the continuous performance to be restarted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 527, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 527 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modification. In this 13th control example, in addition to the RAM223 of the 12th control example described above, the difference is that a special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is added. Other elements are the same as those in the twelfth control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (Fig. 530) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 530), and the value of the counter is referenced in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 529) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 528) (Z5602 in FIG. 529). In the process of Z5602, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is smaller than 3 (Z5602 of FIG. 529: YES), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is set to 0 (of FIG. 529 Z5603). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is determined to be 3 or more (Z5602 in FIG. 529: NO), that is, while the continuous production is interrupted, the second special symbol variation is executed 3 times or more. If so, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 529), and if it is determined that there is no (Z5605 in FIG. 529: YES) , the value of the effect number counter 223AF is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 529), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

That is, in the continuous production return process (see FIG. 529), when the interrupted continuous production is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the interruption of the continuous production is a predetermined number of times (three times) or more. , Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special figure 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not to restart the continuous performance, and when the performance result of the continuous performance is out, the continuous performance is restarted. However, since this only disappoints the player, the value of the performance number counter 223AF is set to 0 so that the continuous performance is not restarted. As a result, when a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous performance, is not successful, the player is given a sense of unnecessary expectation for the big win. In addition, when the continuous performance is restarted, expectations for a big win can be made, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 528 to 530, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. In the thirteenth control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 522), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 521), is partially changed from the twelfth control example. Mainly different. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 528, effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of variable display setting executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example, will be described. Effect setting processing 3 (Z5204: FIG. 528) in the thirteenth control example differs from the effect setting processing (Z5204: FIG. 522) in the twelfth control example in that the processing of Z5310 is not executed and the special effect processing (Z5311 ) and the addition of continuous effect return processing (Z5351). Other processing is the same as in the twelfth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 529 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous production return process (Z5351), first, the reading of the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is executed (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 variation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). When it is determined that it is greater than 3 (Z5602: YES), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223BA is determined to be less than 3 (Z5602: NO), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223F is executed. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a win in the read win information (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: NO), the value of the effect number counter 223AF is set to 0 (Z5606), then the above-described processing of Z5603 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, when it is determined that there is a win (Z5605: YES), the process of Z5603 is executed, and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 530, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: Figure 530) in the thirteenth control example executes the process of Z5504 with respect to the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the twelfth control example. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<14th control example>
Next, a fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 531 to 542. FIG. The fourteenth control example is different from the above-described control examples in that it has adjusting means for allowing the player to adjust the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 .

First, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 531 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 531, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example differs from the above-described eleventh control example in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23A, right volume button 23B) for adjusting the volume are provided. They are different and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and consists of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. This RTC 292 has an input/output port, a device control section, and a register. Also, the RTC 292 is connected to a power supply for RTC. This power supply for RTC is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. For example, a button type battery is used as the RTC power supply 353, and is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input/output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292 . The input/output port is interconnected with the audio lamp controller 113 . The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored and operations can be performed on the stored data. The register includes at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

The clock register is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the clock information clocked in the clock register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time presentation.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the clock register (clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area of the RAM 223. ) or to store the clock information stored in the time information storage area. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is depressed, the clock information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the clock register (clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area. .

As a result, the pachinko hall clerk turns on the power all at once without depressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall or the like. can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time presentation can be matched. On the other hand, if the power to some of the pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the opening hours of the hall (for example, to cancel an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 must be depressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the clock information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the time performance from being shifted between the pachinko machine 10 whose power is shut off and the other pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533, a display screen regarding volume adjustment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described. Figure 532(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and Figure 532(B) shows that no game is being played. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and FIG. FIG. 533(B) is a schematic diagram showing a customer waiting screen in a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is not powered on, and FIG. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 532(A), when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A comment "Please wait for a while" is displayed as the display mode S1 during recovery, and a volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. This volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that indicates the current volume numerically on the right side of the gauge. 1” is displayed, and the hatched area corresponding to the set value “1” is displayed on the gauge. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 532(B), when the left volume button 23A or the right volume button 23B is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. be. The volume switching display S3 includes a "switch" display indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume decrease display mode S3A indicating that the volume decreases when the left volume button 23A is pressed, and a volume decrease display mode S3A which indicates that the volume decreases when the right volume button 23B is pressed. and a volume increase display mode S3B indicating that the volume is increased. The volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23A and the right volume button 23B while the volume switching display S3 is being displayed.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when performing a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally manipulating the control contents of the main control device 110 to aim for a big win), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once. Some turn off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent actions, there is a countermeasure that emits a loud sound when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

However, there are many pachinko machines 10 in recent years that emit a loud sound temporarily as a method of enhancing the performance effect. There was a problem that the store clerk at the amusement arcade would miss hearing. On the other hand, in the 14th control example, from the minimum value of the setting range of the volume that can be variably set by the player, from the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the first special symbol variation is completed. It is also configured to output a small sound. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a game machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game emits an unnecessarily small sound, giving a sense of incongruity compared to the surrounding game machines. It can be made easy to be found by a store clerk in the game arcade.

Further, in this control example, since the player is not allowed to adjust the sound volume from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the first special symbol variation is completed, illegal It is possible to prevent the player who performed the action from adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10 by operating the volume button 23 after the power is turned on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 533(A), the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on displays the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. It consists of In this way, although a volume smaller than the volume setting value "1" is internally output, by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen, an illegal It is possible to prevent the player performing the action from seeing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and perceiving that the pachinko machine 10 has anti-fraud measures.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 533(B), when the volume button 23 is pressed during the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the power is turned on (the volume output is smaller than the set value "1"), Also, the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 534 to 536, the electrical configuration in this 14th control example will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example. It is different from each control example described above in that volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23A, right volume button 23B) are provided, and the rest is the same.

Next, referring to FIG. 535(A), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 535A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourteenth control example differs greatly from the ROMs of the above-described control examples in that a volume table 222CA is provided. Other elements are the same.

The volume table 222CA is a data table that defines volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 . Here, the contents of volume table 222CA will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222CA. As shown in FIG. 536, in the volume table 222CA, in addition to the set values (set values “1” to “4”) that can be set by operating the volume button 23, a predetermined condition after power-on is satisfied. A set value (set value "A") that is set when the device is on is defined, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) of the first rotation after the power is turned on is completed. When the setting value "A" is set, a sound with a loudness of 15DB (decibel) is output. When the set value "1" is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound with a loudness of 30 DB (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a loud sound of 75 DB (decibel) is output. When the set value "3" is set, a sound with a loudness of 85 DB (decibel) is output, and when the set value "4" is set, a sound with a loudness of 95 DB (decibel) is output. A sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on. For example, a flag that is set to ON only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and when the flag is set to ON, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. Alternatively, the power-on time may be discriminated, and a different set value may be set as the initial value based on the discrimination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 535(B), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. In the thirteenth control example, a set volume storage area 223CA, a volume operation invalid flag 223CB, and a volume change wait flag 223CC are added to the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described 12th control example. They are different in that respect. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The set sound volume storage area 223CA is an area for storing (storing) the set sound volume that is currently set, and is set in the initial sound volume setting process (see FIG. 538) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 537). The set value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 538). Also, the setting value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 540) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 539) of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 540).

The volume operation disable flag 223CB is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in setting value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is disabled. change) is disabled. This volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set when it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 538) that the RTC time is during business hours (for example, from 10:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.) (Z6002 in FIG. 538: YES), it is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 538) and referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 540) (Z6107 in FIG. 540). If it is determined that it is set to ON in the process of Z6107 (see Z6107 in FIG. 540), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 532(A)) is displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 532(B)). ) is set (Z6110 in FIG. 540). Then, it is set to off (Z5122 in FIG. 542) in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 542) executed in stop command processing 4 (FIG. 541). That is, when the special symbol variation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON, it is set to OFF.

The volume change standby flag 223CC is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is. In the thirteenth control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, first, it is necessary to press the volume button 23 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the volume switching display S3. The volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23A or the right volume button 23B) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is erroneously pressed during a game.

In addition, when the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation with the RAM clear switch 122 operated (depressed state) at the time of power-on, the maximum A sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at a volume or a volume higher than the maximum volume set by operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clearing and aiming for a winning random value.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to output the game sound at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation until one variation at the time of power-on is completed. When the special symbols are variably displayed at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to output a sound such as BGM or a sound effect (audio for performance), and the volume is set to the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加may be displayed, and the volume may be maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23 . By configuring in this way, when a game is started at the opening of the amusement arcade after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (the previous day's volume setting), resulting in a high volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by being output in . Furthermore, by setting the volume lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware of the low volume while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. It can be made aware that it is configured. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching the volume to a level lower than the minimum volume by switching to the demo screen regardless of when the power is turned on. Furthermore, after the game is started (variation of the special symbols starts), the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume smaller than the minimum volume is continued, the changed special symbols The display color (volume pattern and volume button (volume up with right operation, volume down with left operation) pattern) on the volume setting screen is variable depending on the winning lottery result and the pending memory, but depending on the lottery result (prefetching result) It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for winning is notified by letting the player win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enjoy a game with a quiet volume until a change or storage with a high degree of expectation is made, and to increase the volume at the timing when the degree of expectation becomes high.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the fourteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 537 to Z324, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. In the 14th control example, compared to the 11th control example, the initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the startup process, and the volume setting process (Z2171) and sound editing/output process (Z2109) are added to the main process. The main differences are the addition of processing and the addition of volume-related processing (Z5120) to the stop command processing, which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

Referring to FIG. 537, startup processing executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 537) in the 14th control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 493) in the 11th control example in that an initial sound volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 538, the initial sound volume setting (Z2051), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 537) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 538 is a flow chart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether it is during business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: NO), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222CA provided in the ROM 222, stored in the set volume storage area 223CA provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222CA, stored in the set volume storage area 223CA (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON. (Z6005), this processing ends.

Main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 4. FIG. The main processing (FIG. 539) in the 14th control example differs from the main processing (FIG. 476) in the 12th control example in that volume setting processing (Z2171) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 540, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 539) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 540 is a flow chart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether or not the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this processing ends. If the volume button has been operated (Z6101: YES), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223CC provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change waiting flag 223CC is set to ON (Z6102: YES), the set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222CA (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the set volume storage area 223CA (Z6106), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6102 that the volume change standby flag 223CC is set to OFF (Z6102: NO), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to OFF (Z6107: NO), a display volume change command for showing the volume gauge and adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223CC is set to ON (Z6109), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z6107, if the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON (Z6107: YES), a display volume command for showing the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this process ends.

Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 541 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop command process 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the 14th control example differs from the stop command processing (FIG. 519) in the 12th control example in that volume-related processing (Z5120) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 542, volume-related processing (Z5120), which is one processing in stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 542 is a flow chart showing the contents of volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether or not the volume operation disable flag 223CB provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to ON (Z5121: YES), the volume operation invalid flag 223CB is set to OFF (Z5122), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is OFF (Z5121: NO), the process of Z5122 is not executed and the present process ends.

<Regarding the fifteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 543 to 563. FIG. In the fifteenth control example, control processing regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 707) will be described. Only differences with respect to the eleventh control example will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

In the fifteenth control example, mainly when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the initial operation of the tilting device 310, error processing during the initial operation, control processing and error processing in the operation of the tilting device 310 during a normal game Processing will be explained.

With reference to FIGS. 543(A) and 543(B), the display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of tilting device 310 will be described. FIG. 543A shows that in the initial operation (tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 560) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110) when the power is turned on, the tilting operation timer 223DB of the tilting device 310, which will be described later, is set to 0 ( When it is not detected at the origin position even after the initial movement is completed and the initial movement period reaches the origin position), the abnormality notification display mode (error display).

As shown in FIG. 543(A), even if the operation period for completing the initial operation of the tilting device 310 has passed, the origin sensor of the operation device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position. The text "Button return error A, please call a staff member" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to notify hall employees or the like that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, during the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends, an error is displayed as shown in FIG. 543(A). there is In addition, although the details will be described later, the normal game in which the player may interfere with the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding down the operation with the hand etc. In some cases, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not displayed immediately, but a predetermined specific condition (for example, every three variations of the special symbol, the tilting device 310 is operated four times If an abnormality is continuously detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, etc.), an error is notified, and the progress of the game is continued even if it is not a mechanical abnormality. It is configured to be able to suppress defects that would otherwise interfere.

As shown in FIG. 543(A), the error display at the time of the initial operation is identifiable as "button return error A" so that mechanical (including control-related) abnormalities are displayed. It is designed so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 543(B), after the tilting device 310 is operated in the game effect during the normal game (during the game after the initial action of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the movement (movement) to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even after the movement to the origin position is completed, an error will not be displayed immediately, and an internal error will occur. is set to the status indicating the detected state, and thereafter, an operation to move to the origin position is performed every three fluctuations of the special pattern, and if it can be moved to the origin position four times in succession, the third pattern display device An error message is displayed in the main display area DM of 81 to inform players and hall employees that an error has occurred in the tilting device 310. be done.

Here, by displaying a character "button return error B" different from that during the initial operation, it is configured so that an abnormality during normal game can be easily identified. As described above, in this control example, the error display is executed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that interferes with the tilting motion 310 during the normal game. It is configured in such a way as to suppress frequently-executed failures. Also, when it is confirmed that the tilting device 310 does not have an abnormality by executing an error display during a normal game, the player is playing a game method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, the error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented at an early stage by the hall employee or the like confirming the game method.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 544 to 546, the relationship between the operation of tilting device 310, variation of special symbols, and touch sensor effects will be described. FIG. 544 shows a period during which the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin 10 is a timing chart in an example in which detection is not made by the origin sensor even after the return is completed.

When the variable display of normal reach out A (variation time (variation period) 30000MS) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired, and the judgment value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222DA described later. , and if it matches the value of the effect counter 223H that has been acquired, a tilting motion scenario A table 222DB1 (see FIG. 551(A)), which will be described later, is determined. The tilting motion scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 551(A)) shows the position where the tilting device 310 descends to the position shown in FIG. , and the highest position (see FIG. 734) are repeated at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and then the operation of descending to the origin position shown in FIG. 724 is executed (set).

When normal reach out A is executed, 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (T1), the third symbol is in the reach display mode (the third symbol in the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol. temporarily stopped (stopped). In the ready-to-win display mode, a pattern simulating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Here, for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the tilting operation 320 was pressed and the frame button 22 was pressed, which will be described later. An operation effective period (T5) is set during which the detection is determined to be effective when detected by the detection sensor 324 that detects the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 544 and 551(A), after 18 seconds (18000 MS) (T1) from the start of the normal reach deviation A, the drive motor 342 rotates 210 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 724). The step rotation rotates the disc cam 344 clockwise by 210 degrees from the origin position (position shown in FIG. 724), and moves to the cam release position shown in FIG. 732 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 551(A)). ). After that, the driving motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000MS) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 551(A))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 732) by 20 steps, causing the disc cam 344 to rotate counterclockwise 20 degrees to the unlocked position. (see Fig. 734) (see action pointer 3 (Fig. 551) (A)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaged position to the unlocked position, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise direction) as shown in FIG. By rotating, the rotation claw member 347 is rotated clockwise, and the lock (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotation claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is rotated by the torsion spring 315. is raised by the biasing force of In this case, when the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, a force in the longitudinal direction is applied to the tilting device 320 to increase the lifting force and improve the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and the period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 551(A))). After that, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 734) to rotate the disc cam 344 counterclockwise by 50 degrees, moving downward from the highest position (see FIG. 734) by 50 degrees. It is moved to the swung downward position (see FIG. 735) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 551(A))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is again driven 50 steps in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 735) to rotate the disk cam 344 clockwise by 50 degrees, and the tilting device 320 is moved again. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 734) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 551(A))).

After that, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven again from the highest position to the tilted-down position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 551(A))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 moves from the tilted-down position to the maximum position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the raised position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 551(A))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for one second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 551(A))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 558) is executed, and driving is performed based on the later-described origin detection operation A table 222D3 (see FIG. 552A). By driving the motor 342 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 734), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the driving force is applied in the direction in which the tilting device 320 descends to the origin position. is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 544, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed at the highest position so as not to be lowered by the player. In such a case, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, the movable clutch 343C is separated from the transmission gear 343B and the transmission gear 343B is idly rotated so that the drive motor 342 is driven. Also, the disc cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223DB (1900MS) set in the origin detection operation A table 222DB3 (see FIG. 552(A)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an internal (abnormal state not notified to the outside) tilting device 310 malfunction, which will be described later.

As described above, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the origin position because the player holds the tilting device 320, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343B) can be operated by the structure of the movable clutch 343C. Damage to the drive motor 342, transmission gear 343B, etc. due to idling can be suppressed. Further, by configuring it so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that there is an abnormality in the return-to-origin operation, it is possible to internally identify an abnormal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 545, when the effect of raising tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 544) is executed, the origin sensor is detected even after the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900 MS) has elapsed. is not turned on, and the control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" will be described. Fig. 545 shows that when the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three variations of the special symbol (special symbol) are performed. It is a timing chart when

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed in which the driving motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every three variations of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, until the origin sensor is detected, the value of the tilting operation status must be maintained at "4", and the origin sensor must be turned on by retrying four times (retrying every three fluctuations four times). , the error display shown in FIG. 543(B) is executed.

As a result, an effect in which the tilting device 310 rises is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player performs a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation and the origin position is detected. Even if an abnormality occurs in which the movement to is not performed, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol variation is performed a specified number of times (three times) without immediately announcing the abnormality as in the case of the abnormality at the time of the initial operation. However, if it is determined that the player has not been able to continuously move to the origin position, an error is displayed. It is possible to suppress the problem of being busy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing when it becomes true will be described. FIG. 546 is a timing chart showing operations of the tilting device 310 that are executed when an effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. A change in the special symbol is started, a notice effect is selected in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective, and an effective period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player puts his/her hand over the touch sensor 290 or the like. At the timing when it is determined that the operation is performed and the touch sensor 290 is detected to be ON, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to perform the origin detection operation. FIG. 546 shows a case where the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to "0". On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600MS) has elapsed, the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped, and the tilting operation status remains set to "4". . As a result, the retry operation is continuously performed every three fluctuations, and control for resolving the malfunction of the tilting device 310 can be performed.

The player normally operates the shooting handle with the right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with the left hand. When the player is playing a game while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the origin position, it is conceivable that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand. By causing the tilting device 310 to perform the origin detection operation in , the origin detection operation is executed in a state in which the tilting device 310 is released from being held, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is on. The origin detection operation may be executed in such a manner that the origin detection operation is performed in a state in which the player's holding is more reliably released. In addition, not only the touch sensor 290, but also the frame button 290 may be used, and the third pattern display device 81 may execute an advance notice effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). Alternatively, an effect for reading a three-dimensional code or the like with a mobile phone or the like may be executed, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Naturally, the effect may be such that the user is instructed to use both hands by voice.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 547 to 552. FIG. FIG. 547 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example. In the fifteenth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the eleventh control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. A detailed configuration of the tilting device 310 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 707 to 746. FIG.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven so that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the locking of the tilting device 310 at the lower limit position to prevent the upward movement is released. When the locking is released, the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, is assisted by the vibration force in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is lifted to the highest position by the biasing force of the spring. .

On the other hand, when the tilting member 310 is at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the origin position by rotating the driving motor 342 in a direction opposite to the upward rotation. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311A is locked by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 724), and the lifting of the tilting device 310 is restricted.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. , the left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311GL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311GR (OFF state). , it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position and the player further presses it down, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311GR (ON state), and both the left detection sensor 324L and the left detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , the tilting device 310 can be determined to be operated at the lower limit position by the player.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position, but also when it is regulated at the lowest position. It can be used for various performances. For example, if the tilting device 310 is raised and the effect of pressing down is set to have a high probability of being executed during the variation of the special symbol in which the result of the success/failure determination is a hit, the tilting device 310 can increase the expectation of the result of the success/failure determination. can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, repeatedly vibrates the tilting device 310 from the back side to the front side, vibrating the tilting device 310. , to execute an effect in which the player can feel vibration when touching the tilting device 310. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the tilting device 310 is lifted, it is lifted by the urging force of the spring against the force of gravity. , the vibration from the voice coil motor 352 gives a lifting force, and the problem that the lifting force is weakened by its own weight can be suppressed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifteenth control example, the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described eleventh control example is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 548(A). FIG. 548(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. This fifteenth control example differs from the above-described eleventh control example in that an operation effect selection table 222DA, a tilting motion scenario table DB, an origin detection motion A table 222DCC, an origin detection motion B table 222DD, and an initial tilting motion table 222DE are added. are doing.

The operation effect selection table 222DA is a table for selecting operation data (operation details) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 550(A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222DA. In the operation effect selection table 222DA, the judgment value of the effect counter 223H for determining whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability depending on the variation type of the special symbol is set. A tilt action scenario type is set for a determination value for executing an operation effect. The tilting action scenario includes an operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310. and an operation valid start time (operation valid start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid ends. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222DA, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is to be executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 are determined. A valid period (T5) is set to effectively determine the operation when the button is pressed by the user.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach loss A", the value of the production counter 223H is acquired to determine whether to execute the operation production. When it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed by executing the effect selection table 222DA (when the value of the effect counter 223H acquired is any one of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is as follows. A tilting action scenario A table 222BD1, which will be described later, is selected, the tilting action timer 223DB (T2) is set to 8800 MS (Z2923 in FIG. 559), the operation presentation start time (T1) is set to 18000 MS, and the effective operation start time (T3) is set. ) is set to 23300 MS, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 MS.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the special symbols is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach miss A", the value of the production counter 223H is obtained to determine whether to execute the operation production. When it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed by executing the selection table 222DA (when the value of the effect counter 223H acquired is any one of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device will be described later. The action scenario B table 222BD2 is selected, the tilt action timer 223DB (T2) is set to 7900 MS (Z2923 in FIG. 559), the operation presentation start time (T1) is set to 38000 MS, and the operation valid start time (T3) is set to 41500 MS. is set, and 45900 MS is set to the operation valid end time (T4). In this way, according to the variation type of the special symbol, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is valid are set in advance, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting motion scenario table 222DB sets origin detection motion tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the type of tilting motion scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222DA and the tilting motion scenario. A data table has been set up to

FIG. 550(B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting motion scenario table 222DB. The tilting motion scenario table 222DB includes a tilting motion scenario A table 222DB1, a tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2, an origin detection motion A table 222DB3, and an origin detection motion B table 222DB4.

The tilting motion scenario A table 222DB1 is a table that defines the motion contents in the tilting motion scenario A, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is out of normal reach A or hit normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting action scenario A table 222DB1 is set by lottery in the operation effect selection table 222DA when the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 551(A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario A table 222DB1. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222DA is triggered after the start of the variation of the special symbols, the operation of the tilting motion scenario A table 222DB1 is started.

The operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is to read the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer sequentially from "1" for the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2953 in FIG. 561). ), the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "10" (tilting motion timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (18000 MS) has come after the start of the special symbol variation, the operation pointer is "1" operation data (210 steps in the backward direction during 2100 MS 732) is executed, and the cam disengaging operation (the releasing member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344C4 of the disk cam 344 so that the second protruding portion 344C3 moves to the upper portion of the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 732). (ie, movement of the second overhanging portion 344C3 to the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 732) without operating the rotary pawl member 347) to reach the cam disengaged position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer set to "2" (suspended during 3000 MS). The motion data with the motion pointer set to "3" (movable 20 steps forward during 200MS) is executed, and the unlocking motion (the second protruding portion 344C3 rotates the release member 346 downward , rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the engagement with the tilting device 320), the disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocking position, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the motion data with the motion pointer of "4" (stopped during 500 MS) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer of "5" (50 steps can be moved forward during 500 MS) is executed. ) is executed to reach the position shown in FIG. 735, and the movement pointer is set to the position shown in FIG. The motion data with the motion pointer of "7" (50 steps can be moved forward during 500 MS) is executed, and the position shown in Fig. 735 is reached again. 735) is executed and the position is again shown in FIG. 734 is executed, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222DB1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved from the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is at the highest position. After performing the fanning motion, the motion of returning to the origin position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 544, when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts to rise, the detection is considered valid. After being discriminated, the third symbol display device 81 displays a specific notice performance (for example, a performance notifying the degree of expectation of winning, etc.), and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also produce sound effects matching the notice performance. and the lamp lighting mode is lit. After the tilting device 320 starts to rise, if the player presses the tilting device 320 before the operation effective period (T5) of 3.5 seconds elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation is executed by the operation A table 222DB3, when the tilting device 320 is moved to the origin position by the pressing operation, and the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the origin position, the origin is detected. An operation based on the operation A table 222DB3 is executed to move the disc cam 344 to the initial position (origin position).

In addition, when the tilting device 320 is held by the player at a raised position or the like and the transmission gear 343B idly rotates, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is turned ON, so that the position of the disk cam 344 is determined to be the initial position. to the origin position is executed.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2 is a table that defines motion details in the tilting motion scenario B, and stores motion data when the tilting device 310 moves when the variation pattern type is super reach A. As described above, the tilting action scenario B table 222DB2 is set by lottery in the operation effect selection table 222DA when the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 551(B) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222DA is triggered after the start of the variation of the special symbols, the operation of the tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2 is started.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2 sequentially reads out the motion contents corresponding to the motion pointer from "1" (Z2953 in FIG. 561) during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting motion timer 223DB. , the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "11" (tilting motion timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (38000MS) has come after the start of the special symbol variation, the operation data with the operation pointer "1" (50 steps in the forward direction during 500MS) ) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer of "2" (stopped during 3000 MS) is executed, standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer of "3" (during 200 MS 20 steps can be moved forward) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "4" (20 steps can be moved backward during 200MS) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "5" ( 20 steps can be moved forward during 200 MS) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "6" (20 steps can be moved backward during 200 MS) is executed, and the motion pointer is "7". (movable 20 steps in the forward direction during 200 MS) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "8" (movable 20 steps in the backward direction during 200 MS) is executed, and this motion Three repeated motions from pointers '3' to '8' are set as a fanning motion, and the motion data with the motion pointer '9' (movable 120 steps forward during 1200 MS) is executed, and the position shown in FIG. 740, the motion pointer is set to "11" and the motion is completed.

By configuring in this way, the tilting device 310 performs the tilting motion during the ready-to-win effect, prompting the player to operate, and changing the tilting motion according to the variation type, while the operation effect is being executed. Furthermore, by stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation is generated, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, the type of tilting motion scenario is set according to the type of variation pattern. may be configured such that the selection rate is changed and set according to the success/failure determination result by allocating and setting the determination value of the effect counter 223H. With this configuration, for example, a tilting motion scenario is executed in which the probability of being selected is set to be higher when the result of the win/loss determination is a hit than when the result is a miss, thereby allowing the player to see the result of the win/fail determination. can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2, a tilting motion scenario type is set in which the tilting motion is performed at the start of the motion, and then the robot is moved to the origin position without being raised to the highest position. good too. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set to be easily selected when the result of the right/fail determination is a hit, and when the result of the right/fail determination is a failure, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is set. By setting it so that it is easy to be selected, it is possible to raise expectations for a big win by performing a fanning action.

The origin detection operation A table 222DB3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting motion scenario A. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 552(A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222DB3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data whose motion pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved forward during 1900MS) is executed, the motion pointer becomes "2", and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation A table 222DB3 is set when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag is ON (Z2957: YES). Alternatively, when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: NO), 1900MS is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB and 3 is set in the tilting operation status 223DA based on the origin detection operation A table 222DB3. By doing (Z2959), the contents of the operation of the origin detection operation A table 222DB3 are read out (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 in the effect backtracking operation processing (Fig. 562, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. The return-to-origin operation is performed until there is (Z2971: YES) or the tilting operation timer 223DB reaches 0 (Z2973: NO).

The origin detection operation B table 222DB4 stores the tilting device 310 at the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting motion scenario B. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 552B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222DB4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data whose motion pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved forward during 1900MS) is executed, the motion pointer becomes "2", and the motion ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222DB4, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag is turned on (Z2957: YES). , or when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: NO). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222DB4, the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is set to 1900MS, and the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 3 (Z2959). Until the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0, the operation contents of the origin detection operation B table 222DB3 are read out (Z2974), and the origin is detected (Z2971: YES) or the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO). ), the return-to-origin operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222DC stores operation data for repeating the origin detection when the origin detection operation is not performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. there is

FIG. 552(C) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222DC. In the retry motion table 222DC, similarly to the motion of the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes “2” (the tilting motion timer 223DB becomes 0) in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is “1”. This is performed until the origin is detected (Z2989: YES).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222DC terminates the above-described origin detection operation when the tilting operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), sets the tilting operation status 223DA to 4 (Z2975), 3 is set to the detection variation counter 223DC (Z2976), and 4 is set to the detection check counter 223DD (Z2977). , When the detection check counter 223DD is 1 or more (Z2982: YES), 1 is subtracted (Z2983). The operation time (900MS) is set in the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2985), the detection check counter 223DD is decremented by 1 (Z2986), and if the value after the subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: YES), the detection variation counter 223DC is Set to 3 (Z2988). When the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: NO) and the tilting operation timer 223DB is not 0 (Z2990: YES), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. 223DB becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 reaches the origin position (Z2989: YES). As shown in FIG. 545, the above operation is set once every three times when the special symbol changes, and if the origin detection is not performed, it is performed up to four times.

The tilting initial operation table 222DD stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilting device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 552(D) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting initial motion table 222DD. In the tilting initial motion table 222DD, similarly to the motion of the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes “2” in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is “1”, and the tilting motion timer 223DB is 0 (Z2931: YES). or until the origin is detected (Z2933: YES).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: YES) in the start-up process (FIG. 553) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 MS ) is set in the tilting operation timer 223DB (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062), thereby starting the operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 549, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 549 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the thirteenth control example. In the twelfth control example, unlike the eleventh control example described above, a tilting operation status 223DA, a tilting operation timer 223DB, a detection variation counter 223DC, a detection check counter 223DD, a tilting operation flag 223DE, and a The difference is that a timer 223DF and a are added.

Information for determining the operation state of the tilting device 310 is stored in the tilting operation status 223DA. The tilting operation status 223DA is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 553) executed when the power is turned on, and becomes the initial operation state.

The tilting action status 223DA determines the process to be executed according to the value of the tilting action status 223DA in the tilting device control process (Z2891) which is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (Z2161). . Specifically, when the value of the tilting motion status 223D is "0" (Z2904: YES), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting motion is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "1" (Z2906: YES), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is being executed after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting action status 223D is "2" (Z2908: YES), the operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting action is in the operation effecting state during the special symbol variation. When the value of the tilting action status 223D is "3" (Z2910: YES), the effect backing action process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting action is during the returning action after the scenario action.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "4" (Z2912: YES), retry operation processing (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is being retryed to detect the origin. If the value of the tilting operation status 223D is other than that (Z2912: NO), the value of the tilting operation status 223D is "5", and the execution of this process ends, but the initial operation and return operation described above are performed. In this error state, the tilting operation does not change until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 559), as described above, when the operation effect start time has come (Z2921: YES) after the start of the special symbol variation, the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting action is in the state of operation production during the fluctuation action of the special symbol.

In the tilting initial motion process (Z2907: FIG. 560), 0 is set when the tilting motion timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2933: YES), and when the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2933: YES). The tilting operation is in a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2933: NO), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the operation rendering process (Z2909: FIG. 561), when the tilting operation timer 223DB is set to 0 (Z2951: NO) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: NO), the detection sensor 324 detects the origin ( Z2961: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilting operation enters a standby state.

In the effect backward motion processing (Z2911: FIG. 562), when the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2971: YES), the tilting motion status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2972), the tilting motion is in a standby state, and this processing exit.

When the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: NO) and the tilting action timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), the tilting action status 223DA is set to 4, and the tilting action is being retryed. becomes.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 563), after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: NO), if there is an origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2989: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2972 ), the tilting operation is in a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2989: NO) and the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2992: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 5 ( Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting motion timer 223DB is a timer for counting the motions of the tilting device 310 . When the power is turned on, the tilting operation timer 223DB is set to an initial operation time (Z2061), and is repeatedly updated by being incremented by one each time the main process (FIG. 554) is executed.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting motion status is "0", the motion time is set according to the tilting motion scenario table (Z2923). When the value of the tilting action status is "2", the tilting action timer 223DB is set to 0 (Z2951: NO) in the state of operation rendering, and when the tilting operation flag is ON (Z2957: YES), the origin The time for the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. During the execution of the retry operation when the value of the tilting operation status is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222DC.

The detection fluctuation counter 223DC is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 performs a retry operation when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection variation counter 223DC is tilted when the origin detection of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: NO) in the effect reversing operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223DA is "3". When the operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in retry operation.

During the retry operation, when the detection check counter 223DD is not 0 (Z2982: YES) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: YES), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination processing is performed. conduct. First, the detected variation counter 223DC is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and if the result of the subtraction is 0 (Z2984: NO), it is determined that the variation requires a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is set based on the contents of the retry operation table. After setting (Z2985), if the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223DD (Z2986) is not 0 (Z2987: YES), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (up to 4 times). , the detection variation counter 223DC is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223DD is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223DD is tilted when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: NO) in the production backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is "3". When the operation timer 223DB becomes 0 (Z2973: NO), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

The tilting operation flag 223DE is set when the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is executed, and the tilting device 320 is pressed down by the player during the operation valid period to be moved to the origin position, and the rotation claw member is set. 347 is a flag indicating that it has been locked. The tilting operation flag 223DE is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilting device 320 is pressed during the operation effective period by the processing of Z2956 of the processing during operation rendering (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. set to on when On the other hand, after the tilting operation flag 223DE is determined to be ON by the processing of Z2957, the tilting operation status is set to 3, and after the return-to-origin operation is executed, it is set to OFF (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223DF detects that the tilting device 320 is pressed as a switch for effect when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, when it is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position). This is a timer for determining the valid period for validly determining the detection of the switch 324 . When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the advance notice effect using the tilting device 320 as a switch for effect is determined as the advance notice effect, based on the start timing of the effective period. Data corresponding to the defined validity period is stored. Note that when data corresponding to the effective period is set in the depression notice effective timer 223DF (Z2877: see FIG. 555), the cam disengagement operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the tilting action scenario A table 222DB1 will be executed by the operation sound of the cam disengagement, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the pressing notice valid timer 223DF is updated by being decremented by one by pressing Z2873 (see FIG. 555).

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the fifteenth control example>
Next, control processing by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifteenth control example, a part of the start-up processing (Fig. 553) and the main processing (Fig. 554) are added to the eleventh control example, and the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: Fig. 554) is added. 490) was changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: Fig. 555), sensor input processing (Z2813: Fig. 555) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: Fig. 556), retry processing during touch input (Z2860 : Fig. 557), tilting device control processing (Z2891: Fig. 558), operation effect setting processing (Fig. 559), tilting initial motion processing (Z2907: Fig. 560), during operation effect processing (Z2909: Fig. 561), effect backward motion The difference lies in that processing (Z2911: Figure 562) and retry operation processing (Z2913: Figure 563) are added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 553, startup processing (FIG. 553) executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described. The startup process (FIG. 553) in the fifteenth control example differs from the startup process (FIG. 475) in the eleventh control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (FIG. 553) in the fifteenth control example, after executing the process of Z2012 or the process of Z2013, the tilting initial operation table 222DE (see FIG. 552(D)) provided in the ROM 222 Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223DB provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223DA provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and main processing (FIG. 554), which will be described later, is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 560) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game can be started in a state in which the initial operation is executed and the game machine is moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the turning on of the left side detection sensor 353L. Control can be stably performed.

Main processing (FIG. 554) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing (FIG. 554) in the fifteenth control example, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161) in contrast to the main processing (FIG. 476) in the eleventh control example. ) is changed to Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 555, regarding frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 555) which is one of the main processing (FIG. 554) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. explain. FIG. 555 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 555), first, the pachinko machine 10 is currently in the process of changing the special symbols for which the execution of the press notice is determined (pressing notice is being set) or not. (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not execution of the advance notice of pressing has been decided. If it is determined that the advance notice is being set (Z2881: YES), it is determined whether the advance notice is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice is being executed, and whether the push advance notice valid timer 223DF has a value greater than zero. If it is determined that the pressing notice valid period is in effect (Z2882: YES), the pressing notice valid timer 223DF provided in the RAM 223 is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2883). Next, it is determined whether the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player and the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: YES), a display press-down notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. It should be noted that in the processing of Z2881, if the advance notice is not being executed (Z2881: NO), or in the processing of Z2884, if it is determined that the player has not pressed the button (Z2884: NO). , skip other processes, and shift to the process of Z2890.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2882 that it is not during the advance notice valid period (Z2882: NO), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the advance notice valid period, which is the start timing for executing the advance notice by pressing ( Z2886). A start timer (not shown) is set when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and the start timing of the advance notice is determined by the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value of "0").

If it is determined that it is time to start the effective period (Z2886: YES), the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the depression notice effective timer 223DF is set, and 2100MS is set as the cam disengaging operation. A backward rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam releasing operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 does not perform the upward motion, even if the advance notice is given, so that the player can expect the upward performance to be executed.

If it is not the time to start the pressing notice effective period (Z2886: NO), the process of Z2887 is skipped and the process of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the advance notice effective period of pressing (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing notice effective period timer 223DF is 0. If it is determined that it is time to end the pressing notice valid period (Z2888: YES), the value of the pressing notice valid timer 223DF is reset, and 1500 MS backward rotation is set as the return-to-origin operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2888, if it is determined that the effective period has not ended (Z2888: NO), the processing of Z2889 is skipped and the processing of sensor input processing 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIG. 556, sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 556) in the fifteenth control example will be described. In the sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 556) in the fifteenth control example, the processing of Z2826 to Z2829 is not executed with respect to the sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 491) in the eleventh control example, and retry during touch input. It differs in that processing (Z2860) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The retry processing during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of retry processing during touch input (Z2860).

In the retry processing during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 557), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 4 (Z2861: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223DA is 4 (Z2861: YES), it is determined whether the value of the tilting action timer 223DB provided in the RAM 223 is greater than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2862: YES), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2862: YES), it is determined whether the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not detecting the origin (Z2863: NO), the drive motor is set in the backward rotation direction by one step (Z2864), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2865), and this processing ends.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 558 is a flowchart showing details of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2901: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the tilting action timer 223DB. In the process of Z2901, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2901: NO), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223DA is 0 (Z2904), operation effect setting processing (Z2905) is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4" at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin return retry operation is executed. To make it easy to return a tilting device 320 to the origin by retrying the origin return at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand for a shooting handle and the other hand for operating a touch sensor 290). can be done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 559, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 559 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time rendering start time has not yet reached (Z2921: NO), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: YES), the value of the tilting motion status 223DA is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting action scenario table 222DB provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to OFF (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 558, the description continues. When it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 0 (Z2904: YES), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 1 (Z2906: YES), tilting initial operation processing (Z2907) is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 560, the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 560 is a flow chart showing the content of the tilting initial motion process (Z2907).

In the tilting initial motion process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2391: YES), the operation contents of the initial tilting operation table 222DE are read (Z2932: YES), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2931 whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2931: NO), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: YES), the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2934), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: NO), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in the event of an abnormality during the return to origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, unlike during a game, an error is immediately displayed (abnormality processing), so that the malfunction of the tilting device 320 can be found at an early stage. can.

Returning to FIG. 558, the description continues. In the processing of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 1 (Z2906: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223DA is 2 (Z2908: YES), an operation rendering process (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 561, the operation rendering process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 561 is a flow chart showing the contents of the processing during operation rendering (Z2909).

In the operation rendering process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2951: YES), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223DE provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: YES), this processing ends. When it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223DE is not set to ON (Z2952: NO), the action content corresponding to the tilting action scenario table 222DB is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation valid period is not in effect (Z2954: NO), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that no pressing has been detected (Z2955), this processing ends. If it is determined that the depression has been detected (Z2955: YES), the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z2956), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2951: NO), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z2957: YES), the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222DD provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to OFF (Z2960), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2957 that the tilting operation flag 223DE is not set to ON (Z2957: NO), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: NO), the processing of Z2958 to Z2960 described above is executed, and this processing ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2962), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 558, the description continues. In the processing of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 2 (Z2908: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223DA is 3 (Z2910: YES), effect reversing action processing (Z2911) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 562, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 562 is a flow chart showing the details of the performance backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 0 (Z2972), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2973: YES), the operation contents corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222DD are read out (Z2974), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is 0 (Z2973: NO), the tilting action status 223DA is set to 4 (Z2975). Next, the detection variation counter 223DC provided in the RAM 223 is set to 3 (Z2976), the detection check counter 223DD is set to 4 (Z2977), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 558, the description continues. In the process of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 3 (Z2910: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 4 (Z2912). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is 4 (Z2912: YES), retry operation processing (Z2913) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is not 4 (Z2912), this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 563, the retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 558), will be described. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of retry operation processing (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: YES), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223DD is greater than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2982: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is greater than 0 (Z2982: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the detection variation counter 223DC (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detected variation counter 223DC changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detected variation counter 223DC is greater than 0 (Z2984: YES), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection variation counter 223DC is 0 (Z2984: NO), the tilting operation timer 223DB is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222DC provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), and the value of the detection check counter 223DD is subtracted by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223DD changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2987: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223DD sets the value of the detection variation counter 223DC to 3, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: NO), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: NO), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is greater than 0 (Z2990: YES), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222DC is read out (Z2991), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined at Z2990 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is 0 (Z2990: NO), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223DD is greater than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is greater than 0 (Z2992: YES), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223DD is 0 (Z2992: NO), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2989, when it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: YES), the value of the tilting operation status 223DA is cleared (Z2995), and this process ends.

In addition, in the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or depresses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately moves even if the unlocking operation is performed. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be lifted. As a countermeasure against this, by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward roll; required time 100 MS) as the motion data of the motion pointer 3 (see FIG. 551 (A)), which is the unlocking motion, the unlocking motion can be performed. is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 733, and the tilting device 320 is configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Furthermore, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or when the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pushed down by the detection switch 324 or the upper surface of the tilting device 320 is pressed. A touch sensor is placed to determine whether the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if it is pressed), it waits without releasing the lock and waits until it turns off. may be configured to perform the unlocking operation at the timing when the switch is turned off. In addition, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed down or touched by the player, the tilting device 320 is released from the tilting device 320 by display notification, voice, etc. may be configured to notify the

<16th control example>
Next, a sixteenth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 564 to 588. FIG. In the eleventh control example, when a jackpot A is executed in which the probability of winning/failure determination is set to a low probability after the jackpot game (the electric sapo is given up to 100 times), it is displayed with even-numbered symbols, Although it was notified that it was a jackpot A, in the twenty-third embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if a reserved ball that will be a jackpot is stored in the reserved balls, the jackpot will be executed first. The stop pattern of A, the performance during the big win, etc. are shown as if the big win B1 or the big win B2, and the performance as if a high probability game state (probability variable game state) is set even after the big win game. It differs from the eleventh control example in that it is executed. In addition, in the sixteenth control example, even when the third even-numbered symbol representing the jackpot A is displayed, the jackpot type is actually set to the probability variable game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion performances for informing is set, the type of the promotion performance is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed after that according to the execution contents of the promotion performance (for example, the presence or absence of promotion, etc.) This control example differs from the eleventh control example in that the types of effects are switched and set. Note that detailed descriptions of the points that are the same as in the eleventh control example will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 564, an example of the stop display mode of the special symbol of the win/loss determination result of the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 564(A) shows that the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol H1 stored as the first reserved ball is a jackpot A, and the reserved symbol H2 of the third reserved ball displayed is This is an example showing a case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. FIG. In this case, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol H1 is executed, the even numbered symbols are normally displayed, but the odd numbered symbols are stopped and displayed at the start of the variation. are switched to display. That is, the same stop symbols as when the variation of the special symbols for the big win B1 is executed are displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 564(B), "Super jackpot!! Look forward to the next one!!" A notification as if it were a jackpot is executed. As a result, since the held ball that becomes the big win A is actually stored even when the big win A is executed, the performance as if the big win B1 was executed is executed even when the big win A is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel that the ratio of execution of the big win B1 is higher than the design value, thereby improving the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 565(A), the effect mode when the variation of the special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state (game state with low-probability electrical support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 564 will be described. FIG. 565(A) shows that after the big hit game corresponding to the big hit A is executed in the state where the reserved ball that becomes the big hit A is stored (reserved pattern H2), the time saving game state is set. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the design display device 81 .

As shown in FIG. 565(A), in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, the text "during super time" is displayed when the probability variable gaming state is in spite of the time-saving gaming state. is displayed, and further, the characters ``Increase in the degree of expectation for big win'' are displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high is displayed instead of the fact that the probability of success/failure determination is not set high. As a result, the player is provided with a false notification that is different from the actual one, thereby suppressing a problem that significantly damages the player's trust. In this way, it is also possible to call the notification substantially similar to the probability variation gaming state as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 565(B) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol H2 that was suspended in FIG. 565(A). The reserved pattern H2 is the result of judging whether or not the jackpot A is successful, and the reserved balls that will be the jackpot (any of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) are not stored in the reserved balls. In the same way as in , the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, and the notification indicating that the jackpot A is made is executed.

FIG. 566(A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving gaming state set after the jackpot A jackpot game is executed in the example shown in FIG. 565(B) is set. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode; FIG. As a display mode indicating the time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. It is notified that the game is set. In addition, the number (number of times) is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern is changed once.

FIG. 566(B) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 after the big win game in the big win B1 or the big win B2 is executed. As a display mode suggesting that the variable probability game state is set, the characters "under super time (during variable probability)" are displayed to inform the player that the game state is the variable probability game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode is partially different between when the time-saving gaming state is set in the state where the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored and when the variable probability gaming state is set. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display the same characters (for example, only during supertime). In addition, the game state is notified by the background color without displaying characters, and the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state are set in the state where the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored. , Similar colors (for example, red background color (probability variable game state), pink background color (time-saving game state in the state in which the retained balls that become big hits are stored))) may be configured to display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving gaming state is as if it is a variable-probability gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 567 to 568, the promotion effect executed during the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 567(A) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the big winning game is started, the characters "Big winning!! Start!!" are displayed until the specific winning opening 65A is opened to inform the player that the big winning game is starting.

FIG. 567(B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in an over winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. Over winning promotion effect means that one round is ended by winning 10 balls in the specific winning port 65A, but based on the fact that 10 game balls enter the specific winning port 65A, This is an effect in which a promotion effect is executed in which information on the type of jackpot is notified based on the fact that the game ball further wins the specific prize winning opening 65A during the period until the opening/closing door 65B is changed to the closed state.

In the over-winning promotion effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Put the ball into the attacker and get the key!!" There is a display suggesting that the symbol will be displayed (given to the player). In addition, by displaying the text "Treasure box chance when 11 keys are accumulated!" is notified to the player. Since one key is displayed each time the specific winning opening 65A is won, one over winning occurs at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, the "Treasure box chance!!" is executed by over-winning. Here, "Treasure box chance!!" stores a reserved ball that, when the treasure box is empty and a treasure is displayed, the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the above-described jackpot. It is reported that it is a big win A (promoted) in the state of being. Further, when no treasure is displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. When the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot A, the effect of notifying the promotion is not executed. However, based on the memorization of the reserved ball that will become the big win during the big win game, the display mode (the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) informing of the promotion is displayed. may

Next, with reference to FIG. 568, an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd design display device 81 in the mid-round promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 568(A) shows that when promotion effect during the round is selected, in a specific round (fifth round in this control example), during the round game, “promotion chance!! !!” is displayed, a mid-round promotion effect is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (reported) that information regarding the jackpot game type is reported. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. If it is A, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that a high probability game state of "variable GET!!" will be set after the jackpot game. be done. It should be noted that, in the case of the jackpot A in the state in which the above-described jackpot holding ball is stored, the characters "Variable probability GET!!" Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 569, an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 568(A) is executed at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot round of 16 rounds is finished (the condition for closing the specific winning port 65A in the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds have passed) is established)). It is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, FIG. 569(B) is an example of the display mode in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, at the end of the jackpot game (the jackpot round of 16 rounds is finished (the closing condition of the specific prize winning port 65A in the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds elapsed) is established)) Later, during the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY!! Super chance time!!" A special display mode in which a shoal of fish swims (a school of fish) is displayed, and after the jackpot game, a variable probability game state or a time-saving game state in a state in which the above-mentioned reserved ball that will be the jackpot is stored. is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixteenth control example>
Next, control processing by main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

Referring to FIG. 570(A), the ROM of MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The sixteenth control example differs from the eleventh control example in that a promotion lottery table 222DF is added to the eleventh control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222DF will be described with reference to FIG. 570(B). FIG. 570(B) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this promotion lottery table 222DF. A promotion lottery table 222DF determines whether or not to report promotion as an over-winning promotion performance based on the value of a performance counter 223H acquired based on occurrence of over-winning to a specific winning port 65A during a round. This is a lottery table for Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is the jackpot B2, or when the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM indicating that the player is suggested to execute the jackpot A as if the jackpot B2 was executed is on. , and if the value of the effect counter 223H is any one of "0 to 59", a promotion effect indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, an effect in which a treasure is displayed in a treasure box) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 571, the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 571 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example. In the 16th control example, in contrast to the 11th control example, the winning fluctuating flag 223DG, the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH, the big win counter 223DI, the promoted flag 223DJ, the promotion effect type storage area 223DK, and the pseudo probability change flag 223DM are respectively. The difference is that they are added. A detailed description of the same configuration as in the eleventh control example is omitted.

The hit fluctuation flag 223DG is a flag for determining that the fluctuation of the special symbol to be the big hit A is executed in a state where the reserved balls to be the big hit are not stored. When the hit fluctuating flag 223DG is on, if the variable display of the special pattern can be replaced at the timing when the holding ball that will be the big hit by the winning command is newly stored, the odd number pattern is set. A process of switching to a pattern is executed. As a result, the player can be made to think that even if there is a variation in the special symbol that results in a big win A, it is a big win B1.

The stop pattern replacement flag 223DH wins a replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability when the change of the special pattern for the big win A is started, and if the reserved ball for the big win is already stored. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop pattern to an odd numbered pattern. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is ON, the odd symbols are switched and set when the special symbols start to fluctuate.

The big winning counter 223DJ is a counter for counting the number of winnings of the specific winning opening 65A during one round of the big winning game.

The promoted flag 223DJ is a flag indicating that a promoted effect (an effect of displaying a treasure from a treasure box) has been executed in an over winning promotion effect executed during a jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress the problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promotion effect is executed.

The promotion performance type storage area 223DK is a storage area in which the type of promotion performance to be executed during the jackpot game is determined and the determined promotion performance type data is stored when the jackpot game is executed.

The pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is such that, when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big win A is started, the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped at the odd number symbol in the state that the reserved balls that become the big win are already stored. It is a flag indicating that the replacement lottery controlled to be displayed has been lost. A promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game, or a performance (see FIG. 565(A)) is executed as if the time-saving game state set after the jackpot game is set to the probability variable game state.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the sixteenth control example>
With reference to FIG. 572, control processing by the main controller in this 16th control example will be described. This 16th control example differs from the 11th control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: 474) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: 572). Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 572, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 572) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the 16th control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 474) in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z1110, if it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1110: NO), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the big winning hole (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: YES), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no ball entry (Z1120: NO), this process ends. With this ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65A during the round, and can also determine over winning.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the sixteenth control example>
Control processing by the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this 16th control example, command determination processing (Z2113: FIG. 477) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. 574), and variation pattern reception processing (Z2202: FIG. 478) is changed to variation pattern reception, in contrast to the 11th control example. Processing 2 (Z2240: Fig. 573), winning command reception processing (Z2209: Fig. 484) is changed to winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: Fig. 576), variable display setting processing (Z2114: Fig. 487) is changed to variable display setting processing 2 (Z2114 583), frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 490) is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 584), stop pattern switching processing (Z2450: FIG. 575), Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: Fig. 577), jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: Fig. 577), opening processing (Z2282: Fig. 578), winning ball processing (Z2284: Fig. 580), round processing (Z2286: Fig. 580) 581) and ending processing (Z2288: Fig. 582) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the 16th control example is different from the command determination process (Z2113) in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 are added and the processes of Z2240 and Z2270 are changed. differ in

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: NO), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 ( Z2279). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: YES), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot related command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: NO), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 573, variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 573), which is one process in command determination process 2 (see FIG. 572) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the 16th control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the 11th control example in that processes Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be output from the main controller 110 attached to the variation pattern command. As the game state, a low-probability electric sapo no game state (normal game state), a variable probability game state (with an electric sapo), and a time-saving game state (a game state with a low-probability electric sapo) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: YES), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode storage area 223I, the display state command is set (Z2431), and the process of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the process of Z2430, if there is no change in the game state (Z2430: NO), the process of Z2431 is not executed, and the process proceeds to Z2227.

Referring to FIG. 575, stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 575) which is one process in variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 574) executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example. explain. FIG. 575 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 575), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that there is no variation in the jackpot A (Z2451: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is that of the big win A (Z2451: YES), it is determined whether there is another win in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: YES), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired and a replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the process of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the player has won the replacement lottery (Z2454). If it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: NO), the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery is won (Z2454: YES), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2452, if it is determined that there is no other win in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2452: NO), the win fluctuating flag 223DG is set to ON (Z2457), and this process ends. .

In this way, at the time when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big hit A is started, if the reserved ball that becomes the big win is stored, a lottery (discrimination) is executed to determine whether to replace the stopped symbol. determination), the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH indicating that symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is lost, stop display is performed with an even number of random numbers, the jackpot game is started, promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game, or whether the probability variable game state is reached after the jackpot game. A special notification such as

With reference to FIG. 576, winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 576) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. Winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270) in the 16th control example differs from the winning command reception processing (Z2209: FIG. 484) in the 11th control example in that stop symbol change processing (Z2460) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 577, the stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 575) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example, will be described. do. FIG. 577 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 577), first, it is determined whether or not the hit fluctuating flag 223DG provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit fluctuating flag 223DG is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2461: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit fluctuating flag 223DG is set to ON (Z2461: YES), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big win (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462: YES), the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the process of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that it is in the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: YES), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2464, if it is determined that the current period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: NO), the process of Z2465 is not executed and the process ends.

In this way, at the time when the special symbols that become the big hit A start to fluctuate, even if the held balls that will become the big win are not stored, during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation), the held ball that will become the big win is newly set. , if it is the high-speed fluctuation period of the special symbol, replacement of the stop symbol (replacement of the odd-numbered symbol with the odd-numbered symbol) is executed. In this way, since it is limited to during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without discomfort.

Incidentally, even when the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

Referring to FIG. 578, jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 578) which is one processing in command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. 574) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example ) will be explained. FIG. 578 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z2281: YES), an opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, referring to FIG. 579, opening processing (Z2282: diagram 579) will be explained. FIG. 579 is a flow chart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 579), first, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223H acquired in the processing of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222DF provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to Z2295.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether or not the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2295: YES), it is determined whether there is a big win in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a big win (Z2296: YES), the game state is set to "big win" (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing ends. In the process of Z2295, when it is determined that Z2295 is off (Z2295: NO), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z2297. On the other hand, in the process of Z2296, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the winning information storage area 223F (Z2296: NO), the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to OFF (Z2298), and the gaming state is changed to the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM. It is set during the jackpot game which is in the OFF state (Z2299), the processing of Z2300 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 578, the description continues. In the processing of Z2281, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: NO), it is determined whether or not the entering command has been received (Z2283). When it is determined that the ball-in command has been received (Z2283: YES), the big prize winning-ball process (Z2284) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 580, a big prize winning ball process ( Z2284) will be explained. FIG. 580 is a flow chart showing the details of the big prize winning ball process (Z2284).

In the big winning ball process (Z2284: FIG. 580), first, 1 is added to the value of the big winning counter 223DI provided in the RAM 223 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the type of promotion effect is over winning (Z2312). If it is determined that the type of promotion effect is not over winning (Z2312: NO), a large winning command for display indicating the value of the big winning counter 223DI is set (Z2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: YES), it is determined whether the value of the big winning counter 223DI is greater than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the big win counter 223DI is smaller than 10 (Z2314: NO), a big win command for display indicating the value of the big win counter 223DI corresponding to the over-win effect is set (Z2315), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning prize counter 223DI is greater than 10 (Z2314: YES), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired, and based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM or the jackpot type, the promotion lottery table 222DF. A promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect is won (Z2317). When it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: YES), the value of the big prize counter 223DI and the large prize winning command for display indicating the winning of the promotion effect are set (Z2318), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: NO), a large winning prize command for display indicating the discrepancy between the value of the big winning prize counter 223DI and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this processing is executed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 578, the description continues. In the processing of Z2283, if it is determined that the enter-ball command has not been received (Z2283: NO), it is determined whether or not the number-of-rounds command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: YES), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 581, round processing (Z2286) which is one processing in the jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 578) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example. explain. FIG. 581 is a flow chart showing the contents of round processing (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 581), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2331). When it is determined that the type of promotion effect is not over winning (Z2331: NO), it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2332: NO), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: YES), a round command for display corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set (Z2334), and a SW valid time counter 223K corresponding to the round effect is set. (Z2335), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: YES), or if it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332 : YES), or if it is determined in the process of Z2333 that the number of rounds is not 12R (Z2333: NO), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this process ends. .

Returning to FIG. 578, the description continues. In the processing of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (Z2287). If the ending command has been received (Z2288: YES), ending processing (Z2288) is executed and this processing ends. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: NO), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing ends.

Referring to FIG. 582, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 582) which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 578) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example explain. FIG. 582 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 582), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2371: NO), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223DJ provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223DJ is set to OFF (Z2372: NO), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373). When the jackpot type this time is the jackpot B2 (Z2373: YES), an ending command for display indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the process of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: NO), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to OFF (Z2374: NO), an ending command for display corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). Incidentally, when it is determined in the process of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223DJ is set to ON (Z2372: YES), the above-described process of Z2376 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2374, when it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223DM is set to ON (Z2374: YES), the process of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or Z2376, the game state is set to the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the state command for display is set (Z2378), and this processing ends.

Thus, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined during the jackpot game whether or not the content of the promotion by the over-winning promotion effect is notified, and if not executed, the ending promotion effect or the mid-round promotion effect is performed. The process of switching to is executed.

Thus, even if the over-winning promotion performance is determined, the promotion performance can be executed by switching to a different promotion performance even when the frequency of entering the specific winning hole 65A is low.

With reference to FIG. 583, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 583 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the 16th control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed in contrast to the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 487) in the 11th control example, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515 are executed. The difference is that the Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to ON (Z2511). When it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to OFF (Z2511: NO), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), the display stop type command is set (Z2513), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to ON (Z2511: YES), a stop type is set in which the odd jackpot symbol is a stop symbol (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223DH is set to OFF (Z2515), the processing of Z2513 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 584, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 584) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 584 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107) in the present 16th control example does not execute the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 in contrast to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 490) in the 11th control example. , Z2830, Z2831 and Z2840 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description is omitted.

In the processing of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: YES), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and sensor input processing is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, other SW processes are executed (Z2840), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2830, if it is determined that the effect setting is not in progress (Z2830: NO), the processing of Z2803-2804 described above is executed, sensor input processing (Z2813), other SW processing (Z2840) and terminate this process.

<Regarding control processing by the display control device in the sixteenth control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 585 to 588. FIG. The sixteenth control example differs from the eleventh control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 495) is changed to command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 585 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the 16th control example differs from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 495) in the 11th control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice display command for display (Z3408: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a pattern replacement command for display (Z3430). When it is determined that there is a symbol replacement command for display (Z3430: YES), symbol replacement setting processing (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 586(A). FIG. 586(A) is a flow chart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd jackpot symbol stop type table is replaced and set (Z3441). Next, the stop type table and the stop symbol counter are compared to set the stop symbol (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 585, the description continues. In the processing of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display pattern replacement command (Z3430: NO), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display state command (Z3432: YES), game state setting processing (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 586(B). FIG. 586(B) is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the game state set in the background mode storage area 223I is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 585, the description continues. In the process of Z3432, when it is determined that there is no display state command (Z3432: NO), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot-related command (Z3434). When it is determined that there is a jackpot related command for display (Z3434: YES), a jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 587, the jackpot related display processing (Z3435) will be described. FIG. 587 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command for display has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that an opening command for display has been received (Z3461: YES), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning prize command for display has not been received (Z3461: NO), it is determined whether or not the large winning prize command for display has been received (Z3463). When it is determined that the large winning command for display has been received (Z3463: YES), the large winning processing (Z3464) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the big winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z3463 that the large winning prize command for display has not been received (Z3463: NO), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z3465: YES), the display data table for the round display corresponding to the command round number is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z3465, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: NO), it is determined whether or not the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). If it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: YES), a display data table for the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3467 that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that a display ending command has been received (Z3469: YES), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3469 that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: NO), processing according to other commands is executed (Z3471), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 588, the big winning process (Z3464: FIG. 588), which is one process in the jackpot related display process (Z3435: FIG. 587), will be described. FIG. 588 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big winning process (Z3464).

In the big win process (Z3464), first, in the process of Z3463 of the big win related display process (Z3435: FIG. 587), it is determined whether or not the received big win command for display wins the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: YES), a display data table corresponding to the number of winning prizes indicated by the received command and the winning effect is set (Z3481), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: NO), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). When it is determined that the received command is the loss of the promotion effect (Z3482: YES), the display data table of over winning corresponding to the number of prizes indicated by the command and the loss effect is set (Z3483), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: NO), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over winning effect (Z3484). When it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: YES), the over winning display data table corresponding to the winning number indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of Z3484, when it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: NO), it is determined whether the winning number indicated by the received command number is greater than 10 ( Z3486: NO). If it is determined that the number of prizes won is greater than 10 (Z3486: YES), a display data table corresponding to the normal over prize effect is set (Z3487), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3486 that the number of winnings indicated by the number of commands received is less than 10 (Z3486), this process ends.

<17th control example>
Next, a seventeenth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 589 to 597. FIG. In the eleventh control example, a winning opening that triggers a lottery (fluctuation) based on a first special symbol and a lottery based on a second special symbol that is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning opening that triggers (fluctuation) and the sorting device 700 that alternately wins the ball, the electric accessory 640A is placed when winning for a long time as a result of the determination of whether the second special symbol normal symbol is successful. It is configured to be open for a long period of time (two seconds) so that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加Then, when the normal pattern wins for a long time, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is made to win the ball in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加It was constructed so that the player would be motivated to play the game (see FIG. 425).

In addition, in the twelfth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640A is configured so as to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. When the variation of the second special symbol is started at 10:00 a.m., a special effect (see FIG. 509(B)) is executed to give the player a special feeling. Furthermore, in the twelfth control example, a predetermined period (for five variations of the special symbol) after the end of the time saving state, even if the normal state is set as the game state, the special effect is not executed. was configured to As a result, a predetermined number (maximum of 4) of the second special symbol reserved balls is secured (with the second special symbol reserved during the time saving state), and executed when the time saving state ends It is configured so that the above-described special effect is not executed in the second special symbol variation that is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special performance.

On the other hand, in this 17th control example, as a result of the lottery of normal symbols, when winning for a long time, the game is played using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result. It is different from the eleventh control example in that an effect (long-time open effect) is executed to suggest that the player wins the lottery for a long time in the normal symbol lottery.

In addition, it is different from the eleventh control example in that the performance mode of the long-time open performance is made different according to the timing of winning for a long time as a result of the lottery of normal symbols. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the same points as those of the control examples described above will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 589 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 589, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example causes the ball to flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 in contrast to the 11th control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or forms the surface of the game board 13) as a guidance display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position at which the ball is to be shot when a game (left-handed game) is played. If the member is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when playing a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80, the guidance display mode ZR2 that serves as a guideline for the position at which the ball is to be shot is "turtle". is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is acrylic resin with high transparency), and the player is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball should be shot to execute a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to see the game direction. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) that guides (a right-handed game or a left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that the player can easily grasp visually.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th control example is a region (electric accessory If 640A is in the opening operation, the control nail ZK1 is planted so that the rate of balls flowing down the second winning hole 640 is low. On the other hand, there is a difference in that the nails are planted so that the percentage of balls passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low when a right-handed game is played. By configuring in this way, aiming at the sorting device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) for varying (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and aiming at the second winning opening 640, the second A right-handed game (second game) in which only 2 special symbols are changed (lottery) can be provided to the player.

As in the eleventh control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640A attached to the second winning port 640 is difficult to open. When the left-handed game is generally performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640A is in a state where it is easy to open, so the player inevitably performs the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is performed further. Even if it does, it is not possible to acquire the reservation of the special pattern (the right to draw (change) the special pattern), so that a left-handed game can be performed and a game to obtain the reserved ball of the first special pattern can also be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 590(A), in the present 17th control example, a description will be given of an effect mode displayed during the normal symbol fluctuation when the normal symbol is won for a long period of time. FIG. 590(A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal symbol variation that is won per long time. The same elements as those in the eleventh control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 590(A), in the main display area DM of the third symbol display device 81, there is an effect (long open effect) suggesting that the normal symbol has been won for a long time. is displayed, and an opening target mode ZA2 imitating the electric accessory 640A to be opened and a guidance display mode ZA1 imitating a "tortoise" indicating the game direction to instruct the player are displayed. As a result, the electric accessory 640A is released to the player, so that the player can easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be played.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area ZA3. In the seventeenth control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area ZA3. A determination means for determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result (big hit, small hit, etc.) advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result of the determination means, a long opening effect and a third pattern are provided. A priority display determination means for determining which of the variable effects is to be displayed preferentially, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determination means. You can set it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially display an effect display for showing a game result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the above example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (priority effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area DM, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area ZA3, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of reduced display areas are prepared with different areas, and non-prioritized according to the game result indicated by the effect determined as the non-prioritized effect. It may be configured such that the size of the area for displaying the effect is variable. Also, the effect display on the side determined as the non-prioritized effect may be configured so as not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Furthermore, in the above-described example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol during variation and the lottery result of the normal symbol during variation, the configuration for varying the display area of each effect (variation effect, long open effect) was shown. In addition to this, for example, a reserved ball number discriminating means for discriminating whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the discrimination result of the reserved ball number discriminating means It is also possible to change the display area of the long opening effect by using the

Next, with reference to FIG. 590(B), a description will be given of an effect mode during a long-time winning game of normal symbols (during long opening). FIG. 590(B) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during a long win (effect during long open). The same elements as those in the eleventh control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 590(B), the character "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently being performed is displayed in the center of the main display area DM, and the opening object imitating the electric accessory 640A in the opening operation. Mode ZA2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 590(A), a guidance display mode ZA1 imitating a "tortoise" indicating the game direction to instruct the player is displayed, and the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area ZA3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 591, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is regulated will be described. FIG. 591 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the long opening effect is regulated among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during the long winning. The same elements as those in the eleventh control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the seventeenth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. In the state where it is difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning port 640 (when winning a long time with normal symbols), the state that is advantageous to the player (the first It is configured to surely notify the player of the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol which is likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the special symbol.

When configured in this way, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the normal symbol Even when winning for a long time, the above-described long opening effect is executed. Thus, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640A is long-opened and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640, a new reserved ball is obtained. Therefore, there is a problem that the special feeling of the long opening effect cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in this 17th control example, even if the normal symbol is won for a long time during the predetermined period after the time saving state ends (the period until the special symbol is changed five times), the above-described It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect during the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for execution of the long opening effect.

As shown in FIG. 591, in the state where the long open effect is restricted, the long open effect shown in FIG. Is displayed. Then, a guidance display mode ZA1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as the game direction to be instructed to the player. In this way, even if the normal state is set as the game state, even if the normal pattern is won for a long time, the timing is for a predetermined period (after the time saving state ends, the special pattern changes 5 times. If it is within the period until it is executed), it is possible to surely suppress providing the meaningless long open effect to the player by preventing the long open effect from being executed. can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long open effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), a period (regulation period) for regulating the long open effect is set. , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special design is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state, that is, the variation of the special design is continuous. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times. In addition, during the regulation period described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), clear the regulation period described above and execute a long open effect can be configured to

Furthermore, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the short working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted according to other conditions. If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, or if continuous effects are set across multiple special symbol variations, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) When it is determined that the held ball contains prize winning information for winning a jackpot, the long opening performance may be restricted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventeenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 592, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. The seventeenth control example differs from the twelfth control example in that a long release effect flag 223E1 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the seventeenth control example are the same, various control processes related to the ball output of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example are performed in the above-described eleventh control example. is identical to On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the sound lamp control device 113) related to the effects of the seventeenth control example are the same as those of the twelfth control example except for the points described above. Therefore, the same parts as in the eleventh control example are assigned the same reference numerals for the various control processes related to ball delivery, and the description thereof will be omitted. , and the description thereof is omitted.

Since the variation number counter 223AJ is described above in the twelfth control example, detailed description is omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the variation display of the third symbol is performed. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when set (when special symbols are changed). In the 17th control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ becomes zero.

The long opening effect flag 223E1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223E1 is when a long-time opening command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is not 0 (Z2904 in FIG. 595: NO) , is set to ON (see Z2907 in FIG. 595), and is set to OFF when the end command for a long period of normal design is received (Z2911 in FIG. 595).

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the seventeenth control example>
Next, control processing by the main controller in the seventeenth control example will be described. The seventeenth control example differs from the eleventh control example in that the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 468) is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: see FIG. 593). Other processes are the same as those in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 593, the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described. The normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) in the 17th control example differs from the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 468) in the 11th control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. . Since other processes are the same as those of the eleventh control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 593, when the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes of Z401 and Z402 as in the eleventh control example are performed, and it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the process of changing in the process of Z402. If so (Z402: NO), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203I is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the eleventh control example, this long-time open flag 203I is, in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: FIG. 469), when it is determined that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: YES). , is a flag that is set on (Z428).

In the process of Z451, if it is determined that the long time open flag 203I is set to ON (Z451: YES), the long time open flag 203I is set to OFF (Z403), and the long time end command is set. (Z452), the process proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, in the process of Z451, when it is determined that the long-time open flag 203I is not ON (it is OFF) (Z451: NO), the processes of Z403 and Z452 are skipped and the process proceeds to Z404. Then, the same processing from Z404 to Z409 as in the eleventh control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

That is, as described above, the long-time open flag 203I is a flag that is set to ON from the timing when the variation of the normal symbol won in a long time starts to the end of the long time.

In the process of Z402, when it is determined that the normal pattern is currently fluctuating (Z402: YES), the processes of Z410 to Z413 at the same positions as in the eleventh control example described above are executed, and then a long time hit is performed. A middle command is set (Z453), and this processing ends. The long-time hitting command set in Z453 is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 473) of the main controller 110. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 that has received the long-hitting command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current long-hitting (long open) is in progress, and transmits it to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the game is open for a long time on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 590(B)).

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the seventeenth control example>
Control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 594 and 595. FIG. In this 17th control example, command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) is changed to command determination processing 4 (Z2181: FIG. 594), and long opening effect processing (Z2272) is changed from the 12th control example. The difference is that they are added. Other processes are the same as those in the twelfth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 594, command determination processing 4 (Z2181) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 594 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (Z2181). Command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the 17th control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) in the 12th control example in that processes Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 517) of the 12th control example described above are executed. If it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: NO), then it is determined whether or not a long-time related command has been received (Z2271), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2208: YES), executes a long opening effect process (Z2272), which will be described later, and ends this process. In this long opening effect process (Z2272), a process for setting the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol wins for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, if it is determined that the related command has not been received for a long time (Z2271: NO), Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 of the twelfth control example (Z2152: FIG. 517) Similar processing from Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, and this processing ends. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command command) is received, an effect can be set to notify the player to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595, the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272) will be described. FIG. 595 is a flow chart showing the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272). This long open effect processing (Z2272) is for executing processing for setting the effect mode of the long open effect in the case of winning a long time per normal symbol, the current game state (normal state, time saving state Or, within a predetermined period after the end of the time-saving state), the production mode is set according to the operation state of the normal symbol (during fluctuation, during a winning game).

When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long time hit related command received this time is a long time opening command (Z2901). This open command per long time is a command that is set when winning a long time per normal symbol in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 469) of the main controller 110. FIG. If it is determined in the process of Z2901 that it is a long-time open command (Z2901: YES), then the current game state is extracted from the state storage area 223AZ (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted gaming state is in the time saving state (the time saving state is set) (Z2903). Since it is not a period, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving (in the normal state) (Z2903: NO), then it is determined whether the fluctuation counter 223AJ is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( Z2904). Since the detailed explanation is given in the twelfth control example described above, it will be briefly explained, but this fluctuation number counter 223AJ is a predetermined number (5 ) is set, and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display setting process is executed, and the period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation a predetermined number of times (5 times) is a counter that is referenced to determine

In the process of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223AJ is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: NO), that is, at least five special symbol variations are executed after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the game state is set to the normal state, it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed, so a long effect command for display is set (Z2906). , the long opening effect flag 223E1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this processing is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 476) of the main processing (see FIG. 476) of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode showing a long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 590(A)).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223AJ is greater than 0 (Z2904: YES), that is, in the state where the variation of the special symbol is not executed five times after the time saving state ends If it is determined that there is, it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, so the left hitting long effect command for display is set (Z2905), and this End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 476) of the main processing (see FIG. 476) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long opening effect is being regulated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 591).

In the process of Z2901, if it is determined that the long hit related command received this time is not the long hit release command (Z2901: NO), then it is determined whether or not the long hit medium command has been received (Z2908). . This long-time winning command is set after setting the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 593) of the main controller 110, and is set during the long-time winning game. This command indicates that there is

In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the long hit medium command is received (Z2908: YES), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223E1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is determined. 223E1 is set to ON (Z2909: YES), a display long open command is set (Z2910), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2909, if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223E1 is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Z2909: NO), the process of Z2910 is skipped and this process ends. .

Here, processing of Z2909 will be described. In the 17th control example, similarly to the 11th control example described above, the winning lottery at the timing of starting the variation of the normal symbols (the timing at which the normal symbol variation start process is executed), and the electric accessory 640A at the time of winning. (whether long open or not) is determined, and an open command for a long time is set at that timing. Then, after the normal pattern fluctuation time (3 seconds at the shortest, 30 seconds at the longest) has elapsed after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal pattern (second pattern) is set, and then the electric It is configured to start controlling the operation of the accessory 640A.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the open command for a long time and the command for a long time. In a state where the value of 223AJ is greater than 0, the open command for a long period of time is set, and after that, at the timing when the value of the fluctuation number counter 223AJ is 0, there is a possibility that the command during a long period of time is received.

In this 17th control example, in such a state, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640A, the long opening command is received in the process when the long opening command is received. In a state in which the opening effect flag 223E1 is not set to ON, even if a command during a long hit is received, a long opening command for display is not set. By configuring in this way, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 591) suddenly changes to the effect of the display mode based on the long release command for display (FIG. 590(B)). ) can be suppressed from giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

Returning to FIG. 595, the description continues. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during the long hit is not received (Z2908: NO), then it is determined whether the end command for the long hit is received (Z2911), and the end command for the long hit is received (Z2911: YES), the long open effect flag 223E1 is set to OFF (Z1912), a long open end command for display is set (Z1913), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: NO), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 ( Z2279). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: YES), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot related command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: NO), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing by the display control device in the seventeenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 596 and 597, control processing by the display control device 114 in the seventeenth control example will be described. This 17th control example differs from the 16th control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 596). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 596) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 596 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z3321). The command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the 17th control example differs from the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 585) in the 16th control example in that processes Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: NO), the process of Z3441 is executed. In the process of Z3441, if it is determined that there is no display long open related command (Z3441: NO), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a command related to long release for display (Z3441: YES), long release related processing (Z3442) is executed.

In the long release related process (FIG. 597, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long release effect corresponding to the received long release effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long release effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233E (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233D, time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The clock counter 233H is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233F is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the 17th control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is difficult to execute) is set as the game state, the normal symbol per long time When winning, it is configured to execute a long opening performance during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessary product 640A is opened for a long time for the player, and the game in which the ball is entered into the second prize winning port 640 can be reliably performed.

Furthermore, in this 17th control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired in the normal state. When it is within, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-described long opening effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege given to the player when the long opening effect is executed (the privilege to easily secure the reserved ball of the second special symbol).

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long open effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), a period (regulation period) for regulating the long open effect is set. , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special design is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state, that is, the variation of the special design is continuous. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times. In addition, during the regulation period described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), clear the regulation period described above and execute a long open effect can be configured to

Furthermore, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the short working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted according to other conditions. If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, or if continuous effects are set across multiple special symbol variations, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) When it is determined that the held ball contains prize winning information for winning a jackpot, the long opening performance may be restricted.

Specifically, for example, in the process of Z2903 of the long opening effect process (see FIG. 595), after determining that Z2903: NO, a process is provided to determine whether the continuous effect flag 223AC is set to ON. When it is determined that the effecting flag 223AC is set to ON, it is preferable to terminate this processing as it is so as not to execute the long opening effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without changing the order of priority with other effects to be executed.

Further, in the seventeenth control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is restricted or when the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long open effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is made to perform a right-handed game in order to win the ball, and when the long open effect is regulated, the distribution device 700 The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to perform a left-handed game in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the left-handed game is aimed at the first winning opening 64 and the second right winning opening 640, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. can be made to play a game aiming at the second winning hole 640 by a right-handed game.

In addition, in the seventeenth control example, the game board 13 is changed so that the easiness of the ball flowing down to the sorting device 700 and the second winning hole 640 differs depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, by shooting a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning hole 640, and a strong left-handed game can be performed. Then, the game board 13 may be configured so that the balls can easily reach the sorting device 700 . As a result, the game result can be greatly changed by slightly changing the operation of the shooting device, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the seventeenth control example describes a configuration based on the control content of the main controller 110 in the above-described eleventh control example, but the control of the main controller 110 used in the above-described eleventh control example Without being limited to the content, the control content of the main control device 110 of the twelfth control example, that is, even if it is used in a game machine of the type that executes the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol with priority over the first special symbol good.

In addition, at the end of the game state with electric sapo (game state with low probability electric sapo (time-saving game state) or high probability electric sapo (variable game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls Under the condition that the second special symbol is memorized, the performance of the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed) or the performance of prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加It may be configured to switch to and execute. By constructing in this way, even when switching to the normal game state, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols is small, it is possible to perform the effect of winning the normal symbols for a long period of time, and the player is given a second chance. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of depriving the player of the opportunity to win a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when switching to the normal game state, until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 times), the effect of the normal symbol for a long time is not performed, or the normal symbol is not produced. is configured to switch to a different effect, but regardless of the game state, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), a long period of normal symbols It may be configured such that the win effect is not performed or the effect is switched to a different effect from the normal time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play an advantageous game in accordance with the game state. Furthermore, as a condition for not performing a long-time performance of a normal symbol or switching to a different performance from the normal time, regardless of the number of balls held in the second special symbol, if a specific variation pattern is executed (for example , a variation pattern of a big hit, or a variation pattern of super reach). Alternatively, time information may be obtained from the RTC, and a switching condition may be set at a specific time close to closing (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set by combining the conditions given in this control example.

<18th control example>
Next, an eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 598 to 638. FIG. In the eighteenth control example, in contrast to the above-described eleventh control example, based on the control of the sound lamp control device 113 that is executed when the game machine is turned on (see FIG. 457) and the operation of the frame button 22A, The control of the sound lamp control device 113 executed when changing the background mode by pressing, and the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (8, which is the upper limit number). The difference is that a detailed description has been added about the different points, the control content of the sound lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22, and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 598, but the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example has a plurality of operating means (frame button 22A, left button 22B, right button 22C), the configuration shown as the frame button 22 in the eleventh control example is referred to as the frame button 22A. A detailed description of the button 22A is omitted. Therefore, in each of the control examples described above, various technical ideas explained using the frame button 22 are also applied to the frame button 22A of this control example.

In the eleventh control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 472), start-up processing of the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 475), is executed, and during the period (power-on period) during which each start-up process is executed, as described above with reference to FIG. In addition to displaying, a notification (during power-on period notification) for indicating that the power is currently being turned on (executing each startup process based on power-on) is performed using the audio output device 226 had configured.

In the eleventh control example configured in this way, for example, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbols, and then the power is turned on (turned on), the main controller 110 Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol variation is resumed from the state immediately before the power is turned off, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and output from the voice output device 226 Since it is structured so as to emphasize and notify the player that the notification sound is in the power-on period, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the notification sound is executed before the power is turned off. There is a problem that it makes the user think that the special symbol variation that has been used has been erased.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, when the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is being executed at the time the power is turned off, that is, at the time the power is turned off When the executed special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is restarted after the power is turned on, BGM (special symbol variation sound effect) indicating that the special symbol is varying during the power-on period is output. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp that the special figure fluctuation that has been executed at the time of power failure has been restarted. In addition, rather than creating data of a display image (variation image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, audio data output from the audio output device 226 is created. Since the amount of data processing is smaller, it is possible to inform the player that the special symbols are changing immediately after the power is turned on. Note that the details of the audio output control at power-on will be described later with reference to FIG. 601 .

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22A even while the special symbols are changing. In addition, the timing of changing the background mode is variable according to the changing speed of the special pattern (third pattern) when the player operates the frame button 22A to change the background mode. . Specifically, in this control example, in order to show the lottery result of the special symbols, the number of the third symbols that are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variable display period of the special symbols. The variable display speed is made variable, and when the frame button 22A is operated while the variable display speed of the third pattern is fast, the background mode is immediately changed and the third pattern is changed. When the frame button 22A is operated during the low speed fluctuation, which is slower than the high speed fluctuation, the background mode is switched after the special pattern is finished (after the special pattern is stopped or when the next special pattern is started). configured to change.

In general, the variation display of the third symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that it varies at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of variation, and then varies at low speed (second half period). Using the period in which the three symbols are variably displayed at a low speed, a suggestive performance for indicating the lottery result of the special symbols is executed. Therefore, as in the 18th control example, the background mode is not changed even if the frame button 22A is operated during the low speed fluctuation of the third symbol, so that the dedicated effect corresponding to the currently set background mode is provided. While the (suggestive performance based on the lottery result of special symbols) is being executed, the background mode is changed, and a situation occurs in which the player cannot see the performance contents (result of performance) of the suggestive performance. can be suppressed.

In addition, since it has a variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed variation or a low-speed variation, the background mode is shifted at the present stage. When the operation is performed, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner at which timing the background mode is switched. In this control example, the variation speed of the third symbol is configured to be able to be notified to the player. It may be configured to notify the player.

Furthermore, the variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed variation or a low-speed variation is provided during the execution period of the effect (operation effect) using the operation means. It is configured to also execute notification for letting the player know whether or not there is. As a result, when an operation effective period, which is a period in which the operation means can be operated, is set, whether the operation effective period is the operation effective period set by the execution of the operation effect or not is changed to the background mode. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not it is an operation effective period in which the operation for causing the operation is possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended display mode from appearing when the player operates the operating means.

In the 18th control example, the above-described variation notification means is provided in the operation means (frame button 22A) operated by the player to switch the background mode (provided in the vicinity of the operation means). Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22A to switch to the background mode, the player can easily confirm the notification mode of the variation notification means.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches a specific number (for example, 8, which is the upper limit number), it corresponds to the specific number of winning information (reserved symbols) that is reserved and stored. It is configured to execute a specific period performance (8 pending performances) using the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a period production using a longer period than the production executed corresponding to one variable display period of the special symbol, so that various productions can be executed. It becomes possible and the production effect can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to a specific number and the performance is executed for a specific period.

Here, as in the eighteenth control example, in the case where the period effect is executed within a predetermined range (within the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information held and stored) , As explained with reference to FIG. 427(B) in the eleventh control example described above, the third symbol display is performed to inform the player of the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol (upper limit number: 8). A first reserved symbol pedestal M1 to an eighth reserved symbol pedestal M8 are formed in the small area DS2 of the sub display area DS of the device 81, and sequentially from the first reserved symbol pedestal M1 according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. If the configuration for displaying the reserved design (see FIG. 428(A)) is used, the reserved design corresponding to the winning information newly acquired during execution of the period effect will be displayed in the small area DS2. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the period until is the target of the period effect, and the player is provided with an effect that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth control example, when the period effect is not executed, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area DS2 in the same manner as in the eleventh control example described above. When the performance is executed, only the number of reserved balls to be the target of the period performance is displayed in the small area DS2 as the performance reserved pattern. With this configuration, even if new winning information is acquired during the period production, the number of production pending patterns displayed in the small area DS2 does not increase, so that the player can receive the reserved patterns targeted for the period production. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Details of the period effect in the eighteenth control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609. FIG.

Furthermore, it is constructed so that the player can be notified of the current number of reserved balls of special symbols by using a display area (light emitting area) different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the current number of reserved balls even while the period effect is being executed.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, when the player operates (depresses) the frame button 22A, the operated (depressed) frame button 22A vibrates. It is configured so that the amount of vibration can be varied. By configuring the frame button 22A to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22A, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who presses the frame button 22A, thereby enhancing the performance effect. can be done. Furthermore, it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration executed when the frame button 22A is pressed.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 capable of providing an unexpected performance to the player by vibrating the frame button 22A when the player presses the frame button 22A. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, until the player presses the frame button 22A, the player cannot predict whether or not vibration will be applied when the frame button 22A is pressed. There is a problem that the user cannot actively operate (depress) the frame button 22A.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth control example, whether or not vibration is applied when the player operates (depresses) the frame button 22A before operating (depressing) the frame button 22A is determined. It is configured to be able to suggest the vibration level at the time of vibration. With this configuration, the player can operate the frame button 22A in a state in which the vibration mode when the frame button 22A is operated (depressed) is predicted. can operate (press) the frame button 22A.

Furthermore, since the vibration level of the frame button 22A is configured to be variable, even if a predetermined level of vibration is given when the player presses the frame button 22A, the frame button 22A is operated (depressed) after that. By doing so, it is possible to vibrate the frame button 22A at a vibration level equal to or higher than the predetermined level. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22A a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the eighteenth control example, as in the above-described eleventh control example, a plurality of background modes can be displayed. , the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be variable. Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (an operation of placing a hand over the detection area of the touch sensor 2900), the currently set background mode is notified.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that changes the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, the frame button 22A is pressed). In this case, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the background mode has changed. ) is in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In order to solve this problem, for example, a technique of always displaying the currently set background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is conceivable. Since a part of the limited area of the display screen is used only for notifying the background mode, the area used for various effects executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is reduced. However, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered. In addition, the background mode is performed while the specific effect (for example, effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is highly likely to be a big hit) is being executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. is displayed, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth control example, the background mode can be notified only during any period desired by the player by operating the operating means (touch sensor 2900). It is possible to suppress a situation in which the performance effect of various performances executed on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device 81 is lowered. Further, in the eighteenth control example, since the present background mode is notified by using a display means (light-emitting means) different from the third pattern display device 81, the display of the third pattern display device 81 The limited area of the screen can be effectively utilized for various presentations.

Further, in the eighteenth control example, an effect (operation effect) using the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is configured to be executable. It is configured to play both a role as an operation means for executing the production (participating in the operation production). In other words, the role of the touch sensor 2900 is changed according to the situation. Then, for example, even while an operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, by executing a special operation (operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C), the operation can be performed. It is configured so that the background mode can be notified without operating the touch sensor 2900 for the effect. Therefore, even if the operation means (touch sensor 2900) is used for a plurality of purposes, the player can operate the operation means in an operation mode that matches the purpose desired by the player.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Eighteenth Control Example>
First, with reference to FIG. 598, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example will be described. Fig. 598 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example. ) in that the operation means that the player can operate is changed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above is provided with the frame button 22 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. As described above, a frame button 22A, a left button 22B, and a right button 22C are provided as operating means. The frame button 22A is an operating means used for the same purpose as the frame button 22 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. This is an operation means used for changing the background mode or for switching the background mode. Since the specific contents of the frame button 22A are the same as those of the frame button 22 in the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, like the frame button 22 of the eleventh control example described above, the frame button 22A is also configured so that its mode can be varied by driving the tilting device 310. Since it is the content, detailed description and illustration thereof are omitted.

The left button 22B and right button 22C are operation means provided on the left side of the frame button 22A, and are mainly used as adjustment means for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 450 of the pachinko machine 10. In this 18th control example, the left button 22B and the right button are pressed during the period when the third symbol is not displayed in the third symbol display device 81 and during the period when the variation speed of the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed. The volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by operating 22C. Note that the detailed contents of the volume adjustment are the same as those of the fourteenth control example described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this control example, by operating the left button 22B and the right button 22C during the low speed variation of the third symbol, it is possible to partially invalidate the operation on the other operating means (touch sensor 2900). It is configured as follows. In this way, among the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation can be performed only in a state where a specific condition is established (a state in which the third symbol does not fluctuate, or a state in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed). One operation means can be used for multiple purposes by configuring the operation means for executing control (volume adjustment) based on the above to be used for another purpose when the operation means is operated in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied. Since it can be used, the number of operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 599, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 599 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 599, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example is different from the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that an LED 900 is provided, mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are provided in the variable display device unit 80, and a touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third pattern display device. , are otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The holding LED 900 is used to indicate the number of holding balls of special symbols, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and a reserved ball number command indicating that the number of reserved balls of special symbols output from the main controller 110 will increase or decrease. Based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command shown, the lighting is controlled in correspondence with the special symbol reserved ball number after the increase and the decrease.

Thus, by providing an area outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 for notifying the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the reserved symbol display (Fig. 600) displayed in the sub-display area DS of the third symbol display device 81 (B) reference) is temporarily erased or used for another purpose, the number of pending balls of the current special symbol can be reliably reported. Although detailed description is omitted, this holding LED 900 uses a full-color LED, and is configured to be able to emit at least three colors or more. And, the holding ball of the special figure 2, lighting is controlled so as to be identifiable. Thereby, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each symbol type.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect executed based on the result of pre-determination (pre-reading) performed on the pending stored winning information, when changing the color of the reserved design, LED at the corresponding position of the reserved LED 900 is controlled to emit light in a different color than normal. Furthermore, the display mode (light emission mode) of this pending LED 900 is configured to be less conspicuous than the pending symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is provided at a lower position of the third symbol display device 81 which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player, for example, it may be provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 . In addition, in this 18th control example, since it is configured to be able to store a maximum of 8 reserved ball numbers of special symbols, 8 LEDs that are the same as the upper limit number of reserved storage are stored in the reserved LED 900 is used, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls of special symbols with four LEDs. Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, control is performed to always display the number of reserved balls of special symbols for the reserved LED 900, but in addition to that, for example, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 When the reserved symbols to be displayed are erased or used for another effect, that is, the state in which the player cannot easily grasp the number of reserved balls of the special symbols only by the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When it becomes, it may be configured to execute lighting control for the holding LED 900 .

The mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variable performance (the variable performance of the third symbol) for showing the result of the special figure lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, a "sea mode" in which a display mode simulating the sea (for example, a display mode simulating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device, and the display of the third pattern display device 81 The player can select any one of the "mountain mode" in which a display mode simulating a mountain (for example, a display mode simulating a tree) is displayed as the background of the screen.

The mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are configured to emit light in a light emission mode capable of informing the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, even if the variation effect of the third design using the entire display screen of the third design display device 81 is executed, and the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 are grasped Even if the current background mode cannot be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the lighting modes of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in the first half of the special figure fluctuation (the third pattern is fluctuating at high speed), the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D emit light in a light emission mode that informs the current background mode. , In the second half of the special figure fluctuation (the period from the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are not in the current background mode, but in a suggestive manner that suggests the lottery result. configured to emit light. Then, even in the second half of the special figure fluctuation, the player executes a specific operation on the operation means (frame button 22), so that the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D emit light in a notification mode to notify the current background mode. It is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform light emission control of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D in correspondence with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special drawing lottery result), information useful to the player can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910A to 1910D are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detection means (operation means) having a predetermined detection range, and detects when the player's hand is intruded (placed) within the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period of time. When it is detected, it is determined that an operation has been performed by the player. A player cannot directly see the detection range of the touch sensor 2900, but a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. The display is configured so that the player can easily operate the touch sensor 2900 (make it easier for the player to put his or her hand into the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be able to determine the movement (direction) of a hand entering (arranged) within the detection range. By moving from right to left or from bottom to top, a performance display corresponding to the movement of the hand is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to execute a performance operation corresponding to the player's operation operation on the operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can be made to play the game while being interested.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 600A and 600B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighteenth control example are displayed while varying in synchronization with the third symbol (special symbol) with respect to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described eleventh control example. The scrolling direction of the decorative pattern that is displayed on the screen has been changed from vertical to horizontal (from right to left), and the number of effective lines to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern has been changed to one (see Fig. 427 (A)). ) to five (see FIG. 600(A)), and the difference is that the mode of reporting information related to the game is different. Also, there are some elements that are the same (similar) as those in the eleventh control example, but given different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 600(A)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is They are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "1" to "9" are added.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (such as fish) for each identification information modeled on numbers. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbols, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area DM, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the main symbols arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are formed so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and are configured to be scrolled from right to left and variably displayed. In the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) which do not indicate the special symbol lottery results are formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 600(A), the main display area DM has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed vertically and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed obliquely. In the state where each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, if the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example), A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 600(A), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area DM of 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stop-displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area DM.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player can hardly distinguish ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 600(B). As shown in FIG. 600(B), a small display area DM1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area DM when viewed from the front, and a small display area DM2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. The small display areas DM1 and DM2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area DM1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area DM2.

By providing the small display areas DM1 and DM2 in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth pattern is displayed in the small display areas DM1 and DM2. (see small display area DM1 in FIG. 600(B)) to show that the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas DM1 and DM2 (see figure 600 (B) small display area DM2), but it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth pattern, a plurality of colors By using the display mode showing the number and the display mode that changes the color, it shows that the special pattern is changing, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific pattern and color, the lottery result of the special pattern may be configured as shown.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 600(B), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas DM1, DM2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed as the main display. An example of forming the upper left side and the upper right side of the area DM is shown, but the position and size of the fourth pattern display area to be formed may vary depending on the variation effect performed in the central part of the main display area DM. You may make it differ according to a mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area DS are substantially the same as those in the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. is partitioned into two small areas DS1 and DS2 in the left-right direction, but in the eighteenth control example, the display area of the sub-display area DS is only the small area DS1, and in the small area DS1, the in-execution area DS1A , and a waiting area DS1B. The display contents of the in-execution area DS1A are the same as those of the small area DS1 of the eleventh control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the waiting area DS1B will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals M1 to M8 are displayed in the waiting area DS1B, and normally, reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved special symbols are displayed as in the eleventh control example described above. are doing. On the other hand, in the eighteenth control example, when the reserved symbols are displayed on the pedestal M8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbols reaches the upper limit value (8), the reserved and stored eight reserved symbols are displayed. is configured to execute a dedicated effect (period effect) using (see FIG. 607). While this period effect is being executed, the period during which the period effect is executed (reserved pattern targeted for the period effect) is not displayed in the waiting area DS1B for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. It is configured so that the pending design for production showing only the .

With this configuration, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period production, the new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area DS1B, so that the player can understand how long the period production will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 600, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 also displays a display mode showing the following display contents. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In this guide display area, there are a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for guiding the player to play a left-handed game. It is configured to display a “left-handed” display mode, and the “right-handed” display mode is a game state in which a right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, a variable probability state, a time-saving state. And, it is displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). is configured so that the display mode of is displayed.

<Regarding the effect content in the eighteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 601 to 610, the contents of characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the eighteenth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 601 and 602, description will be given of the contents of the presentation when the power is turned on. FIG. 601 is a timing chart showing the flow of sound effect when the power is turned off (power is cut off) while the special symbol is fluctuating according to the fluctuation pattern A, and then the power is turned on.

In this control example, power outage occurs during special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation), and then, when the power is turned on, while executing the start-up process of the main control unit 110 and the audio lamp control unit 113 (During the return processing period), a display mode indicating that the power is being turned on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 602(A)). And, when the special symbol variation is executed during the return processing period, the BGM during the special symbol variation is output from the voice output device 226. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure variation is being executed during the return processing period.

More specifically, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if power is cut off. It is configured to execute power interruption processing for storing previous game information (variation pattern for effect, BGM information, background mode, remaining variation time, etc.). Since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-described storage area after the power supply from the outside is cut off, The game information is stored in the storage area only when power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part (“B” in FIG. 601) that was output when the power failure occurred is stored, and the BGM part (“B” in FIG. ) to output audio.

In the example shown in FIG. 601, the progress of the BGM that was being output when the power was cut off is stored, and the BGM is reproduced from the point where it was stopped when the power was cut off. The BGM part output at the time of disconnection may be reproduced from the start position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the storage processing to the storage area when a power failure occurs.

Furthermore, in this control example, game information (selected variation pattern , residual fluctuation time, lottery result) are included and output to the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, when the start-up process is completed (when a command indicating completion of initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the initial screen (see FIG. 602(A)) to the normal screen. (See FIG. 602(B)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure variation that was being executed before the power cut has resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 602, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 602A is a schematic diagram showing the display content immediately after power-on, and FIG. 602B is a schematic diagram showing the display content after the initial setting is completed. The contents shown in FIG. 602A are the same as the display contents shown in FIG. If the special figure variation is executed while this initial setting screen is displayed, the BGM (fluctuation sound) corresponding to the variation pattern is output from the continuation of the power outage (see Figure 601 ).

And, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 601(B), a return-only variation pattern based on the remaining period of the special figure variation being executed is executed. In this control example, a first determination is made to determine whether the residual variation time at the completion of initial setting is less than 2 seconds, a second determination is made to determine whether it is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds, and 5 seconds or more. and a third determination to determine whether or not.

Here, by the first determination, if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds, without setting the return-only variation pattern, until the remaining variation time elapses (until the special figure variation being executed ends), the initial The setting screen (see FIG. 602(A)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the short-time variable display, which is difficult for the player to identify, from being executed.

Also, when the remaining variation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the ready-to-win state (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 are stopped with the same symbol on the active line, and only the symbol row Z2 is displayed variably). state), a return-only ready-to-reach effect is executed in which a variable display is executed. This return-only ready-to-win performance is a performance using the variation data of the variation pattern set to have the lowest ratio of the big hit among the normal ready-to-win, ie, ready-to-win variation patterns among the normal variation patterns.

Then, the fluctuation data for the time corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. By constructing in this way, when the special figure variation being executed when the power is turned on is a big win, the winning of the big win can be notified with a variation pattern that is usually difficult to encounter, thereby providing added value to the player. be able to. In addition, by using image data that is rarely used (image data showing a variation pattern that becomes a big hit in normal reach) among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively utilized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 603 to 604, the content of the background mode change operation during special figure fluctuation will be described. Figure 603 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) according to the background change operation timing during special figure fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 603, in this 18th control example, in the variation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation, the variation speed is made variable. Specifically, the variation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, and low speed". As a result, the player can play the game while predicting the timing at which the third symbol will stop. In the eighteenth control example, as in the above-described eleventh control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result is a loss. Since it is configured, the lottery result (length of fluctuation time) of this special symbol can be predicted based on the transition of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (the background can be changed) by the player operating the frame button 22A during the variable display of the special symbols. The timing at which the background is changed is varied according to the timing at which the user operates the frame button 22A.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 603, when the background change operation (pressing the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high speed, the background change The background change is executed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 603 (A), when the current background mode is "sea" and the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, when the background change operation is performed, the background change immediately after that is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 604(B)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 603 (B), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure is not a high speed fluctuation (medium speed fluctuation, low speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special figure The background change is not performed until the end of the background change, and the background change is performed at the timing when the next special figure fluctuation starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 604(A), "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area DM1A provided in the information of the main display area DM of the third pattern display device 81. In the comment display area DM2A provided on the right side of the display area DM1A, characters "Change background with next change" are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the background change operation was performed during the special figure fluctuation (that the pachinko machine 10 officially accepted the background change operation), so the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background change operation from being repeatedly performed.

As described above, in this 18th control example, the timing of performing the background change is different depending on the variation state of the special figure (fluctuation speed of the third symbol) for the background change operation during the special figure variation. It is configured so that As a result, for example, while suppressing the fact that the background change is performed while the effect (for example, the reach effect) is being executed with a high possibility that the lottery result of this special symbol is a hit, this time If it is a period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which the performance suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is difficult to execute, the background can be changed immediately, so that the player can experience various performances (backgrounds). be able to.

It should be noted that, in the flow of the background change described with reference to Figure 603, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure fluctuation and during the special figure high speed fluctuation, the next special figure fluctuation is started Although an example of executing a background change at the timing is shown, it is not limited to this, for example, a stop display in a stop display mode (combination of three third patterns) for showing the lottery result of the special figure with the third pattern. It may be configured to execute the background change at the timing (the timing at which the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure is completed).

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure fluctuation and other than during the high speed fluctuation of the special figure, at least the background change operation is performed until after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured not to execute the change, it may be configured to suppress the fact that the effect that suggests the result of the special drawing is difficult to understand due to the execution of the background change. The background change may be delayed until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background change operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special figure is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special figure switches to low speed fluctuation. .

In addition, when the background change operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation and other than the special figure high-speed fluctuation, the timing at which the background change is performed is configured to be switched based on the result of this special figure lottery. may be, for example, if the special figure variation during variation is a jackpot variation, than when the special figure variation is a deviation variation, a predetermined timing during the variation period (for example, timing to switch to low speed variation) It is good to configure it so that background change can be easily executed with. Furthermore, even when the background change operation is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the special figure, it may be configured to switch the timing of executing the background change based on the result of the special figure lottery of this time.

As a result, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and to motivate the player to perform the background change operation. .

In addition, in FIG. 603, as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is executed, the variation speed of the third symbol (special figure) being executed is used, but not limited to this, For example, the process of the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages), and according to the process of the effect display at the time of the background change operation It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

Specifically, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially displayed as "fluctuation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", and "effect result". For example, the "fluctuation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the special figure fluctuation state "high speed fluctuation" of the 18th control example, and the "reach effect period" and "development effect period" ', and 'effect result notification period' may be configured to correspond to the variation states 'medium speed variation', 'low speed variation', and 'stop' of the special figure of the eighteenth control example.

As described above, even if the timing of the background change executed after the background change operation is varied according to the degree of progress of the effect display instead of the variation speed of the third symbol (special symbol), this control example and the A similar effect can be obtained.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure fluctuation and other than during the special figure high speed fluctuation, the background change is executed after the result of this special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured to do, but not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the next special figure fluctuation (the special figure fluctuation next to the special figure fluctuation that performed the background change operation), and the special figure fluctuation after the next Based on the result of the lottery (preliminary determination (prefetch) result for the prize information retained and stored), whether or not to execute the background change and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change may be configured to be variable. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the background change operation in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure in advance. By making the background change operation to be executed willingly, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of presentations, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, the contents of the variable effect (touch effect) for varying the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 605 is a timing chart showing the variation speed of the third symbol and the flow of the touch effect. As shown in FIG. 605, in this control example, the third pattern is configured to be variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while varying the variation speed in correspondence with the variation period of the special figure variation. are doing. Then, during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, the touch effect (see FIG. 606(A)) is configured to be executed.

When the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the period during which this touch effect is being executed (during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol) When the player enters), the third pattern is configured to perform a variable effect (ready-to-win effect) in which the third symbol changes at a low speed (see FIG. 606(B)).

That is, in this control example, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, the variation speed of the third symbol can be forcibly switched to low speed variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the variable performance (performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low speed fluctuation, so that the player can receive the variable performance can be of interest.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22A can be operated during the period during which the touch effect is being executed to shift the background mode. is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, and when the player grasps that the ready-to-win effect is executed by the change, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the button 22A and then operating the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the ready-to-win effect in the background mode desired by the player.

Here, an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the above-described touch effect will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 606(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the touch effect is executed (timing of Fig. 605(A)), and Fig. 606(B) shows the touch sensor during the touch effect. FIG. 605 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen after operating 2900 (timing in FIG. 605(B)).

As shown in FIG. 606(A), in the state where the touch effect is executed, the third pattern is variably displayed at high speed on the display screen of the third pattern display device (represented by the arrow pointing to the left in the figure). ), in the small area DM3 on the left side of the variable display area during high-speed variation (approximately 1/3 of the left side of the main display area DM), it is indicated that the touch effect is being executed so as to cover the variable display of the third symbol. The touch indication shown is executed. Specifically, a touch point guidance display mode DM31 for guiding a point where the player holds his or her hand, and a period display mode DM32 for indicating the effect period (operation effective period) of the touch effect are displayed. , a comment “touch” prompting the player to operate (touch) the touch sensor 2900 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 606, while the third symbols are changing at high speed, the individual third symbols are changing at such a speed that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize them. Even if the touch display is executed, an effect that is difficult for the player to understand (the effect that the third symbol in the variable display cannot be grasped) is not executed.

Then, during the effect period of the touch effect indicated by the period display mode DM32, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900, as shown in FIG. A ready-to-win effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire display area DM is executed.

As described above, in the eighteenth control example, when the player operates the operation means (touch sensor 2900) while the third symbol is changing at high speed, the third symbol is forced to change at a low speed. It is configured so that it can be switched to By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the execution period of the variable performance (performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low speed fluctuation, so that the player can receive the variable performance can be of interest.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22A can be operated during the period during which the touch effect is being executed to shift the background mode. is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, and the player grasps that the ready-to-win effect can be executed by the change, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the frame button 22A and then operating the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the ready-to-win effect in the desired background mode, and the player quickly gets tired of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609, the contents of the treasure box presentation (8 pieces pending presentation) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit of 8, an 8-holding effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using the 8-holding, is configured to be executed. are doing. This 8 reserved effect is a dedicated effect using 8 reserved patterns, and as the reserved pattern for effect corresponding to each reserved pattern, a reserved pattern for effect in a display mode imitating a treasure box is displayed in the waiting area DS1B. is displayed (see FIG. 607(A)).

Then, when the special figure variation corresponding to the reserved symbols to be subjected to the eight reserved effects is executed, as shown in FIG. Among them, the contents TB10 of the treasure box indicating the lottery result of the variation are displayed. Although details will be described later, this content TB10 is configured to display different colors according to the lottery result of the special figure.

After that, when the new prize information is reserved and stored during the period in which the 8 reserved effects are being executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIGS. 608(A) and (B) A new reserved pattern 900Z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900 without displaying a reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information in the waiting area DS1B. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner up to which reserved symbol the period (performance period) during which the 8 reserved performances are continuously executed.

Then, when the final special figure variation targeted for the 8 reserved effects is executed, as shown in FIG. Reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed. In other words, when there are no reserved symbols to be subjected to the 8 reserved performance, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls currently reserved and stored are displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled because he or she does not know the number of reserved balls currently acquired at the end of the 8-ball reserved presentation.

In addition, in this control example, the 8 pending effects shown with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609 are executed. Even during the period when the reserved symbols are displayed in the waiting area DS1B, if the player performs a specific operation on the operation means, the current reserved symbols are displayed in the waiting area DS1B instead of the reserved symbols for effect. It may be configured to display a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is determined that there is prize winning information for winning a jackpot in advance determination processing executed during the eight pending performance, the eight pending performance is continued until the special figure variation corresponding to the winning information is executed. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, in this control example, in the period production (8 pieces pending production) in which a series of fluctuation production is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (reserved design), the lottery result corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed However, it is not limited to this, and whether winning information for winning a jackpot is included in the reserved symbols to be the target of the period production Whether or not is discriminated (prefetched) in advance before the execution of the special drawing lottery based on the reserved pattern, and based on the prediscrimination result (prefetched result), the production mode of the period production is set. You can In this case, for example, the degree of expectation for winning the big prize may be set in a plurality of stages, and a presentation mode may be set so that the degree of expectation for winning the big prize does not drop during the performance period. As a result, it is possible to heighten the expectation for the big win in accordance with the progress of the period performance, and to keep the player's eyes on the period performance until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, display contents during presentation using the touch sensor 2900 in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 610(A) is a display screen showing a display example when the touch sensor 2900 is operated during the touch effect executed while the third symbol is changing at low speed (during the ready-to-win display). ) is a display screen showing a display example when a special operation is performed during the touch effect executed during the low speed fluctuation of the third symbol (during the ready-to-win display).

As shown in FIG. 610(A), when the touch effect is executed during the low speed variation of the third symbol (during the ready-to-win display), the main display area A small area DM3 is formed in about one-third of the left side of the DM, and touch display is performed. In the state of FIG. 610(A), since the third symbol is in the process of low-speed fluctuation (during the ready-to-win display), the player can visually recognize the ready-to-win display mode only in the display area of the main display area DM which is not covered with the small area DM3. It is reduced and displayed in a possible state, and the touched point guidance display mode DM31 is displayed in a mode indicating that the touch sensor 2900 has been operated (indicated by diagonal lines in the drawing).

In the comment display area DM2A, a comment "great chance", which is the effect result of the touch effect, is displayed. In this control example, the touch effect can be executed during the reach display of the third symbol, and by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed is a big hit. Since an effect (comment display) suggesting whether or not is performed, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while expecting that a comment (for example, a big chance) that is highly likely to be a big win will be displayed. It is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the operation presentation.

It should be noted that if the player wants to quickly perceive the lottery result of the special symbol, by executing the above-described touch effect, the touch sensor 2900 is positively operated, and the touch effect is displayed in the comment display area DM2A. I want to actively display the comment, which is the result of the production, but on the other hand, I want to enjoy the production mode of the variable production of the 3rd pattern (Until the 3rd pattern is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special pattern is suggested. A player who thinks that he does not want to execute other effects to be executed should not display a comment suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the comment display area DM2A without operating the touch sensor 2900 even if the touch effect is executed. It is conceivable to play a game to make

In this case, it is said that the current background mode cannot be grasped by operating the touch sensor 2900 during execution of the touch effect (during the effective period of operation of the operation means (touch sensor 2900) set during the touch effect). I had a problem. Therefore, in the eighteenth control example, by operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C (see FIG. 598) arranged on the left side of the frame button 22A, It is configured so that the current background mode can be notified even if there is. By configuring in this way, even if the operation control using one operation means (touch sensor 2900) is duplicated, it is possible to allow the player to easily perform only the desired operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 610(B), when the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed while the touch effect is being executed while the third symbol is fluctuating at low speed (during the ready-to-win display) ( The lower frame of 610(B) is expressed by filling in a display mode imitating the left button 22B and the right button 22C), and the comment "Pay attention to the mode lamp" is displayed in the comment display area DM2A. As a result, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated at the current stage, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current background mode is being notified instead of displaying the effect result of the touch effect. can. Then, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated in that state, the currently set background mode is selected from among the mode lamps 1910 for notifying the background mode, instead of the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation being executed. The corresponding mode lamp 1910A is illuminated.

Note that, in this control example, when the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed while the touch effect is being executed while the third symbol is changing at low speed (during the ready-to-win display), the touch Even if the sensor 2900 is operated, the effect result of the touch effect is not displayed. It may be configured to forcibly end the touch effect. In other words, it may be configured such that the operation effect being executed is canceled by executing a special operation on the operation means.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighteenth control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 611(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223; FIG. In the 18th control example, in addition to the 11th control example described above, the ROM 222 has an 8-piece pending lottery table 222FA, the special effect selection table 222FB, and the vibration pattern data 222FC. The difference is that an effect execution flag 223FB and a pending effect counter 2223FC are added. Other elements are the same as those in the eleventh control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The 8-piece reservation lottery table 222FA is a data table used when performing a lottery (discrimination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece reservation effect (treasure box effect), and is used in reservation number control processing (see Z2243 in FIG. 621). , the value obtained by adding the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter) is the upper limit value. 8" (Z2473 in FIG. 621: YES), it is referred to determine whether or not to execute the 8 pending effect (Z2475 in FIG. 621). When the execution of the 8 reserved effects is determined, the 8 reserved effects described above with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609 are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 612(C), the contents of the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222FA will be described. FIG. 612(C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222FA. As shown in FIG. 612(C), the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222FA shows the lottery result (hit winning) advantageous to the player within the reservation of the special figure (within the reservation used for the 8-piece reservation effect). It is configured to discriminate whether or not information is included, and to vary the execution probability of the 8 pending effects based on the determination result.

Specifically, when there is winning information indicating winning in the reservation of the special figure (when the judgment result in the reservation is "hit"), the value of the acquired reservation effect counter 223FC is "0 to 140". In the case of "141 to 198", it is stipulated that the 8 pending effects are executed and the 8 pending effects are not executed. On the other hand, if the on-hold judgment result is "only out", if the value of the acquired holding effect counter 223FC is "0 to 90", 8 holding effects are executed, and if it is "91 to 198" It is stipulated not to execute 8 pending effects.

In other words, in this control example, the case where winning information indicating a lottery result (hit winning) that is advantageous to the player is included in the holding that is the target of the 8 holding effect is better than the case where it is not included. It is configured so that the 8-hold performance can be easily executed. As a result, the execution of the 8-hold performance can make the player think that he or she will soon win the jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit number of 8, whether or not to execute 8 reserved effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using 8 reserved Although it is configured to perform the lottery, it is not when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, but when it reaches a predetermined number (for example, 7), whether continuous production (period production) is executed. You may comprise so that a lottery may be performed. In this case, for example, the execution probability of the 8 pending effect may be varied between the case where the number of pending balls corresponding to one special symbol type is 3 and the case where the number is 4 among the 7 pending.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, the bonus (the number of prize balls, the game state set after the jackpot game) given to the player in the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is large. The pre-determined results of the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) on the side where the game is likely to be executed and the other special symbol type (disadvantageous special symbol) are divided, and the execution probabilities of the 8 reserved performances are set to be different. In this case, when there is winning information indicating winning of a jackpot in the holding of advantageous special symbols, it is preferable to make it easier to execute the 8 holding performance than other conditions. As a result, the degree of expectation of the player for the 8-hold effect can be further increased.

The special effect selection table 222FB is a data table referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is operated according to the lottery result of the special symbol, result), different vibration amounts are set.

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222FB will be described with reference to FIG. 612(A). FIG. 612(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect selection table 222FB, and FIG. 612(B) is a vibration amount scenario specified in the special effect selection table 222FB. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of vibration pattern data 222FC having (vibration type).

In the eighteenth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can also be varied in three stages. It is Further, the frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger amount of vibration when the special symbol lottery result or the special symbol preliminary determination result is advantageous to the player. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to be driven when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. It is configured.

Therefore, unless the player presses the frame button 22, the player cannot recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates, and the amount of vibration when it vibrates. be able to. Furthermore, this control example is configured so that the vibration amount corresponding to pressing the frame button multiple times is defined as one vibration amount scenario (vibration type), and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger amount of vibration. This allows the player to intentionally press the frame button 22 multiple times.

In the eighteenth control example, when the sound lamp control device 113 sets the variation pattern for the variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 624), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence/absence of an effect (operation effect) and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (a part of the operation effect) for vibrating the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibration type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222FB when the frame button 22 is pressed, A vibrating operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set vibration type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 612(A), the special effect selection table 222FB has a vibration amount scenario in the case where the hit is included in the reservation of the special symbol, and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 79". "Vibe A" is defined as (vibration type), "vibration B" is defined as the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in the range of "80 to 139", and the vibration amount scenario is defined in the range of "140 to 175" "Vibrator C" is specified as the (vibration type), and "Vibration D" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in the range of "176 to 198".

In addition, when the hit is not included in the suspension of the special figure (only off), and the value of the production counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "vibe B" is used as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). In the range of "50 to 90", "vibe C" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and in the range of "91 to 198", "vibe D" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibrator type). stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 612(B), detailed contents of each vibe type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222FB will be described. As shown in FIG. 612(B), in the eighteenth control example, four types of vibration types (vibration A to vibration D) can be set, and the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of PUSH ) is specified.

Specifically, the vibration type "vibration A" specifies "none (no vibration)" for the first PUSH and "strong" for the second to fourth times, and "vibration B" specifies PUSH. The first push is "weak", the second is "medium", and the third and fourth are "strong". "weak", "medium" for the third time, and "strong" for the fourth time, and "vibration D" defines "weak" for the first PUSH and "medium" for the second to fourth times. ing.

In this way, by varying the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated according to the set type of vibration, and by varying whether or not the amount of vibration is variable according to the number of pushes, Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed next time, the amount of vibration the frame button 22 vibrates can be entertained. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation presentation, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the vibration amount specified for each type of vibration is configured to increase (not decrease) as the number of pushes increases, but it is not limited to this. , the vibration amount may be reduced. In this case, if the special figure variation being executed is a big win variation, or if there is winning information indicating a big win winning in the special figure pending, the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 tends to decrease in the middle of the special performance. It is better to configure it so that Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount becomes small.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, the vibration amount is set for a specific PUSH number of times (4 times) regardless of which type of vibration is set. Instead, the number of pushes for setting the vibration amount may be varied according to the type of vibration.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the 18th control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (effect in which the player operates the frame button 22 multiple times according to the process of the variable display (reach fluctuation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . By configuring in this way, only by operating the frame button 22 along with the effect (operation effect) of the variable display executed by the third pattern display device 81, the frame button can be operated a specified number of times (4 times). can be executed.

In addition, this 18th control example also has display effects dedicated to special effects. The display effect dedicated to this special effect has a step-by-step display mode (up to 4 stages) during a specific period within the special figure fluctuation period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the special figure fluctuation starts). A step-up possible production is executed. This effect is configured in a mode of effect that can suggest that the frame button 22 is pressed and the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is varied (increased).

By using such a dedicated effect, the player can be made to actively operate the frame button 22 while expecting the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 to further increase. In addition, even though the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated with the maximum vibration amount specified for the set vibration type. It is possible to suppress the end of the special performance without causing the special performance to end.

In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured to be set based on the lottery result of the variation as well as the type of the set vibration, and the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 is set. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode is stepped up even though it is not variable.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be explained. , “amplitude indicating amplitude of vibration” and “indicating time required for one unit of vibration (period)”, the amount of vibration is defined based on the magnitude of amplitude. Therefore, since the amplitude of the vibration felt when the frame button 22 is pressed differs depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, it is possible for the player to easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

In addition, in the above-described special effects, it is sufficient that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times. A period from when the frame button 22 is pressed to when the vibration starts) may be varied, and they may be used in combination. In addition, by providing a plurality of vibrating means (such as motors) capable of imparting vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) and controlling the driving of the plurality of vibrating means, the frame button 22 can be vibrated. The position of the source may be varied, or the mode of vibration felt by the player may be varied by varying the drive start timing of each vibration means. In addition, it may be configured such that the variable content of the vibration mode can be selected by the player.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, the frame button 22 is configured so as not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 while the special effect is set. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be vibrated with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set in the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special effect is currently being performed.

The vibe pattern data 222FC is a data table storing the contents of each of the vibe types (vibe A to vibe D) defined in the special effect selection table 222FB. The contents are omitted since they have been described above in the description of the special effect selection table 222FB.

Next, with reference to FIG. 611(B), the content defined in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described eleventh control example. . As described above, the RAM 223 of the eighteenth control example has a next background change flag 223FA, a pending effect execution flag 223FB, a pending effect counter 2223FC, and a SW special effect counter 223FD added to the RAM 223 of the eleventh control example. is different.

The next background change flag 223FA is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is executed to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background is changed depending on the timing of executing the background change operation. In such a case, a time lag occurs between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) is actually changed (transitioned). Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is met, the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 629), the fluctuation state of the special figure at the time when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22) is executed (the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol) If it is determined that the high speed fluctuation is not in progress (Z2964 in FIG. 629: NO), it is set to ON (see Z2965 in FIG. 629). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON in the variation stop processing 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 620) that is executed when a stop command indicating the stop of the special figure variation is received ( Z2266 of Figure 620: YES) then determines whether or not there is a pending memory of Toku-zu (Z2267 of Figure 620), and if it is determined that there is no suspension (Z2267 of Figure 620: NO), Stop of Toku-zu fluctuation Background change is executed at the timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special figure pending (Z2267 in FIG. 620: YES), the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure fluctuation is started (see Z2258 in FIG. 619).

The pending effect executing flag 223FB is a flag for indicating that the 8 pending effect (see FIG. 607) is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8 pending effect is executed. . Then, when the 8 pending effect is completed, it is set to OFF (see Z2534 in FIG. 624). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while this pending effect execution flag 223FB is set to ON, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223A and the special symbol Even if the value obtained by summing the value of the 2-reserved ball number counter 223B) reaches the upper limit number (8), it is configured not to execute a lottery to determine whether to execute a new 8-reserved performance.

Specifically, in the reserved ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 621), when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter is 8 (Z2473 in FIG. 621: YES), then the reserved effect It is configured to determine whether the execution flag 223FB is set to ON, and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (is OFF), the processing of Z2474 and Z2475 in FIG. 621 is executed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the 8-piece reservation performance for an unnecessarily long time, so that the sense of value of the 8-piece reservation presentation can be enhanced. In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 reserved performance, it is determined whether to execute a new 8 reserved performance. It may be configured to execute a lottery. In this case, it is preferable to execute a lottery different from the initial lottery for determining whether or not to execute the 8-piece reservation performance as the lottery for whether or not to execute the new 8-piece reservation performance. Concretely, it is preferable that the new 8-piece reservation effect is more likely to be executed than the first 8-piece reservation effect when the target reservation includes a big win. As a result, when the 8 reserved performance is executed for more than 8 special figure fluctuations, the expectation for the big win can be further enhanced. In addition, even during the 8 ball reservation performance, the game can be motivated to accumulate the reserved balls up to the upper limit again.

The pending effect counter 223FC is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and each time the main process (see FIG. 617) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond) ), the update process is performed so that the values are different. The value of this pending effect counter 223FC is obtained when drawing lots with reference to the 8 pending lottery table 222FA to determine whether or not to execute the 8 pending effect in the pending number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 621). (See Z2474 in FIG. 621).

The SW special effect counter 223FD is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect processing (see Z2841 in FIG. 628). (See Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (See Z2945 in FIG. 628). Here, in this control example, no matter what type of special effect is set, the special effect corresponding to four frame button operations is set, so a value of 4 is set to the SW special effect counter 223FD.

Each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is decremented by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 628), corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD after subtraction. SW motor data is set in order to execute the effect (see Z2947 in FIG. 628).

The return state storage area 223FE stores remaining time information of the return fluctuation (special figure fluctuation in which the power is cut off during execution) included in the return command received from the main controller 110 when returning from the power failure state. This is a storage area for Specifically, it is used in the process (Z2281 in FIG. 622) of storing the remaining fluctuation time information included in the received return command in the fluctuation return process (Z2252 in FIG. 622).

In this control example, it is configured to set the display mode (variation display mode) after the recovery process is completed based on the remaining variation time of the special figure variation stored in the recovery state storage area 223FE after the power is restored. Details will be described later, but if the remaining variation time after the end of the return process is longer than the predetermined time (2 seconds), the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the remaining variation time is executed, and the predetermined time (2 seconds) is displayed. seconds) or less, the recovery processing screen is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the special figure fluctuation after the power return in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

The return fluctuation flag 223FF is a flag for indicating that the special figure fluctuation interrupted at the time of power failure is fluctuating (return fluctuation) after the power is restored, and is set to ON when the return fluctuation is in progress. It is a thing. This return fluctuation flag 223FF is set to ON (Z2284 in FIG. 622) when a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is set in the fluctuation return processing (see FIG. 622) (Z2283 in FIG. 622). After the display command corresponding to the return fluctuation is set, it is set to OFF (Z2296 in FIG. 623).

The remaining variation time counter 223FG is a counter for counting the remaining time of variation of the third symbol. The value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern acquired in the fluctuation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) (Z2511 in FIG. 624), and the counter update process (see FIG. 633). is 0 or more (Z2861: YES), 1 is subtracted.

The high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is a flag for indicating whether the fluctuation of the third symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, and is set to ON when the high-speed fluctuation is in progress. In the counter update process (see Z2176 in FIG. 633), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to ON when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG indicates the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863 in FIG. 633). It is set to off when no period is indicated (Z2865 in FIG. 633). Also, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 630) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626), the touch sensor 2900 is operated (determined as ON) (determined as Z2825: YES), it is also set to OFF when the variation speed of the third symbol is switched to a low speed (Z2833 of Z549). In addition, the setting state of the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is referred to when determining the timing of switching the background mode in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 629) (see Z2964 in FIG. 630).

The special operation flag 223FI is a flag for indicating that the player has performed a special operation on the operating means (left button 22B, right button 22C), and is turned on when the player has performed a special operation. is set to Specifically, when the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed in the left and right button input processing (see Z2843 in FIG. 627) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626). (Z2851 in FIG. 627: YES), and when the flag 223FH during high-speed fluctuation is off during special symbol fluctuation (Z2853 in FIG. 627: NO), it is set to ON (Z2855 in FIG. 627).

Then, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 630), the setting status is determined (see Z2831 in FIG. 630), and if it is set to ON (Z2831 in FIG. 630: YES), the process related to the touch effect is executed. Mode identification processing (Z2968 in FIG. 630) is executed without execution. In this control example, while the player continuously operates (presses) the left button 22B and the right button 22C, the special operation flag 223FI is set to be ON, and the left button 22B and the right button 22C is stopped, the special operation flag 223FI is set to OFF (see Z2857 in FIG. 627). That is, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated while the left button 22B and the right button 22C are pressed, the currently set background mode does not change based on the operation result. Notification is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 598, the left button 22B and the right button 22C are arranged at a distance (approximately 3 cm) that allows the player to operate them simultaneously with one hand. It is Therefore, while the left button 22B and the right button 22C are operated with one hand, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand. It should be noted that the arrangement relationship of each operation means is not limited to the arrangement relationship of this control example, and for example, the left button 22B, the right button 22C and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated simultaneously with one hand. Alternatively, the left button 22B and the right button 22C may be configured so that they can be operated with one hand operating the operating handle, and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand. .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 613 and 614. FIG. In the 18th control example, the contents defined in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the contents defined in the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 are different from those in the 11th control example. are otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 613 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 613, in the work RAM 233 of the eighteenth control example, an 8 display setting flag 233FA, an 8 display effect counter 233FB, a display pending ball number storage area 233FC, and a display effect counter 233FD are added. is different from the eleventh control example described above.

The 8-piece display setting flag 233FA is a flag for indicating that the 8-piece pending effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the 8-piece pending effect is executed. While this eight display setting flag 233FA is set to ON, special symbols are displayed in the waiting area DS1B (see FIG. 602(B)) of the sub-display area DS of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the number of pending balls, the remaining number of pending symbols (retained symbols for effect) to be the target of the 8 pending effect is displayed (see FIG. 609). As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the execution period of the 8 pending effects, which are continuous effects (period effects) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

In the eighteenth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the eight reserved effect and the number of reserved symbols for effect are displayed in synchronization with each other. It is sufficient to display the number of reserved patterns for effect so that the player can easily understand the execution period of , for example, the third pattern stops or temporarily stops during the 8 reserved effect. The number of reserved patterns for use may be set, or one reserved pattern for performance may be set for two or more special figure fluctuations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the 8 pending effects (what number of pending symbols is currently being displayed in a variable display).

The display 8 effect counter 233FB is the number of pending patterns for effect to be displayed in the waiting area DS1B (see FIG. 602(B)) of the sub display area DS of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the 8 pending effect. is a counter for measuring In this control example, since it is configured so as to vary the number of pending symbols for performance corresponding to the remaining number of pending symbols to be subjected to the 8 pending performance, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs 8 performances for display. In the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 636) executed when the hold command is received, the counter value is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 636).

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 635) that is executed when the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the counter is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 635), and after subtraction is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 635). When the value of the 8 display effect counter 233FB becomes 0, it means that all of the reserved patterns to be subjected to the 8 reserved effect have been used. It is set to OFF (see Z3525 in FIG. 635), and in the pending display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 637), a pending design is displayed in the waiting area DS1B (see FIG. 609). As a result, when the last special figure variation targeted for the 8 reserved performance is executed, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbols are displayed in the waiting area DS1B, so the 8 reserved performance is completed. When doing so, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the number of reserved balls of the special figure is accumulated.

The display reserved ball number storage area 233FC is a storage area for storing the current special figure reserved ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives the display reserved ball number command output from the sound lamp control device 113. If so, the number of pending balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233FD is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and each time the display control device 114 command determination processing (see Z3302 in FIG. 634) is executed, a different value and The update process is executed so that The value of the display effect counter 233FD is obtained when lottery is performed with reference to the 8 pending lottery table 222FA to determine whether or not to execute the 8 pending effect in the pending number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 621). (See Z2474 in FIG. 621).

Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234A of the character ROM 234 of the eighteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 613, the NAND flash memory 234A of the eighteenth control example is different from the NAND flash memory 234A of the eleventh control example in that eight effect scenario selection tables 234A3 are added. ing.

The 8-piece production scenario selection table 234A3 is a data table for selecting the production result of the 8-piece reserved production, and is based on the remaining number of reserved symbols to be subjected to the 8-piece reserved production and the lottery result of the special symbols. It is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the 8 reserved performances.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 614 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3. As described above with reference to FIGS. 607 to 609, in this 18th control example, when the special figure variation is started when the 8 holding effect is executed, the treasure chest displayed in the running area DS1A is open. , and the suggested mode is configured to be selected by referring to the 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3.

In this 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3, the variation result (lottery result of special figure variation executed this time) is a hit (jackpot), and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "7 to 4". In other words, when 4 to 7 reserved patterns for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area DS1B, the value of the display effect counter 233FD is in the range of "0 to 50" and the suggestive mode "rainbow". is defined, the suggested mode "red" is defined in the range of "51 to 90", the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "91 to 150", and "white" is defined in the range of "151 to 198" stipulated.

Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 reserved patterns for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area DS1B, the display effect counter The suggested mode "rainbow" is defined in the range of "0 to 89", the suggested mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", and the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179" ” is defined, and “white” is defined in the range of “180 to 198”.

On the other hand, if the variation result (lottery result of the special figure variation executed this time) is out and the value of the 8 display effect counter 233FB is "7 to 4", that is, a treasure box is simulated in the waiting area DS1B. When 4 to 7 reserved patterns for effect are displayed, the value of the display effect counter 233FD is defined in the range of ``0 to 39'' as the suggested mode ``red'', and in the range of ``40 to 149''. A suggestive mode of "blue" is defined, and a range of "150 to 198" is defined as "white". Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 reserved patterns for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area DS1B, the display effect counter The suggested mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 233FD, the suggested mode "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is defined in the range of "160 to 198" stipulated.

As described above, in the 18th control example, as the suggestion mode displayed as the 8 pending effect, there is a win suggestion mode "Rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a win. When the suggestion mode "rainbow" is displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is notified at the timing when the special figure variation is started, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the smaller the value of the 8 display effect counter 233FB, that is, the more the 8 pending effect progresses, the easier it is for various colors to be displayed as the suggestive mode of the 8 pending effect. It is possible to enjoy the performance without getting bored until the end with respect to the 8 pending performances which are continuous performances executed across the special figure fluctuations.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, when the 8 reserved effects are executed, a reserved pattern for effect (treasure box) for indicating the target special figure variation is displayed in the waiting area DS1B, and is the target of the effect. When a special figure variation is executed, the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the variation is displayed while the treasure chest displayed in the running area DS1A is open. However, for example, when displaying reserved patterns for presentation (treasure chest) in the waiting area DS1B, the color of the displayed treasure box may be set based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved pattern. Also good.

Specifically, when the prize information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a big win, it is possible to set multiple colors for treasure boxes that are more likely to be selected than when information indicating a big win is not included. Good to configure. By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the special figure variation executed during the eight pending performance from the stage before the special figure variation is performed.

In addition, an effect (read-ahead effect) in which the state of the pending pattern for effect (color of the treasure box) displayed in the waiting area DS1B is changed, and an effect in which the display state of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the active area DS1A is changed. (the variable effect) and are executed in combination, it is preferable to set the variable mode so that the player pays attention to the variable effect to be executed later than the look-ahead effect to be executed first. In this case, when setting the effect mode (the color of the treasure box) of the look-ahead effect, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the effect mode is set may also be set in advance, When selecting the variable performance, the variable performance may be selected based on the performance mode of the look-ahead performance set for the reserved pattern corresponding to the current variable performance. As a result, it is possible to associate the performance mode of a plurality of performances (read-ahead performance, the variable performance) executed at different timings with respect to one reserved pattern (winning information), thereby making the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute a continuous performance without giving.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the eighteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 615, start-up processing 8 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 615 is a flow chart showing this start-up process 8. FIG. The start-up process 8 in this 18th control example sets a fluctuation return command indicating the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation being executed after executing the process of Z910 for the start-up process in the 11th control example. (Z951) The difference is that processing is added. In the eighteenth control example, a command indicating the remaining remaining time of the return fluctuation is set. Since other processing is the same as the start-up processing in the eleventh control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 616 to 633, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described. In the eighteenth control example, in contrast to the eleventh control example described above, the start-up process (see FIG. 475) is changed to start-up process 8 (see FIG. 615), and the main process (see FIG. 476) is changed to main process 8 (see FIG. 617). ), command determination processing (2113 in FIG. 477) is command determination processing 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 618), variation pattern reception processing (Z2202 in FIG. 478) is variation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 619), variation display setting Processing (Z2114 in FIG. 487) is changed to variable display setting processing 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 624), pending number display update processing (Z2106 in FIG. 476) is changed to pending number display update processing 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 625), frame button input monitoring/ Effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 490) is changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 626), and as new processing, fluctuation recovery processing (Z2252 in FIG. 622) and display startup processing (Z2245 in FIG. 623) , left and right button input processing (Z2843 in FIG. 627), SW effect processing (Z2841 in FIG. 628), background change processing (Z2949 in FIG. 629), mode identification processing (Z2968 in FIG. 631), lamp setting processing (Z2173 in FIG. 632) ) and counter update processing (Z2176 in FIG. 633) are added. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 616, the start-up process (see FIG. 616) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the above-described start-up process of the eleventh control example (see FIG. 475) in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 475) when a state command is received is deleted. . Furthermore, the difference is that the contents of the processing executed in the initial setting (Z2001) are changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 616) is executed, processes Z2001 to Z2011 are executed in the same manner as in the eleventh control example described above, and this process ends. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighteenth control example will be described with respect to the differences from the above-described eleventh control example. In this eighteenth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 601, during the period during which the initial setting is being performed, if the special figure variation is being performed, the BGM of the special figure variation is output. It consists of That is, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 616), the process of reading the game information at the time of power failure is executed, and the game information at the time of power failure read by the process is in special figure fluctuation. When it is determined that there is, a variation command for voice is set for outputting BGM of special figure variation from the voice output device 226 .

Although the details will be described later, in the eighteenth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, power is supplied from the internal power supply provided inside the sound lamp control device 113, and the power is supplied. The game information at the time of disconnection (presence or absence of special figure fluctuation, lottery result of the fluctuation, BGM for fluctuation, remaining fluctuation time, etc.) is temporarily stored in the display storage area. This makes it possible to read out the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the startup process (see FIG. 616).

Next, with reference to FIG. 617, the contents of the main process 8 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 617 is a schematic diagram showing main processing 8 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the eighteenth control example.

The main processing 8 of the eighteenth control example replaces the main processing of the eleventh control example (see FIG. 476) with the pending number display update processing (Z2106 in FIG. Z2171 in 625) is replaced with frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 476), and frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 625) is replaced with command determination processing (Z2113 in FIG. 476). Command determination processing 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 618) is replaced with variable display setting processing (Z2114 in FIG. 476), and variable display setting processing 8 (Z2175 in FIG. Z2111 in), during reach retention effect management processing (Z2112 in FIG. 475) is deleted, and lamp setting processing (see Z2173 in FIG. 617) is added. Other processes are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 8 (see FIG. 617) is executed, first, the same processes Z2101 to Z2105 as the main process (see FIG. 476) of the eleventh control example described above are executed. Then, when the process of Z2105 is finished, next, the pending number display update process 8 is executed (Z2171). Details of this pending number display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of Z2171 is completed, the processing of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 is then executed (Z2172). Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of Z2172 is finished, the processing of Z2108 to Z2110 which is the same as the main processing of the eleventh control example (see FIG. 476) is executed, and then the lamp setting processing is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit . Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing the processing of Z2173, next, counter update processing (Z2176) is executed. Details of this counter update process (Z2176) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the processing of Z2176 is completed, or when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: NO), command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then variable display is performed. Setting processing 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as in the eleventh control example described above is executed. Details of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 618, and details of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 618, the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 618 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z2174). This command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the pending ball count command output from the main controller 110 for the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477) of the eleventh control example described above. the content of the process executed when the stop command is received from the main controller 110 is added; The difference is that a process to be executed when a display rise command to be set is received and a process to be executed when a fluctuation return command is received are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In addition, in the command determination processing (see Z2113 in FIG. 477) of the eleventh control example described above, the processing (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 477) executed when the illustrated stop type command is received is Although the same processing is executed in the control example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the processing (Z2261 in FIG. 618) corresponding to other commands is executed.

When the command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, first, it determines whether the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: YES), then the variation pattern reception process 8 is executed (Z2241), and the process ends. The detailed contents of this fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. The difference is that it is configured to execute processing for background change in .

Returning to FIG. 618, the description continues. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and if it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: YES ), the fluctuation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242), and this processing ends. This fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs the process of setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the process of executing the background change when the special symbol is stopped. The detailed content will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: NO), then it is determined whether the command for the number of reserved balls has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that the command for the number of retained balls has been received. If so (Z2205: YES), the pending number control process is executed (Z2243), and this process ends. Details of this pending number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 2205 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z2205: NO), Z2207 and Z2208, which are the same as the command determination process of the eleventh control example (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), After executing the process, it is determined whether or not the variable return command is received (Z2251). When it is determined that the variable return command is received (Z2251: YES), the variable return process is executed (Z2252), and this process is performed. exit. The detailed content of this fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2251 that the fluctuation return command has not been received (Z2251: NO), then it is determined whether or not the display rise command has been received (Z2244). This display start-up command is set when the display control device 114 completes the initial setting processing after the power is turned on. to the audio lamp controller 113.

When it is determined that the display rise command is received in the process of Z2244, that is, the initial setting process of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third pattern display device 81 based on the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 If it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen (Z2244: YES), display startup processing is executed (Z2245), and this processing ends. Details of the display startup process (Z2245) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z2245, the game information (sound data) stored in the display storage area is read out when the power is turned off, and the process for outputting the sound data to the sound output device 226 is executed. Thereby, as described above with reference to FIG. can output sound based on the sound data stored in the display storage area.

In addition, in this control example, as the game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is fluctuating (information during the special figure fluctuation), which is being executed during the special figure fluctuation Information indicating the type of sound (BGM) (BGM type information) can be stored, and when setting the sound data in the process of Z2245, read the special figure fluctuation information and BGM type information, Based on this, rising voice data is set.

In the process of Z2244, if it is determined that the display rise command has not been received (Z2244: NO), the process corresponding to other commands (including the process when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261). , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 619, the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described. FIG. 619 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 8 (Z2241). This variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) is the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) of the eleventh control example described above, in which the processes of Z2225 to Z2231 are deleted, and the background change process at the start of variation. The difference is that the Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 619) is executed, the same Z2221 to Z2224 processes as the fluctuation pattern reception process of the eleventh control example (see Z2202 in FIG. 478) are executed, and then the following It is determined whether the background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2256). Here, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2256: YES), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z2257). A display switching command to the corresponding variation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223FA is set to OFF (Z2259), and this processing is terminated.

That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high-speed fluctuation period during the special figure fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 619) is executed while the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON. When done, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation performed during the previous special figure fluctuation. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2256 that the next background change flag 223FA is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (Z2256: NO), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 620, the contents of the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) will be described. FIG. 620 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242). When the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223FA is set to ON (Z2266), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2266: YES), it is determined whether there is a pending special figure ( Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B are read out for determination. In the process of Z2267, if it is determined that there is no special figure pending (Z2267: NO), the next special figure variation despite the fact that the conditions for executing the background change in the next special figure variation are satisfied Since it is not executed, in order to execute the background change triggered by the stop of this special figure fluctuation, add 1 to the background mode and set it in the background mode storage area 223I (Z2268). A display switching command to the corresponding variation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223FA is set to OFF (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2271.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2266 that the next background change flag 223FA is not set to ON (Z2266: NO), or if it is determined in the process of Z2267 that there is a special figure pending (Z2267: YES ) does not execute the background change at the timing of executing this process (variation stop timing of the special figure), skipping the processing of Z2268 ~ Z2270 and proceeds to the processing of Z2271.

In the process of Z2271, it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223FF is ON (Z2271), that is, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is the return fluctuation. When it is determined that the return fluctuation flag is ON (Z2271: YES), the return fluctuation flag 223FF is set to OFF (Z2272), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is cleared to 0 (Z2273), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223FF is not ON (Z2271: NO), the current fluctuation is not a return fluctuation, so the processes of Z2272 and Z2273 are skipped and this process ends.

In this control example, as described above, if the conditions for the next special figure variation to be executed with the next background change flag 223FA turned on are not satisfied (at the timing when this special figure variation stops If there is no), it is configured to execute the background change at the timing of stopping the special figure fluctuation this time, so the background mode after switching is provided early to the player who wants the background change. can be done.

Moreover, you may continue the ON state of next background change flag 223FA, for example, until the next special figure variation|variation is performed, without restricting to the structure of this control example mentioned above. In this case, set a predetermined effective period (for example, 1 minute) as the period until the next special figure fluctuation is started, and if the next special figure fluctuation is not executed within the predetermined valid period, the next background It is preferable to configure so that the change flag 223FA is set to OFF.

With this configuration, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223FA set to ON, the next player starts the game. It is possible to suppress the execution of the background change immediately after.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the content of the pending number control process (Z2243) will be described. FIG. 621 is a flowchart showing the content of the pending number control process (Z2243). In this pending number control process (Z2243), based on the information contained in the pending ball number command received from the main controller 110, the processing for managing the special figure pending ball number on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the special figure Execution processing of an effect (8-ball pending effect) whose execution condition is that the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number is performed.

In the reserved number control process (Z2243), first, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B) (Z2471), and sets a display reserved ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved number counter stored in the process of Z2471 (Z2472). Then, it is checked whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B) is 8, which is the upper limit value. Determine (Z2473).

In the process of Z2473, if it is determined that the value of the counter (the number of special pending balls) is 8 (Z2473: YES), the value of the production counter 223H is obtained (Z2474), and the value of the production counter 223H obtained is Based on this, the lottery result is obtained from the 8-piece reservation lottery table 222FA (Z2475), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result indicates that the 8-piece reservation effect is to be executed (Z2476).

When it is determined that the lottery result indicates that the 8 pending effects are to be executed (Z2476: YES), the corresponding 8 pending effects are set (Z2477), and the 8 pending effects commands for display are set (Z2478). ), the pending effect execution flag 223FB is set to ON (Z2479), the value of the pending effect counter 223FC is set to 8, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2476, when it is determined that the lottery result indicates that the 8 pending effect is not executed (Z2476: NO), the 8 pending effect is not executed, so the processes of Z2477 to Z2480 are skipped. to terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 622, the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described. FIG. 622 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252). In this fluctuation return process (Z2252), based on the return fluctuation command received from main controller 110, the process of updating the remaining time of the return fluctuation is executed.

In the fluctuation recovery process (Z2252), first, the remaining fluctuation time information included in the fluctuation recovery command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the recovery state storage area 223FE (Z2281). Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is 0, that is, whether or not it is in recovery fluctuation (Z2282). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2282: NO), a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is set (Z2283), and the returning fluctuation flag 223FF is set to ON (Z2284). Next, from the backup area of the RAM 223, the BGM information indicating the reproduction position of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the time when the power failure occurred is read (Z2285), and from the reproduction position indicated by the read BGM information, the special figure fluctuation BGM is read. is set to start (Z2286), and this process ends. On the other hand, the remaining variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2282. That is, when it is determined that it is time to end the return fluctuation (Z2282: YES), this processing ends.

By executing this fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 622), when the fluctuation display is being executed at the time of power restoration, the special figure fluctuation BGM is resumed from the BGM reproduction position at the time when the power was cut off. be able to. As a result, when the power is momentarily cut off during the execution of the special figure fluctuation (so-called momentary power failure, etc.), the BGM after the power is restored will be the BGM from the continuation of the BGM at the time of the power cut off. can be output. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the lottery situation at the time of power cut-off is maintained as it is even after the power cut-off. Therefore, even if the power source is cut off momentarily (temporarily) during the special figure variation, the player may not be able to discard the special figure variation being executed. Since it is possible to suppress suspicion such as whether or not there is a problem, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the progress of the BGM output at the time of power failure is backed up in the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main controller 110, in addition to the remaining variation time information of the special figure variation being executed, at least the information of the variation type (variation time) may be included in the variation return command. Then, from the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation under execution and the remaining fluctuation time information, the period during which the BGM has been reproduced (the fluctuation time that has passed before the power failure occurred) is calculated, and the total reproduction time of the BGM By calculating back the BGM playback position at the time when the power failure occurred from the difference between the BGM playback positions when the power is restored, the BGM playback position at the time of power recovery may be specified. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide backup means in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the structure of the sound lamp control device 113 can be simplified. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 623, the contents of the display startup process (Z2245) will be described. FIG. 623 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display startup process (Z2245). In this display start-up process (Z2245), when the display start-up command is received from the display control device 114, that is, when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, the remaining variation time is handled based on the value of the remaining variation time counter. Executes the processing for setting the displayed variation pattern command.

In the display start-up process (Z2245), first, it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223FF is ON, that is, whether or not the return fluctuation is in progress (Z2291). If it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223FF is not ON (Z2291: NO), it is not during the return fluctuation, and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223FF is ON (Z2291: YES), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is read (Z2292), and the process proceeds to Z2293.

After executing the process of Z2292, it is then determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time read out in the process of Z2292 is 5 seconds or more (Z2293). When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 5 seconds or more (Z2293: YES), using various display variation patterns held in the variation pattern selection table 222A, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the remaining variation time is issued. Set (Z2294), and start up and set the set audio data (Z2295). Next, the returning fluctuation flag 223FF is set to OFF (Z2296), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2293 that the remaining variation time is not longer than 5 seconds (Z2293: NO), it is determined whether the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or longer (Z2297). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297: YES), the display variation pattern for normal reach is made to correspond to the remaining variation time, and the display variation pattern command is set (Z2298) Z2295 described above, Then, the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2297, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not longer than 2 seconds (Z2297: NO), a display command for displaying the recovering screen is set until the remaining fluctuation time elapses (Z2299 ), the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the 18th control example, the display variation pattern command of the return variation is set in correspondence with the remaining variation time, and the voice data is set to inform the player of the result of the return variation without discomfort. can do. In this 18th control example, the variation pattern table specified for return fluctuation is used to set the display variation pattern command. A display variation pattern command may be set using a return variation pattern table. By configuring in this way, more variation patterns can be provided to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 624, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described. FIG. 624 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). This variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) is different from the variable display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 487) of the eleventh control example described above, in that it is a control process related to a pending effect (8 pending effects) and a remaining variable time counter 223FG. The difference is that the processing for setting is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the fluctuation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223D is set to ON (Z2501). (Z2501: NO), skipping to the process of Z2505 as in the eleventh control example. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223D is set to ON (Z2501: YES), then it is determined whether the value of the pending effect counter 223FC is greater than 0 (Z2531), and is greater than 0. (Z2531: YES), the value of the pending effect counter 223FC is subtracted by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the pending effect counter 223FC after the subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

In the process of Z2533, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223FC is 0 (Z2533: YES), since it is the end timing of the eight pending effects, the pending effect executing flag 223FB is set to OFF (Z2534 ), the process proceeds to Z2502, which is the same as in the eleventh control example described above.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2531, when it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223FC is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2531: NO), it is not currently in the eight pending effects, so Z2532 ~ Skip the processing of Z2534 and shift to the processing of Z2502.

Also, in the process of Z2533, if it is determined that the value of the pending effect counter 223FC is not 0 (Z2533: NO), the 8 pending effect is being executed and the 8 pending effect is not finished. Therefore, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502. When shifting to the process of Z2502, the same processes of Z2502 to Z2504 as the fluctuation display setting process of the eleventh control example (see Z2114 in FIG. 487) are executed, and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation pattern is left. The variable time counter 223FF is set (Z2511). Then, the same processing of Z2502 to Z2504 as the variable display setting processing (see Z2114 in FIG. 487) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) in the eighteenth control example, when the process of Z2511 ends, next, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2535), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 625, the content of the pending number display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described. FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing the content of the pending number display update process 8 (Z2171). In this reserved number display update process 8 (Z2171), a process for controlling the lighting of the reserved LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of special symbols is performed.

When the reserved number display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B) Hold LED 900 is set to light up (Z2631), and then a display holding ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223A, special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223B) is issued. Set (Z2632) and terminate this process.

In addition, in this control example, in the processing of Z2631, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 are made to correspond to the total value, and the LED 900 for holding is lit in the same manner. Although it is configured to make settings, it is not limited to this. Lighting may be set so as to light up, or according to the current gaming state, lighting setting may be performed so as to light up the LED 900 for holding corresponding to only the number of reserved balls of one of the special figures. You can

Furthermore, in this control example, the LED 900 for reservation is configured to always perform the lighting setting indicating the special figure reservation ball, but it is not limited to this, and the period in which a specific game condition is satisfied (for example, The period during which the 8 pending production is executed, the period during which the movable member (accessory) for production is moved so that the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is difficult to see, and the display of the third pattern display device 81 Only during the period when the variable display is performed using the entire screen, it is difficult to visually recognize the number of reserved balls of the special figure on the third symbol display device 81). can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 626, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described. FIG. 626 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed in contrast to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed, the processing content that is executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the processing that is executed when the left and right buttons are input is added. Otherwise, they are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing of Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and Z2805 If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2805: NO), the processing relating to various effects executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z2843. In the process of Z2843, the process for the operation of the left button 22B or right button 22C (hereinafter referred to as left/right button 22) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2805 that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: YES), the SW effect process is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed when the switch to be contacted when the frame button 22 is pressed continues to output ON for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). In other words, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed to turn on the switch (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to its initial position. It is configured to require a recovery period of at least 0.2 seconds, and during the recovery operation, the frame button 22 is positioned at the position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds. Configure.

With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is kept on for at least 0.15 seconds at the shortest. If the detection continues for a predetermined period of time (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination that the frame button 22 has been pressed when an output indicating the ON state for a short period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 627, the contents of the left/right button input process (Z2843), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (Z2172), will be described. FIG. 627 is a flow chart showing the contents of left/right button input processing (Z2843). In this left/right button input process (Z2843), a process for switching the operation mode of the left/right button 22 is executed by determining whether the special symbol is changed at high speed or low speed.

In the left/right button input processing (Z2843), first, it is determined whether or not the left button 22B or the right button 22C has been operated (Z2851). When it is determined that the left/right button 22 has been operated (Z2851: YES), it is determined whether the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG is 0 or more, that is, whether the special symbols are varying (Z2852). When it is determined that the special symbols are fluctuating (Z2852: YES), it is determined whether or not the high-speed fluctuating flag 223FH is on (Z2853). If it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is ON (Z2853: YES), the sound volume level is set according to the operation result of the left/right button 22 (Z2854), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2853 that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is OFF (Z2853: NO), the special operation flag 223FI is set ON (Z2855), and this processing is terminated. By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22 according to the fluctuation state of the special symbols.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2851 that the left/right button 22 has not been operated (Z2851: NO), it is determined whether the special operation flag 223FI is on (Z2856). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223FI is ON (Z2856: YES), the special operation flag 223FI is set to OFF (Z2857), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2856 that the special operation flag 223FI is OFF (Z2856: NO), this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed in the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 626 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 628 is a flow chart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), a control process related to a special effect that vibrates the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, a background change process that changes the background mode by pressing the frame button 22, and the above-described The same processing as part of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example is executed. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same processing as part of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 490) of the eleventh control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, at present, when setting the variable pattern command for display in the process of Z2504 of the variable display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 624), a variable pattern including a special effect is set as the SW effect, and In the processing of Z2804 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 626), it is determined whether or not the SW valid time corresponding to the special effect is set.

In the processing of Z2941, if it is determined that the special effect is performed (Z2941: YES), the operation of the frame button 22 this time is the operation of the frame button 22 during the special effect, so control processing for the special effect. (Z2942 to Z2947) are executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is greater than 0 (Z2942).

The value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is 0 at the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. is. If it is determined that the value of the counter is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of Z2942 (Z2942: NO), the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z2943), and based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223H Then, a special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222FB (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, no matter which special effect is selected, the number of operations of the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is four. be.

Next, a special effect command for display corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set (Z2947), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2942, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special effect is already being executed (Z2942: YES), the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set to 1. After subtraction (Z2948), the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is executed corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD after the subtraction, and this processing ends.

Here, the processing of the special effects described above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, the frame button 22 is operated for the first time in a state where the current variation pattern includes a special effect, and the type of special effect (vibration type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, in the processing of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is set to 4, and in the processing of Z2447, the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibration type C is set (Fig. 612 ( B)).

In addition, in the process of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the button A push-suggestion display mode for executing the action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to this special figure variation and the type of the selected special effect, for example, the following frame button During operation, if a larger vibration is applied than the amount of vibration generated when the frame button is operated this time, a large vibration is applied if a vibration larger than the amount of vibration generated when the frame button is operated It is configured such that the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is more likely to be displayed than when it is not provided.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the special drawing lottery result of this time is a big win, it is configured to make it easier to display the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion than when the lottery result is not a big win (loss). When the next frame button is operated, when a vibration larger than the amount of vibration generated when the frame button is operated this time is applied, and when the special drawing lottery result is a jackpot, the next frame button operation is the most It is configured such that the emphasized display mode is easily displayed.

As a result, it is possible to predict the current special figure lottery result based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the amount of vibration generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration that occurs when the next frame button is operated becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration that occurs when the frame button is operated this time, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed, and the set production can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Next, when the frame button is operated for the second time during the special effect, in the processing of Z2942, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is greater than 0 (3) (Z2942; YES), and the SW special effect is determined. 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 223FD. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD is 2 is set in the SW motor data. Thereafter, similar processing is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD becomes zero. When the processing of Z2946 and Z2947 is finished with the value of the SW special effect counter 223FD being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

In other words, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (the value set in the SW special effect counter 223FD). is configured to In addition, in this control example, since it is configured to be able to set a special effect as a SW effect by making the variation pattern correspond to the setting, the execution period of the special effect is configured to fit within one special figure variation period. However, it may be configured to set a special effect regardless of the setting of the variation pattern (regardless of the special figure variation period). It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute, and the special effect is set based on the determination result. Further, it may be configured such that a special effect is set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a special effect without being involved in the fluctuation time of the special figure to be set. In addition, the amount of vibration of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special figure lottery being changed, the winning information in the hold, and the set game state.

Returning to FIG. 628, the description continues. In the processing of Z2941, if it is determined that the set SW effect is not a special effect (the SW effect is not set) (Z2941: NO), then frame button input monitoring of the eleventh control example described above is performed. - The same processing as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810 and Z2811 of the effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 490) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is not greater than 0 (is 0), that is, if it is determined that the present is the timing at which the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: NO), and since the current frame button 22 is a background change operation for changing the background mode, background change processing is executed (Z2949), and this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the background change processing (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 629 is a flow chart showing the contents of the background change processing (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (an operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed. A process for varying the timing of executing is executed.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 629), first, the timing at which the background change operation is executed is whether the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG is greater than 0, that is, the variation period of the special symbol (special symbol (Z2963), and if it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is greater than 0 (Z2963: YES), next, whether the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is on. That is, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period in which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that the period is not a high-speed fluctuation period (medium-speed period, low-speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: NO), the background mode cannot be changed immediately, so the next background change flag is set. 223FA is set to ON (Z2965), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2963, if the value of the remaining variation time counter is not 0 or more (Z2963: NO), and the current period is not a special figure variation period (for example, it is a customer waiting period) (Z2963: NO ), or if it is determined in the processing of Z2964 that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2964: YES), the background mode can be changed immediately, so the background mode is incremented by 1 and the background mode It sets in the storage area 223I (Z2966), sets a display switching command to a variation pattern corresponding to the set background mode (Z2967), and terminates this processing.

Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 8 (Z2172) in FIG. 626 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 630 is a flowchart showing the contents of sensor input processing 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 are executed.

In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), unlike the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 491) of the eleventh control example described above, the special operation flag 223FI is off, and the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S is 0. The difference is that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when the advance notice effect display is not set, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the eleventh control example described above, the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor valid time counter 223S is greater than 0. The difference is that the sensor effective time counter 223S is used to measure the effective period corresponding to the effect set based on the variation pattern, among the periods in which the operation to the sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Therefore, even when the sensor valid time counter 223S is 0, it is possible to effectively determine the operation to the touch sensor 2900. FIG. Also in the eighteenth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided to provide a period in which the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined as in the above-described eleventh control example, but a description thereof will be omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, it is first determined whether the special operation flag 223FI is on (Z2831), and if it is determined that the special operation flag 223FI is not on (Z2831: YES). , the same processing of Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input processing (Z2813 in FIG. 491) of the eleventh control example described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the special operation flag 223FI is ON in the process of Z2831 (Z2831: YES), or if it is determined in the process of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: NO), the mode identification process is executed (Z2968), and the process ends. In this mode identification process (Z2968), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 631, a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is executed. be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2821 that the sensor effective time counter 223S is 0, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223S is decremented (Z2824), and it is determined whether the touch sensor is on (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor is not on (Z2825: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the touch sensor is on (Z2825: YES), a command is set to change the variation speed of the third symbol at low speed (Z2832), and the high-speed variation flag 223FH is set to off ( Z2833). Next, the touch sensor valid time is reset (Z2829), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 631, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described. FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing the contents of mode identification processing (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, it is first determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2969). A mode display command is set (Z2970), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2969 that the touch sensor 2900 has not been operated (Z2969: NO), the process of Z2970 is skipped and this process ends.

That is, in the eighteenth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player only by operating the touch sensor 2900 . With this configuration, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode within the limited space of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. A wide area can be secured for effecting the variable display.

In the eighteenth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation of the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area DM1A (see FIG. 604(A)). However, without being limited to this, at the timing of displaying the current background mode based on the operation of the touch sensor 2900, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed is determined, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the effect is determined. A display area where is not displayed may be determined, and the background mode may be displayed in that display area. As a result, the background mode can be displayed without interfering with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 632, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described. FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing the details of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to vary the lighting mode of the frame lamp (lamp for lighting the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D (see FIG. 599) according to the game situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is in the special figure fluctuation (Z2131), and if it is determined that it is not in the special figure fluctuation (Z2131: NO), the frame lamp A frame lighting command for lighting green is set (Z2135), then a mode lighting command for lighting the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D is set so as to notify the currently set background mode (Z2134), and this processing is performed. exit.

Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) is embedded in the frame button 22 as light emitting means, and the surface of the frame button 22 can be illuminated in any color by turning on the light emitting means. ing. Various information is notified to the player according to the lighting color of the frame lamp.

Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is in high speed fluctuation. There, red is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is fluctuating other than high speed fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (fluctuation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Furthermore, since the surface of the frame button 22 to be operated when executing the background change operation (the surface that the player touches) is illuminated by the frame lamp, the player who is going to execute the background change operation Since the current special figure fluctuation state (variation speed of the third pattern) can be easily grasped, the timing of executing the background change is changed according to the special figure fluctuation state when the background change operation is performed. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the timing of executing the background change is varied according to the variation speed of the third symbol. To solve the above-mentioned problem by varying the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure variation state (variation speed of the third symbol). can be done.

In this control example, the structure in which the frame lamp directly emits light from the surface of the frame button 22 is used, but the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this. Any position is acceptable. For example, a frame lamp may be provided near the frame button 22 .

Returning to FIG. 632, the description continues. In the process of Z2131, if it is determined that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: YES), then determine whether the high speed fluctuation flag 223FH is on (Z2132), high speed fluctuation flag 223FH is on If so (Z2132: YES), the frame lamp is turned on in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to Z2134, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2132, if it is determined that the special figure is not in high speed fluctuation (Z2131: NO), set the frame lamp to red (Z2136), then all mode lamp lighting command for lighting all is set, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 633, counter update processing (Z2176), which is one processing in the main processing (see FIG. 617), will be described. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the details of the counter update process (Z2176). In this counter update process (Z2176), a process of updating the values of various counters is executed.

In the counter update process (Z2176), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG is 0 or more (Z2861). When the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG is 0 or more (Z2861: YES), the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG is decremented by 1 (Z2862), and the process proceeds to Z2863. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG is not 0 or more, that is, it is 0 (Z2861: NO), the process of Z2862 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2863.

In the process of Z2863, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining variation time counter 223FG read out in the process of Z2861 is a value indicating the high-speed variation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863). If it is determined that it is in the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863: YES), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to ON (Z2864), the other counter values are updated (Z2866), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is not the high-speed fluctuation period of the special symbol (third symbol) (Z2863: NO), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223FH is set to OFF (Z2865), and the above-described Then, the process of Z2866 is executed, and this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the eighteenth control example>
Next, control processing of the display control device 114 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 634 to 638. FIG. In this 18th control example, in place of the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 495), the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 634) is replaced with the variation pattern command process (see Z3302 in FIG. (See Z3405 in FIG. 635), the variation pattern command process 8 (See Z3491 in FIG. 635) is replaced with the resident image transfer setting process (See Z4602 in FIG. 503B), and the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631 in FIG. 638 ) is executed, and 8-piece display setting processing (see Z3493 in FIG. 636) and pending display setting processing (see Z3495 in FIG. 637) are added. Other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 634, the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z3302) will be described. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), in contrast to the above-described command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 495), the process executed when receiving the 8 production pending command for display and when looping this process Add a process to update the value of the display effect counter to , and the contents of the process executed when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, and the contents of the process executed when the pending ball number command is received. , is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same processes of Z3401 to Z3404 as the command determination process of the eleventh control example (see Z2302 in FIG. 495) are executed, and in the process of Z3404, the display fluctuation pattern If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3404: YES), variation pattern command processing 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to Z3496. The detailed content of this variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z3496, a process of updating the value of the display effect counter is executed. In the eighteenth control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated each time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed. This command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes according to the type of command (display command) received by the display control device 114. FIG. Therefore, the timing at which the processing of Z3496 is executed can always be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, when the processing of Z3496 is finished, the processing shifts to Z3401, and the command determination processing 8 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3404 that the display variation pattern command has not been received (Z3404: NO), the same processing of Z3406 to Z3411 as the above-described command determination processing (see Z2302 in FIG. 495) is executed. , the process proceeds to Z3496 described above. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the switching command for display has not been received (Z3410: NO), then it is determined whether or not the command for holding eight effects for display has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that it has been received. If so (Z3492: YES), the 8-piece display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to Z3496.

This 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data relating to the 8-piece pending effect (see FIG. 607), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. In the process of Z3492, if it is determined that the display 8 effect pending command has not been received (Z3492: NO), then it is determined whether the pending ball number command has been received (Z3414), and the pending ball number command is issued. If it is determined that it has been received (Z3414: YES), the pending display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to Z3496. This pending display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the waiting area DS1B of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Details thereof are shown in FIG. will be described later with reference to

In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z3414: NO), the process of Z3418 to Z3420 is the same as the command determination process of the eleventh control example (see Z2302 in FIG. 495). is executed, and then the process proceeds to Z3496.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern command processing 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) differs from the above-described variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 496) in that it adds a control process in the case where eight pending effects are being executed. Elements other than are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the same Z3501 to Z3506 processes as the above-described variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 496) are executed, and then the 8 display setting flag 233FA is set It is determined whether it is set to ON (Z3521). Then, when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the 8-hold effect is not being executed (Z3521: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 8 display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z3521: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the 8 display effect counter 233FB (Z3522), and the 8 display effect after the subtraction Referring to the counter, the player selects the effect mode (the contents of the treasure box) using the 8 effect scenario selection table 234A3 (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the 8-display effect counter 233FB is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: YES), the 8-display setting flag 233FA is set to OFF (Z3526). , the process ends. Also, in the process of Z3525, the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is not 0, that is, even if the 8 pending effect continues even after the next special figure fluctuation (Z3525: NO), this process is executed as it is. finish.

Next, the contents of the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the contents of the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493). When the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8-piece display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z5701), the 8-piece effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

Then, the data table for the set eight effects display is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z5704), time data is set to the clock counter based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and 8 is set to the display 8 effect counter. , the process ends.

Next, the content of the pending display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pending display process (Z3495). When the pending display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of pending balls is set in the displayed pending ball number storage area 233FC based on the information contained in the pending ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the 8-piece display setting flag 233FA is set to ON (Z5802), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z5802: YES), the 8-piece display setting flag 233FA is currently in the pending effect, A pointer corresponding to the value of the display 8 effect counter 233FB is set (Z5803), and this process is terminated. That is, while the 8 reserved effect is being executed, the number of reserved symbols for effect (treasure box) in the waiting area DS1B of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the value of the 8 displayed effect counter 233FB. is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5802, if it is determined that the 8-ball display setting flag 233FA is not set to ON (Z5802: NO), the pointer corresponding to the value of the display pending ball number storage area 233FC is set (Z5804). , the process ends. That is, while the 8 pending effect is not being executed, a pending symbol (circle) corresponding to the number of pending balls of the special symbol is displayed in the waiting area DS1B of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 638, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described. FIG. 638 is a flowchart showing the contents of resident image transfer setting processing 8 (Z4631). This resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) sets a command (display startup command) for indicating that all resident target image data has been transferred. is different from Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same processes Z4701 to Z4705 as the above-described resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 503B) are executed. , set a display startup command (Z4721), and terminate this process. In this way, a command (display By configuring the audio lamp control device 113 to output the start-up command) to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 side can grasp the timing when the display control device 114 becomes operable normally.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time among the other various devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226). Therefore, by outputting a display start-up command from the display control device 114, an instruction to display a normal screen after power-on and an instruction to output various sounds (BGM) can be synchronously executed.

In the eighteenth control example, while the dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols that are reserved and stored is being executed, the period (period It is configured so that the reserved design for production showing only the reserved pattern to be the object of production is displayed. That is, during execution of the period presentation, even if a new starting prize is detected, a new reserved pattern is not displayed in the waiting area DS1B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the look-ahead result based on the new starting prize is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach or a jackpot lottery result, etc.), a hold indicating the startup prize corresponding to the specific lottery result The display range of the pending design for effect may be expanded (or the display range may be expanded at a higher rate) up to the design. By constructing in this way, when the display range of the reserved design for effect is expanded, the player can be made to recognize that the reserved ball corresponding to the specific lottery result is included. It is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for the big win. Alternatively, or in addition, for example, among the reserved symbols that are the target of the period production, a holding corresponding to a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a lottery result of a big hit, etc.) Even when a new starting prize is detected in a state where the pattern is included, the display range of the pending pattern for production is expanded (or the display range is expanded) to the reserved pattern corresponding to the new starting prize. It may be configured so that the ratio of By configuring in this way, even if the display range is expanded, it is possible to have a configuration in which a specific lottery result can be obtained within the range at the beginning of the start of the period production, so that when the variable display corresponding to the specific lottery result is displayed. It is possible to realize a playability that does not know whether or not it will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the eighteenth control example, even when an operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, when a special operation (operating the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22B and the right button 22C) is executed. , it is not handled as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation effect, but is handled as an operation for notifying the background mode. It may be configured so that it is not treated as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 (becomes difficult to handle). More specifically, for example, when an operation on the touch sensor 2900 is detected while either the left button 22B or the right button 22C is pressed during the execution period of the operation effect, It may be configured not to be treated as an operation (not treated as a touch operation in a touch effect). With this configuration, even if the player erroneously operates only the left button 22B and the touch sensor 2900 or only the right button 22C and the touch sensor 2900 in order to perform a special operation, the player may Developing into a ready-to-win effect using the entire main display area DM of the 3-symbol display device 81 (low-speed fluctuation display of the 3rd pattern) (the operation of the touch sensor 2900 being determined as an operation for the touch effect). can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of an effect mode contrary to the intention of the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, since the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D do not change the lighting mode, the player who has made an erroneous operation while intending to perform a special operation can be easily made aware of the erroneous operation. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved. Furthermore, even if the player who tried to operate the touch sensor 2900 as an operation for the touch effect erroneously operates either the left button 22B or the right button 22C together with the touch sensor 2900, It is possible to avoid the display of the background mode by the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910A to 1910D against the player's will. Therefore, a player who has mistakenly operated the left button 22B or the right button 22C together with the touch sensor 2900 in an attempt to participate in the touch effect will feel discomfort due to the display of unintended display contents. You can prevent it from happening. In addition, since the erroneous operation does not cause any change in the display mode, the player can be easily made aware of the erroneous operation. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In this 18th control example, in the special effect involving the vibration of the frame button 22A, each time the frame button 22A is pressed, the mode of vibration (vibration type) that occurs is determined by lottery, and a jackpot is won during the hold. A mode (vibrator type) in which the presence is confirmed and a mode in which the expectation of a big win is increased are provided, but the vibrator type in the special effect may be notified to the player by means other than vibration. That is, for example, when the player operates the frame button 22A continuously at short intervals in a special effect, it may become difficult for the player to perceive the correspondence between the number of presses and the vibration mode. There is In this case, for example, even though the special performance of the aspect (vibration C) in which the possibility of winning a big win is relatively high, the special performance of the aspect (vibration A) in which the big win is confirmed is performed, but the player misunderstands that the special performance is performed in the aspect (vibration A). There is a risk that the player will feel distrustful of the player. This problem can be solved by providing means for notifying the type of vibration executed in the special effect, other than the mode of vibration transmitted to the finger of the player who presses the frame button 22A. More specifically, for example, the third symbol display device 81 displays the correspondence (vibration history) between the number of times the frame button 22A is pressed in one special effect and the type of vibration executed based on the pressing. may be configured. With this configuration, even if the player cannot identify the vibration mode or misunderstands it, the player can easily check the history of the vibration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can identify the type of vibe this time. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand. Further, instead of displaying the history, for example, a graph may be used to display changes in vibration intensity over time. With such a configuration, the transition of the vibration intensity can be easily understood by the player, so that a more comprehensible mode of presentation can be realized. The history and graph display on the third symbol display device 81 may be performed each time a special effect is executed, or if the operation interval of the player is less than a predetermined interval (for example, it is difficult to identify the vibration intensity). 0.5 second interval or less). Further, for example, even after the specified number of times of pressing (4 times) in the special effect is completed, the vibration pattern is set again from the beginning each time the frame button 22A is pressed (the vibration pattern is repeated every time the frame button 22A is pressed 4 times). After the specified number of times of pressing (4 times) is completed, the frame button 22A is kept pressed (so-called long pressing), so that the frame button 22A can be It may be configured such that the vibration pattern is repeated. In other words, even after execution of the vibration mode (vibration type) corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22A is completed, the vibration mode (vibration type) can be reconfirmed by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22A. can be configured. By configuring in this way, a player who has not been able to identify the vibe type can easily reconfirm the vibe type, so the player's convenience can be improved. .

In this 18th control example, if the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is immediately changed. , the background mode is changed at the start of the next variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, under specific conditions, the background mode may be changed immediately when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period. Specifically, for example, after a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, a variable display mode in which high-speed fluctuation is executed is executed again (for example, normal reach occurs and medium-speed fluctuation After the period expires, when it develops into super reach and returns to high speed fluctuation again), the background mode will be changed immediately according to the background change operation until the high speed fluctuation period when developing into super reach. may be configured. With this configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the background mode change is immediately executed by the background change operation during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, thereby determining whether or not the super ready-to-win effect develops. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which it is possible to know in advance. Therefore, the player can actively perform the background change operation during the medium-speed fluctuation period and the low-speed fluctuation period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighteenth control example, if the background change operation is performed during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is only changed at the start of the next fluctuation display. It is not something that can be done. For example, when a background change operation is performed during a medium-speed fluctuation period or a low-speed fluctuation period, instead of carrying over the background mode change until the start of the next fluctuation display, a predetermined notification is given at a predetermined rate. may be By configuring in this way, the change of the background mode is carried over until the next change, and it is suppressed that stress is given to the player because it takes time to change to the background mode in which the game is desired. can do. In this case, the content of the notification includes, for example, the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable display during execution, the degree of expectation for developing into super reach, and the degree of expectation that a big win (or variable display corresponding to super reach) is included in the hold , the degree of expectation and the like for the so-called latent probability change state. With such a configuration, by purposely performing the background change operation during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to realize a game that is different from usual, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

In this 18th control example, three periods with different speeds of the variable display of the third symbol are provided. good. Conversely, as the variable display speed of the first symbols, at least a high-speed variable period, a medium-speed variable period, and a low-speed variable period are provided, and the speed of the variable display of the third symbols is set to that of the variable display of the first symbols. It may be configured to synchronize with the speed.

In this 18th control example, based on the fact that the number of reserved balls of special symbols reaches the upper limit (8), it was configured to execute a specific period effect, but the execution condition of the period effect is not necessarily the upper limit reserved ball The number is not limited and can be set arbitrarily. As the number of reserved balls, which is an execution condition, is reduced, the opportunity to execute the period effect can be increased, so that the interest of the player can be further improved. In addition, the more the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, the more likely the execution period of the period effect is to become longer. Similarly, the end condition of the period effect is not limited to the case where all the balls held at the start of the period effect are consumed, and may be arbitrarily determined.

<Nineteenth control example>
Next, a nineteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 639 to 647. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the 19th control example is the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23A, right volume button 23B) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example described above (see FIG. 532). is provided, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113, and part of the control content are different from the eighteenth control example described above, and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the eighteenth control example described above, when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing of changing the background mode (executing the background change) is determined according to the operation timing. (timing) can be made variable, for example, it is possible to suppress the situation where the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being executed. Therefore, the player can be made to perform the background change operation with peace of mind, and can be made to actively perform the background change operation.

However, in the technique of the eighteenth control example described above, only the timing of the background change executed based on the background change operation is made different, and since the effect mode to be executed is the same, the background change operation executes There is a problem that the player gets bored with the production (background change production).

On the other hand, in the 19th control example, the background notice effect suggesting the background mode after transition is executed after the background change operation is executed and before the background change is actually executed. And, it is configured to vary the effect mode of the background notice effect according to the timing of executing the background change operation (for example, during special figure non-fluctuation timing, during special figure fluctuation). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a different effect mode depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the executed effect. .

Further, in the 19th control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols. As a result, the player can be motivated to perform the background change operation to see the background announcement effect.

Further, in the 19th control example, as in the 14th control example described above, it is configured so that the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period when the special figure variation is not executed (during the customer waiting period). there is Here, the conventional pachinko machine is a game state (for example, time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)) in which special figure fluctuations are easily executed, and a game state in which special figure fluctuations are difficult to be executed (For example, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design)) and can be configured, and further, if the time saving state is set, if the normal state is set It was configured to make it easier to set a shorter variation time as a special figure variation time than.

In other words, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if there is a period during which the special figure variation is not executed during the time saving state, a new special figure variation is likely to be started immediately, and the period when the special figure variation is not performed during the normal state If occurs, it becomes difficult to start a new special figure fluctuation than during the time saving state.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, the customer waiting display (for example, the name of the gaming machine title display) and functions during the customer waiting period (for example, volume control function, light amount control function) are executed, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are switched unnecessarily during the time saving state. However, there is a problem that the player is provided with a display that is difficult to understand. Moreover, there is a problem that the processing for creating each image data displayed on the display screen is executed in a complicated manner, increasing the control load of the pachinko machine 10 . Furthermore, during the time-saving state, it is possible to efficiently execute special figure fluctuations by continuously firing the ball, so even during the customer waiting period functions (volume control function, light control function) Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special figure variation is started before the adjustment operation using the function is completed, giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the special figure fluctuation has stopped, a new special figure fluctuation is not executed, so as to enable the function during the customer waiting period described above Although it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems by configuring, when a player who is playing a game in the normal state tries to adjust the volume or the amount of light, it is necessary to stop the game for a predetermined period. In addition, a new problem arises that the operation of the game is lowered.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in this 19th control example, the period from when the special figure variation is no longer executed until the function becomes executable during the customer waiting period is varied according to the set game state. It is configured so that Thereby, for example, during the high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of the normal design in which the special figure fluctuation is likely to be executed, the customer waits after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special figure fluctuation is no longer executed. The function can be executed during the period, and during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern in which the special figure fluctuation is difficult to execute, the function can be executed during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure fluctuation is no longer executed. can.

<Regarding the production contents of the nineteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 641, the background announcement effect among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the nineteenth control example will be described. FIG. 641(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 641(B) is a display in a state where the background mode shifts with the next change. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen. Among the elements of the display screen, the elements that are the same as those in the eighteenth control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the 19th control example, when the background change operation is executed, a notice effect suggesting the destination background mode is executed before the background mode is switched. Specifically, the display mode of this notice effect will be described as follows: "mode display", which is a display mode that indicates the destination background mode with a comment immediately before the background mode shifts; A "silhouette display", which is a display mode in which the background mode is indicated by the silhouette of the character, can be displayed.

Then, when the timing of executing the background change operation is outside the special figure fluctuation period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and if it is during the special figure fluctuation period, "mode display" and "silhouette display" are selected. By configuring in this way, the effect (background notice effect) to be executed can be changed according to the timing of executing the background change operation, so that the player can perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

Furthermore, in the 19th control example, if the background change operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation period, the selection ratio between "mode display" and "silhouette display" must be different according to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation. I'm letting In addition, when a pattern display mode is selected in which the background mode suggested by the background notice effect is different from the background mode to which the actual transition is made, the possibility of winning the jackpot is increased. (to be higher than the display mode of other background announcement effects). Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively perform the background change operation in order to predict the lottery result of the special figure. In addition, by positively performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with effects corresponding to various background modes, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. .

On the display screen shown in FIG. 641(A), the background mode is shifted to the sea mode by the background change operation, and a silhouette K100 imitating a fish is displayed as a background notice effect suggesting the sea mode. As described above, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the transition to the background mode. It is configured so that the mode and the actually shifted background mode can be visually compared.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 641(B), the comment "Background change with next fluctuation" indicating that the background change operation is executed and the background mode will shift at the start of the next special figure fluctuation is displayed in the comment display area DM2A. is displayed in A silhouette K100 imitating a tree is displayed as a background preview effect suggesting a mountain mode. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 641(B) is a state where the current state is the “mountain mode” and the background mode shifts (shifts to the sea mode) at the next fluctuation, suggesting the background mode after the shift. This is a state in which a silhouette K100 suggesting a mountain mode is displayed as an advance notice effect. In this way, when there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestive display mode of the background notice effect, there is a high possibility of winning a big prize due to the change.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the nineteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the nineteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 639 and 640. FIG. FIG. 639(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the nineteenth control example, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents defined in a RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 639(A), the ROM 222 of the 19th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the 18th control example in that the vibration pattern data 222FC is deleted and the background announcement selection table 222GA is added. but the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The background announcement selection table 222GA is referred to when selecting an effect mode of the background announcement effect when the background change operation is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 640, the contents of the background announcement selection table 222GA will be described. FIG. 640 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the background announcement selection table 222GA.

As shown in Figure 640, the background notice selection table 222GA is the result of the propriety determination (lottery result of the special figure variation being executed at the time of executing the background change operation), the value of the acquired effect counter 223H, and after the transition Background notices of different display modes can be selected according to the background mode.

Specifically, when the win/fail judgment result is a hit and the background mode after transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 69", and "Silhouette A" is in the range of "70 to 159". "Silhouette B" is defined in the range of "160-169", "Mountain mode display" is defined in the range of "170-198", and "Sea mode display" is defined in the range of "170-198". is "mountain mode", "Silhouette B" is in the range of "0 to 69", "Silhouette A" is in the range of "70 to 159", and "160 to 169" is in the range of "160 to 169". "sea mode display" is defined in the range of "170 to 198", and "mountain mode display" is defined in the range of "170-198".

On the other hand, if the pass/fail judgment result is out of range and the background mode after transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 119" and the value of "Silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". , and when the background mode after transition is the "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 119", and "silhouette A" is in the range of "120 to 198”, the “mountain mode display” is defined respectively. Furthermore, if the timing at which the background change operation is executed is during the customer waiting period, if the background mode after transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223H will be within the range of "0 to 198". When the background mode after transition is the "mountain mode", the "mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the value of the effect counter 223H.

Here, each display mode selected as the display mode of the background announcement effect will be described. In this control example, as the display modes of the background notice effect, a "silhouette display" that displays a silhouette of a character suggesting the background mode after transition, a "mode display" that displays characters indicating the background mode after transition, is configured to be configurable.

Of the "silhouette display", "silhouette A" is the silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting the mountain mode shown in FIG. 641(B), and "silhouette B" is the A silhouette of a fish-like character suggestive of the sea mode shown. In this control example, the silhouette display is configured to display a display mode formed of a still image. For example, immediately after the suggestive display mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand which background mode is being suggested. The transition destination background mode may be gradually changed to an easy-to-understand display mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, as the display mode of the background notice effect, it is configured to be able to display "silhouette display" and "mode display". It is configured so that only "mode display" is selected when the change operation is performed, and "silhouette display" is selected when the background change operation is performed during the period when the special figure is fluctuating. . Thereby, by executing the background change operation during the special figure fluctuation, a special production mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this control example, as the background notice effect, it is possible to set a display mode that suggests a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination, and that display mode is selected only when the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit. It is configured so that Therefore, by making the content of the background notice performance and the actual background mode transition situation feel unnatural, it is possible to notify (suggest) the lottery result advantageous to the player in advance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Although this control example uses two background modes (sea mode and mountain mode), the number of background modes may be three or more. It may be set randomly. Also, as a result of performing the background change operation, the background mode may be changed to the same background mode as before the change. By configuring in this way, based on the background mode before transition and the suggestive contents of the background mode after transition displayed in the background notification effect, the display mode of the background notification effect this time and the background after transition It is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether the mode matches or not.

In addition, in the nineteenth control example, similarly to the eighteenth control example described above, the period from when the background change operation is performed until the background mode transitions is varied according to the timing at which the background change operation is performed. It is configured as follows. The above-described background notice effect is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period during which only the background announcement effect is displayed can be varied according to the timing at which the background change operation is performed.

In addition, in the 19th control example, when selecting the display mode of the background notice effect, the display mode is configured to be selected based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed, but it is limited to this. None, for example, it may be configured to select the display mode based on the result of pre-determination of the winning information included in the special figure reservation. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be shifted (changed) during the special figure fluctuation that performed the background change operation, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the background change operation is performed. When the background mode is shifted (changed) in the next special figure fluctuation of the executed special figure fluctuation, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the next special figure fluctuation. It should be configured as follows.

Returning to FIG. 639(B), the description continues. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the 19th control example differs from the RAM 223 of the 18th control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223GA and a delay counter 223GB are added. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223GA is a flag for indicating that the current time is a customer waiting period, and is set to ON when it is the customer waiting period. This customer waiting flag 223GA is, when the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), customer waiting executed in fluctuation stop processing 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 645) It is set to ON in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 646) (see Z2734 in FIG. 646). In addition, if the game state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), customer waiting In effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 647), it is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223GB becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 647). And, it is set to off when special figure fluctuation is started.

In the 19th control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period in which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON, and the player is notified that the volume has become adjustable. The notification display to be notified is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the customer waiting flag 223GA is also a flag for indicating the period during which the volume can be adjusted. Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON is varied according to the set gaming state, and when the gaming state is the normal state, It is configured so that the customer waiting flag 223GA is less likely to be set to ON in the time saving state or the variable probability state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to display on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 the notification display for notifying the player that the volume has become adjustable during the variable probability state or the time saving state. can. In other words, the time saving state and probability variation state are configured to be easily set special figure variation time shorter than the normal state, there is a case where the period during which the special figure variation is not temporarily executed is set. However, since the time saving state and the probability variable state are also game states in which new special figure variations are more likely to be performed than in the normal state, the period in which special figure variations are not performed is likely to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223GA is frequently set to ON, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are switched intricately, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, in this 19th control example, the customer waiting flag 223GA is configured not to be set to ON unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the time saving state or the probability variable state during which the special figure fluctuation is not executed. Therefore, the above problem can be solved. In addition, as a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required for setting the customer waiting flag 223GA to ON during the time saving state or the variable probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol (electric It is preferable to set a period longer than the period from when the accessory 640A is opened until the ball enters the second ball entrance 640). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the customer waiting flag 223GA from being set to ON just by continuing to play the game during the variable probability state and the time saving state.

The delay counter 223GB is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special figure fluctuation until the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON, and the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON during the variable probability state and the time saving state. This is for delaying the timing of

This delay counter 223GB is, in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 646) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 645) executed when the special figure fluctuation stops, the game state is a definite variable state Alternatively, a predetermined period (5 seconds), which is a delay period, is set in the time saving state (Z2733 in FIG. 646). Then, each time the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 647) is executed, it is decremented (Z2759 in FIG. 647), and when the value of the counter becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON ( 647 Z2761). Thereby, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON in the variable probability state or the time saving state can be delayed from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON in the normal state.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device of the nineteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 642 to 647, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the nineteenth control example will be described. In this 19th control example, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 647) is performed instead of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main processing 9 (see FIG. 642) in contrast to the above-described 18th control example. , frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 is replaced with frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9, and command determination processing 8 is replaced with command determination processing 9 (Z2174 in FIG. 643). are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 642, main processing 9 of the nineteenth control example will be described. 642 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 9. FIG. As shown in FIG. 642, main processing 9 includes customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), frame button input monitoring and effect processing 9 (Z2182), and command determination processing 9 ( Z2183) is different, but the others are the same.

Note that the content of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (Z2182) is different from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. Z2949 in (Z2949)) is replaced with background change processing 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 644). The description will be made with reference to FIG. 644, and illustration of other control contents (the same control contents as in the 18th control example) will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 643, the contents of command determination processing 9 (Z2174) will be described. FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (Z2174). This command determination process 9 (Z2174) adds a process of setting the customer waiting flag to off when a variation pattern command is received, to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477) of the 18th control example described above. The difference is that the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242 in FIG. 620) is changed to the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651 in FIG. 643). Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In addition, in the command determination processing (see Z2113 in FIG. 477) of the eleventh control example described above, the processing (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 477) executed when the illustrated stop type command is received is Although the same processing is executed in the control example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the processing (Z2261 in FIG. 643) corresponding to other commands is executed.

When the command determination process 9 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2201: YES), the customer waiting flag 223GA is on. (Z2253). When it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223GA is ON (Z2254: YES), the variation pattern command is received, and since it is the timing for ending the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to OFF (Z2254), The value of the delay counter 223GB is set to 0 (Z2255), the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2253 that the customer waiting flag 223GA is not ON (Z2253: NO), the process of Z2254 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: YES), fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is executed, and this processing ends. The details of the fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 643, the description continues. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: NO), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and if it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: YES ), the fluctuation stop processing 8 is executed (Z2242), and this processing ends. This fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) includes a process of setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a process of executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped, and a customer. The processing for setting the waiting effect is performed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 645 .

In the process of Z2203, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: NO), Z2207 to Z2261 which are the same as the command determination process (Z2174 in FIG. 618) of the eighteenth control example described above are executed. End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 644, the content of background change processing 9 (Z2541) will be described. FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing the contents of background change processing 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) is for the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 629) of the eighteenth control example described above. The difference is that a process for setting the display mode of the background announcement effect is added.

When the background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes Z2963 to Z2967 as the background change process described above (see Z2949 in FIG. 629) are executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223H is obtained (Z2978). Then, based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223H, the effect mode of the background effect is selected using the background effect selection table 222GA (Z2979). Then, the background notice command for display indicating the presentation mode selected in the process of Z2979 is set, and this process ends.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the display switching command set in the process of Z2967 and the display background notice command set in the process of Z2980 are set in the same process. Although they are output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, the display control device 114 first executes the display using the image data based on the background notice command for display, and then, for 0.5 seconds. It is configured to perform display using image data based on the display switching command at intervals. As a result, the background notice effect can be executed prior to the transition to the background.

Next, with reference to FIG. 645, the contents of the fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) will be described. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). This fluctuation stop process 9 (Z2651) is different from the above-described fluctuation stop process (see Z2242 in FIG. 620) of the eighteenth control example, after the processes of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 are completed, the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed. are different in that they execute The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 646 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), the process for setting the customer waiting period is executed after the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure reservation (Z2731). In this process of Z2731, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223A and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B are both zero.

In the process of Z2731, if it is determined that there is a special figure pending (Z2731: YES), the next special figure fluctuation is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731, if it is determined that there is no special figure pending (Z2731: NO), then the current gaming state determines whether the time saving state or probability variable state (Z2732), If it is determined that the time saving state or the probability variable state is not (normal state) (Z2732: NO), the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON (Z2734), and the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2732, if it is determined that the current time-saving state or variable probability state (Z2732: YES), then set a value corresponding to 5 seconds to the delay counter 223GB (Z2733) and end this process do. The value of the delay counter 223 GB set here is decremented in the main process executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 647 is a flow chart showing the contents of the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181). In this customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223GB set in the customer waiting setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 646) is subtracted, and when the value of the delay counter 223GB becomes 0, A process of setting the customer waiting flag 223GA to ON and a volume control process when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON are executed.

In the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON (Z2751). Among them, it is determined whether the right button (up button) for increasing the volume has been operated (pressed down) (Z2764). If it is determined that the right button has been pressed (Z2764: YES), then the volume level is set so that the volume level increases by 1 (Z2753), and a display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2754). , the process ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z2764 that the right button has not been pressed (Z2764: NO), it is determined whether the left button (down button) for decreasing the volume has been operated (pressed) (Z2764: NO). Z2765). If it is determined that the left button has been pressed (Z2765: YES), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), and a display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2757). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2751, if it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223GA is not set to ON (Z2751: NO), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223GB is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( Z2758), when it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2758: NO), since the special figure fluctuation is not being stopped at present, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223GB is greater than 0 (Z2758: YES), then 1 is subtracted from the value of the delay counter 223GB (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223GB after subtraction is obtained. is 0 (Z2760). If it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223GB after subtraction is not 0, that is, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state, and 5 seconds have not passed since the previous special figure fluctuation stopped If so (Z2760: NO), this process ends.

In the processing of Z2760, if it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223GB is 0 (Z2760: YES), the game state is a variable probability state or a time saving state, 5 seconds after the last special figure fluctuation has stopped is the elapsed timing, the customer waiting flag 223GA is set to ON (Z2761), a display customer waiting command is set (Z2762), and then it is determined whether the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763). If it is determined that the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763: YES), the processing of Z2764 described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2763 that the left or right button has not been pressed (Z2763: NO), this process ends.

<Twentyth control example>
Next, a twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 659. FIG. This twentieth control example differs from the above-described nineteenth control example in that an operation effect (cracking effect) for changing the effect mode is executed based on the content of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player; The third symbol (special symbol) stopped and displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 is variably displayed in synchronism with the variation of the special symbol (special symbol), and the result of the lottery of the special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the stationary display mode. The difference is that an effect (background change effect) for shifting (changing) the background mode is executed based on the stop display mode of the decorative pattern for the purpose, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the production contents of the 20th control example>
Here, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth control example, the content of the characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth control example, unlike the control examples described above, a cracking effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stop symbols are executed.

First, the crack effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 648 to 650. FIG. The cracking effect is an operation of stepwise changing the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22A) multiple times within a predetermined effect period. It is a performance. In the twentieth control example, the effect mode after the effect period is set based on the display mode on the display screen at the end of the effect period. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means in order to execute the performance in various modes of performance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 648, the flow of the crack effect in the twentieth control example will be described. FIG. 648 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the crack effect. In this control example, a crack 820, which is a variable display mode, is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the operation means is operated during a predetermined effect period, and the operation means within the effect period. A crack effect is executed in which the number of cracks 820 is variable (increased) based on the operation content (the number of operations). The variable display mode is configured to be variable based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) and the number of times of operation during the performance period described above.

Specifically, in the variation pattern of 60 seconds, for 15 seconds after the lapse of 5 seconds from the start of variation, the operation effective period (button effect period ) is set. Then, when the button effect period is reached, a crack effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 649(A)).

A first period, which is the first half period, and a second period, which is the second half period after the first period, are set as the button effect period during which the crack effect is executed. By operating the frame button 22A during the period, one crack 820 is displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 649(B)), and the remaining period of the first period is variably set to the second period. By configuring in this way, the period for which the second period is set can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22A immediately after the first period is set.

In addition, by pressing the frame button 22A during the first period, based on the pressing timing, the condition for displaying the crack 820 moving to the second line during the second period, that is, the crack is displayed as a variable display mode. 820 is configured to vary the number of times the frame button 22A is operated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing of the operating means and the number of times of operation, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Further, by operating the frame button 22A immediately after the first period is set, even if the second period is set long, the second and subsequent cracks 820 are displayed based on the operation timing (frame As the number of operations on the button 22A), there are cases where a condition with a large number of operations is set, so operating the frame button 22A immediately after the first period is set causes more cracks 820 to be displayed. There is no direct connection to that.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the operation presentation while entertaining the player as to when to operate the frame button 22A during the first period. In the twentieth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the crack effect, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured such that the variable pattern of the subsequent variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the second and subsequent frame button operations. In addition, in this control example, all variable patterns (variable scenarios) of the variable display mode during the production period are configured to be selected depending on the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to be partially selected.

Then, when the second period is set, a display screen is displayed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22A a plurality of times (see FIG. 649(B)), and the first period ends. When the display condition (the condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820) is satisfied, the number of cracks 820 displayed on the display screen is variably displayed, and after the second period (20 650 (A)).

It should be noted that in the cracking effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation is executed, which is a factor for selecting the display condition (variable scenario) for increasing (variable) the number of cracks 820 (variable display mode), , one crack 820 (in the same variable display mode) is displayed regardless of the timing at which the frame button operation is performed. That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the cracking effect has been executed by the first operation of the frame button, and based on the first operation of the frame button. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the selected variable display mode.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to how the cracking effect develops. In addition, in the cracking effect of this control example, the rate at which the variable scenario of the variable display mode is selected is varied based on the lottery result of the special symbols. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the cracking effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the cracking effect of this control example, the button effect period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22A) (the operation to the operation means is determined to be effective) is the first period (5 seconds). and a second period (10 seconds) after the lapse of the first period. An operation (first frame button operation) is executed, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not executed during the first period, the cracking effect is terminated at that point (clears the setting of the operation effective period during the second period, and switches to an effect other than the operation effect). (See FIG. 648(B)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22A from being notified of an effect prompting the user to operate the frame button 22A for a long period of time.

Here, the flow of effects when the frame button 22A is not operated during the first period of the button effect period will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 648(B). ) has elapsed, a display screen (see FIG. 649A) prompting the user to operate the frame button 22A is displayed. At the end of the first period, the valid operation period is cleared. A display mode (sorry display) indicating that the button has not been pressed once is displayed until a predetermined second period (10 seconds) elapses (see FIG. 650(B)). After that, an effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (no crack) is executed.

In this control example, the display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22A has not been pressed even once is displayed until the second period (10 seconds) elapses. Without being limited to this, for example, a display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22A was not pressed even once is displayed only for 2 seconds at the start of a predetermined second period (10 seconds), and then , the effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (no crack) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the period during which the regret display is displayed can be shortened, so that if the player intentionally does not operate the frame button 22A during the first period, the player feels uncomfortable. can make it difficult to give

Also, if the frame button operation (first frame button operation) is performed during the first period, immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first effect period), second and subsequent frame button operations will be accepted. Configure. As a result, the plurality of frame button operations executed during the cracking effect can be given continuity, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650, an example of display contents displayed during the crack effect will be described. FIG. 649(A) is a display screen showing an example of display contents displayed immediately after the crack effect is started, and FIG. It is a display screen which showed an example of the display content displayed when operating. Also, FIG. 650(A) is a display screen showing an example of the content of the effect executed after the button effect period ends with three cracks 820 being displayed, and FIG. 22A is a display screen showing an example of display contents displayed when the first period ends without operating the frame button 22A during the first period.

When the cracking effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 649(A), the effect to be executed this time is an operation effect (an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means (frame button 22A)). In order to notify the player of this, on the right side of the main display area DM, a button display mode DM5A imitating the frame button 22A and a remaining period (4 seconds) is displayed.

Here, the button display mode DM5A is displayed in a display mode (represented by two arrows in the drawing) for prompting the frame button 22A to be pressed multiple times (continuously pressed) instead of being pressed only once. Further, in the remaining period display mode DM5B, the remaining period (represented by diagonal lines in the drawing) is dynamically displayed with respect to the indicator indicating the length of the first period (5 seconds).

Then, in the comment display area DM2A, a comment "Break the screen by repeatedly hitting the button" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect such as destroying the display screen will be executed by operating the frame button 22A a plurality of times during the current operation effect. In addition, a small display area DM4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area DM, and is configured to display the progress of the current cracking effect (the number of cracks) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. In FIG. 649(A), the crack effect has just been executed and the frame button 22A has not been operated even once. 0” is displayed.

Then, when the frame button 22A is operated during the first period of the crack effect, as shown in FIG. 649(B), one crack 820 is displayed in the main display area DM and the progress of the small display area DM4. "1" is displayed as the display mode DM4A. Further, by operating the frame button 22A during the first period, the first period ends and the second period is set. Then, the remaining period display mode DM5C for indicating the remaining period of the second period is displayed. In addition, a comment "Keep tapping more" is displayed in the comment display area DM2A.

When the display condition for increasing the number of cracks 820 is established by operating the frame button 22A multiple times (continuously hitting) while the display screen of FIG. 649(B) is displayed, A crack 820 is displayed on the display screen. Then, when the number of cracks 820 is three at the time when the second period of the button presentation period ends, as shown in FIG. A large number of characters 822 imitating the . In this control example, even after the button effect period ends, the progress display mode DM4A is displayed in the small display area DM4. A value of "3" is displayed to indicate that the This makes it possible for the player to easily understand what the effect result of the crack effect corresponding to the "fish school reach" executed this time was.

In addition, as described above, based on the effect result of the first effect (cracking effect), it is possible to set the effect mode of the second effect to be executed after the first effect, and when the second effect is executed In the case of using a configuration for displaying the effect result of the first effect, for example, the effect result display of the first effect may be configured to display a effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. can be In this case, when the lottery result of the special figure variation is a big hit, it is preferable to display the effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that gives a sense of incongruity, and to make it easier to win a jackpot when the performance with a sense of incongruity is executed, so that a novel performance can be provided.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22A is not operated during the first period of the button effect period of the crack effect, the small display area DM4 will appear at the end of the first period, as shown in FIG. 650(B). "0" is displayed as the progress display mode DM4A, the button display mode DM5A that does not prompt the operation of the frame button 22A is displayed, and the remaining period display mode DM5B is displayed with 0 remaining time. Then, a comment "Unfortunately, end" is displayed in the comment display area DM2A, and a display screen is displayed to inform the player that the cracking effect has ended with the end of the first period.

Note that, in this control example, if the frame button 22A is not operated during the first period, even if a player who does not like the operation of the frame button 22A is playing the game, the player does not feel uncomfortable. 650(B) is displayed at the end of the first period, and the button effect period (operation effective period) is ended. The number of cracks 820 may be determined by lottery at the end of one period, and the determined number of cracks 820 may be displayed on the display screen. As a result, effects corresponding to various numbers of cracks 820 can be provided even to a player who does not operate the frame button 22A. Also, in this case, it is preferable to display the number of cracks 820 (for example, 0.5) that is difficult to display when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times during the first period. This makes it possible for the player to consider whether or not to operate the frame button 22A during the first period in order to experience various effects, thereby suppressing early boredom with the game. be able to.

Next, the background change effect is the effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives a stop type command from the sound lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols) is configured to determine

Therefore, the background change pattern type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114 is configured so that the voice lamp control device 113 can receive it, and when the background change pattern type command is received, It is configured to determine whether or not to change the background mode based on the stopped pattern information stored. By configuring in this way, even if the lottery result of the special figure is lost, the player can be interested in which stop mode the loss is displayed, so the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to enjoy the performance executed on the display screen of the display to the end.

Further, it is determined in advance whether or not the background mode is to be changed, and when the determination results in the determination that the background mode is to be changed, the player is notified of the change of the background. Unlike conventional pachinko machines such as stopping display of 3 patterns (stopping display of background change notification patterns), it is determined whether to execute background change according to the stop mode of the 3rd pattern that is actually stopped and displayed. That is, it is configured so that the stop mode of the third symbol triggers the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set game state, it is possible to easily perform control such as changing the easiness of background change or changing the background change destination. .

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol. By operating the operating means, it may be configured such that the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be variably selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the stop mode based on the player's operation result, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Also, in this case, it is preferable to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operating means than when the player does not operate the operating means at all. It is preferable to configure so that the stop mode of the third symbol to be executed is displayed. As a result, the player can be more motivated to participate in the production.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the twentieth control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 651 and 653. FIG. FIG. 651(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the twentieth control example, and FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents defined in a RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 651(A), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the twentieth control example is used when selecting the effect mode of the cracking effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the nineteenth control example. The difference is that a crack effect selection table 222HA is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The crack effect selection table 222HA is used when selecting the effect mode of the crack effect (display condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks), which is one of the operation effects for executing the operation of the operation means (frame button 22A). In the data table referred to in the SW effect processing 10 (see Z2897 in FIG. 658) executed when the frame button 22A is pressed, it is determined that the SW (switch) effect being executed is the crack effect. If so (Z7101 in FIG. 658: YES), it is referred (Z7105 in FIG. 658).

Here, with reference to FIG. 653, the contents of the crack effect selection table 222HA will be described. FIG. 653 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the crack effect selection table 222HA. As shown in FIG. 653, the cracking effect selection table 222HA includes the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation in which the cracking effect is executed (the result of determination), and the first frame button operation during the SW valid period of the cracking effect and the value of the acquired SW special effect counter 223HA, a different crack effect effect mode (the number of times the frame button is operated to increase the number of cracks) is defined.

Specifically, if the success/failure determination result is a hit (jackpot) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter HA is Effect type A is defined in the range of "0-39", effect B is defined in the range of "40-89", and effect C is defined in the range of "90-99".

Here, specific contents of each effect type defined in the cracking effect selection table 222HA will be described. For effect type A, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second crack is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "10". This is a scenario, with effect type B, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second crack is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "15". In the given scenario, for effect type C, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second crack is "10", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is "25". This scenario is set to

That is, the number of times the number of cracks is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations is varied according to the performance mode of the cracking performance set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much the frame button operation is executed to change the crack, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Note that the crack effect selection table 222HA shown in FIG. 653 shows only the effect type in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times. An effect type in which the second crack is not displayed no matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated, and an effect type in which the third crack is not displayed are also defined. In this way, by defining the performance type in which the crack is difficult to change and the performance type in which the crack is not variable, even if the performance type in which the crack is not variable is set, the frame button is operated with expectation until the end. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 653, description will be made. The success/failure determination result is a hit (jackpot), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA is a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 to 3 seconds, 4 to 5 seconds) In the case, the value of the SW special effect counter HA is defined in the range of "0 to 19", the effect type A is defined in the range of "20 to 79", the effect B is defined in the range of "80 to 99" , production C are defined.

Also, if the success/failure determination result is out of range and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA is a value corresponding to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter HA is "0 to 29". Effect type A is specified in the range, effect B is specified in the range of "30 to 89", and effect D is specified in the range of "90 to 99". Then, if the result of the success/failure judgment is out of line and the value of the SW special effect counter 223HA is a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 to 3 seconds and 4 to 5 seconds) , the value of the SW special effect counter HA is defined in the range of "0 to 4", the effect type A is defined in the range of "5 to 79", the effect B is defined in the range of "80 to 99", Production D is defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 652, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the twentieth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 652, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the twentieth control example has a SW effect counter 223HA, a button depression counter 223HB, and crack information storage, which are different from the RAM 223 of the nineteenth control example described above. The difference is that an area 223HC is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The SW effect counter 223HA is a counter used for selecting a crack effect, and is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 each time the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 654) is executed and repeated. Updated. The detailed contents are the same as those of the effect counter 223H described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The button depression counter 223HB is a counter for counting the number of depressions of the frame button 22, and is incremented by one each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracking effect executed in the twentieth control example, an effect mode (variable display of the number of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button depression counter 223HB.

The crack information storage area 223HC is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect type selected using the crack effect selection table 222HA.

<Regarding the control contents of the sound lamp control device of the twentieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 654 to 658, the control contents of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twentieth control example will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the control content same as each control example mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 654, the main processing 10 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the twentieth control example will be described. 654 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 10. FIG. As shown in FIG. 654, in the main processing 10, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 is changed to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 in the main processing 8 of the eighteenth control example described above. The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the rest is the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 655, the contents of command determination processing 10 will be described. 655 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. FIG. This command determination process 10 is different from the above-described command determination process 8 in that a control process when a display background change pattern command is received is added, and the rest is the same. Details of the display background change symbol command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and the third symbol stop mode to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It contains information for indicating (combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop).

When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes Z2201 to Z2208 as the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the display background change pattern command is received (Z7201). In the processing of Z7201, when it is determined that the display background change pattern command is received (Z7201: YES), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223I (Z7202), and the background mode corresponding to the set background mode is set. A command for switching display to a variation pattern is set (Z7203), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the twentieth control example, based on the third symbol stop mode set by the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 side is configured to execute processing for changing the background mode. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special figure lottery is out, which The player can be made to pay attention to whether the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 656, the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 will be described. 656 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10. FIG. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 10 differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 8 described above in that the SW special processing to be executed is changed to the SW effect processing 10, and the rest is the same. be. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the crack effect ending process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 657 is a flowchart showing the contents of the crack effect ending process (Z2896). In this cracking effect ending process (Z2896), when a specific period of time has elapsed in the cracking effect, a process for setting subsequent effects is executed.

When the crack effect ending process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the crack effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) is checked. It is determined (Z7002), and if it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: NO), then it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not passed (Z7006: NO), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: YES), it is determined whether the value of the button pressing counter 223HB is greater than 0 (Z7003). If it is determined (Z7003: NO), a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect is set (Z7004), the values of the SW valid time counter 223K and the button press counter 223HB are cleared (set to 0), and this End the process.

If it is determined in the process of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223B is greater than 0 (Z7003: YES), this process ends. If it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed in the processing of Z7006 (Z7006: YES), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button pressing counter 223HB is set (Z7007), and the value of the button pressing counter 223HB is cleared. (Z7008), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 658, the contents of SW effect processing 10 will be described. FIG. 658 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing 10. FIG. This SW effect processing 10 differs from the above-described SW effect processing in that a process related to a crack effect is added. Other than that, since they are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

When the SW effect processing 10 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set SW effect is the crack effect (Z7101). The same control as the SW effect processing of the eighteenth control example is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z7101 that the set SW effect is the crack effect (Z7101: YES), then information ( data) is stored (Z7102).

In the process of Z7102, if it is determined that the information (data) indicating the effect mode of the crack effect is already stored in the crack information storage area 223HC (Z7102: YES), the value of the button press counter 223HB is incremented by 1. Then (Z7106), the crack effect type set in the crack information storage area 223HC is read (Z7107), and the effect mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button pressing counter 223HB (variable crack number effect, Set a display effect command for showing a fan effect), and terminate this process.

If it is determined that there is no data in the processing of Z7102 (Z7102: NO), then the value of the SW effect counter 223HA is acquired, the crack effect selection table 222HA is read out (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed Based on the valid time counter value and the obtained SW effect counter 223HA value, the corresponding crack effect type is determined and set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), and the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108). , the process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the twentieth control example>
Next, control processing of the display control device 114 in the twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The control contents of the display control device 114 of this control example differ from the control contents of the eighteenth control example described above in that the stop type command processing 8 is changed to the stop type command processing 10, and the rest is the same. is. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 659 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop type command processing 10 (Z3496). In this stop type command process 10 (Z3496), a command (display background change pattern command) for outputting information about the stop pattern set in the sound lamp control device 113 is set.

When the stop type command process 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same processes of Z3601 and Z3602 as the stop type command process 8 described above are executed, and then the stop pattern set in the process of Z3602 is changed to the background change. (Z8001). In the process of Z8001, if it is determined that the background change is not a stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z8001 that the stop pattern indicates a background change, the display background change pattern command is set (Z8002), the stop pattern determination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this process is performed. exit.

<21st control example>
Next, a twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 660 to 673. FIG. In each of the control examples described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is represented by a liquid crystal presentation using the third symbol display device 81 and a role presentation using a movable accessory (for example, the tilting device 310) that moves the frame button 22. , is used to execute a suggestive effect to suggest to the player.

Specifically, the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command containing information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command Based on the information indicating the lottery result of the included special figure, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the character object effect.

The liquid crystal effect set here is output to the display control device 114 as a display effect command, and various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is created by the display control device 114. On the other hand, for performance effects, a driving scenario for driving the movable role in a predetermined operation is set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the movable role (for example, the tilting device 310) is set based on the set driving scenario. ) to move the driving means (for example, the voice coil motor 352).

In this way, based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), data for liquid crystal presentation and data for character presentation are created, respectively, and based on the created data, a plurality of presentation devices (second 3-symbol display device 81, movable accessory), by synchronizing the effects executed by each of the effect devices, it is possible to execute a more interesting effect. , In each control example described above, since the sound lamp control device 113 outputs data related to each effect to each effect device (display control device 114 and tilting device 310), the effect content executed by each effect device There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize

In particular, in a role production that moves a movable role that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position like the tilting device 310, the movable role is moved in order to execute a specific role production. Since it is necessary to perform a preparatory action to move from the initial position to the production start position, and an end action to move the movable role object to the initial position after the role object production is finished, one piece of information (variation pattern command) When the performance is executed for a plurality of performance devices based on the command, if the performance is executed without considering the position of the movable role at the time when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed, the liquid crystal performance, There was a problem that it deviated from the performance of the character.

Therefore, in the 21st control example, the content of the composite effect (effect mode) executed by combining the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character object effect (driving effect) is set to the movable character object at the execution timing of the compound effect. is configured to be set based on the operational status of the Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is executed only when the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position (initial position). By configuring in this way, even if the control instruction for the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the control instruction for the character effect (movable effect) are separately executed, the display effect and the character effect are out of sync as a combined effect. It is possible to suppress the fading of the image, and to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the twenty-first control example, at the timing of executing the composite effect, the movable accessory is not positioned at the initial position, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect moves to the initial position. When the execution timing of the composite performance arrives in a situation where the player has not returned, the display performance showing the performance result equivalent to the performance result of the composite performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the game is continued without the player being able to recognize the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the composite effect.

Here, in the twenty-first control example, the above-described composite effect is configured to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The details of the effect will be described later, but by executing the composite effect (last effect) during the ending period, the next jackpot will be won immediately after the jackpot game ends (high possibility of winning). is configured to suggest (notify) to the player.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the above-described composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed. A function of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variable state. It is configured so that a product effect (probable variable promotion effect) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be drivable as a decorative performance for enlivening the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to move in various motion patterns (motion scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for multiple purposes during a jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for multiple purposes. , the production effect can be efficiently enhanced.

However, as described above, the more the performance effect is efficiently enhanced, the easier it is to set another role performance during the period in which the movable role is driven (the period during which the performance of the performance is extended). There is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character productions is fixed in advance so that the character productions using the movable accessories are not executed in duplicate, the character production will become monotonous. There is a problem that the effect is lowered. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the character effects overlap, one character effect is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). Configure. As a result, even if it is possible to set the contents of the performance so that the execution periods of the role performance can overlap, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance and to execute various performances of the role. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 660, the flow of setting the composite effect in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 660 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display effect and the character effect (operation effect) during the jackpot game. Of the flow of effects shown in FIG. 660, contents of the OP effect displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, the round effect displayed during the normal round game period, and the interval effect displayed during the interval period. is the same as the contents explained in each of the above control examples, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 660, in this control example, a plurality of accessory effects (operation effects) are executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, during a specific round (one of the 1st, 8th, and 16th rounds) of the jackpot game, an action of opening (raising) the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) associated with the frame button 22A is executed, When the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), the tilting device 310 attached to the frame button 22A (see FIG. 707) is opened during the first operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 and the ending period of the jackpot game. A second operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) by executing the (raising) motion.

Here, the first operation effect is an effect in which the effect result for notifying the player whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the variable probability state is given. The operation effect is to inform the player whether or not there is winning information indicating that the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot B1 or jackpot B2 (see FIG. 440)) in the reserved memory of the special symbols. It is configured to execute a holding consecutive effect, which is a effect to which the effect result of is given.

For example, according to the flow shown in FIG. 660(A), the 16th round (final round) of the jackpot game, the first operation effect (probable promotion effect) is executed. Here, the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is a first effect period (about 6 seconds) that incites whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) is completely opened (up), and a first effect period During the second rendering period (about 2 seconds), the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) and the player can press the frame button 22, and the player presses the frame button 22 during the second rendering period. or when the second effect period has passed, a third effect period (about 2 seconds) for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position.

On the other hand, the round game during the jackpot game is configured to end when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls have won in the specific winning hole 65A. Therefore, depending on the degree of winning during the round game, as shown in FIG. is not located at the initial position). Further, for example, even if the first operation effect is forcibly ended even if it is in the middle stage at the time when the end condition of the 16th round (the final round) is met, the forcibly ended state will be displayed. Since it takes a period of time to move the tilting device 310 to the initial position, the tilting device 310 cannot be positioned at the initial position at the end of 16 rounds (the final round).

Thus, at the end of the 16th round (final round) or at the start of the ending period, if the movable object (tilting device 310) to be the target of the operation effect is not positioned at the initial position, the ending period Even if the condition for executing the second operation effect, that is, the holding continuous effect (last effect) is satisfied during the operation, the third pattern display device 81 is used without executing the operation effect using the tilting device 310. It is configured to execute the last effect only with the display effect.

As a result, the operation effect corresponding to the first operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) is not completely finished (the movable accessory (tilting device 310) driven by the first operation effect is not positioned at the initial position). Thus, even when it is time to execute the continuous continuous performance (last performance), the last performance can be executed using only the display performance, so that the player can experience the continuous continuous performance.

In addition, in this control example, the second operation effect that is executed later than the first operation effect that is executed earlier is executed so that the effect can result in an effect in which a privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given. It is configured as follows. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, depending on the execution status of the first operation effect to be executed first, the second operation effect is executed which can result in a more advantageous effect effect for the player than the first operation effect. It is also possible to suppress the problem that the second operation effect is lost or that the effect of the second operation effect is degraded due to a deviation between the operation effect and the display effect.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, execution conditions for each effect are set so that the holding continuous effect is more difficult to execute than the variable probability promotion effect during the jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the performance that is easy to perform hinders the performance of the performance that is difficult to perform.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 660 (B), when the first operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) is executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the probability variation promotion effect is performed using a predetermined period from the first round. After that, since 16 rounds (final round) can be ended with the tilting device 310 positioned at the initial position, the holding continuous effect (last effect) executed during the ending period can be replaced by the movable accessory ( The second operation effect using the tilting device 310) and the display effect using the third pattern display device 81 can be synchronized and executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 661 to 663, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the above-described operation effects (first operation effect, second operation effect) during the jackpot game are executed will be described. do. An example to be described with reference to FIGS. 661 to 663 shows a display example during a big win game based on a big win B2 (16 round probability variation, even numbered symbol (666) big win). It should be noted that FIGS. 661 to 663 show an example of the display screen during the big win, only the characteristic display mode in this control example is described, and the display during the big win game explained in each control example described above. Each element displayed on the screen (for example, the number of winning balls during the jackpot, the variable probability state, or the element indicating the cumulative number of times the jackpot was won during the time saving state (number of consecutive wins)) has the same content. Therefore, its description is omitted.

Figure 661 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the first effect period of the probability variation promotion effect, Figure 661 (B) is a probability variation promotion effect It is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the second effect period of. And FIG. 662 is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22A during the second effect period of the variable probability promotion effect.

First, when the variable probability promotion effect (first operation effect) is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment "Chance if the button pops out". Then, as shown in the frame line, the tilting device 310 is swung in small steps in the opening direction (upward direction) and the closing direction (downward direction) (inside the frame line in FIG. 661(A), the explanation For the sake of convenience, the state in which the frame button 22A swings up and down is shown).

Then, when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) from the state of FIG. The button display mode shown in FIG. For convenience of explanation, the state in which the frame button 22A is fully protruded is shown within the frame line of FIG. This indicates that the button can be pressed.

If the player presses the frame button 22A in the state shown in FIG. The character "super" is displayed in the vicinity until the jackpot game ends. Then, the characters "Lucky" are displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 662). Then, when the frame button 22A in the protruding state is pressed, the frame button 22A is positioned in the initial state (lowered state) as shown within the frame line in FIG. In this way, by constantly displaying the variable probability promotion mode ("super") on the display screen, the player is informed that the variable probability state is set after the end of the current jackpot game. After that, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, a display mode in which the character "super" is attached is used as the variable probability promotion mode, but it is not limited to this. is set to a display color (for example, rainbow color), or a display color (for example, rainbow color) display mode (for example, character) may be displayed. In addition, in this control example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot is not changed, and a variable probability promotion mode is attached, so that the game can be played in which third symbol display mode the jackpot has been won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed to a display mode (for example, "777") indicating that the jackpot is a variable probability. It may be configured to allow

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this control example, even if the current jackpot is jackpot A (16 rounds, short time 100 times), the variable probability promotion effect described above is configured to be executed. In this case, since the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, when the player presses the frame button 22A in the state of FIG. 661(B), the display screen shown in FIG. , The word “sorry” is displayed to indicate that the variable promotion effect has failed. In addition, even in a part of the case of the jackpot B2 (16-round probability variation and even number pattern (666) jackpot), even if it is configured to display the characters “sorry” indicating that the probability variation promotion effect has failed good. As a result, even if the variable probability promotion performance fails, the variable probability state may be set after the end of the big win game, so that the player can play the game while having expectations until the end of the big win game. .

In addition, in this control example, as a failure pattern of the variable probability promotion effect, it is executed during the first effect period (about 6 seconds) to incite whether the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 707) is completely opened (raised). Only the effect is executed, and then the tilting effect of moving (retracting) the tilting device 310 to the initial position is executed. And this fanning production is a production condition other than the execution condition of the variable promotion production (for example, when winning the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game, or more than a predetermined number in the specific winning opening 65A during the round game It is configured to be executed also when a ball wins or when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during a jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable probability promotion performance is executed, and at the time when the fanning performance is executed, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised). , the player can have expectations. Moreover, since the frequency with which the fanning effect is executed can be increased, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this case, during the first effect period of the variable promotion effect, that is, the effect fusion pattern that executes the display mode (inciting effect display) shown in FIG. 310) can be configured to be executable. As a result, whether this fanning production is part of the probability variation promotion production, production conditions other than the execution conditions of the probability variation promotion production (for example, if you win the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game, It is executed when a condition established when a predetermined number or more of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65A during the game, or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during the jackpot game. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a fanning performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 663, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the holding consecutive effect will be described. FIG. 663(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) during the hold streak effect, and FIG. 663(B). [Fig. 663A] is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the frame button 22A is pressed in the state of Fig. 663(A).

In this control example, at the timing when the jackpot ending period starts, the pending and stored winning information is analyzed (determined), and as a result of the analysis (determined), information indicating that the probability variable jackpot is won is retained and stored. If it is included in the winning prize information that is received, it is configured to execute the holding consecutive effect. When this holding consecutive effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 663(A), the tilting device 310 (frame button 22A) is completely opened (raised) during the ending period (see the framed line in FIG. 663), In the display screen, a button display mode showing the completely raised frame button 22A and characters of "press" for prompting the player to press the frame button 22A are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 663(A), characters of "ENDING" are displayed on the upper left of the display screen to indicate that the state during the jackpot game is the ending period.

When the frame button 22A is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 663(A), the characters "super lucky" are displayed to indicate that the holding consecutive effect has been successful, and many fish-like characters appear on the display screen. A video is played across the screen. Also, the edge of the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot is changed to the success display mode indicating the success of the holding consecutive effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the success of the holding continuous effect (that there is a probability variable jackpot in the holding memory) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, it is set as an execution condition of the holding continuous effect that it is determined that there is a probability variable jackpot in the holding memory, and regardless of whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a probability variable jackpot It is assumed that the holding consecutive production can be executed. Thus, for example, even if the probability variable promotion performance is executed and fails during the jackpot game (even if there is a high possibility that the current big win is not the probability variable jackpot), the possibility of execution of the holding consecutive performance is left. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectations until the end. In addition, when the probability variable promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is successful, the probability variable state in which the probability of the jackpot is high after the jackpot game ends is set, so that the winning information to win the probability variable jackpot is stored in the reserved memory. easier to include. Therefore, the player who succeeds in the variable probability promotion performance during the big winning game can play the game until the end of the big winning game while increasing the expectation of execution of the holding continuous performance.

In this control example, the execution condition of the holding continuous effect is that there is a certain variable jackpot in the holding memory at the time the ending period starts, but it is not limited to this. At a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, such as when the jackpot game is started or when it ends, or at the timing when the special figure variation of the jackpot winning is stopped, it is confirmed that there is a certain variable jackpot in the reserve memory held and stored. It may be set as an execution condition. In addition, when there is a plurality of pieces of prize winning information indicating a big win in the holding memory, even if the big win is not a variable jackpot, the holding consecutive production may be executed. , may be configured to be variably set according to the number of winning information indicating the jackpot contained in the reserved memory.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 664 to 668. FIG. In the twenty-first control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are added to the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. , and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 664, the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 211 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 664 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 664, the ROM 222 of the 21st control example is different from the above-described ROM 222 of the 15th control example (see FIG. , and an operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC are added. Since the rest is the same, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize is a data table used when selecting whether or not to execute an operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) during the jackpot game and the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, In this control example, whether or not to execute the variable probability promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the performance mode of the variable probability promotion effect (the effect mode in which the frame button 22A can be pressed, or the frame button 22A cannot be pressed) It is referred to when selecting the end fan effect mode).

Here, the contents of the special prize during operation effect selection table 222IA will be described with reference to FIG. 666(A). FIG. 666(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special prize operation effect selection table 222IA. As shown in FIG. 666(A), in the special prize operation effect selection table 222IA, different tilting action scenarios are defined based on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the value of the effect counter 223H obtained. .

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A (16 rounds, short time win)", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 9" for "tilting action scenario B", and "10 to 99” defines a “tilting operation scenario C”. The range of "100 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario.

Here, the tilting action scenario defined in the special prize during operation effect selection table 222IA will be briefly described. This tilting action scenario defines the action scenario for driving the tilting device 310, which is a movable accessory. The operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1, which is a timer value for determining the timing for starting the driving of the tilting device 310 after the tilting motion scenario is set, and the operation time (operation period) of the tilting device 310 ) is set for the tilting operation timer 223DB. In other words, depending on the operation data (scenario) selected from the special prize during operation effect selection table 222IA, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and when it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 is determined. , operation presentation content, and are set.

Although the details will be described later, each tilting operation scenario has information for varying the operation mode of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device can be tilted in various operation modes based on the progress of the timer value T2 described above. 310 is operatively configured.

Returning to FIG. 666, the description continues. The jackpot type is ``jackpot B1 (16 rounds, variable odds, odd symbol jackpot)'', and the acquired value of the effect counter 223H is defined to be in the range of ``0 to 199'' so as not to set the tilting action scenario. That is, in this control example, as the operation effect to be executed during the jackpot game, it is configured to be able to execute the variable probability promotion effect (see FIGS. 661 and 662), and this variable probability promotion effect is the variable probability after the end of the jackpot game. This is an effect for suggesting (notifying) the player that the state is set as a jackpot.

In other words, at the time of the big hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big win), the third symbol is stopped and displayed with an odd number symbol, which is a display mode indicating that the probability variable jackpot. In "jackpot B1", Even if the variable probability promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, it only provides a meaningless effect to the player, and there is a risk of causing a decrease in the player's desire to play. tilt motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to play due to the execution of meaningless effects.

Next, the jackpot type is "jackpot B2 (16 rounds, variable probability, even-numbered symbol jackpot)", and the value of the acquired production counter 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 49" as "tilting motion scenario B", and "50 ∼ 149” defines the “tilting motion scenario C”. The range of "150 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario. In addition, the jackpot type is "jackpot C (2 rounds, variable probability)", but the value of the obtained effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, "no tilting action scenario setting" is defined in the entire range. ing. This "jackpot C" is set so that the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is smaller (two rounds) than other jackpot games, and in this control example, the number of rounds (two rounds) is set. After the jackpot game is executed, the variable probability state is always set.

Therefore, the "jackpot C", like the above-described "jackpot B1", by grasping the game mode of the jackpot game, since it is a clear jackpot that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the special prize The intermediate operation effect selection table 222IA is used so that the operation effect (tilting motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to play due to the execution of meaningless effects. In addition, by executing the operation presentation within a small number of rounds, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the presentation during the jackpot game.

Here, a brief description will be given of the contents of the tilting motion scenario types defined in the special prize during operation effect selection table 222IA. It should be noted that, among the contents of the tilt motion scenario, the detailed description of the same parts as in the fifteenth control example described above will be omitted. In this control example, the tilting action scenario B and the tilting action scenario C are provided as the tilting action scenario types defined in the special prize operation effect selection table 222IA. In the tilting operation scenario B, the tilting device 310 is moved by the same operation as the tilting operation scenario B used in the control example of the fifteenth control example, and preparatory driving for moving the tilting device 310 is executed. a preparation period for moving the tilting device 310 three times in the vertical direction (opening/closing direction); A scenario is defined for moving the tilting device 310 such that a period of time is set.

On the other hand, the tilting operation scenario C defines an operation scenario in which only a part of the above-described tilting operation scenario B is executed. A scenario is defined in which the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position after the tilting effect period for executing the tilting drive for moving the tilting device 310 repeatedly three times in the direction (opening/closing direction) is set. In other words, when the tilting action scenario B is set, during the jackpot game, the variable probability promotion effect (see FIG. 661(B)) is executed in which the player presses the frame button 22A, and the tilting action scenario C is set. In this case, it is configured such that a fan effect (see FIG. 661(A)) is executed to prevent the frame button 22A from being pressed during the jackpot game.

Then, as described above, the preparatory drive (preparation period) and the fanning drive (fanning effect period) for the tilting device 310 that are executed when the tilting motion scenario C is set have the same contents as the tilting motion scenario B. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the frame button 22A can be pressed after the tilting drive (tilting effect) of the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22A) is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the journey in which the fanning production is executed have a sense of expectation for the variable promotion production.

Further, in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, similarly to the operation effect selection table 222DA of the fifteenth control example described above, an operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 and a tilt A timer value T2 of the tilting action timer 223DB for setting the operating time (operating period) of the device 310 is defined. 7900 milliseconds (7.9 seconds) is defined as the value T2, and in the tilting motion scenario C, 1000 milliseconds (1 second) as the operation effect start time TI and 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds) as the timer value T2. stipulated. That is, the period set as the operation effect start time TI is defined to be shorter than each tilting action scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222DA of the fifteenth control example described above.

That is, the production using the movable role based on the tilting motion scenario selected with reference to the operation production selection table 222IA is executed during the special figure fluctuation, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 Since it is necessary to move the movable accessory along with the variable display executed on the screen, it was necessary to provide a predetermined grace period for the operation effect start time TI. Since the production using the movable accessory based on the tilting action scenario selected with reference is executed during the jackpot game (during the round game), even if it is executed immediately after the start of the round game, the player feels uncomfortable. This is because there is no way to give By configuring in this way, since the effect of moving the movable accessory can be executed immediately after the round game is started, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by executing the effect of moving the movable accessory at an early stage, it is possible to easily end the effect using the movable accessory within a specific period (round game period).

As described above, in this control example, the tilting action scenario B is selected as the tilting action scenario selected using the special prize operation effect selection table 222IA, and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". It is designed to be higher in the case of "jackpot B2" than in the case. Specifically, the selection ratio is configured to be five times higher. By configuring in this way, when the tilting action scenario B is set and a state in which the frame button 22A can be pressed is provided, it is possible to increase the possibility that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot.

Therefore, when the fanning effect is executed during the jackpot game, the fanning effect (see FIG. 661(A)) progresses and the frame button 22A shifts to the depressible state (see FIG. 661(B)). It is possible to make the player play a game during the big win while making the player expect the . Furthermore, when the frame button 22A becomes depressible, the variable probability promotion performance can be successfully performed with a high probability, so that the frame button 22A can be motivated to be pressed, and the player's willingness to participate in the performance is increased. can be enhanced.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, in addition to selecting the tilting motion scenario C with reference to the above-described special prize operation effect selection table 222IA, when a specific effect condition is established (for example, When winning the performance lottery executed at the start timing of the round game, when more than a predetermined number of balls win in the specific winning opening 65A during the round game, or when the player touches the frame button 22A during the jackpot game. The tilt motion scenario C can be set when, for example, a specific operation is performed. As a result, in addition to when the probability variable promotion effect is set (when the tilting action scenario is selected by the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize), it is possible to execute the fan effect, so the probability variable promotion effect is the fan effect. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the game ended with , or whether the fanning performance other than the variable promotion performance was executed. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the effect that the variable probability promotion effect succeeds will be executed until the end of the jackpot game.

The special prize tilting operation scenario table 222IB is a data table storing the operation contents for the tilting device 310 executed during the jackpot game. Regarding the specific contents, the detailed description of the same parts as the above-described fifteenth control example will be omitted, but the tilting motion selected in the tilting motion scenario table 222IB during the grand prize and the operation effect selection table 222IA during the grand prize A data table is set for setting the origin detection operation table B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the scenario type and the tilting operation scenario.

Here, with reference to FIG. 666(B), the contents of the tilting motion scenario table 222IB during the prize will be described. FIG. 666(B) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the tilting motion scenario table 222IB during the special prize. As shown in FIG. 666(B), the tilting motion scenario table 222IB during the grand prize includes a tilting motion scenario B table 222DB2, a tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1, an origin detection motion B table 222DB4, and an ending scenario table 222IB2. there is Of these, the tilting motion scenario table 222IB during the special prize and the origin detection motion B table 222DB4 have the same contents as those of the fifteenth control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1 defines a motion scenario in which the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22A) moves to the initial position after executing a tilt effect in which the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22A) swings in small increments in the vertical direction. The operation scenario defined in the tilting operation scenario B table 222DB2 of the fifteenth control example described above is partially diverted.

Here, the contents defined in the tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1 will be described with reference to FIG. 667(A). FIG. 667(A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1. This tilting action scenario C table 222IB1 is set by lottery in the special prize operation effect selection table 222IA at the start of the jackpot game. Then, when the operation effect start time set in the prize operation effect selection table 222IA elapses after the tilting motion scenario C is set, the operation of the tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1 is started.

The tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1 sequentially reads out the motion contents corresponding to the motion pointer from "1" during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting motion timer 223DB (see Z2953 in FIG. 561). Then, the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "10" (tilting motion timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation presentation start time (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed, the action data with the action pointer "1" (50 steps can be moved forward during 500 MS) is executed, and the lock is released. , the motion data with a motion pointer of "2" (stop during 3000 MS) is executed, waits, and the motion data with a motion pointer of "3" (20 steps can be moved forward during 200 MS) is executed. Then, the motion data with the motion pointer of "4" (20 steps in the backward direction during 200 MS) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer of "5" (20 steps in the forward direction during 200 MS) is executed. movement) is executed, the movement data with the movement pointer of "6" (20 steps can be moved in the backward direction during 200 MS) is executed, and the movement data with the movement pointer of "7" (20 steps during 200 MS) is executed. forward rotation) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "8" (20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200MS) is executed, and this motion pointer "3" to "8" is executed three times. is performed as a fanning motion (flashing effect), and the motion data with the motion pointer of "9" (50 steps can be moved in the backward direction during 500MS) is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position, The operation pointer becomes "10" and the operation ends.

By configuring in this way, the tilting device 310 performs a tilting operation (tilting effect) during the jackpot game (during the round game) (see FIG. 661 (A)), and the tilting device 310 can be suggested to be completely opened (rising), and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, only a specific fanning motion (motion pointers "3" to "8") is specified as the fanning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a plurality of fanning effects with different positions (open state of the tilting device 310). In this case, among the probability variation promotion production, the success production (see FIG. 662) is executed. By setting the effect mode of (1), the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the fanning effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, the contents defined in the tilting action scenario C table 222IB1 are identical to the contents defined in the tilting action scenario B table 222DB2 up to the first half (the part where the fanning effect ends). It is configured so that the subsequent definition contents are different. Specifically, it is defined that the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position as it is after the end of the fanning effect.

By configuring in this way, until the midst of the fanning production being executed, the current fanning production is a highly expected probability variable promotion production (a probability variable promotion production that allows the frame button 22A to be pressed). Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the variable probability promotion performance (the variable probability promotion performance in which the frame button 22A cannot be pressed) is provided, the player is prevented from grasping the performance result in advance. By suppressing, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

Also, unlike the tilting action scenario B table 222DB2, the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22A) waits at a specific position (most open (raised) position) corresponding to the period for the player to press the frame button 22A. Since there is no need to keep the tilting motion scenario C table 222IB1, an motion for returning the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22A) to the initial position can also be defined. Therefore, the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) from the start to the end of the operation can be executed based on a series of action scenarios, and the accessory action can be executed smoothly. In this control example, the tilting action scenario C table 222IB1 is configured to return the tilting device 310 (the frame button 22A) to the initial position. A motion scenario for returning to the initial position (original position) may be separately provided in the same manner as the accessory motion described above.

Returning to FIG. 666(B), the description continues. The ending scenario table 222IB2 is a scenario table that defines the operation contents of the tilting device 310 for the operation performance executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a predetermined performance condition is established at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game. (when the holding memory contains winning information indicating a variable probability jackpot and when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is positioned at the initial position), it is set.

This ending scenario table 222IB2 is different from the various tables of the above-described tilting action scenarios, and since the operation effect start time T1 is not set, when the ending scenario table is set (Z8514 in FIG. 673), the tilting action timer 223DB is set. is set, and the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222IB1 is started (see Z2992 in FIG. 670).

The ending scenario table 222IB2 reads out the contents of the action corresponding to the action pointer (see Z2953 in FIG. 561) during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting action timer 223DB in order from "1" of the action pointer. , the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "6" (tilting motion timer 223DB becomes 0).

Specifically, the same contents as the partial operation contents of the tilting operation scenario A222DB1 of the fifteenth control example described above are defined, and when the ending scenario is set, the drive motor 342 rotates backward (to the right in FIG. 724). 724), the disk cam 344 rotates 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position shown in FIG. 724), and is moved to the cam release position shown in FIG. (B))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds (500MS) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 667(A))). After a stop period of 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 732) by 20 steps, causing the disc cam 344 to rotate counterclockwise 20 degrees and lock. It is moved to the release position (see FIG. 734) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 667(B)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaging position to the locking disengaging position, as shown in FIG. As the member 347 is rotated clockwise, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotating claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . In this case, when the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, a force in the longitudinal direction is applied to the tilting device 310 to increase the lifting force and improve the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and the period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 667(B))).

After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 667(A))), and the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position. After that, the drive motor 342 rotates 190 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 732) for 1.9 seconds, thereby moving (lowering) the tilting device 310 to the initial position (origin position). and the driving force is transmitted.

As described above, in this control example, as in the tilting action scenario A table 222DB1 of the fifteenth control example described above, the rising speed of the tilting device 310 can be improved. The character performance using (the tilting device 310) can be a powerful performance. Also, within a limited period of the ending period, the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be quickly moved (raised) to the highest position. The period of performance can be lengthened, and various performances can be executed.

In this control example, the ending scenario is set after the ending period has started. It may be configured so that the operation of the action pointer 2 of the ending scenario is completed at the start of the ending period. By configuring in this way, the period from the start of the ending period to the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to the highest position can be further shortened.

In addition, in the twenty-first control example, by setting the ending scenario table 222IB2, the operation of the tilting device 310 is started (operation from the initial position (origin position)) and ends (to the initial position (origin position)). ), but is not limited to this. For example, a scenario table for starting an operation and an operation A scenario table for ending may be provided separately.

Furthermore, in the twenty-first control example, the three seconds during which the tilting device 310 is waiting at the highest position is set as an operation valid period during which the player can press the frame button 22A. When the player presses the frame button 22A during the valid period, the operation valid period is cleared, and the value of the tilt action timer 223DB corresponding to the ending scenario table 222IB2 is subtracted to the value at which the standby state of 3 seconds ends. It is configured to By configuring in this way, when the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22A during the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period ends without pressing the frame button 22A during the operation valid period, the operation valid period can be changed according to the passage of time. When is completed, the end operation of the movable accessory can be executed using a common scenario.

Returning to FIG. 664, the description continues. The operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC is a data table for determining at what timing (round game) during the jackpot game the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is to be executed, and is referred to at the start of the jackpot game ( Z8301 reference of Figure 671), the execution timing of probability variation promotion production is selected. The execution timing selected here is stored in the special prize operation information storage area 223IB, and when the big win game progresses and the round game set as the execution timing is reached, the variable probability promotion performance is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 668, the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC will be described. FIG. 668 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC. As shown in FIG. 668, the operation effect execution timing selection table 222IC defines different execution timings corresponding to the jackpot type and the value of the effect timing counter 223IA.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the value of the production timing counter 223IA is in the range of "0 to 39", and the execution timing of "first round" is in the range of "40 to 109". , "8th round" is defined as the execution timing, and "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "110 to 199". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", when the operation effect (variable promotion effect) is executed, the rate of 20% in the first round, the rate of 35% in the eighth round, 45% It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at a ratio of .

By configuring in this way, since it is configured so that the probability variable promotion performance is easily executed at the end of the jackpot game (16th round), the failure performance is executed as the probability variable promotion performance in the first half of the jackpot game. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in the willingness to play during the remaining period of the jackpot game. In addition, since the timing at which the variable probability promotion performance is executed can be set throughout the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the variable probability promotion performance will be executed.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the variable probability promotion effect only once during the jackpot game. The selection table 222IC may be configured to define a plurality of execution timings. In this case, for example, the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize is configured so that a plurality of effect modes of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game can be selected, and the effect mode of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game. should be configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse probability-varying promotion performances at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the start timing of any round game as the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect, but not limited to this, for example, the interval period set between the round games , when the number of winning balls in the specific winning port 65A in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the start timing may be set when a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the variable probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is more difficult to predict for the player, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 668, the description continues. When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1", the value of the obtained effect timing counter 223IA is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, in the entire range, the execution timing is defined so as not to be set. . That is, in this control example, in the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B1", the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is not selected, so the operation effect execution timing The selection table 222IC is also configured so that the execution timing is not selected. By configuring in this way, even if the variable probability promotion performance is selected in spite of the ``jackpot B1'', the execution of the variable probability promotion performance can be reliably prevented. can.

Next, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2" and the value of the effect timing counter 223IA is in the range of "0 to 19", the execution timing is "first round", and in the range of "20 to 99", “8th round” is defined as the execution timing, and “16th round” is defined as the execution timing in the range of “100 to 199”. In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B2", when the operation effect (variable promotion effect) is executed, 10% in the first round, 40% in the 8th round, 50% It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability variable promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at a ratio of .

In other words, in the ``jackpot B2'' in which the success performance is executed in the variable probability promotion performance, the variable probability promotion performance is more likely to be executed as the jackpot game progresses than in the above-mentioned ``jackpot A''. Therefore, the later the timing at which the variable probability promotion effect is executed, the more the players can expect that the big win this time is the variable probability big win (“jackpot B2”).

In addition, in this control example, the execution timing (1, 8, 16 rounds) of the probability variation promotion effect based on the "jackpot A" and the execution timing (1, 8, 16 rounds) of the probability variation promotion effect based on the "jackpot B2" , the execution timing is selected from the same number of rounds, but without being limited to this, the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can only be executed with the variable promotion effect based on the "jackpot B2" is set. It may be configured to set By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to pay attention to at what timing the variable probability promotion effect is executed. Furthermore, when the "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, the execution timing is not set as in the case of the "jackpot B1" described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 665, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 665 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 665, the RAM 223 in this 21st control example is different from the RAM 223 in the 15th control example (FIG. 549) in that an effect timing counter 223IA and a special prize operation information storage area 223IB are added. are otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The performance timing counter 223IA is formed of a loop counter similar to the performance counter 223H described above, and its value is updated each time the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). It is a thing. The production timing counter 223IA acquires the value of the production timing counter 223IA (Z8314 in FIG. 671) in the opening process 11 (Z8301 in FIG. 671) executed at the start of the jackpot game, and according to the acquired value, The execution timing of the operation performance during the jackpot game is selected based on the operation performance execution timing selection table.

Note that the effect timing counter 223IA and the effect counter 223H are both formed of loop counters that update the range of "0 to 199" every 1 millisecond, but it is difficult to obtain the same value. As you can see, the update content is different. Specifically, the values added by one update are configured to be different prime numbers. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the effect timing counter 223IA and the value of the effect counter 223H from being updated in synchronization with each other.

The operation information storage area 223IB during the special prize stores, as an operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) executed during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the variable probability promotion effect set at the start of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect. This is a storage area for temporary storage. Specifically, the tilting motion scenario (see Z8312 in FIG. 671) selected by the opening process 11 (see Z8301 in FIG. 671) and the execution timing of the selected tilting motion (see Z8315 in FIG. 671) are stored. (See Z8316 in FIG. 671).

Then, it is read in the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672) executed during the jackpot game (see Z8411 in FIG. 672), and when determining whether the current round game is the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect (see Z8412 in FIG. 672), and when it is determined that it is time to execute, an action based on the presentation mode (action scenario) stored in the special prize action information storage area 223IB is started.

<Regarding control processing by the audio ramp control device 113 in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 669 to 673, the contents of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In this 21st control example, the tilting device control process (see Z2891 in FIG. 558) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (Z2161 in FIG. 555) is during the operation effect for the 15th control example described above. The difference is that the contents of the process (see Z2905 in FIG. 559) have been changed, and the contents of the process to be executed when a jackpot-related command is received in the command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 553) have been changed. ing. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 669, the contents of the processing 11 during operation rendering (Z2989) will be described. FIG. 669 is a flow chart showing the contents of the process 11 during operation rendering (Z2989). This processing 11 during operation effect (Z2989) is executed when the tilting motion status is set to 2. And, it is different in that an ending process which is executed when the jackpot ending is in progress is added to the operation effect process (Z2905) of the fifteenth control example described above.

When the operation rendering process 11 (Z2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2951), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (Z2951: YES), next, it is determined whether the current period is during the ending period of the jackpot game (Z2991), and when it is determined that it is during the ending period (Z2991: YES), the ending process is executed. (Z2992), and shifts to the processing of Z2952. On the other hand, in the process of Z2991, when it is determined that the ending period is not in effect (Z2991: NO), the process of Z2992 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z2952.

Details of the during-ending process executed in the process of Z2992 will be described later with reference to FIG. The processing for the case is executed.

Returning to FIG. 669, the description continues. After completing the processing of Z2991 and Z2992, the processing of Z2952 to Z2956, which is the same as the processing during operation rendering (Z2905) of the fifteenth control example described above, is executed, and then the display command corresponding to the operation to be executed this time is set. (Z2993), and the process ends. In the process of Z2993, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position (the most opened position) by the action based on the set tilting action scenario table, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 661(B)) to indicate that the frame button 22A is ready to be pressed, or the tilting device 310 is tilting. In this case, a display command is set for displaying the button display mode on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the contents of the operation.

In this way, by setting the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (setting the display command) based on the actual operation contents of the tilting device 310, the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be easily synchronized with the display mode of the effect display, and a highly effective effect can be executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2951 that the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (Z2951: NO), it is the same as the above-described process during operation rendering (Z2905) of the fifteenth control example. Z2957 to Z2961 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 670, the content of the ending process (Z2992) will be described. FIG. 670 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2992). When the ending process (Z2992) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is 3190 (Z8201). YES), 3000 is set to the value of the SW valid time counter 223K (Z8202), and the process proceeds to Z8202.

In other words, when the value of the tilting action timer 223DB reaches "3190" while the ending scenario (see FIG. 667(B)) is set, the tilting device 310 enters the justified state for 3 seconds. 22A is valid for an operation validity period is set. In this way, by setting the operation effective period of the frame button 22A in accordance with the progress of the operation scenario of the tilting device 310, the operation effective period can be easily set in accordance with the timing when the tilting device 310 is positioned at the highest position. can be set.

In this control example, the operation status of the tilting device 310 is managed based on the progress of the operation scenario (determined based on the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB). ), without being limited to this, detection means ( For example, a movable role object position detection sensor) may be provided, and the operation status of the tilting device 310 may be managed based on the fact that the detection means detects the normal operation of the movable role object.

With this configuration, for example, the period required for the tilting device 310 to move to the highest position (0.5 seconds corresponding to the operation pointer 4 in the ending scenario of this control example) has elapsed. When it is determined that the tilting device 310 has not completed the movement to the highest position, updating of the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is stopped, and a retry period of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) can be set. can. Then, when the tilting device 310 completes the movement to the highest position during the retry period, it is possible to resume updating the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB and set the effective period of operation for the frame button 22A. .

As a result, for example, while the tilting device 310 is performing a lifting motion (opening motion using an elastic member), the player applies a force that resists the lifting motion of the tilting device 310 (e.g. Even if the tilting device 310 cannot move to the highest position within a specific period (within 0.5 seconds), the tilting device 310 will rise to the highest position within a predetermined period (1 second) thereafter. When the player moves to the position, the valid operation period can be set according to the timing, and an appropriate effect can be executed for the player. In addition, if the tilting device 310 does not move to the highest position even after the predetermined period of time (1 second) has passed, another effect (pressing the frame button 22A) is performed without setting the valid operation period. You can also switch to a production that does not let you.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z8201 that the current value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is not 3190 (Z8201: NO), the process of Z8202 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Z8203.

Next, in the processing of Z8203, it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z8203), and if it is determined to be set to ON (Z8203: YES), the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB is set. It resets to "190" (Z8204), sets the value of the SW valid time counter 223K to "0" (Z8205), and terminates this processing.

In other words, when the frame button 22A is pressed during the operation effective period set in the current operation effect (while the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is greater than 0), and the tilting operation flag 223DE is turned on. , the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is changed from the waiting state of the ending scenario, that is, the state of the action pointer 5 (see FIG. 667(B)) to a value that immediately shifts to the action pointer 6, and the operation effective period is changed. , the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is changed to "0". As a result, even if the player presses the frame button 22A at any timing during the operation valid period, the period (3 seconds) during which the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position can be skipped. In addition, the ending scenario can be executed to the end without any problems, even when the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22A or when the operation valid period ends due to the passage of time.

In this control example, when the frame button 22A is pressed during the operation valid period, the value of the tilting action timer 223DB is changed so that the action pointer of the ending scenario is shifted from "5" to "6". , and after pressing the frame button 22A, an operation for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position (original position) is executed. Thus, when using a configuration in which the tilting device 310 moves to the initial position (original position), the value of the tilting operation timer 223DB may be varied up to "0". This makes it possible to omit unnecessary operation processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z8203 that the tilting operation flag 223DE is not set to ON (Z8203: NO), then the currently set action scenario setting table (ending scenario table 222IB2) is dealt with. (Z8206), then it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223K is greater than 0 (Z8207), and if it is greater than 0 (Z8207: YES), then the frame button 22A is pressed (Z8208).

In the processing of Z8208, if it is determined that the frame button 22A has been pressed (Z8208: YES), it means that the frame button 22A has been pressed during the operation valid period in which the ending scenario is set, so a very lucky display is displayed. (See FIG. 663(B)) is set (Z8209), the tilting operation flag 223DE is set to ON (Z8210), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z8207 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223K is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (Z8207: NO), or if the frame button 22A is not pressed in the process of Z8208, If it is determined (Z8208: NO), this processing ends.

Next, the opening process 11 (Z8301) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 671 is a flowchart showing the contents of opening processing 11 (Z8301). This opening process 11 (Z8301) is a process executed when an opening command for a jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477). In addition to the processing of setting the opening command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81, whether or not to execute the operation effect (variable probability promotion effect) during the current jackpot game, and the probability variable promotion effect is executed, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.

When the opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223H is acquired (Z8311), and based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223H and the current jackpot type, the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize A more tilting action scenario is selected (whether or not to be executed and the scenario type is selected) (Z8312). Then, in the processing of Z8312, it is determined whether the tilting motion scenario is selected (Z8313), and if it is determined that it is selected (Z8313: YES), then the value of the production timing counter 223IA is acquired (Z8314), and the acquired Based on the value of the production timing counter 223IA and the big hit type of this time, the execution timing of the tilting action (probability variable promotion production) is selected from the operation production execution timing selection table 222IC (Z8315).

After completing the processing of Z8315, next, information for indicating the type of tilting motion scenario selected in the processing of Z8312, and information for indicating the execution timing of the tilting motion (variable promotion effect) selected in the processing of Z8315. is stored in the special prize operation information storage area 223IB (Z8316), an opening command for display is set (Z8317), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z8313, if it is determined that the tilting motion scenario has not been selected as a result of the process of Z8312 (Z8313: NO), this process ends.

Next, the contents of round processing 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 672 is a flowchart showing the contents of round processing 11. FIG. This round process 11 is a process executed when a round command indicating that a new round of the jackpot game is started is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477), and in this control example , In addition to the processing of setting the display command corresponding to the number of rounds, the determination processing of whether or not to execute the tilting action (probability variation promotion effect) is executed.

When the round process 11 (Z8302) is executed, first, the information (information indicating the type of the tilting action scenario and information indicating execution timing) stored in the special prize action information storage area 223IB is processed. Read (Z8411), determine whether the round game this time is a round for executing tilting action (probability variation promotion effect) (Z8412), and if it is determined that it is the execution timing (Z8412: YES), stored A tilting motion scenario corresponding to the type of the existing tilting motion scenario is set (Z8413), a display command corresponding to the current round number is set (Z8414), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8412, when it is determined that the current round game is not the execution timing of the leaning action (probability variable promotion effect) (Z8412: NO), the processing of Z8413 is skipped and the processing of Z8414 is performed.

Next, the contents of ending process 11 (Z8303) will be described with reference to FIG. 673. FIG. 673 is a flowchart showing the contents of ending process 11 (Z8303). This ending process 11 (Z8303) is a process executed when the ending command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 477). In addition to the process of setting the ending command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, the process of determining whether or not to execute the operation effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period is executed. be done.

When the ending process 11 (Z8303) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223F (the winning information stored on hold) is read out (Z8511). It is determined whether or not winning information indicating a probability variable jackpot is included (Z8512). Here, if it is determined that winning information indicating a variable probability jackpot is included (Z8512: YES), then it is determined whether the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position (origin position) (Z8513), If it is determined to be at the origin position (Z8513: YES), an ending scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is set (Z8514).

Then, the tilting operation status is set to "2" (Z8515), the display command corresponding to the determination result of this time is set (process 8516 of Z2952), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8513, when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not positioned at the origin position (Z8513: NO), an ending command for display indicating that there is a probability variable jackpot is set (Z8517). , the process ends. Also, in the processing of Z8512, if it is determined that there is no prize winning information indicating a probability variable jackpot in the prize winning information (Z8512: NO), this processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in this control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect executed by combining the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character effect (driving effect) is determined at the execution timing of the compound effect. It is configured to be set based on the operation status of the movable accessory. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is executed only when the movable accessory is positioned at a predetermined position (initial position). By configuring in this way, even if the control instruction for the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the control instruction for the character effect (movable effect) are separately executed, the display effect and the character effect are out of sync as a combined effect. It is possible to suppress the fading of the image, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, at the execution timing of the composite effect, in a situation where the movable accessory is not located at the initial position, that is, in a situation where the movable accessory driven by the previously executed role product effect has not returned to the initial position, the composite effect is performed. When the performance execution timing arrives, the display performance showing the performance result equivalent to the performance result of the composite performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the game is continued without the player being able to recognize the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the composite effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the above-described composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed. A function of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probability variable state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variable state. It is configured so that a product effect (probable variable promotion effect) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be drivable as a decorative performance for enlivening the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to move in various motion patterns (motion scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for multiple purposes during a jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for multiple purposes. , the production effect can be efficiently enhanced.

However, as described above, the more the performance effect is efficiently enhanced, the easier it is to set another role performance during the period in which the movable role is driven (the period during which the performance of the performance is extended). There is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character productions is fixed in advance so that the character productions using the movable accessories are not executed in duplicate, the character production will become monotonous. There is a problem that the effect is lowered. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the character effects overlap, one character effect is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). Configure. As a result, even if it is possible to set the contents of the performance so that the execution periods of the role performance can overlap, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance and to execute various performances of the role. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the variable probability promotion effect is executed only once during the jackpot game. . In this case, for example, the operation effect selection table 222IA during the special prize is configured so that a plurality of effect modes of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game can be selected, and the effect mode of the variable probability promotion effect to be executed during the big win game. should be configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse probability-varying promotion performances at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the start timing of any round game as the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect, but not limited to this, for example, the interval period set between the round games , when the number of winning balls in the specific winning port 65A in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the start timing may be set when a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the variable probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is more difficult to predict for the player, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set the start timing of any round game as the execution timing of the variable probability promotion effect, but not limited to this, for example, the interval period set between the round games , when the number of winning balls in the specific winning port 65A in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22A during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the start timing may be set when a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the variable probability promotion effect can be executed at a timing that is more difficult to predict for the player, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the content of the effect (composite effect) executed by combining the liquid crystal effect and the character effect is set differently according to the position of the movable character, for example, the movable character is positioned at the initial position If it is determined that it is, a predetermined composite effect (for example, a composite effect that is executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed, and the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position within 1 second. If it is determined that it is in a position (state), a predetermined composite effect (composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is delayed by 1 second and executed, and the movable accessory is within 1 second. When it is determined that the player is in a position (state) in which it is possible to move to the initial position, various effects may be set so that the suggestive effect of only the liquid crystal effect is executed without moving the movable accessory. As a result, various effects can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, as a role production for moving the movable role, a first role production is executed with a predetermined first position as an initial position and a second position different from the first position as an end position; A pachinko machine capable of executing at least a second role performance performed with the first position and a third position different from the second position as the initial position and the above-described second position as the end position, and a combined performance Based on the position of the movable accessory at the timing of setting the content of , it may be determined whether to execute the first role production or the second role production.

Also, in this case, regardless of the special figure fluctuation, it is preferable to configure so as to be able to execute a fan effect that brings the movable accessory closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22. This allows the player to select the position of the movable accessory when the composite effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the composite performance desired by the player, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In this control example, an example of setting the contents of the suggestion effect for suggesting the jackpot type won during the jackpot game has been described. The technical idea used in this control example may be applied to the production for suggesting (fluctuation production) and the production for suggesting the lottery result of normal symbols (normal pattern fluctuation production). In addition, in this control example, the tilting device 310, which is arranged near the frame button 22A as a movable accessory, is used as an example. Any movable accessory (movable member) configured to be movable between the second position (movable position), for example, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) disposed in the variable display unit 80 Alternatively, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) attached to the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 may be used.

In addition, in this control example, as conditions for operating the movable member (tilting device 310), a first operating condition that can be established during a jackpot game and a second operating condition that can be established based on the lottery result of special symbols are set. However, without being limited to this, for example, a third operating condition that is established when a predetermined time has come, a fourth operating condition that is established when the player presses the frame button 22A, a pending A fifth operating condition or the like, which is established when the number of stored items reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight), may be set as the condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). By setting a plurality of operating conditions for the movable member (tilting device 310) in this way, the movable member can be moved at various timings, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this way, even if the opportunity to move the movable member (tilting device 310) independently of the presentation display is increased for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, according to this control example, the accessory using the movable member It is possible to provide a player with a composite effect combining the effect and the display effect using the third pattern display device 81 without causing discomfort to the player.

In addition to the configuration of this control example, the movable accessory can be moved by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a jackpot game) regardless of the special symbol lottery result. It is also possible to provide an effect (inciting effect) to make the player willingly operate the operating means. In this case, since the position of the movable member becomes undefined when executing the above-described suggestive effect, a situation is likely to occur in which the movable member is not positioned at the initial position (origin position) at the start of the ending period. However, by using the technical concept of this control example, it is possible to execute a composite effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the promotion performance in which whether or not the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is the variable probability jackpot is notified by operating the operation means, It is configured to determine whether or not a holding continuous performance (last performance) is to be executed and, when it is determined that the holding continuous performance (last performance) is to be executed, to execute a holding continuous suggestion performance suggesting that effect. You can As a result, even if the promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game when the holding series suggesting performance is executed, the holding is performed using the movable member without operating the operating means (the movable member is prevented from moving). It is possible to make it easier to execute a continuous performance. In this way, by executing the holding continuation suggesting performance, intentional movement of the movable member is prevented in one performance (promotion performance), and the movable member is made easier to move in another performance (holding continuation performance). becomes possible. Therefore, by giving the player the option of not moving the movable member, the effect to be executed can be made more diverse, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<22nd control example>
Next, the twenty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 674 to 684. FIG. In the 21st control example described above, when executing an effect (composite effect) in which the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character object effect are executed together, the movable member ( When it is determined whether the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, and when it is determined that it is located at the initial position, it is configured to execute a composite effect, and when it is determined that it is not located at the initial position. was configured so as not to execute the composite rendition. As a result, when executing a composite effect, the control means (audio lamp control device 113) that controls the effect is controlled by the control means (display control device 114) that controls the display effect, and the driving means that operates the movable accessory ( Even if a command (command) relating to a composite performance is output independently to a drive motor) and (hereinafter referred to as each device), the performance executed by each device can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be obtained. was able to increase

However, in the technique used in the twenty-first control example described above, in order to output a command (command) for simultaneously executing a composite effect to each device, for example, the movable member is moved to an initial position corresponding to the composite effect. An action (preparatory action) for causing the effect is executed after receiving a command (command) for executing the composite effect. In other words, when executing a composite effect using a plurality of devices (movable members, liquid crystal devices, etc.), the preparatory operation for making the composite effect executable is completed by each device (preparation period) should be included in the first half period of the composite presentation.

If such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a composite effect that synchronizes the liquid crystal effect (display effect) and the character effect, but it is necessary to set a long preparation period, There is a problem that the effect period in which the actual composite effect (the effect executed after the preparation period has elapsed) can be set becomes short when the composite effect is executed by In addition, there is a problem that the player notices the effect contents of the compound effect executed according to the movement state (preparatory action) of the movable accessory during the preparation period, which is the stage before the compound effect is performed.

In particular, as a composite effect, a first composite effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the first position, and a role product effect is performed with the movable accessory positioned at the second position. and a pachinko machine configured to change the selection ratio between the first and second composite effects according to the lottery result of the special symbols, the pachinko machine can be moved during the preparation period. Since the player can easily determine whether the accessory moves to the first position or the second position, it is easy for the player to discriminate even the result of the lottery of the special symbols, and the production effect ( There is a problem that the performance effect of the composite performance is lowered.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, at the time before setting the composite effect (before the determination of whether the composite effect is executed) , to execute control for executing a preparatory action for moving the movable accessory to the first position or the second position.

In this way, by configuring the preparatory action to be set separately from the setting of the composite effect, when the preparatory action of the movable role is executed for the player, the composite effect (character object effect) is performed. It can make you think that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparation operation is executed regardless of whether or not the composite effect (role effect) is executed, the presence or absence of the execution of the compound effect and the lottery result of the special pattern will be determined according to the movable state of the movable role during the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is discriminated.

In the twenty-first control example described above, the display control device 114 and the movable member (tilting device 310) are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113. Round period, fluctuation period of special symbols), for the display effect that is continuously performed, a display command indicating the effect mode of the display effect to be executed within the effect period (for example, display round command, display variation pattern command) is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the performance period, and in the predetermined performance period (round period of the jackpot, variation period of the special symbol), For a character effect in which the effect is executed only for a specific period (for example, a period of 5 to 10 seconds from the start of the effect period), after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the effect period, the movable member (tilting device 310) Then, it is necessary to output a command to perform a preparatory operation (for example, a preparatory period of 2 seconds). In this case, a measuring means (such as a timer) is provided for measuring the timing of outputting a command to the movable member on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In order to be able to execute performance effects using movable members at a plurality of timings, it is necessary to design the measurement means so that a plurality of periods can be measured, which increases the processing of the sound ramp control device 113. There was a problem that

On the other hand, in the 22nd control example, a role object control device 229 is provided for executing motion control for a movable member, and a movable member (for example, the tilting device 310 ) is configured to output an instruction (command) for moving the Then, at the start timing of the production period, the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is a command (a role object command) is included.

With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 only outputs the display command corresponding to the predetermined presentation period to the display control device 114 at the start of the presentation period, thereby preparing the movable member at an appropriate timing. can be made to act. In addition, even if a plurality of execution timings of the compound effect can be set and the timing of executing the preparatory motion is changed in accordance with the set execution timing of the compound effect, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing of outputting the role item command to be included in the voice lamp control device 113, the need for providing a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods can be eliminated. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 674, the electrical configuration in the twenty-second control example will be described. FIG. 674 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example. As shown in FIG. 674, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example, a role product control device 229 that executes the motion control of the movable role is added to the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example described above. , and that the display control device 114 can output an operation instruction (command) to the character object control device 229 and the audio output device 226, and the other points are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, in the block diagram of FIG. 674, for convenience of explanation, only the characteristic configuration of this control example is described among the electrical configuration of the entire pachinko machine 10, but the electrical configuration that is not described (for example, The power supply device 115, the payout control device 111, etc.) have the same configuration as in the twenty-first control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 674, in this 22nd control example, a command (information) for displaying an image based on the image data is output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the third pattern display device 81. , to the role product control device 229 to output a command for operating the movable role product. Here, as shown in FIG. 674, the character object control device 229 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, and data (various commands) output from the display control device 114 can be received. an input port Y304 for inputting commands), an MPUY301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device, and an output port Y306 for outputting data relating to operations to various movable accessories (the tilting device 310 and other devices 228). and is equipped with. The MPUY 301 stores a ROMY 302 storing predetermined program information (operation scenario (preparatory operation scenario, etc.) for operating a movable accessory) upon execution of various control programs executed by the MPUY 301; A RAMY 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, etc., is incorporated.

The MPUY301 of the character object control device 229 is electrically connected to the input port Y305 and the output port Y306. When a command designating movable data for moving a movable role object is received from the display control device 114 to the role object control device 229, the command is sent to the MPUY 301 via the input port Y 305 and the bus line. is entered. Also, an action pattern (action scenario) specified by the display control device 114 is read from the ROMY 302, and an action instruction corresponding to the read action pattern is sent to various movable accessories via the output port Y 306. output as

Furthermore, this control example is configured so that the accessory control device 229 can determine the operation status of the tilting device 310 . Specifically, whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven is determined by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, an operation instruction is received from the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the state in which the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not moving, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, both the sound lamp control device 113 and the character object control device 229 provide motion data for moving the movable character object (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). (corresponding electrical signal) is output to the movable accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scenario is configured to be output to the role product control device 229, and only the role product control device 229 sends motion data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the motion scenario) to the movable role product. corresponding electrical signals). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent operation data from being output from a plurality of control devices to the movable accessory, thereby preventing the operation control of the movable accessory from becoming complicated.

Further, in this control example, data (commands) relating to audio output can be output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the audio output device 226 as well. Here, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114 . Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, the audio output device 226 is configured to be able to receive data (commands) relating to audio output from the audio lamp control device 113 as in the control examples described above.

As shown in FIG. 674, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPUM 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. In the MPUM 301, a ROMM 302 storing predetermined program information (operation scenario (preparatory operation scenario, etc.) for operating a movable accessory) upon execution of various control programs executed by the MPUM 301; A RAMM 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like upon execution of various control programs executed by the MPUM 301, is incorporated.

The MPUM301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port M305 and the amplifier section M306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPUM 301 via the input port M305 and the bus line M304. be done. Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM M302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the amplifier M306. For example, audio data corresponding to BGM is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to stop sound is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to warning sound is output to CN3. Then, it is amplified by the amplifier section M306 and input to the speaker section 450 . Accordingly, various sounds designated by the display control device 114 can be output from the speaker unit 450 .

Here, the configuration of the ROMM 302 provided in the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROMM 302 of the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (not shown).

The audio file storage area is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the display control device 114, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read out from the audio file storage area and output to the corresponding channel of the amplifier section M306.

Specifically, in an audio file storage area (not shown), music data related to music (BGM), stop sound data related to stop sound, and simulated sound generated during preparatory drive for character action are stored. and pseudo-voice data relating to the reproduced pseudo-voice are stored. In this control example, it is possible to output the above-described pseudo sound during the preparation period in which the movable accessory can execute preparation driving.

With this configuration, the same pseudo sound is output whether the preparation drive is actually executed during the preparation period or not, so that the player can On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Specifically, in this control example, similarly to the above-described 21st control example, it is configured so as to execute a role effect in which the tilting device 310 is moved as a movable role. If it is a role product presentation executed during the ending scenario table 222IB2, the operation contents of the operation pointers "1" and "2" (see FIG. 667(B)) correspond to the preparation drive.

Here, the action contents of the action pointers "1" and "2" specified in the ending scenario table 222IB2 (see FIG. 667(B)) are actions to move the mechanism (cam etc.) inside the tilting device 310. For this reason, the player cannot see the action, but since the drive motor is driven when the preparatory drive is performed, the drive sound and the sound generated when the cam is disengaged reach the player. There is a possibility that

Therefore, as in this control example, by outputting a pseudo sound generated during the preparatory drive in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, the player can be notified whether or not the preparatory drive has been executed. can be difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the role product production that requires the preparation drive, it is possible to suppress the judgment of the production mode of the operation production to be executed for the player while the preparation drive is being executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the operation performance is lowered.

In this control example, by outputting the sound that is generated when the preparatory drive is executed, even if the preparatory drive is not actually being executed, the preparatory drive seems to be being executed. However, it is acceptable as long as the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is being executed. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, a decorative effect sound) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the sound generated when the preparatory drive is performed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is (has been) executed, and similar effects can be achieved.

In addition, as described above, this control example uses a configuration in which it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is being performed. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration that allows visual confirmation that the preparatory drive is being executed, in addition to the output of a pseudo sound, the preparatory drive is executed It is necessary to take measures so that it is not visually determined that the In this case, for example, when a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive can be executed is set, regardless of whether or not the preparatory drive is executed, a covered movable member is provided to cover the member that is movable by the preparatory drive so that the player cannot see it visually. It is good to set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and aurally determining that the preparatory drive is to be executed.

<Regarding the flow of the effect during the jackpot game in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 675 to 677, the flow of effects during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the 21st control example described above, the display control device 114 is configured to output an effect execution command to the character control device 229 and the audio output device 226. The contents of control for the effects executed during the final round (16 rounds) and the contents of controls for the effects executed during the ending period are different, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 675, a description will be given of the flow in the case of executing the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 675 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution of a holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a composite effect, during the ending period of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 675, when a jackpot game (jackpot game period) is started, at the timing when a specific period (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) forming the jackpot game period is started, A display command is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 to indicate the display mode of the effect contents (liquid crystal display) during the specific period.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command from the sound lamp control device 113, it creates image data based on the received display command, and displays liquid crystal (opening display, round Display, interval display, ) is executed. The detailed control contents for the display control device 114 to cause the third pattern display device 81 to perform various displays are the same as those of the control examples described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The sound lamp control device 113 sets a specific timing (for example, 6 seconds after the start of the round game) to the display command as a display command (final round command for display) corresponding to the final round (16 rounds). Set including specification information for specification. When the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, it executes the liquid crystal display during the final round, and at the specific timing specified by the specified information included in the final round command for display, the character product control device 229 , and outputs commands (operation commands) to the audio output device 226 .

The role product control device 229 receives an action command (a role product command) output from the display control device 114, and executes preparatory driving for the movable role object (tilting device 310). Also, the audio output device 226 outputs pseudo-audio upon receiving an operation command (audio command) output from the display control device 114 . That is, based on the designation information included in the final round command for display, the preparation drive (preparation period of 2 seconds) for the composite effect (last effect) that can be executed during the ending period is executed.

Here, the specific timing designated by the designation information included in the final round command for display is set to be two seconds before the timing at which the final round can end. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is the same as the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the control examples described above. , the second condition that 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round game, the round game is configured to end when any of the second conditions is satisfied. Therefore, in this control example, the timing obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the timing at which the first condition can be established (the timing at which 10 seconds have passed since the round game was started) (the timing at which 8 seconds have passed since the round game was started) timing) is set as the timing specified by the specified information.

During this preparatory period, the character object control device 229 performs preparatory driving for the tilting device 310, and the sound output device 226 outputs pseudo sound to the speaker 450 during the preparatory period. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the round display of the final round is continuously executed (standby state) so as not to discriminate that the player is currently in the preparation period. After that, when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending period is started, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the composite performance (last performance) during the ending period, and determines the last performance. When it is determined that the (holding continuous effect) is to be executed, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs to the display control device 114 an ending command for display including execution of the last effect.

When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command including the execution of the last effect, it causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the liquid crystal display corresponding to the last effect, and the character control device 229, Outputs a role item command for executing an operation effect corresponding to the last effect. Then, when the character object control device 229 receives the character object command for executing the operation effect corresponding to the last effect, the character object effect corresponding to the last effect is transmitted to the tilting device 310 whose preparatory drive has been completed. Operation data for execution (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors defined in the operation scenario) is output.

As described above, in this control example, the preparation drive for the role production (driving the production) of the movable role (tilting device 310) executed as the composite production during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 completes the preparatory drive, that is, completes the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222IB2 (see FIG. 667(B)). Therefore, compared to the case where the preparatory drive is executed from the start of the ending period, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set.

In addition, the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparatory driving of the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transmits the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since it is configured to output a command for use, the sound lamp control device 113 side measures the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory, and when the execution timing comes, the preparatory drive is performed for the movable accessory. There is no need to output a role item command to execute . Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the display control device 114 is configured to output the command for the character product to the character product control device 229 and simultaneously output the command for sound to the audio output device 226, so as to correspond to the execution period of the preparation driving of the movable character object. Since a pseudo sound is output from the speaker 450, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the sound generated during the preparatory driving of the movable accessory.

In addition, in this control example, as in the above-described 21st control example, it is configured to determine at the start of the ending period whether or not to execute the combined effect (last effect) during the ending period. Therefore, at the start of the final round (16 rounds), which is the timing before the start of the ending period, it is not determined whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed. In such a state, that is, in a state in which it has not been decided whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is to be executed during the ending period, by designating the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory, The preparation driving is executed regardless of whether the composite effect (last effect) is executed or not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the composite effect (last effect) will be executed during the ending period, depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive.

Next, with reference to FIG. 676, a description will be given of the flow in the case where the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a composite effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 676 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the holding continuous effect (last effect), which is a composite effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Fig. 676 is the same as Fig. 675 described above except that the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. A detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 676, when the ending period starts, as a result of the determination performed by the audio ramp control device 113, if it is determined that the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not to be executed, the audio ramp control is performed. A display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the device 113 to the display control device 114 . In this case, for example, similar to the 21st control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (reserved continuous effect) is not established (there is no winning information indicating the probability variable jackpot in the reserved symbol), the normal ending When the display is executed and the execution conditions for the last effect (holding continuous effect) are satisfied, but the combined effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the holding continuous effect is displayed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute effect display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 677, a description will be given of the flow when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not preparatory driven during the preparatory period set during the final round (16th round) of the jackpot game. FIG. 677 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not preparatory driven during the preparatory period set during the final round (16th round) of the jackpot game. FIG. 677 is different from FIG. 676 described above only in that the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not preparatory driven during the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds). Other than that, they are identical. A detailed description of the same parts will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 677, in the final round (16th round), an operation effect for moving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed (round effect drive is executed), and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. When the role product control device 229 receives the role product command output from the display control device 114 during the moving operation (return operation), the movable accessory (tilting device 310 ) is determined to be unexecutable, and the preparatory drive is not executed. Even in this case, the voice output device 226 outputs pseudo voice.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. Also, since the preparation drive was not executed during the final round (16 rounds), the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. Also in this case, similar to the pattern described with reference to FIG. is not executed, a display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 . In this case, for example, similar to the 21st control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not established (there is no winning information indicating the probability variable jackpot in the reserved pattern), the normal ending When the display is executed and the execution conditions for the last effect (holding continuous effect) are satisfied, but the combined effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the holding continuous effect is displayed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute effect display.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for a specific operation effect that can be executed during a specific effect period (ending period) is performed even if it is not determined whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed. configured to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

In addition, a preparation period in which the preparation drive is executed is set in advance, and the preparation drive is executed as an obstruction means for making it difficult for the player to determine whether the preparation drive is being executed during the preparation period. It has a pseudo-sound output means for outputting a pseudo-sound generated in the case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a predetermined execution prohibition condition is satisfied during the preparation period, the preparatory drive is not executed. The sound output means is configured to output pseudo sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the specific operation effect is to be executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

<Regarding control processing in the sound ramp control device of the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 678, the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The twenty-second control example differs from the twenty-first control example described above in that round processing 12 (see Z8352 in FIG. 678) is executed instead of round processing 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672). Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

FIG. 678 is a flow chart showing the contents of round processing 12 (Z8352). This round process 12 (Z8352) is a process of determining whether the newly executed round is the final round (16 rounds), in contrast to the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672) of the 21st control example described above. The difference is that processing for setting a display command dedicated to the final round (16 rounds) is added when the final round (16 rounds) is determined.

Specifically, when round processing 12 (Z8352) is executed, Z8411 to Z8413 identical to round processing 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 672) of the 21st control example described above are executed, and then newly executed. It is determined whether the round to be played is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451). In the process of Z8451, if it is determined that it is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: YES), then the final round command for display is set (Z8452), and the round process 11 (Fig. Z8414, which is the same as Z8302 of 672) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z8451 that the round is not the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: NO), this process ends.

Here, in the processing of Z8452, information for indicating the round display corresponding to the final round (16 rounds) and information for indicating the timing of executing the preparatory driving of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) are included. The final round command for display is set. In this way, by including information for indicating the timing of executing preparatory driving in the final round command for display set at the start timing of a new round, the audio ramp control device 113 can control the movable accessory (tilting device 310).

Further, when the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received command is set, and the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the display data table is stored in the clock counter 233H. Since the effect display corresponding to the set and updated value of the clock counter 233H is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the timing of executing the preparation drive for the final round command for display. By including the information for indicating, it is possible to determine the timing to execute the preparation drive by diverting the time information of the time counter 233H used for displaying the image on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a new measuring means (timer) for determining the timing for executing preparatory driving, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, control processing of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 679 and 680. FIG. In the twenty-second control example, command determination processing 12 is performed instead of command determination processing 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 448) for the control processing executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-first control example. (See Z3392 in FIG. 679).

Here, the contents of command determination processing 12 (see Z3392) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 679 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 12 (see Z3392). When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, the same processes from Z3401 to Z3419 as the above-described command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 448) are executed, and it is determined that there is no error command in the process of Z3418. If so (Z3418: NO), then it is determined whether there is a final round command for display (Z3491).

In the processing of Z3491, if it is determined that there is a final round command for display (Z3491: YES), the final round processing is executed (Z3492), the processing shifts to Z3401, and it is determined that there is no final round command for display. If so (Z3491: NO), the process proceeds to Z3420, which is the same as the above-described command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 448).

Next, with reference to FIG. 680, the contents of the final round process (Z3492) executed in command determination process 12 (see Z3392 in FIG. 679) will be described. In this final round process (Z3492), a process for setting the display data table based on the received final round command for display and a process for outputting the command to the character object control device 229 and the audio output device 226 and is executed.

When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, first, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received final round command is set (Z3495), and then the standby display timing set in the display data table A process for outputting a character object command for causing the character object control device 229 to perform preparatory driving and an audio command for causing the audio output device 226 to output pseudo-audio is set according to (Z3496), this processing ends.

As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233H reaches a value indicating the standby display timing (the start timing of the preparation period), the character command and the voice command can be synchronously output.

<Regarding control processing in the audio output device of the 22nd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPUM 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 681 and 682. FIG. In the twenty-second control example, the audio command set by the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output processing of the audio lamp control device 113 or the command output processing of the display control device 114. The audio output device 226 is configured to output audio data corresponding to the received audio command.

Thus, various display commands output to the display control device 114 and voice By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of production modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (a production display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (visual display mode) and effect sound mode (auditory sound mode) output from the speaker 450 via the audio output device 226 can be set centrally. Therefore, when a plurality of performance modes are executed to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each performance mode and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, the above-described visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. What is necessary is just to perform the production|presentation for showing the lottery result of a special design with respect to. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand that operates an operation handle), or an olfactory presentation mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell. It is also possible to suggest and inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In this way, a plurality of types of performance modes are appropriately combined to execute one performance, so that performance modes to be executed for indicating the lottery results of special symbols can be set in various ways.

Further, in this control example, the display control device 114 is also configured to set an audio command (a command for outputting pseudo-audio) to be output to the audio output device 226 . By configuring in this way, since the display control device 114 can output the sound in accordance with the timing of actually creating the display data, the display content displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, An effect that is more synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 450 can be executed.

In addition, for example, if the effect display is not properly executed due to an abnormality in the control processing of the display control device 114, the audio command is not output to the audio output device 226, so even if the effect display is not executed. Regardless, it is possible to suppress the output of only the sound and the occurrence of a lag between the performance display and the sound execution timing.

First, the main processing executed by MPUM 301 of audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 681(A). FIG. 681(A) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (Z8501). Details of this command determination processing (Z8501) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for outputting a voice corresponding to the voice command is executed. After the processing of Z8501, other processing is executed (Z8502). In the processing of Z8502, processing for reproducing audio data and updating the value of the music pointer is executed.

When the processing of Z8502 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAMM 303 (Z8503). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z8503 (Z8503: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z8505), and the power-off processing is executed (Z8506). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z8507), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of Z8503 (Z8503: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAMM303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAMM303 (Z8504), and the RAMM303 is destroyed. If not (Z8504: NO), the process returns to Z8501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMM 303 is destroyed (Z8504: YES), the processing is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processing.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by MPUM 301 of audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 681(B). FIG. 681B is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 681(B)) is processing executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMM 303 (Z8601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 682, command determination processing (Z8501), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 681A) executed by MPUM 301 of audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 682 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z8501). In this command determination process (Z8501), control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z8501), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z8701). End the determination process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z8701: YES), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z8702). , the command type is analyzed (Z8703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice command output from the display control device 114, that is, a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704). (Z8704: YES), the voice file (pseudo voice data) indicating the pseudo voice notified by the command is read from the voice file storage area of the ROMM 302. Next, set a value corresponding to the timing at which the pseudo-audio is played back to the music pointer value, set a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the pseudo-audio data, and set playback of the pseudo-audio data. (Z8706), the process proceeds to Z8707.

On the other hand, in the process of Z8704, if it is determined that there is no audio command output from the display control device 114 (Z8704: NO), or if the above-described process of Z8706 is executed, then other audio It is determined whether or not there is a command, that is, a voice command received from the voice lamp controller 113 (Z8707).

In the processing of Z8707, for example, BGM for music corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation effect and the jackpot game effect during the jackpot game, the stop sound sound corresponding to the stop display timing of the special symbol (third symbol), and the frame button 22A It is determined whether or not a voice command for indicating a pressing sound voice corresponding to the pressing timing of , an error voice corresponding to an error notification, or the like has been output from the voice lamp control device 113 . Here, when it is determined that there are various audio commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 (Z8707: YES), an audio file (music data) corresponding to the audio (music) indicated by the received various audio commands group) is read from the voice file storage area, and the read voice file (music data group) is stored in a predetermined storage area. Then, the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the audio data indicated by the various received audio commands is set in a predetermined timer, the reproduction of the various audio data is set (Z8708), and the process proceeds to Z8701. Transition.

In the processing of Z8707, when it is determined that there is no other audio data (Z8707: NO), other command processing is executed (Z8709), the process proceeds to Z8701, and the above control is repeatedly executed.

<Regarding the control process of the accessory control device 229 in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 683 and 684, the control processing contents of the role product control device 229 in the twenty-second control example will be described. In the twenty-second control example, the role product command set by the display control device 114 is output to the role product control device 229 by the command output processing of the display control device 114, and the role product control device 229 outputs the received role product Operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors defined in the operation scenario) corresponding to the command for use is output to the corresponding movable accessory.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 that receives the command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the display control By setting various role product commands that the device 114 outputs to the role product control device 229, a plurality of effect display modes (displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol It is possible to operate the movable accessory in synchronization with the effect display mode (visual display mode) to be performed.Therefore, various devices (third symbol In the case of executing a composite effect combining the display device 81, the movable accessory, and the speaker 450), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode set by each of the various devices. You can increase the effect.

In addition, in this control example, the above-described visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of presentation modes for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can It is sufficient if it executes the production for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand that operates an operation handle) or an olfactory presentation mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It is also possible to suggest and inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. In this way, by performing one performance by appropriately combining a plurality of types of performance modes, it is possible to set various performance modes to be executed for showing the lottery result of special symbols.

First, with reference to FIG. 683(A), the main processing executed by MPUY 301 of the character product control device 229 will be described. FIG. 683(A) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the role product control device 229 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing processing according to the command received from the display control device 114 is executed (Z9001). Details of this command determination processing (Z9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for outputting the motion data that has been set is executed. After the processing of Z9001, other processing is executed to reproduce the motion data and update the value of the motion timer for updating the motion scenario (Z9002).

When the processing of Z9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAMY 303 (Z9003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z9003 (Z9003: YES), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z9005), and the power-off processing is executed (Z9006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (Z9007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of Z9003 (Z9003: NO), it is determined whether or not the RAMY 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAMY 303 (Z9004), and the RAMY 303 is destroyed. If not (Z9004: NO), the process returns to Z9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMY 303 is destroyed (Z9004: YES), the processing is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 683(B), command interrupt processing executed by the MPUY 301 of the character product control device 229 will be described. FIG. 683B is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 683(B)) is processing executed each time a command is received from the display control device 114 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMY 303 (Z9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the read command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 684, the command determination process (Z9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 683(A)) executed by the MPUY 301 of the role product control device 229, will be described. FIG. 684 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z9001). In this command determination process (Z9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z9201). End the determination process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z9201: YES), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z9202). are analyzed for their command types (Z9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a role-thing command (S9204), and if it is determined that there is a role-thing command (Z9204: YES), then It is determined whether or not the movable accessory to be operated by the received accessory command is in operation (Z9205). Here, in the process of Z9205, first, it is determined whether the command for the character item received this time is a command indicating an action scenario for which movable character item. If the command indicates , the change in the amount of current applied to the drive motor that moves the tilting device 310 is discriminated. If this amount of current is sufficient to drive the drive motor, it means that the drive motor is being driven, so it is determined that the tilting device 310 is in operation.

In this way, by configuring so as to directly grasp the driving status of the drive motor, even when using a configuration in which motion data is output from a plurality of control devices, the movable status of the movable accessory can be reliably determined. can grasp.

In the process of Z9205, if it is determined that the target movable accessory is in motion (Z9205: YES), the action based on the command for the accessory received this time cannot be executed. Without outputting data, the command for accessory received this time is discarded (Z9206), and the process proceeds to Z9201. On the other hand, if it is determined that the target movable role object is not in motion (Z9205: NO), motion data (ending scenario table 222IB2 (Z9207), and shifts to the processing of Z9201.

Also, in the process of Z9204, if it is determined that there is no role product command (Z9204: NO), other command process is executed (Z9207), and the process shifts to Z9201.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, the accessory control device 229 is provided for controlling the operation of the movable member, and the movable member (for example, tilting) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. It is configured to output a command for moving the device 310). Then, at the start timing of the production period, the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is a command (a role object command) is included.

With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 only outputs the display command corresponding to the predetermined presentation period to the display control device 114 at the start of the presentation period, thereby preparing the movable member at an appropriate timing. can be made to act. In addition, even if a plurality of execution timings of the compound effect can be set and the timing of executing the preparatory motion is changed in accordance with the set execution timing of the compound effect, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing of outputting the role item command to be included in the voice lamp control device 113, the need for providing a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods can be eliminated. Therefore, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, this control example is configured so that the accessory control device 229 can determine the operation status of the tilting device 310 . Specifically, whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven is determined by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, an operation instruction is received from the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the state in which the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not in motion, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, both the sound lamp control device 113 and the character object control device 229 provide motion data for moving the movable character object (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). (corresponding electrical signal) is output to the movable accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scenario is configured to be output to the role product control device 229, and only the role product control device 229 sends motion data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the motion scenario) to the movable role product. corresponding electrical signals). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent operation data from being output from a plurality of control devices to the movable accessory, thereby preventing the operation control of the movable accessory from becoming complicated.

In addition, as in the present control example, by outputting a pseudo sound generated during the preparatory drive in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, the player can determine whether the preparatory drive has been executed. can be made difficult to discriminate. As a result, in the case of executing the role product production that requires the preparation drive, it is possible to suppress the judgment of the production mode of the operation production to be executed for the player while the preparation drive is being executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the operation performance is lowered.

In this control example, by outputting the sound that is generated when the preparatory drive is executed, even if the preparatory drive is not actually being executed, the preparatory drive seems to be being executed. However, it is acceptable as long as the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is being executed. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, a decorative effect sound) that makes it difficult for the player to identify the sound generated when the preparatory drive is performed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is (has been) executed, and similar effects can be achieved.

In addition, as described above, this control example uses a configuration in which it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is being executed. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration that allows visual confirmation that the preparatory drive is being executed, in addition to the output of a pseudo sound, the preparatory drive is executed It is necessary to take measures so that it is not visually determined that the In this case, for example, when a preparatory period during which the preparatory drive can be executed is set, regardless of whether or not the preparatory drive is executed, a covered movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparatory drive so that the player cannot see it visually is provided. It is good to set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and aurally determining that the preparatory drive is to be executed.

As described above, in this control example, the preparation drive for the role production (driving the production) of the movable role (tilting device 310) executed as the composite production during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 completes the preparatory drive, that is, completes the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222IB2 (see FIG. 667(B)). Therefore, compared to the case where the preparatory drive is executed from the start of the ending period, it is possible to set a longer operation effect period during the ending period in which a predetermined period is set.

In addition, the display command output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparatory driving of the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transmits the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since it is configured to output a command for use, the sound lamp control device 113 side measures the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory, and when the execution timing comes, the preparatory drive is performed for the movable accessory. There is no need to output a role item command to execute . Therefore, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output the command for the character product to the character product control device 229 and at the same time output the command for sound to the audio output device 226 so as to correspond to the execution period of the preparation driving of the movable character object. Since a pseudo sound is output from the speaker 450, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the sound generated during the preparatory driving of the movable accessory.

In addition, in this control example, the composite effect executed during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but the timing at which the composite effect is executed is not limited to the jackpot game. It may be during special figure fluctuation. In this case, when using the technical idea of setting the character performance and the preparation operation differently as the variation performance to be executed during the special figure variation, for example, the reserved and stored winning prize information is determined in advance. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, for example, when it is determined to execute the composite performance in the special figure variation executed after 2 fluctuations, or the composite performance is not executed in the special figure fluctuation executed at the degree of 2 fluctuations. It is better to set the advance preparation operation so as to execute the preparation operation before the special figure fluctuation after the 2 fluctuation is executed in a part of the case where it is determined.

Further, when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (the frame button 22), a determination means is provided for determining whether or not to execute the preparatory action, and when the determination means determines to execute the preparatory action. You may configure so that the preparatory operation is executed at . In this case, it is preferable that the operation effect can be executed only when the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. As a result, it is possible to change the probability of execution of the composite effect depending on whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the player can be made to operate the operation means more positively. Furthermore, the operation timing to the operation means for which the determination means described above is used, for example, the operation means as a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation executed before the special figure fluctuation in which the operation production is executed As a result of operating the operating means, when the effect is executed that suggests that the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is out, the determining means decides to perform the preparation operation. Good to configure.

With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to operate the operating means for performing the preparatory action without any sense of incongruity. In addition, since it is possible to execute the preparation operation of the movable role while the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the front special figure variation is being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

<Twenty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 685 to 696. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example (and the 18th control example) described above, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure variation, when the power is cut off, it is played with the special figure variation. The playback position of the BGM is backed up, and when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is resumed, the playback of the BGM is started from the backed up playback position. As a result, the player can easily understand that the special figure variation that was being executed before the power was turned off was resumed after the power was turned on again. was

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure variation, and then the power is turned on again and the special figure variation is restarted, the initial stage of the display control device 114 After the setting is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed in the third symbol display device 81), the variation display effect corresponding to the special figure variation that has been interrupted due to the power cut is started in a pseudo manner. It was configured to This pseudo fluctuation display production is also executed when the restarted special figure fluctuation based on the re-supply of the power ends before the completion of the initial setting. That is, during a predetermined period from the end of the initial setting, without synchronizing with the variation start timing and stop timing of the actual special figure variation (variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37), the first A configuration is adopted in which a variable display performance that is performed in a pseudo manner in the 3-symbol display device 81 is performed. By configuring in this way, by confirming the pseudo variable display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variable display executed when the power supply is cut off can be displayed in the game. It is easy for people to understand. Further, in accordance with this, in the twenty-third control example, when the initialization is completed, the BGM reproduction start position at the time of power-on is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure variation BGM ends. bottom. By configuring in this way, at the timing of starting the pseudo-variation, it is possible to reproduce from the first part of the special-figure variation BGM. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be shown as if it were a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display executed before the occurrence of the power failure can be notified without making the player feel uncomfortable. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above, when the background change operation (pressing operation on the frame button 22A) is performed during execution of the special figure variation, the "silhouette display" is displayed at a predetermined rate. It was configured so that it could be selected. This silhouette display is basically configured so that it is easier to set when the variation is a big hit variation than when it is a misalignment variation. A novel game property is realized in which a player who wants to make a prediction can positively perform an operation to change the background mode during the execution of the special figure variation. In other words, since it is configured to allow the player to actively change the background mode, as a result of frequently changing the effect mode (result mode corresponding to the background mode) executed during the special figure fluctuation, It was possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example is common to the nineteenth control example up to the point that the silhouette display can be set by executing the background change operation. is different from the 19th control example. More specifically, in the twenty-third control example, silhouettes having a plurality of shapes (display modes) are provided. It is possible to suggest (notify) the type of advance notice effect (type of ready-to-win effect) to be executed in the second half (predetermined period) of the variable display. By configuring in this way, the type of the notice effect can be known in advance before the start of the notice effect, so that the player can positively execute the background change operation. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that the ready-to-win effect will develop. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game. In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the effect using the silhouette display is referred to as "silhouette announcement effect".

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in No. 19 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 19th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 685, in the present twenty-third control example, the transition of the BGM and the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off during the special figure fluctuation explain. Figure 685 (A) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation restarted after the power is turned on passes after the initial setting period of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 685 (A), in this 23rd control example, of the special figure fluctuation BGM composed of A melody, B melody, and C melody, the end timing of C melody and the initial stage of display control device 114 The playback start position of the special figure variation BGM is set so that the end timing of the setting matches. In Figure 685, by starting the special figure fluctuation BGM from the middle of the B melody, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end timing of the C melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM are matched. ing. By setting the playback start position of the BGM so that the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody of the BGM match, after that, just loop playback of the special figure fluctuation BGM until the end of the fluctuation as usual. Then, at the timing when the display control device 114 returns, the BGM can be started from the beginning of the special figure variation BGM. That is, the timing of starting the variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed and the timing of reproducing the BGM from the beginning of the special symbol variation BGM can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to reproduce the BGM in the special figure variation performance executed in the remaining variation time at the end of the initialization in a natural voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable sound mode. In addition, since it is not necessary to set playback from the beginning of the BGM at the end of initialization, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the initialization of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In addition, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 mainly changes according to the progress of the special figure variation. The display control device 114 performs control to transfer images used for various effects to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 while initial settings are being performed. Here, if the special figure fluctuation is not executed, only the transfer of the resident image should be executed, and the initial setting time is relatively short, but if the special figure fluctuation is executed, the end of the initial setting Sometimes it is necessary to prepare the image data used for the variable display effect. For this reason, the more image data used for the special figure variation, the longer the period required for initial setting. In this 23rd control example, the display mode of the special figure fluctuation is before reach development with relatively less image data to be used, after normal reach development with relatively more image data to be used, or super The time required for initial setting varies depending on whether the reach has been developed. Specifically, if it is before reach development, the initial setting will be completed in 1 second, but after developing normal reach, it will take 2 seconds to initialize, and if it is after super reach development, the initial setting will be completed. It takes 4 seconds to complete. For this reason, in the twenty-third control example, the state of development of the fluctuation display when the power is turned on is discriminated from the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation type, the period required for the initial setting is predicted, and the predicted initial setting period is used. It is configured to set the start timing of the special figure variation BGM. As a result, the end timing of the initialization and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be reliably matched.

Figure 685 (B) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode in the case where the special figure variation that was interrupted at the time of power failure and resumed after the power was turned on ends before the initial setting is completed. FIG. 685(B) illustrates the case where the special figure variation is executed under the condition that at least one ball is held when the power is cut off. As shown in FIG. 685 (B), when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is resumed, the end timing of the initial setting is predicted, and the BGM is finished in accordance with the predicted end timing. playback start position is set. That is, as in FIG. 685(A), by starting the reproduction from the middle of the B melody, the end timing of the initialization matches the end timing of the C melody.

Also, as shown in FIG. 685 (B), during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114, when the special figure fluctuation is completed, the special based on the held ball (held ball 1) that was held at the time of power off Figure variation (variation display of the first symbol on the first display device 37) is started. FIG. 685(B) illustrates a case where the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation display based on the held ball 1 (holding 1) is later than the end timing of the initialization of the display control device 114 . The variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the holding ball 1 at the time of power interruption continues across the end timing of the initialization of the display control device 114 as shown in FIG. 685 (B). do. On the other hand, as the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. Based on the completion of the initial setting (it is possible to display a normal image), first, a pseudo deviation display for one second is executed. This is a variation for simulating the result of the variable display (the result was shown in the first symbol display device 37 during the initial setting) interrupted when the power was cut off, on the third symbol display device 81. It is a display performance. By executing this pseudo-variation effect, the result of simple variation display by the power-on variation image on the first pattern display device 37 and the power-on variation image on the first pattern display device 37 that ended during the execution of the initial setting (comparison The result of the variable display in a form that is difficult to visually confirm can be notified to the player who has overlooked the result of the variable display in a form that is easier to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily understand the result of the special figure variation being executed when the power is turned off. In addition, if the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off was a big hit, the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation that was restarted after the power was turned on has passed (that is, during the execution of the initial settings ) Since the jackpot will start (there is no room to execute the pseudo-fluctuation), even if the pseudo-fluctuation is not executed, it is unlikely that the player will have suspicion that the lottery results have been discarded due to the power failure. do not have.

As shown in FIG. 685(B), after one second of the pseudo variable display is completed, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the remaining variable time. By configuring in this way, both the result of the variable display that ended during the execution of the initial setting in the display control device 114 and the result of the variable display that was started during the execution of the initial setting can be sent to the player. can be easily understood.

In addition, if the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that was started during the execution of the initial settings is less than 1 second (the fluctuation time has passed while the pseudo fluctuation is being executed), the fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off After the 1-second pseudo-variation corresponding to the display is performed, the 1-second pseudo-variation corresponding to Power Down Hold 1 is performed. In addition, when the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display started during execution of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the pseudo fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation display that was being executed at the time of power failure is executed over the remaining fluctuation time. Later, a 1 second pseudo-variation corresponding to hold 1 on power down is performed. By configuring in this way, the pseudo fluctuation can be executed more preferably.

<Electrical configuration in the 23rd control example>
Next, details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 686(A). FIG. 686(A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-third control example. As shown in FIG. 686A, the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-third control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. The difference is that a silhouette advance notice selection table 222JA is provided instead. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 222 in the 19th control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The silhouette announcement selection table 222JA is a data table that is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the silhouette announcement effect in the twenty-third control example. Here, as described above, the silhouette forewarning effect in the twenty-third control example is performed in the second half of the variable display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed in accordance with the background change operation during execution of the variable display effect. This is an effect that suggests (informs) the type of advance notice effect (type of ready-to-win effect) to be executed in (predetermined period). More specifically, as aspects (shapes) of silhouettes that can be displayed in the silhouette forewarning effect in the twenty-third control example, a bubble-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a bubble and a fish-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a fish (Fig. 641 (A )), a wooden silhouette imitating the shape of a tree (see FIG. 641(B)), and a volcano silhouette imitating the shape of a volcano. Each of these silhouettes suggests the type of advance notice effect (prediction type) to be executed in the second half of the variable display. That is, the bubble-shaped silhouette suggests that a bubble forewarning effect in which a large number of bubbles are generated in the display screen when developing into super reach, and the fish-shaped silhouette develops into super reach. This suggests that a fish school forewarning effect will be executed in which a school of fish crosses the display screen when the tree moves, and the tree shape silhouette is a wind that displays a display mode in which trees sway due to strong winds when developing into super reach. This suggests that a forewarning effect will be executed, and the volcano-shaped silhouette suggests that an eruption forewarning effect will be executed in which the display mode of the mountain erupting is displayed when developing into Super Reach. be.

In addition, the bubble preview effect and the fish school preview effect are exclusive preview effects when the background mode is set to sea mode, and the wind preview effect and eruption preview effect are exclusive to when the background mode is set to mountain mode. It is a preview performance of. The fish school notice effect is a notice effect that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the bubble notice effect (the rate of selection in the case of a change in deviation is low), and the eruption notice effect is a notice effect that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the wind notice effect. is. Then, the bubble warning effect and the wind warning are configured to have the same level of expectation for the big hit when they are executed, and the fish school warning effect and the eruption warning effect are also configured to have the same level of expectation for the big win. ing. For this reason, if the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect with the bubble preview effect set to change to the mountain background, it will switch to the variable display effect with the wind preview effect, and the wind preview effect will be set. When the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect to change to the sea background, the variable display effect is switched to the bubble preview effect. Also, if you perform a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect with the fish school preview effect set and change to the mountain background, it will switch to the variable display effect with the eruption preview effect, and the change with the eruption preview effect set. When the background change operation is performed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the display effect to change to the sea background, the effect is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the fish school advance notice effect. Details of the silhouette announcement selection table 222JA for selecting the effect mode of the silhouette announcement effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 687 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the silhouette announcement selection table 222JA in the twenty-third control example. As shown in FIG. 687, the silhouette announcement selection table 222JA in the twenty-third control example defines the type of silhouette announcement effect to be selected in association with each value range of the effect counter 223H. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 687, for the variable display effect in which the advance notice type that does not involve the development of super reach is set, regardless of the background mode after being changed by the background change operation, A silhouette notice "none" is defined in association with the entire possible range of the effect counter 223H. Therefore, when the player performs the background change operation while the variable display effect of the effect mode not accompanied by development to super reach is being executed, the silhouette announcement effect is not executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 687, the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode, and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the bubble warning super reach. The value of 223H in the range of "0 to 149" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and the range of "150 to 198" is defined in correspondence with the silhouette announcement effect of "bubble silhouette". there is Therefore, if the background is changed to the sea mode and the variable display is accompanied by foam warning super reach, a silhouette preview effect in which a bubble silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199) is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning effect, the player can understand that the game will develop into a super reach with bubble foretelling, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who desires to check the silhouette announcement effect positively change the background mode.

As shown in FIG. 687, when the background mode changed by the background change operation is the sea mode and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the fish school advance notice super reach, the production counter 223H The value range of "0 to 179" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and the value range of "180 to 198" is defined in association with the silhouette announcement effect of "fish silhouette". Therefore, if the background is changed to the sea mode and the variable display is accompanied by a school of fish notice super reach, a silhouette notice effect in which a fish silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 9.5% (19/199). is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning performance, the player can be made to understand that it will develop into a super reach with a fish school forewarning, so that the player's expectation for a big win can be improved. In addition, by configuring the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect to be lower than the super reach effect with the fish school notice effect, which is expected to be a big hit, is lower than the super reach effect with the bubble notice effect, the silhouette notice effect is not generated, it can be expected that the fish school forewarning effect will be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not the silhouette effect is executed and the type of the silhouette, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 687, the background mode after the background change operation is the mountain mode, and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the wind warning super reach. A value range of "0 to 99" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and a value range of "100 to 198" is defined in association with a "wooden silhouette" silhouette announcement effect. Therefore, if the background is changed to the mountain mode and the variable display is accompanied by wind warning super reach, the wooden pattern silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 50.2% (100/199). is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning effect, the player can understand that the game will develop into a super reach with wind forewarning, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect for the wind notice super reach is higher than the occurrence ratio of the silhouette notice effect for the foam notice super reach in the sea mode, so you can see more silhouette notice effects. A player who desires to change the background to the mountain mode can be actively made to perform the operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

As shown in FIG. 687, when the background mode changed by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the variable display being executed is the variable display accompanied by the eruption warning super reach, the production counter 223H A value range of "0 to 149" is defined in association with "no" silhouette announcement, and a value range of "150 to 198" is defined in association with a "volcano silhouette" silhouette announcement effect. Therefore, if the background is changed to mountain mode and the variable display is accompanied by an eruption warning super reach, the volcano silhouette will be displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). is executed. By executing the silhouette forewarning performance, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach with an eruption forewarning, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is configured so that the rate of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect for the eruption notice super reach is higher than the occurrence ratio of the silhouette notice effect for the fish school notice super reach in the sea mode, you can see more silhouette notice effects. A player who desires to change the background to the mountain mode can be actively made to perform the operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

As described above, in the twenty-third control example, when the player performs the background change operation during the execution of the variable display effect in which a specific type of advance notice effect is executed, the predetermined amount is determined for each type of notice effect. A silhouette foretelling effect that suggests execution of the foretelling effect is executed at a ratio of By configuring in this way, it is possible to know whether or not the notice effect is executed and the type of the notice effect before the start of the notice effect. background change operation. In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when the silhouette forewarning effect occurs, it is determined that the game will develop to super ready-to-win with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win. You can improve your expectations. In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette foretelling effect is varied only according to the type of the foretelling effect. In other words, regardless of whether the change is a big win or a loss, the silhouette announcement effect is selected. By configuring in this way, even if the silhouette announcement effect is not executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's sense of expectation for the big win to be spoiled. Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. there is As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player selects the execution ratio of the silhouette foretelling effect that the player likes and performs the game. In addition, since it is configured to inform in advance the type of super reach announcement effect to be executed thereafter by the silhouette announcement effect, after knowing the type of announcement effect by the silhouette announcement effect, the background mode is maintained to silhouette. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), it corresponds to the changed background equivalent to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is made different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect may be made common. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the prescribed contents of the silhouette announcement selection table 222JA, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the 23rd control example, the configuration is such that whether or not to execute the silhouette announcement effect and the silhouette type are selected only depending on whether or not the specific type of announcement effect is to be executed, but the invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is varied depending on whether the game is a big win or not. With this configuration, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the silhouette announcement effect, so that the player can be made to more positively perform the background change operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 686(B), the details of the RAM 223 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example will be described. FIG. 686B is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 686(B), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-third control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. 639(B)). The only difference is that a counter 223JB and a silhouette lottery completion flag 223JC are added.

The pseudo-variation counter 223JA counts the number of variable displays of the third symbol (except for the power-on variable image) that have not been executed in the third symbol display device 81 among the variable displays executed after the power is turned on again. This is a counter for counting (the number of pseudo fluctuation executions). This pseudo-fluctuation counter 223JA is incremented by 1 (see Z2277 in FIG. 688) each time a stop command is received during execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 (when fluctuation stop timing occurs), and the pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed. The value is decremented by 1 each time it is executed (see Z2316 in FIG. 691 and Z2560 in FIG. 693). When the value of the pseudo-fluctuation counter 223J is 1 or more, a new pseudo-fluctuation is executed each time the fluctuation or pseudo-fluctuation is completed.

The pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation production. This pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is set with a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation at the start of the pseudo fluctuation (Z2315, Z2321 in FIG. 691, Z2257, Z2259 in FIG. 693). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JB becomes 0 and the value of the above-described pseudo-variation counter 223JA is 1 or more, execution of the pseudo-variation is set. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223JB becomes 0 during the execution of the variation display, the normal variation display is performed for the remaining variation time, and the pseudo-variation time counter is displayed in the variation stop state (suspended state). When the value of 223JB becomes 0, the change stops as it is.

The silhouette lottery completion flag 223JC is a flag for indicating whether or not the lottery using the silhouette advance notice selection table 222JA has been executed in one variation display. If the silhouette lottery completion flag 223JC is on, it means that the lottery using the silhouette advance notice selection table 222JA has already been executed in the variable display during execution, and if it is off, it means that it has not been executed. means. The silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON at the timing when the background change operation is performed for the first time during execution of the variable display (see Z2986 in FIG. 694). Also, it is set to OFF when fluctuation stops (see Z2280 in FIG. 688).

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 688 to 696, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 688, the fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) in the twenty-third control example will be described. This fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) is a process that is executed instead of the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 645) in the nineteenth control example. This is the processing for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 .

Processing from Z2265 to Z2269 in the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 688) in the twenty-third control example is the same as processing from Z2265 to Z2269 in the fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 645) in the nineteenth control example. process is executed. Also, in the fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 688) in the twenty-third control example, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265), and the process proceeds to Z2266. When the process of Z2269 is completed, the next background change flag 223FA is set to OFF (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2273.

In the process of Z2273, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and then it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223FF is ON (Z2275). In the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the return fluctuation flag 223FF is off (Z2275: NO), the process proceeds to Z2280. On the other hand, in the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the returning fluctuation flag 223FF is ON (Z2275: YES), it is determined whether or not a big hit stop symbol is set (Z2276). In the process of Z2276, if it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is set (Z2276: YES), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is cleared to 0 (Z2278), and the return fluctuation flag 223FF is set to off ( Z2279), and the process shifts to Z2280.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2276, if it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is not set (Z2276: NO), it is determined that the first off symbol has been stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, 1 is added to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA (Z2277), and the process proceeds to Z2280. In the processing of Z2280, the silhouette lottery flag 223JC is set to OFF (Z2280), and this processing ends.

By executing this fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 688), the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA can be incremented by 1 each time the first symbol that is out is stopped and displayed during the initialization of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to accurately execute the pseudo-variation production for the number of times of deviation fluctuations executed during the initial setting after the initial setting is completed. Therefore, after the completion of the initial setting, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable display of the third symbol for the same number of times as the variable display that was being executed when the power was turned off and the variable display based on the ball held when the power was turned off. can be executed in As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having suspicion that the lottery results have been discarded due to power failure, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 689, the fluctuation recovery process 13 (Z2262) in the twenty-third control example will be described. This fluctuation recovery process 13 (Z2262) is a process executed instead of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 622) in the nineteenth control example (and eighteenth control example). ), this is a process for executing control according to the return fluctuation command received from main controller 110, similar to the fluctuation return process (see FIG. 622).

In each of the processes Z2281 to Z2284 of the fluctuation recovery process 13 (see FIG. 689) in the twenty-third control example, Z2281 to Z2281 to Z2284 of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 622) in the nineteenth control example (and eighteenth control example) The same processing as each processing of Z2284 is executed. In addition, in the fluctuation recovery process 13 (see FIG. 689) in the twenty-third control example, when the process of Z2284 is finished, next, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation recovery command and the fluctuation type (fluctuation time) By, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time corresponds to normal reach production (Z2331), and if it is determined that it is the remaining variation time corresponding to normal reach production (Z2231: YES), special figure fluctuation BGM is set to be reproduced from a reproduction position corresponding to two seconds before the end of the music (Z2332), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2331, if it is determined that the remaining variation time does not correspond to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2331: NO), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time corresponds to the super reach effect. If it is determined (Z2333) and it is determined that it is in the super reach production (Z2333: YES), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 4 seconds before the end of the song ( Z2334), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2333, if it is determined that the super reach effect is not being executed (Z2333: NO), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is played from the playback position corresponding to one second before the end of the song is set (Z2335), and this processing ends.

By executing this fluctuation recovery process 13 (see FIG. 689), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation can be ended in accordance with the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 . That is, the display mode of the special figure fluctuation is before reach development with relatively less image data to be used, after normal reach development with relatively more image data to be used, or after super reach development with the most image data to be used By differentiating the start timing of the special figure variation BGM depending on whether, the end timing of the initialization and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be reliably matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 690, display startup processing 13 (Z2247) in the twenty-third control example will be described. This display start-up process 13 (Z2247) is a process executed instead of the display start-up process (see FIG. 623) in the nineteenth control example (and eighteenth control example). ), similar to the display startup process (see FIG. 623), when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, the process for setting the variable display of the third symbol according to the value of the remaining variable time counter. .

In the processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 of the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 690) in the twenty-third control example, the display rise processing in the nineteenth control example (and the eighteenth control example) (see FIG. 623) ), the same processes as Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 are executed. In addition, in the display start-up process 13 (see FIG. 690) in the twenty-third control example, if it is determined in the process of S2291 that the return fluctuation flag 223FF is ON (Z2291: YES), then the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Z2301), and if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is greater than 0 (Z2301: YES), Since it means that the special figure fluctuation has ended one or more times during the initial setting, the pseudo fluctuation start process for starting the pseudo fluctuation production showing the result of the special figure fluctuation finished during the initial setting Execute (Z2302) and terminate this process. The details of this pseudo fluctuation start processing (Z2302) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2301 that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2301: NO), the process proceeds to Z2292.

Next, with reference to FIG. 691, details of the above-described pseudo fluctuation start processing (Z2302) will be described. This pseudo-variation start process (Z2302) is, as described above, a process for starting the pseudo-variation production showing the result of the special figure variation that has ended during the initial setting. As shown in FIG. 691, when the pseudo fluctuation start process (Z2302) is executed, first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is read (Z2311), and the residual value specified from the read value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 0 (Z2312).

If it is determined in the process of Z2312 that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2312: NO), then it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313). If it is determined that the remaining variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the process of Z2313 (Z2313: YES), and if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 0 in the process of Z2312 (Z2312: YES), 1 The start of the pseudo-fluctuation production for seconds is set (Z2314), and the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the pseudo-fluctuation time counter 223JB (Z2315). Next, the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA is updated by subtracting 1 from it (Z2316), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2313, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2313: NO), then it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317). If it is determined that the time is 1 second or less (Z2317: NO), it means that the remaining fluctuation time is not enough to perform pseudo fluctuation, so the power recovery screen (power-on image) continues to be displayed. is set (Z2318), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is updated by adding 1 (Z2319), and the process proceeds to Z2321. On the other hand, in the process of Z2317, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317: YES), if the pseudo fluctuation of 1 second is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the pseudo fluctuation is 1 second or less, and there is not enough time left to perform the special figure fluctuation, so the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2320), and the process moves to Z2321. In the process of Z2321 executed after the process of Z2319 or Z2320, a counter value corresponding to the residual fluctuation time is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB (Z2321), and this process is finished.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation start process (see Figure 691), the result of the special figure fluctuation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the form of pseudo fluctuation production by the third symbol after the end of the initial setting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 692, the details of the variable display setting process 13 (Z2185) in the twenty-third control example will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (Z2185) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) in the nineteenth control example (and eighteenth control example). 624) in (18 Control Example), this is a process for executing control according to the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. FIG.

In each of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of the fluctuation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 692) in the twenty-third control example, the fluctuation in the nineteenth control example (and eighteenth control example) The same processes as Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of display setting process 8 (see FIG. 624) are executed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 692) in the twenty-third control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, next, a detailed variable display mode corresponding to the variable pattern command is determined, and the determined variable display mode is determined. A variation pattern command setting process for setting a display variation pattern command corresponding to the mode is executed (Z2521), and the process proceeds to Z2535. Details of this variation pattern command setting process (Z2521) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 693 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command setting processing (Z2521). In this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521), first, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation type extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is set in the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG (Z2551), and then the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is set. It is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552), and if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2552: YES), the variation according to the extracted variation pattern A display mode is selected (Z2553), a display variation pattern command indicating the selected variation display mode is set (Z2554), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2552, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552: YES), then the residual fluctuation time indicated by the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223FG is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555), and if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds (Z2555: NO), if you set a pseudo-variation effect for 1 second, after the end of the pseudo-variation Since the remaining variable time is not long enough to perform the variable display effect, a variable pattern command for display indicating the start of the pseudo-variable effect of the variable time over the remaining variable time is set (Z2556). Next, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB (Z2557), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2555, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555: YES), even if the pseudo-fluctuation effect for 1 second is executed, sufficient (at least 1 (longer than a second) can be secured as the fluctuation time, a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of pseudo fluctuation for one second is set (Z2558). Next, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB (Z2559), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is updated by subtracting 1 (Z2560), and this processing ends.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 693), the fluctuation display mode can be preferably set in consideration of the remaining number of pseudo fluctuations at the start of fluctuation.

Next, background change processing 13 (see FIG. 694) in the twenty-third control example will be described with reference to FIG. This background change process 13 (Z2541) is a process executed in place of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 644) in the nineteenth control example, and is similar to the background change process 9 (see FIG. 644) in the nineteenth control example. In addition, when a background change operation is performed, the background change is set according to the timing of the operation.

In the background change process 13 (see FIG. 694) in the twenty-third control example, the processes Z2963 to Z2967 are the same as the processes Z2963 to Z2967 in the background change process 9 (see FIG. 644) in the nineteenth control example. process is executed. In the background change process 13 (see FIG. 694) in the twenty-third control example, when the process of Z2967 or the process of Z2968 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the silhouette lottery done flag 223JC is ON (Z2981). , If it is determined that the silhouette lottery completion flag 223JC is off (Z2981: NO), it means that the lottery for the silhouette preview effect has not been executed in the variable display being executed this time. and processing for setting (each processing of Z2982 to Z2986). More specifically, the value of the production counter 223H is acquired (Z2982), and the silhouette announcement form corresponding to the acquired value of the production counter 223H is selected from the silhouette announcement selection table 222JA (Z2983).

When the processing of Z2983 is completed, the silhouette lottery completed flag 223JC is then set to ON (Z2984), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the silhouette previous notice effect by the processing of Z2983 indicates the execution of the silhouette previous notice effect. (Z2985). In the process of Z2985, when it is determined that the lottery result indicates execution of the silhouette announcement (Z2986: YES), a silhouette announcement command for display indicating execution of the selected silhouette announcement effect is set (Z2986), and this process is performed. exit. On the other hand, in the process of Z2985, when it is determined that the result of the lottery indicates "no" for the silhouette announcement effect (Z2985: NO), the process of Z2986 is skipped and the present process ends.

By executing this background change processing 13 (see FIG. 694), it is possible to execute a lottery for the silhouette announcement effect based on the first background change operation during execution of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who confirms the silhouette announcement effect feel a sense of anticipation for the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 695, the details of the counter update process 13 (Z2177) in the twenty-third control example will be described. This counter update process 13 (Z2177) is a process executed instead of the counter update process (see FIG. 633) in the 19th control example (and 18th control example). ), similar to the counter update process (see FIG. 633), this process is for updating various counters.

Of the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 695) in the twenty-third control example, Z2861 to Z2866 of the counter update process (see FIG. 633) in the nineteenth control example (and the eighteenth control example) correspond to Z2861 to Z2866. The same processing as each processing of Z2866 is executed. In addition, in the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 695) in the twenty-third control example, after the process of Z2864 or Z2865 is finished, the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223JB is a value greater than 0 (1 or more). (Z2871), and if the value of the pseudo variable time counter 223JB is 0 (Z2871: NO), the process proceeds to Z2866.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2871, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo variable time counter 223JB is greater than 0 (1 or more) (Z2871: YES), the value of the pseudo variable time counter 223JB is subtracted by 1 (Z2872 ), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JB after the subtraction has become 0 (Z2873). In the processing of Z2873, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z2873: YES), it is determined whether pseudo fluctuation is executed or normal fluctuation display is executed according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA. is executed (Z2874), and the process proceeds to Z2875. The details of this pseudo change setting process (Z2873) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2873 that the value of the pseudo variable time counter 223JB after subtraction is not 0 (Z2873: NO), the process of Z2874 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2875.

Next, with reference to FIG. 696, details of the above-described pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874) will be described. This pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) is, as described above, a process for determining whether to execute pseudo-variation or normal variation display according to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223JA. In this pseudo fluctuation setting process (Z2874), first, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223FG is read (Z2881), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2882).

In the process of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the read pseudo-fluctuation counter 223JA is 0 (Z2882: YES), then whether or not the residual fluctuation time indicated by the counter value read out in the process of Z2881 is 0. is discriminated (Z2883). In the process of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2883: NO), set the execution of the variation display over the remaining variation time (Z2884), set the start of the special figure variation BGM ( Z2885), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0, it means that the actual game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuation stop state. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA is not 0 (is 1 or more) (Z2882: NO), then whether the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2886), and if it is determined that the remaining variation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2886: NO), it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time is 0 (Z2887). In the processing of Z2887, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2887: NO), the start of the pseudo variation over the remaining variation time is set (Z2888), and the remaining variation time is set for the pseudo variation time counter 223JB. is set (Z2889), and the process proceeds to Z2893.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2886 (Z2886: YES), and if it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2887 (Z2887: YES) , sets the start of the pseudo-variation production for 1 second (Z2890), and sets the counter value corresponding to 1 second with respect to the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223JB (Z2891). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA (Z2892), and the process proceeds to Z2893. In the process of Z2893, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2893), and this process ends.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 696), when the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation has passed, the pseudo fluctuation is set again according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223JA, or the normal fluctuation display is performed. You can decide exactly what to do.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example, the power is cut off during execution of the special figure variation, and then the power is turned on again to perform the special figure variation (the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37). When the variable display) is resumed, after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed in the third symbol display device 81), it is resumed when the power is turned on. It is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo variation display effect showing the result of the special figure variation. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation effect asynchronous with the variation period of the first symbol variation display restarted based on power-on. By configuring in this way, by confirming the pseudo variable display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variable display executed when the power supply is cut off can be displayed in the game. It is easy for people to understand. Further, in accordance with this, in the twenty-third control example, when the initialization is completed, the BGM reproduction start position at the time of power-on is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure variation BGM ends. bottom. By configuring in this way, at the timing of starting the pseudo-variation, it is possible to reproduce from the first part of the special-figure variation BGM. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be shown as if it were a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display executed before the occurrence of the power failure can be notified without making the player feel uncomfortable. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special figure variation interrupted by the power cutoff is executed without being discarded after the power is turned on again, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example, when the background change operation is executed during the execution of the variable display, if a specific condition is established, a predetermined silhouette announcement effect that can suggest the establishment of the specific condition is given. It was configured to be executable at a ratio of More specifically, whether or not to execute a silhouette announcement effect that suggests (informs) the type of announcement effect (type of ready-to-win effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display by the display mode of the silhouette display is changed by the background change. A lottery is performed based on the execution of the operation. By configuring in this way, when the silhouette announcement effect is executed, the type of the announcement effect can be known in advance before the start of the announcement effect, so that the player can be positively informed. A background change operation can be performed. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that the ready-to-win effect will develop. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game. In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette foretelling effect is varied only according to the type of the foretelling effect. In other words, regardless of whether the change is a big win or a loss, the silhouette announcement effect is selected. By configuring in this way, even if the silhouette announcement effect is not executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's sense of expectation for the big win to be spoiled. Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. there is As a result, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player selects the execution ratio of the silhouette foretelling effect that the player likes and performs the game. In addition, since it is configured to inform in advance the type of super reach announcement effect to be executed thereafter by the silhouette announcement effect, after knowing the type of announcement effect by the silhouette announcement effect, the background mode is maintained to silhouette. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), it corresponds to the changed background equivalent to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twenty-third control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is made different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect may be made common. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the defined contents of the silhouette announcement selection table 222JA, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the 23rd control example, the configuration is such that whether or not to execute the silhouette announcement effect and the silhouette type are selected only depending on whether or not the specific type of announcement effect is to be executed, but the invention is not limited to this. . For example, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of the silhouette announcement effect is varied depending on whether the game is a big win or not. With this configuration, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the silhouette announcement effect, so that the player can be made to more positively perform the background change operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

In this 23rd control example, when the power is cut off during execution of the special figure fluctuation and the power is turned on again, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end of the special figure fluctuation BGM are reproduced. In order to match the timing, the end timing of the initialization is determined when the power is turned on, and the reproduction start position of the special figure fluctuation BGM is adjusted (varied) according to the determination result. It is not something that can be done. For example, the reproduction start position may be adjusted so that the special figure variation BGM ends in accordance with the end timing of the special figure variation restarted when the power is turned on.

In this 23rd control example, the number of times of the special figure variation that has been completed during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 is counted, and after the initial setting is completed, the pseudo variation display effect for the count number is Although the 3-symbol display device 81 is configured to execute sequentially, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the initial setting is completed, the result of the special figure fluctuation for the count number may be collectively notified by one pseudo fluctuation display effect. More specifically, for example, the display screen in the third symbol display device 81 is divided by at least the count number, and in each of the divided display areas, the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is displayed. It may be configured to execute the pseudo-variation display shown. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to shorten the performance time of the pseudo-variation performance for notifying the result of the special figure variation that has been completed during the execution of the initial setting, the variation of the normal third symbol can be made earlier. The display can be restored to an executable state.

In the twenty-third control example, the silhouette forewarning effect is developed into a specific type of reach effect (bubble forewarning super reach, fish school forewarning super reach, wind forewarning super reach, eruption forewarning super reach) in the variable display being executed. Although it is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying in advance, the object to be notified by the silhouette foretelling effect is not limited to this. For example, not only in the variable display being executed, but also in the case where there is a pending ball that develops into a targeted ready-to-win effect in the variable display being held, the silhouette advance notice effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, not only the variable display being executed at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed, but also the reserved ball at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed can be given a sense of expectation, so the game can be played. It is possible to maintain the expectation of the player for the big win for a longer period of time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this 23rd control example, when the special figure fluctuation is restarted based on power-on, the period required for the initial setting of the display control device 114 is predicted, and the special figure fluctuation BGM is completed in the predicted period. , It was configured to set the start position of the special figure variation BGM when the power was turned on, but in addition to this, if the actual end timing of the initial settings deviated from the prediction result, the initial screen (display of the image at power on) Period) may be extended to match the end timing of the special figure variation BGM. By configuring in this way, the end timing of the special figure variation BGM and the end timing of the initial screen can be matched more reliably.

<24th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 697 to 706. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example described above, the display control device 114 controls the controller 229 for controlling the movement of the movable member. It was configured to output instructions (commands). Then, at the start timing of the production period, the display command output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 is a command (a role object command) is included, and the display control device 114 is configured to determine whether or not it is time to execute the preparatory operation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example, the timing of outputting a command for executing a preparatory operation is defined in advance in the display data table. , the command output is output by reading the information indicating the output of the command. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a timer means or the like for measuring the timing of outputting the accessory command, so the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified.

Further, in the twenty-fourth control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, a mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is configured to be executable. This reach line suggesting effect is an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the reach line will occur and the line of the reach line before the ready reach effect occurs. The occurrence of the ready-to-win performance increases the expectation of the big win, and the more the ready-to-win line increases, the higher the expectation of the big win. can be done.

First, with reference to FIGS. 697 and 698, the content of the reach line suggesting effect will be described. This reach line suggestion effect is a effect that can be executed during the high speed fluctuation period. As shown in FIG. 697(A), when the reach line suggestion effect is executed, first, a character imitating a dinosaur is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 behind the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation. 810 is displayed, and on the right side of the character 810, a balloon image 810A imitating a balloon is displayed. In the balloon image 810A, a text saying "The more same numbers are arranged, the higher the expectations!" is displayed. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the advance notice effect in which the numbers are arranged is executed and that the degree of expectation changes depending on how the numbers are arranged. Note that, in this reach line suggestion effect, a effect is executed in which nine numbers are divided into three times and displayed inside the balloon image 810A. Out of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810A, two numbers are aligned vertically to create a level of expectation higher than that of the double-line ready-to-reach effect (a more highly anticipated effect than the single-line ready-to-win effect). It is determined that it will develop into a production of or will be a big hit. In addition, by vertically aligning three of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810A, a triple-line ready-to-reach effect (a more anticipated effect than the double-line ready-to-win effect) develops. or it will be a big hit. Furthermore, when three numbers are aligned horizontally, it is determined that a big win will occur. In this way, the reach line suggestive effect can suggest the reach line, etc. of the reach line suggestive effect that develops thereafter, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the content of the reach line suggestive effect. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that, in the following drawings, description of an image (leftward dashed arrow) showing the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is omitted in order to make the content of the effect easier to understand.

FIG. 697(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first three numbers out of the nine numbers are displayed in the reach line suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 697(B), the first three numbers are displayed side by side above balloon image 810A. FIG. 697B illustrates a state in which an image imitating the number "7", an image imitating the number "6", and an image imitating the number "5" are displayed.

FIG. 698(A) is a diagram showing a state in which all nine numbers are displayed and three identical numbers are aligned vertically. As shown in FIG. 698(A), when the same numbers are arranged, an effect image 810B surrounding the same numbers is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the numbers are aligned and the number of aligned numbers. Incidentally, when two or more numbers are collected in the reach line suggesting effect, a transition is made to a dedicated background mode according to the number of collected numbers. Specifically, by aligning two identical numbers vertically, there is a "super sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestive effect is sea mode), which corresponds to the effect of expectations higher than the reach effect of the double line. ), or shifts to the "super mountain mode" (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the mountain mode). In addition, by aligning three identical numbers vertically or horizontally, there is a "premium sea mode" that corresponds to the production of expectations higher than the reach production of the triple line (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion production is the sea mode). case) or “premium mountain mode” (when the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestive effect is mountain mode). In addition, in "Super Sea Mode" and "Super Mountain Mode", there is a low probability that it will develop into a single line reach effect that is less expected than a double line reach effect, but this background mode and the reach that occurs A pattern inconsistent with the type of is selected only in the case of a big win. Similarly, even if it does not develop to triple reach (develops to single reach or double reach) even if it shifts to "premium sea mode" or "premium mountain mode", the jackpot is confirmed. In this way, the single reach production and double reach production, which usually have a relatively low jackpot expectation, will be confirmed when the jackpot occurs under specific conditions, so the reach after the background mode is promoted in the reach line suggestion production A game can be played by paying attention to the number of lines. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 698(B) shows a display mode in the case of shifting to the premium sea mode when three numbers are aligned vertically in the reach line suggestive effect executed in the sea mode. In this premium sea mode, as shown in FIG. 698(B), characters "premium sea mode" are displayed in the mode display area DM1A. Also, as shown in FIG. 698(B), when shifting to the "premium sea mode", three effective lines, the vertical effective line L1 in the center of the screen, the upward-sloping effective line L2, and the downward-sloping effective line L3, It develops into a triple reach production that takes reach. As described above, the triple reach production is a production that has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the single reach production and the double reach production (the rate of selection in the case of failure is low), so the player's expectation for the big hit can be improved. Thus, the reach line suggesting effect is not only a effect suggesting the number of reach lines, but also a effect suggesting promotion of the rear mode (mode promotion effect).

<Electrical configuration in the 24th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 699, details of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 699 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 699, the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-fourth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-second control example (see FIG. 665) only in that a mode promotion effect selection table 222KA is added. do. This mode promotion effect selection table 222KA is a data table referred to for selecting the effect mode (the number of identical numbers aligned in the balloon image 810A) of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestive effect). Details of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA will be described with reference to FIGS. 700 and 701. FIG.

FIG. 700(A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 700(A), the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA includes a win table 222KA1 for selecting whether or not to execute the mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect) and the effect mode in the variation display of the big win. , and at least a failure table 222KA2 for selecting whether or not a mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect) can be executed in the change display of failure, and a performance mode.

First, with reference to FIG. 700(B), the defined contents of the win table 222KA1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 700(B), the winning table 222KA1 stores the value range of the effect counter 223H and the effect mode (the number of numbers aligned in the balloon image 810A) for each reach line number when the reach effect develops. mode) is defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the hit variation that single-line reach occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 149". are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "0 to 149" in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "none" is 150, so in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win production is set. , the rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 75.4% (150/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the winning variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "150 to 192", and the effect mode corresponds to "discrete eye". It is stipulated with In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "150 to 192", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is displayed vertically. A mode (separate stitches) that are not even arranged horizontally is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "random number" is 43, so a big win with a single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the ratio of execution of randomized mode promotion effects is about 21.6% (43/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the winning variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "193, 194", and the effect mode is "Vertical 2 pieces". are defined in association with each other. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "193, 194", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically doubled. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertically double" is 2, so the single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the jackpot variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is about 1% (2/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the winning variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H "195" is defined in association with the effect mode of "vertical 3 pieces". ing. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "195", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same three numbers are aligned vertically. Aspects are displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical three-piece arrangement" is 1, so the single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the big hit variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with three vertically aligned is about 0.5% (1/199).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H "196 to 198" is associated with "horizontal three pieces" as the effect mode. stipulated. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "196 to 198", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is displayed horizontally by 3. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3 pieces" is 4, so the single-line ready-to-win production is set. In the big hit variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with the horizontal 3 pieces is about 2% (4/199).

Thus, in the ready-to-win effect in which single-line ready-to-win occurs, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 3/4 (the mode promotion effect is difficult to execute). Therefore, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the player can expect the occurrence of the double line or triple line ready-to-win effect with high expectation for big win.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 99" and the mode promotion effect "none" is associated. stipulated. In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "0 to 99" in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "none" is 100, so in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win production is set. , the rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 50.2% (100/199).

In addition, in the hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "100 to 119" in association with the effect mode of "discrete eyes". In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "100 to 119" in the big hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (reach-line suggesting effect) is executed, and the odds are displayed. be. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "various eyes" is 20, so a big win with a double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which randomized mode promotion effects are executed is about 10% (20/199).

In addition, in the hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "120 to 189" is defined in association with the effect mode of "vertically double". In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "120 to 189", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically doubled. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 70, so a big hit with double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect with the vertical doubles is executed is about 35.2% (70/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is "190", and the effect mode "vertical 3" is defined in correspondence. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "190", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same three numbers are aligned vertically. Aspects are displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 1, so a big hit with double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect with three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "191 to 198" is defined in association with "horizontal three" as the effect mode. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "191 to 198", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is displayed horizontally by 3. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 8, so the double line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the horizontal three-piece mode promotion effect is executed is about 4% (8/199).

In this way, in the hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, the execution ratio of the mode promotion effect is higher (approximately 25%→approximately 50%) than in the hit variation in which the single-line ready-to-win effect occurs. Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the vertical two effect mode is selected at a high rate, but the split mode is also selected at about 10%. Therefore, even when a random number is displayed, the player can expect an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the ready-to-win effect of the double line.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 700(B), in the hit variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is in the range of "0 to 49" and the mode promotion effect "no" is associated. stipulated. In other words, in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "none" is 50, so in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win production is set. , the rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 25.1% (50/199).

In addition, in the hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "50 to 69" in association with the effect mode of "discrete eyes". In other words, when the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "50 to 69" in the big hit fluctuation in which the double line ready-to-win effect occurs, the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed and the odds are displayed. be. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "various eyes" is 20, so a big win with a double-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which randomized mode promotion effects are executed is about 10% (20/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "70 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode of "vertical double alignment". In other words, in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "70 to 99", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically doubled. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 30, so a big win with triple-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the ratio of execution of the mode promotion effect with two vertically aligned is about 15.1% (30/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "100 to 189" is defined in association with the effect mode of "vertical three". In other words, in the jackpot variation in which the triple line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "100 to 189", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is vertically 3. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 90, so a big win with triple-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect with three vertical lines is executed is about 45.2% (90/199).

In addition, in the winning variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223H in the range of "190 to 198" is defined in association with "horizontal 3 pieces" as the effect mode. In other words, in the big hit variation in which the double-line ready-to-win effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223H is "190 to 198", the mode promotion effect (ready-to-win suggesting effect) is executed, and the same number is placed three times horizontally. A state in which each piece is arranged is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223H, the number of counter values (random numbers) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 9, so a big win with triple-line ready-to-win production is set. In the variation, the rate at which the horizontal three-piece mode promotion effect is executed is about 4.5% (9/199).

In this way, in the hit variation in which the ready-to-win effect of the triple line occurs, the execution ratio of the mode promotion effect is higher (approximately 75%) than in the hit change in which the ready-to-win effect of the single line or double line occurs. In addition, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the effect mode of vertical 3 is selected at a high rate, but the mode of split eyes and vertical 2 is also selected about 25%. Therefore, even when the mode promotion effect of split eyes or two vertical lines is displayed, the player can expect the ready-to-win effect of the triple line.

Next, with reference to FIG. 701, details of the losing table 222KA2 forming the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA will be described. As described above, the loss table 222KA is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect mode in the case of execution in the loss variation. Similar to the win table 222KA, the winning table 222KA defines the correspondence relationship between the value range of the effect counter 223H and the effect mode for each line number of reach.

As shown in FIG. 701, for the non-reach variable display effect that does not generate reach, the mode promotion effect "none" is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the effect counter 223H. there is Therefore, the mode promotion effect is not executed in the variable effect in which reach does not occur.

Further, as shown in FIG. 701, for the single-line ready-to-win effect, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 155" with the mode promotion effect "none" associated with it. The rendering mode of "separate eyes" is defined in association with the range of "156 to 198". That is, in the single-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 78.4% (156/199), and the "discrete eyes" mode is performed at a rate of about 21.6% (43/199). Promotion production is executed. In other words, regardless of whether the game is a win or a loss, the rate of selecting the "random eye" is the same (21.6%). In addition, the percentage of the selected pattern (approximately 3.5%) of the hit pattern (a production pattern that develops into a single reach with 2 or 3 vertical lines, or a pattern with 3 horizontal lines) is selected. The execution ratio of the mode promotion effect is lower in the reach effect of the single line. In other words, when the production mode of "unbalanced eye" is set and develops into a single line reach production, it becomes difficult to guess the degree of expectation for a big hit from the mode promotion production mode, so the result of the reach production You can keep an eye on it until the end. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 701, for the double line ready-to-win effect, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 108" with the mode promotion effect "none" associated with it. The range of "109 to 128" is defined in association with the production mode of "separate eyes", and the range of "129 to 198" is defined in association with the production mode of "double vertical". It is That is, in the double line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 54.8% (109/199), and the mode promotion effect of "discrete eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). is executed, and the effect mode of “vertically aligned two” is executed at a rate of about 35.2% (70/199). That is, in the double-line ready-to-win effect, the selection ratios of "separate eyes" and "vertical double alignment" are common both in the case of winning and in the case of losing. Therefore, in the case where the mode promotion effect of "separate eyes" or "vertical two pieces" is executed and develops into a double-line ready-to-reach effect, it is difficult to guess the degree of expectation for a big hit from the aspect of the mode promotion effect itself. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the contents of the suggestion in the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 701, for the ready-to-win effect of the triple line, the value of the effect counter 223H is defined in the range of "0 to 58" with the mode promotion effect "none" associated with it. The range of "59 to 78" is defined in correspondence with the production mode of "separate eyes", and the range of "79 to 108" is defined in association with the production mode of "vertical double". , and the effect mode of "vertical three" is defined in association with the range of "109 to 198". That is, in the reach effect of the triple line, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 29.6% (59/199), and the mode promotion effect of "discrete eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). is executed, and at a rate of about 15.1% (30/199), the production mode of "Vertical 2" is executed, and at a rate of about 45.2% (90/199), "Vertical 3" A presentation mode is executed. In other words, regardless of whether it is a win or a loss, the ratio of selecting each of the "discrete eyes", the "vertical double alignment", and the "vertical triple alignment" is common. Therefore, when the mode promotion effects of "uneven eyes", "vertical double alignment", and "vertical triple alignment" are executed and develop into a triple line ready-to-reach effect, the mode promotion effect itself is a jackpot. Since it becomes difficult to guess the degree of expectation, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the suggested content in the ready-to-win effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Thus, in the twenty-fourth control example, the mode promotion effect is configured to be able to suggest the effect mode (reach line of the reach effect) to be executed in the second half (predetermined period) of the variable effect. Here, in the reach production, the higher the number of reach lines, the higher the expectation of a big hit. can be confirmed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 702, the specified contents of the display data table in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 702 is a diagram showing an example of a round number display data table set in a round accompanied by preparation driving of a character in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 702, the display data table in the twenty-fourth control example defines, in addition to drawing contents, commands to be output to another control device (for example, the character object control device 229). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 702, a preparation driving command is defined as a role item command for the end of the drawing content stored at the address “00FAH”. Therefore, when the value of the pointer 233F updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 494(B)) is executed (every 20 milliseconds) becomes the pointer value corresponding to the address "00FAH", the address " 00FAH”, a preparation drive command is read out. When the preparation drive command is read out, the display control device 114 outputs the preparation drive command to the accessory control device 229 . By configuring in this way, the control process for acquiring the drawing content and the process for outputting the command can be performed together, so the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233F provided for acquiring the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 703 and 704, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 703, the variable display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. The variable display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the twenty-fourth control example is a process that is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 487) in the twenty-second control example (and the eleventh control example). Similar to the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the example (and the eleventh control example), this is a process for determining the aspect of the variable display effect according to the variation type (variation time) notified by the variation pattern.

Of the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 703) in the twenty-fourth control example, each process of Z2501 to Z2513 corresponds to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 487) in the twenty-second control example (and the eleventh control example). The same processing as each of Z2501 to Z2509 is executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 703) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, next, the possibility of execution of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) and the effect mode are selected by lottery. A mode promotion effect lottery process is executed (Z2571), and the process proceeds to Z2504. Details of this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 704 is a flowchart showing mode promotion effect lottery processing (Z2571). In this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571), first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern (Z2771), and if it is determined to be a jackpot variation pattern (Z2771: YES) Next, the win table 222KA1 (see FIG. 700(B)) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA is read (Z2772), and the process proceeds to Z2774. On the other hand, in the process of Z2771, if it is determined that it is not a big hit variation pattern (that is, it is a loss variation pattern) (Z2771: NO), a failure table 222KA2 of the mode promotion effect selection table 222KA (see FIG. 701) ) is read out (Z2773), and the process proceeds to Z2774. In the process of Z2774, from the table read out by the process of Z2772 or Z2773, the effect mode (the number of reach lines) set for the current variation pattern and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223H are determined. (Z2774) to terminate this process.

By executing this mode promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 704), depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of reach lines of the reach effect executed in the variable display effect, whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed, and effect Aspects can be suitably selected by lottery.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 705 and 706. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 705, the details of the display setting process 14 (Z3303) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. This display setting process 14 (Z3303) is a process that is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 501) in the 22nd control example (and 11th control example). ), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 This is a process for specifically specifying the .

In the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 705) in the twenty-fourth control example, the processes Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 are the display setting processes in the twenty-second control example (and the eleventh control example) (see FIG. 501). Reference), Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 are executed. In addition, in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 705) in the twenty-fourth control example, when the process of Z4305 is completed, next, drawing content acquisition processing for acquiring the drawing content for one frame from the content of the display data table is executed. is executed (Z4331), and the process moves to Z4307. Details of this drawing content acquisition processing (Z4331) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 706 is a flowchart showing drawing content acquisition processing (Z4331). In this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331), first, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233F is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233D (Z4351). Next, it is determined whether or not the specified content indicating the command for the role item is included in the acquired drawing content (Z4352), and if it is determined that the content indicating the command for the role item has been acquired (Z4352: YES) , the command for the acquired content is set so as to be output to the role product control device 229 (Z4353), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4352 that the content indicating the accessory command is not acquired from the display data table (Z4352: NO), the process of Z4353 is skipped and the process ends.

By executing the drawing content acquisition processing (see FIG. 706), the control processing for acquiring the drawing content and the processing for outputting the command can be performed together, so that the control processing can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233F provided for acquiring the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example is configured to be able to execute the mode promotion effect as one of the entertainment effects. In this mode promotion effect, before the ready-to-win effect occurs, the effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur and the number of lines of the reach line, etc., and the actual ready-to-win effect is performed. It is possible to improve the expectation for a big win before the is executed.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, a command output instruction to the character object control device 229 is included in the defined contents of the display data table that defines the drawing contents in various effects for each frame. When the drawing content is acquired from the display data table, if the command seed and the force instruction are acquired, the display control device 114 outputs the command together with the acquisition of the drawing content. . By configuring in this way, control processing of the display control device 114 can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. Also, since the command can be output using the value of the pointer 233F provided for acquiring the drawing content, there is no need to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 707 to 746, the configuration of the operation device 300 (frame button) of the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th control example to the 24th control example will be described.

707 is a front perspective view of the manipulation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 707, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by a player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17A recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17A, there is a gap large enough for at least a finger to fit comfortably. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 709).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

Figure 708(A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 708(B) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIB-VIB in Figure 708(A), and Figure 709(A). is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 709(B) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIB-VIIB of FIG. 709(A).

708 and 709 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that FIG. 708 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312A1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312A1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312A1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 709, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player when, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of "press button") appears on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 139).

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed by dropping the hand downward forcefully, as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312A1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. It shifts towards the user, and the palm and the operation surface 312A1 are likely to rub against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 709, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312A1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 710 and 711. FIG. 710 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 708, and FIG. 711 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 710 and 711, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 711, an example of the player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 710 and 711, the operation surface 312A1 of the tilting device 310 is made visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312A1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the area of the protective lens member 311I is configured to gradually increase. 714) is visually recognized gradually, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of lightness and darkness) increases, and the difference between the first state and the second state increases. , the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 711, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 709) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating around the wrist), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312A1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 712 and 713. FIG. 712 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 713 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 712, the operating device 300 is rotatably pivoted about a shaft portion 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 713, the voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force to the outside of the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

714 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 715 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 714 and 715, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the back side end of the paper surface of FIG. 714), A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 An upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a driving device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the left-right direction and the rear.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of the tilting device 310, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below; a pair of left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R arranged on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321; It is mainly provided with an opening 325 which is an opening formed by cutting a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the movement end of the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. be.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321A drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321B drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right and an insertion hole 321C drilled symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321A is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and formed with a size that allows the overhang projecting portion 311J of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311J of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force can be applied to the tilting device 310 in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321B is a through hole through which detection pieces 311GL and 311GR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection pieces 311GL and 311GR projecting from the detection holes 321B in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R.

The insertion hole 321C is configured to have a size such that the shaft portion 311C arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted, and when the driving device 340 is operated, the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322A is provided.

The locking portion 322A is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322A, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322A acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . In addition, the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341F of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341F upward and forward (see FIG. 719B), the LED device 341F passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device By pushing up 340, the LED device 341F can be arranged above the opening 325, and compared to the vertical width including the LED device 341F and the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 is larger. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311H extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 714 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 712) such that the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 . As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321A.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . Disk cams 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344EL, 344ER of the disc cams 344L, 344R are connected to the detection sensors 353L, 353L, 344R.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are arranged in the detection groove of 53R.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344EL, 344ER in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases detectable by 3R.

The tilting device 310 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 716-718. 716(A) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 716(B) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVB in FIG. 716(A), and FIG. FIG. 716(A) is a cross-sectional view of tilting device 310 taken along line XIVC-XIVC of FIG. 716(A). 717 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 718 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 716 to 718, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings at the top and bottom. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314; and a ring member BR1.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311A inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311B opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311A, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311B. A cylindrical shaft portion 311C extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311C, and a recessed portion 311D having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311E which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315A of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311F which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315B of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311GL extending below the bottom plate portion 311A, a right detection piece 311GR (see FIG. 717), and an extension extending a predetermined amount forward from the front end of the bottom plate portion 311A. a provision portion 311H, a protective lens member 311I which is arranged above the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311A, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light transmissive material, and a bottom plate portion. 311A mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311J projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311A.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player, the bottom plate portion 311A is pushed downward by the lower frame member 3.
20 is a portion that abuts on the bottom plate portion 321 of the member 20. FIG.

The opening 311B is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341F of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311C is a columnar member that is inserted through the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 719B) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340. Prepare.

The left detection piece 311GL and the right detection piece 311GR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 717) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311GR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311GR to the tip of the left detection piece 311GL centering on the shaft portion 314 is about 3° (from the first state (see FIG. 724) to the push end (see FIG. 724). 725)), the left detection piece 311GL is projected more than the right detection piece 311GR.

The extended portion 311H is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311I toward the front side, and protrudes to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 712). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311I has a curved shape when viewed from above (see FIG. 716(A)) and a curved shape when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 716(C)). The structure is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhang projecting portion 311J projects perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311A and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321A of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 731), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321A and the tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 718, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312A having an operation surface 312A1, an intermediate plate member 312B fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312A, and the intermediate plate member 312B connected to the top plate member 312A. and a cylindrical member 312C having a cylindrical shape and having a size to surround the LED device 341F in the first state (see FIG. 708).

The cylindrical member 312C improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 708), because of its positional relationship, the cylindrical member 312C directs the light emitted from the LED device 341F toward the tilting device 310 into a cylindrical shape. While it is fixed inside the member 312C, in the second state (see FIG. 709), such limitation is lifted and the light from the LED device 341F can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward like flanges, and has a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311I. , and a spherical shell portion 313A having a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315A extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315B connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 719 and 720. FIG. 719(A) is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 719(B) is a side view of the driving device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIB in FIG. 719(A), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 719 and 720, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-like sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344D of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341C of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344C1 and the second A release member 346 that abuts on the overhanging portion 344C3 in the rotational direction, a rotary pawl member 347 that is coaxially and pivotally supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and the rotary pawl member 347 is tilted downward. A first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of releasing, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. and a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shaped motor accommodating portion 3 when viewed from above.
41A and a shaft support hole 341B which is drilled at the same position of the opposing plate portion of the motor housing portion 341A and which supports the disk cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341B. A shaft portion 341C projecting in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341B, an extension portion 341D extending from the motor housing portion 341A below the shaft portion 341C, and a motor A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341A
E, and an LED device 341F disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341E and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341F has a triangular member on its upper surface, and a portion that refracts light (
part that refracts light). As a result, the light from the LED device 341F can be evenly radiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is positioned inside the motor housing portion 341A inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341A.
A fixing member 342A that is fastened and fixed to 1A is provided.

The fixed member 342A supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343B meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345A that is supported by the connecting pin 344D of the disk cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shape. and a guide hole 345B through which the shaft portion 311C (see FIG. 717) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345B is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345A abuts against the shaft portion 311C in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345B is formed so that the disc cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 721 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343A to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 720) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343B which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343A and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. , a movable clutch 343C that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343B and the cylindrical member 343A by moving in the axial direction, a coil spring 343D that presses the movable clutch 343C against the transmission gear 343B, Mainly provide

The cylindrical member 343A has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 344 at both ends thereof.
43A1 and 343A2, and the right fixing portion 343A2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343A1. Here, the fixed portion 343A2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
It is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343B when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343D.

The transmission gear 343B includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343B1 through which the cylindrical member 343A is inserted,
A clutch portion 343B2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343C.

Since the insertion hole 343B1 is perfectly circular, the transmission gear 343B can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343A even when the cylindrical member 343A is fixed.

The movable clutch 343C has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343A is inserted.
43C1, and a clutch portion 343C2 formed with unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface facing the transmission gear 343B and configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343B2. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343B2 and 343C2 have an angle of about 100 degrees at the top.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex part and a concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343C1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343C with respect to the cylindrical member 343A is disabled, so that the clutch portion 343B2 of the transmission gear 343B and the clutch portion 343C2 of the movable clutch 343C are engaged. As a result, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343B is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343A via the movable clutch 343C. Accordingly, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 720).

In addition, the movable clutch 343C is normally engaged with the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343D.
43B, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343B2 and 343C2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343C, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable along 43A2 in a manner away from the transmission gear 343B.

The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. 722 . In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344EL and 344ER. , and the description of the right disc cam 344R is omitted.

722(A) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXA in FIG. 720, and FIG. 722(B) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXB in FIG. be. 722(A) and 722(B) illustrate the state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 722(A) and 722(B), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disk, and is positioned at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344A that protrudes inward in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344B that protrudes inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344A, and an outer side of the circular rib 344B. An engaging rib 344C projecting inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344B and having two radially outward projecting portions; It mainly includes a connecting pin 344D projecting in the direction in a cylindrical shape and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 720), and a detection hole 344EL drilled in the vicinity of the outer circumference.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344ER is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344EL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344A has a D-shaped cross-section whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the columnar member 343A (see FIG. 721), and whose outer periphery is fitted into the shaft support hole 341B (see FIG. 720). Configured. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341B.

The circular rib 344B protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341A (see FIG. 720) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341B. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344C protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 722A) from the position where the detection hole 344EL is arranged. a protruding portion 344C1, a first lead-in portion 344C2 retracted radially inward at a position deviated from the first protruding portion 344C1 by an angle Θ1 (angle Θ1=50° in this embodiment), and At a position deviated by an angle Θ2 (angle Θ2 = 150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344C3 projects radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344C3 forms an angle Θ3 (angle Θ3=20°) and a second lead-in portion 344C4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344D is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311E of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 724). That is, the connecting pin 344D is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311E of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344A.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

723(A) and 723(B) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. FIG. 723(A) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 rotates to the end position of the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 723(B) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346B is arranged at the intermediate position of the long guide hole 347B). state) (see FIG. 737).

As shown in FIGS. 723(A) and 723(B), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346A supported by the shaft portion 341C (see FIG. 720), A projecting pin 346B projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346A, an insertion hole 346C through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346A and an engaging portion 346D configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346D is configured to be able to contact with the engaging rib 344C (see FIG. 722) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 712). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346</b>D can be smoothly brought into contact with the engaging rib 344 by forming a curved outer periphery.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347A that is supported by the shaft portion 341C (see FIG. 720) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347A. An elongated guide hole 347B is drilled along the guide pin 346B of the release member 346 (drilled with a size that includes the moving locus of the pin 346B), and the end of the second spring SP2. A hook-shaped portion 347D protruding downward in a hook-like shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347A, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 720) can be inserted. Mainly includes a pull-down hole 347E drilled in the.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 723(A), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 723(A)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346D in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346D, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 723(B).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 724 to 726, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

Figures 724 to 726 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 708(A). 724 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 725 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 724 to the end position, and FIG. 725 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state shown in FIG. 725 to the first state. Also, in FIGS. 724 to 726, an example of a player's hand performing the tilting device 310 repeatedly operation is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 724, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 724) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311A is hooked on the hook portion 347D of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG. As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 724).

In the state shown in FIG. 724, the left detection piece 311GL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311GR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 713).

As shown in FIG. 725, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 725) by about 3°. In this state, the left detection piece 311GL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311GR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 724 and the state shown in FIG. 725 are alternately repeated. is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 720) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311J of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 726, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, causing the player to Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This will
A player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 727 to 732, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. Figures 727 to 732 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 708(A).

727 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 728, the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 729 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 731 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 730, and FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount to reach a second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344C3 of the engaging rib 344C contacts the engaging portion 346D of the releasing member 346. is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 730, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 729 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 727, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341F is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312C of the lid 312. As shown in FIG. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312C is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312C, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. As a result, the cylindrical member 312C serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341F can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 728, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 728) from the state shown in FIG. direction), the first projecting portion 344C1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346D of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 728). Along with this, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it disengages from the bottom plate portion 311A of the tilting device 310 .

The change in posture of the release member 346 causes the first retraction portion 344C2 of the engagement rib 344C and the engagement portion 34
6D is maintained until the disc cam 344 rotates until it faces 6D, so the tilting device 310 rises by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 728).

At this time, in the state of FIGS. 727 and 728, the shaft portion 311C of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one terminal position of the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345 (the terminal position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 729, when the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 729) and the first retraction portion 344C2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engagement portion 346D of the release member 346, By the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 729), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 729). 727). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 729). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 728 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341F, and the area where the protective lens member 311I can be visually recognized from the player's point of view increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341F can also be emitted in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the attitude of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341F can be changed, and the lighting effect can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 730, from the state shown in FIG. 729, the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 730), and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward rotation direction ( By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 730, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 is seen by the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341F, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 730, the spherical shell portion 313A of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341F (left side in FIG. 730), so that the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341F can be It is possible to expand not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 730).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341F travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312C. (See Figure 727). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341F is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the illumination range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 731, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 730, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311C only moves through the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 730, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 720). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 731, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 731) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311A passes through the hooked portion 347D. Return to engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state of vertically moving the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 730, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310. .

In the state shown in FIG. 731, the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 726), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position is to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 732, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding projecting portion 311J of the tilting device 310 moves from the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of
As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 732, from the state shown in FIG. 731, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (reverse in FIG. The driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it clockwise) by a predetermined amount.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344C and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344C1 contacts the engaging rib 344C, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344C3 contacts the engaging rib 344C.

731, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 731) so that the first projecting portion 344C1 of the engaging rib 344C passes through the engaging portion 346D, and then reverse rotation is performed. 731 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 727. In this case, a load is applied to the releasing member 346 in a direction to push up the releasing member 346, and only the releasing member 346 can be rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 731) while the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 733 to 736, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

Figures 733 to 736 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 708(A). 733, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 733) from the state shown in FIG. 732, and the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 733). FIG. 734 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 733 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state, and FIG. 736 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 735 to the terminal position. Also, in FIG. 735, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 734 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 733, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 733) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311C of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 734, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 735, from the state shown in FIG. 734, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 734), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( By repeating the operation of rotating clockwise in FIG. 734, the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 is seen by the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341F, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 735, the spherical shell portion 313A of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341F (left side in FIG. It is possible to expand not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 735).

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 735 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. 730 and 735. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of up-down motions (tilting motions), namely, the up-down motion shown in FIG. 730 and the up-down motion shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after releasing the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation each time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 735, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is being moved up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 735, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311C only moves through the guide hole 345B of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311C from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 735, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 720). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 736, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311A of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347D of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311A passes through the hook-shaped portion 347D by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 736) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 736) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is vertically moved as shown in FIG. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 737 to 739, the operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

Figures 737 to 739 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 708(A). 737 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 737) and the release member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 737) from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 738, after rotating cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 737) beyond the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 739, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 738) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. In FIGS. 737 to 739, an example of a player's hand swinging from above against the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 737, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 736) from the state shown in FIG. 346D. In this case, the engagement rib 344C pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. It stops, and the rotary pawl member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

737, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 737) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344C and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 737, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 737), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 738, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (normal/reverse switching motion) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting motion) within the range of the angle D2, the attitude of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 738) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350, as shown in FIG. (see FIG. 716) is controlled to stop the rotation of the disc cam 344 (stop the driving of the drive motor 342) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned ON.

In the states shown in FIGS. 738 and 739, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward. A change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 737 to 739, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down (normal/reverse switching). operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 733) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 720) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 740 and 741. FIG. FIG. 740 is a cross-sectional view of manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A), and FIG. 741 is a partial cross-sectional view of manipulation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. In FIG. 740, the player's hand holding and fixing the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 741, the upper member of the body cover 351 is shown. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 740, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 741) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343B. be.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343B is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343A that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 741, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343B is urged in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343B is driven through the clutch portions 343B2 and 343C2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343C moves away from the transmission gear 343B. As a result, the transmission gear 343B is disengaged from the movable clutch 343C, and the transmission gear 343B can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°).
20 is not in the ON state (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while displaying, for example, a display on the third pattern display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case in which the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify the user to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343C. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 is in the first state, it can be specified that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. By resetting the initial phase, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are controlled in a state where they are matched again. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
This rotation control prevents deviation between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 . Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343B and the movable clutch 343C, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 741, the movable clutch 343C has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343B regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343B. The necessity will be explained below.

Figures 742, 743, 744 and 745 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of Figure 708(A). 742 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 740, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. 744 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 740, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 743, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CCW, tilting device 310 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 742 and moves toward the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 745, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engagement rib 344C moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 744 to the state shown in FIG. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344C comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344C contacts the release member 346 from below. A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operations from FIG. 740 to the first state shown in FIGS. 743 or 745, whichever is different.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 741), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player will notice the mode of the control being performed, and the player will grasp the effect that will be executed from now on, which may diminish the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the driving motor 342, the load on the driving motor 342 increases, and the durability of the driving motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. Since only the direction is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the performance changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 rotates, the player can confirm whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since it is possible to grasp the change in the degree of expectation, it is possible for the player to understand the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 740) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. can be directed to watch over

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 741) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 746, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 even when the player performs the motion of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third motion mode). explain.

FIG. 746 is a cross-sectional view of manipulation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 708(A). 746 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 746) from the first initial state of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 727). The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 746) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344C1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346D of the releasing member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

As shown in FIG. 746, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first protruding portion 344C1 of the disk cam 344, the first protruding portion 344C1 and the first retracting portion 344C2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disk cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346D, the tilting device 310 can be vertically reciprocated while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 746) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 can be moved in the manner shown in FIG. In the vertical movement, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves to the first state (rotation). It is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310 and the vertical motion is continued.

Therefore, for example, as the operation modes of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640A is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22B (1022B, 1122B), and third frame button (release button) 22C A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640A is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203D in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223B by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22B (1022B, 1122B), and third frame button (release button) 22C A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type that tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired), especially in the variable probability state. Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments and control examples. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type that tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired), especially in the variable probability state. Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Further, all or part of the configurations of the above embodiments and control examples may be combined and implemented.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Plate Member 620 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member with light, wherein light is incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is increased. A gaming machine A1, characterized in that it comprises output increasing means for increasing output, and the output increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion is provided, and light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member is provided. A game machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflective portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of game machine, for example, by arranging the light transmission member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the display of the liquid crystal display device can be seen by the player through the light transmission member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. to emit from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it is difficult to make (display) the pattern or pattern clearly stand out. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases the cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, which causes a problem that other members and equipment are affected by the heat.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since it is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiation means, the light reflected by the reflecting portion It is possible to intensify the light emitted from the front of the transmissive member. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and accordingly, deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, the formation position of the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the rear surface of the light transmitting member, or may be inside the light transmitting member.

The gaming machine A2 in the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the emission increasing means comprises an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A2, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means is emitted to the side end surface of the light transmission member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member is reduced accordingly. Light collection efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member out of the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased. , patterns and designs can be made to stand out (display) clearly. Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the emission increasing means is provided with an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that when another device in the game area emits light In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from the other device, so that the light can be suppressed from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of a pattern or design on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine A3, wherein in the game machine A2, the outer edge member is arranged on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and goes off to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that goes off to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light transmission member, even if the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member, , the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface can block the light, so that the incident light from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member can be suppressed. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent a pattern or design from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A gaming machine A4 in the gaming machine A2 or A3, characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end face of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means can be emitted. , the light can be reflected by the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

A game machine A5 in any one of the game machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is made of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are made of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It easily permeates to the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than that of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary between and, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmission member.

According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is arranged with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member and the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5. The light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected on the front or rear surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indices of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, light from the side end face of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and more likely to be transmitted through the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine A5, by arranging the outer edge member with a predetermined gap formed between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and rotates the pinion gear. and a driving means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape A curved rack gear is engraved on the outer edge member, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshing with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotating the pinion gear. Rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby rotating the light transmitting member together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both to condense the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and to transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A7, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and to apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the ring shape, and the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotary mechanism is provided with a plurality of supporting rings guided along the guide grooves, the light transmitting member is exposed to the light through the action of the guide grooves and the supporting rings. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can enter from the side end surfaces of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light-transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member can be viewed by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivoted, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a mode in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove. A form in which a fixed support wheel slides along a guide groove is exemplified.

In addition, in the game machine A8 subordinate to the game machine A7, the outer edge member having the curved rack gear carved on either the front or the back of the light transmissive member, and the outer edge member having the guide groove recessed on the light transmissive member. Preferably, they are arranged on the other of the front or back, respectively. That is, by arranging the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, respectively, the light emitted from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end surfaces of the light transmission member, This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the rear side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front side and the outer edge member on the back side, respectively, and enter from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member. In addition, by arranging the outer edge member on each of the front side and the back side of the light transmission member in this way, the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and can be suppressed from being incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed so that its outer peripheral side faces the front or rear surface of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the opposing space between the outer edge member and the light transmission member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the outer edge member and the light transmission member are formed. Since a guide groove is provided between and facing each other, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by making one inner wall of the guide groove bear on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the outer edge member does not need to be formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure described above.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is directed to the front surface of the light transmission member. Alternatively, it can be made easier to reflect on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

In any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, characterized in that it is disposed so that the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means emits the light. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmission member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Irradiation Unit 650 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface of each target member is directed toward the target member, wherein the plurality of light emitting means One or a plurality of elastically deformable substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture Characterized game machine B1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in a posture in which each of the irradiation surfaces faces the target member (for example, JP-A-2015 -29735). According to this game machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting section. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member from a light-transmissive material in a disc shape and forms a reflecting portion, and at the same time, arranges a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member). in such a manner as to surround the object member in a posture directed toward the object, and a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the object member was devised (unknown at the time of filing of the present application).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was newly found that there is a problem that a plurality of light-emitting means must be arranged around the target member, and therefore the arrangement work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, they are oriented in different directions), the arrangement work is also troublesome from this point of view. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, one or more substrate members on which at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and formed to be elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined posture in which the substrate members are elastically deformed. Since the base member is provided, by arranging one substrate member on the base member, the work of arranging at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the light emitting means.

Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member individually, the work of disposing the light-emitting means can be reduced from this point as well.

A gaming machine B2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a block body formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member and arranged on the substrate member is held by the base member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Also, it is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and to easily regulate the attitude of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be restrained from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In the game machine B2, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, since the light emitting means is arranged in the area of the board member where the block body is arranged, the posture of the light emitting means is the same as the warp of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

In the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the blocks are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member positioned between the blocks is elastically deformed so that the base member can be moved. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at predetermined intervals, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since the substrate member is held in a deformed (bent) posture by the base member, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized compared to the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any one of game machines B2 to B4, the light-emitting means is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member on the side opposite to the target member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being arranged on the back side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the object member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

A game machine B6, wherein the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front side of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member to prevent damage due to contact with the light emitting means.

In game machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. By arranging the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B7, one of the base body and the block body is provided with a projection, and the other of the base body and the block body has a fitting hole into which the projection is received and fitted. A game machine B8 characterized by being recessed in the.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B2 to B7, a projection is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and a fitting that receives and fits the projection is provided. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and labor for the arrangement work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of blocks are arranged on a substrate member, and the blocks are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one of the blocks is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side thereof arranged on the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member accommodates the electronic components arranged on the substrate member. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine B9, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body has a concave portion on the side of the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member is arranged on the substrate member. Since the electronic parts are housed, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement. In the machine, an elastic member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position under the action of gravity. In a state in which the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be displaced in a direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position and the second position) overhanging the game area, and the motion of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the game machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in a direction toward position 2 and is displaced from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a reciprocating displacement (approximately a single vibration ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravitational direction can be the orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection of uniform circular motion). can be increased, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, simply by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, it is possible to increase the variation of the displacement, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control, thus reducing the product cost and improving the reliability. can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side moves up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. When the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released and the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately single vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only vertical linear motion but also rotational motion centered on the one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such displacement members perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine C2, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member whose one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and whose other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a connecting member whose one end is connected to the position where the displacement member is positioned and whose other end is connected to the displacement member. When the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member can be changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are in balance, A gaming machine C4 characterized in that a direction connecting a connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and a connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at equilibrium (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of push or pull from equilibrium. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member has a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position is provided. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including A game machine C5 characterized in that, when said displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , said protruding part faces the other of said rotating member and connecting member so as to be able to come into contact therewith.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is positioned at the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate about the balanced position (predetermined position), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range, thereby smoothing the reciprocation of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, in the outer range, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to contact and rotate. Rattling between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the game machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the protruding portion is used to suppress looseness between the rotating member and the connecting member, thereby adjusting the posture of the displacement member. While being stabilized, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position toward the second position by the driving force of the driving means, the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion can be avoided, so that the displacement member is acted upon. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center of the game area. , At the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member, improve the appearance and improve durability, and suppress obstruction of the performance of other members. When displacing the from the first position toward the second position (overhanging position), it is possible to rapidly overhang (displace) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

In the game machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are positioned substantially on a straight line. Gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is positioned on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction to rotate the rotating member is generated. A condition that does not occur (ie dead center) can be created. Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly), while at the same time achieving the second position. After being placed at the position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member due to the action of the dead point described above, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

In any one of game machines C3 to C7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion corresponds to a connection position between the displacement member and the base member and the rotation position. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine C8.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base. Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , when the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the abutting portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion between the rotating member and the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member are rotatable). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the. As a result, the driving force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the driving means comprises first driving means and second driving means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. A game machine D1 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and which performs an effect by displacing the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is arranged at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area. An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player visually recognizes the motion of the displaced member displaced toward the extended position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the production by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. As a result, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and one displacement member is used in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first drive means, and a first member slidably displaceably disposed on the base member and driven by the second drive means and a second member driven by a second member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are respectively connected to the first member and the second member so as to be at least rotatable. .

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the first member slidably displaceably arranged on the base member and driven by the first drive means and the first member slidably displaceable on the base member and a second member driven by the second drive means, wherein the first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably coupled to the first and second members, respectively, so that the When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to slide. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same rotation center and different rotation directions, but different rotation directions and different rotation centers. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member and the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the driving force of the first driving means linearly displaces the first member or the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced by the above, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need for a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved trajectory. Therefore, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are curvedly displaced. ), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (e.g., traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are made different, and the kind of displacement itself is made different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In the game machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member is different from the displacement speed of the second member. A gaming machine D5 characterized by speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is set to a different displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be displaced (linearly moved) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, and can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacing member in a displacing manner in which such rotary motion and linear motion are combined in the conventional configuration in which the displacing member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , like the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D5, the second displacement member is provided displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the second displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , the device (variation) between the displacement mode by the first driving means and the displacement mode by the second driving means can be enlarged. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and light irradiation means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. , a game machine E1 characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of them.

Here, a game comprising a displacement member displaceably formed between a first position and a second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacing the displacement member. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is provided inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a translucent material is provided on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back side by the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting portion) emits light. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the light irradiating means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is little change in the manner in which the player visually recognizes it, and there is a problem that it is difficult to make the game interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. It is possible to change the mode of visual recognition by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Examples of the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed include a form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and a form in which the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples include a form in which two parts are combined, a form in which these are combined, and the like.

A gaming machine E2 in which the gaming machine E1 comprises a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member. The target wiring can be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, allowing the player to visually recognize a part of the target member through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and is formed with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 characterized by.

Here, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, it is possible for the player to visually recognize different portions of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first group out of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective part can be visually recognized through the opening, and a second group, which is a group different from the first group, is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between a second position and a second position that is visible through While allowing the player to visually recognize the formed first pattern or pattern, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. , to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or design visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the game machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and can rotate about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape around the base member. Therefore, compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced, the target member is arranged while securing the number of patterns and patterns that are visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. can reduce the space required for

In the game machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front and has a reflecting portion, and receives the light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. , the game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably arranged on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E6, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape and has a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and projected from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the center of rotation of the target member.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( irrespective of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

A gaming machine E7 in which the gaming machine E1 comprises a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member, so that the combination of the displacements of the two allows the light irradiation means to move the target member. It is possible to increase the variation of changes in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the manner in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make the player more interested.

In the game machine E7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the target member is provided, and the light irradiating means contacts the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, it is provided with a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation means displaces the object by the driving force applied from the driving means. Since the member is displaced together with the target member when the member is brought into contact with the target member, it can be used as a drive unit for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a drive unit for displacing the light irradiation unit. can.

<Feature F group> (Free setting of countdown notice)
effect period setting means for setting one effect period out of different effect periods; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a specific period set within the one effect period; a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed; and notification effect setting means for setting a trigger for ending the notification effect based on information.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, a game configured to be able to execute a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect) is executed among the effects to be executed for a predetermined period. there is a machine (For example, JP-A-2013-198568).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect is to be executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the performance. In addition, in the conventional gaming machine having the above-described configuration, while the advance notification effect is being executed, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is varied (for example, the specific effect that is the target of the advance notification effect is varied). ), and the production effect cannot be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine F1, as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is to be executed, the notification effect setting means sets the start opportunity based on the first information, and sets the start opportunity based on the second information. A termination trigger is set. As a result, the period for executing the information performance is set based on a plurality of different information, so that the period for executing the information performance can be freely set and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has execution information determining means for determining execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determining means as the second information. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the trigger for ending the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification performance is executed, and at the same time, it is possible to execute the notification performance corresponding to the specific performance to be executed, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the execution information discriminating means discriminates at least the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, the execution information for indicating that the specific production is to be executed is set as the second information, and the end timing of the notification production is set. You can set the notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific performance is executed while freely setting the period during which the notification performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 has specific effect setting means for setting one specific effect out of a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A gaming machine F4 characterized by:

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set the notification effect in accordance with the timing at which the specific effect is executed for a plurality of specific effects with different execution timings. can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the timing for setting the start timing of the notification effect based on the first information to be different from the timing for setting the timing to start the notification effect based on the second information, and sets the timing for ending the notification effect based on the second information. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that it sets .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification performance can be set at different timings, so that the period during which the notification performance is executed can be freely set. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. Characterized game machine F6.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F5, after the notification performance is executed, the timing for ending the notification performance can be set. Set the execution period. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period during which the notification effect is executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, when the notification effect is executed, it is not set at which timing the specific effect to be executed is targeted for the notification effect, so it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the content of the notification effect in advance. can be reliably prevented.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F6, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated during the performance, and the notification performance setting means sets the performance mode of the notification performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means. A gaming machine F7 characterized by:

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the performance period of the notification performance is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation performance, so the player's participation in the performance is increased. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and at least the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

According to the game machine F8, in any of the game machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information in the period during which the notification effect is executed, so the notification effect period can be set freely. , it is possible to secure a period for executing an effect based on the second information, and it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect indicating a period of time until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8, the timing effect can be executed during the second notification effect period. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine F9, based on the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means and the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means, A game machine F10 characterized by comprising temporal performance period setting means for setting a period in which the temporal performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the period for executing the performance with time is executed for a certain period by the time-lapse performance period setting means based on the length of the performance period during which the notification performance is executed. As a trigger for executing performance over time, the timing obtained by subtracting a fixed period from the execution timing of the specific performance is determined, so even when a different performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the start timing of the specific performance can be accurately determined. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player.

In any one of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the first effect to be executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information. The game machine F11 is characterized by having a first effect mode varying means for varying the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during one notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the performance mode of the first performance executed during the first notification performance period is established while the first performance is being executed. It is changed when a possible effect variable condition is established. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the effect variable condition is satisfied when the notification effect setting means sets a trigger for ending the notification effect.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the timing for ending the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is determined, the effect mode of the first effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set end timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, an operating means operable by a player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operating means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means. operation determination means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect execution means. A gaming machine F13, wherein the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the trigger for ending the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to change the presentation period of the notification presentation by the operation of the player, and to enhance the presentation effect.

The gaming machine F13 has specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F14 characterized in that the information for the game is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F13, a specific period during which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and during the set specific period Since the effect period of the notification effect can be varied based on the above, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period out of a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F15 characterized by executing the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F14, a specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the game machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period during which the notification effect is executed. and the operation effect execution means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and sets the length of the second notification effect period to correspond to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has an effect period variable means for varying the effect period. A gaming machine F16 characterized by:

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effects of the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, The length of the notification effect is varied by varying the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation contents of the operating means during the operation effect. Therefore, when the length of the notification effect is varied, it is possible to ensure the period during which the operation effect is executed, so there is an effect that the effect can be executed in which the player can easily operate the operation means.

<Characteristic G group> (Variation of HP display)
Determination means for executing determination based on performance information; Variable performance execution means for executing variable performance for varying performance values based on the determination result of the determination means; a first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value, and the effect value when the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means. and a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the value of the second effect value.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as a variable production, a game machine executes a production (battle production) in which the player's character and the enemy character play against each other, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. be. (For example, JP-A-2015-9075).

In such a conventional game machine, the effect of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle performance, and the decreasing physical strength points are used to determine whether the player has won the jackpot or not. By notifying the player in advance of the execution timing of the effect of (1), the variable effect can be executed while increasing the player's expectation for the big win. Furthermore, by setting in detail the physical strength points that decrease during the battle production, the number of production patterns of the battle production is increased, thereby suppressing the players from becoming bored with the battle production. However, in the conventional game machine, detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points. There is a problem that the amount of processing for management becomes enormous. It should be noted that it is possible to simplify the reduction management of physical strength points by reducing the number of patterns in which the physical strength points are reduced during the battle production. There was a problem that I got tired of it.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variations of the effect value than when the effect value is determined by one determining means. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G1, an effect state setting means capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. a production value updating means for continuously variably updating; and a first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means, wherein the production value updating means is A gaming machine G2, characterized in that said effect value is variably updated based on said first effect value stored in said first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, when the rendering value determined based on the first rendering value and the second rendering value is variably updated, the combined rendering value is not used. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the effect value actually displayed (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) is reduced. It is possible to reduce the patterns of values (first effect values) variably updated by the effect value updating means with respect to the display patterns, and to reduce the processing load.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value updating means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine G3, characterized by comprising mode display means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect updating means is displayed. There is an effect that the variable amount of the effect value can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is composed of a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the A gaming machine G4, characterized in that it has effect value summing means for calculating the effect value by summing it with a second effect value.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effects of the game machine G3, the first effect value, which is part of the effect value, and the second effect value, which is different from the first effect value, are added by the effect value adding means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a prescribed discrimination condition is established, and a privilege is given based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. and a privilege granting means, wherein the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means when the determination by the determining means is executed.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination by the determination means is executed, and the effect value changes. An effect can be executed so as to be related to the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the production value, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the fact that the first effect value determining means has determined the first effect value. A game machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first rendering value is determined, the second rendering value is determined. A production value that is the sum of the values is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that is changed by the execution of the discrimination by the discriminating means.

In the game machine G5 or G6, the game machine G7 is characterized in that the first effect value determination means varies the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be changed based on the determination result of the determination means, so that the variable amount of the effect value can be changed for the player. can be made to pay attention, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determination means makes it easy to determine the first effect value so that the variable amount becomes large when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value is, the easier it is to give the privilege, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the variable amount of the effect value. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G8, a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected. and determination value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the second effect value determination The means selects one selection range from among a plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means, and determines the second effect value. A game machine G9 characterized by.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines G1 to G8, the selection range for selecting the second effect value is varied based on whether the first effect value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. can let Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range storing a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. and a second selection range in which the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a determination result of the determined value determining means. (2) a game machine G10, wherein the second effect value is set by selecting the second selection range;

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second effect value for decreasing the first effect value is selected, so the first effect It is possible to suppress the effect value obtained by adding the value and the second effect value from becoming larger than the first effect value. As a result, for example, when a lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress the determination of a value greater than the lower limit value as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that causes the user to be overwhelmed.

<Characteristic group H> (Suggestion of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
First determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game when a first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result. a high-probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means is likely to be the predetermined first determination result; a probability setting means capable of setting a low-probability state in which the first determination result is unlikely to occur; The probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second determination result by the second determination means is the predetermined second determination result. A game state setting means capable of setting, as game states, a first game state in which the predetermined determination condition is likely to be established, and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is more difficult to be established than in the first game state. and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying the period during which the first game state is set by the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means includes: The second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. and a second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low-probability game is set and the second requirement that the determination is performed a predetermined number of times by the first determination means in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a period effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the period effect in correspondence with the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the game state is set to an advantageous game state (for example, a variable state in which the probability of winning is high) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the player wins. There is a gaming machine that indicates to the player whether or not the period in which the game state continues will end, depending on the result of an effect (for example, a battle effect). (For example, JP-A-2011-143197).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, if a win is made while the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the win pattern in which the character wins is displayed, and if a win is made when the advantageous gaming state ends, the winning pattern is displayed. The result of the defeat pattern is displayed, and if the win is not won (when the advantageous game state is set continuously), the battle effect is displayed so that the result of the draw pattern without winning or losing is displayed. Since it is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle production, and to enhance the production effect. However, if the game is executed for a long period of time in an advantageous game state without winning a win, as a result, it becomes easier to execute a battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed, and the player does not respond to the battle effect. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning a prize as a result of the lottery, the draw pattern battle effect is executed. When a specific variation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle performance of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the player's expectation for the battle performance is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are met based on the presentation mode of the second presentation. Thus, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the period presentation.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the first effect.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the effect result of the second effect, and the first condition or Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted according to the effect mode of the first effect. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has second effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on whether or not the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to predict the situation until the first condition is satisfied depending on the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when either the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Characterized game machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the effect mode of the period effect is changed by satisfying any one of the plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition. variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is established according to the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the period effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means determines the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. The game machine H5 is characterized in that it sets an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result.

According to the game machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied can be suggested by the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while giving him/her a sense of danger, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, and It is characterized in that the easiness of establishment of the performance switching condition is differentiated between when the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and when the low probability state is set. Game machine H6.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the second Since the frequency of execution of one performance can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency of execution of the first performance, and interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

The game machine H7 is characterized in that the game machine H6 has condition setting means for making it easier to satisfy the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, it is possible to facilitate execution of the first effect during a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first effect is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the determination result of the first determination means is the determination result that the privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the first performance is executed, the player pays attention to the performance while being conscious of whether or not the privilege game is won or whether or not the first condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance that is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8 has a number-of-time measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed while the first game state is continuously set by the game state setting means. The game machine H9 is characterized in that the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of executions of the period effect counted by the frequency counting means.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period presentation is repeatedly executed, the second presentation mode is set based on the number of repetitions. When the game state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, effect period determination means for determining a effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect execution means; a performance regulation means for regulating execution of the first performance by the period performance execution means when the performance period determined by the performance period determination means is within a predetermined period. Characterized game machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the presentation switching condition is established, it is determined that the presentation period after the first presentation is executed is within a predetermined period. When it is done, the execution of the first effect is regulated by the effect regulating means. As a result, frequent execution of the first effect can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the execution of the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not restricted by the effect regulation means. Characteristic game machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H10, the first effect that is executed when the privilege game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the performance period determining means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress deterioration of the performance effect when executed. In addition, when the first performance is executed again within a predetermined performance period after the previous first performance is executed, the degree of expectation for execution of the privilege game can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. has the effect of

<Feature J group> (Different target effects at the notification timing of the expectation increase effect)
Expectation level display control means capable of displaying, on a display means, a plurality of expectation level display modes capable of suggesting in stages an expectation level indicating that a predetermined condition has been established; display mode changing means for stepwise varying an expectation level display mode; variable information setting means for setting variable information to be varied by the display mode varying means; and at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. variable suggestion effect execution means for executing a variable suggestion effect suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, wherein the expectation level display control means controls the expectation level of at least one of the plurality of expectation level display modes. The game machine J1 is characterized in that display modes are displayed on the display means at different timings, and that the game machine J1 has an execution timing setting means for setting timings for executing the variable suggestive effects.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the player has won a big win. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the degree of expectation of the big win, and the degree of expectation of the big win of this variable performance is displayed. There is a gaming machine that notifies the player by the display mode of the character that is displayed. (For example, JP-A-2013-248305).

In such a conventional game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win can be shown to the player by the display mode of the characters displayed during the variable performance, so that the player is interested in the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation display modes are provided in which a display mode corresponding to the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, and the display modes of each expectation display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player by judging it realistically, it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation for the big win based on the display modes of the plurality of types of expectation degree display modes, and the effect is executed. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the contents, and to enhance the performance effect. In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a suggestion effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation level display mode can be executed, and which display mode is to be displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a game machine that executes an expectation degree display mode pre-suggestion effect for making a player predict in which display mode the expectation degree display mode will be displayed as a variable effect. There is also a game machine that changes the display mode of the degree-of-expectation display mode from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation level display modes, when an expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation level display mode is executed, expectations that are not subject to the expectation level display mode prior suggestion effect This implicitly denies that the degree display mode is variable, and there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect execution means provides a variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation level display modes displayed on the display means at different timings will be varied. executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestive effect can be varied. As a result, even if the same presentation mode is used as the variable suggestion presentation, there is an effect that it is possible to make the expectation degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion presentation different.

In the gaming machine J1, a determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on the result of determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; and wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, when a privilege is given, the expectation level display mode can easily indicate a high expectation level. I will keep an eye on the content. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the variable suggestion effect notifies variable information of an expectation level display mode that is changed in stages.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, it is possible to inform the variable information of the target expectation level display mode by the variable suggestion performance, so that the variable suggestion performance can be provided to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention and enhance the production effect.

In the game machine J3, the variable suggestive effect displays a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating the extent to which the degree-of-expectation display mode is actually varied. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as the variable suggestive effect. There is an effect that the game can be played while giving expectation so that the amount becomes a real variable amount, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the game machine has a target notification means for notifying an expectation degree display mode targeted for the variable suggestion performance executed by the variable suggestion performance execution means before the variable suggestion performance ends. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by notifying the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestive effect to be executed this time, the variable There is an effect that the suggestive performance can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

In any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an expectation class setting means for setting an expectation class based on the determination result of the discriminating means, and based on the expectation class set by the expectation class setting means and an expectation level setting means for setting an expectation level for each of the plurality of expectation level display modes, wherein the expectation level display control means comprises the plurality of expectation level display modes set by the expectation level setting means. of the expectations, the expectation level display mode for indicating at least a part of the expectations is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the already displayed expectations and the expectations level setting means. A game machine J6 characterized in that a difference from the expected degree is suggested as the variable amount.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines J2 to J5, an effect is executed that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation level and the preset expectation level as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation level display mode in which the high expectation level is already displayed, the benefit is given. can increase the likelihood of Therefore, not only the performance content of the variable suggestive performance but also the display mode of the current degree of expectation display mode is selected by lottery, so that there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J2, an operation means operable by a player, an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for causing the operation means to be operated, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. an operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, wherein the display mode changing means varies the degree of expectation display mode according to the determination result by the operation determining means. Characterized game machine J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, the degree-of-expectation display mode can be varied in response to the operation of the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means. has the effect of

In the gaming machine J8, a determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; Acquisition means for acquiring entry information when a prescribed acquisition condition is met, and storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a prescribed number as an upper limit until the prescribed determination condition is met. possible storage means, preliminary discrimination means for executing preliminary discrimination based on the said entering ball information stored in the storing means, and the number of entering ball information indicating the number of said entering ball information stored in said storing means. and display means for displaying the number of entered ball information displayed by the displayed means for the number of entered ball information in response to the determination result of the operation determination means when a predetermined additional condition is met. A gaming machine J9 characterized by having additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect for changing a display mode for indicating the number of pieces of information on entering a ball.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of entered ball information can be changed by the additional effect executed in response to the operation of the operating means. , there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

The game machine J9 has an effect condition determining means for determining whether the expectation level display mode displayed by the expectation level display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determining means satisfies the effect condition. A game machine J10 characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the additional condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J9, when the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy the predetermined rendering conditions, the additional rendering is executed. There is an effect that the relevance can be given and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the expectation level display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expectation level display modes. Game machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J10, by executing additional effects, the number of effects to be executed can be complemented. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease.

<Feature K group> (Holding consecutive jackpot production)
Determining means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is established; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and a predetermined acquisition condition. acquisition means for acquiring entry information when the condition is satisfied; and storage means capable of storing the entry information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. and a pre-discrimination means for executing pre-discrimination based on the entered ball information stored in the storage means, wherein the pre-discrimination means determines that a pre-discrimination condition is satisfied at least during the privilege game. The pre-determination is executed when the pre-determination is performed, and the pre-determination means has a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination means. Game machine K1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, ball entry information is acquired based on a ball entering a starting hole, and holding means capable of holding the ball entry information until a lottery condition is satisfied, and a lottery condition is satisfied. A lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on ball entry information when the player wins, and an execution means for executing a winning game advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is winning. There is a game machine. Then, it has a preliminary discrimination means for discriminating in advance the entering ball information held in the holding means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the advance discrimination means determines that there is a winning in the holding at the time of the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that continues to display the display mode (the number of rounds) during a winning game when it is determined. (For example, JP-A-2014-30737).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, when a win is won again during a hold, a special effect can be executed during the second win game, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. However, it is configured to discriminate the winning information held at the end of the jackpot, and during the first winning game, the effect set at the time of winning is only executed. Even if the prize winning information is reserved, the performance for the first winning game cannot be changed, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In addition, although the production is configured to be continuous with respect to a plurality of winning games, only the production that allows the player to easily identify the break between the first winning game and the second winning game is executed. , there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how many winning games will be executed during the performance that is continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means executed during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the preliminary determination result.

In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means includes a plurality of small privilege games, and the preliminary determination condition is established when the minor privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, when the small privilege game is executed, the pre-determining condition is satisfied and the effect mode during the privilege game is set, so the execution status of the small privilege game It is possible to set the effect mode of the privilege game in accordance with. Therefore, even if the performance mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine K2 has privilege game selection means for selecting one privilege game from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, one privilege game is selected from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. There is an effect that variation can be provided and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the pre-determining means, when the result of the pre-determining is a predetermined result of pre-determining, the storing means includes the entering ball information for executing the privilege game. The performance mode setting means sets the performance mode during the privilege game corresponding to the number of small privilege games to be executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the preliminary discrimination means. A game machine K4 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the privilege game is set according to the number of the small privilege games determined by the preliminary determination means, so that the player can enjoy the privilege game. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user pay attention to the production mode.

In a gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means. Among them, a small privilege game number reporting means for reporting at least a part, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means, and the small privilege reported by the small privilege game number reporting means a first difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of games; and a notification for setting the number of the small privilege games to be notified by the number of small privilege games notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means. and a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the number of small privilege games (round games) to be executed during the privilege game (jackpot) is partially notified, so that one privilege can be obtained. To make it difficult for a player to grasp the number of small privilege games to be executed during a game, and to play a game while expecting that more small privilege games are executed even while the privilege games are being executed. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine K5 is characterized by comprising adding means for adding the number of said small privilege games to be executed in said privilege game pre-determined by said pre-determination means to said execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, when it is determined in advance that the privilege game will be executed by the prior determination means during the privilege game (jackpot), in the privilege game determined in advance The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage means by the adding means. As a result, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times at short intervals, the number of the small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is the same as the number of the small privilege games to be executed in the later privilege game. can be set by adding the number of Therefore, by seeing the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number reporting means, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed, and one privilege game ends. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

The game machine K5 or K6 has update determination means for determining whether or not to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means when the small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5 or K6, the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notifying means is determined by the update determining means. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small privilege game is executed, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number reporting means is not updated, when the next small privilege game is executed, It is possible to leave the possibility of updating the number of small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games informing means, and it is possible to play games while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed. effective.

In the game machine K7, a forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition. A game machine K8 characterized by having:

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of the game machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, the forced update means is notified by the small privilege game number notification means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games being played, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period during which the player is allowed to play the privilege game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, executed small privilege game number reporting means for reporting the number of the small privilege games already executed, the number of the small privilege games reported by the small privilege game number reporting means, Second difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means, and when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies a second condition. and forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the number of small privilege games notification means.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effect of the game machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition, the forced update means notifies by the small bonus game number notification means. To prevent the number of executed minor privilege games from becoming larger than the number of minor privilege games notified by a minor privilege game number informing means in order to forcibly update the number of executed minor privilege games. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number reporting means performs the prior determination of the entering ball information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period of time during which the privilege game is executed. is the result of the predetermined pre-determination, the game machine K10 is characterized in that a specific number of small bonus games is notified.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, among the periods during which the privilege game is being executed, the entering ball information acquired within the specific period is the privilege game as a result of the preliminary determination. , the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of obtaining information on entering a ball during a privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the execution number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number reporting means a third difference determining means for determining a difference; and when the determination result of the third difference determining means satisfies a third condition in a state where the one privilege game is finished, the one privilege game is finished. and effect continuation means for continuing the effect executed during the privilege game until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the determination result by the third difference determination means satisfies the third condition, the effect continuation means executes during the privilege game. The effect will continue to be displayed. As a result, when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, an effect to be executed during the privilege game can be continuously displayed after the end of the first privilege game. be.

In the gaming machine K11, the gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, during the period from the end of the first privilege game to the execution of the second privilege game by the effect continuation means, during the privilege game It is possible to reliably execute the production to be performed. Therefore, since a series of performances can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to play the game while expecting that more small privilege games will be executed while the performance is being executed. effective.

In any one of the game machines K5 to K12, stored number determination means for determining the number of the entered ball information stored in the storage means when the result of determination by the determination means is a predetermined determination result; and an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes to be executed during a privilege game, and stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the entering means determined by the storage number determination means. A gaming machine K13, characterized in that it has privilege game effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, in the case of a predetermined determination result, an effect mode during the privilege game is performed based on the number of entered ball information stored in the storage means. is selected, various effects can be provided to the player during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means stores, as the plurality of effect modes, that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result when the privilege game is started. A gaming machine K14, characterized in that it stores at least a first performance mode that can be notified to the player and a second performance mode that can be notified to the player after the privilege game is finished.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K13, it is notified that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the predetermined preliminary determination result by the performance mode selected by the special game performance mode selection means. Since it is possible to vary the timing of the display, the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group L> (change the production frequency with the game history)
Determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is established, effect execution means for executing an effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and effect for indicating the specific determination result by the effect execution means. a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player when executed; a storage means for storing corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is satisfied; and determining means for determining, based on the history information, whether to execute a specific effect among the effects to be executed.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not the game has been won. Then, there is a game machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player, as the variable effect that is executed for a predetermined period. (For example, JP-A-2012-249877).

In such a conventional gaming machine, since the presentation mode is varied based on the player's operation on the operating means, the player can be motivated to participate in the game. However, there is a problem that if the operation effect is frequently executed for a player who does not operate the operation means willingly, the player's desire to play will decrease.

According to the gaming machine L1, since execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific effect according to the progress of the game, etc., thereby improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine L1 has an effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables are set so that the selection rate of the specific effect is different, and the determination means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it determines a table.

According to the game machine L2, the selection rate of the specific performance can be switched by selecting the corresponding performance selection table in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, so that the selection rate of the specific performance can be varied with easy control. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has operation means operated by a player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and one of the effects includes the An operation effect is set to change the effect mode when the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation, and the specific condition is at least one condition that the operation determination means determines the predetermined operation. A game machine L3 characterized by being set to the conditions of

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operation means in the operation presentation, not only can the presentation mode be changed, but also the specific condition can be easily established, so that the history information can be obtained. can be varied and the execution ratio of the specific performance can be affected.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, accumulation means capable of accumulating at least the history information, setting means capable of setting accumulation values up to a predetermined upper limit based on accumulation results of the accumulation means, and selecting means for selecting an accumulated privilege system corresponding to the set accumulation value from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems; and accumulated privilege granting means for imparting an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system selected by the selecting means. and, when the new accumulated value is set by the setting means, the accumulated privilege granting means gives a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selecting means. and wherein the selection means selects one accumulated privilege system from among a plurality of accumulated privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, an accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and an accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is awarded. As a result, based on the history information, both the setting of the frequency with which the specific effect is executed and the provision of the accumulated benefit are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege imparted by the accumulated privilege imparting means differs for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, the accumulated benefits to be given can be varied according to the accumulated privilege system, so the enjoyment of obtaining various accumulated benefits while changing the operation contents of the operating means. can be provided to the player. Further, by changing the operation contents of the operation means, it is possible to change the performance frequency, so that there is an effect that the player can be provided with a new enjoyment for the performance to be executed.

The game machine L5 is characterized by comprising history information erasing means for erasing the history information stored in the storage means to the extent that the different accumulated privilege systems can be selected by the selection means. Game machine L6 to play.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the history information can be deleted to the extent that a different accumulated privilege system can be selected. It is possible to make it easier for the accumulated privilege system to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits.

In addition, since the history information is partially erased by the history information erasing means, the accumulated value set by the setting means also changes (decreases). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the value is reached and the performance effect is lowered.

A game machine L7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines L4 to L6, the game machine L7 is characterized by having guide means for guiding game contents for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by the selection means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, a specific accumulated privilege system is selected by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guidance means. Therefore, there is an effect that various accumulation benefits can be given to the player, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machine L7, since the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be varied by the guide means, a different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating the operation means according to the presentation mode of the operation presentation. It will be done. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine L8, the guide means selects, as the effect mode of the operation effect, a notification effect mode in which the operation means is made to perform the predetermined operation, or a non-report effect mode in which no notification is made. A game machine L9 characterized in that it guides game contents by using a.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effects, it is possible to execute the effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operation means and the effect mode in which it is difficult to perform the operation means. A different accumulated benefit system can be selected simply by operating. Therefore, there is an effect that various benefits can be given to the player and the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9 has system selection means for allowing the player to select the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game contents guided by the guide means from among the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A game machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the game content so that the player can select the accumulated privilege system desired by the player, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature M group> (Discrimination measures when a small hit is confirmed)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. judgment means capable of judging the case, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means is stopped. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and a game ball enters during the period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a specific area in which the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter, and a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. privilege granting means for giving; privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means; and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. and a notification means for notifying notification information that allows a player to identify the type of the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or longer after the notification information is notified by the notification means. and means for making it difficult to enter a ball into the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols or the like, it is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, so that the winning game is further executed, and the game set after that If the state is determined by the type of winning game executed first, it is determined whether it is a winning type that gives a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific ball entrance or specific area is determined. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor may increase due to the game method in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game.

The gaming machine M1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine M1, by confirming the notification information indicating the type of privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, if the player tries to avoid being granted a specific privilege type, the other privilege type is displayed. Even in the case of , it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the specific ball-entering means, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the game parlor.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes combining a pseudo-stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when the specific privilege game is executed, the game ball is sent to the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that avoids entering a ball.

A gaming machine M3, wherein the gaming machine M1 or M2 has variable control means for varying a ball-entering rate of balls entering the specific area according to the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, it is possible to vary the rate of entering a ball into the specific area depending on the type of privilege game to be executed, so the probability of entering a ball into the specific area is increased. can be easily controlled.

<Characteristics N group> (Direct hit production 2)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time the ball enters the specific ball-entering means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the effect is only performed up to the winning game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

The game machine N1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only the identification information indicates a specific determination result, but also the performance can make the player expect that the ball will enter the specific area, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine N1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game provided from a plurality of effects.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means is characterized in that, when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a period set in advance has passed, the effect is switched to a specific effect and executed. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the ball does not enter the specific area, the specific effect is switched to, so that it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. There is an effect that it can be notified to

<Feature P group> (A delay device is provided at the top of the V attacker to prevent Choro strikes)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the special game execution means, and a specification that the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter. an area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means; a notifying means for notifying information about the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed; and adjusting means for reducing the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols or the like, it is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, so that the winning game is further executed, and the game set after that If the state is determined by the type of winning game executed first, it is determined whether it is a winning type that gives a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific ball entrance or specific area is determined. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor may increase due to the game method in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game.

The game machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantages of the game parlor.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of flowing down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjustment means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine P1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by the player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 flow path and a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means adjusts the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific entering ball A game machine P2, characterized in that the game machine P2 is characterized in that it allocates at a predetermined ratio to a specific channel that allows a ball to enter the means and a channel that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by the player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 channel and a second channel in which the game ball that has flowed down the first channel is difficult to flow down, and the adjustment means prevents the game ball that has flowed down the second channel from rolling for a predetermined period or more. A game machine P3, characterized in that it has a rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjustment means. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means by passing a predetermined period.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed to when the specific ball-entering means becomes capable of entering a ball is transferred to the second channel. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from when a game ball is shot until it reaches the specific ball entering means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the ball to be entered into the specific ball entry means in the privilege game.

<Feature Q group> (Choro strike countermeasure 2)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the special game execution means, and a specification that the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter. an area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means; and adjusting means for reducing the amount of game balls that are guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time to a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means. Game machine Q1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, a gaming method is performed in which a game ball is not entered into a specific ball entrance or a specific area, so there is a risk of increasing the disadvantages of the game parlor. was there.

The game machine Q1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantages of the game parlor.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of flowing down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjustment means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine Q1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by a player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 flow path and a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means adjusts the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific entering ball A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that the game machine Q2 is characterized in that it distributes at a predetermined ratio to a specific channel that allows a ball to enter the means and a channel that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by a player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 channel and a second channel in which the game ball that has flowed down the first channel is difficult to flow down, and the adjustment means prevents the game ball that has flowed down the second channel from rolling for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjusting means. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means by passing a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed to when the specific ball-entering means becomes capable of entering a ball is transferred to the second channel. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that the period from when a game ball is shot until it reaches the specific ball-entering means through the adjusting means is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the ball to be entered into the specific ball entry means in the privilege game.

<Feature R group> (Production up to V passage in small hits and direct hits)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time the ball enters the specific ball-entering means. , wherein the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting stepwise switching of the game ball shooting method before the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed. A game machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the effect is only performed up to the winning game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

The game machine N1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only the identification information indicates a specific determination result, but also the performance can make the player expect that the ball will enter the specific area, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine R1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect execution means is characterized in that, when a game ball does not enter the specific area after a period set in advance has elapsed, the effect is switched to a specific effect and executed. Gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the ball does not enter the specific area, the specific effect is switched to. There is an effect that it can be notified to

<Feature S group> (Two types of control switching between small hit and pattern hit)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and a first state in which the guidance path for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. A switching means for switching, and first switching information for switching the guideway by the switching means when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the above and setting means for setting second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. After the game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous to the player or set to be disadvantageous to the player. There has been proposed a system in which a game ball enters an area to further give a privilege such as a winning game. (For example, JP-A-2013-9795).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

The gaming machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guideway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player different guidance modes up to the specific area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the gaming machine S1 is switched to the first state by switching the guideway according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the guideway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the game ball can easily enter the specific area, There is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is granted by hitting the ball in the specific area even in the second privilege game.

A gaming machine S3, wherein in the gaming machine S1 or S2, a plurality of different information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be diversified, and the guidance state of the taxiway can be diversified.

<Feature T group> (Two types of switching 2 for small hits and pattern hits)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and a first state in which the guidance path for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. A switching means for switching, and first switching information for switching the guideway by the switching means when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the above and setting means for setting second switching information for switching the guideway to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. After the game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous to the player or set to be disadvantageous to the player. There has been proposed a system in which a game ball enters an area to further give a privilege such as a winning game. (For example, JP-A-2013-9795).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

The gaming machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guideway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player different guidance modes up to the specific area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

In the game machine T1, the game ball is guided to the specific area by different guide paths depending on whether the second state is switched to the first state by the second switching information or the first state is switched to the first state by the first switching information. A game machine T2 characterized in that the is induced.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from becoming bored early because the player is guided to the specific area by a different guidance.

A gaming machine T3 characterized in that in the gaming machine T1 or T2, a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be diversified, and there is an effect that the guidance state of the taxiway can be diversified.

<Feature group U> (Set the production mode based on the length of the period from special 2 winning to special 2 fluctuation)
a first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; an acquisition means for acquiring the acquired information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a maximum number; second determination means for performing a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when a second determination condition is satisfied; and the first determination dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, the first identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the means or the second identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time; In the gaming machine, dynamic display of the second identification information is not started while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect based on the dynamic display of the second identification information, and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is satisfied. and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect execution means based on the determination result of the period determiner. A gaming machine U1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a game machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and different lotteries are executed depending on the starting port into which the game ball enters. Then, there is one that executes a suggestive effect that suggests the result of a winning lottery that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into each starting port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the other starting opening while a winning lottery is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into one starting opening, By preventing the execution of a new lottery until the lottery is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the lottery excessively.

However, the period from when a game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning lottery (suggestion effect) based on the entering ball is executed is based on the entry of the game ball into the other starting port. Since it differs according to the status of the winning lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting hole, a suggestive effect for indicating the lottery result of the winning lottery executed based on the entering ball is executed. If the period until the game is extended, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestive effect is being executed based on which ball entry, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced, resulting in a decrease in the player's willingness to play. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine U1, the effect of the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, it is possible to execute the period performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The game machine U1 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means determines the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the period is discriminated based on.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, the second identification information is displayed after the predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the residual dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed by the period determination means. Since it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of is started, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period effect in line with the actual game contents, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the obtaining means obtains the obtained information, and the period determination means determines whether the predetermined start condition is satisfied and then the relevant start condition is satisfied. The game machine U3 is characterized in that it determines the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information for which a start condition is established is started.

According to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is the period determination. Since it is discriminated by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period effect in line with the actual game contents, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing means includes at least a period from when the obtaining means obtains the obtained information until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started. The game machine U4 is characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine U3, as the effect period in which the period effect is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the second identification information is dynamically generated based on the acquired information. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual game situation in the period corresponding to the actual game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

The game machine U1 or U2 has specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the period determining means is determined by the specific game execution means. It determines the period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, and the period effect execution means at least, after the predetermined execution condition is established , the game machine U5, characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period including the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the period production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, dynamic display determination means capable of determining whether the first identification information is dynamically displayed when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; and the dynamic display determination means. a second period determining means for performing determination of a second period different from the period determining means when determining that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed by The means determines a period from when the acquired information is acquired in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started. A gaming machine U6 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing at which the period determination means can perform determination, the second identification information is displayed at a timing different from that timing. Determination by the period determining means can be executed. Therefore, since the period from when the predetermined start condition is established until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started can be determined at a plurality of timings, the period effect in line with the actual game content can be executed. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means may provide, as the period effects, a first period effect executed during a predetermined first period and a second period effect executed after the first period. and a second period effect executed in the period effect, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determining means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period performance can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, the effect mode setting means selects part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect when the determination result by the period determining means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine U8 characterized in that it sets the

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is being executed or the second period effect is being executed for the player. can make it difficult to understand Therefore, even when the period determining means determines that the second period is long, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

<Feature group V> (When a predetermined condition is satisfied, execute a general pattern long opening suggestion effect)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the ball is hit, and privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. a game machine comprising: determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, and the effect executing means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, an effect is executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In such a game machine, the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestive performance, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the game ball will be easily entered into the starting hole. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, when the suggestive effect is executed, the player stops shooting the game ball and restarts the game based on the effect result of the suggestive effect. In that case, the game is stopped until the suggestive effect is completed, and the game is restarted in accordance with the timing when the movable member moves, or if the effect mode of the suggestive effect is highly likely to be off. , play the game until the suggestive effect is completed. During the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning lottery (suggestive effect) based on the entering ball is executed, the game is played to the other starting port. Because it differs depending on the situation of the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, after the game ball enters the starting hole, the lottery result of the winning lottery executed based on the entering ball If the period until the suggestive effect for indicating is executed becomes longer, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestive effect is being executed based on which ball entry, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced. , there is a problem that the desire to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to inform that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to satisfy the performance condition, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, as the types of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first type corresponding to a first specific game that is advantageous to the player and a second type that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to 2 specific games, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the presentation by the presentation executing means is performed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In a gaming machine V1 or V2, a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the performance condition is established and specific identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determining means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time. and display means, wherein the condition determination means determines that the performance condition is established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the performance condition can be established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player can be motivated to play a game in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine V3, information holding means capable of holding execution information indicating that the judgment has been executed by the judgment means, and judging whether the execution information held by the information holding means satisfies a valid condition. The condition determining means determines that the effect condition is established even when the effective condition determining means determines that the effective condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be established while the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if there occurs a timing when the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed in spite of the fact that a game is being played in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the effect can be executed by the effect executing means. . Therefore, it is possible to stably execute an effect for a player who is actively playing a game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In either game machine V3 or V4, acquisition means capable of acquiring acquisition information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. , wherein the determination means performs the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means is the acquisition means performs a first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and performs a second condition determination based on the determination being performed by the determination means, and the effect execution means, A game machine characterized in that the performance is executed when it is determined that the performance condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition determination or the result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3 or V4, the condition determining means can determine whether the performance condition is established at a plurality of timings. Therefore, it is possible to stably execute the performance and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine V1 or V5, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a timing notification effect for notifying the timing at which the variable ball-entering means is in the first state. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1 or V5, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing at which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is determined by the effect executed by the effect execution means. Since the game is notified to the player, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the effect by the effect executing means is executed, and the effect is that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo-timing notification effect for notifying a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball-entering means enters the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect condition is not established, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball-entering means is in the first state is notified, so that a game in which only the determination condition is established without establishing the effect condition is performed. There is an effect that the player can be made to play a disadvantageous game.

A game machine V8 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the performance condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, since the determination condition is easier to satisfy than the performance condition, the player is motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the performance condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature group W> (Information of advantageous small winnings with a higher probability than the distribution ratio during time saving in the small winning performance during time saving)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; determining means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means; and executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determining means is the first determination result; and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, game state setting means capable of setting a first game state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; Pre-determining means for pre-determining before the determination based on the acquired information is executed; and, the game state setting means, based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition in the state in which the first game state is set, the first game state and is to set a different second game state, and the effect execution means is based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A game machine W1 characterized by being capable of executing a suggestive effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) at which the game state advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state and the probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game is lowered. (For example, 65% or less) may be set to suppress the gambling aspect of the game.

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a win (for example, a big win or a small win) is won in a state in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make the player feel anticipation for the win notification effect during the advantageous game state, and the willingness to play is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, a first privilege game or a second privilege game more advantageous than the first privilege game is carried out based on the result of the preliminary determination by the suggestive effect executed during the first game state. is suggested. Since the suggestion performance can be executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. It can make it easier to suggest Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means is configured such that the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the predetermined end condition is established is a pre-determination result indicating the second determination result. The game machine W1 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the suggestive effect when the article pre-discrimination result is obtained than when the pre-discrimination result for indicating the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the pre-determination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the second game state is set based on the establishment of the termination condition of the first game state indicates the second determination result. In this case, the suggestive effect by the effect executing means is more likely to be executed than in the case where the first determination result is indicated. As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the determination result of the determination means executed during the first game state, the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determined result, it is possible to increase the ratio of execution of the second privilege game when the first suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine W2 has a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio of the first judgment result and a ratio of the second judgment result of the judgment result by the judgment means, wherein the ratio setting means is , wherein the ratio of the second determination result is set to be higher when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. Gaming machine W3.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the second determination result during the second game state than during the first game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second privilege game is executed when the first suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the effect executing means defines a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the preliminary determination is performed by the preliminary determination means as the effect period. A game machine W4 characterized by being capable of executing a suggestive effect.

According to W4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestive effect is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the pre-determined acquired information is executed as the effect period. has the effect of increasing

<Feature X group> (When the conditions for shifting from the time saving state to the normal state are met, the notification is executed during the time saving state to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations in the normal state)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; Determination means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A game having execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which acquisition is more difficult than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is established in the state where the first game state is set, and the storage means stores the A memory number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored, and a notification mode setting capable of setting a notification mode based on the determination result of the memory number determination means in a state where the first game state is set. means, and notification execution means capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, wherein the notification mode setting means performs at least the memory at a specific timing of the first game state. The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). Further, in such a game machine, when a specific game state is set, a specific start opening is provided to make it easier to enter a ball than when another game state is set, and a game is played at the specific start opening. When a lottery based on the entry of a ball is executed, a privilege game with a high degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another start opening, and a specified There is a configuration in which the right of a lottery to be executed based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number as an upper limit. In the gaming machine configured as described above, when a specific game state is set, it is possible for the player to efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of a specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. However, there is a problem that the desire to play the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to set the mode of notification executed by the notification executing means according to the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period of the first game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game for varying the number of acquired information stored so that various types of notification operations are executed by the notification execution means, and the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the game machine X1, the notification execution means executes acquisition suggestion notification for suggesting acquisition of the acquisition information during the first game state, and the notification mode setting means is the stored number determination means. A gaming machine X2, characterized in that, when it is determined that the acquisition information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, when the number of acquisition information stored in the storage means in the specific period in the first gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. Further, when the number of acquisition information stored in the storage means in the specific period in the first game state is larger than a predetermined number, for example, when the storage means stores the upper limit number of acquisition information, an acquisition suggestion is made. Since it is possible to configure such that the notification is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the contents of the notification executed by the notification execution means.

In the game machine X1 or X2, a discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of discriminations executed by the discrimination means in a state in which the first game state is set, and based on the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means and transition condition determination means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification execution means is configured until the transition condition is satisfied after it is determined by the transition condition determination means that the transition condition is satisfied. A game machine X3 characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specified period of time.

According to the game machine X3, in addition to the effects of the game machine X2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is established, the player is made to play a game for acquiring the acquisition information within a limited period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the last period in which the first game state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means has at least , the notification effect is executed during the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the memory number determination means at the end timing of the first period. and a second period effect execution means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characteristic game machine X4.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effects of the game machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine X4, the number of acquired information stored in the storage means at the time the first period is set and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the end of the first period and an increase number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period based on the number of A gaming machine X5 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the presentation mode of the second period presentation is set based on the number of acquired information stored during the first period, so the first period is set. By adjusting the number of acquired information stored at the point in time when the player changes the number of acquired information stored during the first period, it is possible to vary the presentation mode of the second period presentation. . Therefore, since different effects can be executed according to the game content executed by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine X4 or X5 has pre-determination means for determining in advance the acquired information stored in the storage means before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. is a gaming machine X6, wherein the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X5, it is possible to set the presentation mode of the second period presentation based on the preliminary determination result of the acquired information stored in the storage means. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested by the second period presentation.

In the game machine X6, the second period effect executing means is provided when the determination result of the determination means during execution is other than the specific determination result, and the determination result of the preliminary determination means is the specific determination result. In the case of indicating, the second period effect is executed until the determination result of the determination means based on the acquired information, which is the specific determination result, is notified. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X6, when the determination result of the prior determination means is a specific determination result, the effect execution means continues until the identification information corresponding to the prior determination is stopped and displayed. A performance is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect executed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means sets a suggestive effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being a setting.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X7, the suggestive effect mode suggests that the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which determination resulted in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Set multiple time-saving end conditions and grant different benefits according to the time-saving end conditions that are met)
Determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. , a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is likely to be executed, and a second game state in which the discrimination is more difficult to execute than the first game state. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state based on at least the establishment of a predetermined transition condition in a state in which the first game state is set; a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as conditions; and when the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means is satisfied and a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the above, wherein the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege. A gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is provided when a transition condition is satisfied.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in the gaming machine, when a specific game state is set, the specific game state is set by setting the fluctuation period of the second lottery to be shorter than when another game state is set. is set so that the second lottery is executed more frequently.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set during the specific game state is constant, the game becomes monotonous during the specific game state, and the player's motivation to play decreases. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first game state in which the acquisition information is easily acquired is set, it differs depending on the established transition condition among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first game state to the second game state. Benefits can be given. Therefore, even though the first game state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the first game state to end without obtaining a privilege. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game for making the setting, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine Y1, the transition condition setting means sets the condition to be established based on the fact that the number of determinations by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine Y2 characterized in that it is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit to the number of determinations performed by the determination means during the period in which the first game state is set, so that the player is not overwhelmed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the privilege is granted.

In gaming machine Y1 or Y2, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and predetermined execution specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period when a condition is satisfied, and The determination is executed based on the entry of a game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the second game state. The game machine Y3 is characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means imparts a game state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first game state as the first privilege granted when the first transition condition is established. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by:

In the game machine Y4, determination means capable of executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period of time. and dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the predetermined execution condition is that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner. and the dynamic display period setting means displays a shorter dynamic display when the first privilege is granted than when the first privilege is not granted. A gaming machine Y5 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the target display period.

In the game machine Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means causes the determination result of the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set to be a special determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine Y6 characterized in that a condition that is established based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number is set as the second transition condition.

According to the game machine Y6, in addition to the effects of the game machine Y1 or Y2, the first game state changes to the second game state according to the determination result of the determination means executed during the period in which the first game state is set. , the period during which the first game state continues can be made indefinite. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic AA Group> (Make it difficult for the player to understand the trigger until the jackpot game is executed)
a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition; a first determination means for executing a first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; A second determination means for executing a second determination when a second determination condition different from the first determination condition is satisfied; a determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is satisfied; Variable ball entry means capable of changing from a difficult first state to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first state; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game that causes the variable ball entering means to change to the second state for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second determination condition is that the variable ball entering means can be established based on the entry of the ball, and the privilege game execution means is a first execution condition that is established when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, or , the privilege game is executed based on the establishment of a second execution condition that can be established based on the determination result of the second determination means, and the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first Execution of an effect for notifying first information indicating that the determination result is the determination result or second information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result using the same effect mode. means, the effect executing means is configured to determine a period from execution of the effect to execution of the privilege game based on the establishment of the first execution condition, and a period from the execution of the effect to the The game machine AA1 is characterized in that the performance is executed so that the period until the privilege game is executed based on the establishment of the second execution condition is the same.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, a first lottery is executed to determine whether the game is successful or not, and the lottery result is a win. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. A first suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the first lottery to the player and a second suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player can be executed. (for example, JP-A-2011-115411). In such a gaming machine, by executing the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, the player can enjoy the game while having expectations for both the first lottery and the second lottery. It was possible to make it play, and it was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, since the effect modes of the effects executed are different between the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, there is a problem that the game situation is easily determined by the player, and the player's desire to play is reduced. . It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine AA1, regardless of which execution condition is satisfied, the period from when the effect is executed by the effect executing means to when the privilege game is executed can be made the same. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to understand on which execution condition the privilege game to be executed is based. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, the second execution condition is met after the effect executing means executes the effect for notifying the second information indicating that the determination result of the determining means is the specific determination result. A game machine AA2 is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the game machine AA2 cannot.

According to the game machine Z2, after the performance is executed by the performance executing means, the special performance can be executed when the privilege game cannot be executed, so that the player is provided with an easily understandable performance. There is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In gaming machines AA1 to AA2, a gaming machine having a game area in which game balls can flow down and a shooting means capable of varying the shooting intensity and allowing the game balls to reach the game area, The game area includes at least a first game area in which a game ball shot with one shot intensity by the shooting means can flow down, and a game ball shot with a predetermined shot intensity different from the one shot intensity. A second game area different from the first game area that can flow down, and a first ball entry means that satisfies the first determination condition when a game ball enters the first game area and a specific ball entry means that satisfies the determination condition by entering a game ball, and the bonus game is performed by the variable ball entry means and the bonus game execution means in the second game area. is executed, the specific variable ball entry means capable of changing from a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first state is arranged. The game machine AA3 is characterized in that the effect execution means executes the effect in an effect mode including a variable discharge notification for firing the game ball with the predetermined discharge intensity.

According to the game machine AA3, since the notification for varying the firing intensity is executed based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, the timing of varying the firing intensity can also be the same. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution trigger of the specific game can be made more difficult to understand.

In the gaming machine AA3, a first period required for the game ball flowing down the second game area to reach the variable ball entry means, and a game ball flowing down the second game area to the specific variable ball entry means A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that the second period required to reach the point is different.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA3, the timing at which the ball flowing down the second game area enters the second variable ball entry means and the timing at which the ball enters the specific variable ball entry means are different. Therefore, it is possible to sequentially confirm whether the game ball flowing down the second game area enters the variable ball entering means or enters the specific variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the game ball flowing down more enjoyable.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means, and the privilege game execution means is the dynamic display means. When the identification information dynamically displayed by is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating the specific determination result, the privilege game is executed, and the effect execution means is the dynamic display means The gaming machine AA5 executes the presentation during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

<Characteristics AB group> (provide a period to increase the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed with one electric chew open)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and when a predetermined execution condition is established, A specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entering means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and a determination condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. If it is established, a determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed; and when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped in a specific display mode, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, wherein the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means is set by the specific game. The game machine AB1 is characterized by comprising specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period in which a short dynamic display period shorter than the predetermined period during which the ball means is varied to the first state is likely to be set.

According to the gaming machine AB1, when the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, it becomes easier to set a dynamic display period shorter than the period during which one specific game is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the discrimination by the discrimination means a plurality of times during one specific game period. It is possible to make the player play the game while anticipating that the specific period will be set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a gaming machine AB1, a second discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined second discrimination and second identification information for indicating the result of the second discrimination executed by the second discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a prescribed period of time. Any one of a plurality of dynamic display periods can be set as a dynamic display period of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means and the second dynamic display means. and a second dynamic display period setting means, wherein the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. A first game state in which the dynamic display period of the first period can be set by the second dynamic display period setting means, and a second period longer than the first period than the first game state and a state setting means capable of setting at least a second game state in which is easily set.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1, there is an effect that the number of determinations by the determination means per unit time can be increased in the first game state more than in the second game state.

In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the game state setting means sets, as the first game state, an advantageous first game state that can be set for a first period and a second period that is shorter than the advantageous first game state. A possible disadvantageous first game state can be set at least, and the execution condition is satisfied more when the advantageous first game state is set than when the disadvantageous first game state is set. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized by being easy to use.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the longer the first game state is set, the easier it is to execute the special game. Therefore, the privilege game is executed during the first game state even though the first game state is set for a long period of time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Any one of the game machines AB1 to AB3 has transition condition determination means capable of determining whether a predetermined transition condition is established, and the game state setting means, in a state in which the first game state is set, The second game state is set when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the execution condition is satisfied when the transition condition determining means determines that a specific transition condition is satisfied. A gaming machine AB4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a special game can be executed when a specific transition condition is satisfied and the first game state ends. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game until the end.

The game machine AB4 is characterized by having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific transition condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Gaming machine AB5.

According to the gaming machine AB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, a suggestive effect suggesting that a specific transition condition is established while the first game state is set is executed. is executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristic BA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power; notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power is supplied by the power supply means; and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed In a gaming machine having effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and voice output means capable of outputting a sound based on voice data of a predetermined period, the voice output means is configured so that the notification is performed by the notifying means. The sound is output from the start position of the sound data during the notification period to be executed, and the sound is output from the predetermined position of the sound data when the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Characterized gaming machine BA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is a method that stops subtraction of the variable time when the power is turned off during a predetermined variable time, displays a recovery screen after the power is turned on, and restarts the subtraction of the stopped variable time (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016. -005505). In such a game machine, it was possible to inform the player that the power was turned on by displaying the recovery screen in an easy-to-understand manner. There is a problem that it is not possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the subtraction of the variable time has been restarted. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of the gaming situation at the time of power return in a more comprehensible manner.

According to the game machine BA1, even while the notification indicating that the power is supplied is being executed, the sound output during the period during which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that the period during which the power supply is notified and the subsequent period can be associated with each other. Also, at the timing when the notification indicating that the power is supplied is finished and the predetermined effect is started, the sound based on the sound data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the sound data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect to be executed after the end of the notification indicating that the power is supplied. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without making the player feel uncomfortable.

It should be noted that, when using the gaming machine BA1 described above, a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure variation is being executed at the time the power is turned off, and the determination result during the predetermined period during which the power is turned off A storable storage means is further provided, and when it is determined that the power is turned off during the special figure fluctuation when the power is supplied, during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied, the special It is preferable to configure so as to output BGM that is output during figure fluctuation. Thereby, while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being performed, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure variation is being performed by using the voice. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, it is preferable that the period for notifying that the power is supplied is continuously set until the start-up process for various control devices of the pachinko machine 10 is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that the power supply has been supplied. In addition, if the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation, or if the special figure fluctuation is started during the period of notifying that the power supply is supplied, the period of notifying that the power supply is over , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing of the normal display screen. In this case, determine the period from the time the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure variation in progress, and set the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure variation in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time period (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect to inform that the power is supplied by a predetermined time period (1 second). . As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect corresponding to the remaining variable time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify it, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BB group> (Different background change timing according to pattern change speed at the time of button operation)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. , an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determiner, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. A variable timing setting for setting a timing for varying the presentation mode based on a dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation is performed. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by comprising means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is also a game in which operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and various effects are set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a game machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. It was possible to make the player operate willingly, that is, to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Since the number of performance modes to be executed becomes scarce, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of performance modes and to enhance the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine BB, since the performance mode can be changed according to the variation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, various performances can be provided. In the gaming machine BB described above, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is conceivable as the effect mode variable by the effect mode changing means, for example. Thereby, the timing for variably setting the background mode can be varied according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, in a state immediately before the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide notification means for notifying the player of the current dynamic display speed of the identification information. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode will be changed immediately after operating the operation means in order to change the effect mode. Furthermore, if the period from when the player operates the operation means to change the effect mode to when the effect mode is changed is longer than or equal to the predetermined period, the player is informed that the effect mode will be changed after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is preferable to configure to display the comments shown in . As a result, when an operation for changing the presentation mode is executed, it is possible for the game company to easily grasp whether or not the game machine is accepting the operation.

Furthermore, when providing an interval of a predetermined period or more from operating the operation means until the effect mode is varied, for example, the timing at which the next special figure variation is executed is configured to be the predetermined period described above. good to do By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode in a state in which the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic BC group> (Switching development effects according to button operation timing and number of operations)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed operation timing determination means capable of determining the operation timing determination means capable of measuring the number of times that the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determination means to be performed; a determination result of the operation timing determination means; a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode based on the measurement result of the measuring means; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance in accordance with the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means. Characteristic gaming machine BC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery. , a privilege game was executed that was advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is also a game in which operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and various effects are set based on the details of the operation performed by the player on the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). Such a game machine is configured to set an effect mode based on the operation content or the number of times of operation on the operation means. In a game machine constructed in this way, it is difficult to set a variety of presentation modes according to the operation contents of the operating means, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. There has been a demand for a game machine that can set modes.

According to the game machine BC1, the performance mode can be changed based on both the operation timing and the number of times of operation of the operation means, so that more diverse performances can be set and the performance effect can be enhanced. .

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BC1, it is configured to be able to execute a continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation of the operation means a plurality of times, and the period during which the continuous operation effect is executed Of these, it is preferable to configure so as to set the effect mode variable timing of subsequent continuous operation effects in accordance with the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the timing of the first operation to the operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations to the operation means is varied. Good to configure. With such a configuration, it is possible to set various effects modes without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the operation means for the first time, it is preferable to set the same presentation mode for the operation to the operation means for the first time. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing of the operation means for the first time.

In addition, according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed when the continuous operation effect is completed, the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed. As a result, the player can be motivated to participate in the continuous operation presentation. In addition, the continuous operation production can be executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the production mode executed after the continuous operation production is set based on the production result of the continuous operation production and the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation. , and based on the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period, the effect mode variable condition of the continuous operation effect (operation It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic BD group> (Provide a state in which the display of the number of pending balls displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of pending balls and a state in which it is not synchronized)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is established based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; storage means capable of storing information up to a first predetermined number as an upper limit at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied; effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect multiple times; and a mode display means for displaying the display mode of on the display means, wherein the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when a first condition is satisfied. is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect executed by the effect executing means is displayed. A game machine BD1 characterized in that a second mode for indicating the number of games is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery can be stored so that the game can be played efficiently. In some gaming machines configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (reserved) to execute a lottery, a reserved symbol is displayed to show the number of reserved rights stored to the player. (For example, JP-A-2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of reservations, the content of the game can be determined based on the number of reservations, and the game can be played efficiently. In addition, a function of determining the lottery result in advance is given to the stored hold before the lottery is actually executed, and the stored number of holds becomes a specific number. In some cases, a series of effects (continuous effects) are executed using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of reservations is executed. In such a continuous effect, the results of pre-discrimination for multiple holds can be executed using a series of effects, so the winning is included in the target lottery rather than the effect based on the result of a single lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay attention to the performance. However, in the gaming machine described above, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold pattern corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbols indicating the hold targeted for the continuous effect. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine up to which reserved symbols are to be subjected to the continuous effect, and there is a problem that the effect of the effect is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of informing a player of reserved symbols to be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the game machine BD1, the display mode indicating the number of memories displayed on the display means may display the number of memories stored in the memory means according to the conditions established, or may display information indicating the number of times of presentation. Since it is possible to variably set when to play, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine BD1, it is preferable to provide second display means capable of always displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the number stored in the storage means, which affects the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-described display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emission mode of light emission means such as an LED. Also good.

Further, it may be configured such that the number stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means while the information indicating the number of performances is displayed on the display means. Furthermore, it is preferable that the second display means be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of performances, the number stored in the storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the performance period may be displayed. (eg, one display every 30 seconds). Also, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol is stopped (including temporary stop) during the production period may be used.

<Feature BE group> (Notice effect executed only when the background is changed)
An operation means operable by a player, an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a performance mode for varying the performance mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means. variable means, effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode changing means, and when the variable timing at which the effect mode is varied by the effect mode changing means satisfies a specific condition; , and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to see if the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there is a game machine that executes a suggestive effect to make the player play the game while expecting that the lottery result will be a win. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestive effect, there has been a configuration in which the mode in which the suggestive effect is executed can be changed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-213999). Furthermore, there is also a game that varies the mode (background) in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the player's operation of the operating means. In such a game machine, by executing a dedicated suggestive effect according to the set mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by providing a variety of effects to the player. However, there is a problem in that the player willingly operates the operating means after watching the special effects corresponding to each mode and loses the desire to change the mode. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of allowing a player to change modes at will.

According to the game machine BE1, since a dedicated effect can be executed when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience the game even if the game is played for a long time during the period when each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to experience various effects to operate the operating means.

<Characteristic BF Group> (A period during which the current mode is notified and a period during which the current mode is not notified are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the period when the current mode is not notified.)
A mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means, and set by the mode setting means. a production mode notifying means capable of informing a given production mode, an operating means operable by a player, and an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; The effect mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or during a second period different from the first period. The game machine BF1 is characterized in that, when the game machine BF1 is set, information for indicating the performance mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the game machine BF1, the performance mode reporting period and the non-reporting period are set, and the performance mode can be reported based on the operation to the operation means even during the non-reporting period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means so as to grasp the presentation mode. In this case, when the predetermined operation is not performed on the operation means during the second period, it is preferable to notify other information about the game. It is preferable to configure so as to report suggestive information suggesting the speed and the determination result of the determining means. Thus, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the player's operation on the operating means.

<Characteristic BG group> (Step up button vibes)
Operation means that can be operated by a player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and the vibration means a vibration amount varying means capable of varying the amount of vibration for vibrating the operation means to a different vibration amount; It has a period setting means for setting a possible variable period and a suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine BG1. According to the game machine BG1, since the suggestive effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operation means is varied, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means.

<Feature BH group> (Informs the speed of pattern change with the color of the button)
determining means for executing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the fact that the identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. operation determination means capable of determining the operation determination means, operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determination means, and mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means, The mode changing means changes the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. A game machine BH1 characterized in that the . According to the game machine BH1, it is possible to grasp the dynamic display speed of the identification information depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Feature BI group> (The background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period of time; the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode A gaming machine comprising stop display means for stop-displaying in a display mode, and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means, The stop display means is capable of stopping and displaying a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and is capable of varying the performance mode based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. A game machine BI1 characterized by comprising a variable means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine B11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, it is preferable that the stop display mode can be selected. Specifically, it is preferable that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operation means.

<Characteristic BJ group> (prevention of leading in the preparation drive of the character action)
display means for executing a predetermined effect display; effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario; movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation; a production operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the production operation based on the production scenario; and production scenario setting means capable of setting one production scenario from a plurality of production scenarios as the production scenario; The movable means is configured to be movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. It has an executable preparation movement control means, and the preparation movement control means executes the preparation movement before the production display is executed by the production display control means based on the production scenario. A gaming machine BJ1 characterized by: According to the game machine BJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to reliably execute an effect based on the effect scenario. Furthermore, since it is configured to perform the preparatory movement control separately from the presentation action based on the presentation scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed both when the presentation action is executed and when it is not executed. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the performance action is executed even if the movable means performs the preparatory movement.

<Feature BK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the action state of the character)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means. In a gaming machine in which a display means capable of displaying and a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the information corresponding to the information. storage means capable of storing up to a first predetermined number until determination is performed, and storing the information stored in the storage means until dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started pre-determining means capable of pre-determining in advance; effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determining means; and the effect set by the effect mode setting means A specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the mode at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. and effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by Game machine BK1 to play. According to the game machine BK1, the performance mode set based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means can be replaced with the replacement performance mode, so that the performance can be executed according to the situation, and the performance effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move within a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode replacement means based on the position information of the movable means. It should be configured so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means indicates a position at which it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the effect mode replacement means changes the movable means. It is preferable to set a rendering mode that is not used, for example, a rendering mode that uses only the display means, as a replacement rendering mode. In addition, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate, and using the above-mentioned technical idea in a game machine with enhanced production effect, the production mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic BL Group> (Different setting timing of operation effective period during demonstration according to game state)
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; A first game state in which a first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is likely to be set. and a waiting state for setting a waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means is not executed. State setting means, operation means that can be operated by the player, operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined operation based on the determination result of the operation determination means. Operation effect execution means capable of executing effects, and effective period setting means setting an operation effective period during which the operation determination means can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The valid period setting means extends the valid period after the standby state is set when the second period is set by the gaming state setting means more than when the first period is set. The gaming machine BL1 is characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until setting is long. According to the game machine BL1, the setting timing of the operation effective period for validly determining the operation to the operation means can be changed according to the set game state, so that the operation is not executed carelessly. can be suppressed. In addition, in the case where notification means for notifying the player that the operation effective period has been set is provided, frequent notification by the notification means can be suppressed. In addition, while the second game state is being set, it is preferable to make the discrimination by the discrimination means easier to execute. As a result, the second game state can be made more advantageous than the first game state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second game state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic BM group>
Power supply means capable of supplying power to a game machine, notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means, and execution by the notification means Effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect on the basis of the end of the notification, and reproduction capable of reproducing predetermined audio data on the basis of the start of the power supply by the power supply means. and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproducing means, wherein the notification is performed as the reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproducing means. A game machine BM1, characterized by comprising reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by said means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on (for example, JP-A-2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been demanded to make it easier to understand the game situation when the power is turned on. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

According to the game machine BM1, power supply means capable of supplying power to the game machine, and notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. , based on the completion of the notification executed by the notification means, a predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect, and a predetermined effect based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data; and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means; A reproduction start position setting means is provided for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by the notification means as the reproduction start position. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine BM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine BM2.

According to the game machine BM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

In the game machine BM1 or BM2, the game machine BM3 is characterized in that the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the voice data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, the reproducing means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio can be output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines BM1 to BM3 is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for the predetermined performance are satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. A game machine BM4, wherein said reproducing means reproduces said voice data based on said execution determining means determining that said execution condition is established.

According to the game machine BM4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BM1 to BM3, the condition for executing the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the power supply by the power supply means. and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data when the execution condition is judged to be satisfied by the execution judgment means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BN group>
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; operation means operable by the player; and a predetermined operation on the operation means. In a gaming machine having operation determination means capable of determining the dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed speed setting means for setting a speed; and period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the determination result of the operation determination means is a specific determination result. and a gaming machine BN1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BN1, there are provided a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display. a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode; an operation means operable by the player; an operation determining means capable of determining that an operation has been performed; an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determining means; and the effect mode changed by the effect mode changing means The performance mode is varied based on the performance execution means capable of executing the corresponding performance and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. and variable timing setting means for setting timing. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine BN1 has an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means, and the effect execution means is controlled by the speed setting means. The gaming machine BN2 is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the set dynamic display speed of the identification information.

According to the game machine BN2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be actively operated the operation means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the game machine BN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period and specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN2, the player can select whether to operate the operation means or the second operation means during the first period, and the player can play the game. It is possible to increase the willingness to participate in Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BO group>
an operation means capable of being operated by a player; an operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means; an operation timing determining means capable of determining the operation timing determined to have been performed; and based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means, setting an effect mode during a second period set after the first period. and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, wherein the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means. A game machine BO1 characterized in that a suggestive effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BO1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. an operation timing determining means capable of determining an operation timing at which the predetermined operation is determined by the determining means; and a second period set after the first period based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means. a performance mode setting means for setting a performance mode during a period; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means; A suggestive effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BO1 has measuring means for measuring the number of determinations that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the effect mode setting means counts the number of determinations measured by the measuring means. game machine BO2, wherein an effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing at which the is a specific number of times.

According to the game machine BO2, in addition to the effect of the game machine BO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can be actively operated the operation means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine BO2, the effect executing means performs a predetermined number of determinations less than the specific number of times, the number of determinations measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times, during the second period set by the effect mode setting means The game machine BO3 is characterized by executing a unified performance that does not suggest a performance mode.

According to the gaming machine BO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BO2, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the presentation mode set in the second period at an early stage. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic BP group>
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, determination means for performing determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination results of the determination means are specified. privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of; specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and the acquisition means storage means capable of storing the information acquired by at least up to a first predetermined number until the determination condition for the information is satisfied; display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode; As a display mode to be displayed in the display mode, a specific display mode is displayed based on the number of information items of the information stored in the storage means becoming a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. and a third predetermined number less than or equal to the second predetermined number out of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on the fact that the information of is used for determination by the determination means at least.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the game machine BP1, acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the discrimination condition is established, and A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, and a specific performance for executing a specific performance for indicating the determination result of the determination means. execution means, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied, and display in a predetermined display mode display means, and a display mode to be displayed on the display means based on the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means reaching a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number; and the second predetermined number of the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means mode termination means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on the following third predetermined number of the information being used for determination by the determination means at least. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BP1, a second display control means is provided for displaying, on the display means, a number-of-times indication mode suggesting the remaining number of determinations of the determination means to be executed until the specific display mode ends. A gaming machine BP2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BP2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BP1, the display means is provided with a number-of-times suggestion mode for suggesting the number of determinations of the remaining determination means to be executed until the specific display mode ends. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the number of information suggestion mode suggesting the number of information items of the information stored in the storage means is displayed in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number of times suggestion mode. A gaming machine BP3 characterized by comprising third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, an information number suggesting mode that suggests the number of information stored in the storage means is provided. Since the third display control means is provided for displaying in a manner indistinguishable from the number-of-times suggesting mode, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggesting mode.

In the gaming machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means controls a predetermined specific condition when the new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. is established, the game machine BP4 increases the number of times suggested by the number of times suggestion mode.

According to the game machine BP4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BP2 or BP3, the second display control means stores the new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is being displayed. If a predetermined specific condition is established when the game is played, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BQ group>
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. Execution means, specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition during execution of the specific effect. A game machine BQ1 characterized by comprising a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting a type.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BQ1, there is provided a determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination result that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game; specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance for indicating the determination result of the determination means; a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect based on the above. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BQ1, the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means include a first specific effect in which a first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a second specific performance in which a second performance mode different from the first performance mode is executed after at least the specified period has passed from the start of the performance. A gaming machine comprising type determining means, wherein said suggestive effect executing means executes said suggestive effect based on the establishment of said specific condition before said specific period elapses. BQ2.

According to the game machine BQ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BQ1, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first effect mode is performed after at least a specific period has passed since the start of the specific effect. A plurality including at least a first specific effect to be executed, and a second specific effect to be executed in a second effect mode different from the first effect mode after at least the specified period has passed since the start of the specific effect. The suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect based on the establishment of the specific condition before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

A game machine BQ3 is characterized in that the game machine BQ1 or BQ2 is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the game machine BQ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BQ1 or BQ2, it is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is established based on the fact that the operation means is operated. , the player who desires to execute the suggestive effect can be made to positively operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the taste of the player.

<Characteristic BR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of performance modes, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance corresponding to the performance mode set by the mode setting means, and set by the mode setting means. a performance mode notifying means capable of notifying the performance mode that has been set, and a suppression period for suppressing the performance mode notification by the performance mode notifying means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. suppression period setting means; and notification control means for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode on the basis that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A gaming machine BR1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the gaming machine BR1, mode setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of effect modes, and effect executing means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. a performance mode notification means capable of reporting the performance mode set by the mode setting means; and suppression of notification of the performance mode by the performance mode notification means when a predetermined first condition is established. a suppression period setting means for setting a suppression period to be set; and notification control for causing the presentation mode notification means to notify the presentation mode based on establishment of a predetermined second condition during the suppression period. and means. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine BR1, as a type of effect executed by the operation means operable by the player and the effect execution means, a first operation to the operation means is detected during a specific period included in the effect period. effect type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the suppression period setting means, at least during the specific period , the suppression period is set, and the presentation mode notification means notifies the presentation mode based on detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. A game machine BR2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine BR2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BR1, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the type of presentation executed by the presentation executing means, during the specific period included in the presentation period. an effect type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on detection of a first operation on the operating means; The period setting means sets the suppression period for at least the specific period, and the presentation mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. Based on what has been done, the effect mode is notified. As a result, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the game machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operating means.

According to the game machine BQ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is performed on the operation means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic BS group>
an operation means operable by a player; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which an effective period for treating an operation to the operation means as effective during one effect period is set; and between the effective period. Specific control execution means for executing specific control based on the fact that the operation means is operated, and first control and second control as types of specific control executed by the specific control execution means. and control type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least and, as the type of the specific effect, when the operation means is operated a specific number of times during the effective period of one , a first type in which the first control is likely to be executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the specific number of operations are performed than the first type; A game machine BS1 characterized by comprising a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, JP-A-2012-217766). Such gaming machines are required to further enhance the amusement of games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game in the above game machine.

According to the game machine BS1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation to the operation means as valid is set during one effect period, Specific control execution means for executing specific control based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the valid period, and the type of specific control executed by the specific control execution means, a first control type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least control and second control; and as the type of the specific effect, a specific number of operations on the operation means during the valid period of one. and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than in the first type. and specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least . As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BS1, the specific effect is such that a correspondence relationship between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and a control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means is set in advance for each type of the specific effect. A game machine BS2 characterized in that it is defined.

According to the game machine BS2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BS1, the specific effect is a correspondence between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and the control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is control for vibrating the operation means with a first vibration intensity, and the second control vibrates the operation means with a vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity. A game machine BS3 characterized in that the control is for vibrating at a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine BS3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BS1 or BS2, the first control is control for vibrating the operation means with a first vibration intensity, and the second control is a control for vibrating the operation means. Since it is a control for vibrating the means with the second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by confirming the vibration intensity of the operation means. effective.

In any one of the game machines BS1 to BS3, the specific effect is defined by a correspondence relationship between the number of times the operation means is operated during the valid period and a control type that is likely to be determined by the control type determination means. game machine BS4, which is predetermined for each type of game machine BS4.

According to the game machine BS4, in addition to the effect of any one of BS1 to BS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution during the execution period of one specific effect for the display means and display control means for displaying a history of controls executed by the means. As a result, the player can easily understand the type of the executed specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's convenience can be improved.

<Characteristic BT group>
Operation means operable by the player, operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and predetermined operation performance can be executed based on the determination result of the operation determination means. operation effect execution means, wherein the operation effect setting means sets one of the plurality of operation effects as the operation effect to be executed by the operation effect execution means; and the operation means. wherein the mode variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. A gaming machine BT1 characterized by:

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine BT1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and based on the determination result of the operation determination means and an operation effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, wherein one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. Setting means and mode changing means capable of varying the mode of the operating means, wherein the mode changing means changes the mode of the operating means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable in the suggested mode. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine BT1 is characterized in that it has light emitting means for emitting light in an area visible to the player in the operation means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. BT2.

According to the gaming machine BT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it has light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means varies the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. As a result, there is an effect that the current situation can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner to the player who intends to operate the operating means.

In game machine BT1 or BT2, determining means for executing predetermined determination, dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means on display means for a predetermined period, and dynamic display thereof and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and The game machine BT3 is characterized in that different operation performances can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine BT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BT1 or BT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and a dynamic and privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the displayed identification state is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, wherein the operation effect setting means is provided during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects for each.

As a result, different operation presentations are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic BU group>
A display means capable of displaying identification information, a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, and a privilege of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. game execution means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; A first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed after at least a specific period of time has passed since the display was started, and a second mode different from the first mode is displayed after the specific period of time has passed. a mode selection means for selecting one mode from among a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and a period from when the dynamic display of the identification information is started until the specific period elapses and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first mode is displayed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. , a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed, and specific effect type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least: .

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine BU1, the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the determination means for executing the predetermined determination, and the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, which is advantageous to the player. bonus game execution means for executing a special bonus game; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means; and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. As a type of, a first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed after at least a specific period has passed since the dynamic display was started, and the first mode after the specific period has passed a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed; mode selection means for selecting one mode from among a plurality of types including at least; Suggesting that the first mode is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. a specific performance type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a possible first specific performance and a second specific performance capable of suggesting that the second mode is displayed. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BU1, the specific effect executing means is configured to display a failure effect mode showing a failure determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of one of the specific effects. The first specific effect is such that a combination of the failure effect modes displayed during the execution period of one of the specific effects is a first combination, and the second specific effect A gaming machine BU2 characterized in that a combination of said failure effect modes displayed during an execution period of said one specific effect is a second combination different from said first combination.

According to the gaming machine BU2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BU1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the failure effect mode showing the result of the determination of failure different from the result of the specific determination a plurality of times during the execution period of one of the specific effects. In the first specific effect, the combination of the failure effect modes displayed during the execution period of one specific effect is the first combination, and in the second specific effect, the combination is one The combination of the out-of-line effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BV group>
In a gaming machine having effect control means capable of executing effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect, and effect mode setting means for the effect mode setting means. and an output means capable of outputting effect information indicating the effect mode set by the output means, based on the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined first effect for the first effect means A first performance control means for executing a performance operation and a second performance means different from the first performance means for executing a predetermined second performance operation based on the performance information output by the output means. and a second effect control means, wherein the first effect control means is a specific information output means capable of outputting specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. A gaming machine BV1 characterized by having:

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine BV1, in the gaming machine having the effect control means capable of executing the effect control for executing the predetermined effect, the effect control means includes effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. and an output means capable of outputting effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means and a first effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a predetermined effect for a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. and a second effect control means for executing a second effect operation, wherein the first effect control means transmits specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. It has specific information output means capable of outputting. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BV1, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect action and the second effect action, and the output means indicates the duplicate effect mode. The production information is output to the first production control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second production operation among the duplicate production modes to the second production control means as the specific information. A gaming machine BV2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BV2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BV1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect action and the second effect action, and the output means outputs the effect information indicating the duplicate effect mode. to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation among the overlapping effect modes to the second effect control means as the specific information. . As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlapping effect mode is set such that the start timing of the first effect action is earlier than the start timing of the second effect action. Game machine BV3.

According to the gaming machine BV3, the effect mode setting means sets the overlapping effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect action is earlier than the start timing of the second effect action. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BW group>
a performance period setting means capable of setting a predetermined performance period; and when a first performance condition is established while the first performance period is set by the performance period setting means, the performance period is set at least from a first position. a first effect execution means capable of executing a first effect using a effect member movable to a second position different from the first position; a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using a display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, wherein the first effect a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means in a specific effect period within the effect period; a movable state determining means for determining a movable state of the effect member; a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Game machine BW1 to play.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine BW1, when the first effect period is established by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period, and the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means, A first performance executing means capable of executing a first performance using a performance member movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position, and the first performance period are set. a second performance executing means capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance using a display means when a second performance condition different from the first performance condition is established during the game. In the game machine, a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the effect member and the display means and a movable state of the effect member are determined in a specific effect period within the first effect period. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the result of determination by the movable condition determiner is a specific result. It is. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine BW1, the movable state determination means determines the specific determination result when the effect member is not positioned at the first position.

According to the game machine BW2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BW1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable state determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained when the effect member is not positioned at the first position. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BW1 or BW2, the game machine BW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine BW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Any one of the game machines BW1 to BW3 has operation means operable by the player and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first The performance condition is satisfied when the operation determining means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine BW4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BW1 to BW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine BW4, valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period for validly determining that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation judging means; and period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the game machine BW5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BW4, the following effects are produced. That is, it has operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine BW4, valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period for validly determining that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation judging means; and period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic BX group>
determining means for performing a predetermined determination; dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means on a display means for a predetermined period; A first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , standby state setting means for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, operation means operable by the player, and predetermined operation means for the operation means. and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the result of the determination by the operation determining means, wherein the operation determining means comprises the When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and based on the game state set by the game state setting means, the A gaming machine BX1 characterized by having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting a standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. In some cases, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. (For example, JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine BX1, there are provided a determination means for executing a predetermined determination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means. A first game state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the display executing means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. a game state setting means capable of setting a possible second game state; a waiting state setting means for setting a waiting state when a predetermined waiting condition is satisfied; an operating means operable by a player; an operation determining means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; and an operation performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means; The operation determination means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, and is set by the game state setting means. It has standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition based on the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is performed. The means variably sets the standby condition so that the standby condition is less likely to be established when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. A gaming machine BX2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BX2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BX1, the following effects are produced. That is, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting means The standby condition is variably set so that the standby condition is less likely to be established when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine BX1 or BX2, the game machine BX3 is characterized in that the second game state is more likely to be determined by the determination means than the first game state.

According to the game machine BX3, the second game state is more likely to be determined by the determination means than the first game state. As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during a winning game, so that a bonus such as a winning game is further provided. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2013-9795).
In such a game machine, there is a demand for an improvement in the amusement of the game.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 acquires acquisition information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination when the first discrimination condition is established. acquisition means, storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquired information acquired by the acquisition means, and based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when a second determination condition is satisfied Display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the result of determination by the first determination means or second identification information for indicating the result of determination by the second determination means; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined period of time, and dynamic display of the second identification information is not started while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. period effect executing means for executing a period effect based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition; and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, after the predetermined start condition is A period determining means for determining a period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started, and an effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect executing means is determined based on the determination result of the period determining means. and effect mode setting means for setting.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, further comprising remaining period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means. determines the period based on the remaining dynamic display period determined by the remaining period determining means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined start condition is established when the acquiring means acquires the acquired information, and the period determining means determines the period from when the predetermined start condition is satisfied until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information for which the start condition is satisfied is started.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, when the first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means for executing the first determination, the acquisition means for acquiring the acquired information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquired information acquired by the acquiring unit; and a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage unit when a second determination condition is satisfied. a second discriminating means to be executed, and the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discriminating means or the second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discriminating means is displayed on the display means for a predetermined period of time; dynamic display means for displaying a target, wherein dynamic display of the second identification information is not started while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; period effect executing means for executing a period effect based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition; and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the second identification after the predetermined start condition is satisfied. A period determining means for determining a period until the dynamic display of information is started, and an effect for setting an effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the determination result of the period determining means. and a mode setting means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has remaining period determination means for determining a residual dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determination means determines the residual dynamic display period determined by the remaining period determination means. The period is determined based on.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined start condition is met when the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, and the period determining means waits until the start condition is met after the predetermined start condition is met. The period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started is determined.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
114 display control device (effect executing means)
226 audio output device (audio output means)
253 RAM erase switch circuit (initialization means)
Z1004 Privilege giving means Z2051 Initial setting means Z2171 Volume setting means Z6107 Output control means

Claims (1)

production executing means capable of executing production;
A gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means,
Audio output means capable of outputting audio as part of the production executed by the production execution means;
volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the audio output means based on an operation from outside the game machine;
a first state in which the sound is output from the sound output means based on the volume set by the sound volume setting means; and a sound is output from the sound output means at a predetermined volume regardless of the sound volume set by the sound volume setting means. an output control means for switching between a second state that causes
and initial setting means for setting the second state when a power failure state in which power supply for operating the game machine is interrupted to a return state in which power supply to the game machine is started. death,
The game machine is
In the second state, it is possible to set a specific volume that is smaller than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means,
It is possible to set a plurality of different levels of volume, and it is possible to suggest a suggestive mode corresponding to the set level of volume,
The suggestion mode corresponding to the specific sound volume set in the second state is not suggested,
an initialization means capable of initializing the state of the gaming machine based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
It is possible to notify a predetermined specific sound at a predetermined volume that is higher than the specific volume during a period in which the initialization process is being performed by the initialization means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined display mode can be displayed during a period of time in the second state .

Images